ECE/TRANS/326 (Vol.II)
Economic Commission for Europe
Inland Transport Committee
applicable as from 1 January 2023
Agreement Concerning the International
Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road
Volume II
UNITED NATIONS
New York and Geneva, 2022Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
© 2022 United Nations
All rights reserved worldwide
Requests to reproduce excerpts or to photocopy should be addressed to the Copyright Clearance
Center at copyright.com.
All other queries on rights and licenses, including subsidiary rights, should be addressed to:
United Nations Publications
405 East 42nd Street, S-09FW001
New York, NY 10017
United States of America
Email: permissions@un.org
website: https://shop.un.org
The designations employed and the presentation of the material in this publication do not imply the
expression of any opinion whatsoever on the part of the Secretariat of the United Nations concerning
the legal status of any country, territory, city or area, or of its authorities, or concerning the
delimitation of its frontiers or boundaries.
United Nations publication issued by the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe.
ECE/TRANS/326
ISBN: 978‐92‐1‐139211-1
eISBN: 978‐92‐1‐001432-8
ISSN: 2411‐8605
eISSN: 2411-8613
Sales No. E.22.VIII.2
Complete set of two volumes
Volumes I and II not to be sold separatelyCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS (VOLUME II)
Annex A GENERAL PROVISIONS AND PROVISIONS CONCERNING
DANGEROUS SUBSTANCES AND ARTICLES (cont’d) ………………………………………………. 1
Part 4 Packing and tank provisions ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
Chapter 4.1 Use of packagings, including intermediate bulk
containers (IBCs) and large packagings ……………………………………………. 5
4.1.1 General provisions for the packing of dangerous goods
in packagings, including IBCs and large packagings ……………………………… 5
4.1.2 Additional general provisions for the use of IBCs …………………………………. 34
4.1.3 General provisions concerning packing instructions ………………………………. 34
4.1.4 List of packing instructions ………………………………………………………………… 37
4.1.5 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 1 ……………………………………. 150
4.1.6 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 2 and goods
of other classes assigned to packing instruction P200 …………………………….. 151
4.1.7 Special packing provisions for organic peroxides (Class 5.2)
and self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 ………………………………………………. 155
4.1.8 Special packing provisions for infectious substances (Class 6.2) …………….. 156
4.1.9 Special packing provisions for radioactive material ……………………………….. 157
4.1.10 Special provisions for mixed packing ………………………………………………….. 160
Chapter 4.2 Use of portable tanks and
UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) ………………………………….. 167
4.2.1 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for
the carriage of substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9 …………………………. 167
4.2.2 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for
the carriage of non refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals
under pressure ………………………………………………………………………………….. 171
4.2.3 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for
the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases ……………………………………………. 172
4.2.4 General provisions for the use of
UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) ……………………………………… 173
4.2.5 Portable tank instructions and special provisions …………………………………… 174
Chapter 4.3 Use of fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks,
tank-containers and tank swap bodies with shells made
of metallic materials, and battery-vehicles and
multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) ……………………………………….. 189
4.3.1 Scope ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 189
4.3.2 Provisions applicable to all classes ………………………………………………………. 189
4.3.3 Special provisions applicable to Class 2 ………………………………………………. 193
4.3.4 Special provisions applicable to Classes 1 and 3 to 9 …………………………….. 202
4.3.5 Special provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 209
Chapter 4.4 Use of fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) tanks,
fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, tank containers
and tank swap bodies ………………………………………………………………………. 213
4.4.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 213
4.4.2 Operation …………………………………………………………………………………………. 213
Chapter 4.5 Use of vacuum operated waste tanks ………………………………………………… 215
4.5.1 Use …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 215
4.5.2 Operation …………………………………………………………………………………………. 215
Chapter 4.6 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 217
– iii -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
iv
Chapter 4.7 Use of mobile explosives manufacturing units (MEMUs) …………………… 219
4.7.1 Use …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 219
4.7.2 Operation …………………………………………………………………………………………. 219
Part 5 Consignment procedures ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 221
Chapter 5.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………… 223
5.1.1 Application and general provisions ……………………………………………………… 223
5.1.2 Use of overpacks ………………………………………………………………………………. 223
5.1.3 Empty uncleaned packagings (including IBCs and large packagings),
tanks, MEMUs, vehicles and containers for carriage in bulk …………………… 223
5.1.4 Mixed packing ………………………………………………………………………………….. 223
5.1.5 General provisions for Class 7 ……………………………………………………………. 224
Chapter 5.2 Marking and labelling ……………………………………………………………………… 231
5.2.1 Marking of packages …………………………………………………………………………. 231
5.2.2 Labelling of packages ………………………………………………………………………… 236
Chapter 5.3 Placarding and marking of containers, bulk containers, MEGCs,
MEMUs, tank-containers, portable tanks and vehicles ……………………… 247
5.3.1 Placarding ………………………………………………………………………………………… 247
5.3.2 Orange-coloured plate marking …………………………………………………………… 250
5.3.3 Elevated temperature substance mark ………………………………………………….. 255
5.3.4 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 256
5.3.5 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 256
5.3.6 Environmentally hazardous substance mark …………………………………………. 256
Chapter 5.4 Documentation ………………………………………………………………………………… 257
5.4.0 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 257
5.4.1 Dangerous goods transport document and related information ………………… 257
5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate …………………………………………………… 267
5.4.3 Instructions in writing ……………………………………………………………………….. 268
5.4.4 Retention of dangerous goods transport information ……………………………… 273
5.4.5 Example of a multimodal dangerous goods form …………………………………… 273
Chapter 5.5 Special provisions ……………………………………………………………………………. 277
5.5.1 (Deleted) ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 277
5.5.2 Special provisions applicable to fumigated cargo transport units
(UN 3359) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 277
5.5.3 Special provisions applicable the carriage of dry ice (UN 1845) and to
to packages and vehicles and containers containing substances presenting
a risk of asphyxiation when used for cooling or conditioning purposes
(such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977)
or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951) or nitrogen) ……………………………… 278
5.5.4 Dangerous goods contained in equipment in use or intended for
use during carriage, attached to or placed in packages, overpacks,
containers or load compartments ………………………………………………………….. 281
– iv -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
v
Part 6 Requirements for the construction and testing of packagings, intermediate
bulk container (IBCs), large packagings, tanks and bulk containers ………………………………… 283
Chapter 6.1 Requirements for the construction and testing of packagings ……………. 285
6.1.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 285
6.1.2 Code for designating types of packagings …………………………………………….. 286
6.1.3 Marking …………………………………………………………………………………………… 288
6.1.4 Requirements for packagings ……………………………………………………………… 292
6.1.5 Test requirements for packagings ………………………………………………………… 302
6.1.6 Standard liquids for verifying the chemical compatibility
testing of polyethylene packagings, including IBCs,
in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6 and 6.5.6.3.5, respectively …………………………. 310
Chapter 6.2 Requirements for the construction and testing of pressure
receptacles, aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing
gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied
flammable gas …………………………………………………………………………………. 313
6.2.1 General requirements ………………………………………………………………………… 313
6.2.2 Requirements for UN pressure receptacles …………………………………………… 319
6.2.3 General requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles ………………………….. 341
6.2.4 Requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles designed,
constructed and tested according to referenced standards ……………………….. 346
6.2.5 Requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles not designed,
constructed and tested according to referenced standards ……………………….. 355
6.2.6 General requirements for aerosol dispensers, small
receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell
cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas ………………………………………. 359
Chapter 6.3 Requirements for the construction and testing of
packagings for Class 6.2 infectious substances of
Category A (UN Nos. 2814 and 2900) ……………………………………………….. 363
6.3.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 363
6.3.2 Requirements for packagings ……………………………………………………………… 363
6.3.3 Code for designating types of packagings …………………………………………….. 363
6.3.4 Marking …………………………………………………………………………………………… 363
6.3.5 Test requirements for packagings ………………………………………………………… 364
Chapter 6.4 Requirements for the construction, testing and
approval of packages for radioactive material and
for the approval of such material ……………………………………………………… 369
6.4.1 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 369
6.4.2 General requirements ………………………………………………………………………… 369
6.4.3 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 370
6.4.4 Requirements for excepted packages …………………………………………………… 370
6.4.5 Requirements for Industrial packages ………………………………………………….. 370
6.4.6 Requirements for packages containing uranium hexafluoride …………………. 371
6.4.7 Requirements for Type A packages …………………………………………………….. 372
6.4.8 Requirements for Type B(U) packages ………………………………………………… 373
6.4.9 Requirements for Type B(M) packages ……………………………………………….. 374
6.4.10 Requirements for Type C packages ……………………………………………………… 375
6.4.11 Requirements for packages containing fissile material …………………………… 375
6.4.12 Test procedures and demonstration of compliance ………………………………… 379
6.4.13 Testing the integrity of the containment system and shielding
and evaluating criticality safety …………………………………………………………… 379
6.4.14 Target for drop tests ………………………………………………………………………….. 380
6.4.15 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand normal
conditions of carriage ………………………………………………………………………… 380
6.4.16 Additional tests for Type A packages
designed for liquids and gases …………………………………………………………….. 381
– v -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
vi
6.4.17 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand accident
conditions in carriage ………………………………………………………………………… 381
6.4.18 Enhanced water immersion test for Type B(U) and
Type B(M) packages containing more than 105 A2
and Type C packages …………………………………………………………………………. 382
6.4.19 Water leakage test for packages containing fissile material …………………….. 382
6.4.20 Tests for Type C packages …………………………………………………………………. 382
6.4.21 Inspections for packagings designed to contain 0.1 kg or more
of uranium hexafluoride …………………………………………………………………….. 383
6.4.22 Approvals of package designs and materials …………………………………………. 384
6.4.23 Applications and approvals for radioactive material carriage ………………….. 384
Chapter 6.5 Requirements for the construction and testing
of intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) …………………………………………….. 395
6.5.1 General requirements ………………………………………………………………………… 395
6.5.2 Marking …………………………………………………………………………………………… 397
6.5.3 Construction requirements …………………………………………………………………. 400
6.5.4 Testing, certification and inspection …………………………………………………….. 401
6.5.5 Specific requirements for IBCs …………………………………………………………… 402
6.5.6 Test requirements for IBCs ………………………………………………………………… 409
Chapter 6.6 Requirements for the construction and testing of large packagings ……. 419
6.6.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 419
6.6.2 Code for designating types of large packagings …………………………………….. 419
6.6.3 Marking …………………………………………………………………………………………… 420
6.6.4 Specific requirements for large packagings …………………………………………… 421
6.6.5 Test requirements for large packagings ………………………………………………… 424
Chapter 6.7 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing
of portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) … 429
6.7.1 Application and general requirements ………………………………………………….. 429
6.7.2 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage
of substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9 …………………………………………… 429
6.7.3 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage
of non-refrigerated liquefied gases ………………………………………………………. 447
6.7.4 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of portable tanks intended for the carriage
of refrigerated liquefied gases …………………………………………………………….. 461
6.7.5 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and
testing of UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)
intended for the carriage of non–refrigerated gases ……………………………….. 473
Chapter 6.8 Requirements for the construction, equipment, type approval,
inspections and tests, and marking of fixed tanks (tank-vehicles),
demountable tanks and tank-containers and tank swap bodies,
with shells made of metallic materials, and battery-vehicles and
multiple element gas containers (MEGCs) ………………………………………… 481
6.8.1 Scope and general provisions ………………………………………………………………. 481
6.8.2 Requirements applicable to all classes …………………………………………………. 483
6.8.3 Special requirements applicable to Class 2 …………………………………………… 506
6.8.4 Special provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 519
6.8.5 Requirements concerning the materials and construction of
fixed welded tanks, demountable welded tanks, and welded
shells of tank-containers for which a test pressure of not less
than 1 MPa (10 bar) is required, and of fixed welded tanks,
demountable welded tanks and welded shells of
tank-containers intended for the carriage of refrigerated
liquefied gases of Class 2 …………………………………………………………………… 526
– vi -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
vii
Chapter 6.9 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of portable tanks with shells made of
fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) materials …………………………………………… 531
6.9.1 Application and general requirements ………………………………………………….. 531
6.9.2 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and
testing of FRP portable tanks ………………………………………………………………. 531
Chapter 6.10 Requirements for the construction, equipment, type
approval, inspection and marking of vacuum-operated
waste tanks ……………………………………………………………………………………… 543
6.10.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 543
6.10.2 Construction …………………………………………………………………………………….. 543
6.10.3 Items of equipment ……………………………………………………………………………. 543
6.10.4 Inspection ………………………………………………………………………………………… 545
Chapter 6.11 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of bulk containers ………………………………………………………….. 547
6.11.1 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 547
6.11.2 Application and general requirements ………………………………………………….. 547
6.11.3 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of containers conforming to the CSC used
as BK1 or BK2 bulk containers …………………………………………………………… 547
6.11.4 Requirements for the design, construction and approval of
BK1 or BK2 bulk containers other than containers conforming
to the CSC ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 548
6.11.5 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection
and testing of BK3 flexible bulk containers ………………………………………….. 549
Chapter 6.12 Requirements for the construction, equipment, type approval,
inspections and tests, and marking of tanks, bulk containers
and special compartments for explosives of mobile explosives
manufacturing units (MEMUs) ………………………………………………………… 555
6.12.1 Scope ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 555
6.12.2 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 555
6.12.3 Tanks ………………………………………………………………………………………………. 555
6.12.4 Items of equipment ……………………………………………………………………………. 556
6.12.5 Special compartments for explosives …………………………………………………… 557
Chapter 6.13 Requirements for the design, construction, equipment,
type approval, testing and marking of fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP)
fixed tanks (tank-vehicles) and demountable tanks …………………………… 559
6.13.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 559
6.13.2 Construction …………………………………………………………………………………….. 559
6.13.3 Items of equipment ……………………………………………………………………………. 562
6.13.4 Type testing and approval ………………………………………………………………….. 562
6.13.5 Inspections ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 564
6.13.6 Marking …………………………………………………………………………………………… 565
– vii -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
viii
Part 7 Provisions concerning the conditions of carriage, loading, unloading and handling ………….. 567
Chapter 7.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………… 569
7.1.7 Special provisions applicable to the carriage of self-reactive
substances of Class 4.1, organic peroxides of Class 5.2 and
substances stabilized by temperature control (other than
self-reactive substances and organic peroxides) ……………………………………… 570
Chapter 7.2 Provisions concerning carriage in packages ……………………………………… 573
Chapter 7.3 Provisions concerning carriage in bulk …………………………………………….. 575
7.3.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 575
7.3.2 Additional provisions for the carriage in bulk when the provisions
of 7.3.1.1 (a) are applied …………………………………………………………………….. 576
7.3.3 Provisions for the carriage in bulk when the
provisions of 7.3.1.1 (b) are applied …………………………………………………….. 578
Chapter 7.4 Provisions concerning carriage in tanks ……………………………………………. 581
Chapter 7.5 Provisions concerning loading, unloading and handling ……………………. 583
7.5.1 General provisions concerning loading, unloading and handling ……………… 583
7.5.2 Mixed loading prohibition ………………………………………………………………….. 584
7.5.3 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 586
7.5.4 Precautions with respect to foodstuffs, other articles of
consumption and animal feeds ……………………………………………………………. 586
7.5.5 Limitation of the quantities carried ……………………………………………………… 586
7.5.6 (Reserved) ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 587
7.5.7 Handling and stowage ……………………………………………………………………….. 587
7.5.8 Cleaning after unloading ……………………………………………………………………. 588
7.5.9 Prohibition of smoking ………………………………………………………………………. 588
7.5.10 Precautions against electrostatic charges ………………………………………………. 589
7.5.11 Additional provisions applicable to certain classes or specific goods ……….. 589
Annex B PROVISIONS CONCERNING TRANSPORT EQUIPMENT
AND TRANSPORT OPERATIONS ………………………………………………………………………………. 597
Part 8 Requirements for vehicle crews, equipment, operation and documentation ……………………… 599
Chapter 8.1 General requirements concerning transport units
and equipment on board ………………………………………………………………….. 601
8.1.1 Transport units …………………………………………………………………………………. 601
8.1.2 Documents to be carried on the transport unit ……………………………………….. 601
8.1.3 Placarding and marking ……………………………………………………………………… 601
8.1.4 Fire fighting equipment ……………………………………………………………………… 602
8.1.5 Miscellaneous equipment and equipment for personal protection ……………. 602
Chapter 8.2 Requirements concerning the training of the vehicle crew …………………. 605
8.2.1 Scope and general requirements concerning the training of drivers ………….. 605
8.2.2 Special requirements concerning the training of drivers …………………………. 605
8.2.3 Training of persons, other than the drivers holding a
certificate in accordance with 8.2.1, involved in the
carriage of dangerous goods by road ……………………………………………………. 610
– viii -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
ix
Chapter 8.3 Miscellaneous requirements to be complied with by the vehicle crew …. 611
8.3.1 Passengers ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 611
8.3.2 Use of fire-fighting appliances ……………………………………………………………. 611
8.3.3 Prohibition on opening packages …………………………………………………………. 611
8.3.4 Portable lighting apparatus …………………………………………………………………. 611
8.3.5 Prohibition on smoking ……………………………………………………………………… 611
8.3.6 Running the engine during loading or unloading …………………………………… 611
8.3.7 Use of the parking brakes and wheel chocks …………………………………………. 611
8.3.8 Use of cables ……………………………………………………………………………………. 611
Chapter 8.4 Requirements concerning the supervision of vehicles ………………………… 613
Chapter 8.5 Additional requirements relating to particular classes or substances …. 615
Chapter 8.6 Road tunnel restrictions for the passage of vehicles carrying
Dangerous goods ……………………………………………………………………………… 619
8.6.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 619
8.6.2 Road signs or signals governing the passage of vehicles carrying
dangerous goods ……………………………………………………………………………….. 619
8.6.3 Tunnel restriction codes …………………………………………………………………….. 619
8.6.4 Restrictions for the passage of transport units carrying dangerous
goods through tunnels ……………………………………………………………………….. 619
Part 9 Requirements concerning the construction and approval of vehicles ……………………………….. 621
Chapter 9.1 Scope, definitions and requirements for the approval of vehicles ……….. 623
9.1.1 Scope and definitions ………………………………………………………………………… 623
9.1.2 Approval of EX/II, EX/III, FL and AT vehicles and MEMUs …………………. 624
9.1.3 Certificate of approval ……………………………………………………………………….. 625
Chapter 9.2 Requirements concerning the construction of vehicles ………………………. 629
9.2.1 Compliance with the requirements of this Chapter ………………………………… 629
9.2.2 Electrical equipment ………………………………………………………………………….. 633
9.2.3 Braking equipment ……………………………………………………………………………. 636
9.2.4 Prevention of fire risks ………………………………………………………………………. 637
9.2.5 Speed limitation device ……………………………………………………………………… 638
9.2.6 Coupling devices of motor vehicles and trailers ……………………………………. 638
9.2.7 Prevention of other risks caused by fuels ……………………………………………… 638
Chapter 9.3 Additional requirements concerning complete or completed
EX/II or EX/III vehicles intended for the carriage of
explosive substances and articles (Class 1) in packages ……………………… 641
9.3.1 Materials to be used in the construction of vehicle bodies ………………………. 641
9.3.2 Combustion heaters …………………………………………………………………………… 641
9.3.3 EX/II vehicles …………………………………………………………………………………… 641
9.3.4 EX/III vehicles …………………………………………………………………………………. 641
9.3.5 Engine and load compartment …………………………………………………………….. 642
9.3.6 External heat sources and load compartment ………………………………………… 642
9.3.7 Electrical equipment ………………………………………………………………………….. 642
Chapter 9.4 Additional requirements concerning the construction
of the bodies of complete or completed vehicles intended
for the carriage of dangerous goods in packages
(other than EX/II and EX/III vehicles) ……………………………………………… 643
Chapter 9.5 Additional requirements concerning the construction
of the bodies of complete or completed vehicles intended
for the carriage of dangerous solids in bulk ………………………………………. 645
– ix -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
x
Chapter 9.6 Additional requirements concerning complete or completed vehicles
intended for the carriage of temperature controlled substances …………. 647
Chapter 9.7 Additional requirements concerning fixed tanks (tank-vehicles),
battery-vehicles and complete or completed vehicles used for the
carriage of dangerous goods in demountable tanks with a capacity
greater than 1 m³ or in tank-containers, portable tanks or MEGCs
of a capacity greater than 3 m³ (EX/III, FL and AT vehicles) …………….. 649
9.7.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 649
9.7.2 Requirements concerning tanks …………………………………………………………… 649
9.7.3 Fastenings ………………………………………………………………………………………… 649
9.7.4 Electrical bonding of FL vehicles ………………………………………………………… 650
9.7.5 Stability of tank-vehicles ……………………………………………………………………. 650
9.7.6 Rear protection of vehicles …………………………………………………………………. 650
9.7.7 Combustion heaters …………………………………………………………………………… 650
9.7.8 Electrical equipment ………………………………………………………………………….. 651
9.7.9 Additional safety requirements concerning FL and EX/III vehicles …………. 651
Chapter 9.8 Additional requirements concerning complete and
Completed MEMUs …………………………………………………………………………. 653
9.8.1 General provisions …………………………………………………………………………….. 653
9.8.2 Requirements concerning tanks and bulk containers ………………………………. 653
9.8.3 Electric bonding of MEMUs ………………………………………………………………. 653
9.8.4 Stability of MEMUs ………………………………………………………………………….. 653
9.8.5 Rear protection of MEMUs ………………………………………………………………… 653
9.8.6 Combustion heaters …………………………………………………………………………… 653
9.8.7 Additional safety requirements …………………………………………………………… 654
9.8.8 Additional security requirements ………………………………………………………… 654
– x -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
ANNEX A
GENERAL PROVISIONS AND
PROVISIONS CONCERNING DANGEROUS
SUBSTANCES AND ARTICLES
(cont’d)Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
PART 4
Packing and tank provisionsCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 5 –
CHAPTER 4.1
USE OF PACKAGINGS, INCLUDING INTERMEDIATE
BULK CONTAINERS (IBCs) AND LARGE PACKAGINGS
NOTE: Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, marked in accordance with 6.1.3, 6.2.2.7, 6.2.2.8, 6.2.2.9,
6.2.2.10, 6.3.4, 6.5.2 or 6.6.3 but which were approved in a country which is not Contracting Party to ADR may
nevertheless be used for carriage under ADR.
4.1.1 General provisions for the packing of dangerous goods in packagings, including IBCs and large
packagings
NOTE: For the packing of goods of Classes 2, 6.2 and 7, the general provisions of this section only
apply as indicated in 4.1.8.2 (Class 6.2, UN Nos. 2814 and 2900), 4.1.9.1.5 (Class 7) and in the
applicable packing instructions of 4.1.4 (P201, P207 and LP200 for Class 2 and P620, P621, P622,
IBC620, LP621 and LP622 for Class 6.2).
4.1.1.1 Dangerous goods shall be packed in good quality packagings, including IBCs and large packagings,
which shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally encountered during
carriage, including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport units and
warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical
handling. Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be constructed and closed so as to
prevent any loss of contents when prepared for transport which might be caused under normal
conditions of transport, by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure (resulting from
altitude, for example). Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be closed in accordance
with the information provided by the manufacturer. No dangerous residue shall adhere to the outside of
packagings, IBCs and large packagings during carriage. These provisions apply, as appropriate, to new,
reused, reconditioned or remanufactured packagings and to new, reused, repaired or remanufactured
IBCs, and to new, reused or remanufactured large packagings.
4.1.1.2 Parts of packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, which are in direct contact with dangerous
goods:
(a) shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods;
(b) shall not cause a dangerous effect e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods;
and
(c) shall not allow permeation of the dangerous goods that could constitute a danger under normal
conditions of carriage.
Where necessary, they shall be provided with a suitable inner coating or treatment.
NOTE: For chemical compatibility of plastics packagings, including IBCs, made from polyethylene
see 4.1.1.21.
4.1.1.3 Design type
4.1.1.3.1 Unless otherwise provided elsewhere in ADR, each packaging, including IBCs and large packagings,
except inner packagings, shall conform to a design type successfully tested in accordance with the
requirements of 6.1.5, 6.3.5, 6.5.6 or 6.6.5, as applicable.
4.1.1.3.2 Packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, may conform to one or more than one successfully
tested design type and may bear more than one mark.
4.1.1.4 When filling packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, with liquids, sufficient ullage (outage)
shall be left to ensure that neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the packaging occurs as a result
of an expansion of the liquid caused by temperatures likely to occur during transport. Unless specific
requirements are prescribed, liquids shall not completely fill a packaging at a temperature of 55 °C.
However, sufficient ullage shall be left in an IBC to ensure that at the mean bulk temperature of 50 °C
it is not filled to more than 98 % of its water capacity. For a filling temperature of 15 °C, the maximum
degree of filling shall be determined as follows, unless otherwise provided, either:
– 5 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 6 –
(a) Boiling point (initial boiling point) of
the substance in °C
< 60 60
< 100
100
< 200
200
< 300
300
Degree of filling as a percentage of the
capacity of the packaging
90 92 94 96 98
or
packaging.theofcapacitytheof%
)t-(501
98
fillingofdegree(b)
f
In this formula represents the mean coefficient of cubic expansion of the liquid substance
between 15 °C and 50 °C; that is to say, for a maximum rise in temperature of 35 °C,
50
5015
d35
d
:formulathetoaccordingcalculatedis
d
d 15 and d50 being the relative densities1 of the liquid at 15 °C and 50 °C and t f the mean
temperature of the liquid at the time of filling.
4.1.1.5 Inner packagings shall be packed in an outer packaging in such a way that, under normal conditions of
carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the outer packaging. Inner
packagings containing liquids shall be packed with their closures upward and placed within outer
packagings consistent with the orientation marks prescribed in 5.2.1.10. Inner packagings that are liable
to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or stoneware or of certain plastics
materials, etc., shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material. Any leakage of
the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material or of the
outer packaging.
4.1.1.5.1 Where an outer packaging of a combination packaging or a large packaging has been successfully tested
with different types of inner packagings, a variety of such different inner packagings may also be
assembled in this outer packaging or large packaging. In addition, provided an equivalent level of
performance is maintained, the following variations in inner packagings are allowed without further
testing of the package:
(a) Inner packagings of equivalent or smaller size may be used provided:
(i) the inner packagings are of similar design to the tested inner packagings
(e.g. shape – round, rectangular, etc.);
(ii) the material of construction of the inner packagings (glass, plastics, metal, etc.) offers
resistance to impact and stacking forces equal to or greater than that of the originally
tested inner packaging;
(iii) the inner packagings have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of similar
design (e.g. screw cap, friction lid, etc.);
(iv) sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up void spaces and to prevent
significant movement of the inner packagings; and
(v) inner packagings are oriented within the outer packaging in the same manner as in the
tested package.
(b) A lesser number of the tested inner packagings, or of the alternative types of inner packagings
identified in (a) above, may be used provided sufficient cushioning is added to fill the void
space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the inner packagings.
4.1.1.5.2 Use of supplementary packagings within an outer packaging (e.g. an intermediate packaging or a
receptacle inside a required inner packaging) additional to what is required by the packing instructions
is authorized provided all relevant requirements are met, including those of 4.1.1.3, and, if appropriate,
suitable cushioning is used to prevent movement within the packaging.
1 Relative density (d) is considered to be synonymous with specific gravity (SG) and will be used throughout this
Chapter.
– 6 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 7 –
4.1.1.6 Dangerous goods shall not be packed together in the same outer packaging or in large packagings, with
dangerous or other goods if they react dangerously with each other and cause:
(a) combustion or evolution of considerable heat;
(b) evolution of flammable, asphyxiant, oxidizing or toxic gases;
(c) the formation of corrosive substances; or
(d) the formation of unstable substances.
NOTE: For mixed packing special provisions, see 4.1.10.
4.1.1.7 The closures of packagings containing wetted or diluted substances shall be such that the percentage of
liquid (water, solvent or phlegmatizer) does not fall below the prescribed limits during transport.
4.1.1.7.1 Where two or more closure systems are fitted in series on an IBC, that nearest to the substance being
carried shall be closed first.
4.1.1.8 Where pressure may develop in a package by the emission of gas from the contents (as a result of
temperature increase or other causes), the packaging or IBC may be fitted with a vent provided that the
gas emitted will not cause danger on account of its toxicity, its flammability or the quantity released,
for example.
A venting device shall be fitted if dangerous overpressure may develop due to normal decomposition
of substances. The vent shall be so designed that, when the packaging or IBC is in the attitude in which
it is intended to be carried, leakages of liquid and the penetration of foreign substances are prevented
under normal conditions of carriage.
NOTE: Venting of the package is not permitted for air carriage.
4.1.1.8.1 Liquids may only be filled into inner packagings which have an appropriate resistance to internal
pressure that may be developed under normal conditions of carriage.
4.1.1.9 New, remanufactured or reused packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, or reconditioned
packagings and repaired or routinely maintained IBCs shall be capable of passing the tests prescribed
in 6.1.5, 6.3.5, 6.5.6 or 6.6.5, as applicable. Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every
packaging, including IBCs and large packagings, shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from
corrosion, contamination or other damage and every IBC shall be inspected with regard to the proper
functioning of any service equipment. Any packaging which shows signs of reduced strength as
compared with the approved design type shall no longer be used or shall be so reconditioned, that it is
able to withstand the design type tests. Any IBC which shows signs of reduced strength as compared
with the tested design type shall no longer be used or shall be so repaired or routinely maintained that
it is able to withstand the design type tests.
4.1.1.10 Liquids shall be filled only into packagings, including IBCs, which have an appropriate resistance to
the internal pressure that may develop under normal conditions of carriage. Packagings and IBCs
marked with the hydraulic test pressure prescribed in 6.1.3.1 (d) and 6.5.2.2.1, respectively shall be
filled only with a liquid having a vapour pressure:
(a) such that the total gauge pressure in the packaging or IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling
substance plus the partial pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa) at 55 °C, determined
on the basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature
of 15 °C, will not exceed two-thirds of the marked test pressure; or
(b) at 50 °C less than four-sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa; or
(c) at 55 °C less than two-thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa.
IBCs intended for the carriage of liquids shall not be used to carry liquids having a vapour pressure of
more than 110 kPa (1.1 bar) at 50 °C or 130 kPa (1.3 bar) at 55 °C.
– 7 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 8 –
Examples of required marked test pressures for packagings, including IBCs,
calculated as in 4.1.1.10 (c)
UN
No
Name Class Packing
group
Vp55
(kPa)
Vp55 × 1.5
(kPa)
(Vp55 × 1.5)
minus 100
(kPa)
Required minimum
test pressure gauge
under 6.1.5.5.4(c)
(kPa)
Minimum test pressure
(gauge) to be marked
on the packaging (kPa)
2056
2247
1593
1155
Tetrahydrofuran
n-Decane
Dichloromethane
Diethyl ether
3
3
6.1
3
II
III
III
I
70
1.4
164
199
105
2.1
246
299
5
-97.9
146
199
100
100
146
199
100
100
150
250
NOTE 1: For pure liquids the vapour pressure at 55 °C (V p55) can often be obtained from scientific
tables.
NOTE 2: The table refers to the use of 4.1.1.10 (c) only, which means that the marked test pressure
shall exceed 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55 °C less 100 kPa. When, for example, the test pressure
for n-decane is determined according to 6.1.5.5.4 (a), the minimum marked test pressure may be lower.
NOTE 3: For diethyl ether the required minimum test pressure under 6.1.5.5.5 is 250 kPa.
4.1.1.11 Empty packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, that have contained a dangerous substance
are subject to the same requirements as those for a filled packaging, unless adequate measures have
been taken to nullify any hazard.
NOTE: When such packagings are carried for disposal, recycling or recovery of their material, they
may also be carried under UN 3509 provided the conditions of special provision 663 of Chapter 3.3
are met.
4.1.1.12 Every packaging as specified in Chapter 6.1 intended to contain liquids shall successfully undergo a
suitable leakproofness test. This test is part of a quality assurance programme as stipulated in 6.1.1.4
which shows the capability of meeting the appropriate test level indicated in 6.1.5.4.3:
(a) before it is first used for carriage;
(b) after remanufacturing or reconditioning of any packaging, before it is re-used for carriage.
For this test the packaging need not have its closures fitted. The inner receptacle of a composite
packaging may be tested without the outer packaging, provided the test results are not affected. This
test is not required for:
– inner packagings of combination packagings or large packagings;
– inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) marked with the
symbol “RID/ADR” in accordance with 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii);
– light gauge metal packagings marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” in accordance
with 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii).
4.1.1.13 Packagings, including IBCs, used for solids which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be
encountered during carriage shall also be capable of containing the substance in the liquid state.
4.1.1.14 Packagings, including IBCs, used for powdery or granular substances shall be sift-proof or shall be
provided with a liner.
4.1.1.15 For plastics drums and jerricans, rigid plastics IBCs and composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles,
unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, the period of use permitted for the carriage of
dangerous substances shall be five years from the date of manufacture of the receptacles, except where
a shorter period of use is prescribed because of the nature of the substance to be carried.
NOTE: For composite IBCs the period of use refers to the date of manufacture of the inner receptacle.
4.1.1.16 Where ice is used as a coolant it shall not affect the integrity of the packaging.
– 8 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 9 –
4.1.1.17 (Deleted)
4.1.1.18 Explosives, self-reactive substances and organic peroxides
Unless specific provision to the contrary is made in ADR, the packagings, including IBCs and large
packagings, used for goods of Class 1, self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of
Class 5.2 shall comply with the provisions for the medium danger group (packing group II).
4.1.1.19 Use of salvage packagings and large salvage packagings
4.1.1.19.1 Damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming packages, or dangerous goods that have spilled or
leaked may be carried in salvage packagings mentioned in 6.1.5.1.11 and in large salvage packagings
mentioned in 6.6.5.1.9. This does not prevent the use of a larger size packaging, an IBC of type 11A or
a large packaging of appropriate type and performance level and under the conditions of 4.1.1.19.2 and
4.1.1.19.3.
4.1.1.19.2 Appropriate measures shall be taken to prevent excessive movement of the damaged or leaking
packages within a salvage packaging or large salvage packaging. When the salvage packaging or large
salvage packaging contains liquids, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to eliminate the
presence of free liquid.
4.1.1.19.3 Appropriate measures shall be taken to ensure that there is no dangerous build-up of pressure.
4.1.1.20 Use of salvage pressure receptacles
4.1.1.20.1 In the case of damaged, defective, leaking or non-conforming pressure receptacles, salvage pressure
receptacles according to 6.2.3.11 may be used.
NOTE: A salvage pressure receptacle may be used as an overpack in accordance with 5.1.2. When
used as an overpack, marks shall be in accordance with 5.1.2.1 instead of 5.2.1.3.
4.1.1.20.2 Pressure receptacles shall be placed in salvage pressure receptacles of suitable size. More than one
pressure receptacle may be placed in the same salvage pressure receptacle only if the contents are known
and do not react dangerously with each other (see 4.1.1.6). In this case the total sum of water capacities
of the placed pressure receptacles shall not exceed 3 000 litres. Appropriate measures shall be taken to
prevent movement of the pressure receptacles within the salvage pressure receptacle e.g. by partitioning,
securing or cushioning.
4.1.1.20.3 A pressure receptacle may only be placed in a salvage pressure receptacle if:
(a) The salvage pressure receptacle is in accordance with 6.2.3.11 and a copy of the approval
certificate is available;
(b) Parts of the salvage pressure receptacle which are, or are likely to be in direct contact with the
dangerous goods will not be affected or weakened by those dangerous goods and will not cause
a dangerous effect (e.g. catalyzing reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods); and
(c) The contents of the contained pressure receptacle(s) are limited in pressure and volume so that
if totally discharged into the salvage pressure receptacle, the pressure in the salvage pressure
receptacle at 65 °C will not exceed the test pressure of the salvage pressure receptacle (for gases,
see packing instruction in P200 (3) in 4.1.4.1). The reduction of the useable water capacity of
the salvage pressure receptacle, e.g. by any contained equipment and cushioning, shall be taken
into account.
4.1.1.20.4 The proper shipping name, the UN number preceded by the letters “UN” and label(s) as required for
packages in Chapter 5.2 applicable to the dangerous goods inside the contained pressure receptacle(s)
shall be applied to the salvage pressure receptacle for carriage.
4.1.1.20.5 Salvage pressure receptacles shall be cleaned, purged and visually inspected internally and externally
after each use. They shall be periodically inspected and tested in accordance with 6.2.3.5 at least once
every five years.
– 9 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 10 –
4.1.1.21 Verification of the chemical compatibility of plastics packagings, including IBCs, by assimilation of
filling substances to standard liquids
4.1.1.21.1 Scope
For polyethylene packagings as specified in 6.1.5.2.6, and for polyethylene IBCs as specified in
6.5.6.3.5, the chemical compatibility with filling substances may be verified by assimilation to standard
liquids following the procedures, as set out in 4.1.1.21.3 to 4.1.1.21.5 and using the list in table
4.1.1.21.6, provided that the particular design types have been tested with these standard liquids in
accordance with 6.1.5 or 6.5.6, taking into account 6.1.6 and that the conditions in 4.1.1.21.2 are met.
When assimilation in accordance with this sub-section is not possible, the chemical compatibility needs
to be verified by design type testing in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5 or by laboratory tests in accordance
with 6.1.5.2.7 for packagings, and in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.6 for IBCs, respectively.
NOTE: Irrespective of the provisions of this sub-section, the use of packagings, including IBCs, for a
specific filling substance is subject to the limitations of Table A of Chapter 3.2, and the packing
instructions in Chapter 4.1.
4.1.1.21.2 Conditions
The relative densities of the filling substances shall not exceed that used to determine the height for the
drop test performed successfully according to 6.1.5.3.5 or 6.5.6.9.4 and the mass for the stacking test
performed successfully according to 6.1.5.6 or where necessary according to 6.5.6.6 with the
assimilated standard liquid(s). The vapour pressures of the filling substances at 50 °C or 55 °C shall not
exceed that used to determine the pressure for the internal pressure (hydraulic) test performed
successfully according to 6.1.5.5.4 or 6.5.6.8.4.2 with the assimilated standard liquid(s). In case that
filling substances are assimilated to a combination of standard liquids, the corresponding values of the
filling substances shall not exceed the minimum values derived from the applied drop heights, stacking
masses and internal test pressures.
Example: UN 1736 Benzoyl chloride is assimilated to the combination of standard liquids “Mixture of
hydrocarbons and wetting solution”. It has a vapour pressure of 0.34 kPa at 50 °C and a relative density
of approximately 1.2. Design type tests for plastics drums and jerricans were frequently performed at
minimum required test levels. In practice this means that the stacking test is commonly performed with
stacking loads considering only a relative density of 1.0 for the “Mixture of hydrocarbons” and a
relative density of 1.2 for the “Wetting solution” (see definition of standard liquids in 6.1.6). As a
consequence chemical compatibility of such tested design types would not be verified for benzoyl
chloride by reason of the inadequate test level of the design type with the standard liquid “mixture of
hydrocarbons”. (Due to the fact that in the majority of cases the applied internal hydraulic test pressure
is not less than 100 kPa, the vapour pressure of benzoyl chloride would be covered by such test level
according to 4.1.1.10).
All components of a filling substance, which may be a solution, mixture or preparation, such as wetting
agents in detergents and disinfectants, irrespective whether dangerous or non-dangerous, shall be
included in the assimilation procedure.
4.1.1.21.3 Assimilation procedure
The following steps shall be taken to assign filling substances to listed substances or groups of
substances in table 4.1.1.21.6 (see also scheme in Figure 4.1.1.21.1):
(a) Classify the filling substance in accordance with the procedures and criteria of Part 2
(determination of the UN number and packing group);
(b) If it is included there, go to the UN number in column (1) of table 4.1.1.21.6;
(c) Select the line that corresponds in terms of packing group, concentration, flashpoint, the presence
of non-dangerous components etc. by means of the information given in columns (2a), (2b) and
(4), if there is more than one entry for this UN number.
If this is not possible, the chemical compatibility shall be verified in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5
or 6.1.5.2.7 for packagings, and in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.6 for IBCs (however, in
the case of aqueous solutions, see 4.1.1.21.4);
– 10 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 11 –
(d) If the UN number and packing group of the filling substance determined in accordance with (a)
is not included in the assimilation list, the chemical compatibility shall be proved in accordance
with 6.1.5.2.5 or 6.1.5.2.7 for packagings, and in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.6 for IBCs;
(e) Apply the “Rule for collective entries”, as described in 4.1.1.21.5, if this is indicated in column
(5) of the selected line;
(f) The chemical compatibility of the filling substance may be regarded as verified taking into
account 4.1.1.21.1 and 4.1.1.21.2, if a standard liquid or a combination of standard liquids is
assimilated in column (5) and the design type is approved for that/those standard liquid(s).
Figure 4.1.1.21.1: Scheme for the assimilation of filling substances to standard liquids
Classification of the substance
according to Part 2 to determine
UN number and packing group
Is
the substance
or group of substances
mentioned by name in
the assimilation list?
Are
the UN number and
packing group
included in the
assimilation list?
Further tests required
(see 4.1.1.21.1)
No
Yes
No
Does
the assimilation list
indicate standard
liquid or combination
of standard liquids?
No
to be continued with “Rule for collective entries”
Chemical
compatibility may be
regarded as verified,
if packaging/IBC
design type has been
tested with indicated
standard liquid(s);
may be also valid for
aqueous solutions
Yes
Yes
– 11 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 12 –
4.1.1.21.4 Aqueous solutions
Aqueous solutions of substances and groups of substances assimilated to specific standard liquid(s) in
accordance with 4.1.1.21.3 may also be assimilated to that (those) standard liquid(s) provided the
following conditions are met:
(a) the aqueous solution can be assigned to the same UN number as the listed substance in
accordance with the criteria of 2.1.3.3, and
(b) the aqueous solution is not specifically mentioned by name otherwise in the assimilation list in
4.1.1.21.6, and
(c) no chemical reaction is taking place between the dangerous substance and the solvent water.
Example: Aqueous solutions of UN 1120 tert-Butanol:
– Pure tert-Butanol itself is assigned to the standard liquid “acetic acid” in the assimilation list.
– Aqueous solutions of tert-Butanol can be classified under the entry UN 1120 BUTANOLS in
accordance with 2.1.3.3, because the aqueous solution of tert-Butanol does not differ from the
entries of the pure substances relating to the class, the packing group(s) and the physical state.
Furthermore, the entry “1120 BUTANOLS” is not explicitly limited to the pure substances, and
aqueous solutions of these substances are not specifically mentioned by name otherwise in Table
A of chapter 3.2 as well as in the assimilation list.
– UN 1120 BUTANOLS do not react with water under normal conditions of carriage.
As a consequence, aqueous solutions of UN 1120 tert-Butanol may be assigned to the standard liquid
“acetic acid”.
4.1.1.21.5 Rule for collective entries
For the assimilation of filling substances for which “Rule for collective entries” is indicated in column
(5), the following steps shall be taken and conditions be met (see also scheme in Figure 4.1.1.21.2):
(a) Perform the assimilation procedure for each dangerous component of the solution, mixture or
preparation in accordance with 4.1.1.21.3 taking into account the conditions in 4.1.1.21.2. In
the case of generic entries, components may be neglected, that are known to have no damaging
effect on high density polyethylene (e.g. solid pigments in UN 1263 PAINT or PAINT
RELATED MATERIAL);
(b) A solution, mixture or preparation cannot be assimilated to a standard liquid, if:
(i) the UN number and packing group of one or more of the dangerous components does
not appear in the assimilation list; or
(ii) “Rule for collective entries” is indicated in column (5) of the assimilation list for one or
more of the components; or
(iii) (with the exception of UN 2059 NITROCELLULOSE SOLUTION, FLAMMABLE)
the classification code of one or more of its dangerous components differs from that of
the solution, mixture or preparation.
(c) If all dangerous components are listed in the assimilation list, and its classification codes are
in accordance with the classification code of the solution, mixture or preparation itself, and all
dangerous components are assimilated to the same standard liquid or combination of standard
liquids in column (5), the chemical compatibility of the solution, mixture or preparation may
be regarded as verified taking into account 4.1.1.21.1 and 4.1.1.21.2;
(d) If all dangerous components are listed in the assimilation list and its classification codes are
in accordance with the classification code of the solution, mixture or preparation itself, but
different standard liquids are indicated in column (5), the chemical compatibility may only be
– 12 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 13 –
regarded as verified for the following combinations of standard liquids taking into account
4.1.1.21.1 and 4.1.1.21.2:
(i) water/nitric acid 55 %; with the exception of inorganic acids with the classification code
C1, which are assigned to standard liquid “water”;
(ii) water/wetting solution;
(iii) water/acetic acid;
(iv) water/mixture of hydrocarbons;
(v) water/n-butyl acetate – n-butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution;
(e) In the scope of this rule, chemical compatibility is not regarded as verified for other
combinations of standard liquids than those specified in (d) and for all cases specified in (b).
In such cases the chemical compatibility shall be verified by other means (see 4.1.1.21.3 (d)).
Example 1: Mixture of UN 1940 THIOGLYCOLIC ACID (50 %) and UN 2531 METHACRYLIC ACID,
STABILIZED (50 %); classification of the mixture: UN 3265 CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC,
ORGANIC, N.O.S.
– Both the UN numbers of the components and the UN number of the mixture are included in the
assimilation list;
– Both the components and the mixture have the same classification code: C3;
– UN 1940 THIOGLYCOLIC ACID is assimilated to standard liquid “acetic acid”, and UN 2531
METHACRYLIC ACID, STABILIZED is assimilated to standard liquid “n-butyl acetate/n-butyl
acetate-saturated wetting solution”. According to paragraph (d) this is not an acceptable
combination of standard liquids. The chemical compatibility of the mixture has to be verified by
other means.
Example 2: Mixture of UN 1793 ISOPROPYL ACID PHOSPHATE (50 %) and UN 1803
PHENOLSULPHONIC ACID, LIQUID (50 %); classification of the mixture: UN 3265 CORROSIVE
LIQUID, ACIDIC, ORGANIC, N.O.S.
– Both the UN numbers of the components and the UN number of the mixture are included in the
assimilation list;
– Both the components and the mixture have the same classification code: C3;
– UN 1793 ISOPROPYL ACID PHOSPHATE is assimilated to standard liquid “wetting solution”,
and UN 1803 PHENOLSULPHONIC ACID, LIQUID is assimilated to standard liquid “water”.
According to paragraph (d) this is one of the acceptable combinations of standard liquids. As a
consequence the chemical compatibility may be regarded as verified for this mixture, provided
the packaging design type is approved for the standard liquids “wetting solution” and “water”.
– 13 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 14 –
Figure 4.1.1.21.2: Scheme “Rules for collective entries”
Acceptable combinations of standard liquids:
– water/nitric acid (55 %), with the exception of inorganic acids of classification code C1 which are assigned to
standard liquid “water”;
– water/wetting solution;
– water/acetic acid;
– water/mixture of hydrocarbons;
– water/n-butyl acetate – n-butyl acetate saturated wetting solution
Single entries, collective entries, solutions, mixtures,
preparations with indication
“Rule for collective entries” in assimilation list
Are
entries included in the
assimilation list for all
components of
solution, mixture or
preparation?
Have
all components the same
classification code as the
solution, mixture or
preparation?
Are
all components
assimilated to the same
standard liquid or
combination of
standard liquids?
Further
testing
required
Chemical compatibility may be regarded as proven, if packaging/ IBC design type
has been tested with indicated standard liquid(s)
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
No No
Are
all components
separately or together,
assimilated to one of
the combinations of
standard liquids
below?
– 14 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 15 –
4.1.1.21.6 Assimilation list
In the following table (assimilation list) dangerous substances are listed in the numerical order of their
UN numbers. As a rule, each line deals with a dangerous substance, single entry or collective entry
covered by a specific UN number. However, several consecutive lines may be used for the same UN
number, if substances belonging to the same UN number have different names (e.g. individual isomers
of a group of substances), different chemical properties, different physical properties and/or different
transport conditions. In such cases the single entry or collective entry within the particular packing
group is the last one of such consecutive lines.
Columns (1) to (4) of table 4.1.1.21.6, following a structure similar to that of Table A of Chapter 3.2,
are used to identify the substance for the purpose of this sub-section. The last column indicates the
standard liquid(s) to which the substance can be assimilated.
Explanatory notes for each column:
Column (1) UN No.
Contains the UN number:
– of the dangerous substance, if the substance has been assigned its own specific UN number, or
– of the collective entry to which dangerous substances not listed by name have been assigned in
accordance with the criteria (“decision trees”) of Part 2.
Column (2a) Proper shipping name or technical name
Contains the name of the substance, the name of the single entry, which may cover various isomers, or
the name of the collective entry itself.
The indicated name can deviate from the applicable proper shipping name.
Column (2b) Description
Contains a descriptive text to clarify the scope of the entry in those cases when the classification, the
transport conditions and/or the chemical compatibility of the substance may be variable.
Column (3a) Class
Contains the number of the class, whose heading covers the dangerous substance. This class number is
assigned in accordance with the procedures and criteria of Part 2.
Column (3b) Classification code
Contains the classification code of the dangerous substance in accordance with the procedures and
criteria of Part 2.
Column (4) Packing group
Contains the packing group number(s) (I, II or III) assigned to the dangerous substance in accordance
with the procedures and criteria of Part 2. Certain substances are not assigned to packing groups.
Column (5) Standard liquid
This column indicates, as definite information, either a standard liquid or a combination of standard
liquids to which the substance can be assimilated, or a reference to the rule for collective entries in
4.1.1.21.5.
– 15 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 16 –
Table 4.1.1.21.6: Assimilation list
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1090 Acetone 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
Remark: applicable only, if
it is proved that the
permeability of the substance
out of the package intended
for carriage has an acceptable
level
1093 Acrylonitrile, stabilized 3 FT1 I n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1104 Amyl acetates pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1105 Pentanols pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II/III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1106 Amylamines pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 FC II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1109 Amyl formates pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1120 Butanols pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II/III Acetic acid
1123 Butyl acetates pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II/III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1125 n-Butylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1128 n-Butyl formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1129 Butyraldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1133 Adhesives containing flammable liquid 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1139 Coating solution includes surface treatments
or coatings used for
industrial or other purposes
such as vehicle under
coating, drum or barrel
lining
3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1145 Cyclohexane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1146 Cyclopentane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1153 Ethylene glycol diethyl
ether
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
1154 Diethylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1158 Diisopropylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
– 16 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 17 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1160 Dimethylamine aqueous
solution
3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1165 Dioxane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1170 Ethanol or Ethanol
solution
aqueous solution 3 F1 II/III Acetic acid
1171 Ethylene glycol monoethyl
ether
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
1172 Ethylene glycol monoethyl
ether acetate
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
1173 Ethyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1177 2-Ethylbutyl acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1178 2-Ethylbutyraldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1180 Ethyl butyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1188 Ethylene glycol
monomethyl ether
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
1189 Ethylene glycol
monomethyl ether acetate
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
1190 Ethyl formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1191 Octyl aldehydes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1192 Ethyl lactate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1195 Ethyl propionate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1197 Extracts, liquid, for
flavour or aroma
3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1198 Formaldehyde solution,
flammable
aqueous solution, flashpoint
between 23 °C and 60 °C
3 FC III Acetic acid
1202 Diesel fuel complying with
EN 590:2013 + A1:2017 or
with a flashpoint not more
than 100 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
– 17 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 18 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1202 Gas oil flashpoint not more than
100 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1202 Heating oil, light extra light 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1202 Heating oil, light complying with
EN 590:2013 + AC:2014 or
with a flashpoint not more
than 100 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1203 Motor spirit, or gasoline,
or petrol
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1206 Heptanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1207 Hexaldehyde n-Hexaldehyde 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1208 Hexanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1210 Printing ink
or
Printing ink related
material
flammable, including
printing ink thinning or
reducing compound
3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1212 Isobutanol 3 F1 III Acetic acid
1213 Isobutyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1214 Isobutylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1216 Isooctenes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1219 Isopropanol 3 F1 II Acetic acid
1220 Isopropyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1221 Isopropylamine 3 FC I Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1223 Kerosene 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1224 3,3-Dimethyl-2-butanone 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1224 Ketones, liquid, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1230 Methanol 3 FT1 II Acetic acid
1231 Methyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1233 Methylamyl acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1235 Methylamine, aqueous
solution
3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1237 Methyl butyrate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1247 Methyl methacrylate
monomer, stabilized
3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
– 18 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 19 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1248 Methyl propionate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1262 Octanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1263 Paint
or
Paint related material
including paint, lacquer,
enamel, stain, shellac,
varnish, polish, liquid filler
and liquid lacquer base
or
including paint thinning and
reducing compound
3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1265 Pentanes n-Pentane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1266 Perfumery products with flammable solvents 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1268 Coal tar naphtha vapour pressure at 50 °C not
more than 110 kPa
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1268 Petroleum distillates,
n.o.s.
or
Petroleum products, n.o.s.
3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1274 n-Propanol 3 F1 II/III Acetic acid
1275 Propionaldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1276 n-Propyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1277 Propylamine n-Propylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1281 Propyl formates pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1282 Pyridine 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
1286 Rosin oil 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1287 Rubber solution 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1296 Triethylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1297 Trimethylamine, aqueous
solution
not more than 50 %
trimethylamine, by mass
3 FC I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1301 Vinyl acetate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1306 Wood preservatives,
liquid
3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
1547 Aniline 6.1 T1 II Acetic acid
1590 Dichloroanilines, liquid pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
6.1 T1 II Acetic acid
1602 Dye, liquid, toxic, n.o.s.
or
Dye intermediate, liquid,
toxic, n.o.s.
6.1 T1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1604 Ethylenediamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
– 19 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 20 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1715 Acetic anhydride 8 CF1 II Acetic acid
1717 Acetyl chloride 3 FC II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1718 Butyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution
1719 Hydrogen sulphide aqueous solution 8 C5 III Acetic acid
1719 Caustic alkali liquid, n.o.s. inorganic 8 C5 II/III Rule for collective entries
1730 Antimony pentachloride,
liquid
pure 8 C1 II Water
1736 Benzoyl chloride 8 C3 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1750 Chloroacetic acid solution aqueous solution 6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid
1750 Chloroacetic acid solution mixtures of mono- and
dichloroacetic acid
6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid
1752 Chloroacetyl chloride 6.1 TC1 I n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1755 Chromic acid solution aqueous solution with not
more than 30 % chromic acid
8 C1 II/III Nitric acid
1760 Cyanamide aqueous solution with not
more than 50 % cyanamide
8 C9 II Water
1760 O,O-Diethyl-
dithiophosphoric acid
8 C9 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1760 O,O-Diisopropyl-
dithiophosphoric acid
8 C9 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1760 O,O-Di-n-propyl-
dithiophosphoric acid
8 C9 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1760 Corrosive liquid, n.o.s. flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C9 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1761 Cupriethylenediamine
solution
aqueous solution 8 CT1 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1764 Dichloroacetic acid 8 C3 II Acetic acid
1775 Fluoroboric acid aqueous solution with not
more than 50 % fluoroboric
acid
8 C1 II Water
1778 Fluorosilicic acid 8 C1 II Water
1779 Formic acid with more than 85 % acid by
mass
8 C3 II Acetic acid
1783 Hexamethylenediamine
solution
aqueous solution 8 C7 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
1787 Hydriodic acid aqueous solution 8 C1 II/III Water
1788 Hydrobromic acid aqueous solution 8 C1 II/III Water
1789 Hydrochloric acid not more than 38 % aqueous
solution
8 C1 II/III Water
1790 Hydrofluoric acid with not more than 60 %
hydrogen fluoride
8 CT1 II Water
the permissible period of use:
not more than 2 years
1791 Hypochlorite solution aqueous solution, containing
wetting agents as customary
in trade
8 C9 II/III Nitric acid
and
wetting solution *
– 20 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 21 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1791 Hypochlorite solution aqueous solution 8 C9 II/III Nitric acid *
* For UN 1791: Test to be carried out only with vent. If the test is carried out with nitric acid as the standard liquid, an acid-
resistant vent and gasket shall be used. If the test is carried out with hypochlorite solutions themselves, vents and gaskets of the
same design type, resistant to hypochlorite (e.g. of silicone rubber) but not resistant to nitric acid, are also permitted.
1793 Isopropyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution
1802 Perchloric acid aqueous solution with not
more than 50 % acid, by
mass
8 CO1 II Water
1803 Phenolsulphonic acid,
liquid
isomeric mixture 8 C3 II Water
1805 Phosphoric acid, solution 8 C1 III Water
1814 Potassium hydroxide
solution
aqueous solution 8 C5 II/III Water
1824 Sodium hydroxide
solution
aqueous solution 8 C5 II/III Water
1830 Sulphuric acid with more than 51 % pure
acid
8 C1 II Water
1832 Sulphuric acid, spent chemical stable 8 C1 II Water
1833 Sulphurous acid 8 C1 II Water
1835 Tetramethylammonium
hydroxide, solution
aqueous solution, flashpoint
more than 60 °C
8 C7 II Water
1840 Zinc chloride solution aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
1848 Propionic acid with not less than 10 % and
less than 90 % acid by mass
8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1862 Ethyl crotonate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1863 Fuel, aviation, turbine
engine
3 F1 I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1866 Resin solution flammable 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1902 Diisooctyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution
1906 Sludge acid 8 C1 II Nitric acid
1908 Chlorite solution aqueous solution 8 C9 II/III Acetic acid
1914 Butyl propionates 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1915 Cyclohexanone 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1917 Ethyl acrylate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1919 Methyl acrylate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1920 Nonanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture, flashpoint between
23 °C and 60 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1935 Cyanide solution, n.o.s. inorganic 6.1 T4 I/II/III Water
1940 Thioglycolic acid 8 C3 II Acetic acid
1986 Alcohols, flammable,
toxic, n.o.s.
3 FT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1987 Cyclohexanol technical pure 3 F1 III Acetic acid
1987 Alcohols, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
– 21 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 22 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
1988 Aldehydes, flammable,
toxic, n.o.s.
3 FT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1989 Aldehydes, n.o.s. 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1992 2,6-cis-Dimethyl-
morpholine
3 FT1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
1992 Flammable liquid, toxic,
n.o.s.
3 FT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
1993 Propionic acid vinyl ester 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1993 (1-Methoxy-2-propyl)
acetate
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
1993 Flammable liquid, n.o.s. 3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
2014 Hydrogen peroxide,
aqueous solution
with not less than 20 % but
not more than 60 %
hydrogen peroxide,
stabilized as necessary
5.1 OC1 II Nitric acid
2022 Cresylic acid liquid mixture containing
cresols, xylenols and methyl
phenols
6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid
2030 Hydrazine aqueous
solution
with not less than 37 % but
not more than 64 %
hydrazine, by mass
8 CT1 II Water
2030 Hydrazine hydrate aqueous solution with 64 %
hydrazine
8 CT1 II Water
2031 Nitric acid other than red fuming, with
not more than 55 % pure acid
8 CO1 II Nitric acid
2045 Isobutyraldehyde 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2050 Diisobutylene isomeric
compounds
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2053 Methyl isobutyl carbinol 3 F1 III Acetic acid
2054 Morpholine 8 CF1 I Mixture of hydrocarbons
2057 Tripropylene 3 F1 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2058 Valeraldehyde pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2059 Nitrocellulose solution,
flammable
3 D I/II/III Rule for collective entries:
Deviating from the general
procedure this rule may be
applied to solvents of
classification code F1
2075 Chloral, anhydrous,
stabilized
6.1 T1 II Wetting solution
2076 Cresols, liquid pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
6.1 TC1 II Acetic acid
2078 Toluene diisocyanate liquid 6.1 T1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2079 Diethylenetriamine 8 C7 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2209 Formaldehyde solution aqueous solution with 37 %
Form-aldehyde, methanol
content: 8-10 %
8 C9 III Acetic acid
2209 Formaldehyde solution aqueous solution, with not
less than 25 % formaldehyde
8 C9 III Water
– 22 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 23 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2218 Acrylic acid, stabilized 8 CF1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2227 n-Butyl methacrylate,
stabilized
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2235 Chlorobenzyl chlorides,
liquid
para-Chlorobenzyl chloride 6.1 T2 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2241 Cycloheptane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2242 Cycloheptene 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2243 Cyclohexyl acetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2244 Cyclopentanol 3 F1 III Acetic acid
2245 Cyclopentanone 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2247 n-Decane 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2248 Di-n-butylamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2258 1,2-Propylenediamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2259 Triethylenetetramine 8 C7 II Water
2260 Tripropylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2263 Dimethylcyclohexanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2264 N,N-Dimethyl-
cyclohexylamine
8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2265 N,N-Dimethyl-formamide 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2266 Dimethyl-N-propylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2269 3,3′-Imino-dipropylamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2270 Ethylamine, aqueous
solution
with not less than 50 % but
not more than 70 %
ethylamine, flashpoint below
23 °C, corrosive or slightly
corrosive
3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2275 2-Ethylbutanol 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2276 2-Ethylhexylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2277 Ethyl methacrylate,
stabilized
3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2278 n-Heptene 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
– 23 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 24 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2282 Hexanols pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2283 Isobutyl methacrylate,
stabilized
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2286 Pentamethylheptane 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2287 Isoheptenes 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2288 Isohexenes 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2289 Isophoronediamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2293 4-Methoxy-4-methyl-
pentan-2-one
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2296 Methylcyclohexane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2297 Methylcyclohexanone pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2298 Methylcyclopentane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2302 5-Methylhexan-2-one 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2308 Nitrosylsulphuric acid,
liquid
8 C1 II Water
2309 Octadienes 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2313 Picolines pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2317 Sodium cuprocyanide
solution
aqueous solution 6.1 T4 I Water
2320 Tetraethylenepentamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2324 Triisobutylene mixture of C12-mono-
olefines, flashpoint between
23 °C and 60 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2326 Trimethyl-
cyclohexylamine
8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2327 Trimethylhexamethylene-
diamines
pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2330 Undecane 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2336 Allyl formate 3 FT1 I n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2348 Butyl acrylates, stabilized pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2357 Cyclohexylamine flashpoint between 23 °C
and 60 °C
8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2361 Diisobutylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2366 Diethyl carbonate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
– 24 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 25 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2367 alpha-Methyl-
valeraldehyde
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2370 1-Hexene 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2372 1,2-Di-(dimethylamino)-
ethane
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2379 1,3-Dimethylbutylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2383 Dipropylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2385 Ethyl isobutyrate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2393 Isobutyl formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2394 Isobutyl propionate flashpoint between 23 °C
and 60 °C
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2396 Methacrylaldehyde,
stabilized
3 FT1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2400 Methyl isovalerate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2401 Piperidine 8 CF1 I Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2403 Isopropenyl acetate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2405 Isopropyl butyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2406 Isopropyl isobutyrate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2409 Isopropyl propionate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2410 1,2,3,6-Tetrahydro-
pyridine
3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2427 Potassium chlorate,
aqueous solution
5.1 O1 II/III Water
2428 Sodium chlorate, aqueous
solution
5.1 O1 II/III Water
2429 Calcium chlorate, aqueous
solution
5.1 O1 II/III Water
2436 Thioacetic acid 3 F1 II Acetic acid
2457 2,3-Dimethylbutane 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2491 Ethanolamine 8 C7 III Wetting solution
2491 Ethanolamine solution aqueous solution 8 C7 III Wetting solution
– 25 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 26 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2496 Propionic anhydride 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2524 Ethyl orthoformate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2526 Furfurylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2527 Isobutyl acrylate,
stabilized
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2528 Isobutyl isobutyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2529 Isobutyric acid 3 FC III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2531 Methacrylic acid,
stabilized
8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2542 Tributylamine 6.1 T1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2560 2-Methylpentan-2-ol 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2564 Trichloroacetic acid
solution
aqueous solution 8 C3 II/III Acetic acid
2565 Dicyclohexylamine 8 C7 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2571 Ethylsulphuric acid 8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2571 Alkylsulphuric acids 8 C3 II Rule for collective entries
2580 Aluminium bromide
solution
aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
2581 Aluminium chloride
solution
aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
2582 Ferric chloride solution aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
2584 Methane sulphonic acid with more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 II Water
2584 Alkylsulphonic acids,
liquid
with more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2584 Benzene sulphonic acid with more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 II Water
2584 Toluene sulphonic acids with more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 II Water
2584 Arylsulphonic acids,
liquid
with more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2586 Methane sulfonic acid with not more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 III Water
2586 Alkylsulphonic acids,
liquid
with not more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
– 26 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 27 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2586 Benzene sulphonic acid with not more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 III Water
2586 Toluene sulphonic acids with not more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 III Water
2586 Arylsulphonic acids,
liquid
with not more than 5 % free
sulphuric acid
8 C1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2610 Triallylamine 3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2614 Methallyl alcohol 3 F1 III Acetic acid
2617 Methylcyclohexanols pure isomers and isomeric
mixture, flashpoint between
23 °C and 60 °C
3 F1 III Acetic acid
2619 Benzyldimethylamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2620 Amyl butyrates pure isomers and isomeric
mixture, flashpoint between
23 °C and 60 °C
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2622 Glycidaldehyde flashpoint below 23 °C 3 FT1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2626 Chloric acid, aqueous
solution
with not more than 10 %
chloric acid
5.1 O1 II Nitric acid
2656 Quinoline flashpoint more than 60 °C 6.1 T1 III Water
2672 Ammonia solution relative density between
0.880 and 0.957 at 15 °C in
water, with more than 10 %
but not more than 35 %
ammonia
8 C5 III Water
2683 Ammonium sulphide
solution
aqueous solution, flashpoint
between 23 °C and 60 °C
8 CFT II Acetic acid
2684 3-Diethylamino-
propylamine
3 FC III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2685 N,N-Diethylethylene-
diamine
8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2693 Bisulphites, aqueous
solution, n.o.s.
inorganic 8 C1 III Water
2707 Dimethyldioxanes pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
3 F1 II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2733 Amines, flammable,
corrosive , n.o.s.
or
Polyamines, flammable,
corrosive, n.o.s.
3 FC I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2734 Di-sec-butylamine 8 CF1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
2734 Amines, liquid, corrosive,
flammable, n.o.s.
or
Polyamines, liquid,
corrosive, flammable,
n.o.s.
8 CF1 I/II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
– 27 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 28 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2735 Amines, liquid, corrosive,
n.o.s.
or
Polyamines, liquid,
corrosive, n.o.s.
8 C7 I/II/III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2739 Butyric anhydride 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2789 Acetic acid, glacial
or
Acetic acid solution
aqueous solution, more than
80 % acid, by mass
8 CF1 II Acetic acid
2790 Acetic acid solution aqueous solution, more than
10 % but not more than 80 %
acid, by mass
8 C3 II/III Acetic acid
2796 Sulphuric acid with not more than 51 %
pure acid
8 C1 II Water
2797 Battery fluid, alkali Potassium/Sodium
hydroxide, aqueous solution
8 C5 II Water
2810 2-Chloro-6-fluorobenzyl
chloride
stabilized 6.1 T1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2810 2-Phenylethanol 6.1 T1 III Acetic acid
2810 Ethylene glycol monohexyl
ether
6.1 T1 III Acetic acid
2810 Toxic liquid, organic,
n.o.s.
6.1 T1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
2815 N-Aminoethylpiperazine 8 CT1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2818 Ammonium polysulphide
solution
aqueous solution 8 CT1 II/III Acetic acid
2819 Amyl acid phosphate 8 C3 III Wetting solution
2820 Butyric acid n-Butyric acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2821 Phenol solution aqueous solution, toxic, non-
alkaline
6.1 T1 II/III Acetic acid
2829 Caproic acid n-Caproic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2837 Bisulphates, aqueous
solution
8 C1 II/III Water
2838 Vinyl butyrate, stabilized 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2841 Di-n-amylamine 3 FT1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2850 Propylene tetramer mixture of C12-
monoolefines, flashpoint
between 23 °C and 60 °C
3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2873 Dibutylaminoethanol N,N-Di-n-
butylaminoethanol
6.1 T1 III Acetic acid
2874 Furfuryl alcohol 6.1 T1 III Acetic acid
2920 O,O-Diethyl-
dithiophosphoric acid
flashpoint between 23 °C
and 60 °C
8 CF1 II n-Butylacetate/
n-Butylacetate-saturated
wetting solution
– 28 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 29 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
2920 O,O-Dimethyl-
dithiophosphoric acid
flashpoint between 23 °C
and 60 °C
8 CF1 II Wetting solution
2920 Hydrogen bromide 33 % solution in glacial
acetic acid
8 CF1 II Wetting solution
2920 Tetramethylammonium
hydroxide
aqueous solution, flashpoint
between 23 °C and 60 °C
8 CF1 II Water
2920 Corrosive liquid,
flammable, n.o.s.
8 CF1 I/II Rule for collective entries
2922 Ammonium sulphide aqueous solution, flashpoint
more than 60 °C
8 CT1 II Water
2922 Cresols aqueous alkaline solution,
mixture of sodium and
potassium cresolate,
8 CT1 II Acetic acid
2922 Phenol aqueous alkaline solution,
mixture of sodium and
potassium phenolate
8 CT1 II Acetic acid
2922 Sodium hydrogen difluoride aqueous solution 8 CT1 III Water
2922 Corrosive liquid, toxic,
n.o.s.
8 CT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
2924 Flammable liquid,
corrosive, n.o.s.
slightly corrosive 3 FC I/II/III Rule for collective entries
2927 Toxic liquid, corrosive,
organic, n.o.s.
6.1 TC1 I/II Rule for collective entries
2933 Methyl 2-chloro-
propionate
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2934 Isopropyl 2-chloro-
propionate
3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2935 Ethyl 2-chloropropionate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2936 Thiolactic acid 6.1 T1 II Acetic acid
2941 Fluoroanilines pure isomers and isomeric
mixture
6.1 T1 III Acetic acid
2943 Tetrahydrofurfurylamine 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
2945 N-Methylbutylamine 3 FC II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2946 2-Amino-5-diethyl-
aminopentane
6.1 T1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
2947 Isopropyl chloroacetate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
2984 Hydrogen peroxide,
aqueous solution
with not less than 8 % but
less than 20 % hydrogen
peroxide, stabilized as
necessary
5.1 O1 III Nitric acid
3056 n-Heptaldehyde 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3065 Alcoholic beverages with more than 24 % alcohol
by volume
3 F1 II/III Acetic acid
– 29 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 30 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
3066 Paint
or
Paint related material
including paint, lacquer,
enamel, stain, shellac,
varnish, polish, liquid filler
and liquid lacquer base
or
including paint thinning and
reducing compound
8 C9 II/III Rule for collective entries
3079 Methacrylonitrile,
stabilized
6.1 TF1 I n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3082 sec-Alcohol C 6-C17 poly
(3-6) ethoxylate
9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Alcohol C12-C15 poly (1-3)
ethoxylate
9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Alcohol C13-C15 poly (1-6)
ethoxylate
9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Aviation turbine fuel JP-5 flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Aviation turbine fuel JP-7 flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Coal tar flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Coal tar naphtha flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Creosote produced of coal
tar
flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Creosote produced of wood
tar
flashpoint more than 60 °C 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Cresyl diphenyl phosphate 9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Decyl acrylate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Diisobutyl phthalate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Di-n-butyl phthalate 9 M6 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Hydrocarbons liquid, flashpoint more than
60 °C, environmentally
hazardous
9 M6 III Rule for collective entries
3082 Isodecyl diphenyl
phosphate
9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Methylnaphthalenes isomeric mixture, liquid 9 M6 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3082 Triaryl phosphates n.o.s. 9 M6 III Wetting solution
– 30 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 31 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
3082 Tricresyl phosphate with not more than 3 %
ortho-isomer
9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Trixylenyl phosphate 9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Zinc alkyl dithiophosphate C3-C14 9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Zinc aryl dithiophosphate C7-C16 9 M6 III Wetting solution
3082 Environmentally
hazardous substance,
liquid, n.o.s.
9 M6 III Rule for collective entries
3099 Oxidizing liquid, toxic,
n.o.s.
5.1 OT1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3101
3103
3105
3107
3109
3111
3113
3115
3117
3119
Organic Peroxide, Type B,
C, D, E or F, liquid
or
Organic Peroxide, Type B,
C, D, E or F, liquid,
temperature controlled
5.2 P1 n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
and
mixture of hydrocarbons
and
nitric acid**
** For UN Nos. 3101, 3103, 3105, 3107, 3109, 3111, 3113, 3115, 3117, 3119 (tert-butyl hydroperoxide with more than 40 %
peroxide content and peroxyacetic acids are excluded): All organic peroxides in a technically pure form or in solution in
solvents which, as far as their compatibility is concerned, are covered by the standard liquid “mixture of hydrocarbons” in this
list. Compatibility of vents and gaskets with organic peroxides may be verified, also independently of the design type test, by
laboratory tests with nitric acid.
3145 Butylphenols liquid, n.o.s. 8 C3 I/II/III Acetic acid
3145 Alkylphenols, liquid, n.o.s. including C2 to C12
homologues
8 C3 I/II/III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3149 Hydrogen peroxide and
peroxyacetic acid mixture,
stabilized
with UN 2790 acetic acid,
UN 2796 sulphuric acid
and/or UN 1805 phosphoric
acid, water and not more
than 5 % peroxyacetic acid
5.1 OC1 II Wetting solution
and
nitric acid
3210 Chlorates, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II/III Water
3211 Perchlorates, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II/III Water
3213 Bromates, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II/III Water
3214 Permanganates,
inorganic, aqueous
solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II Water
3216 Persulphates, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 III Wetting solution
3218 Nitrates, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II/III Water
3219 Nitrites, inorganic,
aqueous solution, n.o.s.
5.1 O1 II/III Water
3264 Cupric chloride aqueous solution, slightly
corrosive
8 C1 III Water
3264 Hydroxylamine sulphate 25 % aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
3264 Phosphorous acid aqueous solution 8 C1 III Water
– 31 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 32 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
3264 Corrosive liquid, acidic,
inorganic, n.o.s.
flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries;
not applicable to mixtures
having components of UN
Nos.: 1830, 1832, 1906 and
2308
3265 Methoxyacetic acid 8 C3 I n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Allyl succinic acid
anhydride
8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Dithioglycolic acid 8 C3 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Butyl phosphate mixture of mono- and di-
butyl phosphate
8 C3 III Wetting solution
3265 Caprylic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Isovaleric acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Pelargonic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Pyruvic acid 8 C3 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3265 Valeric acid 8 C3 III Acetic acid
3265 Corrosive liquid, acidic,
organic, n.o.s.
flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C3 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3266 Sodium hydrosulphide aqueous solution 8 C5 II Acetic acid
3266 Sodium sulphide aqueous solution, slightly
corrosive
8 C5 III Acetic acid
3266 Corrosive liquid, basic,
inorganic, n.o.s.
flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C5 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3267 2,2′-(Butylimino)-
bisethanol
8 C7 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
and
wetting solution
3267 Corrosive liquid, basic,
organic, n.o.s.
flashpoint more than 60 °C 8 C7 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3271 Ethylene glycol monobutyl
ether
flashpoint 60 °C 3 F1 III Acetic acid
3271 Ether, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
3272 Acrylic acid tert-butyl ester 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Isobutyl propionate flashpoint below 23 °C 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Methyl valerate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Trimethyl ortho-formate 3 F1 II n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
– 32 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 33 –
UN
No.
Proper shipping name
or
technical name
Description Class Classifi-
cation
Code
Packing
group
Standard liquid
3.1.2 3.1.2 2.2 2.2 2.1.1.3
(1) (2a) (2b) (3a) (3b) (4) (5)
3272 Ethyl valerate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Isobutyl isovalerate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 n-Amyl propionate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 n-Butylbutyrate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Methyl lactate 3 F1 III n-Butyl acetate/
n-butyl acetate-saturated
wetting solution
3272 Ester, n.o.s. 3 F1 II/III Rule for collective entries
3287 Sodium nitrite 40 % aqueous solution 6.1 T4 III Water
3287 Toxic liquid, inorganic,
n.o.s.
6.1 T4 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3291 Clinical waste,
unspecified, n.o.s.
liquid 6.2 I3 Water
3293 Hydrazine, aqueous
solution
with not more than 37 %
hydrazine, by mass
6.1 T4 III Water
3295 Heptenes n.o.s 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
3295 Nonanes flashpoint below 23 °C 3 F1 II Mixture of hydrocarbons
3295 Decanes n.o.s 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3295 1,2,3-Trimethylbenzene 3 F1 III Mixture of hydrocarbons
3295 Hydrocarbons, liquid,
n.o.s.
3 F1 I/II/III Rule for collective entries
3405 Barium chlorate, solution aqueous solution 5.1 OT1 II/III Water
3406 Barium perchlorate,
solution
aqueous solution 5.1 OT1 II/III Water
3408 Lead perchlorate, solution aqueous solution 5.1 OT1 II/III Water
3413 Potassium cyanide,
solution
aqueous solution 6.1 T4 I/II/III Water
3414 Sodium cyanide, solution aqueous solution 6.1 T4 I/II/III Water
3415 Sodium fluoride, solution aqueous solution 6.1 T4 III Water
3422 Potassium fluoride,
solution
aqueous solution 6.1 T4 III Water
– 33 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 34 –
4.1.2 Additional general provisions for the use of IBCs
4.1.2.1 When IBCs are used for the carriage of liquids with a flash-point of 60 °C (closed cup) or lower, or of
powders liable to dust explosion, measures shall be taken to prevent a dangerous electrostatic discharge.
4.1.2.2 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC, shall be inspected and tested, as relevant, in accordance
with 6.5.4.4 or 6.5.4.5:
– before it is put into service;
– thereafter at intervals not exceeding two and a half and five years, as appropriate;
– after the repair or remanufacture, before it is re-used for carriage.
An IBC shall not be filled and offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or
inspection. However, an IBC filled prior to the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection may
be carried for a period not to exceed three months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or
inspection. In addition, an IBC may be carried after the date of expiry of the last periodic test or
inspection:
(a) after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the required test or inspection
prior to refilling; and
(b) unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months
beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection in order to allow the return of
dangerous goods or residues for proper disposal or recycling.
NOTE: For the particulars in the transport document, see 5.4.1.1.11.
4.1.2.3 IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall be filled to at least 80 % of the volume of the outer casing.
4.1.2.4 Except for routine maintenance of metal, rigid plastics, composite and flexible IBCs performed by the
owner of the IBC, whose State and name or authorized symbol is durably marked on the IBC, the party
performing routine maintenance shall durably mark the IBC near the manufacturer’s UN design type
mark to show:
(a) The State in which the routine maintenance was carried out; and
(b) The name or authorized symbol of the party performing the routine maintenance.
4.1.3 General provisions concerning packing instructions
4.1.3.1 Packing instructions applicable to dangerous goods of Classes 1 to 9 are specified in Section 4.1.4. They
are subdivided in three sub-sections depending on the type of packagings to which they apply:
Sub-section 4.1.4.1 for packagings other than IBCs and large packagings; these packing
instructions are designated by an alphanumeric code starting with the letter
“P” or “R” for packagings specific to RID and ADR;
Sub-section 4.1.4.2 for IBCs; these are designated by an alphanumeric code starting with the
letters “IBCs”;
Sub-section 4.1.4.3 for large packagings; these are designated by an alphanumeric code starting
with the letters “LP”.
Generally, packing instructions specify that the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 or 4.1.3, as
appropriate, are applicable. They may also require compliance with the special provisions of Sections
4.1.5, 4.1.6, 4.1.7, 4.1.8 or 4.1.9 when appropriate. Special packing provisions may also be specified in
the packing instruction for individual substances or articles. They are also designated by an
alphanumeric code comprising the letters:
“PP” for packagings other than IBCs and large packagings, or “RR” for special provisions specific to
RID and ADR;
“B” for IBCs or “BB” for special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR;
– 34 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 35 –
“L” for large packagings or “LL” for special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR.
Unless otherwise specified, each packaging shall conform to the applicable requirements of Part 6.
Generally packing instructions do not provide guidance on compatibility and the user shall not select a
packaging without checking that the substance is compatible with the packaging material selected (e.g.
glass receptacles are unsuitable for most fluorides). Where glass receptacles are permitted in the packing
instructions porcelain, earthenware and stoneware packagings are also allowed.
4.1.3.2 Column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 shows for each article or substance the packing instruction(s)
that shall be used. Columns (9a) and (9b) indicate the special packing provisions and the mixed packing
provisions (see 4.1.10) applicable to specific substances or articles.
4.1.3.3 Each packing instruction shows, where applicable, the acceptable single and combination packagings.
For combination packagings, the acceptable outer packagings, inner packagings and when applicable
the maximum quantity permitted in each inner or outer packaging, are shown. Maximum net mass and
maximum capacity are as defined in 1.2.1. Where packagings which need not meet the requirements of
4.1.1.3 (e.g. crates, pallets) are authorized in a packing instruction or the special provisions listed in
Table A in Chapter 3.2, these packagings are not subject to the mass or volume limits generally
applicable to packagings conforming to the requirements of Chapter 6.1, unless otherwise indicated in
the relevant packing instruction or special provision.
4.1.3.4 The following packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried are liable to become
liquid during carriage:
Packagings
Drums: 1D and 1G
Boxes: 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2
Bags: 5L1, 5L2, 5L3, 5H1, 5H2, 5H3, 5H4, 5M1 and 5M2
Composite packagings: 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6HD1, 6PC, 6PD1, 6PD2, 6PG1, 6PG2 and
6PH1
Large packagings
Flexible plastics: 51H (outer packaging)
IBCs
For substances of packing group I: All types of IBC
For substances of packing groups II and III:
Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F
Fibreboard: 11G
Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4,
13M1 and 13M2
Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2
For the purposes of this paragraph, substances and mixtures of substances having a melting point equal
to or less than 45 °C shall be treated as solids liable to become liquid during carriage.
4.1.3.5 Where the packing instructions in this Chapter authorize the use of a particular type of packaging (e.g.
4G; 1A2), packagings bearing the same packaging identification code followed by the letters “V”, “U”
or “W” marked in accordance with the requirements of Part 6 (e.g. 4GV, 4GU or 4GW; 1A2V, 1A2U
or 1A2W) may also be used under the same conditions and limitations applicable to the use of that type
of packaging according to the relevant packing instructions. For example, a combination packaging
marked with the packaging code “4GV” may be used whenever a combination packaging marked “4G”
is authorized, provided the requirements in the relevant packing instruction regarding types of inner
packagings and quantity limitations are respected.
– 35 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 36 –
4.1.3.6 Pressure receptacles for liquids and solids
4.1.3.6.1 Unless otherwise indicated in ADR, pressure receptacles conforming to:
(a) the applicable requirements of Chapter 6.2; or
(b) the national or international standards on the design, construction, testing, manufacturing and
inspection, as applied by the country in which the pressure receptacles are manufactured,
provided that the provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met, and that, for metallic cylinders, tubes, pressure
drums, bundles of cylinders and salvage pressure receptacles, the construction is such that the
minimum burst ratio (burst pressure divided by test pressure) is:
(i) 1.50 for refillable pressure receptacles;
(ii) 2.00 for non-refillable pressure receptacles,
are authorized for the carriage of any liquid or solid substance other than explosives, thermally unstable
substances, organic peroxides, self-reactive substances, substances where significant pressure may
develop by evolution of chemical reaction and radioactive material (unless permitted in 4.1.9).
This sub-section is not applicable to the substances mentioned in 4.1.4.1, packing instruction P200,
table 3.
4.1.3.6.2 Every design type of pressure receptacle shall be approved by the competent authority of the country
of manufacture or as indicated in Chapter 6.2.
4.1.3.6.3 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles having a minimum test pressure of 0.6 MPa shall be
used.
4.1.3.6.4 Unless otherwise indicated, pressure receptacles may be provided with an emergency pressure relief
device designed to avoid bursting in case of overfill or fire accidents.
Pressure receptacle valves shall be designed and constructed in such a way that they are inherently able
to withstand damage without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could
cause inadvertent release of the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the methods as given in
4.1.6.8 (a) to (e).
4.1.3.6.5 The level of filling shall not exceed 95 % of the capacity of the pressure receptacle at 50 °C. Sufficient
ullage (outage) shall be left to ensure that the pressure receptacle will not be liquid full at a temperature
of 55 °C.
4.1.3.6.6 Unless otherwise indicated pressure receptacles shall be subjected to a periodic inspection and test every
5 years. The periodic inspection shall include an external examination, an internal examination or
alternative method as approved by the competent authority, a pressure test or equivalent effective non-
destructive testing with the agreement of the competent authority including an inspection of all
accessories (e.g. tightness of valves, emergency relief valves or fusible elements). Pressure receptacles
shall not be filled after they become due for periodic inspection and test but may be carried after the
expiry of the time limit. Pressure receptacle repairs shall meet the requirements of 4.1.6.11.
4.1.3.6.7 Prior to filling, the packer shall perform an inspection of the pressure receptacle and ensure that the
pressure receptacle is authorized for the substances to be carried and that the requirements of ADR have
been met. Shut-off valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during carriage. The consignor
shall verify that the closures and equipment are not leaking.
4.1.3.6.8 Refillable pressure receptacles shall not be filled with a substance different from that previously
contained unless the necessary operations for change of service have been performed.
4.1.3.6.9 Marking of pressure receptacles for liquids and solids according to 4.1.3.6 (not conforming to the
requirements of Chapter 6.2) shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority
of the country of manufacturing.
4.1.3.7 Packagings or IBCs not specifically authorized in the applicable packing instruction shall not be used
for the carriage of a substance or article unless specifically allowed under a temporary derogation agreed
between Contracting Parties in accordance with 1.5.1.
– 36 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 37 –
4.1.3.8 Unpackaged articles other than Class 1 articles
4.1.3.8.1 Where large and robust articles cannot be packaged in accordance with the requirements of Chapters
6.1 or 6.6 and they have to be carried empty, uncleaned and unpackaged, the competent authority of the
country of origin2 may approve such carriage. In doing so the competent authority shall take into
account that:
(a) Large and robust articles shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally
encountered during carriage including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between
cargo transport units and warehouses, as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual
or mechanical handling;
(b) All closures and openings shall be sealed so that there can be no loss of contents which might be
caused under normal conditions of carriage, by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity
or pressure (resulting from altitude, for example). No dangerous residue shall adhere to the
outside of the large and robust articles;
(c) Parts of large and robust articles, which are in direct contact with dangerous goods:
(i) shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods; and
(ii) shall not cause a dangerous effect e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous
goods;
(d) Large and robust articles containing liquids shall be stowed and secured to ensure that neither
leakage nor permanent distortion of the article occurs during carriage;
(e) They shall be fixed in cradles or crates or other handling devices or to the cargo transport unit in
such a way that they will not become loose during normal conditions of carriage.
4.1.3.8.2 Unpackaged articles approved by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.3.8.1
shall be subject to the consignment procedures of Part 5. In addition the consignor of such articles shall
ensure that a copy of any such approval is attached to the transport document.
NOTE: A large and robust article may include flexible fuel containment systems, military equipment,
machinery or equipment containing dangerous goods above the limited quantities according to 3.4.1.
4.1.4 List of packing instructions
NOTE: Although the following packing instructions use the same numbering system as used in the
IMDG Code and the UN Model Regulations, readers should be aware that some of the details may be
different in the case of ADR.
2 If the country of origin is not a contracting party to ADR, the competent authority of the first country contracting
party to the ADR reached by the consignment.
– 37 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 38 –
4.1.4.1 Packing instructions concerning the use of packagings (except IBCs and large packagings)
P001 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) P001
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum capacity/Net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Drums
Glass 10 l steel (1A1, 1A2) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Plastics 30 l aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Metal 40 l other metal (1N1, 1N2) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (1D) 150 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1, 4C2) 150 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D) 150 kg 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) 75 kg 400 kg 400 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg 60 kg 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 150 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
Single packagings:
Drums
steel, non-removable head (1A1) 250 l 450 l 450 l
steel, removable head (1A2) 250 l a 450 l 450 l
aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) 250 l 450 l 450 l
aluminium, removable head (1B2) 250 l a 450 l 450 l
metal other than steel or aluminium, non-
removable head (1N1)
250 l 450 l 450 l
metal other than steel or aluminium, removable
head (1N2)
250 l a 450 l 450 l
plastics, non-removable head (1H1) 250 l 450 l 450 l
plastics, removable head (1H2) 250 l a 450 l 450 l
Jerricans
steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 l 60 l 60 l
steel, removable head (3A2) 60 l a 60 l 60 l
aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) 60 l 60 l 60 l
aluminium, removable head (3B2) 60 l a 60 l 60 l
plastics, non-removable head (3H1) 60 l 60 l 60 l
plastics, removable head (3H2) 60 l a 60 l 60 l
a Only substances with a viscosity of more than 2 680 mm²/s are authorized.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 38 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 39 –
P001 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) (cont’d) P001
Single packagings (cont’d) Maximum capacity/Net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Composite packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
plastics receptacle with outer steel, aluminium or
plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HH1)
250 l 250 l 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer fibre or plywood
drum (6HG1, 6HD1)
120 l 250 l 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium
crate or box or plastics receptacle with outer
wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics
box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
60 l 60 l 60 l
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium,
fibreboard, plywood, expanded plastics or solid
plastics drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1
or 6PH2) or with outer steel or aluminium crate
or box or with outer wooden or fibreboard box or
with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2,
6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2)
60 l 60 l 60 l
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
Additional requirement:
For substances of Class 3, packing group III, which give off small quantities of carbon dioxide or nitrogen, the
packagings shall be vented.
Special packing provisions:
PP1 For UN Nos. 1133, 1210, 1263 and 1866 and for adhesives, printing inks, printing ink related materials, paints,
paint related materials and resin solutions which are assigned to UN 3082, metal or plastics packagings for
substances of packing groups II and III in quantities of 5 litres or less per packaging are not required to meet the
performance tests in Chapter 6.1 when carried:
(a) in palletized loads, a pallet box or unit load device, e.g. individual packagings placed or stacked and
secured by strapping, shrink or stretch-wrapping or other suitable means to a pallet; or
(b) as inner packagings of combination packagings with a maximum net mass of 40 kg.
PP2 For UN 3065, wooden barrels with a maximum capacity of 250 litres and which do not meet the provisions of
Chapter 6.1 may be used.
PP4 For UN No. 1774, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level.
PP5 For UN No. 1204, packagings shall be so constructed that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal
pressure. Cylinders, tubes and pressure drums shall not be used for these substances.
PP6 (Deleted)
PP10 For UN No. 1791, packing group II, the packaging shall be vented.
PP31 For UN No. 1131, packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
PP33 For UN No. 1308, packing groups I and II, only combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg
allowed.
PP81 For UN No. 1790 with more than 60 % but not more than 85 % hydrogen fluoride and UN No. 2031 with more
than 55 % nitric acid, the permitted use of plastics drums and jerricans as single packagings shall be two years
from their date of manufacture.
PP93 For UN Nos. 3532 and 3534, packagings shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour
to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings in the event of loss of stabilization.
Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR:
RR2 For UN No. 1261, removable head packagings are not permitted.
– 39 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 40 –
P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) P002
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Glass 10 kg
Plastics a 50 kg
Metal 50 kg
Paper a, b, c 50 kg
Fibre a, b, c 50 kg
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with sift
proof walls (4C2)
250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg 400 kg 400 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg 60 kg 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 250 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
Single packagings:
Drums
steel (1A1 or 1A2 d) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (1B1 or 1B2 d) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N2 d) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plastics (1H1 or 1H2 d) 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G) e 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (1D) e 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1 or 3A2 d) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1 or 3B2 d ) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1 or 3H2 d) 120 kg 120 kg 120 kg
a These inner packagings shall be sift-proof.
b These inner packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage
(see 4.1.3.4).
c These inner packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I.
d These packagings shall not be used for substances of packing group I that may become liquid during carriage
(see 4.1.3.4).
e These packagings shall not be used when substances being carried may become liquid during carriage (see
4.1.3.4).
(Cont’d on next page)
– 40 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 41 –
P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) (cont’d) P002
Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Single packagings (cont’d): Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Boxes
steel (4A) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
solid plastics (4H2) e Not allowed 400 kg 400 kg
Bags
bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2) e Not allowed 50 kg 50 kg
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle with outer steel, aluminium,
plywood, fibre or plastics drum (6HA1, 6HB1,
6HG1 e , 6HD1 e, or 6HH1)
400 kg 400 kg 400 kg
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium
crate or box, wooden box, plywood box,
fibreboard box or solid plastics box (6HA2,
6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 e, 6HG2 e or 6HH2)
75 kg 75 kg 75 kg
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium
plywood or fibre drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 e or
6PG1 e ) or with outer steel or aluminium crate or
box or with outer wooden, or fibreboard box or
with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2,
6PC, 6PD2 e, or 6PG2e) or with outer expanded
plastics or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or
6PH2 e)
75 kg 75 kg 75 kg
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
e These packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage
(see 4.1.3.4).
(Cont’d on next page)
– 41 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 42 –
P002 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) (cont’d) P002
Special packing provisions:
PP6 (Deleted)
PP7 For UN No. 2000, celluloid may also be transported unpacked on pallets, wrapped in plastic film and secured
by appropriate means, such as steel bands as a full load in closed vehicles or containers. Each pallet shall not
exceed 1 000 kg.
PP8 For UN No. 2002, packagings shall be so constructed that explosion is not possible by reason of increased
internal pressure. Cylinders, tubes and pressure drums shall not be used for these substances.
PP9 For UN Nos. 3175, 3243 and 3244, packagings shall conform to a design type that has passed a leakproofness
test at the packing group II performance level. For UN No. 3175, the leakproofness test is not required when
the liquids are fully absorbed in solid material contained in sealed bags.
PP11 For UN No. 1309, packing group III, and UN No. 1362, 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are allowed if they are
overpacked in plastic bags and are wrapped in shrink or stretch wrap on pallets.
PP12 For UN Nos. 1361, 2213 and UN No. 3077, 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are allowed when carried in closed vehicles
or containers.
PP13 For articles classified under UN No. 2870, only combination packagings meeting the packing group I
performance level are authorized.
PP14 For UN Nos. 2211, 2698 and 3314, packagings are not required to meet the performance tests in Chapter 6.1.
PP15 For UN Nos. 1324 and 2623, packagings shall meet the packing group III performance level.
PP20 For UN No. 2217, any sift-proof, tearproof receptacle may be used.
PP30 For UN No. 2471, paper or fibre inner packagings are not permitted.
PP34 For UN No. 2969 (as whole beans), 5H1, 5L1 and 5M1 bags are permitted.
PP37 For UN Nos. 2590 and 2212, 5M1 bags are permitted. All bags of any type shall be carried in closed vehicles
or containers or be placed in closed rigid overpacks.
PP38 For UN No. 1309, packing group II, bags are permitted only in closed vehicles or containers.
PP84 For UN No. 1057, rigid outer packagings meeting the packing group II performance level shall be used. The
packagings shall be designed and constructed and arranged to prevent movement, inadvertent ignition of the
devices or inadvertent release of flammable gas or liquid.
NOTE: For waste lighters collected separately see Chapter 3.3, special provision 654.
PP92 For UN Nos. 3531 and 3533, packagings shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour
to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packagings in the event of loss of stabilization.
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
RR5 Notwithstanding special packing provision PP84, only the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2 and 4.1.1.5 to
4.1.1.7 need be complied with if the gross mass of the package is not more than 10 kg.
NOTE: For waste lighters collected separately see Chapter 3.3, special provision 654.
– 42 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 43 –
P003 PACKING INSTRUCTION P003
Dangerous goods shall be placed in suitable outer packagings. The packagings shall meet the provisions of 4.1.1.1,
4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.8 and 4.1.3 and be so designed that they meet the construction requirements of 6.1.4. Outer
packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity
and its intended use, shall be used. Where this packing instruction is used for the transport of articles or inner packagings
of combination packagings, the packaging shall be designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge of articles
during normal conditions of carriage.
Special packing provisions:
PP16 For UN No. 2800, batteries shall be protected from short circuits and shall be securely packed in strong outer
packagings.
NOTE 1: Non-spillable batteries which are an integral part of, and necessary for, the operation of mechanical
or electronic equipment shall be securely fastened in the battery holder on the equipment and protected in such
a manner as to prevent damage and short circuits.
NOTE 2: For used batteries (UN 2800), see P801.
PP17 For UN No. 2037, packages shall not exceed 55 kg net mass for fibreboard packagings or 125 kg net mass for
other packagings.
PP19 For UN Nos. 1364 and 1365, carriage as bales is authorized.
PP20 For UN Nos. 1363, 1386, 1408 and 2793 any sift-proof, tearproof receptacle may be used.
PP32 UN Nos. 2857 and 3358 and robust articles consigned under UN No. 3164 may be carried unpackaged, in crates
or in appropriate overpacks.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
PP87 (Deleted)
PP88 (Deleted)
PP90 For UN No. 3506, sealed inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and puncture resistant material impervious to
mercury which will prevent escape of the substance from the package irrespective of the position or the
orientation of the package shall be used.
PP91 For UN 1044, large fire extinguishers may also be carried unpackaged provided that the requirements of 4.1.3.8.1
(a) to (e) are met, the valves are protected by one of the methods in accordance with 4.1.6.8 (a) to (d) and other
equipment mounted on the fire extinguisher is protected to prevent accidental activation. For the purpose of this
special packing provision, “large fire extinguishers” means fire extinguishers as described in indents (c) to (e)
of special provision 225 of Chapter 3.3.
PP96 For UN No. 2037 waste gas cartridges carried in accordance with special provision 327 of Chapter 3.3, the
packagings shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of
pressure.
Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR:
RR6 For UN No. 2037 in the case of carriage by full load, metal articles may also be packed as follows: the articles
shall be grouped together in units on trays and held in position with an appropriate plastics cover; these units
shall be stacked and suitably secured on pallets.
RR9 For UN 3509, packagings are not required to meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
Packagings meeting the requirements of 6.1.4, made leak tight or fitted with a leak tight and puncture resistant
sealed liner or bag, shall be used.
When the only residues contained are solids which are not liable to become liquid at temperatures likely to be
encountered during carriage, flexible packagings may be used.
When liquid residues are present, rigid packagings that provide a means of retention (e.g. absorbent material)
shall be used.
Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every packaging shall be inspected to ensure that it is free from
corrosion, contamination or other damage. Any packaging showing signs of reduced strength shall no longer be
used (minor dents and scratches are not considered as reducing the strength of the packaging).
Packagings intended for the carriage of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues of Class 5.1 shall
be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any other combustible
material.
– 43 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 44 –
P004 PACKING INSTRUCTION P004
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3473, 3476, 3477, 3478 and 3479.
The following packagings are authorized:
(1) For fuel cell cartridges, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.3, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) For fuel cell cartridges packed with equipment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of
4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3.
When fuel cell cartridges are packed with equipment, they shall be packed in inner packagings or placed in the
outer packaging with cushioning material or divider(s) so that the fuel cell cartridges are protected against
damage that may be caused by the movement or placement of the contents within the outer packaging.
The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging.
For the purpose of this packing instruction, “equipment” means apparatus requiring the fuel cell cartridges with
which it is packed for its operation.
(3) For fuel cell cartridges contained in equipment: strong outer packagings which meet the general provisions of
4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6 and 4.1.3.
Large robust equipment (see 4.1.3.8) containing fuel cell cartridges may be carried unpackaged. For fuel cell
cartridges contained in equipment, the entire system shall be protected against short circuit and inadvertent
operation.
NOTE: The packagings authorized in (2) and (3) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
P005 PACKING INSTRUCTION P005
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3528, 3529 and 3530.
If the engine or machinery is constructed and designed so that the means of containment containing the dangerous
goods affords adequate protection, an outer packaging is not required.
Dangerous goods in engines or machinery shall otherwise be packed in outer packagings constructed of suitable
material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, and meeting
the applicable requirements of 4.1.1.1, or they shall be fixed in such a way that they will not become loose during
normal conditions of carriage, e.g. in cradles or crates or other handling devices.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
In addition, the manner in which means of containment are contained within the engine or machinery, shall be such
that under normal conditions of carriage, damage to the means of containment containing the dangerous goods is
prevented; and in the event of damage to the means of containment containing liquid dangerous goods, no leakage of
the dangerous goods from the engine or machinery is possible (a leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this
requirement).
Means of containment containing dangerous goods shall be so installed, secured or cushioned as to prevent their
breakage or leakage and so as to control their movement within the engine or machinery during normal conditions of
carriage. Cushioning material shall not react dangerously with the content of the means of containment. Any leakage
of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning material.
Additional requirement:
Other dangerous goods (e.g. batteries, fire extinguishers, compressed gas accumulators or safety devices) required for
the functioning or safe operation of the engine or machinery shall be securely mounted in the engine or machine.
– 44 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 45 –
P006 PACKING INSTRUCTION P006
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3537 to 3548.
(1) The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2)
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) In addition, for robust articles the following packagings are authorized:
Strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material and of adequate strength and design in relation to the
packaging capacity and its intended use. The packagings shall meet the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.8 and
4.1.3 in order to achieve a level of protection that is at least equivalent to that provided by Chapter 6.1. Articles
may be carried unpackaged or on pallets when the dangerous goods are afforded equivalent protection by the
article in which they are contained.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
(3) Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) Receptacles within articles containing liquids or solids shall be constructed of suitable materials and secured
in the article in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or
leak their contents into the article itself or the outer packaging;
(b) Receptacles containing liquids with closures shall be packed with their closures correctly oriented. The
receptacles shall in addition conform to the internal pressure test provisions of 6.1.5.5;
(c) Receptacles that are liable to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or
stoneware or of certain plastics materials shall be properly secured. Any leakage of the contents shall not
substantially impair the protective properties of the article or of the outer packaging;
(d) Receptacles within articles containing gases shall meet the requirements of Section 4.1.6 and Chapter 6.2
as appropriate or be capable of providing an equivalent level of protection as packing instructions P200 or
P208;
(e) Where there is no receptacle within the article, the article shall fully enclose the dangerous substances and
prevent their release under normal conditions of carriage.
(4) Articles shall be packed to prevent movement and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of carriage.
– 45 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 46 –
P010 PACKING INSTRUCTION P010
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings
Inner packagings Outer packagings Maximum net mass (see 4.1.3.3)
Glass 1 l
Steel 40 l
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg
fibre (1G) 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg
natural wood (4C1, 4C2) 400 kg
plywood (4D) 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) 400 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg
Single packagings Maximum capacity (see 4.1.3.3)
Drums
steel, non-removable head (1A1) 450 l
Jerricans
steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 l
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle in steel drums (6HA1) 250 l
Steel pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
P099 PACKING INSTRUCTION P099
Only packagings which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used. A copy of the competent
authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the
packaging was approved by the competent authority.
P101 PACKING INSTRUCTION P101
Only packagings which are approved by the competent authority of the country of origin may be used. If the country
of origin is not a Contracting Party to the ADR, the packaging shall be approved by the competent authority of the first
country Contracting Party to ADR reached by the consignment. The distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international
road traffica of the country for which the authority acts, shall be marked on the transport documents as follows:
“Packaging approved by the competent authority of…” (see 5.4.1.2.1 (e))
a Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
P110(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION P110(a)
(Reserved)
NOTE: This packing instruction in the UN Model Regulations is not admitted for carriage under ADR.
– 46 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 47 –
P110(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION P110(b)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Receptacles
metal
wood
rubber, conductive
plastics, conductive
Bags
rubber, conductive
plastics, conductive
Dividing partitions
metal
wood
plastics
fibreboard
Boxes
natural wood, sift-proof wall (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
Special packing provision:
PP42 For UN Nos. 0074, 0113, 0114, 0129, 0130, 0135 and 0224, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) Inner packagings shall not contain more than 50 g of explosive substance (quantity corresponding to
dry substance);
(b) Compartments between dividing partitions shall not contain more than one inner packaging, firmly
fitted; and
(c) The outer packaging may be partitioned into up to 25 compartments.
P111 PACKING INSTRUCTION P111
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, waterproofed
plastics
textile, rubberized
Receptacles
wood
Sheets
plastics
textile, rubberized
Not necessary Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP43 For UN 0159, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics
(1H1 or 1H2) drums are used as outer packagings.
– 47 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 48 –
P112(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Solid wetted, 1.1D)
P112(a)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, multiwall, water resistant
plastics
textile
textile, rubberized
woven plastics
Receptacles
metal
plastics
wood
Bags
plastics
textile, plastic coated
or lined
Receptacles
metal
plastics
wood
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirement:
Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as the outer packaging.
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0219 and 0394, packagings shall be lead free.
PP45 For UN Nos. 0072 and 0226, intermediate packagings are not required.
– 48 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 49 –
P112(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Solid dry, other than powder 1.1D)
P112(b)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, kraft
paper, multiwall, water resistant
plastics
textile
textile, rubberized
woven plastics
Bags (for UN No. 0150 only)
plastics
textile, plastic coated
or lined
Bags
woven plastics, sift-proof (5H2)
woven plastics, water-resistant (5H3)
plastics, film (5H4)
textile, sift-proof (5L2)
textile, water resistant (5L3)
paper, multiwall, water
resistant (5M2)
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings shall be lead free.
PP46 For UN Nos. 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a
maximum net mass of 30 kg.
PP47 For UN No. 0222, inner packagings are not required when the outer packaging is a bag.
– 49 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 50 –
P112(c) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Solid dry powder 1.1D)
P112(c)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, multiwall, water resistant
plastics
woven plastics
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Bags
paper, multiwall, water
resistant with inner
lining
plastics
Receptacles
metal
plastics
wood
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirements:
1. Inner packagings are not required if drums are used as the outer packaging.
2. The packaging shall be sift-proof.
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154, 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings shall be lead free.
PP46 For UN No. 0209, bags, sift-proof (5H2) are recommended for flake or prilled TNT in the dry state and a
maximum net mass of 30 kg.
PP48 For UN No. 0504, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small amount of
metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not considered
metal packagings.
– 50 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 51 –
P113 PACKING INSTRUCTION P113
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper
plastics
textile, rubberized
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Not necessary Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirement:
The packaging shall be sift-proof.
Special packing provisions:
PP49 For UN Nos. 0094 and 0305, no more than 50 g of substance shall be packed in an inner packaging.
PP50 For UN No. 0027, inner packagings are not necessary when drums are used as outer packagings.
PP51 For UN No. 0028, paper kraft or waxed paper sheets may be used as inner packagings.
– 51 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 52 –
P114(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Solid wetted)
P114(a)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
plastics
textile
woven plastics
Receptacles
metal
plastics
wood
Bags
plastics
textile, plastic coated
or lined
Receptacles
metal
plastics
Dividing partitions
wood
Boxes
steel (4A)
metal, other than steel or aluminium (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
Plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirement:
Intermediate packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums are used as outer packagings.
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings shall be lead free.
PP43 For UN 0342, inner packagings are not required when metal (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) or plastics
(1H1 or 1H2) drums are used as outer packagings.
– 52 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 53 –
P114(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Solid dry)
P114(b)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, kraft
plastics
textile, sift-proof
woven plastics, sift-proof
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
paper
plastics
woven plastics, sift-proof
wood
Not necessary Boxes
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP26 For UN Nos. 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235 and 0236, packagings shall be lead free.
PP48 For UN Nos. 0508 and 0509, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small
amount of metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not
considered metal packagings.
PP50 For UN Nos. 0160, 0161 and 0508, inner packagings are not necessary if drums are used as outer packagings.
PP52 For UN Nos. 0160 and 0161, when metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) are used as outer
packagings, metal packagings shall be so constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increased internal
pressure from internal or external causes is prevented.
– 53 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 54 –
P115 PACKING INSTRUCTION P115
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Receptacles
plastics
wood
Bags
plastics in metal
receptacles
Drums
metal
Receptacles
wood
Boxes
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP45 For UN No. 0144, intermediate packagings are not required.
PP53 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when boxes are used as outer packagings, inner packagings shall
have taped screw cap closures and be not more than 5 litres capacity each. Inner packagings shall be
surrounded with non-combustible absorbent cushioning materials. The amount of absorbent cushioning
material shall be sufficient to absorb the liquid contents. Metal receptacles shall be cushioned from each other.
Net mass of propellant is limited to 30 kg for each package when outer packagings are boxes.
PP54 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, when drums are used as outer packagings and when intermediate
packagings are drums, they shall be surrounded with non-combustible cushioning material in a quantity
sufficient to absorb the liquid contents. A composite packaging consisting of a plastics receptacle in a metal
drum may be used instead of the inner and intermediate packagings. The net volume of propellant in each
package shall not exceed 120 litres.
PP55 For UN No. 0144, absorbent cushioning material shall be inserted.
PP56 For UN No. 0144, metal receptacles may be used as inner packagings.
PP57 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, bags shall be used as intermediate packagings when boxes are used
as outer packagings.
PP58 For UN Nos. 0075, 0143, 0495 and 0497, drums shall be used as intermediate packagings when drums are
used as outer packagings.
PP59 For UN No. 0144, fibreboard boxes (4G) may be used as outer packagings.
PP60 For UN No. 0144, aluminium drums (1B1 and 1B2) and metal, other than steel or aluminium, drums (1N1
and 1N2) shall not be used.
– 54 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 55 –
P116 PACKING INSTRUCTION P116
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
Bags
paper, water and oil
resistant
plastics
textile, plastic coated or lined
woven plastics, sift-proof
Receptacles
fibreboard, water resistant
metal
plastics
wood, sift-proof
Sheets
paper, water resistant
paper, waxed
plastics
Not necessary Bags
woven plastics (5H1, 5H2, 5H3)
paper, multiwall, water
resistant (5M2)
plastics, film (5H4)
textile, sift-proof (5L2)
textile, water resistant (5L3)
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls
(4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2)
plastics (3H1, 3H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP61 For UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not required if leakproof removable head drums
are used as outer packagings.
PP62 For UN Nos. 0082, 0241, 0331 and 0332, inner packagings are not required when the explosive is contained in
a material impervious to liquid.
PP63 For UN No. 0081, inner packagings are not required when contained in rigid plastic which is impervious to nitric
esters.
PP64 For UN No. 0331, inner packagings are not required when bags (5H2), (5H3) or (5H4) are used as outer
packagings.
PP65 (Deleted)
PP66 For UN No. 0081, bags shall not be used as outer packagings.
– 55 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 56 –
P130 PACKING INSTRUCTION P130
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Not necessary
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP67 The following applies to UN Nos. 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048,
0056, 0137, 0138, 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280,
0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363,
0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488, 0502 and 0510:
Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or
with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be carried unpackaged.
When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected
against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of carriage. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an
unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for carriage unpackaged. Such unpackaged
articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
– 56 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 57 –
P131 PACKING INSTRUCTION P131
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
paper
plastics
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Reels
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP68 For UN Nos. 0029, 0267 and 0455, bags and reels shall not be used as inner packagings.
P132(a) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Articles consisting of closed metal, plastics or fibreboard casings that contain a
detonating explosive, or consisting of plastics-bonded detonating explosives)
P132(a)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Not necessary
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
wood, natural, ordinary (4C1)
wood, natural, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
– 57 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 58 –
P132(b) PACKING INSTRUCTION
(Articles without closed casings)
P132(b)
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Sheets
paper
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
P133 PACKING INSTRUCTION P133
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Trays, fitted with dividing
partitions
fibreboard
plastics
wood
Intermediate packagings
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Additional requirement:
Receptacles are only required as intermediate packagings when the inner packagings are trays.
Special packing provision:
PP69 For UN Nos. 0043, 0212, 0225, 0268 and 0306, trays shall not be used as inner packagings.
– 58 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 59 –
P134 PACKING INSTRUCTION P134
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
water resistant
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Sheets
fibreboard, corrugated
Tubes
fibreboard
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
P135 PACKING INSTRUCTION P135
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
paper
plastics
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Sheets
paper
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
– 59 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 60 –
P136 PACKING INSTRUCTION P136
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
plastics
textile
Boxes
fibreboard
plastics
wood
Dividing partitions in the outer
packagings
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
P137 PACKING INSTRUCTION P137
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
plastics
Boxes
Fibreboard
wood
Tubes
fibreboard
metal
plastics
Dividing partitions in the outer
packagings
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP70 For UN Nos. 0059, 0439, 0440 and 0441, when the shaped charges are packed singly, the conical cavity shall
face downwards and the package shall be marked as illustrated in figures 5.2.1.10.1.1 or 5.2.1.10.1.2. When the
shaped charges are packed in pairs, the conical cavities shall face inwards to minimize the jetting effect in the
event of accidental initiation.
– 60 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 61 –
P138 PACKING INSTRUCTION P138
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirement:
If the ends of the articles are sealed, inner packagings are not necessary.
P139 PACKING INSTRUCTION P139
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
plastics
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Reels
Sheets
paper
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP71 For UN Nos. 0065, 0102, 0104, 0289 and 0290, the ends of the detonating cord shall be sealed, for example,
by a plug firmly fixed so that the explosive cannot escape. The ends of flexible detonating cord shall be fastened
securely.
PP72 For UN Nos. 0065 and 0289, inner packagings are not required when they are in coils.
– 61 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 62 –
P140 PACKING INSTRUCTION P140
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
Plastics
Receptacles
wood
Reels
Sheets
paper, kraft
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provisions:
PP73 For UN No. 0105, no inner packagings are required if the ends are sealed.
PP74 For UN No. 0101, the packaging shall be sift-proof except when the fuse is covered by a paper tube and both
ends of the tube are covered with removable caps.
PP75 For UN No. 0101, steel, aluminium or other metal boxes or drums shall not be used.
P141 PACKING INSTRUCTION P141
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Trays, fitted with dividing
partitions
plastics
wood
Dividing partitions in the outer
packagings
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
– 62 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 63 –
P142 PACKING INSTRUCTION P142
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
paper
plastics
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Sheets
paper
Trays, fitted with dividing
partitions
plastics
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
P143 PACKING INSTRUCTION P143
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Bags
paper, kraft
plastics
textile
textile, rubberized
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
Plastics
wood
Trays, fitted with dividing
partitions
plastics
wood
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary (4C1)
natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2)
plywood (4D)
reconstituted wood (4F)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Additional requirement:
Instead of the above inner and outer packagings, composite packagings (6HH2) (plastics receptacle with outer solid
plastics box) may be used.
Special packing provision:
PP76 For UN Nos. 0271, 0272, 0415 and 0491, when metal packagings are used, metal packagings shall be so
constructed that the risk of explosion, by reason of increase in internal pressure from internal or external causes
is prevented.
– 63 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 64 –
P144 PACKING INSTRUCTION P144
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general packing provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.3 and special packing
provisions of 4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
Plastics
wood
Dividing partitions in the outer
packagings
Intermediate packagings
Not necessary
Outer packagings
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
natural wood, ordinary with metal liner
(4C1)
plywood (4D) with metal liner
reconstituted wood (4F) with metal liner
plastics, expanded (4H1)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2)
aluminium (1B1, 1B2)
other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
Special packing provision:
PP77 For UN Nos. 0248 and 0249, packagings shall be protected against the ingress of water. When water-activated
contrivances are transported unpackaged, they shall be provided with at least two independent protective
features which prevent the ingress of water.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
– 64 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 65 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION P200
Type of packagings: Cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders
Cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders are authorised provided the special packing provisions of
4.1.6, the provisions listed below under (1) to (9) and, when referred to in the column “Special packing provisions” of
tables 1, 2 or 3, the relevant special packing provisions listed below under (10), are met.
General
(1) Pressure receptacles shall be so closed and leakproof as to prevent escape of the gases.
(2) Pressure receptacles containing toxic substances with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³ (ppm) as specified
in the table shall not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Pressure relief devices shall be fitted on UN
pressure receptacles used for the carriage of UN No. 1013 carbon dioxide and UN No. 1070 nitrous oxide.
(3) The following three tables cover compressed gases (Table 1), liquefied and dissolved gases (Table 2) and
substances not in Class 2 (Table 3). They provide:
(a) the UN number, name and description, and the classification code of the substance;
(b) the LC₅₀ for toxic substances;
(c) the types of pressure receptacles authorised for the substance, shown by the letter “X”;
(d) the maximum test period for periodic inspection of the pressure receptacles;
NOTE: For pressure receptacles which make use of composite materials, the maximum test period
shall be 5 years. The test period may be extended to that specified in Tables 1 and 2 (i.e. up to 10 years),
if approved by the competent authority or body designated by this authority which issued the type
approval.
(e) the minimum test pressure of the pressure receptacles;
(f) the maximum working pressure of the pressure receptacles for compressed gases (where no value is
given, the working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure) or the maximum filling
ratio(s) dependent on the test pressure(s) for liquefied and dissolved gases;
(g) special packing provisions that are specific to a substance.
Test pressure, filling ratios and filling requirements
(4) The minimum test pressure required for is 1 MPa (10 bar).
(5) In no case shall pressure receptacles be filled in excess of the limit permitted in the following requirements:
(a) For compressed gases, the working pressure shall be not more than two thirds of the test pressure of the
pressure receptacles. Restrictions to this upper limit on working pressure are imposed by (10), special
packing provision “o”. In no case shall the internal pressure at 65 °C exceed the test pressure.
(b) For high pressure liquefied gases, the filling ratio shall be such that the settled pressure at 65 °C does
not exceed the test pressure of the pressure receptacles.
The use of test pressures and filling ratios other than those in the table is permitted, except where (10),
special packing provision “o” applies, provided that:
(i) the criterion of (10), special packing provision “r” is met when applicable; or
(ii) the above criterion is met in all other cases.
For high pressure liquefied gases and gas mixtures for which relevant data are not available, the
maximum filling ratio (FR) shall be determined as follows:
FR = 8.5 10 -4 d g P h
where FR = maximum filling ratio
d g = gas density (at 15 °C, 1 bar)(in kg/m³)
P h = minimum test pressure (in bar).
(Cont’d on next page)
– 65 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 66 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
If the density of the gas is unknown, the maximum filling ratio shall be determined as follows:
338
10 3
R
MMP
FR h
where FR = maximum filling ratio
P h = minimum test pressure (in bar)
MM = molecular mass (in g/mol)
R = 8.31451 10 -2 bar.l.mol-1 .K -1 (gas constant).
For gas mixtures, the average molecular mass is to be taken, taking into account the volumetric
concentrations of the various components.
(c) For low pressure liquefied gases, the maximum mass of contents per litre of water capacity shall
equal 0.95 times the density of the liquid phase at 50 °C; in addition, the liquid phase shall not fill
the pressure receptacle at any temperature up to 60 °C. The test pressure of the pressure receptacle
shall be at least equal to the vapour pressure (absolute) of the liquid at 65 °C, minus 100 kPa (1 bar).
For low pressure liquefied gases and gas mixtures for which relevant data are not available, the
maximum filling ratio shall be determined as follows:
FR = (0.0032 BP – 0.24) d 1
where FR = maximum filling ratio
BP = boiling point (in Kelvin)
d 1 = density of the liquid at boiling point (in kg/l).
(d) For UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, see (10), special
packing provision “p”.
(e) For liquefied gases charged with compressed gases, both components – the liquefied gas and the
compressed gas – have to be taken into consideration in the calculation of the internal pressure in the
pressure receptacle.
The maximum mass of contents per litre of water capacity shall not exceed 0.95 times the density of
the liquid phase at 50 °C; in addition, the liquid phase shall not completely fill the pressure receptacle
at any temperature up to 60 °C.
When filled, the internal pressure at 65 °C shall not exceed the test pressure of the pressure
receptacles. The vapour pressures and volumetric expansions of all substances in the pressure
receptacles shall be considered. When experimental data is not available, the following steps shall be
carried out:
(i) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas and of the partial pressure of the
compressed gas at 15 °C (filling temperature);
(ii) Calculation of the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase resulting from the heating from
15 °C to 65 °C and calculation of the remaining volume for the gaseous phase;
(iii) Calculation of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65 °C considering the volumetric
expansion of the liquid phase;
NOTE: The compressibility factor of the compressed gas at 15 °C and 65 °C shall be
considered.
(iv) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas at 65 °C;
(v) The total pressure is the sum of the vapour pressure of the liquefied gas and the partial
pressure of the compressed gas at 65 °C;
(vi) Consideration of the solubility of the compressed gas at 65 °C in the liquid phase;
The test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be less than the calculated total pressure minus
100 kPa (1bar).
If the solubility of the compressed gas in the liquid phase is not known for the calculation, the test
pressure can be calculated without taking the gas solubility (sub-paragraph (vi)) into account.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 66 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 67 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
(6) Other test pressure and filling ratio may be used provided they satisfy the general requirements outlined in
paragraphs (4) and (5) above.
(7) (a) The filling of pressure receptacles may only be carried out by specially-equipped centres, with qualified
staff using appropriate procedures.
The procedures should include checks:
– of the conformity of receptacles and accessories with ADR;
– of their compatibility with the product to be carried;
– of the absence of damage which might affect safety;
– of compliance with the degree or pressure of filling, as appropriate;
– of marks and identification.
(b) LPG to be filled in cylinders shall be of high quality; this is deemed to be fulfilled if the LPG to be filled
is in compliance with the limitations on corrosiveness as specified in ISO 9162:1989.
Periodic inspections
(8) Refillable pressure receptacles shall be subjected to periodic inspections in accordance with the requirements
of 6.2.1.6 and 6.2.3.5 respectively.
(9) If special provisions for certain substances do not appear in the tables below, periodic inspections shall be
carried out:
(a) Every 5 years in the case of pressure receptacles intended for the carriage of gases of classification codes
1T, 1TF, 1TO, 1TC, 1TFC, 1TOC, 2T, 2TO, 2TF, 2TC, 2TFC, 2TOC, 4A, 4F and 4TC;
(b) Every 5 years in the case of pressure receptacles intended for the carriage of substances from other
classes;
(c) Every 10 years in the case of pressure receptacles intended for the carriage of gases of classification
codes 1A, 1O, 1F, 2A, 2O and 2F.
For pressure receptacles which make use of composite materials, the maximum test period shall be 5 years. The
test period may be extended to that specified in Tables 1 and 2 (i.e. up to 10 years), if approved by the competent
authority or body designated by this authority which issued the type approval.
Special packing provisions
(10) Material compatibility
a: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles shall not be used.
b: Copper valves shall not be used.
c: Metal parts in contact with the contents shall not contain more than 65 % copper.
d: When steel pressure receptacles or composite pressure receptacles with steel liners are used, only those
bearing the “H” mark in accordance with 6.2.2.7.4 (p) are permitted.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 67 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 68 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Requirements for toxic substances with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³ (ppm)
k: Valve outlets shall be fitted with pressure retaining gas-tight plugs or caps having threads that match
those of the valve outlets and made of material not liable to attack by the contents of the pressure
receptacle.
Each cylinder within a bundle shall be fitted with an individual valve that shall be closed during carriage.
After filling, the manifold shall be evacuated, purged and plugged.
Bundles containing UN 1045 Fluorine, compressed, may be constructed with isolation valves on groups
of cylinders not exceeding 150 litres total water capacity instead of isolation valves on every cylinder.
Cylinders and individual cylinders within a bundle shall have a test pressure greater than or equal to 200
bar and a minimum wall thickness of 3.5 mm for aluminium alloy or 2 mm for steel. Individual cylinders
not complying with this requirement shall be carried in a rigid outer packaging that will adequately
protect the cylinder and its fittings and meeting the packing group I performance level. Pressure drums
shall have a minimum wall thickness as specified by the competent authority.
Pressure receptacles shall not be fitted with a pressure relief device.
Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall be limited to a maximum water capacity of 85 litres.
Each valve shall be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle and be connected
directly to the pressure receptacle by either a taper thread or other means which meets the requirements
of ISO 10692-2:2001.
Each valve shall either be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, or be of a type which
prevents leakage through or past the packing.
Carriage in capsules is not allowed.
Each pressure receptacle shall be tested for leakage after filling.
Gas specific provisions
l: UN No. 1040 ethylene oxide may also be packed in hermetically sealed glass or metal inner packagings
suitably cushioned in fibreboard, wooden or metal boxes meeting the packing group I performance level.
The maximum quantity permitted in any glass inner packaging is 30 g, and the maximum quantity
permitted in any metal inner packaging is 200 g. After filling, each inner packaging shall be determined
to be leak-tight by placing the inner packaging in a hot water bath at a temperature, and for a period of
time, sufficient to ensure that an internal pressure equal to the vapour pressure of ethylene oxide at 55 °C
is achieved. The maximum net mass in any outer packaging shall not exceed 2.5 kg.
m: Pressure receptacles shall be filled to a working pressure not exceeding 5 bar.
n: Cylinders and individual cylinders in a bundle shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas. When bundles
containing UN 1045 Fluorine, compressed are divided into groups of cylinders in accordance with
special packing provision “k” each group shall contain not more than 5 kg of the gas.
o: In no case shall the working pressure or filling ratio shown in the tables be exceeded.
p: For UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free: cylinders shall be
filled with a homogeneous monolithic porous material; the working pressure and the quantity of
acetylene shall not exceed the values prescribed in the approval or in ISO 3807-1:2000, ISO 3807-
2:2000 or ISO 3807:2013, as applicable.
For UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved: cylinders shall contain a quantity of acetone or suitable solvent
as specified in the approval (see ISO 3807-1:2000, ISO 3807-2:2000 or ISO 3807:2013 as applicable);
cylinders fitted with pressure relief devices or manifolded together shall be carried vertically.
Alternatively, for UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved: cylinders which are not UN pressure receptacles
may be filled with a non monolithic porous material; the working pressure, the quantity of acetylene and
the quantity of solvent shall not exceed the values prescribed in the approval. The maximum test period
for periodic inspection of the cylinders shall not exceed five years.
A test pressure of 52 bar shall be applied only to cylinders fitted with a fusible plug.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 68 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 69 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
q: Valve outlets of pressure receptacles for pyrophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing
more than 1 % of pyrophoric compounds shall be fitted with gas-tight plugs or caps which shall be made
of material not liable to attack by the contents of the pressure receptacle. When these pressure receptacles
are manifolded in a bundle, each of the pressure receptacles shall be fitted with an individual valve that
shall be closed during carriage, and the outlet of the manifold valve shall be fitted with a pressure
retaining gas-tight plug or cap. Gas-tight plugs or caps shall have threads that match those of the valve
outlets. Carriage in capsules is not allowed.
r: The filling ratio of this gas shall be limited such that, if complete decomposition occurs, the pressure
does not exceed two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle.
ra: This gas may also be packed in capsules under the following conditions:
(a) The mass of gas shall not exceed 150 g per capsule;
(b) The capsules shall be free from faults liable to impair the strength;
(c) The leakproofness of the closure shall be ensured by an additional device (cap, crown, seal,
binding, etc.) capable of preventing any leakage of the closure during carriage;
(d) The capsules shall be placed in an outer packaging of sufficient strength. A package shall not
weigh more than 75 kg.
s: Aluminium alloy pressure receptacles shall be:
– Equipped only with brass or stainless steel valves; and
– Cleaned for hydrocarbons contamination and not contaminated with oil. UN pressure receptacles
shall be cleaned in accordance with ISO 11621:1997.
ta: Other criteria may be used for filling of welded steel cylinders intended for the carriage of substances
of UN No. 1965:
(a) with the agreement of the competent authorities of the countries where the carriage is carried out;
and
(b) in compliance with the provisions of a national code or standard recognised by the competent
authorities.
When the criteria for filling are different from those in P200(5), the transport document shall include
the statement “Carriage in accordance with packing instruction P200, special packing provision ta” and
the indication of the reference temperature used for the calculation of the filling ratio.
Periodic inspection
u: The interval between periodic tests may be extended to 10 years for aluminium alloy pressure
receptacles. This derogation may only be applied to UN pressure receptacles when the alloy of the
pressure receptacle has been subjected to stress corrosion testing as specified in ISO 7866:2012 + Cor
1: 2014.
ua: The interval between periodic tests may be extended to 15 years for aluminium alloy cylinders and
bundles of such cylinders if the provisions of paragraph (13) of this packing instruction are applied. This
shall not apply to cylinders made from aluminium alloy AA 6351. For mixtures, this provision “ua” may
be applied provided all the individual gases in the mixture have been allocated “ua” in Table 1 or Table
2.
v: (1) The interval between inspections for steel cylinders, other than refillable welded steel
cylinders for UN Nos. 1011, 1075, 1965, 1969 or 1978, may be extended to 15 years:
(a) with the agreement of the competent authority (authorities) of the country (countries)
where the periodic inspection and the carriage take place; and
(b) in accordance with the requirements of a technical code or a standard recognised by the
competent authority
(2) For refillable welded steel cylinders for UN Nos. 1011, 1075, 1965, 1969 or 1978, the interval
may be extended to 15 years, if the provisions of paragraph (12) of this packing instruction are
applied.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 69 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 70 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
va: For seamless steel cylinders which are equipped with residual pressure valves (RPVs) (see note below)
that have been designed and tested in accordance with EN ISO 15996:2005 + A1:2007 or EN ISO
15996:2017 and for bundles of seamless steel cylinders equipped with main valve(s) with a residual
pressure device, tested in accordance with EN ISO 15996:2005 + A1:2007 or EN ISO 15996:2017, the
interval between periodic tests may be extended to 15 years if the provisions of paragraph (13) of this
packing instruction are applied. For mixtures, this provision “va” may be applied provided all the
individual gases in the mixture have been allocated “va” in Table 1 or Table 2.
NOTE: “Residual Pressure Valve” (RPV) means a closure which incorporates a residual pressure
device that prevents ingress of contaminants by maintaining a positive differential between the pressure
within the cylinder and the valve outlet. In order to prevent back-flow of fluids into the cylinder from a
higher pressure source a “Non-Return Valve” (NRV) function shall either be incorporated into the
residual pressure device or be a discrete additional device in the cylinder valve, e.g. a regulator.
Requirements for N.O.S. entries and for mixtures
z: The construction materials of the pressure receptacles and their accessories shall be compatible with the
contents and shall not react to form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith.
The test pressure and filling ratio shall be calculated in accordance with the relevant requirements of
(5).
Toxic substances with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³ shall not be carried in tubes, pressure
drums or MEGCs and shall meet the requirements of special packing provision “k”. However, UN 1975
Nitric oxide and dinitrogen tetroxide mixture may be carried in pressure drums.
For pressure receptacles containing pyrophoric gases or flammable mixtures of gases containing more
than 1 % pyrophoric compounds, the requirements of special packing provision “q” shall be met.
The necessary steps shall be taken to prevent dangerous reactions (i.e. polymerisation or decomposition)
during carriage. If necessary, stabilisation or addition of an inhibitor shall be required.
Mixtures containing UN No. 1911 diborane, shall be filled to a pressure such that, if complete
decomposition of the diborane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not
be exceeded.
Mixtures containing UN 2192 germane, other than mixtures of up to 35 % germane in hydrogen or
nitrogen or up to 28 % germane in helium or argon, shall be filled to a pressure such that, if complete
decomposition of the germane occurs, two thirds of the test pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not
be exceeded.
Mixtures of fluorine and nitrogen with a fluorine concentration below 35 % by volume may be filled in
pressure receptacles up to a maximum allowable working pressure for which the partial pressure of
fluorine does not exceed 3.1 MPa (31 bar) absolute.
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑝𝑝𝑤𝑤𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑤𝑤𝑝𝑝 �bar� � 31
𝑥𝑥�
� 1
in which xf = fluorine concentration in % by volume/100.
Mixtures of fluorine and inert gases with a fluorine concentration below 35 % by volume may be filled
in pressure receptacles up to a maximum allowable working pressure for which the partial pressure of
fluorine does not exceed 3.1 MPa (31 bar) absolute, additionally taking the coefficient of nitrogen
equivalency in accordance with ISO 10156:2017 into account when calculating the partial pressure.
𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑝𝑝𝑤𝑤𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑤𝑤𝑝𝑝 �bar� � 31
𝑥𝑥�
�𝑥𝑥� � �� � 𝑥𝑥� � � 1
where xf = fluorine concentration in % by volume/100;
Kk = coefficient of equivalency of an inert gas relative to nitrogen (coefficient of nitrogen
equivalency);
xk = inert gas concentration in % by volume/100.
However, the working pressure for mixtures of fluorine and inert gases shall not exceed 20 MPa (200
bar). The minimum test pressure of pressure receptacles for mixtures of fluorine and inert gases equals
1.5 times the working pressure or 20 MPa (200 bar), with the greater value to be applied.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 70 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 71 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Requirements for substances not in Class 2
ab: Pressure receptacles shall satisfy the following conditions:
(i) The pressure test shall include an inspection of the inside of the pressure receptacles and check
of accessories;
(ii) In addition resistance to corrosion shall be checked every two years by means of suitable
instruments (e.g. ultrasound) and the condition of the accessories verified;
(iii) Wall thickness shall not be less than 3 mm.
ac: Tests and inspections shall be carried out under the supervision of an expert approved by the competent
authority.
ad: Pressure receptacles shall satisfy the following conditions:
(i) Pressure receptacles shall be designed for a design pressure of not less than 2.1 MPa (21 bar)
(gauge pressure);
(ii) In addition to the marks for refillable receptacles, the pressure receptacles shall bear the following
particulars in clearly legible and durable characters:
– The UN number and the proper shipping name of the substance according to 3.1.2;
– The maximum permitted mass when filled and the tare of the pressure receptacle, including
accessories fitted during filling, or the gross mass.
(11) The applicable requirements of this packing instruction are considered to have been complied with if the
following standards, as relevant, are applied:
Applicable
requirements Reference Title of document
(7) EN 13365:2002
+A1:2005
Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles for permanent and
liquefied gases (excluding acetylene) – Inspection at the time of
filling
(7) EN ISO
24431:2016
Gas cylinders – Seamless, welded and composite cylinders for
compressed and liquefied gases (excluding acetylene) – Inspection at
time of filling
(7) (a) ISO 10691:2004 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders for liquefied
petroleum gas (LPG) – Procedures for checking before, during and
after filling.
(7) (a) ISO 11755:2005 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles for compressed and liquefied gases
(excluding acetylene) – Inspection at time of filling
(7) (a) and (10)
p
EN ISO
11372:2011
Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Filling conditions and filling
inspection
(7) (a) and (10)
p
EN ISO
13088:2011
Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinder bundles – Filling conditions and
filling inspection
(7) and (10) ta
(b)
EN 1439:2021 LPG equipment and accessories – Procedure for checking
transportable refillable LPG cylinders before, during and after filling
(7) and (10) ta
(b)
EN 13952:2017 LPG equipment and accessories – Filling operations for LPG
cylinders
(7) and (10) ta
(b)
EN 14794:2005 LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable aluminium
cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) – Procedure for checking
before, during and after filling
(12) An interval of 15 years for the periodic inspection of refillable welded steel cylinders may be granted in
accordance with special packing provision v (2) of paragraph (10), if the following provisions are applied.
1. General provisions
1.1 For the application of this section, the competent authority shall not delegate its tasks and duties
to Xb bodies (inspection bodies of type B) or IS (in-house inspection services) (for the definitions of Xb
and IS, see 6.2.3.6.1).
1.2 The owner of the cylinders shall apply to the competent authority for granting the 15 year interval,
and shall demonstrate that the requirements of sub-paragraphs 2, 3 and 4 are met.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 71 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 72 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
1.3 Cylinders manufactured since 1 January 1999 shall have been manufactured in conformity with
the following standards:
– EN 1442; or
– EN 13322-1; or
– Annex I, parts 1 to 3 to Council Directive 84/527/EECa
as applicable according to the table in 6.2.4.
Other cylinders manufactured before 1 January 2009 in conformity with ADR in accordance with a
technical code accepted by the national competent authority may be accepted for a 15 year interval, if
they are of equivalent safety to the provisions of ADR as applicable at the time of application.
1.4 The owner shall submit documentary evidence to the competent authority demonstrating that the
cylinders comply with the provisions of sub-paragraph 1.3. The competent authority shall verify that
these conditions are met.
1.5 The competent authority shall check whether the provisions of sub-paragraphs 2 and 3 are
fulfilled and correctly applied. If all provisions are fulfilled, it shall authorise the 15-year interval for the
cylinders. In this authorisation, the type of cylinder (as specified in the type approval) or a group of
cylinders (see Note) covered shall be clearly identified. The authorisation shall be delivered to the owner;
the competent authority shall keep a copy. The owner shall keep the documents for as long as the
cylinders are authorised for a 15 year interval.
NOTE: A group of cylinders is defined by the production dates of identical cylinders for a period,
during which the applicable provisions of ADR and of the technical code accepted by the competent
authority have not changed in their technical content. Example: Cylinders of identical design and volume
having been manufactured according to the provisions of ADR as applicable between 1 January 1985
and 31 December 1988 in combination with a technical code accepted by the competent authority
applicable for the same period, form one group in terms of the provisions of this paragraph.
1.6 The competent authority shall monitor the owner of the cylinders for compliance with the
provisions of ADR and the authorisation given as appropriate, but at least every three years or when
changes to the procedures are introduced.
2. Operational provisions
2.1 Cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection shall only be filled in
filling centres applying a documented quality system to ensure that all the provisions of paragraph (7) of
this packing instruction and the requirements and responsibilities of EN 1439:2021 (or until 31
December 2024, EN 1439:2017) and EN 13952:2017 are fulfilled and correctly applied.
2.2 The competent authority shall verify that these requirements are fulfilled and check this as
appropriate, but at least every three years or when changes to the procedures are introduced.
2.3 The owner shall provide documentary evidence to the competent authority that the filling centre
complies with the provisions of sub-paragraph 2.1.
2.4 If a filling centre is situated in a different Contracting Party to ADR, the owner shall provide
additional documentary evidence that the filling centre is monitored accordingly by the competent
authority of that Contracting Party to ADR.
2.5 To prevent internal corrosion, only gases of high quality with very low potential contamination
shall be filled into the cylinders. This is deemed to be fulfilled, if the gases conform to the limitations on
corrosiveness as specified in ISO 9162:1989.
3. Provisions for qualification and periodic inspection
3.1 Cylinders of a type or group already in use, for which a 15 year interval has been granted and to
which the 15 year interval has been applied, shall be subject to a periodic inspection according to 6.2.3.5.
NOTE: For the definition of a group of cylinders, see Note to sub-paragraph 1.5.
3.2 If a cylinder with a 15-year interval fails the hydraulic pressure test during a periodic inspection
e.g. by bursting or leakage, the owner shall investigate and produce a report on the cause of the failure
and if other cylinders (e.g. of the same type or group) are affected. In the latter case, the owner shall
inform the competent authority. The competent authority shall then decide on appropriate measures and
inform the competent authorities of all other Contracting Parties to ADR accordingly.
(Cont’d on next page)
a Council directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to welded unalloyed steel gas
cylinders, published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19.11.1984.
– 72 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 73 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
3.3 If internal corrosion as defined in the standard applied (see sub-paragraph 1.3) has been detected,
the cylinder shall be withdrawn from use and shall not be granted any further period for filling and
carriage.
3.4 Cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval shall only be fitted with valves designed and
manufactured for a minimum 15 year period of use according to EN 13152:2001 + A1:2003,
EN 13153:2001 + A1:2003, EN ISO 14245:2010, EN ISO 14245:2019, EN ISO 14245:2021,
EN ISO 15995:2010, EN ISO 15995:2019 or EN ISO 15995:2021. After a periodic inspection, a new
valve shall be fitted to the cylinder, except that manually operated valves, which have been refurbished
or inspected according to EN 14912:2022 may be re-fitted, if they are suitable for another 15 year period
of use. Refurbishment or inspection shall only be carried out by the manufacturer of the valves or
according to his technical instruction by an enterprise qualified for such work and operating under a
documented quality system.
4. Marking
Cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection in accordance with this
paragraph shall additionally be marked clearly and legibly with “P15Y”. This mark shall be removed if
the cylinder is no longer authorised for a 15 year interval.
NOTE: This mark shall not apply to cylinders subject to the transitional provision in 1.6.2.9, 1.6.2.10
or the provisions of special packing provision v (1) of paragraph (10) of this packing instruction.
(13) An interval of 15 years for the periodic inspection of seamless steel and aluminium alloy cylinders and bundles
of such cylinders may be granted in accordance with special packing provisions ua or va of paragraph (10), if
the following provisions are applied:
1. General provisions
1.1 For the application of this paragraph, the competent authority shall not delegate its tasks and
duties to Xb bodies (inspection bodies of type B) or IS (in-house inspection services) (for the definitions
of Xb and IS, see 6.2.3.6.1).
1.2 The owner of the cylinders or bundles of cylinders shall apply to the competent authority for
granting the 15 year interval, and shall demonstrate that the requirements of sub-paragraphs 2, 3 and 4
are met.
1.3 Cylinders manufactured since 1 January 1999 shall have been manufactured in conformity with
one of the following standards:
– EN 1964-1 or EN 1964-2; or
– EN 1975; or
– EN ISO 9809-1 or EN ISO 9809-2; or
– EN ISO 7866; or
– Annex I, parts 1 to 3 to Council Directive 84/525/EECb and 84/526/EECc
as applicable at the time of manufacture (see also the table in 6.2.4.1).
Other cylinders manufactured before 1 January 2009 in conformity with ADR in accordance with a
technical code accepted by the national competent authority may be accepted for a 15 year interval for
periodic inspection, if they are of equivalent safety to the provisions of ADR as applicable at the time of
application.
NOTE: This provision is considered to be fulfilled if the cylinder has been reassessed according to the
procedure for the reassessment of conformity described in Annex III of Directive 2010/35/EU of 16 June
2010 or Annex IV, Part II, of Directive 1999/36/EC of 29 April 1999.
Cylinders and bundles of cylinders marked with the United Nations packaging symbol specified in
6.2.2.7.2 (a) shall not be granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection.
(Cont’d on next page)
b Council Directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to seamless, steel gas cylinders,
published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300 of 19.11.1984.
c Council Directive on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to seamless, unalloyed
aluminium and aluminium alloy gas cylinders, published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 300
of 19.11.1984.
– 73 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 74 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
1.4 Bundles of cylinders shall be constructed such that contact between cylinders along the
longitudinal axis of the cylinders does not result in external corrosion. The supports and restraining straps
shall be such as to minimise the risk of corrosion to the cylinders. Shock absorbent materials used in
supports shall only be allowed if they have been treated to eliminate water absorption. Examples of
suitable materials are water resistant belting and rubber.
1.5 The owner shall submit documentary evidence to the competent authority demonstrating that the
cylinders comply with the provisions of sub-paragraph 1.3. The competent authority shall verify that
these conditions are met.
1.6 The competent authority shall check whether the provisions of sub-paragraphs 2 and 3 are
fulfilled and correctly applied. If all provisions are fulfilled, it shall authorise the 15 year interval for
periodic inspection for the cylinders or bundles of cylinders. In this authorisation a group of cylinders
(see NOTE below) covered shall be clearly identified. The authorisation shall be delivered to the owner;
the competent authority shall keep a copy. The owner shall keep the documents for as long as the
cylinders are authorised for a 15 year interval.
NOTE: A group of cylinders is defined by the production dates of identical cylinders for a period,
during which the applicable provisions of ADR and of the technical code accepted by the competent
authority have not changed in their technical content. Example: Cylinders of identical design and volume
having been manufactured according to the provisions of ADR applicable between 1 January 1985 and
31 December 1988 in combination with a technical code accepted by the competent authority applicable
for the same period form one group in terms of the provisions of this paragraph.
1.7 The owner shall ensure compliance with the provisions of ADR and the authorisation given as
appropriate and shall demonstrate this to the competent authority on request but at least every three years
or when significant changes to the procedures are introduced.
2. Operational provisions
2.1 Cylinders or bundles of cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection
shall only be filled in filling centres applying a documented and certified quality system to ensure that
all the provisions of paragraph (7) of this packing instruction and the requirements and responsibilities
of EN ISO 24431:2016 or EN 13365:2002 as applicable are fulfilled and correctly applied. The quality
system, according to the ISO 9000 (series) or equivalent, shall be certified by an accredited independent
body recognized by the competent authority. This includes procedures for pre- and post-fill inspections
and the filling process for cylinders, bundles of cylinders and valves.
2.2 Aluminium alloy cylinders and bundles of such cylinders without RPVs having been granted a
15 year interval for periodic inspection shall be checked prior to every fill in accordance with a
documented procedure which shall at least include the following:
Open the cylinder valve or the main valve of the bundle of cylinders to check for residual
pressure;
If gas is emitted, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled;
If no gas is emitted, the internal condition of the cylinder or bundle of cylinders shall be checked
for contamination;
If no contamination is detected, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled.
If contamination is detected corrective action is to be carried out.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 74 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 75 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
2.3 Seamless steel cylinders fitted with RPVs and bundles of seamless steel cylinders equipped with
main valve(s) with a residual pressure device having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic
inspection shall be checked prior to every fill in accordance with a documented procedure which shall
at least include the following:
• Open the cylinder valve or bundle of cylinders main valve to check for residual pressure;
• If gas is emitted, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled;
• If no gas is emitted the functioning of the residual pressure device shall be checked;
• If the check shows that the residual pressure device has retained pressure the cylinder or bundle of
cylinders may be filled;
• If the check shows that the residual pressure device has not retained pressure, the internal condition
of the cylinder or bundle of cylinders shall be checked for contamination:
– If no contamination is detected, the cylinder or bundle of cylinders may be filled following
repair or replacement of the residual pressure device;
– If contamination is detected, a corrective action shall be carried out.
2.4 To prevent internal corrosion, only gases of high quality with very low potential contamination
shall be filled into cylinders or bundles of cylinders. This is deemed to be fulfilled, if the compatibility
of gases/material is acceptable in accordance with EN ISO 11114-1:2020 and EN ISO 11114-2:2013,
and the gas quality meets the specifications in EN ISO 14175:2008 or, for gases not covered in the
standard, a minimum purity of 99.5 % by volume and a maximum moisture content of 40 ml/m³(ppm).
For nitrous oxide the values shall be a minimum purity of 98 % by volume and a maximum moisture
content of 70 ml/m³ (ppm).
2.5 The owner shall ensure that the requirements of 2.1 to 2.4 are fulfilled and provide documentary
evidence of this to the competent authority on request, but at least every three years or when significant
changes to the procedures are introduced.
2.6 If a filling centre is situated in a different Contracting Party to ADR, the owner shall provide to
the competent authority, on request, additional documentary evidence that the filling centre is monitored
accordingly by the competent authority of that Contracting Party to ADR. See also 1.2.
3. Provisions for qualification and periodic inspection
3.1 Cylinders and bundles of cylinders already in use, for which the conditions of sub-paragraph 2
have been met from the date of the last periodic inspection to the satisfaction of the competent authority,
may have their inspection period extended to 15 years from the date of the last periodic inspection.
Otherwise the change of test period from ten to fifteen years shall be made at the time of periodic
inspection. The periodic inspection report shall indicate that this cylinder or bundle of cylinders shall be
fitted with a residual pressure device as appropriate. Other documentary evidence may be accepted by
the competent authority.
3.2 If a cylinder with a 15 year interval fails the pressure test by bursting or leakage or if a severe
defect is detected by a non-destructive test (NDT) during a periodic inspection the owner shall
investigate and produce a report on the cause of the failure and if other cylinders (e.g. of the same type
or group) are affected. In the latter case, the owner shall inform the competent authority. The competent
authority shall then decide on appropriate measures and inform the competent authorities of all other
Contracting Parties to ADR accordingly.
3.3 If internal corrosion and other defects as defined in the periodic inspection standards referenced
in 6.2.4 have been detected, the cylinder shall be withdrawn from use and shall not be granted any further
period for filling and carriage.
3.4 Cylinders or bundles of cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection
shall only be fitted with valves designed and tested according to EN 849 or EN ISO 10297 as applicable
at the time of manufacture (see also the table in 6.2.4.1). After a periodic inspection a new valve shall
be fitted, except that valves which have been refurbished or inspected according to
EN ISO 22434:2022 may be re-fitted.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 75 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 76 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
4. Marking
Cylinders and bundles of cylinders having been granted a 15 year interval for periodic inspection in
accordance with this paragraph shall have the date (year) of the next periodic inspection as required in
section 5.2.1.6 (c) and at the same time additionally be marked clearly and legibly with “P15Y”. This
mark shall be removed if the cylinder or bundle of cylinders is no longer authorised for a 15 year interval
for periodic inspection.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 76 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 77 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 1: COMPRESSED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar b
Maximum working
pressure, bar b
Special packing
provisions
1002 AIR, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1006 ARGON, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1016 CARBON MONOXIDE,
COMPRESSED
1TF 3760 X X X X 5 u
1023 COAL GAS, COMPRESSED 1TF X X X X 5
1045 FLUORINE, COMPRESSED 1TOC 185 X X 5 200 30 a, k,
n, o
1046 HELIUM, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1049 HYDROGEN, COMPRESSED 1F X X X X 10 d,
ua,
va
1056 KRYPTON, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1065 NEON, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1066 NITROGEN, COMPRESSED 1A X X X X 10 ua,
va
1071 OIL GAS, COMPRESSED 1TF X X X X 5
1072 OXYGEN, COMPRESSED 1O X X X X 10 s, ua,
va
1612 HEXAETHYL
TETRAPHOSPHATE AND
COMPRESSED GAS MIXTURE
1T X X X X 5 z
1660 NITRIC OXIDE, COMPRESSED 1TOC 115 X X 5 225 33 k, o
1953 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S.
1TF 5000 X X X X 5 z
1954 COMPRESSED GAS,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S
1F X X X X 10 z, ua,
va
1955 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
N.O.S.
1T 5000 X X X X 5 z
1956 COMPRESSED GAS, N.O.S. 1A X X X X 10 z, ua,
va
1957 DEUTERIUM, COMPRESSED 1F X X X X 10 d,
ua,
va
1964 HYDROCARBON GAS MIXTURE,
COMPRESSED, N.O.S.
1F X X X X 10 z, ua,
va
1971 METHANE, COMPRESSED or
NATURAL GAS, COMPRESSED
with high methane content
1F X X X X 10 ua,
va
– 77 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 78 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 1: COMPRESSED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar b
Maximum working
pressure, bar b
Special packing
provisions
2034 HYDROGEN AND METHANE
MIXTURE, COMPRESSED
1F X X X X 10 d,
ua,
va
2190 OXYGEN DIFLUORIDE,
COMPRESSED
1TOC 2.6 X X 5 200 30 a, k,
n, o
3156 COMPRESSED GAS, OXIDIZING,
N.O.S.
1O X X X X 10 z, ua,
va
3303 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
OXIDIZING, N.O.S.
1TO 5000 X X X X 5 z
3304 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
CORROSIVE, N.O.S.
1TC 5000 X X X X 5 z
3305 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE,
N.O.S.
1TFC 5000 X X X X 5 z
3306 COMPRESSED GAS, TOXIC,
OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE, N.O.S.
1TOC 5000 X X X X 5 z
a Not applicable for pressure receptacles made of composite materials.
b Where the entries are blank, the working pressure shall not exceed two thirds of the test pressure.
– 78 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 79 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1001 ACETYLENE, DISSOLVED 4F X X 10 60 c, p
1005 AMMONIA, ANHYDROUS 2TC 4000 X X X X 5 29 0.54 b, ra
1008 BORON TRIFLUORIDE 2TC 864 X X X X 5 225 0.715 a
300 0.86 a
1009 BROMOTRIFLUORO-
METHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 13B1)
2A X X X X 10 42 1.13 ra
120 1.44 ra
250 1.60 ra
1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED
(1,2-butadiene) or
2F X X X X 10 10 0.59 ra
1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED
(1,3-butadiene) or
2F X X X X 10 10 0.55 ra
1010 BUTADIENES AND
HYDROCARBON MIXTURE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 10 0.50 ra, v, z
1011 BUTANE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.52 ra, v
1012 BUTYLENE (Butylenes
mixture) or
2F X X X X 10 10 0.50 ra, z
1012 BUTYLENE (1-Butylene) or 2F X X X X 10 10 0.53
1012 BUTYLENE (cis-2-Butylene)
or
2F X X X X 10 10 0.55
1012 BUTYLENE (trans-2-
Butylene)
2F X X X X 10 10 0.54
1013 CARBON DIOXIDE 2A X X X X 10 190
250
0.68
0.76
ra, ua, va
ra, ua, va
1017 CHLORINE 2TOC 293 X X X X 5 22 1.25 a, ra
1018 CHLORODIFLUORO-
METHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 22)
2A X X X X 10 27 1.03 ra
1020 CHLOROPENTAFLUORO-
ETHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 115)
2A X X X X 10 25 1.05 ra
1021 1-CHLORO-1,2,2,2-
TETRAFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 124)
2A X X X X 10 11 1.20 ra
1022 CHLOROTRIFLUORO-
METHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 13)
2A X X X X 10 100 0.83 ra
120 0.90 ra
190 1.04 ra
250 1.11 ra
1026 CYANOGEN 2TF 350 X X X X 5 100 0.70 ra, u
1027 CYCLOPROPANE 2F X X X X 10 18 0.55 ra
1028 DICHLORODIFLUORO-
METHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 12)
2A X X X X 10 16 1.15 ra
1029 DICHLOROFLUORO-
METHANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS R 21)
2A X X X X 10 10 1.23 ra
– 79 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 80 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1030 1,1-DIFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R
152a)
2F X X X X 10 16 0.79 ra
1032 DIMETHYLAMINE,
ANHYDROUS
2F X X X X 10 10 0.59 b, ra
1033 DIMETHYL ETHER 2F X X X X 10 18 0.58 ra
1035 ETHANE 2F X X X X 10 95 0.25 ra
120 0.30 ra
300 0.40 ra
1036 ETHYLAMINE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.61 b, ra
1037 ETHYL CHLORIDE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.80 a, ra
1039 ETHYL METHYL ETHER 2F X X X X 10 10 0.64 ra
1040 ETHYLENE OXIDE, or
ETHYLENE OXIDE WITH
NITROGEN up to a total
pressure of 1MPa (10 bar) at
50 °C
2TF 2900 X X X X 5 15 0.78 l, ra
1041 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
CARBON DIOXIDE
MIXTURE with more than 9 %
but not more than 87 %
ethylene oxide
2F X X X X 10 190 0.66 ra
250 0.75 ra
1043 FERTILIZER
AMMONIATING SOLUTION
with free ammonia
4A X X X 5 b, z
1048 HYDROGEN BROMIDE,
ANHYDROUS
2TC 2860 X X X X 5 60 1.51 a, d, ra
1050 HYDROGEN CHLORIDE,
ANHYDROUS
2TC 2810 X X X X 5 100 0.30 a, d, ra
120 0.56 a, d, ra
150 0.67 a, d, ra
200 0.74 a, d, ra
1053 HYDROGEN SULPHIDE 2TF 712 X X X X 5 48 0.67 d, ra, u
1055 ISOBUTYLENE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.52 ra
1058 LIQUEFIED GASES, non-
flammable, charged with
nitrogen, carbon dioxide or air
2A X X X X 10 ra, z
1060 METHYLACETYLENE AND
PROPADIENE MIXTURE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 c, ra,
z
Propadiene with 1 % to 4 %
methylacetylene
2F X X X X 10 22 0.52 c, ra
Mixture P1 2F X X X X 10 30 0.49 c, ra
Mixture P2 2F X X X X 10 24 0.47 c, ra
1061 METHYLAMINE,
ANHYDROUS
2F X X X X 10 13 0.58 b, ra
1062 METHYL BROMIDE with not
more than 2 % chloropicrin
2T 850 X X X X 5 10 1.51 a
– 80 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 81 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1063 METHYL CHLORIDE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 40)
2F X X X X 10 17 0.81 a, ra
1064 METHYL MERCAPTAN 2TF 1350 X X X X 5 10 0.78 d, ra, u
1067 DINITROGEN TETROXIDE
(NITROGEN DIOXIDE)
2TOC 115 X X X 5 10 1.30 k
1069 NITROSYL CHLORIDE 2TC 35 X X 5 13 1.10 k, ra
1070 NITROUS OXIDE 2O X X X X 10 180 0.68 ua, va
225 0.74 ua, va
250 0.75 ua, va
1075 PETROLEUM GASES,
LIQUEFIED
2F X X X X 10 v, z
1076 PHOSGENE 2TC 5 X X X 5 20 1.23 a, k, ra
1077 PROPYLENE 2F X X X X 10 27 0.43 ra
1078 REFRIGERANT GAS, N.O.S. 2A X X X X 10 ra, z
Mixture F1 2A X X X X 10 12 1.23
Mixture F2 2A X X X X 10 18 1.15
Mixture F3 2A X X X X 10 29 1.03
1079 SULPHUR DIOXIDE 2TC 2520 X X X X 5 12 1.23 ra
1080 SULPHUR HEXAFLUORIDE 2A X X X X 10 70 1.06 ra, ua, va
140 1.34 ra, ua, va
160 1.38 ra, ua, va
1081 TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 200 m, o, ra
1082 TRIFLUOROCHLOROETHY-
LENE, STABILIZED
(REFRIGERANT GAS R1113)
2TF 2000 X X X X 5 19 1.13 ra, u
1083 TRIMETHYLAMINE,
ANHYDROUS
2F X X X X 10 10 0.56 b, ra
1085 VINYL BROMIDE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 10 1.37 a, ra
1086 VINYL CHLORIDE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 12 0.81 a, ra
1087 VINYL METHYL ETHER,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 10 0.67 ra
1581 CHLOROPICRIN AND
METHYL BROMIDE
MIXTURE with more than 2 %
chloropicrin
2T 850 X X X X 5 10 1.51 a
1582 CHLOROPICRIN AND
METHYL CHLORIDE
MIXTURE
2T d X X X X 5 17 0.81 a
1589 CYANOGEN CHLORIDE,
STABILIZED
2TC 80 X X 5 20 1.03 k
1741 BORON TRICHLORIDE 2TC 2541 X X X X 5 10 1.19 a, ra
1749 CHLORINE TRIFLUORIDE 2TOC 299 X X X X 5 30 1.40 a
– 81 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 82 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1858 HEXAFLUOROPROPYLENE
(REFRIGERANT GAS
R 1216)
2A X X X X 10 22 1.11 ra
1859 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE 2TC 922 X X X X 5 200 0.74 a
300 1.10 a
1860 VINYL FLUORIDE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 250 0.64 a, ra
1911 DIBORANE 2TF 80 X X 5 250 0.07 d, k, o
1912 METHYL CHLORIDE AND
METHYLENE CHLORIDE
MIXTURE
2F X X X X 10 17 0.81 a, ra
1952 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
CARBON DIOXIDE
MIXTURE with not more than
9 % ethylene oxide
2A X X X X 10 190 0.66 ra
250 0.75 ra
1958 1,2-DICHLORO-1,1,2,2-
TETRAFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 114)
2A X X X X 10 10 1.30 ra
1959 1,1-DIFLUOROETHYLENE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R
1132a)
2F X X X X 10 250 0.77 ra
1962 ETHYLENE 2F X X X X 10 225 0.34
300 0.38
1965 HYDROCARBON GAS
MIXTURE,
LIQUEFIED,N.O.S
2F X X X X 10 b ra, ta,
v, z
Mixture A 2F 10 10 0.50
Mixture A01 2F 10 15 0.49
Mixture A02 2F 10 15 0.48
Mixture A0 2F 10 15 0.47
Mixture A1 2F 10 20 0.46
Mixture B1 2F 10 25 0.45
Mixture B2 2F 10 25 0.44
Mixture B 2F 10 25 0.43
Mixture C 2F 10 30 0.42
1967 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC,
N.O.S.
2T X X X X 5 z
1968 INSECTICIDE GAS, N.O.S. 2A X X X X 10 ra, z
1969 ISOBUTANE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.49 ra, v
1973 CHLORODIFLUOROME-
THANE AND
CHLOROPENTAFLUORO-
ETHANE MIXTURE with
fixed boiling point, with
approximately 49 %
chlorodifluoromethane
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 502)
2A X X X X 10 31 1.01 ra
– 82 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 83 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1974 CHLORODIFLUORO-
BROMOMETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS
R 12B1)
2A X X X X 10 10 1.61 ra
1975 NITRIC OXIDE AND
DINITROGEN TETROXIDE
MIXTURE (NITRIC OXIDE
AND NITROGEN DIOXIDE
MIXTURE)
2TOC 115 X X X 5 k, z
1976 OCTAFLUOROCYCLO-
BUTANE (REFRIGERANT
GAS RC 318)
2.A X X X X 10 11 1.32 ra
1978 PROPANE 2F X X X X 10 23 0.43 ra, v
1982 TETRAFLUOROMETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 14)
2A X X X X 10 200 0.71
300 0.90
1983 1-CHLORO-2,2,2-
TRIFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS
R 133a)
2A X X X X 10 10 1.18 ra
1984 TRIFLUOROMETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 23)
2A X X X X 10 190 0.88 ra
250 0.96 ra
2035 1,1,1-TRIFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS
R 143a)
2F X X X X 10 35 0.73 ra
2036 XENON 2A X X X X 10 130 1.28
2044 2,2-DIMETHYLPROPANE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.53 ra
2073 AMMONIA SOLUTION,
relative density less than 0.880
at 15 °C in water,
4A
with more than 35 % but not
more than 40 % ammonia
4A X X X X 5 10 0.80 b
with more than 40 % but not
more than 50 % ammonia
4A X X X X 5 12 0.77 b
2188 ARSINE 2TF 178 X X 5 42 1.10 d, k
2189 DICHLOROSILANE 2TFC 314 X X X X 5 10 0.90 a
200 1.08 a
2191 SULPHURYL FLUORIDE 2T 3020 X X X X 5 50 1.10 u
2192 GERMANE c 2TF 620 X X X X 5 250 0.064 d, ra, r, q
2193 HEXAFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 116)
2A X X X X 10 200 1.13
2194 SELENIUM
HEXAFLUORIDE
2TC 50 X X 5 36 1.46 k, ra
2195 TELLURIUM
HEXAFLUORIDE
2TC 25 X X 5 20 1.00 k, ra
2196 TUNGSTEN
HEXAFLUORIDE
2TC 218 X X X X 5 10 3.08 a, ra
2197 HYDROGEN IODIDE,
ANHYDROUS
2TC 2860 X X X X 5 23 2.25 a, d, ra
– 83 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 84 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
2198 PHOSPHORUS
PENTAFLUORIDE
2TC 261 X X X X 5 200 0.90
300 1.25
2199 PHOSPHINE c 2TF 20 X X 5 225 0.30 d, k, q, ra
250 0.45 d, k, q, ra
2200 PROPADIENE, STABILIZED 2F X X X X 10 22 0.50 ra
2202 HYDROGEN SELENIDE,
ANHYDROUS
2TF 51 X X 5 31 1.60 k
2203 SILANE c 2F X X X X 10 225 0.32 q
250 0.36 q
2204 CARBONYL SULPHIDE 2TF 1700 X X X X 5 30 0.87 ra, u
2417 CARBONYL FLUORIDE 2TC 360 X X X X 5 200 0.47
300 0.70
2418 SULPHUR
TETRAFLUORIDE
2TC 40 X X 5 30 0.91 a, k, ra
2419 BROMOTRIFLUORO-
ETHYLENE
2F X X X X 10 10 1.19 ra
2420 HEXAFLUOROACETONE 2TC 470 X X X X 5 22 1.08 ra
2421 NITROGEN TRIOXIDE 2TOC CARRIAGE PROHIBITED
2422 OCTAFLUOROBUT-2-ENE
(REFRIGERANT
GAS R 1318)
2A X X X X 10 12 1.34 ra
2424 OCTAFLUOROPROPANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 218)
2A X X X X 10 25 1.04 ra
2451 NITROGEN TRIFLUORIDE 2O X X X X 10 200 0.50
2452 ETHYLACETYLENE,
STABILIZED
2F X X X X 10 10 0.57 c, ra
2453 ETHYL FLUORIDE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 161)
2F X X X X 10 30 0.57 ra
2454 METHYL FLUORIDE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 41)
2F X X X X 10 300 0.63 ra
2455 METHYL NITRITE 2A CARRIAGE PROHIBITED
2517 1-CHLORO-1,1-
DIFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS
R 142b)
2F X X X X 10 10 0.99 ra
2534 METHYLCHLOROSILANE 2TFC 2810 X X X X 5 ra, z
2548 CHLORINE
PENTAFLUORIDE
2TOC 122 X X 5 13 1.49 a, k
2599 CHLOROTRIFLUORO-
METHANE AND
TRIFLUOROMETHANE
AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE
with approximately 60 %
chlorotrifluoromethane
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 503)
2A X X X X 10 31 0.12 ra
42 0.17 ra
100 0.64 ra
2601 CYCLOBUTANE 2F X X X X 10 10 0.63 ra
– 84 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 85 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
2602 DICHLORODIFLUORO-
METHANE AND
DIFLUOROETHANE
AZEOTROPIC MIXTURE
with approximately 74 %
dichlorodifluoromethane
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 500)
2A X X X X 10 22 1.01 ra
2676 STIBINE 2TF 178 X X 5 200 0.49 k, ra, r
2901 BROMINE CHLORIDE 2TOC 290 X X X X 5 10 1.50 a
3057 TRIFLUOROACETYL
CHLORIDE
2TC 10 X X X 5 17 1.17 k, ra
3070 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
DICHLORODIFLUORO-
METHANE MIXTURE with
not more than 12,5 % ethylene
oxide
2A X X X X 10 18 1.09 ra
3083 PERCHLORYL FLUORIDE 2TO 770 X X X X 5 33 1.21 u
3153 PERFLUORO(METHYL
VINYL ETHER)
2F X X X X 10 20 0.75 ra
3154 PERFLUORO(ETHYL VINYL
ETHER)
2F X X X X 10 10 0.98 ra
3157 LIQUEFIED GAS,
OXIDIZING, N.O.S.
2O X X X X 10 z
3159 1,1,1,2-
TETRAFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R
134a)
2A X X X X 10 18 1.05 ra
3160 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S.
2TF 5000 X X X X 5 ra, z
3161 LIQUEFIED GAS,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S.
2F X X X X 10 ra, z
3162 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
N.O.S.
2T 5000 X X X X 5 z
3163 LIQUEFIED GAS, N.O.S. 2A X X X X 10 ra, z
3220 PENTAFLUOROETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 125)
2A X X X X 10 49 0.95 ra
35 0.87 ra
3252 DIFLUOROMETHANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 32)
2F X X X X 10 48 0.78 ra
3296 HEPTAFLUOROPROPANE
(REFRIGERANT GAS R 227)
2A X X X X 10 13 1.21 ra
3297 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
CHLOROTETRAFLUORO-
ETHANE MIXTURE with not
more than 8.8 % ethylene oxide
2A X X X X 10 10 1.16 ra
3298 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
PENTAFLUOROETHANE
MIXTURE with not more than
7.9 % ethylene oxide
2A X X X X 10 26 1.02 ra
– 85 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 86 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
3299 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
TETRAFLUOROETHANE
MIXTURE with not more than
5.6 % ethylene oxide
2A X X X X 10 17 1.03 ra
3300 ETHYLENE OXIDE AND
CARBON DIOXIDE
MIXTURE with more than
87 % ethylene oxide
2TF More
than
2900
X X X X 5 28 0.73 ra
3307 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
OXIDIZING, N.O.S.
2TO 5000 X X X X 5 z
3308 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
CORROSIVE, N.O.S.
2TC 5000 X X X X 5 ra, z
3309 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE,
N.O.S.
2TFC 5000 X X X X 5 ra, z
3310 LIQUEFIED GAS, TOXIC,
OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE,
N.O.S.
2TOC 5000 X X X X 5 z
3318 AMMONIA SOLUTION,
relative density less than 0.880
at 15 °C in water, with more
than 50 % ammonia
4TC X X X X 5 b
3337 REFRIGERANT GAS R 404A
(Pentafluoroethane, 1,1,1-
trifluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-
tetrafluoroethane zeotropic
mixture with approximately
44 % pentafluoroethane and
52 % 1,1,1-trifluoroethane)
2A X X X X 10 36 0.82 ra
3338 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407A
(Difluoromethane,
pentafluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-
tetrafluoroethane zeotropic
mixture with approximately
20 % difluoromethane and
40 % pentafluoroethane)
2A X X X X 10 32 0.94 ra
3339 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407B
(Difluoromethane,
pentafluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-
tetrafluoroethane zeotropic
mixture with approximately
10 % difluoromethane and
70 % pentafluoroethane
2A X X X X 10 33 0.93 ra
3340 REFRIGERANT GAS R 407C
(Difluoromethane,
pentafluoroethane, and 1,1,1,2-
tetrafluoroethane zeotropic
mixture with approximately
23 % difluoromethane and
25 % pentafluoroethane)
2A X X X X 10 30 0.95 ra
– 86 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 87 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 2: LIQUEFIED GASES AND DISSOLVED GASES
UN
No. Name and description
Classification code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
3354 INSECTICIDE GAS,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S
2F X X X X 10 ra, z
3355 INSECTICIDE GAS, TOXIC,
FLAMMABLE, N.O.S.
2TF X X X X 5 ra, z
3374 ACETYLENE, SOLVENT
FREE
2F X X 5 60 c, p
a Not applicable for pressure receptacles made of composite materials.
b For mixtures of UN No. 1965, the maximum permissible filling mass per litre of capacity is as follows:
c Considered as pyrophoric.
d Considered to be toxic. The LC₅₀ value still to be determined.
C
B
B2
B1
A1
A0
A02
A01
A
0.42
0.43
0.44
0.45
0.46
0.47
0.48
0.49
0.50
0.440 0.450 0.463 0.474 0.485 0.495 0.505 0.516 0.525
Maximum permissible mass of
contents per litre of capacity
Density at 50 °C in kg/l
Commercial butane
Commercial
propane
– 87 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 88 –
P200 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P200
Table 3: SUBSTANCES NOT IN CLASS 2
UN
No. Name and description
Class
Classification Code
LC₅₀ ml/m³
Cylinders
Tubes
Pressure drums
Bundles of cylinders
Test period, years a
Test pressure, bar
Filling ratio
Special packing
provisions
1051 HYDROGEN CYANIDE,
STABILIZED containing less
than 3 % water
6.1 TF1 40 X X 5 100 0.55 k
1052 HYDROGEN FLUORIDE,
ANHYDROUS
8 CT1 1307 X X X 5 10 0.84 a, ab,
ac
1745 BROMINE
PENTAFLUORIDE
5.1 OTC 25 X X X 5 10 b k, ab,
ad
1746 BROMINE TRIFLUORIDE 5.1 OTC 50 X X X 5 10 b k, ab,
ad
2495 IODINE PENTAFLUORIDE 5.1 OTC 120 X X X 5 10 b k, ab,
ad
a Not applicable for pressure receptacles made of composite materials.
b A minimum ullage of 8 % by volume is required.
P201 PACKING INSTRUCTION P201
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3167, 3168 and 3169.
The following packagings are authorized:
(1) Cylinders and gas receptacles conforming to the construction, testing and filling requirements approved by the
competent authority.
(2) The following combination packagings provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings:
(a) For non-toxic gases, hermetically sealed inner packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of
5 litres per package;
(b) For toxic gases, hermetically sealed inner packagings of glass or metal with a maximum capacity of 1
litre per package.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level.
– 88 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 89 –
P202 PACKING INSTRUCTION P202
(Reserved)
P203 PACKING INSTRUCTION P203
This instruction applies to Class 2 refrigerated liquefied gases.
Requirements for closed cryogenic receptacles:
(1) The special packing provisions of 4.1.6 shall be met.
(2) The requirements of Chapter 6.2 shall be met.
(3) The closed cryogenic receptacles shall be so insulated that they do not become coated with frost.
(4) Test pressure
Refrigerated liquids shall be filled in closed cryogenic receptacles with the following minimum test pressures:
(a) For closed cryogenic receptacles with vacuum insulation, the test pressure shall not be less than 1.3 times
the sum of the maximum internal pressure of the filled receptacle, including during filling and discharge,
plus 100 kPa (1 bar);
(b) For other closed cryogenic receptacles, the test pressure shall be not less than 1.3 times the maximum
internal pressure of the filled receptacle, taking into account the pressure developed during filling and
discharge.
(5) Degree of filling
For non-flammable, non-toxic refrigerated liquefied gases (classification codes 3A and 3O) the volume of liquid
phase at the filling temperature and at a pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar) shall not exceed 98 % of the water capacity
of the pressure receptacle.
For flammable refrigerated liquefied gases (classification code 3F) the degree of filling shall remain below the
level at which, if the contents were raised to the temperature at which the vapour pressure equalled the opening
pressure of the relief valve, the volume of the liquid phase would reach 98 % of the water capacity at that
temperature.
(6) Pressure-relief devices
Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be fitted with at least one pressure-relief device.
(7) Compatibility
Materials used to ensure the leakproofness of the joints or for the maintenance of the closures shall be compatible
with the contents. In the case of receptacles intended for the carriage of oxidizing gases (classification code 3O),
these materials shall not react with these gases in a dangerous manner.
(8) Periodic inspection
(a) The periodic inspection and test frequencies of pressure relief valves in accordance with 6.2.1.6.3 shall not
exceed five years.
(b) The periodic inspection and test frequencies of non-UN closed cryogenic receptacles in accordance with
6.2.3.5.2 shall not exceed 10 years.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 89 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 90 –
P203 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P203
Requirements for open cryogenic receptacles:
Only the following non oxidizing refrigerated liquefied gases of classification code 3A may be carried in open cryogenic
receptacles: UN Nos. 1913, 1951, 1963, 1970, 1977, 2591, 3136 and 3158.
Open cryogenic receptacles shall be constructed to meet the following requirements:
(1) The receptacles shall be designed, manufactured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand all conditions,
including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during their normal use and during normal conditions of
carriage.
(2) The capacity shall be not more than 450 litres.
(3) The receptacle shall have a double wall construction with the space between the inner and outer wall being
evacuated (vacuum insulation). The insulation shall prevent the formation of hoar frost on the exterior of the
receptacle.
(4) The materials of construction shall have suitable mechanical properties at the service temperature.
(5) Materials which are in direct contact with the dangerous goods shall not be affected or weakened by the dangerous
goods intended to be carried and shall not cause a dangerous effect, e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the
dangerous goods.
(6) Receptacles of glass double wall construction shall have an outer packaging with suitable cushioning or absorbent
materials which withstand the pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of carriage.
(7) The receptacle shall be designed to remain in an upright position during carriage, e.g. have a base whose smaller
horizontal dimension is greater than the height of the centre of gravity when filled to capacity or be mounted on
gimbals.
(8) The openings of the receptacles shall be fitted with devices allowing gases to escape, preventing any splashing
out of liquid, and so configured that they remain in place during carriage.
(9) Open cryogenic receptacles shall bear the following marks permanently affixed e.g. by stamping, engraving or
etching:
– The manufacturer’s name and address;
– The model number or name;
– The serial or batch number;
– The UN number and proper shipping name of gases for which the receptacle is intended;
– The capacity of the receptacle in litres.
P204 PACKING INSTRUCTION P204
(Deleted)
P205 PACKING INSTRUCTION P205
This instruction applies to UN No. 3468.
(1) For metal hydride storage systems, the special packing provisions of 4.1.6 shall be met.
(2) Only pressure receptacles not exceeding 150 litres in water capacity and having a maximum developed pressure
not exceeding 25 MPa are covered by this packing instruction.
(3) Metal hydride storage systems meeting the applicable requirements for the construction and testing of pressure
receptacles containing gas of Chapter 6.2 are authorised for the carriage of hydrogen only.
(4) When steel pressure receptacles or composite pressure receptacles with steel liners are used, only those bearing
the “H” mark, in accordance with 6.2.2.9.2 (j) shall be used.
(5) Metal hydride storage systems shall meet the service conditions, design criteria, rated capacity, type tests, batch
tests, routine tests, test pressure, rated charging pressure and provisions for pressure relief devices for
transportable metal hydride storage systems specified in ISO 16111:2008 or ISO 16111:2018 (Transportable
gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in reversible metal hydride) and their conformity and approval shall
be assessed in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
(6) Metal hydride storage systems shall be filled with hydrogen at a pressure not exceeding the rated charging
pressure shown in the permanent mark on the system as specified by ISO 16111:2008 or ISO 16111:2018.
(7) The periodic test requirements for a metal hydride storage system shall be in accordance with ISO 16111:2008
or ISO 16111:2018 and carried out in accordance with 6.2.2.6, and the interval between periodic inspections
shall not exceed five years. See 6.2.2.4 to determine which standard is applicable at the time of periodic
inspection and test.
– 90 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 91 –
P206 PACKING INSTRUCTION P206
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505.
Unless otherwise indicated in ADR, cylinders and pressure drums conforming to the applicable requirements of Chapter
6.2 are authorized.
(1) The special packing provisions of 4.1.6 shall be met.
(2) The maximum test period for periodic inspection shall be 5 years.
(3) Cylinders and pressure drums shall be so filled that at 50 °C the non-gaseous phase does not exceed 95 % of their
water capacity and they are not completely filled at 60 °C. When filled, the internal pressure at 65 °C shall not
exceed the test pressure of the cylinders and pressure drums. The vapour pressures and volumetric expansion of
all substances in the cylinders and pressure drums shall be taken into account.
For liquids charged with a compressed gas both components – the liquid and the compressed gas – have to be
taken into consideration in the calculation of the internal pressure in the pressure receptacle. When experimental
data is not available, the following steps shall be carried out:
(a) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquid and of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 15 °C
(filling temperature);
(b) Calculation of the volumetric expansion of the liquid phase resulting from the heating from 15 °C to 65 °C
and calculation of the remaining volume for the gaseous phase;
(c) Calculation of the partial pressure of the compressed gas at 65 °C considering the volumetric expansion of
the liquid phase;
NOTE: The compressibility factor of the compressed gas at 15 °C and 65 °C shall be considered.
(d) Calculation of the vapour pressure of the liquid at 65 °C;
(e) The total pressure is the sum of the vapour pressure of the liquid and the partial pressure of the compressed
gas at 65 °C;
(f) Consideration of the solubility of the compressed gas at 65 °C in the liquid phase.
The test pressure of the cylinders or pressure drums shall not be less than the calculated total pressure minus
100 kPa (1bar).
If the solubility of the compressed gas in the liquid phase is not known for the calculation, the test pressure can
be calculated without taking the gas solubility (sub-paragraph (f)) into account.
(4) The minimum test pressure shall be in accordance with packing instruction P200 for the propellant but shall not
be less than 20 bar.
Additional requirement:
Cylinders and pressure drums shall not be offered for carriage when connected with spray application equipment such
as a hose and wand assembly.
Special packing provisions:
PP89 For UN Nos. 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, notwithstanding 4.1.6.9 (b), non-refillable cylinders used may
have a water capacity in litres not exceeding 1 000 litres divided by the test pressure expressed in bars provided
capacity and pressure restrictions of the construction standard comply with ISO 11118:1999, which limits the
maximum capacity to 50 litres.
PP97 For fire extinguishing agents assigned to UN No. 3500 the maximum test period for periodic inspection shall
be 10 years. They may be carried in tubes of a maximum water capacity of 450 l conforming to the applicable
requirements of Chapter 6.2.
– 91 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 92 –
P207 PACKING INSTRUCTION P207
This instruction applies to UN No. 1950.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(a) Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(b) Rigid outer packagings with a maximum net mass as follows:
Fibreboard 55 kg
Other than fibreboard 125 kg
The provisions of 4.1.1.3 need not be met.
The packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent excessive movement of the aerosols and inadvertent
discharge during normal conditions of carriage.
Special packing provision:
PP87 For UN 1950 waste aerosols carried in accordance with special provision 327, the packagings shall have a means
of retaining any free liquid that might escape during carriage, e.g. absorbent material. The packagings shall be
adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the build-up of pressure.
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
RR6 For UN 1950 in the case of carriage by full load, metal articles may also be packed as follows: The articles shall
be grouped together in units on trays and held in position with an appropriate plastics cover; these units shall be
stacked and suitably secured on pallets.
– 92 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 93 –
P208 PACKING INSTRUCTION P208
This instruction applies to Class 2 adsorbed gases.
(1) The following packagings are authorized provided the general packing requirements of 4.1.6.1 are met:
Cylinders specified in Chapter 6.2 and in accordance with ISO 11513:2011, ISO 11513:2019, ISO 9809-1:2010
or ISO 9809-1:2019.
(2) The pressure of each filled cylinder shall be less than 101.3 kPa at 20 C and less than 300 kPa at 50 C.
(3) The minimum test pressure of the cylinder shall be 21 bar.
(4) The minimum burst pressure of the cylinder shall be 94.5 bar.
(5) The internal pressure at 65 C of the filled cylinder shall not exceed the test pressure of the cylinder.
(6) The adsorbent material shall be compatible with the cylinder and shall not form harmful or dangerous
compounds with the gas to be adsorbed. The gas in combination with the adsorbent material shall not affect or
weaken the cylinder or cause a dangerous reaction (e.g. a catalyzing reaction).
(7) The quality of the adsorbent material shall be verified at the time of each fill to ensure that the pressure and
chemical stability requirements of this packing instruction are met each time an adsorbed gas package is offered
for carriage.
(8) The adsorbent material shall not meet the criteria of any of the classes in ADR.
(9) Requirements for cylinders and closures containing toxic gases with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³
(ppm) (see Table 1) shall be as follows:
(a) Valve outlets shall be fitted with pressure retaining gas-tight plugs or caps having threads matching those
of the valve outlets.
(b) Each valve shall either be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, or be of a type which
prevents leakage through or past the packing.
(c) Each cylinder and closure shall be tested for leakage after filling.
(d) Each valve shall be capable of withstanding the test pressure of the cylinder and be directly connected to
the cylinder by either a taper-thread or other means which meets the requirements of ISO 10692-2:2001.
(e) Cylinders and valves shall not be fitted with a pressure relief device.
(10) Valve outlets for cylinders containing pyrophoric gases shall be fitted with gas-tight plugs or caps having
threads matching those of the valve outlets.
(11) The filling procedure shall be in accordance with Annex A of ISO 11513:2011 (applicable until 31 December
2024) or Annex A of ISO 11513:2019.
(12) The maximum period for periodic inspections shall be 5 years.
(13) Special packing provisions that are specific to a substance (see Table 1).
Material compatibility
a: Aluminium alloy cylinders shall not be used.
d: When steel cylinders are used, only those bearing the “H” mark in accordance with 6.2.2.7.4 (p) are
permitted.
Gas specific provisions
r: The filling of this gas shall be limited such that, if complete decomposition occurs, the pressure does not
exceed two thirds of the test pressure of the cylinder.
Material compatibility for n.o.s. adsorbed gas entries
z: The construction materials of the cylinders and their accessories shall be compatible with the contents and
shall not react to form harmful or dangerous compounds therewith.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 93 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 94 –
P208 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P208
Table 1: ADSORBED GASES
UN
No. Name and description Classification
code
LC₅₀
ml/m³
Special
packing
provisions
3510 ADSORBED GAS, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 9F z
3511 ADSORBED GAS, N.O.S. 9A z
3512 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, N.O.S. 9T ≤ 5000 z
3513 ADSORBED GAS, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 9O z
3514 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, N.O.S. 9TF ≤ 5000 z
3515 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, N.O.S. 9TO ≤ 5000 z
3516 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, CORROSIVE, N.O.S. 9TC ≤ 5000 z
3517 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, FLAMMABLE, CORROSIVE,
N.O.S. 9TFC ≤ 5000 z
3518 ADSORBED GAS, TOXIC, OXIDIZING, CORROSIVE,
N.O.S. 9TOC ≤ 5000 z
3519 BORON TRIFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 9TC 387 a
3520 CHLORINE, ADSORBED 9TOC 293 a
3521 SILICON TETRAFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 9TC 450 a
3522 ARSINE, ADSORBED 9TF 20 d
3523 GERMANE, ADSORBED 9TF 620 d, r
3524 PHOSPHORUS PENTAFLUORIDE, ADSORBED 9TC 190
3525 PHOSPHINE, ADSORBED 9TF 20 d
3526 HYDROGEN SELENIDE, ADSORBED 9TF 2
P209 PACKING INSTRUCTION P209
This packing instruction applies to UN No. 3150 devices, small, hydrocarbon gas powered or hydrocarbon gas refills
for small devices
(1) The special packing provisions of 4.1.6 when applicable shall be met.
(2) The articles shall comply with the provisions of the country in which they were filled.
(3) The devices and refills shall be packed in outer packagings conforming to 6.1.4 tested and approved in
accordance with Chapter 6.1 for packing group II.
P300 PACKING INSTRUCTION P300
This instruction applies to UN No. 3064.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings consisting of inner metal cans of not more than 1 litre capacity each and outer wooden boxes
(4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F) containing not more than 5 litres of solution.
Additional requirements:
1. Metal cans shall be completely surrounded with absorbent cushioning material.
2. Wooden boxes shall be completely lined with suitable material impervious to water and nitroglycerin.
– 94 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 95 –
P301 PACKING INSTRUCTION P301
This instruction applies to UN No. 3165.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Aluminium pressure receptacle made from tubing and having welded heads.
Primary containment of the fuel within this receptacle shall consist of a welded aluminium bladder having a
maximum internal volume of 46 litres.
The outer receptacle shall have a minimum design gauge pressure of 1 275 kPa and a minimum burst gauge
pressure of 2 755 kPa.
Each receptacle shall be leak checked during manufacture and before dispatch and shall be found leakproof.
The complete inner unit shall be securely packed in non-combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite,
in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately protect all fittings.
Maximum quantity of fuel per primary containment and package is 42 litres.
(2) Aluminium pressure receptacle.
Primary containment of the fuel within this receptacle shall consist of a welded vapour tight fuel compartment
with an elastomeric bladder having a maximum internal volume of 46 litres.
The pressure receptacle shall have a minimum design gauge pressure of 2 860 kPa and a minimum burst
gauge pressure of 5 170 kPa.
Each receptacle shall be leak-checked during manufacture and before dispatch and shall be securely packed
in non-combustible cushioning material such as vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging
which will adequately protect all fittings.
Maximum quantity of fuel per primary containment and package is 42 litres.
P302 PACKING INSTRUCTION P302
This instruction applies to UN No. 3269.
The following combination packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2);
Inner packagings:
The activator (organic peroxide) shall have a maximum quantity of 125 ml per inner packaging if liquid,
and 500 g per inner packaging if solid.
The base material and the activator shall be each separately packed in inner packagings.
The components may be placed in the same outer packaging provided that they will not interact dangerously in the
event of a leakage.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II or III performance level according to the criteria for Class 3 applied
to the base material.
– 95 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 96 –
P400 PACKING INSTRUCTION P400
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and
shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10
bar, gauge pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not
less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar);
(2) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G), drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1D or 1G) or jerricans
(3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2) enclosing hermetically sealed metal cans with inner packagings of glass or metal,
with a capacity of not more than 1 litre each, having closures with gaskets. Inner packagings shall have
threaded closures or closures physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or
loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage. Inner packagings shall be cushioned on all
sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. Inner
packagings shall not be filled to more than 90 % of their capacity. Outer packagings shall have a maximum
net mass of 125 kg;
(3) Steel, aluminium or metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2), jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1 or 3B2) or
boxes (4A, 4B or 4N) with a maximum net mass of 150 kg each with hermetically sealed inner metal cans not
more than 4 litre capacity each, with closures fitted with gaskets. Inner packagings shall have threaded closures
or closures physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure
by impact or vibration during carriage. Inner packagings shall be cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent,
non-combustible material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. Each layer of inner packagings
shall be separated by a dividing partition in addition to cushioning material. Inner packagings shall not be filled
to more than 90 % of their capacity.
Special packing provision:
PP86 For UN Nos. 3392 and 3394, air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means.
P401 PACKING INSTRUCTION P401
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and
subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0.6 MPa (6 bar, gauge
pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than 20
kPa (0.2 bar);
(2) Combination packagings:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings:
Glass, metal or plastics which have threaded closures with a maximum capacity of 1 litre.
Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to
absorb the entire contents.
The maximum net mass per outer packaging shall not exceed 30 kg.
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
RR7 For UN Nos. 1183, 1242, 1295 and 2988, the pressure receptacles shall however be subjected to the tests every
five years.
– 96 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 97 –
P402 PACKING INSTRUCTION P402
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be made of steel and
subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 0.6 MPa (6 bar, gauge
pressure). During carriage, the liquid shall be under a layer of inert gas with a gauge pressure of not less than
20 kPa (0.2 bar);
(2) Combination packagings:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings with a maximum net mass as follows:
Glass 10 kg
Metal or plastics 15 kg
Each inner packaging shall be fitted with threaded closures.
Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by inert cushioning and absorbent material in a quantity sufficient to
absorb the entire contents.
The maximum net mass per outer packaging shall not exceed 125 kg.
(3) Steel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 250 litres;
(4) Composite packagings consisting of a plastics receptacle with outer steel drum or aluminium (6HA1 or 6HB1)
with a maximum capacity of 250 litres.
Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR:
RR4 For UN No. 3130, the openings of receptacles shall be tightly closed by means of two devices in series, one of
which shall be screwed or secured in an equivalent manner.
RR7 For UN No. 3129, the pressure receptacles shall however be subjected to the tests every five years.
RR8 For UN Nos. 1389, 1391, 1411, 1421, 1928, 3129, 3130, 3148 and 3482, the pressure receptacles shall however
be subjected to an initial test and to periodic tests at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar).
– 97 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 98 –
P403 PACKING INSTRUCTION P403
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum
net massInner packagings Outer packagings
Glass 2 kg Drums
Plastics 15 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg
Metal 20 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 400 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg
Inner packagings shall be
hermetically sealed (e.g. by
taping or by threaded
closures).
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg
fibre (1G) 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 400 kg
other metal (4N) 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 250 kg
natural wood with sift proof walls (4C2) 250 kg
plywood (4D) 250 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 250 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg
Single packagings:
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2) 250 kg
aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 250 kg
metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) 250 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drums (6HA1 or 6HB1) 250 kg
plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drums (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1) 75 kg
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden, plywood,
fibreboard or solid plastics boxes (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
75 kg
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
Additional requirement:
Packagings shall be hermetically sealed.
Special packing provision:
PP83 Deleted.
– 98 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 99 –
P404 PACKING INSTRUCTION P404
This instruction applies to pyrophoric solids: UN Nos.: 1383, 1854, 1855, 2008, 2441, 2545, 2546, 2846, 2881, 3200,
3391 and 3393.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Combination packagings
Outer packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D,
4F, 4G or 4H2)
Inner packagings: Metal receptacles with a maximum net mass of 15 kg each. Inner packagings shall
be hermetically sealed;
Glass receptacles, with a maximum net mass of 1 kg each, having closures with
gaskets, cushioned on all sides and contained in hermetically sealed metal cans.
Inner packagings shall have threaded closures or closures physically held in place
by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact
or vibration during carriage.
Outer packagings shall have a maximum net mass of 125 kg.
(2) Metal packagings: (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 3A1, 3A2, 3B1 and 3B2) Maximum gross mass: 150 kg;
(3) Composite packagings: Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1 or 6HB1) Maximum
gross mass: 150 kg.
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
Special packing provision:
PP86 For UN Nos. 3391 and 3393, air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means.
P405 PACKING INSTRUCTION P405
This instruction applies to UN No. 1381.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For UN No. 1381, phosphorus, wet:
(a) Combination packagings
Outer packagings: (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F) Maximum net mass: 75 kg
Inner packagings:
(i) hermetically sealed metal cans, with a maximum net mass of 15 kg; or
(ii) glass inner packagings cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, non-combustible material in a
quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents with a maximum net mass of 2 kg; or
(b) Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2); maximum net mass: 400 kg
Jerricans (3A1 or 3B1); maximum net mass: 120 kg.
These packagings shall be capable of passing the leakproofness test specified in 6.1.5.4 at the packing group II
performance level;
(2) For UN No. 1381, dry phosphorus:
(a) When fused, drums (1A2, 1B2 or 1N2) with a maximum net mass of 400 kg; or
(b) In projectiles or hard cased articles when carried without Class 1 components: as specified by the
competent authority.
– 99 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 100 –
P406 PACKING INSTRUCTION P406
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Combination packagings
outer packagings: (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2, 1G, 1D, 1H1, 1H2, 3H1 or 3H2)
inner packagings: water-resistant packagings;
(2) Plastics, plywood or fibreboard drums (1H2, 1D or 1G) or boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4D, 4F, 4C2, 4G and 4H2)
with a water resistant inner bag, plastics film lining or water resistant coating;
(3) Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2), plastics drums (1H1 or 1H2), metal jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1
or 3B2), plastics jerricans (3H1 or 3H2), plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drums (6HA1 or
6HB1), plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drums (6HG1, 6HH1 or 6HD1), plastics
receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid
plastics boxes (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2).
Additional requirements:
1. Packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent the loss of water or alcohol content or the content of
the phlegmatizer.
2. Packagings shall be so constructed and closed so as to avoid an explosive overpressure or pressure build-up of
more than 300 kPa (3 bar).
Special packing provisions:
PP24 UN Nos. 2852, 3364, 3365, 3366, 3367, 3368 and 3369 shall not be carried in quantities of more than 500 g per
package.
PP25 For UN No. 1347, the quantity carried shall not exceed 15 kg per package.
PP26 For UN Nos. 1310, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1344, 1347, 1348, 1349, 1517, 2907, 3317 and 3376 packagings shall be
lead free.
PP48 For UN No. 3474, metal packagings shall not be used. Packagings of other material with a small amount of
metal, for example metal closures or other metal fittings such as those mentioned in 6.1.4, are not considered
metal packagings.
PP78 UN No. 3370 shall not be carried in quantities of more than 11.5 kg per package.
PP80 For UN No. 2907, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level. Packagings meeting the test
criteria of packing group I shall not be used.
P407 PACKING INSTRUCTION P407
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1331, 1944, 1945 and 2254.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Inner packagings:
Matches shall be tightly packed in securely closed inner packagings to prevent accidental ignition under normal
conditions of carriage.
The maximum gross mass of the package shall not exceed 45 kg except for fibreboard boxes which shall not exceed
30 kg.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level.
Special packing provision:
PP27 UN No. 1331, Strike-anywhere matches shall not be packed in the same outer packaging with any other
dangerous goods other than safety matches or wax Vesta matches, which shall be packed in separate inner
packagings. Inner packagings shall not contain more than 700 strike-anywhere matches.
– 100 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 101 –
P408 PACKING INSTRUCTION P408
This instruction applies to UN No. 3292.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For cells:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
There shall be sufficient cushioning material to prevent contact between cells and between cells and the internal
surfaces of the outer packaging and to ensure that no dangerous movement of the cells within the outer
packaging occurs in carriage.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) Batteries may be carried unpacked or in protective enclosures (e.g. fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates). The
terminals shall not support the weight of other batteries or materials packed with the batteries.
Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirement:
Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit and shall be isolated in such a manner as to prevent
short circuits.
P409 PACKING INSTRUCTION P409
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2956, 3242 and 3251.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Fibre drum (1G) which may be fitted with a liner or coating; maximum net mass: 50 kg;
(2) Combination packagings: Fibreboard box (4G) with a single inner plastic bag;
maximum net mass: 50 kg;
(3) Combination packagings: Fibreboard box (4G) or fibre drum (1G) with plastics inner packagings each
containing a maximum of 5 kg; maximum net mass: 25 kg.
– 101 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 102 –
P410 PACKING INSTRUCTION P410
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum net mass
Inner packagings Outer packagings Packing group
II
Packing group III
Glass 10 kg Drums
Plastics a 30 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg 400 kg
Metal 40 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 400 kg 400 kg
Paper a, b 10 kg other metal (1N1, 1N2)
plastics (1H1, 1H2)
400 kg 400 kg
Fibre a, b 10 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg 400 kg
fibre (1G)a 400 kg 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D) 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) a 400 kg 400 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1, 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg
Single packagings:
Drums
steel (1A1 or 1A2) 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (1B1 or 1B2) 400 kg 400 kg
metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1 or 1N2) 400 kg 400 kg
plastics (1H1 or 1H2) 400 kg 400 kg
Jerricans
steel (3A1 or 3A2) 120 kg 120 kg
aluminium (3B1 or 3B2) 120 kg 120 kg
plastics (3H1 or 3H2) 120 kg 120 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) c 400 kg 400 kg
aluminium (4B) c 400 kg 400 kg
other metal (4N) c 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) c 400 kg 400 kg
plywood (4D) c 400 kg 400 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) c 400 kg 400 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) c 400 kg 400 kg
fibreboard (4G) c 400 kg 400 kg
solid plastics (4H2) c 400 kg 400 kg
Bags
Bags (5H3, 5H4, 5L3, 5M2) c, d 50 kg 50 kg
a These packagings shall be sift-proof.
b These inner packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage.
c These packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage.
d For packing group II substances, these packagings may only be used when carried in a closed vehicle or container.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 102 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 103 –
P410 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P410
Composite packagings Maximum net mass
Packing group
II
Packing group
III
plastics receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, plywood, fibre or plastics
drum (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HD1, or 6HH1) 400 kg 400 kg
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box, or outer
wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC,
6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
75 kg 75 kg
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, plywood or fibre drum (6PA1,
6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or outer steel or aluminium crate or box or with outer
wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2,
6PC, 6PD2, or 6PG2) or with outer expanded or solid plastics packaging
(6PH1 or 6PH2)
75 kg 75 kg
Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
Special packing provisions:
PP39 For UN No. 1378, for metal packagings a venting device is required.
PP40 For UN Nos. 1326, 1352, 1358, 1395, 1396, 1436, 1437, 1871, 2805 and 3182, packing group II, bags are not
allowed.
PP83 Deleted.
P411 PACKING INSTRUCTION P411
This instruction applies to UN No. 3270.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2);
provided that explosion is not possible by reason of increased internal pressure.
The maximum net mass shall not exceed 30 kg.
P412 PACKING INSTRUCTION P412
This instruction applies to UN No. 3527
The following combination packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Outer packagings:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2)
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2);
(2) Inner packagings:
(a) The activator (organic peroxide) shall have a maximum quantity of 125 ml per inner packaging if liquid,
and 500 g per inner packaging if solid.
(b) The base material and the activator shall be each separately packed in inner packagings.
The components may be placed in the same outer packaging provided that they will not interact dangerously in the
event of a leakage.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II or III performance level according to the criteria for Class 4.1 applied
to the base material.
– 103 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 104 –
P500 PACKING INSTRUCTION P500
This instruction applies to UN No. 3356.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
The generator(s) shall be carried in a package which meets the following requirements when one generator in the
package is actuated:
(a) Other generators in the package will not be actuated;
(b) Packaging material will not ignite; and
(c) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not exceed 100 °C.
P501 PACKING INSTRUCTION P501
This instruction applies to UN No. 2015.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Inner packaging
maximum capacity
Outer
packaging
maximum
net mass
(1) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4H2) or drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2,
1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D) or jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2) with
glass, plastics or metal inner packagings
5 l 125 kg
(2) Fibreboard box (4G) or fibre drum (1G), with plastics or metal inner
packagings each in a plastics bag
2 l 50 kg
Single packagings: Maximum capacity
Drums
steel (1A1) 250 l
aluminium (1B1)
metal other than steel or aluminium (1N1)
plastics (1H1)
Jerricans
steel (3A1) 60 l
aluminium (3B1)
plastics (3H1)
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1,
6HD1)
250 l
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics
receptacle with outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box
(6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
60 l
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1,
6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1) or with outer steel, aluminium, wooden or fibreboard
box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or
with outer expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2).
60 l
Additional requirements:
1. Packagings shall have a maximum filling degree of 90 %.
2. Packagings shall be vented.
– 104 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 105 –
P502 PACKING INSTRUCTION P502
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum net
massInner packagings Outer packagings
Glass 5 l Drums
Metal 5 l steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg
Plastics 5 l aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg
plywood (1D) 125 kg
fibre (1G) 125 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 125 kg
aluminium (4B) 125 kg
other metal (4N) 125 kg
natural wood (4C1) 125 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 125 kg
plywood (4D) 125 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg
Single packagings: Maximum
capacity
Drums
steel (1A1) 250 l
aluminium (1B1)
plastics (1H1)
Jerricans
steel (3A1) 60 l
aluminium (3B1)
plastics (3H1)
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with outer
wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2 or 6HH2)
60 l
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1 or 6PD1)
or with outer steel, aluminium, wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2,
6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or with outer expanded or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2).
60 l
Special packing provision:
PP28 For UN No. 1873, parts of packagings which are in direct contact with perchloric acid shall be constructed of
glass or plastics.
– 105 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 106 –
P503 PACKING INSTRUCTION P503
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings:
Inner packagings Outer packagings Maximum net mass
Glass 5 kg Drums
Metal 5 kg steel (1A1, 1A2) 125 kg
Plastics 5 kg aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 125 kg
other metal (1N1, 1N2) 125 kg
plywood (1D) 125 kg
fibre (1G) 125 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 125 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 125 kg
aluminium (4B) 125 kg
other metal (4N) 125 kg
natural wood (4C1) 125 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 125 kg
plywood (4D) 125 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 40 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg
Single packagings:
Metal drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1 or 1N2) with a maximum net mass of 250 kg.
Fibreboard (1G) or plywood drums (1D) fitted with inner liners with a maximum net mass of 200 kg.
– 106 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 107 –
P504 PACKING INSTRUCTION P504
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Maximum net mass
(1) Glass receptacles with a maximum capacity of 5 litres in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1,
1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2 outer packagings
75 kg
(2) Plastics receptacles with a maximum capacity of 30 litres in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1,
1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2 outer packagings
75 kg
(3) Metal receptacles with a maximum capacity of 40 litres in 1G, 4F or 4G outer
packagings
125 kg
(4) Metal receptacles with a maximum capacity of 40 litres in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1,
1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4H2 outer packagings
225 kg
Single packagings: Maximum capacity
Drums
steel, non-removable head (1A1) 250 l
steel, removable head (1A2) 250 l
aluminium, non-removable head (1B1) 250 l
aluminium, removable head (1B2) 250 l
metal other than steel or aluminium, non-removable head (1N1) 250 l
metal other than steel or aluminium, removable head (1N2) 250 l
plastics, non-removable head (1H1) 250 l
plastics, removable head (1H2) 250 l
Jerricans
steel, non-removable head (3A1) 60 l
steel, removable head (3A2) 60 l
aluminium, non-removable head (3B1) 60 l
aluminium, removable head (3B2) 60 l
plastics, non-removable head (3H1) 60 l
plastics, removable head (3H2) 60 l
Composite packagings
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum (6HA1, 6HB1) 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1) 120 l
plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with
outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2
or 6HH2)
60 l
glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1, 6PG1 or
6PD1) or with outer steel, aluminium, wooden or fibreboard box or with outer wickerwork
hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2) or with outer expanded or solid plastics
packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2).
60 l
Special packing provisions:
PP10 For UN No. 2014, 2984 and 3149, the packaging shall be vented.
– 107 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 108 –
P505 PACKING INSTRUCTION P505
This instruction applies to UN No. 3375.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Combination packagings: Inner packaging
maximum capacity
Outer
packaging
maximum
net mass
Boxes (4B, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4G, 4H2) or drums (1B2, 1G, 1N2, 1H2, 1D) or
jerricans (3B2, 3H2) with glass, plastics or metal inner packagings
5 l 125 kg
Single packagings: Maximum capacity
Drums
aluminium (1B1, 1B2) 250 l
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 250 l
Jerricans:
aluminium (3B1, 3B2) 60 l
plastics (3H1, 3H2) 60 l
Composite packagings:
plastics receptacle with outer aluminium drum (6HB1) 250 l
plastics receptacle with outer fibre, plastics or plywood drum (6HG1, 6HH1,
6HD1)
250 l
plastics receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box or plastics receptacle with
outer wooden, plywood, fibreboard or solid plastics box (6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2,
6HG2 or 6HH2)
60 l
glass receptacle with outer aluminium, fibre or plywood drum (6PB1, 6PG1,
6PD1) or with outer expanded or solid plastics plastics receptacles (6PH1 or
6PH2) or with outer aluminium crate or box or with outer wooden or fibreboard
box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2)
60 l
– 108 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 109 –
P520 PACKING INSTRUCTION P520
This instruction applies to organic peroxides of Class 5.2 and self-reactive substances of Class 4.1
The packagings listed below are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of
4.1.7.1 are met.
The packing methods are designated OP1 to OP8. The packing methods appropriate for the individual currently assigned
organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in 2.2.41.4 and 2.2.52.4. The quantities specified for each
packing method are the maximum quantities authorized per package. The following packagings are authorized:
(1) Combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and
4H2), drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D), jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1 and 3H2);
(2) Single packagings consisting of drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1G, 1H1, 1H2 and 1D) and jerricans (3A1, 3A2,
3B1, 3B2, 3H1 and 3H2);
(3) Composite packagings with plastics inner receptacles (6HA1, 6HA2, 6HB1, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1,
6HG2, 6HH1 and 6HH2).
Maximum quantity per packaging/package a for packing methods OP1 to OP8
Packing
Method
Maximum
Quantity
OP1 OP2 a OP3 OP4 a OP5 OP6 OP7 OP8
Maximum mass (kg) for
solids and for combination
packagings (liquid and
solid)
0.5 0.5/10 5 5/25 25 50 50 400 b
Maximum contents in
litres for liquids c
0.5 – 5 – 30 60 60 225 d
a If two values are given, the first applies to the maximum net mass per inner packaging and the second to the
maximum net mass of the complete package.
b 60 kg for jerricans / 200 kg for boxes and, for solids, 400 kg in combination packagings with outer packagings
comprising boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1 and 4H2) and with inner packagings of plastics or fibre with a
maximum net mass of 25 kg.
c Viscous substances shall be treated as solids when they do not meet the criteria provided in the definition for
“liquids” presented in 1.2.1.
d 60 litres for jerricans.
Additional requirements:
1. Metal packagings, including inner packagings of combination packagings and outer packagings of combination
or composite packagings may only be used for packing methods OP7 and OP8.
2. In combination packagings, glass receptacles may only be used as inner packagings with maximum contents of
0.5 kg for solids or 0.5 litre for liquids.
3. In combination packagings, cushioning materials shall not be readily combustible.
4. The packaging of an organic peroxide or self-reactive substance required to bear an “EXPLOSIVE” subsidiary
hazard label (model No.1, see 5.2.2.2.2) shall also comply with the provisions given in 4.1.5.10 and 4.1.5.11.
Special packing provisions:
PP21 For certain self-reactive substances of types B or C, UN Nos. 3221, 3222, 3223, 3224, 3231, 3232, 3233 and
3234, a smaller packaging than that allowed by packing methods OP5 or OP6 respectively shall be used (see
4.1.7 and 2.2.41.4).
PP22 UN No. 3241, 2-Bromo-2-nitropropane-1, 3-diol, shall be packed in accordance with packing method OP6.
– 109 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 110 –
P520 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P520
Special packing provisions (cont’d):
PP94 Very small amounts of energetic samples of 2.1.4.3 may be carried under UN No. 3223 or UN No. 3224, as
appropriate, provided that:
1. Only combination packagings with outer packagings comprising boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G,
4H1 and 4H2) are used;
2. The samples are carried in microtiter plates or multi-titer plates made of plastics, glass, porcelain or
stoneware as inner packaging;
3. The maximum amount per individual inner cavity does not exceed 0.01 g for solids or 0.01 ml for liquids;
4. The maximum net quantity per outer packaging is 20 g for solids or 20 ml for liquids, or in the case of mixed
packing the sum of grams and millilitres does not exceed 20; and
5. When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is optionally used as a coolant for quality control measures, the requirements
of 5.5.3 are complied with. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the inner packagings in their original
position. The inner and outer packagings shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant
used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
PP95 Small amounts of energetic samples of 2.1.4.3 may be carried under UN No. 3223 or UN No. 3224, as
appropriate, provided that:
1. The outer packaging consists only of corrugated fibreboard of type 4G having minimum dimensions of 60
cm (length) by 40.5 cm (width) by 30 cm (height) and minimum wall thickness of 1.3 cm;
2. The individual substance is contained in an inner packaging of glass or plastics of maximum capacity 30 ml
placed in an expandable polyethylene foam matrix of at least 130 mm thickness having a density of 18 ± 1
g/l;
3. Within the foam carrier, inner packagings are segregated from each other by a minimum distance of 40 mm
and from the wall of the outer packaging by a minimum distance of 70 mm. The package may contain up to
two layers of such foam matrices, each carrying up to 28 inner packagings;
4. The maximum content of each inner packaging does not exceed 1 g for solids or 1 ml for liquids;
5. The maximum net quantity per outer packaging is 56 g for solids or 56 ml for liquids, or in the case of mixed
packing the sum of grams and millilitres does not exceed 56; and
6. When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is optionally used as a coolant for quality control measures, the requirements
of 5.5.3 are complied with. Interior supports shall be provided to secure the inner packagings in their original
position. The inner and outer packagings shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant
used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
P600 PACKING INSTRUCTION P600
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1700, 2016 and 2017.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Outer packagings (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2)
meeting the packing group II performance level. The articles shall be individually packaged and separated from each
other using partitions, dividers, inner packagings or cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal
conditions of carriage.
Maximum net mass: 75 kg
– 110 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 111 –
P601 PACKING INSTRUCTION P601
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings
are hermetically sealed:
(1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 15 kg, consisting of
one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum quantity of 1 litre each and filled to not more than
90 % of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of
preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during carriage, individually placed in
metal receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents
of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in
1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer
packagings;
(2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or plastics inner packagings not exceeding 5 litres in capacity
individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert cushioning material in
1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings
with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90 % of their capacity.
The closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-
off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage;
(3) Packagings consisting of:
Outer packagings: Steel or plastics drums (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2), tested in accordance with the test
requirements in 6.1.5 at a mass corresponding to the mass of the assembled package either as a packaging
intended to contain inner packagings, or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked
accordingly;
Inner packagings:
Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1) meeting the requirements of Chapter 6.1 for
single packagings, subject to the following conditions:
(a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 0.3 MPa (gauge pressure);
(b) The design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa;
(c) They shall be isolated from the outer drum by the use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which
surrounds the inner packaging on all sides;
(d) Their capacity shall not exceed 125 litres;
(Cont’d on next page)
– 111 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 112 –
P601 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P601
(3) Packagings consisting of: (cont’d)
(e) Closures shall be of a screw cap type that are:
(i) physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure
by impact or vibration during carriage; and
(ii) provided with a cap seal;
(f) The outer and inner packagings shall be subjected periodically to a leakproofness test according to (b) at
intervals of not more than two and a half years;
(g) The complete packaging shall be visually inspected to the satisfaction of the competent authority at least
every 3 years; and
(h) The outer and inner packaging shall bear in clearly legible and durable characters:
(i) the date (month, year) of the initial test and the latest periodic test and inspection;
(ii) the stamp of the expert who carried out the test and inspection;
(4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be subjected to an initial
test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). Pressure
receptacles may not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Each pressure receptacle containing a toxic
by inhalation liquid with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³ (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve
conforming to the following:
(a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-threaded connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be
capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage;
(b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive
substances, a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap
with gasket joint attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of substance
through or past the packing;
(c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material;
(d) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets
shall be compatible with each other and with the contents.
Each pressure receptacle with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.0 mm and each pressure receptacle
which does not have fitted valve protection shall be carried in an outer packaging. Pressure receptacles shall
not be manifolded or interconnected.
Special packing provision:
PP82 (Deleted)
Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR:
RR3 (Deleted)
RR7 For UN No. 1251, the pressure receptacles shall however be subjected to the tests every five years.
RR10 UN No. 1614, when completely absorbed by an inert porous material, shall be packed in metal receptacles of a
capacity of not more than 7.5 litres, placed in wooden cases in such a manner that they cannot come into contact
with one another. The receptacles shall be entirely filled with the porous material which shall not shake down
or form dangerous spaces even after prolonged use or under impact, even at temperatures of up to 50 °C.
– 112 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 113 –
P602 PACKING INSTRUCTION P602
The following packagings are authorised provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings
are hermetically sealed:
(1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 15 kg, consisting of
one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum quantity of 1 litre each and filled to not more than
90 % of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable of
preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during carriage, individually placed in
metal receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb the entire contents
of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in
1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer
packagings;
(2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or plastics inner packagings individually packed with absorbent
material sufficient to absorb the entire contents and inert cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1,
1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross
mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than 90 % of their capacity. The closure of each
inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of
the closure by impact or vibration during carriage. Inner packagings shall not exceed 5 litres in capacity;
(3) Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1, 6HA1 or 6HH1), subject to the following conditions:
(a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 0.3 MPa (gauge pressure);
(b) The design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa; and
(c) Closures shall be of a screw cap type that are:
(i) physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure
by impact or vibration during carriage; and
(ii) provided with a cap seal;
(4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met. They shall be subjected to an initial
test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure). Pressure
receptacles may not be equipped with any pressure relief device. Each pressure receptacle containing a toxic by
inhalation liquid with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³ (ppm) shall be closed with a plug or valve
conforming to the following:
(a) Each plug or valve shall have a taper-threaded connection directly to the pressure receptacle and be
capable of withstanding the test pressure of the pressure receptacle without damage or leakage;
(b) Each valve shall be of the packless type with non-perforated diaphragm, except that, for corrosive
substances, a valve may be of the packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap
with gasket joint attached to the valve body or the pressure receptacle to prevent loss of substance
through or past the packing;
(c) Each valve outlet shall be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded solid plug and inert gasket material;
(d) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets
shall be compatible with each other and with the contents.
Each pressure receptacle with a wall thickness at any point of less than 2.0 mm and each pressure receptacle
which does not have fitted valve protection shall be carried in an outer packaging. Pressure receptacles shall
not be manifolded or interconnected.
– 113 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 114 –
P603 PACKING INSTRUCTION P603
This instruction applies to UN 3507.
The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and the special
packing provisions of 4.1.9.1.2, 4.1.9.1.4 and 4.1.9.1.7 are met:
Packagings consisting of:
(a) Metal or plastics primary receptacle(s); in
(b) Leakproof rigid secondary packaging(s); in
(c) A rigid outer packaging:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Additional requirements:
1. Primary inner receptacles shall be packed in secondary packagings in a way that, under normal conditions of
carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the secondary packaging. Secondary packagings
shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material to prevent movement. If multiple primary
receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or separated so as
to prevent contact between them.
2. The contents shall comply with the provisions of 2.2.7.2.4.5.2.
3. The provisions of 6.4.4 shall be met.
Special packing provision:
In the case of fissile-excepted material, limits specified in 2.2.7.2.3.5 shall be met.
– 114 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 115 –
P620 PACKING INSTRUCTION P620
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2814 and 2900.
The following packagings are authorized provided the special packing provisions of 4.1.8 are met:
Packagings meeting the requirements of Chapter 6.3 and approved accordingly consisting of:
(a) Inner packagings comprising:
(i) leakproof primary receptacle(s);
(ii) a leakproof secondary packaging;
(iii) other than for solid infectious substances, an absorbent material in sufficient quantity to absorb the entire
contents placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging; if multiple primary
receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either individually wrapped or
separated so as to prevent contact between them;
(b) A rigid outer packaging:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
The smallest external dimension shall be not less than 100 mm.
Additional requirements:
1. Inner packagings containing infectious substances shall not be consolidated with inner packagings containing
unrelated types of goods. Complete packages may be overpacked in accordance with the provisions of 1.2.1 and
5.1.2; such an overpack may contain dry ice.
2. Other than for exceptional consignments, e.g. whole organs which require special packaging, the following
additional requirements shall apply:
(a) Substances consigned at ambient temperatures or at a higher temperature: Primary receptacles shall
be of glass, metal or plastics. Positive means of ensuring a leakproof seal shall be provided, e.g. a heat
seal, a skirted stopper or a metal crimp seal. If screw caps are used, they shall be secured by positive
means, e.g., tape, paraffin sealing tape or manufactured locking closure;
(b) Substances consigned refrigerated or frozen: Ice, dry ice or other refrigerant shall be placed around
the secondary packaging(s) or alternatively in an overpack with one or more complete packages
marked in accordance with 6.3.3. Interior supports shall be provided to secure secondary packaging(s)
or packages in position after the ice or dry ice has dissipated. If ice is used, the outer packaging or
overpack shall be leakproof. If dry ice is used, the outer packaging or overpack shall permit the release
of carbon dioxide gas. The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their
integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used;
(c) Substances consigned in liquid nitrogen: Plastics primary receptacles capable of withstanding very
low temperature shall be used. The secondary packaging shall also be capable of withstanding very
low temperatures, and in most cases will need to be fitted over the primary receptacle individually.
Provisions for the carriage of liquid nitrogen shall also be fulfilled. The primary receptacle and the
secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the liquid nitrogen;
(d) Lyophilised substances may also be carried in primary receptacles that are flame-sealed glass
ampoules or rubber-stoppered glass vials fitted with metal seals.
3. Whatever the intended temperature of the consignment, the primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall
be capable of withstanding without leakage an internal pressure producing a pressure differential of not less than
95 kPa. This primary receptacle or secondary packaging shall also be capable of withstanding temperatures in
the range -40 °C to +55 °C.
4. Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in the same packaging as Class 6.2 infectious substances unless they
are necessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards of
the infectious substances. A quantity of 30 ml or less of dangerous goods included in Classes 3, 8 or 9 may be
packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances. These small quantities of dangerous goods
of Classes 3, 8 or 9 are not subject to any additional requirements of ADR when packed in accordance with this
packing instruction.
5. Alternative packagings for the carriage of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority of the
country of origin a in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.8.7.
a If the country of origin is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the competent authority of the first Contracting Party
to the ADR reached by the consignment.
– 115 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 116 –
P621 PACKING INSTRUCTION P621
This instruction applies to UN No. 3291.
The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 except 4.1.1.15 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Provided that there is sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the packaging
is capable of retaining liquids:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level for solids.
(2) For packages containing larger quantities of liquid:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2);
Composites (6HA1, 6HB1, 6HG1, 6HH1, 6HD1, 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2, 6PA1, 6PB1,
6PG1, 6PD1, 6PH1, 6PH2, 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PG2 or 6PD2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level for liquids.
Additional requirement:
Packagings intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture and retain
liquids under the performance test conditions in Chapter 6.1.
– 116 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 117 –
P622 PACKING INSTRUCTION P622
This instruction applies to waste of UN No. 3549 carried for disposal.
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
metal
plastics
metal
plastics
Boxes
steel (4A)
aluminium (4B)
other metal (4N)
plywood (4D)
fibreboard (4G)
plastics, solid (4H2)
Drums
steel (1A2)
aluminium (1B2)
other metal (1N2)
plywood (1D)
fibre (1G)
plastics (1H2)
Jerricans
steel (3A2)
aluminium (3B2)
plastics (3H2)
The outer packaging shall conform to the packing group I performance level for solids.
Additional requirements:
1. Fragile articles shall be contained in either a rigid inner packaging or a rigid intermediate packaging.
2. Inner packagings containing sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be rigid and resistant to
puncture.
3. The inner packaging, the intermediate packaging, and the outer packaging shall be capable of retaining liquids.
Outer packagings that are not capable of retaining liquids by design shall be fitted with a liner or suitable measure
of retaining liquids.
4. The inner packaging and/or the intermediate packaging may be flexible. When flexible packagings are used, they
shall be capable of passing the impact resistance test of at least 165 g according to ISO 7765-1:1988 “Plastics film
and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1: Staircase methods” and
the tear resistance test of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the
bag in accordance with ISO 6383-2:1983 “Plastics – Film and sheeting – Determination of tear resistance – Part 2:
Elmendorf method”. The maximum net mass of each flexible inner packaging shall be 30 kg.
5. Each flexible intermediate packaging shall contain only one inner packaging.
6. Inner packagings containing a small amount of free liquid may be included in intermediate packaging provided that
there is sufficient absorbent or solidifying material in the inner or intermediate packaging to absorb or solidify all
the liquid content present. Suitable absorbent material which withstands the temperatures and vibrations liable to
occur under normal conditions of carriage shall be used.
7. Intermediate packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning and/or absorbent material.
– 117 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 118 –
P650 PACKING INSTRUCTION P650
This packing instruction applies to UN No. 3373.
(1) The packaging shall be of good quality, strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally
encountered during carriage, including transhipment between cargo transport units and between cargo transport
units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet or overpack for subsequent manual or mechanical
handling. Packagings shall be constructed and closed to prevent any loss of contents that might be caused under
normal conditions of carriage by vibration or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure.
(2) The packaging shall consist of at least three components:
(a) a primary receptacle;
(b) a secondary packaging; and
(c) an outer packaging
of which either the secondary or the outer packaging shall be rigid.
(3) Primary receptacles shall be packed in secondary packagings in such a way that, under normal conditions of
carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or leak their contents into the secondary packaging. Secondary
packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning material. Any leakage of the contents
shall not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging.
(4) For carriage, the mark illustrated below shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on a
background of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible. The mark shall be in the form of a
square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped) with minimum dimensions of 50 mm by 50 mm; the width of
the line shall be at least 2 mm and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high. The proper shipping name
“BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B” in letters at least 6 mm high shall be marked on the outer
packaging adjacent to the diamond-shaped mark.
(5) At least one surface of the outer packaging shall have a minimum dimension of 100 mm 100 mm.
(6) The completed package shall be capable of successfully passing the drop test in 6.3.5.3 as specified in 6.3.5.2
at a height of 1.2 m. Following the appropriate drop sequence, there shall be no leakage from the primary
receptacle(s) which shall remain protected by absorbent material, when required, in the secondary packaging.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 118 –
Minimum dimension
50 mm
Minimum dimension
50 mm
UN3373Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 119 –
P650 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P650
(7) For liquid substances:
(a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be leakproof;
(b) The secondary packaging shall be leakproof;
(c) If multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either
individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them;
(d) Absorbent material shall be placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary packaging. The
absorbent material shall be in quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents of the primary receptacle(s)
so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the integrity of the cushioning material
or of the outer packaging;
(e) The primary receptacle or the secondary packaging shall be capable of withstanding, without leakage, an
internal pressure of 95 kPa (0.95 bar).
(8) For solid substances:
(a) The primary receptacle(s) shall be siftproof;
(b) The secondary packaging shall be siftproof;
(c) If multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they shall be either
individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them;
(d) If there is any doubt as to whether or not residual liquid may be present in the primary receptacle during
carriage then a packaging suitable for liquids, including absorbent materials, shall be used.
(9) Refrigerated or frozen specimens: Ice, dry ice and liquid nitrogen:
(a) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. When used,
ice shall be placed outside the secondary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack. Interior
supports shall be provided to secure the secondary packagings in the original position. If ice is used, the
outside packaging or overpack shall be leakproof.
(b) The primary receptacle and the secondary packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of
the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were
lost.
(10) When packages are placed in an overpack, the package marks required by this packing instruction shall either
be clearly visible or be reproduced on the outside of the overpack.
(11) Infectious substances assigned to UN No. 3373 which are packed and packages which are marked in accordance
with this packing instruction are not subject to any other requirement in ADR.
(12) Clear instructions on filling and closing such packages shall be provided by packaging manufacturers and
subsequent distributors to the consignor or to the person who prepares the package (e.g. patient) to enable the
package to be correctly prepared for carriage.
(13) Other dangerous goods shall not be packed in the same packaging as Class 6.2 infectious substances unless they
are necessary for maintaining the viability, stabilizing or preventing degradation or neutralizing the hazards of
the infectious substances. A quantity of 30 ml or less of dangerous goods included in Classes 3, 8 or 9 may be
packed in each primary receptacle containing infectious substances. When these small quantities of dangerous
goods are packed with infectious substances in accordance with this packing instruction no other requirements
of ADR need be met.
(14) If any substance has leaked and has been spilled in a cargo transport unit, it may not be reused until after it has
been thoroughly cleaned and, if necessary, disinfected or decontaminated. Any other goods and articles carried
in the same cargo transport unit shall be examined for possible contamination.
Additional requirement:
Alternative packagings for the carriage of animal material may be authorized by the competent authority of the country
of origin a in accordance with the provisions of 4.1.8.7.
a If the country of origin is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the competent authority of the first Contracting Party
to the ADR reached by the consignment.
– 119 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 120 –
P800 PACKING INSTRUCTION P800
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2803 and 2809.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
(2) Steel flasks or bottles with threaded closures with a capacity not exceeding 3 l; or
(3) Combination packagings which conform to the following requirements:
(a) Inner packagings shall comprise glass, metal or rigid plastics intended to contain liquids with a
maximum net mass of 15 kg each;
(b) The inner packagings shall be packed with sufficient cushioning material to prevent breakage;
(c) Either the inner packagings or the outer packagings shall have inner liners or bags of strong leakproof
and puncture-resistant material impervious to the contents and completely surrounding the contents to
prevent it from escaping from the package irrespective of its position or orientation;
(d) The following outer packagings and maximum net masses are authorized:
Outer packaging: Maximum net mass
Drums
steel (1A1, 1A2) 400 kg
metal, other than steel or aluminium (1N1, 1N2) 400 kg
plastics (1H1, 1H2) 400 kg
plywood (1D) 400 kg
fibre (1G) 400 kg
Boxes
steel (4A) 400 kg
metal, other than steel or aluminium (4N) 400 kg
natural wood (4C1) 250 kg
natural wood with sift-proof walls (4C2) 250 kg
plywood (4D) 250 kg
reconstituted wood (4F) 125 kg
fibreboard (4G) 125 kg
expanded plastics (4H1) 60 kg
solid plastics (4H2) 125 kg
Special packing provision:
PP41 For UN No. 2803, when it is necessary to carry gallium at low temperatures in order to maintain it in a
completely solid state, the above packagings may be overpack ed in a strong, water-resistant outer packaging
which contains dry ice or other means of refrigeration. If a refrigerant is used, all of the above materials used
in the packaging of gallium shall be chemically and physically resistant to the refrigerant and shall have impact
resistance at the low temperatures of the refrigerant employed. If dry ice is used, the outer packaging shall
permit the release of carbon dioxide gas.
– 120 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 121 –
P801 PACKING INSTRUCTION P801
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2794, 2795 and 3028 and used batteries of UN No. 2800.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.6, and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Rigid outer packagings, wooden slatted crates or pallets.
Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) Battery stacks shall be in tiers separated by a layer of electrically non-conductive material;
(b) Battery terminals shall not support the weight of other superimposed elements;
(c) Batteries shall be packaged or secured to prevent inadvertent movement;
(d) Batteries shall not leak under normal conditions of carriage or appropriate measures shall be taken to
prevent the release of electrolyte from the package (e.g. individually packaging batteries or other equally
effective methods); and
(e) Batteries shall be protected against short circuits.
(2) Stainless steel or plastics bins may also be used to carry used batteries.
Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) The bins shall be resistant to the electrolyte that was contained in the batteries;
(b) The bins shall not be filled to a height greater than the height of their sides;
(c) The outside of the bins shall be free of residues of electrolyte contained in the batteries;
(d) Under normal conditions of carriage, no electrolyte shall leak from the bins;
(e) Measures shall be taken to ensure that filled bins cannot lose their content;
(f) Measures shall be taken to prevent short circuits (e.g. batteries are discharged, individual protection of the
battery terminals, etc.); and
(g) The bins shall be either:
(i) covered; or
(ii) carried in closed or sheeted vehicles or containers.
NOTE: The packagings authorized in (1) and (2) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
P801a PACKING INSTRUCTION P801a
(Deleted)
– 121 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 122 –
P802 PACKING INSTRUCTION P802
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Combination packagings:
Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or
4H2;
maximum net mass: 75 kg.
Inner packagings: glass or plastics; maximum capacity: 10 litres;
(2) Combination packagings:
Outer packagings: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or
4H2;
maximum net mass: 125 kg.
Inner packagings: metal; maximum capacity: 40 litres;
(3) Composite packagings: Glass receptacle with outer steel, aluminium or plywood drum (6PA1, 6PB1 or 6PD1)
or with outer steel, aluminium or wooden box or with outer wickerwork hamper (6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PD2)
or with outer solid plastics packaging (6PH2); maximum capacity: 60 litres.
(4) Steel drums (1A1) with a maximum capacity of 250 litres;
(5) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
P803 PACKING INSTRUCTION P803
This instruction applies to UN No. 2028.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
(2) Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2).
Maximum net mass: 75 kg.
The articles shall be individually packaged and separated from each other using partitions, dividers, inner packagings
or cushioning material to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of carriage.
– 122 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 123 –
P804 PACKING INSTRUCTION P804
This instruction applies to UN No. 1744.
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met and the packagings
are hermetically sealed:
(1) Combination packagings with a maximum gross mass of 25 kg, consisting of
– one or more glass inner packaging(s) with a maximum capacity of 1.3 litres each and filled to not more
than 90 % of their capacity; the closure(s) of which shall be physically held in place by any means capable
of preventing back-off or loosening by impact or vibration during carriage, individually placed in
– metal or rigid plastics receptacles together with cushioning and absorbent material sufficient to absorb
the entire contents of the glass inner packaging(s), further packed in
– 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer
packagings.
(2) Combination packagings consisting of metal or polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) inner packagings, not exceeding
5 litres in capacity individually packed with absorbent material sufficient to absorb the contents and inert
cushioning material in 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G, 4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G
or 4H2 outer packagings with a maximum gross mass of 75 kg. Inner packagings shall not be filled to more than
90 % of their capacity. The closure of each inner packaging shall be physically held in place by any means
capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during carriage;
(3) Packagings consisting of:
Outer packagings:
Steel or plastics drums (1A1, 1A2, 1H1 or 1H2) tested in accordance with the test requirements in 6.1.5 at a
mass corresponding to the mass of the assembled package either as a packaging intended to contain inner
packagings, or as a single packaging intended to contain solids or liquids, and marked accordingly;
Inner packagings:
Drums and composite packagings (1A1, 1B1, 1N1, 1H1 or 6HA1) meeting the requirements of Chapter 6.1 for
single packagings, subject to the following conditions:
(a) The hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted at a pressure of at least 300 kPa (3 bar) (gauge pressure);
(b) The design and production leakproofness tests shall be conducted at a test pressure of 30 kPa (0.3 bar);
(c) They shall be isolated from the outer drum by the use of inert shock-mitigating cushioning material which
surrounds the inner packaging on all sides;
(d) Their capacity shall not exceed 125 litres;
(e) Closures shall be of a screw type that are:
(i) Physically held in place by any means capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure
by impact or vibration during carriage;
(ii) Provided with a cap seal;
(f) The outer and inner packagings shall be subjected periodically to an internal inspection and leakproofness
test according to (b) at intervals of not more than two and a half years; and
(g) The outer and inner packagings shall bear in clearly legible and durable characters:
(i) the date (month, year) of the initial test and the latest periodic test and inspection of the inner
packaging; and
(ii) the name or authorized symbol of the expert who carried out the tests and inspections;
(4) Pressure receptacles, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.3.6 are met.
(a) They shall be subjected to an initial test and periodic tests every 10 years at a pressure of not less than 1
MPa (10 bar) (gauge pressure);
(b) They shall be subjected periodically to an internal inspection and leakproofness test at intervals of not
more than two and a half years;
(c) They may not be equipped with any pressure relief device;
(d) Each pressure receptacle shall be closed with a plug or valve(s) fitted with a secondary closure device;
and
(e) The materials of construction for the pressure receptacle, valves, plugs, outlet caps, luting and gaskets
shall be compatible with each other and with the contents.
– 123 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 124 –
P900 PACKING INSTRUCTION P900
(Reserved)
P901 PACKING INSTRUCTION P901
This instruction applies to UN No. 3316.
The following combination packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 1H1, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the performance level consistent with the packing group assigned to the kit as a whole
(see special provision 251 of Chapter 3.3). Where the kit contains only dangerous goods to which no packing group is
assigned, packagings shall meet the packing group II performance level.
Maximum quantity of dangerous goods per outer packaging: 10 kg excluding the mass of any carbon dioxide, solid
(dry ice) used as a refrigerant.
Additional requirements:
Dangerous goods in kits shall be packed in inner packagings which shall be protected from other materials in the kit.
P902 PACKING INSTRUCTION P902
This instruction applies to UN No. 3268.
Packaged articles:
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group III performance level.
The packagings shall be designed and constructed so as to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent operation
during normal conditions of carriage.
Unpackaged articles:
The articles may also be carried unpackaged in dedicated handling devices or cargo transport units when moved to,
from, or between where they are manufactured and an assembly plant including intermediate handling locations.
Additional requirement:
Any pressure receptacle shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s)
contained therein.
– 124 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 125 –
P903 PACKING INSTRUCTION P903
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090 , 3091, 3480 and 3481.
For the purpose of this packing instruction, “equipment” means apparatus for which the lithium cells or batteries will
provide electrical power for its operation. The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions
of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For cells and batteries:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Cells or batteries shall be packed in packagings so that the cells or batteries are protected against damage that
may be caused by the movement or placement of the cells or batteries within the packaging.
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(2) In addition, for a cell or a battery with a gross mass of 12 kg or more employing a strong, impact resistant outer
casing:
(a) Strong outer packagings;
(b) Protective enclosures (e.g., fully enclosed or wooden slatted crates); or
(c) Pallets or other handling devices.
Cells or batteries shall be secured to prevent inadvertent movement, and the terminals shall not support the
weight of other superimposed elements.
Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
(3) For cells or batteries packed with equipment:
Packagings conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction, then placed with the
equipment in an outer packaging; or
Packagings that completely enclose the cells or batteries, then placed with equipment in a packaging conforming
to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction.
The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging.
(4) For cells or batteries contained in equipment:
Strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the
packaging capacity and its intended use. They shall be constructed in such a manner as to prevent accidental
operation during carriage. Packagings need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
Large equipment can be offered for carriage unpackaged or on pallets when the cells or batteries are afforded
equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained.
When intentionally active, devices such as radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, watches and temperature
loggers, which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat, may be carried in strong outer
packagings.
NOTE: For carriage in a transport chain including air carriage, these devices, when active, shall meet defined
standards for electromagnetic radiation to ensure that the operation of the devices does not interfere with
aircraft systems.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 125 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 126 –
P903 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P903
(5) For packagings containing both cells or batteries packed with equipment and contained in equipment:
(a) For cells and batteries, packagings that completely enclose the cells or batteries, then placed with
equipment in a packaging conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction;
or
(b) Packagings conforming to the requirements in paragraph (1) of this packing instruction, then placed with
the equipment in a strong outer packaging constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and
design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use. The outer packaging shall be
constructed in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during carriage and need not meet the
requirements of 4.1.1.3.
The equipment shall be secured against movement within the outer packaging.
When intentionally active, devices such as radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, watches and temperature
loggers, which are not capable of generating a dangerous evolution of heat, may be carried in strong outer
packagings.
NOTE: For carriage in a transport chain including air carriage, these devices, when active, shall meet defined
standards for electromagnetic radiation to ensure that the operation of the devices does not interfere with
aircraft systems.
NOTE: The packagings authorized in (2), (4) and (5) may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirement:
Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
– 126 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 127 –
P903a PACKING INSTRUCTION P903a
(Deleted)
P903b PACKING INSTRUCTION P903b
(Deleted)
P904 PACKING INSTRUCTION P904
This instruction applies to UN No. 3245.
The following packagings are authorized:
(1) Packagings meeting the provisions of 4.1.1.1, 4.1.1.2, 4.1.1.4, 4.1.1.8 and 4.1.3 and so designed that they meet
the construction requirements of 6.1.4. Outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate
strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, shall be used. Where this packing
instruction is used for the carriage of inner packagings of combination packagings the packaging shall be
designed and constructed to prevent inadvertent discharge during normal conditions of carriage.
(2) Packagings, which need not conform to the packaging test requirements of Part 6, but conforming to the
following:
(a) An inner packaging comprising:
(i) primary receptacle(s) and a secondary packaging, the primary receptacle(s) or the secondary
packaging shall be leakproof for liquids or siftproof for solids;
(ii) for liquids, absorbent material placed between the primary receptacle(s) and the secondary
packaging. The absorbent material shall be in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents of
the primary receptacle(s) so that any release of the liquid substance will not compromise the
integrity of the cushioning material or of the outer packaging;
(iii) if multiple fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging they shall be
individually wrapped or separated to prevent contact between them;
(b) An outer packaging shall be strong enough for its capacity, mass and intended use, and with a smallest
external dimension of at least 100 mm.
For carriage, the mark illustrated below shall be displayed on the external surface of the outer packaging on a background
of a contrasting colour and shall be clearly visible and legible. The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle
of 45° (diamond-shaped) with each side having a length of at least 50 mm; the width of the line shall be at least 2 mm
and the letters and numbers shall be at least 6 mm high.
Additional requirement:
Ice, dry ice and liquid nitrogen
When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of 5.5.3 shall apply. When used, ice shall be
placed outside the secondary packagings or in the outer packaging or an overpack. Interior supports shall be provided
to secure the secondary packaging in the original position. If ice is used, the outside packaging or overpack shall be
leakproof.
– 127 –
UN 3245
Minimum dimension
50 mm
Minimum dimension
50 mm
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 128 –
P905 PACKING INSTRUCTION P905
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2990 and 3072.
Any suitable packaging is authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met, except that packagings
need not conform to the requirements of Part 6.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
When the life saving appliances are constructed to incorporate or are contained in rigid outer weatherproof casings
(such as for lifeboats), they may be carried unpackaged.
Additional requirements:
1. All dangerous substances and articles contained as equipment within the appliances shall be secured to prevent
inadvertent movement and in addition:
(a) Signal devices of Class 1 shall be packed in plastics or fibreboard inner packagings;
(b) Non-flammable, non-toxic gases shall be contained in cylinders as specified by the competent authority,
which may be connected to the appliance;
(c) Electric storage batteries (Class 8) and lithium batteries (Class 9) shall be disconnected or electrically
isolated and secured to prevent any spillage of liquid; and
(d) Small quantities of other dangerous substances (for example in Classes 3, 4.1 and 5.2) shall be packed
in strong inner packagings.
2. Preparation for transport and packaging shall include provisions to prevent any accidental inflation of the
appliance.
P906 PACKING INSTRUCTION P906
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 2315, 3151, 3152 and 3432.
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For liquids and solids containing or contaminated with PCBs, polyhalogenated biphenyls, polyhalogenated
terphenyls or halogenated monomethyldiphenylmethanes: Packagings in accordance with packing instructions
P001 or P002, as appropriate.
(2) For transformers and condensers and other articles:
(a) Packagings in accordance with packing instructions P001 or P002. The articles shall be secured with
suitable cushioning material to prevent inadvertent movement during normal conditions of carriage; or
(b) Leakproof packagings which are capable of containing, in addition to the articles, at least 1.25 times the
volume of the liquid PCBs, polyhalogenated biphenyls, polyhalogenated terphenyls or halogenated
monomethyldiphenylmethanes present in them. There shall be sufficient absorbent material in the
packagings to absorb at least 1.1 times the volume of liquid which is contained in the articles. In general,
transformers and condensers shall be carried in leakproof metal packagings which are capable of
holding, in addition to the transformers and condensers, at least 1.25 times the volume of the liquid
present in them.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Notwithstanding the above, liquids and solids not packaged in accordance with packing instructions P001 and P002
and unpackaged transformers and condensers may be carried in cargo transport units fitted with a leakproof metal tray
to a height of at least 800 mm, containing sufficient inert absorbent material to absorb at least 1.1 times the volume of
any free liquid.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirement:
Adequate provisions shall be taken to seal the transformers and condensers to prevent leakage during normal conditions
of carriage.
– 128 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 129 –
P907 PACKING INSTRUCTION P907
This instruction applies to articles, such as machinery, apparatus or devices of UN No. 3363.
If the article is constructed and designed so that the receptacles containing the dangerous goods are afforded adequate
protection, an outer packaging is not required. Dangerous goods in an article shall otherwise be packed in outer
packagings constructed of suitable material, and of adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity
and its intended use, and meeting the applicable requirements of 4.1.1.1.
Receptacles containing dangerous goods shall conform to the general provisions in 4.1.1, except that 4.1.1.3, 4.1.1.4,
4.1.1.12 and 4.1.1.14 do not apply. For non-flammable, non-toxic gases, the inner cylinder or receptacle, its contents
and filling ratio shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority of the country in which the cylinder or receptacle
is filled.
In addition, the manner in which receptacles are contained within the article shall be such that under normal conditions
of carriage, damage to receptacles containing the dangerous goods is unlikely; and in the event of damage to
receptacles containing solid or liquid dangerous goods, no leakage of the dangerous goods from the article is possible
(a leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this requirement). Receptacles containing dangerous goods shall be so
installed, secured or cushioned as to prevent their breakage or leakage and so as to control their movement within the
article during normal conditions of carriage. Cushioning material shall not react dangerously with the content of the
receptacles. Any leakage of the contents shall not substantially impair the protective properties of the cushioning
material.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
P908 PACKING INSTRUCTION P908
This instruction applies to damaged or defective lithium ion cells and batteries and damaged or defective lithium metal
cells and batteries, including those contained in equipment, of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481.
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
For cells and batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G)
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2)
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2)
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
1. Each damaged or defective cell or battery or equipment containing such cells or batteries shall be
individually packed in inner packaging and placed inside an outer packaging. The inner packaging or outer
packaging shall be leak-proof to prevent the potential release of electrolyte.
2. Each inner packaging shall be surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive
thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat.
3. Sealed packagings shall be fitted with a venting device when appropriate.
4. Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibrations and shocks, prevent movement
of the cells or batteries within the package that may lead to further damage and a dangerous condition
during carriage. Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may also be
used to meet this requirement.
5. Non combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the
packaging is designed or manufactured.
For leaking cells or batteries, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to the inner or outer packaging to
absorb any release of electrolyte.
A cell or battery with a net mass of more than 30 kg shall be limited to one cell or battery per outer packaging.
Additional requirement:
Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
– 129 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 130 –
P909 PACKING INSTRUCTION P909
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 carried for disposal or recycling, either packed
together with or packed without non-lithium batteries.
(1) Cells and batteries shall be packed in accordance with the following:
(a) The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3, are
met:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H2); and
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
(b) Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level.
(c) Metal packagings shall be fitted with an electrically non-conductive lining material (e.g. plastics) of
adequate strength for the intended use.
(2) However, lithium ion cells with a Watt-hour rating of not more than 20 Wh, lithium ion batteries with a Watt-
hour rating of not more than 100 Wh, lithium metal cells with a lithium content of not more than 1 g and lithium
metal batteries with an aggregate lithium content of not more than 2 g may be packed in accordance with the
following:
(a) In strong outer packaging up to 30 kg gross mass meeting the general provisions of 4.1.1, except 4.1.1.3,
and 4.1.3.
(b) Metal packagings shall be fitted with an electrically non-conductive lining material (e.g. plastics) of
adequate strength for the intended use.
(3) For cells or batteries contained in equipment, strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material, and of
adequate strength and design in relation to the packaging capacity and its intended use, may be used. Packagings
need not meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3. Equipment may also be offered for carriage unpackaged or on pallets
when the cells or batteries are afforded equivalent protection by the equipment in which they are contained.
(4) In addition, for cells or batteries with a gross mass of 12 kg or more employing a strong, impact resistant outer
casing, strong outer packagings constructed of suitable material and of adequate strength and design in relation
to the packaging’s capacity and its intended use, may be used. Packagings need not meet the requirements of
4.1.1.3.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirements:
1. Cells and batteries shall be designed or packed to prevent short circuits and the dangerous evolution of heat.
2. Protection against short circuits and the dangerous evolution of heat includes, but is not limited to:
– individual protection of the battery terminals,
– inner packaging to prevent contact between cells and batteries,
– batteries with recessed terminals designed to protect against short circuits, or
– the use of an electrically non-conductive and non-combustible cushioning material to fill empty space
between the cells or batteries in the packaging.
3. Cells and batteries shall be secured within the outer packaging to prevent excessive movement during carriage
(e.g. by using a non-combustible and electrically non-conductive cushioning material or through the use of a
tightly closed plastics bag).
– 130 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 131 –
P910 PACKING INSTRUCTION P910
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 production runs consisting of not more than 100 cells
or batteries and to pre-production prototypes of cells or batteries when these prototypes are carried for testing.
The following packagings are authorized provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For cells and batteries, including when packed with equipment:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level and shall meet the following
requirements:
(a) Batteries and cells, including equipment, of different sizes, shapes or masses shall be packaged in an outer
packaging of a tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed
the gross mass for which the design type has been tested;
(b) Each cell or battery shall be individually packed in an inner packaging and placed inside an outer packaging;
(c) Each inner packaging shall be completely surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-
conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat;
(d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent movement
of the cells or batteries within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during
carriage. Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may be used to meet
this requirement;
(e) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging
is designed or manufactured;
(f) A cell or battery with a net mass of more than 30 kg shall be limited to one cell or battery per outer
packaging.
(2) For cells and batteries contained in equipment:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2).
Packagings shall conform to the packing group II performance level and shall meet the following
requirements:
(a) Equipment of different sizes, shapes or masses shall be packaged in an outer packaging of a tested design
type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which
the design type has been tested;
(b) The equipment shall be constructed or packaged in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation
during carriage;
(c) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent
movement of the equipment within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition
during carriage. When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement it shall be non-combustible
and electrically non-conductive; and
(d) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the
packaging is designed or manufactured.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 131 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 132 –
P910 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P910
(3) The equipment or the batteries may be carried unpackaged under conditions specified by the competent
authority of any Contracting Party to ADR, which may also recognize an approval granted by the competent
authority of a country which is not a Contracting Party to ADR, provided that this approval has been granted
in accordance with the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO
Technical Instructions. Additional conditions that may be considered in the approval process include, but are
not limited to:
(a) The equipment or the battery shall be strong enough to withstand the shocks and loadings normally
encountered during carriage, including trans-shipment between cargo transport units and between cargo
transport units and warehouses as well as any removal from a pallet for subsequent manual or mechanical
handling; and
(b) The equipment or the battery shall be fixed in cradles or crates or other handling devices in such a way
that it will not become loose during normal conditions of carriage.
NOTE: The packagings authorized may exceed a net mass of 400 kg (see 4.1.3.3).
Additional requirements
The cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit;
Protection against short circuits includes, but is not limited to,
– individual protection of the battery terminals,
– inner packaging to prevent contact between cells and batteries,
– batteries with recessed terminals designed to protect against short circuits, or
– the use of a electrically non-conductive and non-combustible cushioning material to fill empty space between the
cells or batteries in the packaging.
P911 PACKING INSTRUCTION P911
This instruction applies to damaged or defective cells and batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 liable to
rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of
toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of carriage.
The following packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
For cells and batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries:
Drums (1A2, 1B2, 1N2, 1H2, 1D, 1G);
Boxes (4A, 4B, 4N, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2);
Jerricans (3A2, 3B2, 3H2)
The packagings shall conform to the packing group I performance level.
(1) The packaging shall be capable of meeting the following additional performance requirements in case of rapid
disassembly, dangerous reaction, production of a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission
of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours of the cells or batteries:
(a) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not have a temperature of more than 100°C.
A momentary spike in temperature up to 200 °C is acceptable;
(b) No flame shall occur outside the package;
(c) No projectiles shall exit the package;
(d) The structural integrity of the package shall be maintained; and
(e) The packagings shall have a gas management system (e.g. filter system, air circulation, containment for gas,
gas tight packaging etc.), as appropriate.
(2) The additional packaging performance requirements shall be verified by a test as specified by the competent
authority of any ADR Contracting Party who may also recognize a test specified by the competent authority of
a country which is not an ADR Contracting Party provided that this test has been specified in accordance with
the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructionsa.
A verification report shall be available on request. As a minimum requirement, the cell or battery name, the cell
or battery number, the mass, type, energy content of the cells or batteries, the packaging identification and the
test data according to the verification method as specified by the competent authority shall be listed in the
verification report.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 132 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 133 –
P911 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) P911
(3) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of section 5.5.3 shall apply. The inner
packaging and outer packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as
the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
Additional requirement:
Cells or batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
a The following criteria, as relevant, may be considered to assess the performance of the packaging:
(a) The assessment shall be done under a quality management system (as described e.g. in section
2.2.9.1.7 (e)) allowing for the traceability of tests results, reference data and characterization models used;
(b) The list of hazards expected in case of thermal run-away for the cell or battery type, in the condition
it is carried (e.g. usage of an inner packaging, state of charge (SOC), use of sufficient non-combustible,
electrically non-conductive and absorbent cushioning material etc.), shall be clearly identified and quantified;
the reference list of possible hazards for lithium cells or batteries (rapidly disassemble, dangerously react,
produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases
or vapours) can be used for this purpose. The quantification of these hazards shall rely on available scientific
literature;
(c) The mitigating effects of the packaging shall be identified and characterized, based on the nature of
the protections provided and the construction material properties. A list of technical characteristics and
drawings shall be used to support this assessment (Density [kg·m -3 ], specific heat capacity [J·kg -1·K-1 ], heating
value [kJ·kg -1 ], thermal conductivity [W·m -1·K-1 ], melting temperature and flammability temperature [K], heat
transfer coefficient of the outer packaging [W·m -2·K-1 ], …);
(d) The test and any supporting calculations shall assess the result of a thermal run-away of the cell or
battery inside the packaging in the normal conditions of carriage;
(e) In case the SOC of the cell or battery is not known, the assessment used, shall be done with the highest
possible SOC corresponding to the cell or battery use conditions;
(f) The surrounding conditions in which the packaging may be used and carried shall be described
(including for possible consequences of gas or smoke emissions on the environment, such as ventilation or other
methods) according to the gas management system of the packaging;
(g) The tests or the model calculation shall consider the worst case scenario for the thermal run-away
triggering and propagation inside the cell or battery; this scenario includes the worst possible failure in the
normal carriage condition, the maximum heat and flame emissions for the possible propagation of the reaction;
(h) These scenarios shall be assessed over a period of time long enough to allow all the possible
consequences to occur (e.g. 24 hours);
(i) In the case of multiple batteries and multiple items of equipment containing batteries, additional
requirements such as the maximum number of batteries and items of equipment, the total maximum energy
content of the batteries, and the configuration inside the package, including separations and protections of the
parts, shall be considered.
R001 PACKING INSTRUCTION R001
The following packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Light gauge metal packagings Maximum capacity/maximum net mass
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
steel, non-removable head (0A1) Not allowed 40 l / 50 kg 40 l / 50 kg
steel, removable head (0A2) a Not allowed 40 l / 50 kg 40 l / 50 kg
a Not allowed for UN No. 1261 NITROMETHANE.
NOTE 1: This instruction applies to solids and liquids (provided the design type is tested and marked appropriately).
NOTE 2: For Class 3, packing group II, these packagings may be used only for substances with no subsidiary hazard
and a vapour pressure of not more than 110 kPa at 50 °C and for slightly toxic pesticides.
– 133 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 134 –
4.1.4.2 Packing instructions concerning the use of IBCs
IBC01 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC01
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (31A, 31B and 31N).
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
BB1 For UN No. 3130, the openings of receptacles for this substance shall be tightly closed by means of two devices
in series, one of which shall be screwed or secured in an equivalent manner.
IBC02 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC02
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (31HZ1).
Special packing provisions:
B5 For UN Nos. 1791, 2014, 2984 and 3149, IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during carriage.
The inlet to the venting device shall be sited in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions
during carriage.
B7 For UN Nos. 1222 and 1865, IBCs with a capacity greater than 450 litres are not permitted due to the substance’s
potential for explosion when carried in large volumes.
B8 The pure form of this substance shall not be transported in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of
more than 110 kPa at 50 °C or 130 kPa at 55 °C.
B15 For UN No. 2031 with more than 55 % nitric acid, the permitted use of rigid plastics IBCs and of rigid plastics
inner receptacles of composite IBCs shall be two years from their date of manufacture.
B16 For UN No. 3375, IBCs of type 31A and 31N are not allowed without competent authority approval.
Special packing provisions specific to RID and ADR:
BB2 For UN No.1203, notwithstanding special provision 534 (see 3.3.1), IBCs shall only be used when the actual
vapour pressure is not more than 110 kPa at 50 °C, or 130 kPa at 55 °C.
BB4 For UN Nos. 1133, 1139, 1197, 1210, 1263, 1266, 1286, 1287, 1306, 1866, 1993 and 1999, assigned to packing
group III in accordance with 2.2.3.1.4, IBCs with a capacity greater than 450 litres are not permitted.
IBC03 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC03
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (31HZ1, 31HA2, 31HB2, 31HN2, 31HD2 and 31HH2).
Special packing provision:
B8 The pure form of this substance shall not be carried in IBCs since it is known to have a vapour pressure of more
than 110 kPa at 50 °C or 130 kPa at 55 °C.
B19 For UN Nos. 3532 and 3534, IBCs shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to
prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the IBCs in the event of loss of stabilization.
– 134 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 135 –
IBC04 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC04
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N).
IBC05 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC05
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N).);
(2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (11HZ1, 21HZ1 and 31HZ1).
IBC06 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC06
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 and 31HZ1).
Additional requirement:
Where the solid may become liquid during carriage see 4.1.3.4.
Special packing provisions:
B12 For UN No. 2907, IBCs shall meet the packing group II performance level. IBCs meeting the test criteria of
packing group I shall not be used.
IBC07 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC07
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 and 31HZ1);
(4) Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F).
Additional requirements:
1. Where the solid may become liquid during carriage see 4.1.3.4.
2. Liners of wooden IBCs shall be siftproof.
Special packing provision:
B18 For UN Nos. 3531 and 3533, IBCs shall be designed and constructed to permit the release of gas or vapour to
prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the IBCs in the event of loss of stabilization.
B20 UN No. 3550 may be carried in flexible IBCs (13H3 or 13H4) with siftproof liners to prevent any egress of
dust during carriage.
– 135 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 136 –
IBC08 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC08
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
(3) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2 and 31HZ1);
(4) Fibreboard (11G);
(5) Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F);
(6) Flexible (13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 and 13M2).
Additional requirement:
Where the solid may become liquid during carriage see 4.1.3.4.
Special packing provisions:
B3 Flexible IBCs shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and water-restistant liner.
B4 Flexible, fibreboard or wooden IBCs shall be sift-proof and water-resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof
and water-resistant liner.
B6 For UN Nos. 1363, 1364, 1365, 1386, 1408, 1841, 2211, 2217, 2793 and 3314, IBCs are not required to meet
the IBC testing requirements of Chapter 6.5.
B13 NOTE: For UN Nos. 1748, 2208, 2880, 3485, 3486 and 3487, carriage by sea in IBCs is prohibited according
to the IMDG Code.
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
BB3 For UN 3509, IBCs are not required to meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
IBCs meeting the requirements of 6.5.5, made leak tight or fitted with a leak tight and puncture
resistant sealed liner or bag, shall be used.
When the only residues are solids which are not liable to become liquid at temperatures likely to
be encountered during carriage, flexible IBCs may be used.
When liquid residues are present, rigid IBCs that provide a means of retention (e.g. absorbent
material) shall be used.
Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every IBC shall be inspected to ensure that it is
free from corrosion, contamination or other damage. Any IBC showing signs of reduced strength,
shall no longer be used (minor dents and scratches are not considered as reducing the strength of
the IBC).
IBCs intended for the carriage of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues of Class
5.1 shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any
other combustible material.
IBC99 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC99
Only IBCs which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used. A copy of the competent
authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication that the
packaging was approved by the competent authority.
– 136 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 137 –
IBC100 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC100
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 0082, 0222, 0241, 0331 and 0332.
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of
4.1.5 are met:
(1) Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N);
(2) Flexible (13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4 and 13M2);
(3) Rigid plastics (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
(4) Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2).
Additional requirements:
1. IBCs shall only be used for free flowing substances.
2. Flexible IBCs shall only be used for solids.
Special packing provisions:
B3 For UN No. 0222, flexible IBCs shall be sift-proof and water resistant or shall be fitted with a sift-proof and
water resistant liner.
B9 For UN No. 0082, this packing instruction may only be used when the substances are mixtures of ammonium
nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such
explosives shall not contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates. Metal IBCs are not
authorized.
B10 For UN No. 0241, this packing instruction may only be used for substances which consist of water as an
essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other oxidizing substances some or all of
which are in solution. The other constituents may include hydrocarbons or aluminium powder, but shall not
include nitro-derivatives such as trinitrotoluene. Metal IBCs are not authorized.
B17 For UN No. 0222, metal IBCs are not authorized.
– 137 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 138 –
IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC520
This instruction applies to organic peroxides and self-reactive substances of type F.
The IBCs listed below are authorized for the formulations listed, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, 4.1.2 and
4.1.3 and special provisions of 4.1.7.2 are met. The formulations not listed in 2.2.41.4 or in 2.2.52.4 but listed below
may also be carried packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P520 of 4.1.4.1, with the
same control and emergency temperatures, if applicable.
For formulations not listed below, only IBCs which are approved by the competent authority may be used (see 4.1.7.2.2).
UN No. Organic peroxide Type of
IBC
Maximum
quantity
(litres/kg)
Control
Tempera-
ture
Emergency
Tempera-
ture
3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, LIQUID
tert-Butyl cumyl peroxide 31HA1 1000
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72 % with water 31A 1 250
31HA1 1 000
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate, not more than 32 % in diluent
type A
31A
31HA1
1 250
1 000
tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate, not more than 32 % in diluent
type A
31A 1 250
tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-trimethylhexanoate, not more
than 37 % in diluent type A
31A
31HA1
1 250
1 000
Cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 90 % in diluent type
A
31HA1 1 250
Dibenzoyl peroxide, not more than 42 % as a stable
dispersion in water
31H1 1 000
Di-tert-butyl peroxide, not more than 52 % in diluent type
A
31A
31HA1
1 250
1 000
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy) cyclohexane, not more
than 42 % in diluent type A
31H1 1 000
1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy) cyclohexane, not more than
37 % in diluent type A
31A 1 250
Dilauroyl peroxide, not more than 42 %, stable
dispersion, in water
31HA1 1 000
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di(tert-butylperoxy)hexane,
not more than 52 % in diluent type A
31HA1 1000
Isopropyl cumyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72 % in
diluent type A
31HA1 1 250
p-Menthyl hydroperoxide, not more than 72 % in diluent
type A
31HA1 1 250
Peroxyacetic acid, stabilized, not more than 17 % 31A
31H1
31H2
31HA1
1 500
1 500
1 500
1 500
3,6,9-Triethyl-3,6,9-trimethyl-1,4,7-triperoxonane
not more than 27 % in diluent type A
31HA1 1000
3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, SOLID
Dicumyl peroxide 31A
31H1
31HA1
2 000
(Cont’d on next page)
– 138 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 139 –
IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC520
UN No. Organic peroxide Type of
IBC
Maximum
quantity
(litres/kg)
Control
Tempera-
ture
Emergency
Tempera-
ture
3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, LIQUID,
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED
tert-Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate,
not more than 62 % in diluent type A
31HA1 1000 +15 °C +20 °C
tert-Amyl peroxypivalate, not more than 32 % in diluent
type A
31A 1 250 +10 °C +15 °C
tert-Amyl peroxypivalate, not more than 42 % as a stable
dispersion in water
31HA1 1 000 0 °C +10 °C
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not more than 32 %
in diluent type B
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
+30 °C
+30 °C
+35 °C
+35 °C
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 32 % in
diluent type A
31A 1 250 0 °C +10 °C
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 52 %,
stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 -5 °C +5 °C
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate, not more than 27 % in diluent
type B
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
+10 °C
+10 °C
+15 °C
+15 °C
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate, not more than 42 % in a diluent
type A
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
+10 °C
+10 °C
+15 °C
+15 °C
Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 52 %, stable
dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 -15 °C – 5 °C
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more than 42 %
stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 – 5 °C + 5 °C
Di-(4-tert-butylcyclohexyl) peroxydicarbonate, not more
than 42 %, stable dispersion, in water
31HA1 1 000 +30 °C +35 °C
Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42 %, stable
dispersion, in water
31HA1 1 000 +30 °C +35 °C
Di-(2-neodecanoylperoxyisopropyl)benzene, not more
than 42 %, stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 -15 °C -5 °C
3-Hydroxy-1,1-dimethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate, not
more than 52 %, stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 -15 °C -5 °C
Di-(2-ethylhexyl) peroxydicarbonate, not more
than 62 %, stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 -20 °C -10 °C
31HA1 1000 -20°C -10°C
Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate, not more than 42 %, stable
dispersion, in water
31HA1 1 000 +15 °C +20 °C
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide, not more
than 52 % in diluent type A
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
+10 °C
+10 °C
+15 °C
+15 °C
Di-(3,5,5-trimethylhexanoyl) peroxide, not more
than 52 %, stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 +10 °C +15 °C
1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxyneodecanoate, not more
than 52 %, stable dispersion, in water
31A
31HA1
1 250
1 000
– 5 °C
-5 °C
+ 5 °C
+5 °C
1,1,3,3-Tetramethylbutyl peroxy-2-ethylhexanoate, not
more than 67 %, in diluent type A
31HA1 1000 +15 °C +20 °C
Dicyclohexylperoxydicarbonate, not more than 42 % as a
stable dispersion, in water
31A 1 250 +10 °C +15 °C
Diisobutyryl peroxide, not more than 28 % as a stable
dispersion in water
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
-20 °C
-20 °C
-10 °C
-10 °C
Diisobutyryl peroxide, not more than 42 % as a stable
dispersion in water
31HA1
31A
1 000
1 250
-25 °C
-25 °C
-15 °C
-15 °C
3120 ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F, SOLID,
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED
No formulation listed
(Cont’d on next page)
– 139 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 140 –
IBC520 PACKING INSTRUCTION (cont’d) IBC520
Additional requirements:
1. IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during carriage. The inlet to the pressure-relief device
shall be sited in the vapour space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions during carriage.
2. To prevent explosive rupture of metal IBCs or composite IBCs with complete metal casing, the emergency-relief
devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-accelerating
decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of fire-engulfment as calculated by the formula in
4.2.1.13.8. The control and emergency temperatures specified in this packing instruction are based on a non-
insulated IBC. When consigning an organic peroxide in an IBC in accordance with this instruction, it is the
responsibility of the consignor to ensure that:
(a) the pressure and emergency relief devices installed on the IBC are designed to take appropriate account
of the self-accelerating decomposition of the organic peroxide and of fire-engulfment; and
(b) when applicable, the control and emergency temperatures indicated are appropriate, taking into account
the design (e.g. insulation) of the IBC to be used.
IBC620 PACKING INSTRUCTION IBC620
This instruction applies to UN No. 3291.
The following IBCs are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1, except 4.1.1.15, 4.1.2 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid, leakproof IBCs conforming to the packing group II performance level.
Additional requirements:
1. There shall be sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present in the IBC.
2. IBCs shall be capable of retaining liquids.
3. IBCs intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture.
– 140 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 141 –
4.1.4.3 Packing instructions concerning the use of large packagings
LP01 PACKING INSTRUCTION (LIQUIDS) LP01
The following large packagings are authorized provided the general provision of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Inner packagings Large outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Glass 10 litres Steel (50A)
Not allowed Not allowed Maximum
capacity: 3 m³
Plastics 30 litres Aluminium (50B)
Metal 40 litres Metal other than steel or
aluminium (50N)
Rigid plastics (50H)
Natural wood (50C)
Plywood (50D)
Reconstituted wood (50F)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
LP02 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) LP02
The following large packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Inner packagings Large outer packagings Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
Glass 10 kg Steel (50A)
Not allowed Not allowed Maximum
capacity: 3 m³
Plastics b 50 kg Aluminium (50B)
Metal 50 kg Metal other than steel or
aluminium (50N)Paper a, b 50 kg
Fibre a, b 50 kg Rigid plastics (50H)
Natural wood (50C)
Plywood (50D)
Reconstituted wood (50F)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
Flexible plastics (51H) c
a These inner packagings shall not be used when the substances being carried may become liquid during carriage.
b These inner packagings shall be sift-proof.
c To be used with flexible inner packagings only.
Special packing provisions:
L2 Deleted.
L3 NOTE: For UN Nos. 2208 and 3486, carriage by sea in large packagings is prohibited.
(Cont’d on next page)
– 141 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 142 –
LP02 PACKING INSTRUCTION (SOLIDS) (cont’d) LP02
Special packing provision specific to RID and ADR:
LL1 For UN 3509, large packagings are not required to meet the requirements of 4.1.1.3.
Large packagings meeting the requirements of 6.6.4, made leak tight or fitted with a leak tight and puncture
resistant sealed liner or bag, shall be used.
When the only residues are solids which are not liable to become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered
during carriage, flexible large packagings may be used.
When liquid residues are present, rigid large packagings that provide a means of retention (e.g. absorbent
material) shall be used.
Before being filled and handed over for carriage, every large packaging shall be inspected to ensure that it is free
from corrosion, contamination or other damage. Any large packaging showing signs of reduced strength, shall
no longer be used (minor dents and scratches are not considered as reducing the strength of the large packaging).
Large packagings intended for the carriage of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues of Class
5.1 shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any other
combustible material.
LP03 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP03
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3537 to 3548.
(1) The following large packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
(2) Additionally, the following conditions shall be met:
(a) Receptacles within articles containing liquids or solids shall be constructed of suitable materials and secured
in the article in such a way that, under normal conditions of carriage, they cannot break, be punctured or
leak their contents into the article itself or the outer packaging;
(b) Receptacles containing liquids with closures shall be packed with their closures correctly oriented. The
receptacles shall in addition conform to the internal pressure test provisions of 6.1.5.5;
(c) Receptacles that are liable to break or be punctured easily, such as those made of glass, porcelain or
stoneware or of certain plastics materials shall be properly secured. Any leakage of the contents shall not
substantially impair the protective properties of the article or of the outer packaging;
(d) Receptacles within articles containing gases shall meet the requirements of Section 4.1.6 and Chapter 6.2
as appropriate or be capable of providing an equivalent level of protection as packing instructions P200 or
P208; and
(e) Where there is no receptacle within the article, the article shall fully enclose the dangerous substances and
prevent their release under normal conditions of carriage.
(3) Articles shall be packed to prevent movement and inadvertent operation during normal conditions of carriage.
– 142 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 143 –
LP99 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP99
Only large packagings which are approved for these goods by the competent authority may be used. A copy of the
competent authority approval shall accompany each consignment or the transport document shall include an indication
that the packaging was approved by the competent authority.
LP101 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP101
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of
4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Large outer packagings
Not necessary Not necessary
Steel (50A)
Aluminium (50B)
Metal other than steel or
aluminium (50N)
Rigid plastics (50H)
Natural wood (50C)
Plywood (50D)
Reconstituted
wood (50F)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
Special packing provision:
L1 For UN Nos. 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016, 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038, 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138,
0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182, 0183, 0186, 0221, 0243, 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280, 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297,
0299, 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328, 0329, 0344, 0345, 0346, 0347, 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424, 0425, 0434,
0435, 0436, 0437, 0438, 0451, 0488, 0502 and 0510:
Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of initiation or
with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be carried unpackaged.
When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected
against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of carriage. A negative result in Test Series 4 on an
unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for carriage unpackaged. Such unpackaged
articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable handling devices.
LP102 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP102
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 and special provisions of
4.1.5 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Large outer packagings
Bags
water resistant
Receptacles
fibreboard
metal
plastics
wood
Sheets
fibreboard, corrugated
Tubes
fibreboard
Not necessary
Steel (50A)
Aluminium (50B)
Metal other than steel
or aluminium (50N)
Rigid plastics (50H)
Natural wood (50C)
Plywood (50D)
Reconstituted wood (50F)
Rigid fibreboard (50G)
– 143 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 144 –
LP200 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP200
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 1950 and 2037.
The following large packagings are authorized for aerosols and gas cartridges, provided that the general provisions of
4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
Special packing provision:
L2 The large packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent dangerous movement and inadvertent
discharge during normal conditions of carriage. For waste aerosols carried in accordance with special provision
327, the large packagings shall have a means of retaining any free liquid that might escape during carriage, e.g.
absorbent material. For waste aerosols and was gas cartridges carried in accordance with special provision 327,
the large packagings shall be adequately ventilated to prevent the creation of dangerous atmospheres and the
build-up of pressure.
LP621 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP621
This instruction applies to UN No. 3291.
The following large packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For clinical waste placed in inner packagings: Rigid, leakproof large packagings conforming to the requirements
of Chapter 6.6 for solids, at the packing group II performance level, provided there is sufficient absorbent
material to absorb the entire amount of liquid present and the large packaging is capable of retaining liquids;
(2) For packages containing larger quantities of liquid: Large rigid packagings conforming to the requirements of
Chapter 6.6, at the packing group II performance level, for liquids.
Additional requirement:
Large packagings intended to contain sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be resistant to puncture and
retain liquids under the performance test conditions in Chapter 6.6.
– 144 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 145 –
LP622 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP622
This instruction applies to waste of UN No. 3549 carried for disposal.
The following large packagings are authorized provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Inner packagings Intermediate packagings Outer packagings
metal
plastics
metal
plastics
steel (50A)
aluminium (50B)
metal other than steel or aluminium
(50N)
plywood (50D)
rigid fibreboard (50G)
rigid plastics (50H)
The outer packaging shall conform to the packing group I performance level for solids.
Additional requirements:
1. Fragile articles shall be contained in either a rigid inner packaging or a rigid intermediate packaging.
2. Inner packagings containing sharp objects such as broken glass and needles shall be rigid and resistant to puncture.
3. The inner packaging, the intermediate packaging and the outer packaging shall be capable of retaining liquids.
Outer packagings that are not capable of retaining liquids by design shall be fitted with a liner or suitable measure
of retaining liquids.
4. The inner packaging and/or the intermediate packaging may be flexible. When flexible packagings are used, they
shall be capable of passing the impact resistance test of at least 165 g according to ISO 7765-1:1988 “Plastics film
and sheeting – Determination of impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1: Staircase methods” and
the tear resistance test of at least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the
bag in accordance with ISO 6383-2:1983 “Plastics – Film and sheeting – Determination of tear resistance – Part 2:
Elmendorf method”. The maximum net mass of each flexible inner packaging shall be 30 kg.
5. Each flexible intermediate packaging shall contain only one inner packaging.
6. Inner packagings containing a small amount of free liquid may be included in intermediate packaging provided that
there is sufficient absorbent or solidifying material in the inner or intermediate packaging to absorb or solidify all
the liquid content present. Suitable absorbent material which withstands the temperatures and vibrations liable to
occur under normal conditions of carriage shall be used.
7. Intermediate packagings shall be secured in outer packagings with suitable cushioning and/or absorbent material.
– 145 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 146 –
LP902 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP902
This instruction applies to UN No. 3268.
Packaged articles:
The following packagings are authorized, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group III performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
The packagings shall be designed and constructed to prevent movement of the articles and inadvertent operation during
normal conditions of carriage.
Unpackaged articles:
The articles may also be carried unpackaged in dedicated handling devices or cargo transport units when moved to,
from, or between where they are manufactured and an assembly plant including intermediate handling locations.
Additional requirement:
Any pressure receptacle shall be in accordance with the requirements of the competent authority for the substance(s)
contained in the pressure receptacle(s).
LP903 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP903
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481.
The following large packagings are authorized for a single battery and for a single item of equipment containing
batteries, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
The battery or the equipment shall be packed so that the battery or the equipment is protected against damage that may
be caused by its movement or placement within the large packaging.
Additional requirement:
Batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
– 146 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 147 –
LP904 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP904
This instruction applies to single damaged or defective batteries and to single items of equipment containing damaged
or defective cells and batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481.
The following large packagings are authorized for a single damaged or defective battery and for a single item of
equipment containing damaged or defective cells and batteries, provided the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are
met.
For batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A)
aluminium (50B)
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N)
rigid plastics (50H)
plywood (50D)
1. The damaged or defective battery or equipment containing such cells or batteries shall be individually packed in
an inner packaging and placed inside an outer packaging. The inner packaging or outer packaging shall be leak-
proof to prevent the potential release of electrolyte.
2. The inner packaging shall be surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-conductive thermal
insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat.
3. Sealed packagings shall be fitted with a venting device when appropriate.
4. Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibrations and shocks, prevent movement of the
battery or the equipment within the package that may lead to further damage and a dangerous condition during
carriage. Cushioning material that is non-combustible and electrically non-conductive may also be used to meet
this requirement.
5. Non combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the packaging is
designed or manufactured.
For leaking cells and batteries, sufficient inert absorbent material shall be added to the inner or outer packaging to
absorb any release of electrolyte.
Additional requirement:
Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
– 147 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 148 –
LP905 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP905
This instruction applies to UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 production runs consisting of not more than 100 cells
and batteries and to pre-production prototypes of cells and batteries when these prototypes are carried for testing.
The following large packagings are authorized for a single battery and for a single item of equipment containing cells
or batteries, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
(1) For a single battery:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
natural wood (50C);
plywood (50D);
reconstituted wood (50F);
rigid fibreboard (50G).
Large packagings shall also meet the following requirements:
(a) A battery of different size, shape or mass may be packed in an outer packaging of a tested design type
listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross mass for which the
design type has been tested;
(b) The battery shall be packed in an inner packaging and placed inside the outer packaging;
(c) The inner packaging shall be completely surrounded by sufficient non-combustible and electrically non-
conductive thermal insulation material to protect against a dangerous evolution of heat;
(d) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent
movement of the battery within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition during
carriage. When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement it shall be non-combustible and
electrically non-conductive; and
(e) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the large
packaging is designed or manufactured.
(2) For a single item of equipment containing cells or batteries:
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group II performance level, made of:
Steel (50A);
Aluminium (50B);
Metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
Rigid plastics (50H);
Natural wood (50C);
Plywood (50D);
Reconstituted wood (50F);
Rigid fibreboard (50G).
Large packagings shall also meet the following requirements:
(a) A single item of equipment of different size, shape or mass may be packed in an outer packaging of a
tested design type listed above provided the total gross mass of the package does not exceed the gross
mass for which the design type has been tested;
(b) The equipment shall be constructed or packed in such a manner as to prevent accidental operation during
carriage;
(c) Appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the effects of vibration and shocks and prevent
movement of the equipment within the package that may lead to damage and a dangerous condition
during carriage. When cushioning material is used to meet this requirement, it shall be non-combustible
and electrically non-conductive; and
(d) Non-combustibility shall be assessed according to a standard recognized in the country where the large
packaging is designed or manufactured.
Additional requirement:
Cells and batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
– 148 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 149 –
LP906 PACKING INSTRUCTION LP906
This instruction applies to damaged or defective batteries of UN Nos. 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481 liable to rapidly
disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous emission of toxic,
corrosive or flammable gases or vapours under normal conditions of carriage.
The following large packagings are authorized, provided that the general provisions of 4.1.1 and 4.1.3 are met:
For batteries and items of equipment containing batteries :
Rigid large packagings conforming to the packing group I performance level, made of:
steel (50A);
aluminium (50B);
metal other than steel or aluminium (50N);
rigid plastics (50H);
plywood (50D);
rigid fibreboard (50G)
(1) The large packaging shall be capable of meeting the following additional performance requirements in case of
rapid disassembly, dangerous reaction, production of a flame or a dangerous evolution of heat or a dangerous
emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours of the battery:
(a) The outside surface temperature of the completed package shall not have a temperature of more than 100 °C.
A momentary spike in temperature up to 200 °C is acceptable;
(b) No flame shall occur outside the package;
(c) No projectiles shall exit the package;
(d) The structural integrity of the package shall be maintained; and
(e) The large packagings shall have a gas management system (e.g. filter system, air circulation, containment
for gas, gas tight packaging etc.), as appropriate.
(2) The additional large packaging performance requirements shall be verified by a test as specified by the competent
authority of any ADR Contracting Party who may also recognize a test specified by the competent authority of
a country which is not an ADR Contracting Party provided that this test has been specified in accordance with
the procedures applicable according to RID, ADR, ADN, the IMDG Code or the ICAO Technical Instructions a.
A verification report shall be made available on request. As a minimum requirement, the name of the batteries,
their type as defined in Section 38.3.2.3 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, the maximum number of batteries,
the total mass of batteries, the total energy content of the batteries, the large packaging identification and the test
data according to the verification method as specified by the competent authority shall be listed in the verification
report. A set of specific instructions describing the way to use the package shall also be part of the verification
report.
(3) When dry ice or liquid nitrogen is used as a coolant, the requirements of section 5.5.3 shall apply. The inner
packaging and outer packaging shall maintain their integrity at the temperature of the refrigerant used as well as
the temperatures and the pressures which could result if refrigeration were lost.
(4) The specific instructions for use of the package shall be made available by the packaging manufacturers and
subsequent distributors to the consignor. They shall include at least the identification of the batteries and items
of equipment that may be contained inside the packaging, the maximum number of batteries contained in the
package and the maximum total of the batteries’ energy content, as well as the configuration inside the package,
including the separations and protections used during the performance verification test.
Additional requirement:
Batteries shall be protected against short circuit.
a The following criteria, as relevant, may be considered to assess the performance of the large packaging:
(a) The assessment shall be done under a quality management system (as described e.g. in section 2.2.9.1.7 (e))
allowing for the traceability of tests results, reference data and characterization models used;
(b) The list of hazards expected in case of thermal run-away for the battery type, in the condition it is carried (e.g.
usage of an inner packaging, state of charge (SOC), use of sufficient non-combustible, electrically non-conductive
and absorbent cushioning material etc.), shall be clearly identified and quantified; the reference list of possible
hazards for lithium batteries (rapidly disassemble, dangerously react, produce a flame or a dangerous evolution of
heat or a dangerous emission of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases or vapours) can be used for this purpose. The
quantification of these hazards shall rely on available scientific literature;
– 149 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 150 –
(c) The mitigating effects of the large packaging shall be identified and characterized, based on the nature of the
protections provided and the construction material properties. A list of technical characteristics and drawings shall
be used to support this assessment (Density [kg·m – ³], specific heat capacity [J·kg -1·K-1 ], heating value [kJ·kg -1 ],
thermal conductivity [W·m -1·K-1 ], melting temperature and flammability temperature [K], heat transfer coefficient
of the outer packaging [W·m -2·K-1 ], …);
(d) The test and any supporting calculations shall assess the result of a thermal run-away of the battery inside the
large packaging in the normal conditions of carriage;
(e) In case the SOC of the battery is not known, the assessment used, shall be done with the highest possible SOC
corresponding to the battery use conditions;
(f) The surrounding conditions in which the large packaging may be used and carried shall be described
(including for possible consequences of gas or smoke emissions on the environment, such as ventilation or other
methods) according to the gas management system of the large packaging;
(g) The tests or the model calculation shall consider the worst case scenario for the thermal run-away triggering
and propagation inside the battery; this scenario includes the worst possible failure in the normal carriage
condition, the maximum heat and flame emissions for the possible propagation of the reaction;
(h) These scenarios shall be assessed over a period of time long enough to allow all the possible consequences to
occur (e.g. 24 hours);
(i) In the case of multiple batteries and multiple items of equipment containing batteries, additional requirements
such as the maximum number of batteries and items of equipment, the total maximum energy content of the batteries,
and the configuration inside the package, including separations and protections of the parts, shall be considered.
4.1.4.4 (Deleted)
4.1.5 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 1
4.1.5.1 The general provisions of Section 4.1.1 shall be met.
4.1.5.2 All packagings for Class 1 goods shall be so designed and constructed that:
(a) They will protect the explosives, prevent them escaping and cause no increase in the risk of
unintended ignition or initiation when subjected to normal conditions of carriage including
foreseeable changes in temperature, humidity and pressure;
(b) The complete package can be handled safely in normal conditions of carriage; and
(c) The packages will withstand any loading imposed on them by foreseeable stacking to which they
will be subject during carriage so that they do not add to the risk presented by the explosives, the
containment function of the packagings is not harmed, and they are not distorted in a way or to
an extent which will reduce their strength or cause instability of a stack.
4.1.5.3 All explosive substances and articles, as prepared for carriage, shall have been classified in accordance
with the procedures detailed in 2.2.1.
4.1.5.4 Class 1 goods shall be packed in accordance with the appropriate packing instruction shown in
Column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, as detailed in 4.1.4.
4.1.5.5 Unless otherwise specified in ADR, packagings, including IBCs and large packagings, shall conform to
the requirements of chapters 6.1, 6.5 or 6.6, as appropriate, and shall meet their test requirements for
packing group II.
4.1.5.6 The closure device of packagings containing liquid explosives shall ensure a double protection against
leakage.
4.1.5.7 The closure device of metal drums shall include a suitable gasket; if a closure device includes a screw-
thread, the ingress of explosive substances into the screw-thread shall be prevented.
4.1.5.8 Packagings for water soluble substances shall be water resistant. Packagings for desensitized or
phlegmatized substances shall be closed to prevent changes in concentration during carriage.
– 150 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 151 –
4.1.5.9 When the packaging includes a double envelope filled with water which may freeze during transport, a
sufficient quantity of an anti-freeze agent shall be added to the water to prevent freezing. Anti-freeze
that could create a fire hazard because of its inherent flammability shall not be used.
4.1.5.10 Nails, staples and other closure devices made of metal without protective covering shall not penetrate
to the inside of the outer packaging unless the inner packaging adequately protects the explosives against
contact with the metal.
4.1.5.11 Inner packagings, fittings and cushioning materials and the placing of explosive substances or articles
in packages shall be accomplished in a manner which prevents the explosive substances or articles from
becoming loose in the outer packaging under normal conditions of carriage. Metallic components of
articles shall be prevented from making contact with metal packagings. Articles containing explosive
substances not enclosed in an outer casing shall be separated from each other in order to prevent friction
and impact. Padding, trays, partitioning in the inner or outer packaging, mouldings or receptacles may
be used for this purpose.
4.1.5.12 Packagings shall be made of materials compatible with, and impermeable to, the explosives contained
in the package, so that neither interaction between the explosives and the packaging materials, nor
leakage, causes the explosive to become unsafe to carriage, or the hazard division or compatibility group
to change.
4.1.5.13 The ingress of explosive substances into the recesses of seamed metal packagings shall be prevented.
4.1.5.14 Plastics packagings shall not be liable to generate or accumulate sufficient static electricity so that a
discharge could cause the packaged explosive substances or articles to initiate, ignite or function.
4.1.5.15 Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for military use, without their means of
initiation or with their means of initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be
carried unpackaged. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-propelled, their ignition
systems shall be protected against stimuli encountered during normal conditions of carriage. A negative
result in Test Series 4 on an unpackaged article indicates that the article can be considered for carriage
unpackaged. Such unpackaged articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other suitable
handling, storage or launching devices in such a way that they will not become loose during normal
conditions of carriage.
Where such large explosive articles are as part of their operational safety and suitability tests subjected
to test regimes that meet the intentions of ADR and such tests have been successfully undertaken, the
competent authority may approve such articles to be carried in accordance with ADR.
4.1.5.16 Explosive substances shall not be packed in inner or outer packagings where the differences in internal
and external pressures, due to thermal or other effects, could cause an explosion or rupture of the
package.
4.1.5.17 Whenever loose explosive substances or the explosive substance of an uncased or partly cased article
may come into contact with the inner surface of metal packagings (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1N1, 1N2, 4A,
4B, 4N and metal receptacles), the metal packaging shall be provided with an inner liner or coating (see
4.1.1.2).
4.1.5.18 Packing instruction P101 may be used for any explosive provided the packaging has been approved by
a competent authority regardless of whether the packaging complies with the packing instruction
assignment in Column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2.
4.1.6 Special packing provisions for goods of Class 2 and goods of other classes assigned to packing
instruction P200
4.1.6.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of pressure receptacles and open
cryogenic receptacles for the carriage of Class 2 substances and goods of other classes assigned to
packing instruction P200 (e.g. UN 1051 hydrogen cyanide, stabilized). Pressure receptacles shall be
constructed and closed so as to prevent any loss of contents which might be caused under normal
conditions of carriage, including by vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure
(resulting from change in altitude, for example).
4.1.6.2 Parts of pressure receptacles and open cryogenic receptacles which are in direct contact with dangerous
goods shall not be affected or weakened by those dangerous goods and shall not cause a dangerous
– 151 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 152 –
effect (e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods) (see also table of standards at
the end of this section).
4.1.6.3 Pressure receptacles, including their closures and open cryogenic receptacles, shall be selected to
contain a gas or a mixture of gases according to the requirements of 6.2.1.2 and the requirements of the
relevant packing instructions of 4.1.4.1. This sub-section also applies to pressure receptacles which are
elements of MEGCs and battery-vehicles.
4.1.6.4 A change of use of a refillable pressure receptacle shall include emptying, purging and evacuation
operations to the extent necessary for safe operation (see also table of standards at the end of this
section). In addition, a pressure receptacle that previously contained a Class 8 corrosive substance or a
substance of another class with a corrosive subsidiary hazard shall not be authorized for the carriage of
a Class 2 substance unless the necessary inspection and testing as specified in 6.2.1.6 and 6.2.3.5
respectively have been performed.
4.1.6.5 Prior to filling, the packer shall perform an inspection of the pressure receptacle or open cryogenic
receptacle and ensure that the pressure receptacle or open cryogenic receptacle is authorized for the
substance and, in case of a chemical under pressure, for the propellant to be carried and that the
requirements have been met. Shut-off valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during
carriage. The consignor shall verify that the closures and equipment are not leaking.
NOTE: Shut-off valves fitted to individual cylinders in bundles may be open during carriage, unless
the substance carried is subject to special packing provision ‘k’ or ‘q’ in packing provision P200.
4.1.6.6 Pressure receptacles and open cryogenic receptacles shall be filled according to the working pressures,
filling ratios and provisions specified in the appropriate packing instruction for the specific substance
being filled and taking into account the lowest pressure rating of any component. Service equipment
having a pressure rating lower than other components shall nevertheless comply with 6.2.1.3.1. Reactive
gases and gas mixtures shall be filled to a pressure such that if complete decomposition of the gas
occurs, the working pressure of the pressure receptacle shall not be exceeded.
4.1.6.7 Pressure receptacles, including their closures, shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and
testing requirements detailed in Chapter 6.2. When outer packagings are prescribed, the pressure
receptacles and open cryogenic receptacles shall be firmly secured therein. Unless otherwise specified
in the detailed packing instructions, one or more inner packagings may be enclosed in one outer
packaging.
4.1.6.8 Valves and other components which are to remain connected to the valve during carriage (e.g. handling
devices or adaptors) shall be designed and constructed in such a way that they are inherently able to
withstand damage without release of the contents or shall be protected from damage which could cause
inadvertent release of the contents of the pressure receptacle, by one of the following methods (see also
table of standards at the end of this section):
(a) Valves are placed inside the neck of the pressure receptacle and protected by a threaded plug or
cap;
(b) Valves are protected by caps or guards. Caps shall possess vent-holes of sufficient cross-sectional
area to evacuate the gas if leakage occurs at the valves;
(c) Valves are protected by shrouds or permanent protection attachments;
(d) Pressure receptacles are carried in frames, (e.g. cylinders in bundles); or
(e) Pressure receptacles are carried in protective boxes. For UN pressure receptacles the packaging
as prepared for carriage shall be capable of meeting the drop test specified in 6.1.5.3 at the
packing group I performance level.
4.1.6.9 Non-refillable pressure receptacles shall:
(a) be carried in an outer packaging, such as a box or crate, or in shrink-wrapped or stretch-wrapped
trays;
(b) be of a water capacity less than or equal to 1.25 litres when filled with flammable or toxic gas;
(c) not be used for toxic gases with an LC₅₀ less than or equal to 200 ml/m³; and
– 152 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 153 –
(d) not be repaired after being put into service.
4.1.6.10 Refillable pressure receptacles, other than closed cryogenic receptacles, shall be periodically inspected
according to the provisions of 6.2.1.6, or 6.2.3.5.1 for non UN receptacles, and packing instruction
P200, P205, P206 or P208 as applicable. Pressure relief valves for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be
subject to periodic inspections and tests according to the provisions of 6.2.1.6.3 and packing instruction
P203. Pressure receptacles shall not be filled after they become due for periodic inspection but may be
carried after the expiry of the time-limit for purposes of performing inspection or disposal, including
the intermediate carriage operations.
4.1.6.11 Repairs shall be consistent with the fabrication and testing requirements of the applicable design and
construction standards and are only permitted as indicated in the relevant periodic inspection standards
specified in chapter 6.2. Pressure receptacles, other than the jacket of closed cryogenic receptacles, shall
not be subjected to repairs of any of the following:
(a) weld cracks or other weld defects;
(b) cracks in walls;
(c) leaks or defects in the material of the wall, head or bottom.
4.1.6.12 Receptacles shall not be offered for filling:
(a) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the receptacle or its service equipment may
be affected;
(b) unless the receptacle and its service equipment has been examined and found to be in good
working order; and
(c) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.1.6.13 Filled receptacles shall not be offered for carriage:
(a) when leaking;
(b) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the receptacle or its service equipment may
be affected;
(c) unless the receptacle and its service equipment has been examined and found to be in good
working order; and
(d) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.1.6.14 Owners shall, on the basis of a reasoned request from the competent authority, provide it with all the
information necessary to demonstrate the conformity of the pressure receptacle in a language easily
understood by the competent authority. They shall cooperate with that authority, at its request, on any
action taken to eliminate non-conformity of the pressure receptacles which they own.
4.1.6.15 For UN pressure receptacles, the ISO standards and EN ISO standards listed in Table 4.1.6.15.1, except
EN ISO 14245 and EN ISO 15995, shall be applied. For information on which standard shall be used
at the time of manufacturing the equipment, see 6.2.2.3.
For other pressure receptacles, the requirements of section 4.1.6 are considered to have been complied
with if the standards in Table 4.1.6.15.1, as relevant, are applied. For information on which standards
shall be used for the manufacture of valves with inherent protection, see 6.2.4.1. For information on the
applicability of standards for manufacturing valve protection caps and valve guards, see Table
4.1.6.15.2.
– 153 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 154 –
Table 4.1.6.15.1: Standards for UN and non-UN pressure receptacles
Applicable
paragraphs
Reference Title of document
4.1.6.2 EN ISO 11114-1:2020 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with
gas contents – Part 1: Metallic materials
EN ISO 11114-2:2013 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with
gas contents – Part 2: Non-metallic materials
4.1.6.4 ISO 11621:1997 or
EN ISO 11621:2005
Gas cylinders – Procedures for change of gas service
4.1.6.8
Valves with
inherent
protection
Clause 4.6.2 of EN ISO
10297:2006 or clause
5.5.2 of EN ISO
10297:2014 or clause
5.5.2 of EN ISO
10297:2014 + A1:2017
Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and type testing
Clause 5.3.8 of EN
13152:2001 + A1:2003
Testing and specifications of LPG cylinder valves – Self-closing
Clause 5.3.7 of EN
13153:2001 + A1:2003
Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves – Manually
operated
Clause 5.9 of EN ISO
14245:2010, clause 5.9
of EN ISO 14245:2019
or clause 5.9 of EN ISO
14245:2021
Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves
– Self-closing
Clause 5.10 of EN ISO
15995:2010, clause 5.9
of EN ISO 15995:2019
or clause 5.9 of EN ISO
15995:2021
Gas cylinders – Specifications and testing of LPG cylinder valves
– Manually operated
Clause 5.4.2 of EN ISO
17879:2017
Gas cylinders – Self-closing cylinder valves – Specification and
type testing
Clause 7.4 of EN
12205:2001 or clause
9.2.5 of EN ISO
11118:2015 or clause
9.2.5 of EN ISO
11118:2015 + A1:2020
Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders –
Specification and test methods
4.1.6.8 (b) ISO 11117:1998 or
EN ISO 11117:2008 +
Cor 1:2009 or EN ISO
11117:2019
0
B
Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and guards – Design,
construction and tests
EN 962:1996 +
A2:2000
Transportable gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve
guards for industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design,
construction and tests
4.1.6.8 (c) Requirements for shrouds and permanent protection attachments used as valve protection under
4.1.6.8 (c) are given in the relevant pressure receptacle shell design standards (see 6.2.2.3 for
UN pressure receptacles and 6.2.4.1 for non-UN pressure receptacles).
4.1.6.8 (b) and
(c)
ISO 16111:2008 or
ISO 16111:2018
Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed in
reversible metal hydride
– 154 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 155 –
Table 4.1.6.15.2: Manufacturing dates applicable to valve protection caps and guards
fitted to non-UN pressure receptacles
Reference Title of document Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11117:1998 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards for
industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design construction and tests
Until 31
December 2014
EN ISO 11117: 2008
+ Cor 1:2009
Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards – Design,
construction and tests
Until 31
December 2024
EN ISO 11117:2019 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and guards – Design,
construction and tests
Until further
notice
EN 962:1996
+A2:2000
Transportable gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve
guards for industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design,
construction and tests
Until 31
December 2014
4.1.7 Special packing provisions for organic peroxides (Class 5.2) and self-reactive substances of
Class 4.1
4.1.7.0.1 For organic peroxides, all receptacles shall be “effectively closed”. Where significant internal pressure
may develop in a package by the evolution of a gas, a vent may be fitted, provided the gas emitted will
not cause danger, otherwise the degree of filling shall be limited. Any venting device shall be so
constructed that liquid will not escape when the package is in an upright position and it shall be able to
prevent ingress of impurities. The outer packaging, if any, shall be so designed as not to interfere with
the operation of the venting device.
4.1.7.1 Use of packagings (except IBCs)
4.1.7.1.1 Packagings for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances shall conform to the requirements of
Chapter 6.1 and shall meet its test requirements for packing group II.
4.1.7.1.2 The packing methods for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are listed in packing instruction
520 and are designated OP1 to OP8. The quantities specified for each packing method are the maximum
quantities authorized per package.
4.1.7.1.3 The packing methods appropriate for the individual currently assigned organic peroxides and self-
reactive substances are listed in 2.2.41.4 and 2.2.52.4.
4.1.7.1.4 For new organic peroxides, new self-reactive substances or new formulations of currently assigned
organic peroxides or self-reactive substances, the following procedure shall be used to assign the
appropriate packing method:
(a) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE B or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE B:
Packing method OP5 shall be assigned, provided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive
substance) satisfies the criteria of 20.4.3 (b) (resp. 20.4.2 (b)) of the Manual of Tests and Criteria
in a packaging authorized by the packing method. If the organic peroxide (or self-reactive
substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those authorized by packing
method OP5 (viz. one of the packagings listed for OP1 to OP4), then the corresponding packing
method with the lower OP number is assigned;
(b) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE C or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE C:
Packing method OP6 shall be assigned, provided that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive
substance) satisfies the criteria of 20.4.3 (c) (resp. 20.4.2 (c)) of the Manual of Tests and Criteria
in a packaging authorized by the packing method. If the organic peroxide (or self-reactive
substance) can only satisfy these criteria in a smaller packaging than those authorized by packing
method OP6 then the corresponding packing method with the lower OP number is assigned;
(c) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE D or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE D:
Packing method OP7 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance;
(d) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE E or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE E:
– 155 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 156 –
Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance;
(e) ORGANIC PEROXIDE, TYPE F or SELF-REACTIVE SUBSTANCE, TYPE F:
Packing method OP8 shall be assigned to this type of organic peroxide or self-reactive substance.
4.1.7.2 Use of intermediate bulk containers
4.1.7.2.1 The currently assigned organic peroxides specifically listed in packing instruction IBC520 may be
carried in IBCs in accordance with this packing instruction. IBCs shall conform to the requirements of
Chapter 6.5 and shall meet its test requirements for packing group II.
4.1.7.2.2 Other organic peroxides and self-reactive substances of type F may be carried in IBCs under conditions
established by the competent authority of the country of origin when, on the basis of the appropriate
tests, that competent authority is satisfied that such carriage may be safely conducted. The tests
undertaken shall include those necessary:
(a) To prove that the organic peroxide (or self-reactive substance) complies with the principles for
classification given in 20.4.3 (f) [resp. 20.4.2 (f)] of the Manual of Tests and Criteria, exit box F
of Figure 20.1 (b) of the Manual;
(b) To prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance during
carriage;
(c) To determine, when applicable, the control and emergency temperatures associated with the
carriage of the product in the IBC concerned as derived from the SADT;
(d) To design, when applicable, pressure and emergency relief devices; and
(e) To determine if any special provisions are necessary for safe carriage of the substance.
If the country of origin is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the classification and transport conditions
shall be recognized by the competent authority of the first country Contracting Party to ADR reached
by the consignment.
4.1.7.2.3 Emergencies to be taken into account are self-accelerating decomposition and fire engulfment. To
prevent explosive rupture of metal or composite IBCs with a complete metal casing, the emergency-
relief devices shall be designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during self-
accelerating decomposition or during a period of not less than one hour of complete fire engulfment
calculated by the equations given in 4.2.1.13.8.
4.1.8 Special packing provisions for infectious substances (Class 6.2)
4.1.8.1 Consignors of infectious substances shall ensure that packages are prepared in such a manner that they
arrive at their destination in good condition and present no hazard to persons or animals during carriage.
4.1.8.2 The definitions in 1.2.1 and the general packing provisions of 4.1.1.1 to 4.1.1.17, except 4.1.1.10 to
4.1.1.12 and 4.1.1.15 apply to infectious substances packages. However, liquids shall only be filled into
packagings which have an appropriate resistance to the internal pressure that may develop under normal
conditions of carriage.
4.1.8.3 An itemized list of contents shall be enclosed between the secondary packaging and the outer packaging.
When the infectious substances to be carried are unknown, but suspected of meeting the criteria for
inclusion in Category A, the words “suspected Category A infectious substance” shall be shown, in
parenthesis, following the proper shipping name on the document inside the outer packaging.
4.1.8.4 Before an empty packaging is returned to the consignor, or sent elsewhere, it shall be disinfected or
sterilized to nullify any hazard and any label or mark indicating that it had contained an infectious
substance shall be removed or obliterated.
4.1.8.5 Provided an equivalent level of performance is maintained, the following variations in the primary
receptacles placed within a secondary packaging are allowed without the need for further testing of the
completed packaging:
– 156 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 157 –
(a) Primary receptacles of equivalent or smaller size as compared to the tested primary receptacles
may be used provided:
(i) the primary receptacles are of similar design to the primary receptacle tested (e.g. shape:
round, rectangular, etc.);
(ii) the material of construction of the primary receptacles (e.g. glass, plastics, metal) offers
resistance to impact and stacking forces equivalent to or better than that of the primary
receptacles originally tested;
(iii) the primary receptacles have the same or smaller openings and the closure is of equivalent
design (e.g. screw cap, friction lid, etc.);
(iv) sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up empty spaces and to prevent
significant movement of the primary receptacles; and
(v) primary receptacles are oriented within the secondary packagings in the same manner as
in the tested package;
(b) A lesser number of the tested primary receptacles, or of the alternative types of primary
receptacles identified in (a) above, may be used provided sufficient cushioning is added to fill
the void space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the primary receptacles.
4.1.8.6 Paragraphs 4.1.8.1 to 4.1.8.5 only apply to infectious substances of Category A (UN Nos. 2814 and
2900). They do not apply to UN No. 3373 BIOLOGICAL SUBSTANCE, CATEGORY B (see packing
instruction P650 of 4.1.4.1), nor to UN No. 3291 CLINICAL WASTE, UNSPECIFIED, N.O.S. or
(BIO) MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S. or REGULATED MEDICAL WASTE, N.O.S.
4.1.8.7 For the carriage of animal material, packagings or IBCs not specifically authorized in the applicable
packing instruction shall not be used for the carriage of a substance or article unless specifically
approved by the competent authority of the country of origin2 and provided:
(a) The alternative packaging complies with the general requirements of this Part;
(b) When the packing instruction indicated in Column (8) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 so specifies,
the alternative packaging meets the requirements of Part 6;
(c) The competent authority of the country of origin2 determines that the alternative packaging
provides at least the same level of safety as if the substance were packed in accordance with a
method specified in the particular packing instruction indicated in Column (8) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2; and
(d) A copy of the competent authority approval accompanies each consignment or the transport
document includes an indication that alternative packaging was approved by the competent
authority.
4.1.9 Special packing provisions for radioactive material
4.1.9.1 General
4.1.9.1.1 Radioactive material, packagings and packages shall meet the requirements of Chapter 6.4. The quantity
of radioactive material in a package shall not exceed the limits specified in 2.2.7.2.2, 2.2.7.2.4.1,
2.2.7.2.4.4, 2.2.7.2.4.5, 2.2.7.2.4.6, special provision 336 of Chapter 3.3 and 4.1.9.3.
The types of packages for radioactive materials covered by ADR, are:
(a) Excepted package (see 1.7.1.5);
(b) Industrial package Type 1 (Type IP-1 package);
(c) Industrial package Type 2 (Type IP-2 package);
2 If the country of origin is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the competent authority of the first Contracting Party
to the ADR reached by the consignment.
– 157 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 158 –
(d) Industrial package Type 3 (Type IP-3 package);
(e) Type A package;
(f) Type B(U) package;
(g) Type B(M) package;
(h) Type C package.
Packages containing fissile material or uranium hexafluoride are subject to additional requirements.
4.1.9.1.2 The non-fixed contamination on the external surfaces of any package shall be kept as low as practicable
and, under routine conditions of transport, shall not exceed the following limits:
(a) 4 Bq/cm² for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters; and
(b) 0.4 Bq/cm² for all other alpha emitters.
These limits are applicable when averaged over any area of 300 cm² of any part of the surface.
4.1.9.1.3 A package shall not contain any items other than those that are necessary for the use of the radioactive
material. The interaction between these items and the package under the conditions of carriage
applicable to the design, shall not reduce the safety of the package.
4.1.9.1.4 Except as provided in 7.5.11, CV33, the level of non-fixed contamination on the external and internal
surfaces of overpacks, containers and vehicles shall not exceed the limits specified in 4.1.9.1.2. This
requirement does not apply to the internal surfaces of containers being used as packagings, either loaded
or empty.
4.1.9.1.5 For radioactive material having other dangerous properties the package design shall take into account
those properties. Radioactive material with a subsidiary hazard, packaged in packages that do not
require competent authority approval, shall be carried in packagings, IBCs, tanks or bulk containers
fully complying with the requirements of the relevant chapters of Part 6 as appropriate, as well as
applicable requirements of chapters 4.1, 4.2 or 4.3 for that subsidiary hazard.
4.1.9.1.6 Before a packaging is first used to carry radioactive material, it shall be confirmed that it has been
manufactured in conformity with the design specifications to ensure compliance with the relevant
provisions of ADR and any applicable certificate of approval. The following requirements shall also be
fulfilled, if applicable:
(a) If the design pressure of the containment system exceeds 35 kPa (gauge), it shall be ensured that
the containment system of each packaging conforms to the approved design requirements
relating to the capability of that system to maintain its integrity under that pressure;
(b) For each packaging intended for use as a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package and for each
packaging intended to contain fissile material, it shall be ensured that the effectiveness of its
shielding and containment and, where necessary, the heat transfer characteristics and the
effectiveness of the confinement system, are within the limits applicable to or specified for the
approved design;
(c) For each packaging intended to contain fissile material, it shall be ensured that the effectiveness
of the criticality safety features is within the limits applicable to or specified for the design and
in particular where, in order to comply with the requirements of 6.4.11.1 neutron poisons are
specifically included, checks shall be performed to confirm the presence and distribution of those
neutron poisons.
4.1.9.1.7 Before each shipment of any package, it shall be ensured that the package contains neither:
(a) Radionuclides different from those specified for the package design; nor
(b) Contents in a form, or physical or chemical state different from those specified for the package
design.
4.1.9.1.8 Before each shipment of any package, it shall be ensured that all the requirements specified in the
relevant provisions of ADR and in the applicable certificates of approval have been fulfilled. The
following requirements shall also be fulfilled, if applicable:
– 158 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 159 –
(a) It shall be ensured that lifting attachments which do not meet the requirements of 6.4.2.2 have
been removed or otherwise rendered incapable of being used for lifting the package, in
accordance with 6.4.2.3;
(b) Each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package shall be held until equilibrium conditions have
been approached closely enough to demonstrate compliance with the requirements for
temperature and pressure unless an exemption from these requirements has received unilateral
approval;
(c) For each Type B(U), Type B(M) and Type C package, it shall be ensured by inspection and/or
appropriate tests that all closures, valves and other openings of the containment system through
which the radioactive contents might escape are properly closed and, where appropriate, sealed
in the manner for which the demonstrations of compliance with the requirements of 6.4.8.8 and
6.4.10.3 were made;
(d) For packages containing fissile material the measurement specified in 6.4.11.5 (b) and the tests
to demonstrate closure of each package as specified in 6.4.11.8 shall be performed;
(e) For packages intended to be used for shipment after storage, it shall be ensured that all packaging
components and radioactive contents have been maintained during storage in a manner such that
all the requirements specified in the relevant provisions of ADR and in the applicable certificates
of approval have been fulfilled.
4.1.9.1.9 The consignor shall also have a copy of any instructions with regard to the proper closing of the package
and any preparation for shipment before making any shipment under the terms of the certificates.
4.1.9.1.10 Except for consignments under exclusive use, the transport index of any package or overpack shall not
exceed 10, nor shall the criticality safety index of any package or overpack exceed 50.
4.1.9.1.11 Except for packages or overpacks carried under exclusive use under the conditions specified in 7.5.11,
CV33 (3.5)(a), the maximum dose rate at any point on any external surface of a package or overpack
shall not exceed 2 mSv/h.
4.1.9.1.12 The maximum dose rate at any point on any external surface of a package or overpack under exclusive
use shall not exceed 10 mSv/h.
4.1.9.2 Requirements and controls for carriage of LSA material and SCO
4.1.9.2.1 The quantity of LSA material or SCO in a single Type IP-1 package , Type IP-2 package, Type IP-3
package , or object or collection of objects, whichever is appropriate, shall be so restricted that the
external dose rate at 3 m from the unshielded material or object or collection of objects does not exceed
10 mSv/h.
4.1.9.2.2 For LSA material and SCO which are or contain fissile material, which is not excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5,
the applicable requirements of 7.5.11, CV33 (4.1) and (4.2) shall be met.
4.1.9.2.3 For LSA material and SCO which are or contain fissile material, the applicable requirements of 6.4.11.1
shall be met.
4.1.9.2.4 LSA material and SCO in groups LSA-I, SCO-I and SCO-III may be carried unpackaged under the
following conditions:
(a) All unpackaged material other than ores containing only naturally occurring radionuclides shall
be carried in such a manner that under routine conditions of carriage there will be no escape of
the radioactive contents from the vehicle nor will there be any loss of shielding;
(b) Each vehicle shall be under exclusive use, except when only carrying SCO-I on which the
contamination on the accessible and the inaccessible surfaces is not greater than ten times the
corresponding level according to the definition of “contamination” in 2.2.7.1.2;
(c) For SCO-I where it is suspected that non-fixed contamination exists on inaccessible surfaces in
excess of the values specified in 2.2.7.2.3.2 (a)(i), measures shall be taken to ensure that the
radioactive material is not released into the vehicle;
(d) Unpackaged fissile material shall meet the requirements of 2.2.7.2.3.5 (e); and
– 159 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 160 –
(e) For SCO-III:
(i) Carriage shall be under exclusive use;
(ii) Stacking shall not be permitted;
(iii) All activities associated with the shipment, including radiation protection, emergency
response and any special precautions or special administrative or operational controls that
are to be employed during carriage shall be described in a transport plan. The transport
plan shall demonstrate that the overall level of safety in carriage is at least equivalent to
that which would be provided if the requirements of 6.4.7.14 (only for the test specified
in 6.4.15.6, preceded by the tests specified in 6.4.15.2 and 6.4.15.3) had been met;
(iv) The requirements of 6.4.5.1 and 6.4.5.2 for a Type IP-2 package shall be satisfied, except
that the maximum damage referred to in 6.4.15.4 may be determined based on provisions
in the transport plan, and the requirements of 6.4.15.5 are not applicable;
(v) The object and any shielding are secured to the conveyance in accordance with 6.4.2.1;
(vi) The shipment shall be subject to multilateral approval.
4.1.9.2.5 LSA material and SCO, except as otherwise specified in 4.1.9.2.4, shall be packaged in accordance with
the table below:
Table 4.1.9.2.5: Industrial package requirements for LSA material and SCO
Radioactive contents Industrial package type
Exclusive use Not under exclusive use
LSA-I
Solid a
Liquid
Type IP-1
Type IP-1
Type IP-1
Type IP-2
LSA-II
Solid
Liquid and gas
Type IP-2
Type IP-2
Type IP-2
Type IP-3
LSA-III Type IP-2 Type IP-3
SCO-I a Type IP-1 Type IP-1
SCO-II Type IP-2 Type IP-2
a Under the conditions specified in 4.1.9.2.4, LSA-I material and SCO-I may be carried unpackaged.
4.1.9.3 Packages containing fissile material
The contents of packages containing fissile material shall be as specified for the package design either
directly in ADR or in the certificate of approval.
4.1.10 Special provisions for mixed packing
4.1.10.1 When mixed packing is permitted in accordance with the provisions of this section, different dangerous
goods or dangerous goods and other goods may be packed together in combination packagings
conforming to 6.1.4.21, provided that they do not react dangerously with one another and that all other
relevant provisions of this Chapter are complied with.
NOTE 1: See also 4.1.1.5 and 4.1.1.6.
NOTE 2: For radioactive material, see 4.1.9.
4.1.10.2 Except for packages containing Class 1 goods only or Class 7 goods only, if wooden or fibreboard boxes
are used as outer packagings, a package containing different goods packed together shall not weigh
more than 100 kg.
4.1.10.3 Unless otherwise prescribed by a special provision applicable according to 4.1.10.4, dangerous goods
of the same class and the same classification code may be packed together.
– 160 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 161 –
4.1.10.4 When indicated for a given entry in Column (9b) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, the following special
provisions shall apply to the mixed packing of the goods assigned to that entry with other goods in the
same package.
MP1 May only be packed together with goods of the same type within the same compatibility
group.
MP2 Shall not be packed together with other goods.
MP3 Mixed packing of UN No. 1873 with UN No. 1802 is permitted.
MP4 Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not
subject to the requirements of ADR. However, if this organic peroxide is a hardener or
compound system for Class 3 substances, mixed packing is permitted with these
substances of Class 3.
MP5 UN No. 2814 and UN No. 2900 may be packed together in a combination packaging in
conformity with packing instruction P620. They shall not be packed together with other
goods; this does not apply to UN No. 3373 Biological substance, Category B packed in
accordance with packing instruction P650 or to substances added as coolants, e.g. ice, dry
ice or refrigerated liquid nitrogen.
MP6 Shall not be packed together with other goods. This does not apply to substances added
as coolants, e.g. ice, dry ice or refrigerated liquid nitrogen.
MP7 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes when mixed
packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP8 May – in quantities not exceeding 3 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes when mixed
packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP9 May be packed together in an outer packaging for combination packagings in accordance
with 6.1.4.21:
– with other goods of Class 2;
– with goods of other classes, when the mixed packing is also permitted for these;
or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP10 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– 161 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 162 –
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP11 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes (except substances of packing group I or II of Class 5.1) when
mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP12 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes (except substances of packing group I or II of Class 5.1) when
mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
Packages shall not weigh more than 45 kg. If fibreboard boxes are used as outer
packagings however, a package shall not weigh more than 27 kg.
MP13 May – in quantities not exceeding 3 kg per inner packaging and per package – be packed
together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP14 May – in quantities not exceeding 6 kg per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP15 May – in quantities not exceeding 3 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP16 (Reserved)
MP17 May – in quantities not exceeding 0.5 litre per inner packaging and 1 litre per package –
be packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of other classes, except Class 7, when mixed packing is also permitted
for these; or
– 162 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 163 –
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP18 May – in quantities not exceeding 0.5 kg per inner packaging and 1 kg per package – be
packed together in a combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of other classes, except Class 7, when mixed packing is also permitted
for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR,
provided they do not react dangerously with one another.
MP19 May – in quantities not exceeding 5 litres per inner packaging – be packed together in a
combination packaging conforming to 6.1.4.21:
– with goods of the same class covered by other classification codes or with goods
of other classes, when mixed packing is also permitted for these; or
– with goods which are not subject to the requirements of ADR, provided they do
not react dangerously with one another.
MP20 May be packed together with substances covered by the same UN number.
Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers, except
if provided for by special provision MP 24.
Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not
subject to the requirements of ADR.
MP21 May be packed together with articles covered by the same UN number.
Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers, except
for:
(a) their own means of initiation, provided that
(i) the means of initiation will not function under normal conditions of
carriage; or
(ii) such means have at least two effective protective features which prevent
explosion of an article in the event of accidental functioning of the means
of initiation; or
(iii) when such means do not have two effective protective features (i.e. means
of initiation assigned to compatibility group B), in the opinion of the
competent authority of the country of origin3, the accidental functioning of
the means of initiation does not cause the explosion of an article under
normal conditions of carriage;
(b) articles of compatibility groups C, D and E.
Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not
subject to the requirements of ADR.
When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall
be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with
2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document, see 5.4.1.2.1 (b).
3 If the country of origin is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the approval shall require validation by the competent
authority of the first country Contracting Party to ADR reached by the consignment.
– 163 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 164 –
MP22 May be packed together with articles covered by the same UN number.
Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers, except
(a) With their own means of initiation, provided that the means of initiation will not
function under normal conditions of carriage; or
(b) With articles of compatibility groups C, D and E; or
(c) If provided for by special provision MP 24.
Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not
subject to the requirements of ADR.
When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall
be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with
2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document, see 5.4.1.2.1 (b).
MP23 May be packed together with articles covered by the same UN number.
Shall not be packed together with goods of Class 1 having different UN numbers, except
(a) With their own means of initiation, provided that the means of initiation will not
function under normal conditions of carriage; or
(b) If provided for by special provision MP 24.
Shall not be packed together with goods of other classes or with goods which are not
subject to the requirements of ADR.
When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall
be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with
2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document, see 5.4.1.2.1 (b).
MP24 May be packed together with goods with the UN numbers shown in the table below, under
the following conditions:
– if a letter A is indicated in the table, the goods with those UN numbers may be
included in the same package without any special limitation of mass;
– if a letter B is indicated in the table, the goods with those UN numbers may be
included in the same package up to a total mass of 50 kg of explosive substances.
When goods are packed together in accordance with this special provision, account shall
be taken of a possible amendment of the classification of packages in accordance with
2.2.1.1. For the description of the goods in the transport document, see 5.4.1.2.1 (b).
– 164 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 165 –
UN
No.
0012
0014
0027
0028
0044
0054
0160
0161
0186
0191
0194
0195
0197
0238
0240
0312
0333
0334
0335
0336
0337
0373
0405
0428
0429
0430
0431
0432
0505
0506
0507
0509
0012 A
0014 A
0027 B B B B B
0028 B B B B B
0044 B B B B B
0054 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0160 B B B B B
0161 B B B B B
0186 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0191 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0194 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0195 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0197 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0238 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0240 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0312 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0333 A A A A
0334 A A A A
0335 A A A A
0336 A A A A
0337 A A A A
0373 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0405 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0428 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0429 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0430 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0431 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0432 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0505 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0506 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0507 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
0509 B B B B B
– 165 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 167 –
CHAPTER 4.2
USE OF PORTABLE TANKS AND UN
MULTIPLE-ELEMENT GAS CONTAINERS (MEGCs)
NOTE 1: For fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks and tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made
of metallic materials, and battery-vehicles and multiple element gas containers (MEGCs), see Chapter 4.3; for fibre-
reinforced plastics tanks, see Chapter 4.4; for vacuum operated waste tanks, see Chapter 4.5.
NOTE 2: Portable tanks and UN MEGCs marked in accordance with the applicable provisions of Chapter 6.7 but which
were approved in a State which is not a Contracting Party to ADR may nevertheless be used for carriage under ADR.
4.2.1 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of substances of Class 1 and
Classes 3 to 9
4.2.1.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the carriage of
substances of Classes 1, 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 6.2, 7, 8 and 9. In addition to these general
provisions, portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements
detailed in 6.7.2. Substances shall be carried in portable tanks conforming to the applicable portable
tank instruction identified in Column (10) of the Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 (T1
to T23) and the portable tank special provisions assigned to each substance in Column (11) of Table A
of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3.
4.2.1.2 During carriage, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service
equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service
equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning it need not be protected in this way.
Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.2.17.5.
4.2.1.3 Certain substances are chemically unstable. They are accepted for carriage only when the necessary
steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or polymerization
during carriage. To this end, care shall in particular be taken to ensure that shells do not contain any
substances liable to promote these reactions.
4.2.1.4 The temperature of the outer surface of the shell excluding openings and their closures or of the thermal
insulation shall not exceed 70 °C during carriage. When necessary, the shell shall be thermally insulated.
4.2.1.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable
tanks filled with the previous substance.
4.2.1.6 Substances shall not be carried in the same or in adjoining compartments of shells when they may react
dangerously with each other (see definition for “dangerous reaction” in 1.2.1).
4.2.1.7 The design approval certificate, the test report and the certificate showing the results of the initial
inspection and test for each portable tank issued by the competent authority or its authorized body shall
be retained by the authority or body and the owner. Owners shall be able to provide this documentation
upon the request of any competent authority.
4.2.1.8 Unless the name of the substance(s) being carried appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.2.20.2 a
copy of the certificate specified in 6.7.2.18.1 shall be made available upon the request of a competent
authority or its authorized body and readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as
appropriate.
4.2.1.9 Degree of filling
4.2.1.9.1 Prior to filling, the consignor shall ensure that the appropriate portable tank is used and that the portable
tank is not filled with substances which in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets, service
equipment and any protective linings, are likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous
products or appreciably weaken these materials. The consignor may need to consult the manufacturer
of the substance in conjunction with the competent authority for guidance on the compatibility of the
substance with the portable tank materials.
– 167 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 168 –
4.2.1.9.1.1 Portable tanks shall not be filled above the extent provided in 4.2.1.9.2 to 4.2.1.9.6. The applicability of
4.2.1.9.2, 4.2.1.9.3 or 4.2.1.9.5.1 to individual substances is specified in the applicable portable tank
instruction or special provisions in 4.2.5.2.6 or 4.2.5.3 and Column (10) or (11) of Table A of Chapter
3.2.
4.2.1.9.2 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for general use is determined by the formula:
)t-(t1
97
fillingofDegree
fr
4.2.1.9.3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for liquids of Class 6.1 and Class 8, in packing groups I and II,
and liquids with an absolute vapour pressure of more than 175 kPa (1.75 bar) at 65 °C, is determined
by the formula:
)t-(t1
95
fillingofDegree
fr
4.2.1.9.4 In these formulae, is the mean coefficient of cubical expansion of the liquid between the mean
temperature of the liquid during filling (tf ) and the maximum mean bulk temperature during carriage (tr )
(both in °C). For liquids carried under ambient conditions could be calculated by the formula:
50
5015
35d
d-d
in which d 15 and d 50 are the densities of the liquid at 15 °C and 50 °C, respectively.
4.2.1.9.4.1 The maximum mean bulk temperature (tr ) shall be taken as 50 °C except that, for journeys under
temperate or extreme climatic conditions, the competent authorities concerned may agree to a lower or
require a higher temperature, as appropriate.
4.2.1.9.5 The provisions of 4.2.1.9.2 to 4.2.1.9.4.1 do not apply to portable tanks which contain substances
maintained at a temperature above 50 °C during carriage (e.g. by means of a heating device). For
portable tanks equipped with a heating device, a temperature regulator shall be used to ensure the
maximum degree of filling is not more than 95 % full at any time during carriage.
4.2.1.9.5.1 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids carried above their melting point and for elevated
temperature liquids shall be determined by the following formula:
f
r
d
d
95fillingofDegree
in which d f and d r are the densities of the liquid at the mean temperature of the liquid during filling and
the maximum mean bulk temperature during carriage respectively.
4.2.1.9.6 Portable tanks shall not be offered for carriage:
(a) With a degree of filling, for liquids having a viscosity less than 2 680 mm²/s at 20 °C or
maximum temperature of the substance during carriage in the case of the heated substance, of
more than 20 % but less than 80 % unless the shells of portable tanks are divided, by partitions
or surge plates, into sections of not more than 7 500 litres capacity;
(b) With residue of substances previously carried adhering to the outside of the shell or service
equipment;
(c) When leaking or damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the portable tank or its lifting or
securing arrangements may be affected; and
(d) Unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order.
4.2.1.9.7 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not
apply to portable tanks which according to 6.7.2.17.4 need not be provided with a means of closing off
the forklift pockets.
– 168 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 169 –
4.2.1.10 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 3 substances in portable tanks
4.2.1.10.1 All portable tanks intended for the carriage of flammable liquids shall be closed and be fitted with relief
devices in accordance with 6.7.2.8 to 6.7.2.15.
4.2.1.10.1.1 For portable tanks intended for use only on land, open venting systems may be used if allowed according
to Chapter 4.3.
4.2.1.11 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Classes 4.1, 4.2 or 4.3 substances (other than Class
4.1 self-reactive substances) in portable tanks
(Reserved)
NOTE: For Class 4.1 self-reactive substances, see 4.2.1.13.1.
4.2.1.12 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 5.1 substances in portable tanks
(Reserved)
4.2.1.13 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 5.2 substances and Class 4.1
self-reactive substances in portable tanks
4.2.1.13.1 Each substance shall have been tested and a report submitted to the competent authority of the country
of origin for approval. Notification thereof shall be sent to the competent authority of the country of
destination. The notification shall contain relevant transport information and the report with test results.
The tests undertaken shall include those necessary:
(a) To prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance during
carriage;
(b) To provide data for the design of the pressure and emergency relief devices taking into account
the design characteristics of the portable tank.
Any additional provision necessary for safe carriage of the substance shall be clearly described in the
report.
4.2.1.13.2 The following provisions apply to portable tanks intended for the carriage of Type F organic peroxides
or Type F self-reactive substances with a Self-Accelerating Decomposition Temperature (SADT) of
55 °C or more. In case of conflict these provisions prevail over those specified in Section 6.7.2.
Emergencies to be taken into account are self-accelerating decomposition of the substance and
fire-engulfment as described in 4.2.1.13.8.
4.2.1.13.3 The additional provisions for carriage of organic peroxides or self-reactive substances with a SADT less
than 55 °C in portable tanks shall be specified by the competent authority of the country of origin.
Notification thereof shall be sent to the competent authority of the country of destination.
4.2.1.13.4 The portable tank shall be designed for a test pressure of at least 0.4 MPa (4 bar).
4.2.1.13.5 Portable tanks shall be fitted with temperature sensing devices.
4.2.1.13.6 Portable tanks shall be fitted with pressure-relief devices and emergency-relief devices. Vacuum-relief
devices may also be used. Pressure-relief devices shall operate at pressures determined according to
both the properties of the substance and the construction characteristics of the portable tank. Fusible
elements are not allowed in the shell.
4.2.1.13.7 The pressure-relief devices shall consist of spring-loaded valves fitted to prevent significant build-up
within the portable tank of the decomposition products and vapours released at a temperature of 50 °C.
The capacity and start-to-discharge pressure of the relief valves shall be based on the results of the tests
specified in 4.2.1.13.1. The start-to-discharge pressure shall, however, in no case be such that liquid
would escape from the valve(s) if the portable tank were overturned.
4.2.1.13.8 The emergency-relief devices may be of the spring-loaded or frangible types, or a combination of the
two, designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during a period of not less
than one hour of complete fire-engulfment as calculated by the following formula:
– 169 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 170 –
0.82
AF70961q
where:
q = heat absorption [W]
A = wetted area [m²]
F = insulation factor
= 1 for non-insulated shells, or
shellsinsulatedfor
47032
T)-(923U
F
where:
K = heat conductivity of insulation layer [W. m-1 . K -1 ]
L = thickness of insulation layer [m]
U = K/L = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation [W. m-2 . K-1 ]
T = temperature of the substance at relieving conditions [K]
The start-to-discharge pressure of the emergency-relief device(s) shall be higher than that specified
in 4.2.1.13.7 and based on the results of the tests referred to in 4.2.1.13.1. The emergency-relief devices
shall be dimensioned in such a way that the maximum pressure in the portable tank never exceeds the
test pressure of the tank.
NOTE: An example of a method to determine the size of emergency-relief devices is given in
Appendix 5 of the “Manual of Tests and Criteria”.
4.2.1.13.9 For insulated portable tanks the capacity and setting of emergency-relief device(s) shall be determined
assuming a loss of insulation from 1 % of the surface area.
4.2.1.13.10 Vacuum-relief devices and spring-loaded valves shall be provided with flame arresters. Due attention
shall be paid to the reduction of the relief capacity caused by the flame arrester.
4.2.1.13.11 Service equipment such as valves and external piping shall be so arranged that no substance remains in
them after filling the portable tank.
4.2.1.13.12 Portable tanks may be either insulated or protected by a sun-shield. If the SADT of the substance in the
portable tank is 55 °C or less, or the portable tank is constructed of aluminium, the portable tank shall
be completely insulated. The outer surface shall be finished in white or bright metal.
4.2.1.13.13 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90 % at 15 C.
4.2.1.13.14 The mark as required in 6.7.2.20.2 shall include the UN number and the technical name with the
approved concentration of the substance concerned.
4.2.1.13.15 Organic peroxides and self-reactive substances specifically listed in portable tank instruction T23
in 4.2.5.2.6 may be carried in portable tanks.
4.2.1.14 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 6.1 substances in portable tanks
(Reserved)
4.2.1.15 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 6.2 substances in portable tanks
(Reserved)
4.2.1.16 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 7 substances in portable tanks
4.2.1.16.1 Portable tanks used for the carriage of radioactive material shall not be used for the carriage of other
goods.
– 170 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 171 –
4.2.1.16.2 The degree of filling for portable tanks shall not exceed 90 % or, alternatively, any other value approved
by the competent authority.
4.2.1.17 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 8 substances in portable tanks
4.2.1.17.1 Pressure-relief devices of portable tanks used for the carriage of Class 8 substances shall be inspected
at intervals not exceeding one year.
4.2.1.18 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of Class 9 substances in portable tanks
(Reserved)
4.2.1.19 Additional provisions applicable to the carriage of solid substances carried above their melting point
4.2.1.19.1 Solid substances carried or offered for carriage above their melting point which are not assigned a
portable tank instruction in column (10) of the Table A of Chapter 3.2 or when the assigned portable
tank instruction does not apply to carriage at temperatures above their melting point may be carried in
portable tanks provided that the solid substances are classified in Classes 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, 8 or 9
and have no subsidiary hazard other than that of Class 6.1 or Class 8 and are in packing group II or III.
4.2.1.19.2 Unless otherwise indicated in the Table A of Chapter 3.2, portable tanks used for the carriage of these
solid substances above their melting point shall conform to the provisions of portable tank instruction
T4 for solid substances of packing group III or T7 for solid substances of packing group II. A portable
tank which affords an equivalent or greater level of safety may be selected according to 4.2.5.2.5. The
maximum degree of filling (in %) shall be determined according to 4.2.1.9.5 (TP3).
4.2.2 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of non-refrigerated liquefied
gases and chemicals under pressure
4.2.2.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the carriage of non-
refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure.
4.2.2.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in
6.7.3. Non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure shall be carried in portable tanks
conforming to portable tank instruction T50 as described in 4.2.5.2.6 and any portable tank special
provisions assigned to specific non-refrigerated liquefied gases in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter
3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3.
4.2.2.3 During carriage, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service
equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service
equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning it need not be protected in this way.
Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.3.13.5.
4.2.2.4 Certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases are chemically unstable. They are accepted for carriage only
when the necessary steps have been taken to prevent their dangerous decomposition, transformation or
polymerization during carriage. To this end, care shall in particular be taken to ensure that portable
tanks do not contain any non-refrigerated liquefied gases liable to promote these reactions.
4.2.2.5 Unless the name of the gas(es) being carried appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.3.16.2, a copy
of the certificate specified in 6.7.3.14.1 shall be made available upon a competent authority request and
readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate.
4.2.2.6 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable
tanks filled with the previous non-refrigerated liquefied gas.
4.2.2.7 Filling
4.2.2.7.1 Prior to filling the portable tank shall be inspected to ensure that it is authorized for the non-refrigerated
liquefied gas or the propellant of the chemical under pressure to be carried and that the portable tank is
not loaded with non-refrigerated liquefied gases, or with chemicals under pressure which in contact with
the materials of the shell, gaskets, service equipment and any protective linings, are likely to react
dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials. During
filling, the temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or propellant of chemicals under pressure
shall fall within the limits of the design temperature range.
– 171 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 172 –
4.2.2.7.2 The maximum mass of non-refrigerated liquefied gas per litre of shell capacity (kg/l) shall not exceed
the density of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas at 50 °C multiplied by 0.95. Furthermore, the shell shall
not be liquid-full at 60 °C.
4.2.2.7.3 Portable tanks shall not be filled above their maximum permissible gross mass and the maximum
permissible load mass specified for each gas to be carried.
4.2.2.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for carriage:
(a) In an ullage condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the
shell;
(b) When leaking;
(c) When damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the tank or its lifting or securing
arrangements may be affected; and
(d) Unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order.
4.2.2.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not
apply to portable tanks which according to 6.7.3.13.4 need not be provided with a means of closing off
the forklift pockets.
4.2.3 General provisions for the use of portable tanks for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases
4.2.3.1 This section provides general provisions applicable to the use of portable tanks for the carriage of
refrigerated liquefied gases.
4.2.3.2 Portable tanks shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in
6.7.4. Refrigerated liquefied gases shall be carried in portable tanks conforming to portable tank
instruction T75 as described in 4.2.5.2.6 and the portable tank special provisions assigned to each
substance in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3.
4.2.3.3 During carriage, portable tanks shall be adequately protected against damage to the shell and service
equipment resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the shell and service
equipment are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning it need not be protected in this way.
Examples of such protection are provided in 6.7.4.12.5.
4.2.3.4 Unless the name of the gas(es) being carried appears on the metal plate described in 6.7.4.15.2, a copy
of the certificate specified in 6.7.4.13.1 shall be made available upon a competent authority request and
readily provided by the consignor, consignee or agent, as appropriate.
4.2.3.5 Empty portable tanks not cleaned and not gas-free shall comply with the same provisions as portable
tanks filled with the previous substance.
4.2.3.6 Filling
4.2.3.6.1 Prior to filling the portable tank shall be inspected to ensure that it is authorized for the refrigerated
liquefied gas to be carried and that the portable tank is not loaded with refrigerated liquefied gases which
in contact with the materials of the shell, gaskets, service equipment and any protective linings, are
likely to react dangerously with them to form dangerous products or appreciably weaken these materials.
During filling, the temperature of the refrigerated liquefied gas shall be within the limits of the design
temperature range.
4.2.3.6.2 In estimating the initial degree of filling the necessary holding time for the intended journey including
any delays which might be encountered shall be taken into consideration. The initial degree of filling of
the shell, except as provided for in 4.2.3.6.3 and 4.2.3.6.4, shall be such that if the contents, except
helium, were to be raised to a temperature at which the vapour pressure is equal to the maximum
allowable working pressure (MAWP) the volume occupied by liquid would not exceed 98 %.
4.2.3.6.3 Shells intended for the carriage of helium can be filled up to but not above the inlet of the pressure-relief
device.
– 172 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 173 –
4.2.3.6.4 A higher initial degree of filling may be allowed, subject to approval by the competent authority, when
the intended duration of carriage is considerably shorter than the holding time.
4.2.3.7 Actual holding time
4.2.3.7.1 The actual holding time shall be calculated for each journey in accordance with a procedure recognized
by the competent authority, on the basis of the following:
(a) The reference holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas to be carried (see 6.7.4.2.8.1) (as
indicated on the plate referred to in 6.7.4.15.1);
(b) The actual filling density;
(c) The actual filling pressure;
(d) The lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting device(s).
4.2.3.7.2 The actual holding time shall be marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate firmly
secured to the portable tank, in accordance with 6.7.4.15.2.
4.2.3.7.3 The date at which the actual holding time ends shall be entered in the transport document (see
5.4.1.2.2 (d)).
4.2.3.8 Portable tanks shall not be offered for carriage:
(a) In an ullage condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within the
shell;
(b) When leaking;
(c) When damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the portable tank or its lifting or securing
arrangements may be affected;
(d) Unless the service equipment has been examined and found to be in good working order;
(e) Unless the actual holding time for the refrigerated liquefied gas being carried has been
determined in accordance with 4.2.3.7 and the portable tank is marked in accordance
with 6.7.4.15.2; and
(f) Unless the duration of carriage, after taking into consideration any delays which might be
encountered, does not exceed the actual holding time.
4.2.3.9 Forklift pockets of portable tanks shall be closed off when the tank is filled. This provision does not
apply to portable tanks which according to 6.7.4.12.4, need not be provided with a means of closing off
the forklift pockets.
4.2.4 General provisions for the use of UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs)
4.2.4.1 This section provides general requirements applicable to the use of multiple-element gas containers
(MEGCs) for the carriage of non-refrigerated gases referred to in 6.7.5.
4.2.4.2 MEGCs shall conform to the design, construction, inspection and testing requirements detailed in 6.7.5.
The elements of MEGCs shall be periodically inspected according to the provisions set out in packing
instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1 and in 6.2.1.6.
4.2.4.3 During carriage, MEGCs shall be protected against damage to the elements and service equipment
resulting from lateral and longitudinal impact and overturning. If the elements and service equipment
are so constructed as to withstand impact or overturning, they need not be protected in this way.
Examples of such protection are given in 6.7.5.10.4.
4.2.4.4 The periodic testing and inspection requirements for MEGCs are specified in 6.7.5.12. MEGCs or their
elements shall not be charged or filled after they become due for periodic inspection but may be carried
after the expiry of the time limit.
– 173 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 174 –
4.2.4.5 Filling
4.2.4.5.1 Prior to filling, the MEGC shall be inspected to ensure that it is authorized for the gas to be carried and
that the applicable provisions of ADR have been met.
4.2.4.5.2 Elements of MEGCs shall be filled according to the working pressures, filling ratios and filling
provisions specified in packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1 for the specific gas being filled into each
element. In no case shall an MEGC or group of elements be filled as a unit in excess of the lowest
working pressure of any given element.
4.2.4.5.3 MEGCs shall not be filled above their maximum permissible gross mass.
4.2.4.5.4 Isolation valves shall be closed after filling and remain closed during carriage. Toxic gases (gases of
groups T, TF, TC, TO, TFC and TOC) shall only be carried in MEGCs where each element is equipped
with an isolation valve.
4.2.4.5.5 The opening(s) for filling shall be closed by caps or plugs. The leakproofness of the closures and
equipment shall be verified by the filler after filling.
4.2.4.5.6 MEGCs shall not be offered for filling:
(a) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or its structural or
service equipment may be affected;
(b) unless the pressure receptacles and its structural and service equipment has been examined and
found to be in good working order; and
(c) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.2.4.6 Charged MEGCs shall not be offered for carriage;
(a) when leaking;
(b) when damaged to such an extent that the integrity of the pressure receptacles or its structural or
service equipment may be affected;
(c) unless the pressure receptacles and its structural and service equipment have been examined and
found to be in good working order; and
(d) unless the required certification, retest, and filling marks are legible.
4.2.4.7 Empty MEGCs that have not been cleaned and purged shall comply with the same requirements as
MEGCs filled with the previous substance.
4.2.5 Portable tank instructions and special provisions
4.2.5.1 General
4.2.5.1.1 This section includes the portable tank instructions and special provisions applicable to dangerous goods
authorized to be carried in portable tanks. Each portable tank instruction is identified by an alpha-
numeric code (e.g. T1). Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 indicates the portable tank instruction
that shall be used for each substance permitted for carriage in a portable tank. When no portable tank
instruction appears in Column (10) for a specific dangerous goods entry then carriage of the substance
in portable tanks is not permitted unless a competent authority approval is granted as detailed in 6.7.1.3.
Portable tank special provisions are assigned to specific dangerous goods in Column (11) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2. Each portable tank special provision is identified by an alpha-numeric code (e.g. TP1). A
listing of the portable tank special provisions is provided in 4.2.5.3.
NOTE: The gases authorized for carriage in MEGCs are indicated with the letter “(M)” in Column
(10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2.
– 174 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 175 –
4.2.5.2 Portable tank instructions
4.2.5.2.1 Portable tank instructions apply to dangerous goods of Classes 1 to 9. Portable tank instructions provide
specific information relevant to portable tanks provisions applicable to specific substances. These
provisions shall be met in addition to the general provisions in this Chapter and the general requirements
in Chapter 6.7 or Chapter 6.9.
4.2.5.2.2 For substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9, the portable tank instructions indicate the applicable
minimum test pressure, the minimum shell thickness, bottom opening requirements and pressure relief
requirements. In portable tank instruction T23, self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and Class 5.2
organic peroxides permitted to be carried in portable tanks are listed along with the applicable control
and emergency temperatures.
4.2.5.2.3 Non-refrigerated liquefied gases are assigned to portable tank instruction T50. T50 provides the
maximum allowable working pressures, the requirements for the openings below liquid level, pressure-
relief requirements and maximum filling density requirements for non-refrigerated liquefied gases
permitted for carriage in portable tanks.
4.2.5.2.4 Refrigerated liquefied gases are assigned to portable tank instruction T75.
4.2.5.2.5 Determination of the appropriate portable tank instructions
When a specific portable tank instruction is specified in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for a
specific dangerous goods entry additional portable tanks which possess higher minimum test pressures,
greater shell thicknesses, more stringent bottom opening and pressure-relief device arrangements may
be used. The following guidelines apply to determining the appropriate portable tanks which may be
used for carriage of particular substances:
Portable tank
instruction specified Portable tank instructions also permitted
T1 T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21,
T22
T2 T4, T5, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T3 T4, T5, T6, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T4 T5, T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T5 T10, T14, T19, T20, T22
T6 T7, T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T7 T8, T9, T10, T11, T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T8 T9, T10, T13, T14, T19, T20, T21, T22
T9 T10, T13, T14, T19, T20, T21, T22
T10 T14, T19, T20, T22
T11 T12, T13, T14, T15, T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T12 T14, T16, T18, T19, T20, T22
T13 T14, T19, T20, T21, T22
T14 T19, T20, T22
T15 T16, T17, T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T16 T18, T19, T20, T22
T17 T18, T19, T20, T21, T22
T18 T19, T20, T22
T19 T20, T22
T20 T22
T21 T22
T22 None
T23 None
– 175 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 176 –
4.2.5.2.6 Portable tank instructions
Portable tank instructions specify the requirements applicable to a portable tank when used for the
carriage of specific substances. Portable tank instructions T1 to T22 specify the applicable minimum
test pressure, the minimum shell thickness in mm reference steel for shells made of metallic materials
or the minimum FRP shell thickness, and the pressure-relief and bottom-opening requirements.
T1 – T22 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTIONS T1 – T22
These portable tank instructions apply to liquid and solid substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9. The general provisions
of Section 4.2.1 and the requirements of Section 6.7.2 shall be met. The instructions for portable tanks with FRP shells
apply to substances of classes 1, 3, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 8 and 9. Additionally, the requirements of Chapter 6.9 apply.
Portable tank
instruction
Minimum test
pressure (bar)
Minimum shell thickness
(in mm-reference steel
for shells made of
metallic materials)
(see 6.7.2.4)
Pressure-relief
requirements a
(see 6.7.2.8)
Bottom opening
requirements b
(see 6.7.2.6)
T1 1.5 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2
T2 1.5 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T3 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2
T4 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T5 2.65 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T6 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.2
T7 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T8 4 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal Not allowed
T9 4 6 mm Normal Not allowed
T10 4 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T11 6 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T12 6 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3
T13 6 6 mm Normal Not allowed
T14 6 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T15 10 See 6.7.2.4.2 Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T16 10 See 6.7.2.4.2 See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3
T17 10 6 mm Normal See 6.7.2.6.3
T18 10 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 See 6.7.2.6.3
T19 10 6 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T20 10 8 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
T21 10 10 mm Normal Not allowed
T22 10 10 mm See 6.7.2.8.3 Not allowed
a When the word “Normal” is indicated, all the requirements of 6.7.2.8 apply except for 6.7.2.8.3.
b When this column indicates “Not allowed”, bottom openings are not permitted when the substance to be carried is
a liquid (see 6.7.2.6.1). When the substance to be carried is a solid at all temperatures encountered under normal
conditions of carriage, bottom openings conforming to the requirements of 6.7.2.6.2 are authorized.
– 176 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 177 –
T23 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T23
This portable tank instruction applies to self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2. The
general provisions of Section 4.2.1 and the requirements of Section 6.7.2 shall be met. The additional provisions specific
to self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2 in 4.2.1.13 shall also be met. The formulations
not listed in 2.2.41.4 or in 2.2.52.4 but listed below may also be carried packed in accordance with packing method OP8
of packing instruction P520 of 4.1.4.1, with the same control and emergency temperatures, if applicable.
UN
No. Substance Minimum
test
pressure
(bar)
Minimum
shell
thickness
(mm-
reference
steel)
Bottom
opening
requi-
rements
Pressure-
relief
requi-
rements
Degree of
filling Control
tempe-
rature
Emergency
temperature
3109 ORGANIC PEROXIDE,
TYPE F, LIQUID
4 See
6.7.2.4.2
See
6.7.2.6.3
See 6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
tert-Butyl hydro-
peroxidea, not more than
72 % with water
tert-Butyl hydro-
peroxide, not more than
56 % in diluent type Bb
Cumyl hydroperoxide,
not more than 90 % in
diluent type A
Di-tert-butyl peroxide,
not more than 32 % in
diluent type A
Isopropyl cumyl hydro-
peroxide, not more
than 72 % in diluent
type A
p-Menthyl hydro-
peroxide, not more than
72 % in diluent type A
Pinanyl hydro-
peroxide, not more than
56 % in diluent type A
3110 ORGANIC PEROXIDE
TYPE F, SOLID
4 See
6.7.2.4.2
See
6.7.2.6.3
See 6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
Dicumyl peroxidec
3119 ORGANIC PEROXIDE,
TYPE F, LIQUID,
TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED
4 See
6.7.2.4.2
See
6.7.2.6.3 See 6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
d d
tert-Amyl
peroxyneodecanoate, not
more than 47 % in
diluent type A
-10 °C -5 °C
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate,
not more than 32 % in
diluent type B
+30 °C +35 °C
(Cont’d on next page)
a Provided that steps have been taken to achieve the safety equivalence of 65% tert-Butyl hydroperoxide and 35%
water.
b Diluent type B is tert-Butyl alcohol.
c Maximum quantity per portable tank: 2000 kg.
d As approved by the competent authority.
– 177 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 178 –
T23 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T23
This portable tank instruction applies to self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2. The
general provisions of Section 4.2.1 and the requirements of Section 6.7.2 shall be met. The additional provisions specific
to self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and organic peroxides of Class 5.2 in 4.2.1.13 shall also be met. The formulations
listed below may also be carried packed in accordance with packing method OP8 of packing instruction P520 of 4.1.4.1,
with the same control and emergency temperatures, if applicable.
UN
No. Substance Minimum
test
pressure
(bar)
Minimum
shell
thickness
(mm-
reference
steel)
Bottom
opening
requi-
rements
Pressure-
relief
requi-
rements
Degree of
filling Control
tempe-
rature
Emergency
temperature
3119
(Cont’d)
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-
ethylhexanoate, not
more than 32 % in
diluent type B
+15 °C +20 °C
tert-Butyl
peroxypivalate, not
more than 27 % in
diluent type B
c +5 °C +10 °C
tert-Butyl peroxy-
3,5,5-trimethyl-
hexanoate, not more
than 32 % in diluent
type B
+35 °C +40 °C
Di-(3,5,5-trimethyl-
hexanoyl) peroxide,
not more than 38 % in
diluent type A or
type B
0 °C +5 °C
Peroxyacetic acid,
distilled, type F,
stabilizede
+30 C +35 C
3120 ORGANIC
PEROXIDE, TYPE F,
SOLID,
TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED
4 See
6.7.2.4.2 See
6.7.2.6.3 See 6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
d d
3229 SELF-REACTIVE
LIQUID TYPE F 4 See
6.7.2.4.2 See
6.7.2.6.3 See
6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
3230 SELF-REACTIVE
SOLID TYPE F 4 See
6.7.2.4.2 See
6.7.2.6.3 See
6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
3239 SELF-REACTIVE
LIQUID TYPE F,
TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED
4 See
6.7.2.4.2 See
6.7.2.6.3 See
6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
d d
3240 SELF-REACTIVE
SOLID TYPE F,
TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED
4 See
6.7.2.4.2 See
6.7.2.6.3 See
6.7.2.8.2
4.2.1.13.6
4.2.1.13.7
4.2.1.13.8
See
4.2.1.13.13
d d
d As approved by the competent authority.
e Formulation derived from distillation of peroxyacetic acid originating from peroxyacetic acid in concentration
of not more than 41% with water, total active oxygen (Peroxyacetic acid+H2O 2)
9.5%, which fulfils the criteria of the
Manual of Tests and Criteria, paragraph 20.4.3 (f). “CORROSIVE” subsidiary hazard placard required (Model No 8,
see 5.2.2.2.2).
– 178 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 179 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
1005 Ammonia, anhydrous 29.0
25.7
22.0
19.7
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.53
1009 Bromotrifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 13B1)
38.0
34.0
30.0
27.5
Allowed Normal 1.13
1010 Butadienes, stabilized 7.5
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.55
1010 Butadienes and hydrocarbon
mixture, stabilized
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
1011 Butane 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.51
1012 Butylene 8.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.53
1017 Chlorine 19.0
17.0
15.0
13.5
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.25
1018 Chlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 22)
26.0
24.0
21.0
19.0
Allowed Normal 1.03
1020 Chloropentafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 115)
23.0
20.0
18.0
16.0
Allowed Normal 1.06
1021 1-Chloro-
1,2,2,2-tetrafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 124)
10.3
9.8
7.9
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.20
1027 Cyclopropane 18.0
16.0
14.5
13.0
Allowed Normal 0.53
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 179 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 180 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
1028 Dichlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 12)
16.0
15.0
13.0
11.5
Allowed Normal 1.15
1029 Dichlorofluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 21)
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.23
1030 1,1-Difluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 152a)
16.0
14.0
12.4
11.0
Allowed Normal 0.79
1032 Dimethylamine, anhydrous 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.59
1033 Dimethyl ether 15.5
13.8
12.0
10.6
Allowed Normal 0.58
1036 Ethylamine 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.61
1037 Ethyl chloride 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.80
1040 Ethylene oxide with nitrogen up
to a total pressure of 1MPa
(10 bar) at 50 °C
–
–
–
10.0
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.78
1041 Ethylene oxide and carbon
dioxide mixture with more than
9 % but not more than 87 %
ethylene oxide
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
1055 Isobutylene 8.1
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.52
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 180 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 181 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
1060 Methylacetylene and propadiene
mixture, stabilized
28.0
24.5
22.0
20.0
Allowed Normal 0.43
1061 Methylamine, anhydrous 10.8
9.6
7.8
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.58
1062 Methyl bromide with not more
than 2 % chloropicrin
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.51
1063 Methyl chloride
(Refrigerant gas R 40)
14.5
12.7
11.3
10.0
Allowed Normal 0.81
1064 Methyl mercaptan 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.78
1067 Dinitrogen tetroxide 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.30
1075 Petroleum gases, liquefied See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
1077 Propylene 28.0
24.5
22.0
20.0
Allowed Normal 0.43
1078 Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
1079 Sulphur dioxide 11.6
10.3
8.5
7.6
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.23
1082 Trifluorochloroethylene,
stabilized
(Refrigerant gas R 1113)
17.0
15.0
13.1
11.6
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.13
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 181 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 182 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
1083 Trimethylamine, anhydrous 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.56
1085 Vinyl bromide, stabilized 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.37
1086 Vinyl chloride, stabilized 10.6
9.3
8.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.81
1087 Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized 7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.67
1581 Chloropicrin and methyl
bromide mixture with more than
2 % chloropicrin
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.51
1582 Chloropicrin and methyl
chloride mixture
19.2
16.9
15.1
13.1
Not Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 0.81
1858 Hexafluoropropylene
(Refrigerant gas R 1216)
19.2
16.9
15.1
13.1
Allowed Normal 1.11
1912 Methyl chloride and methylene
chloride mixture
15.2
13.0
11.6
10.1
Allowed Normal 0.81
1958 1,2-Dichloro-1,1,2,2-
tetrafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 114)
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.30
1965 Hydrocarbon gas, mixture
liquefied, n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
1969 Isobutane 8.5
7.5
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.49
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 182 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 183 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
1973 Chlorodifluoromethane and
chloropentafluoroethane
mixture with fixed boiling point,
with approximately 49 %
chlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 502)
28.3
25.3
22.8
20.3
Allowed Normal 1.05
1974 Chlorodifluorobromomethane
(Refrigerant gas R 12B1)
7.4
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.61
1976 Octafluorocyclobutane
(Refrigerant gas RC 318)
8.8
7.8
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.34
1978 Propane 22.5
20.4
18.0
16.5
Allowed Normal 0.42
1983 1-Chloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 133a)
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.18
2035 1,1,1-Trifluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 143a)
31.0
27.5
24.2
21.8
Allowed Normal 0.76
2424 Octafluoropropane
(Refrigerant gas R 218)
23.1
20.8
18.6
16.6
Allowed Normal 1.07
2517 1-Chloro-1,1-difluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 142b)
8.9
7.8
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 0.99
2602 Dichlorodifluoromethane and
1,1-difluoroethane azeotropic
mixture with approximately
74 % dichlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 500)
20.0
18.0
16.0
14.5
Allowed Normal 1.01
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 183 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 184 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
3057 Trifluoroacetyl chloride 14.6
12.9
11.3
9.9
Not allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.17
3070 Ethylene oxide and
dichlorodifluoromethane
mixture with not more than
12.5 % ethylene oxide
14.0
12.0
11.0
9.0
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 1.09
3153 Perfluoro (methyl vinyl ether) 14.3
13.4
11.2
10.2
Allowed Normal 1.14
3159 1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 134a)
17.7
15.7
13.8
12.1
Allowed Normal 1.04
3161 Liquefied gas, flammable, n.o.s. See
MAWP definition
in 6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
3163 Liquefied gas, n.o.s. See
MAWP definition
in 6.7.3.1
Allowed Normal See 4.2.2.7
3220 Pentafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R 125)
34.4
30.8
27.5
24.5
Allowed Normal 0.87
3252 Difluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R 32)
43.0
39.0
34.4
30.5
Allowed Normal 0.78
3296 Heptafluoropropane
(Refrigerant gas R 227)
16.0
14.0
12.5
11.0
Allowed Normal 1.20
3297 Ethylene oxide and
chlorotetrafluoroethane mixture,
with not more than 8.8 %
ethylene oxide
8.1
7.0
7.0
7.0
Allowed Normal 1.16
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
– 184 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 185 –
T50 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION (cont’d) T50
This portable tank instruction applies to non-refrigerated liquefied gases and chemicals under pressure (UN Nos. 3500,
3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505). The general provisions of Section 4.2.2 and the requirements of Section 6.7.3 shall
be met.
UN
No.
Non-refrigerated
liquefied gases
Max. allowable working
pressure (bar): Small;
Bare; Sunshield;
Insulated; respectivelya
Openings
below liquid
level
Pressure- relief
requirements b
(see 6.7.3.7)
Maximum filling
ratio
3298 Ethylene oxide and
pentafluoroethane mixture, with
not more than 7.9 % ethylene
oxide
25.9
23.4
20.9
18.6
Allowed Normal 1.02
3299 Ethylene oxide and
tetrafluoroethane mixture, with
not more than 5.6 % ethylene
oxide
16.7
14.7
12.9
11.2
Allowed Normal 1.03
3318 Ammonia solution, relative
density less than 0.880 at 15 °C
in water, with more than 50 %
ammonia
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 See 4.2.2.7
3337 Refrigerant gas R 404A 31.6
28.3
25.3
22.5
Allowed Normal 0.84
3338 Refrigerant gas R 407A 31.3
28.1
25.1
22.4
Allowed Normal 0.95
3339 Refrigerant gas R 407B 33.0
29.6
26.5
23.6
Allowed Normal 0.95
3340 Refrigerant gas R 407C 29.9
26.8
23.9
21.3
Allowed Normal 0.95
3500 Chemical under pressure, n.o.s. See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
3501 Chemical under pressure,
flammable, n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
3502 Chemical under pressure, toxic,
n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
3503 Chemical under pressure,
corrosive, n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
3504 Chemical under pressure,
flammable, toxic, n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
3505 Chemical under pressure,
flammable, corrosive, n.o.s.
See MAWP definition in
6.7.3.1
Allowed See 6.7.3.7.3 TP4c
a “Small” means tanks having a shell with a diameter of 1.5 m or less; “Bare” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m without insulation or sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Sunshield” means tanks having a shell
with a diameter of more than 1.5 m with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12); “Insulated” means tanks having a shell with a
diameter of more than 1.5 m with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12); (See definition of “Design reference temperature” in 6.7.3.1).
b The word “Normal” in the pressure relief requirements column indicates that a frangible disc as specified in
6.7.3.7.3 is not required.
c For UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505, the degree of filling shall be considered instead of the
maximum filling ratio.
– 185 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 186 –
T75 PORTABLE TANK INSTRUCTION T75
This portable tank instruction applies to refrigerated liquefied gases. The general provisions of Section 4.2.3 and the
requirements of Section 6.7.4 shall be met.
4.2.5.3 Portable tank special provisions
Portable tank special provisions are assigned to certain substances to indicate provisions which are in
addition to or in lieu of those provided by the portable tank instructions or the requirements in
Chapter 6.7. Portable tank special provisions are identified by an alpha numeric code beginning with
the letters “TP” (tank provision) and are assigned to specific substances in Column (11) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2. The following is a list of the portable tank special provisions:
TP1 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.1.9.2 shall not be exceeded.
)
)t(t1
97
fillingof(
fr
Degree
TP2 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.1.9.3 shall not be exceeded.
)
)t(t1
95
fillingof(
fr
Degree
TP3 The maximum degree of filling (in %) for solids carried above their melting point and for
elevated temperature liquids shall be determined in accordance with 4.2.1.9.5.
)
d
d
95fillingof(
f
r
Degree
TP4 The degree of filling shall not exceed 90 % or, alternatively, any other value approved by
the competent authority (see 4.2.1.16.2).
TP5 The degree of filling prescribed in 4.2.3.6 shall be met.
TP6 To prevent the tank bursting in any event, including fire engulfment, it shall be provided
with pressure-relief devices which are adequate in relation to the capacity of the tank and
to the nature of the substance carried. The device shall also be compatible with the
substance.
TP7 Air shall be eliminated from the vapour space by nitrogen or other means.
TP8 The test pressure may be reduced to 1.5 bar when the flash point of the substances carried
is greater than 0 °C.
TP9 A substance under this description shall only be carried in a portable tank under an
approval granted by the competent authority.
TP10 A lead lining, not less than 5 mm thick, which shall be tested annually, or another suitable
lining material approved by the competent authority is required. A portable tank may be
offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last lining inspection for a period not to
exceed three months beyond that date, after emptying but before cleaning, for purposes
of performing the next required test or inspection prior to refilling.
TP12 (Deleted)
TP13 (Reserved)
TP16 The tank shall be fitted with a special device to prevent under-pressure and excess pressure
during normal carriage conditions. This device shall be approved by the competent
authority.
Pressure-relief requirements are as indicated in 6.7.2.8.3 to prevent crystallization of the
product in the pressure-relief valve.
– 186 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 187 –
TP17 Only inorganic non-combustible materials shall be used for thermal insulation of the tank.
TP18 Temperature shall be maintained between 18 °C and 40 °C. Portable tanks containing
solidified methacrylic acid shall not be reheated during carriage.
TP19 At the time of construction, the minimum shell thickness determined according to 6.7.3.4
shall be increased by 3 mm as a corrosion allowance. Shell thickness shall be verified
ultrasonically at intervals midway between periodic hydraulic tests and shall never be
lower than the minimum shell thickness determined according to 6.7.3.4.
TP20 This substance shall only be carried in insulated tanks under a nitrogen blanket.
TP21 The shell thickness shall be not less than 8 mm. Tanks shall be hydraulically tested and
internally inspected at intervals not exceeding 2.5 years.
TP22 Lubricant for joints or other devices shall be oxygen compatible.
TP23 Deleted.
TP24 The portable tank may be fitted with a device located under maximum filling conditions
in the vapour space of the shell to prevent the build-up of excess pressure due to the slow
decomposition of the substance carried. This device shall also prevent an unacceptable
amount of leakage of liquid in the case of overturning or entry of foreign matter into the
tank. This device shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body.
TP25 Sulphur trioxide 99.95 % pure and above may be carried in tanks without an inhibitor
provided that it is maintained at a temperature equal to or above 32.5 °C.
TP26 When carried under heated conditions, the heating device shall be fitted outside the shell.
For UN 3176 this requirement only applies when the substance reacts dangerously with
water.
TP27 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 4 bar may be used if it is shown that a
test pressure of 4 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition
in 6.7.2.1.
TP28 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 2.65 bar may be used if it is shown
that a test pressure of 2.65 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition
in 6.7.2.1.
TP29 A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 1.5 bar may be used if it is shown that
a test pressure of 1.5 bar or less is acceptable according to the test pressure definition
in 6.7.2.1.
TP30 This substance shall be carried in insulated tanks.
TP31 This substance may only be carried in tanks in the solid state.
TP32 For UN Nos. 0331, 0332 and 3375, portable tanks may be used subject to the following
conditions:
(a) To avoid unnecessary confinement, each portable tank constructed of metal or
fibre-reinforced plastics shall be fitted with a pressure-relief device that may be of
the reclosing spring-loaded type, a frangible disc or a fusible element. The set to
discharge or burst pressure, as applicable, shall not be greater than 2.65 bar for
portable tanks with minimum test pressures greater than 4 bar.
(b) For UN 3375 only, the suitability for carriage in tanks shall be demonstrated. One
method to evaluate this suitability is test 8 (d) in Test Series 8 (see Manual of Tests
and Criteria, Part 1, Sub-section 18.7).
(c) Substances shall not be allowed to remain in the portable tank for any period that
could result in caking. Appropriate measures shall be taken to avoid accumulation
and packing of substances in the tank (e.g. cleaning, etc).
– 187 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 188 –
TP33 The portable tank instruction assigned for this substance applies to granular and powdered
solids and to solids which are filled and discharged at temperatures above their melting
point which are cooled and carried as a solid mass. For solids which are carried above
their melting point, see 4.2.1.19.
TP34 Portable tanks need not be subjected to the impact test in 6.7.4.14.1 if the portable tank is
marked “NOT FOR RAIL TRANSPORT” on the plate specified in 6.7.4.15.1 and also in
letters of at least 10 cm high on both sides of the outer jacket.
TP35 Deleted.
TP36 Fusible elements in the vapour space may be used on portable tanks.
TP37, TP38 and TP39 (Deleted)
TP40 Portable tanks shall not be carried when connected with spray application equipment.
TP41 With the agreement of the competent authority, the 2.5 year internal examination may be
waived or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures, provided that the
portable tank is dedicated to the carriage of the organometallic substances to which this
tank special provision is assigned. However this examination is required when the
conditions of 6.7.2.19.7 are met.
– 188 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 189 –
CHAPTER 4.3
USE OF FIXED TANKS (TANK-VEHICLES), DEMOUNTABLE TANKS,
TANK-CONTAINERS AND TANK SWAP BODIES WITH SHELLS MADE
OF METALLIC MATERIALS, AND BATTERY-VEHICLES AND
MULTIPLE-ELEMENT GAS CONTAINERS (MEGCs)
NOTE: For portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) see Chapter 4.2; for fibre-reinforced
plastics tanks, see Chapter 4.4; for vacuum operated waste tanks, see Chapter 4.5.
4.3.1 Scope
4.3.1.1 Provisions which take up the whole width of the page apply both to fixed tanks (tank-vehicles),
demountable tanks and battery-vehicles, and to tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs.
Provisions contained in a single column apply only to:
– fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks and battery-vehicles (left-hand column);
– tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs (right-hand column).
4.3.1.2 These provisions apply to:
fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks
and battery-vehicles
tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs
used for the carriage of gaseous, liquid, powdery or granular substances.
4.3.1.3 Section 4.3.2 lists the provisions applicable to fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, tank-
containers and tank swap bodies, intended for the carriage of substances of all classes, and to battery-
vehicles and MEGCs intended for the carriage of gases of Class 2. Sections 4.3.3 and 4.3.4 contain
special provisions adding to or amending the provisions of Section 4.3.2.
4.3.1.4 For requirements concerning the construction, equipment, type approval, inspections and tests and
marking, see Chapter 6.8.
4.3.1.5 For transitional measures concerning the application of this Chapter, see:
1.6.3. 1.6.4.
4.3.2 Provisions applicable to all classes
4.3.2.1 Use
4.3.2.1.1 A substance subject to ADR may be carried in fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, battery-
vehicles, tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs only when provision is made for a tank code
according to 4.3.3.1.1 and 4.3.4.1.1 in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2.
4.3.2.1.2 The required type of tank, battery-vehicle and MEGC is given in code form in Column (12) of Table A
in Chapter 3.2. The explanations for reading the four parts of the code are given in 4.3.3.1.1 (when the
substance to be carried belongs to Class 2) and in 4.3.4.1.1 (when the substance to be carried belongs
to Classes 1 and 3 to 9)1.
4.3.2.1.3 The required type according to 4.3.2.1.2 corresponds to the least stringent construction requirements
which are acceptable for the dangerous substance in question unless otherwise prescribed in this Chapter
or in Chapter 6.8. It is possible to use tanks corresponding to codes prescribing a higher minimum
calculation pressure, or more stringent requirements for filling or discharge openings or for safety
valves/devices (see 4.3.3.1.1 for Class 2 and 4.3.4.1.1 for Classes 3 to 9).
1 An exception is made for tanks intended for the carriage of substances of classes 1, 5.2 or 7 (see 4.3.4.1.3).
– 189 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 190 –
4.3.2.1.4 For certain substances, tanks, battery-vehicles or MEGCs are subject to additional provisions which are
included as special provisions in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2.
4.3.2.1.5 Tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs shall not be loaded with any dangerous substances other than those
for the carriage of which they have been approved according to 6.8.2.3.2 and which, in contact with the
materials of the shell, gaskets, equipment and protective linings, are not liable to react dangerously with
them (see “dangerous reaction” in 1.2.1), to form dangerous products or appreciably to weaken these
materials2.
4.3.2.1.6 Foodstuffs shall not be carried in tanks used for dangerous substances unless the necessary steps have
been taken to prevent any harm to public health.
4.3.2.1.7 The tank record shall be retained by the owner or the operator who shall be able to provide this
documentation at the request of the competent authority. The tank record shall be maintained throughout
the life of the tank and retained for 15 months after the tank is taken out of service.
Should a change of owner or operator occur during the life of the tank the tank record shall be transferred
without delay to the new owner or operator.
Copies of the tank record or all necessary documents shall be made available to the inspection body for
tests and inspections on tanks in accordance with 6.8.2.4.5 or 6.8.3.4.18, on the occasion of periodic or
exceptional inspections.
4.3.2.2 Degree of filling
4.3.2.2.1 The following degrees of filling shall not be exceeded in tanks intended for the carriage of liquids at
ambient temperatures:
(a) for flammable substances, environmentally hazardous substances and flammable
environmentally hazardous substances, without additional hazards (e.g. toxicity or corrosivity),
in tanks with a breather device or with safety valves (even where preceded by a bursting disc):
capacityof%
)t-(501
100
fillingofDegree
F
(b) for toxic or corrosive substances (whether flammable or environmentally hazardous or not) in
tanks with a breather device or with safety valves (even where preceded by a bursting disc):
capacityof%
)t-(501
98
fillingofDegree
F
(c) for flammable substances, environmentally hazardous substances and slightly toxic or corrosive
substances (whether flammable or environmentally hazardous or not) in hermetically closed
tanks without a safety device:
capacityof%
)t-(501
97
fillingofDegree
F
(d) for highly toxic, toxic, highly corrosive or corrosive substances (whether flammable or
environmentally hazardous or not) in hermetically closed tanks without a safety device:
capacityof%
)t-(501
95
fillingofDegree
F
4.3.2.2.2 In these formulae, is the mean coefficient of cubical expansion of the liquid between 15 °C and 50 °C,
i.e. for a maximum variation in temperature of 35 °C.
2 It may be necessary to consult the manufacturer of the substance and the competent authority for guidance on the
compatibility of the substance with the materials of the tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC.
– 190 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 191 –
is calculated by the formula:
50
5015
35d
dd
where d 15 and d 50 are the relative densities of the liquid at 15 °C and 50 °C respectively.
tF is the mean temperature of the liquid during filling.
4.3.2.2.3 The provisions of 4.3.2.2.1 (a) to (d) above shall not apply to tanks whose contents are, by means of a
heating device, maintained at a temperature above 50 °C during carriage. In this case the degree of
filling at the outset shall be such, and the temperature so regulated, that the tank is not full to more than
95 % of its capacity and that the filling temperature is not exceeded, at any time during carriage.
4.3.2.2.4 Shells intended for the carriage of substances in the liquid state or liquefied gases or refrigerated
liquefied gases, which are not divided by partitions or surge plates into sections of not more than 7 500
litres capacity, shall be filled to not less than 80 % or not more than 20 % of their capacity.
This provision is not applicable to:
– liquids with a kinematic viscosity at 20 °C of at least 2 680 mm²/s;
– molten substances with a kinematic viscosity at the temperature of filling of at least 2 680 mm²/s;
– UN 1963 HELIUM, REFRIGERATED, LIQUID and UN 1966 HYDROGEN,
REFRIGERATED, LIQUID.
4.3.2.3 Operation
4.3.2.3.1 The thickness of the walls of the shell shall not, throughout its use, fall below the minimum figure
prescribed in:
6.8.2.1.17 to 6.8.2.1.21. 6.8.2.1.17 to 6.8.1.20.
4.3.2.3.2 During carriage tank-containers/MEGCs shall be
loaded on the carrying vehicle in such a way as to
be adequately protected by the fittings of the
carrying vehicle or of the tank-container/MEGC
itself against lateral and longitudinal impact and
against overturning3. If the tank-
containers/MEGCs, including the service
equipment, are so constructed as to withstand
impact or overturning they need not be protected in
this way.
4.3.2.3.3 During filling and discharge of tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs, appropriate measures shall be taken
to prevent the release of dangerous quantities of gases and vapours. Tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs
shall be closed so that the contents cannot spill out uncontrolled. The openings of bottom-discharge
tanks shall be closed by means of screw-threaded plugs, blank flanges or other equally effective devices.
After filling, the filler shall ensure that all the closures of the tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs are in
the closed position and there is no leakage. This also applies to the upper part of the dip tube.
4.3.2.3.4 Where several closure systems are fitted in series, that nearest to the substance being carried shall be
closed first.
3 Examples of protection of shells:
– protection against lateral impact may, for example, consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both
sides at the level of the median line;
– protection against overturning may, for example, consist of reinforcing rings or bars fixed transversally in
relation to the frame;
– protection against rear impact, may, for example, consist of a bumper or frame.
– 191 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 192 –
4.3.2.3.5 No dangerous residue of the filling substance shall adhere to the outside of the tank during carriage.
4.3.2.3.6 Substances which may react dangerously with each other shall not be carried in adjoining compartments
of tanks.
Substances which may react dangerously with each other may be carried in adjoining compartments of
tanks, when these compartments are separated by a partition with a wall thickness equal to or greater
than that of the tank itself. They may also be carried separated by an empty space or an empty
compartment between loaded compartments.
4.3.2.3.7 Fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, battery-vehicles, tank-containers, tank swap bodies and
MEGCs may not be filled or offered for carriage after the date specified for the inspection required by
6.8.2.4.2, 6.8.2.4.3, 6.8.3.4.6 and 6.8.3.4.12.
However, fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, battery-vehicles, tank-containers, tank swap
bodies and MEGCs filled prior to the date specified for the next inspection may be carried:
(a) for a period not to exceed one month after the date specified if the inspection due is a periodic
inspection in accordance with 6.8.2.4.2, 6.8.3.4.6 (a) and 6.8.3.4.12;
(b) unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed three months
after the expiry of the date specified, if the inspection due is a periodic inspection in accordance
with 6.8.2.4.2, 6.8.3.4.6 (a) and 6.8.3.4.12 in order to allow the return of dangerous goods for
proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be mentioned in the transport
document;
(c) for a period not to exceed three months after the date specified, if the inspection due is an
intermediate inspection in accordance with 6.8.2.4.3, 6.8.3.4.6 (b) and 6.8.3.4.12.
4.3.2.4 Empty tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs, uncleaned
NOTE: For empty tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs, uncleaned, special provisions TU1, TU2, TU4,
TU16 and TU35 of 4.3.5 may apply.
4.3.2.4.1 No dangerous residue of the filling substance shall adhere to the outside of the tank during carriage.
4.3.2.4.2 To be accepted for carriage, empty tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs, uncleaned, shall be closed in
the same manner and be leakproof to the same degree as if they were full.
4.3.2.4.3 Where empty tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs, uncleaned, are not closed in the same manner and
are not leakproof to the same degree as if they were full and where the provisions of ADR cannot be
complied with, they shall be carried, with due regard to adequate safety, to the nearest suitable place
where cleaning or repair can be carried out. Carriage is adequately safe if suitable measures have been
taken to ensure equivalent safety commensurate with the provisions of ADR and to prevent the
uncontrolled release of the dangerous goods.
4.3.2.4.4 Empty fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, battery-vehicles, tank-containers, tank swap
bodies and MEGCs, uncleaned, may also be carried after the expiry of the periods established in
6.8.2.4.2 and 6.8.2.4.3 for undergoing the inspection.
– 192 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 193 –
4.3.3 Special provisions applicable to Class 2
4.3.3.1 Coding and hierarchy of tanks
4.3.3.1.1 Coding of tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs
The four parts of the codes (tank codes) given in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 have the
following meanings:
Part Description Tank Code
1 Types of tank,
battery-vehicle or
MEGC
C = tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC for compressed gases;
P = tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC for liquefied gases or
dissolved gases;
R = tank for refrigerated liquefied gases.
2 Calculation pressure X = value of the minimum relevant test pressure according to
the table in 4.3.3.2.5; or
22 = minimum calculation pressure in bar.
3 Openings (see
6.8.2.2 and
6.8.3.2)
B = tank with bottom filling or discharge openings with
3 closures; or
battery-vehicle or MEGC with openings below the surface
of the liquid or for compressed gases;
C = tank with top filling or discharge openings with 3 closures
with only cleaning openings below the surface of the liquid;
D = tank with top filling or discharge openings with 3 closures;
or
battery-vehicle or MEGC with no openings below the
surface of the liquid.
4 Safety valves/devices N = tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC with safety valve according
to 6.8.3.2.9 or 6.8.3.2.10 which is not hermetically closed;
H = hermetically closed tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC (see
1.2.1);
NOTE 1: The special provision TU17 indicated in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 for certain
gases means that the gas may only be carried in a battery-vehicle or MEGC the elements of which are
composed of receptacles.
NOTE 2: The special provision TU40 indicated in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 for certain
gases means that the gas may only be carried in a battery-vehicle or MEGC, the elements of which are
composed of seamless receptacles.
NOTE 3: The pressures indicated on the tank itself or on the panel shall be not less than the value of
“X” or the minimum calculation pressure.
– 193 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 194 –
4.3.3.1.2 Hierarchy of tanks
Tank
code
Other tank code(s) permitted for the substances under this code
C*BN
C*BH
C*CN
C*CH
C*DN
C*DH
P*BN
P*BH
P*CN
P*CH
P*DN
P*DH
R*BN
R*CN
R*DN
C#BN, C#CN, C#DN, C#BH, C#CH, C#DH
C#BH, C#CH, C#DH
C#CN, C#DN, C#CH, C#DH
C#CH, C#DH
C#DN, C#DH
C#DH
P#BN, P#CN, P#DN, P#BH, P#CH, P#DH
P#BH, P#CH, P#DH
P#CN, P#DN, P#CH, P#DH
P#CH, P#DH
P#DN, P#DH
P#DH
R#BN, R#CN, R#DN
R#CN, R#DN
R#DN
The figure represented by “#” shall be equal to or greater than the figure represented by “*”.
NOTE: This hierarchy does not take any special provisions into account (see 4.3.5 and 6.8.4) for each
entry.
4.3.3.2 Filling conditions and test pressures
4.3.3.2.1 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of compressed gases shall be at least 1.5 times the
working pressure as defined in 1.2.1 for pressure receptacles.
4.3.3.2.2 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of:
– high pressure liquefied gases; and
– dissolved gases
shall be such that, when the shell is filled to the maximum filling ratio, the pressure reached in the shell
by the substance at 55 °C for tanks with thermal insulation or 65 °C for tanks without thermal insulation
does not exceed the test pressure.
4.3.3.2.3 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of low pressure liquefied gases will be:
(a) If the tank is equipped with thermal insulation, at least equal to the vapour pressure, reduced by
0.1 MPa (1 bar) of the liquid at 60 °C, but not less than 1 MPa (10 bar);
(b) If the tank is not equipped with thermal insulation, at least equal to the vapour pressure, reduced
by 0.1 MPa (1 bar), of the liquid at 65 °C, but not less than 1 MPa (10 bar).
The maximum permissible mass of contents per litre of capacity is calculated as follows:
Maximum permissible mass of contents per litre of capacity = 0.95
density of the liquid phase at 50 °C
(in kg/l)
Moreover the vapour phase shall not disappear below 60 °C.
If the shells are not more than 1.5 m in diameter, the values of the test pressure and maximum filling
ratio conforming to packing instruction P200 in 4.1.4.1 shall be applicable.
4.3.3.2.4 The test pressure for tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases shall be not less than
1.3 times the maximum allowable working pressure and indicated on the tank but not less than 300 kPa
(3 bar) (gauge pressure); for tanks with vacuum insulation the test pressure shall be not less than 1.3
times the maximum allowable working pressure increased by 100 kPa (1 bar).
– 194 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 195 –
4.3.3.2.5 Table of gases and gas mixtures which may be carried in fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), battery-vehicles,
demountable tanks, tank-containers or MEGCs indicating the minimum test pressure for tanks and as
far as applicable the filling ratio
In the case of gases and gas mixtures classified under n.o.s. entries, the values of the test pressure and
the filling ratio shall be prescribed by the inspection body.
When tanks for compressed or high pressure liquefied gases have been subjected to a test pressure lower
than shown in the table, and the tanks are fitted with thermal insulation, a lower maximum load may be
prescribed by the inspection body, provided that the pressure reached in the tank by the substance at
55 °C does not exceed the test pressure stamped on the tank.
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
1001 Acetylene, dissolved 4 F only in battery-vehicles and MEGCs composed of
receptacles
1002 Air, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1003 Air, refrigerated liquid 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4
1005 Ammonia, anhydrous 2 TC 2.6 26 2.9 29 0.53
1006 Argon, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1008 Boron trifluoride 2 TC 22.5 225 22.5 225 0.715
30 300 30 300 0.86
1009 Bromotrifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas
R13B1)
2 A 12 120 1.50
4.2 42 1.13
12 120 1.44
25 250 1.60
1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED (1,2-
butadiene) or 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.59
1010 BUTADIENES, STABILIZED (1,3-
butadiene) or 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.55
1010 BUTADIENES AND
HYDROCARBON, MIXTURE,
STABILIZED
2 F 1 10 1 10 0.50
1011 Butane 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.51
1012 BUTYLENE (1-Butylene) or 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.53
1012 BUTYLENE (trans-2-Butylene) or 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.54
1012 BUTYLENE (cis-2-Butylene) or 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.55
1012 BUTYLENE (Butylenes mixture) 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.50
1013 Carbon dioxide 2 A 19 190 0.73
22.5 225 0.78
19 190 0.66
25 250 0.75
1016 Carbon monoxide, compressed 1 TF see 4.3.3.2.1
1017 Chlorine 2 TOC 1.7 17 1.9 19 1.25
1018 Chlorodifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas
R22)
2 A 2.4 24 2.6 26 1.03
1020 Chloropentafluoroethane (Refrigerant
gas R115)
2 A 2 20 2.3 23 1.08
1021 1-chloro-1,2,2,2- tetrafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R124)
2 A 1 10 1.1 11 1.2
1022 Chlorotrifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas
R13)
2 A 12 120 0.96
22.5 225 1.12
10 100 0.83
12 120 0.90
19 190 1.04
25 250 1.10
1023 Coal gas, compressed TF see 4.3.3.2.1
1026 Cyanogen 2 TF 10 100 10 100 0.70
1027 Cyclopropane 2 F 1.6 16 1.8 18 0.53
– 195 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 196 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
1028 Dichlorodifluoromethane (Refrigerant
gas R12)
2 A 1.5 15 1.6 16 1.15
1029 Dichlorofluoromethane (Refrigerant gas
R21)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.23
1030 1,1-difluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R152a)
2 F 1.4 14 1.6 16 0.79
1032 Dimethylamine, anhydrous 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.59
1033 Dimethyl ether 2 F 1.4 14 1.6 16 0.58
1035 Ethane 2 F 12 120 0.32
9.5 95 0.25
12 120 0.29
30 300 0.39
1036 Ethylamine 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.61
1037 Ethyl chloride 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.8
1038 Ethylene, refrigerated liquid 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
1039 Ethyl methyl ether 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.64
1040 Ethylene oxide with nitrogen up to a
total pressure of 1MPa (10 bar) at 50 °C
2 TF 1.5 15 1.5 15 0.78
1041 Ethylene oxide and carbon dioxide
mixture, with more than 9 % but not
more than 87 % ethylene oxide
2 F 2.4 24 2.6 26 0.73
1046 Helium, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1048 Hydrogen bromide, anhydrous 2 TC 5 50 5.5 55 1.54
1049 Hydrogen, compressed 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1
1050 Hydrogen chloride, anhydrous 2 TC 12 120 0.69
10 100 0.30
12 120 0.56
15 150 0.67
20 200 0.74
1053 Hydrogen sulphide 2 TF 4.5 45 5 50 0.67
1055 Isobutylene 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.52
1056 Krypton, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1058 Liquefied gases, non flammable,
charged with nitrogen, carbon dioxide
or air
2 A 1.5 filling pressure
see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1060 Methylacetylene and propadiene
mixture, stabilized:
2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
mixture P1 2 F 2.5 25 2.8 28 0.49
mixture P2 2 F 2.2 22 2.3 23 0.47
propadiene with 1 % to 4 %
methylacetylene
2 F 2.2 22 2.2 22 0.50
1061 Methylamine, anhydrous 2 F 1 10 1.1 11 0.58
1062 Methyl bromide with not more than 2 %
chloropicrin
2 T 1 10 1 10 1.51
1063 Methyl chloride
(Refrigerant gas R40)
2 F 1.3 13 1.5 15 0.81
1064 Methyl mercaptan 2 TF 1 10 1 10 0.78
1065 Neon, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1066 Nitrogen, compressed 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1
1067 Dinitrogen tetroxide (nitrogen dioxide) 2 TOC only in battery-vehicles and MEGCs composed of
receptacles
1070 Nitrous oxide 2 O 22.5 225 0.78
18 180 0.68
22.5 225 0.74
25 250 0.75
1071 Oil gas, compressed 1 TF see 4.3.3.2.1
1072 Oxygen, compressed 1 O see 4.3.3.2.1
– 196 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 197 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
1073 Oxygen, refrigerated liquid 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4
1075 Petroleum gases, liquefied 2 F See 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1076 Phosgene 2 TC only in battery-vehicles and MEGCs composed of
receptacles
1077 Propylene 2 F 2.5 25 2.7 27 0.43
1078 Refrigerant gases, n.o.s. such as: 2 A
mixture F1 2 A 1 10 1.1 11 1.23
mixture F2 2 A 1.5 15 1.6 16 1.15
mixture F3 2 A 2.4 24 2.7 27 1.03
other mixtures 2 A see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1079 Sulphur dioxide 2 TC 1 10 1.2 12 1.23
1080 Sulphur hexafluoride 2 A 12 120 1.34
7 70 1.04
14 140 1.33
16 160 1.37
1081 Tetrafluoroethylene, stabilized 2 F only in battery-vehicles and MEGCs composed of
seamless receptacles
1082 Trifluorochloroethylene, stabilized
(Refrigerant gas R1113)
2 TF 1.5 15 1.7 17 1.13
1083 Trimethylamine, anhydrous 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.56
1085 Vinyl bromide, stabilized 2 F 1 10 1 10 1.37
1086 Vinyl chloride, stabilized 2 F 1 10 1.1 11 0.81
1087 Vinyl methyl ether, stabilized 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.67
1581 Chloropicrin and methyl bromide
mixture with more than 2 %
chloropicrin
2 T 1 10 1 10 1.51
1582 Chloropicrin and methyl chloride
mixture
2 T 1.3 13 1.5 15 0.81
1612 Hexaethyl tetraphosphate and
compressed gas mixture
1 T see 4.3.3.2.1
1749 Chlorine trifluoride 2 TOC 3 30 3 30 1.40
1858 Hexafluoropropylene
(Refrigerant gas R 1216)
2A 1.7 17 1.9 19 1.11
1859 Silicon tetrafluoride 2 TC 20
30
200
300
20
30
200
300
0.74
1.10
1860 Vinyl fluoride, stabilized 2 F 12 120 0.58
22.5 225 0.65
25 250 0.64
1912 Methyl chloride and methylene chloride
mixture
2 F 1.3 13 1.5 15 0.81
1913 Neon, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
1951 Argon, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
1952 Ethylene oxide and carbon dioxide
mixture, with not more than 9 %
ethylene oxide
2 A 19 190 19 190 0.66
25 250 25 250 0.75
1953 Compressed gas, toxic, flammable,
n.o.s. a
1 TF see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
1954 Compressed gas, flammable n.o.s. 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
1955 Compressed gas, toxic, n.o.s.a 1 T see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
1956 Compressed gas, n.o.s. 1 A see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
1957 Deuterium, compressed 1 F see 4.3.3.2.1
1958 1,2-dichloro-1,1,2,2-tetrafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R114)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.3
a Allowed if LC₅₀ equal to or greater than 200 ppm.
– 197 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 198 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
1959 1,1-difluoroethylene (Refrigerant gas
R1132a)
2 F 12 120 0.66
22.5 225 0.78
25 250 0.77
1961 Ethane, refrigerated liquid 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
1962 Ethylene 2 F 12 120 0.25
22.5 225 0.36
22.5 225 0.34
30 300 0.37
1963 Helium, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
1964 Hydrocarbon gas mixture, compressed,
n.o.s.
1 F see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
1965 Hydrocarbon gas mixture, liquefied,
n.o.s.:
2 F
Mixture A 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.50
Mixture A01 2 F 1.2 12 1.4 14 0.49
Mixture A02 2 F 1.2 12 1.4 14 0.48
Mixture A0 2 F 1.2 12 1.4 14 0.47
Mixture A1 2 F 1.6 16 1.8 18 0.46
Mixture B1 2 F 2 20 2.3 23 0.45
Mixture B2 2 F 2 20 2.3 23 0.44
Mixture B 2 F 2 20 2.3 23 0.43
Mixture C 2 F 2.5 25 2.7 27 0.42
Other mixtures 2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1966 Hydrogen, refrigerated liquid 3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
1967 Insecticide gas, toxic, n.o.s.a 2 T see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1968 Insecticide gas, n.o.s. 2 A see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
1969 Isobutane 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.49
1970 Krypton, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
1971 Methane, compressed or natural gas,
compressed with high methane content
1 F see 4.3.3.2.1
1972 Methane, refrigerated liquid or natural
gas, refrigerated liquid with high
methane content
3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
1973 Chlorodifluoromethane and
chloropentafluoroethane mixture with
fixed boiling point, with approximately
49 % chlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R502)
2 A 2.5 25 2.8 28 1.05
1974 Chlorodifluorobromomethane
(Refrigerant gas R12B1)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.61
1976 Octafluorocyclobutane (Refrigerant gas
RC318)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.34
1977 Nitrogen, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
1978 Propane 2 F 2.1 21 2.3 23 0.42
1982 Tetrafluoromethane (Refrigerant gas
R14)
2 A 20 200 20 200 0.62
30 300 30 300 0.94
1983 1-chloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R133a)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.18
1984 Trifluoromethane (Refrigerant gas R23) 2 A 19 190 0.92
25 250 0.99
19 190 0.87
25 250 0.95
2034 Hydrogen and methane mixture,
compressed
1 F see 4.3.3.2.1
2035 1,1,1-trifluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R143a)
2 F 2.8 28 3.2 32 0.79
2036 Xenon 2 A 12 120 1.30
– 198 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 199 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
13 130 1.24
2044 2,2-dimethylpropane 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.53
2073 Ammonia solutions, relative density less
than 0.880 at 15 °C in water:
4 A
with more than 35 % and not more than
40 % ammonia
4 A 1 10 1 10 0.80
with more than 40 % and not more than
50 % ammonia
4 A 1.2 12 1.2 12 0.77
2187 Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
2189 Dichlorosilane 2 TFC 1 10 1 10 0.90
2191 Sulfuryl fluoride 2 T 5 50 5 50 1.1
2193 Hexafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R116)
2 A 16 160 1.28
20 200 1.34
20 200 1.10
2197 Hydrogen iodide, anhydrous 2 TC 1.9 19 2.1 21 2.25
2200 Propadiene, stabilized 2 F 1.8 18 2.0 20 0.50
2201 Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4
2203 Silaneb 2 F 22.5 225 22.5 225 0.32
25 250 25 250 0.36
2204 Carbonyl sulphide 2 TF 2.7 27 3.0 30 0.84
2417 Carbonyl fluoride 2 TC 20 200 20 200 0.47
30 300 30 300 0.70
2419 Bromotrifluoroethylene 2 F 1 10 1 10 1.19
2420 Hexafluoroacetone 2 TC 1.6 16 1.8 18 1.08
2422 Octafluorobut-2-ene
(Refrigerant gas R1318)
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.34
2424 Octafluoropropane
(Refrigerant gas R218)
2 A 2.1 21 2.3 23 1.07
2451 Nitrogen trifluoride 2 O 20 200 20 200 0.50
30 300 30 300 0.75
2452 Ethylacetylene, stabilized 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.57
2453 Ethyl fluoride
(Refrigerant gas R161)
2 F 2.1 21 2.5 25 0.57
2454 Methyl fluoride
(Refrigerant gas R41)
2 F 30 300 30 300 0.36
2517 1-chloro-1,1-difluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R142b)
2 F 1 10 1 10 0.99
2591 Xenon, refrigerated liquid 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
2599 Chlorotrifluoromethane and
trifluoromethane, azeotropic mixture
with approximately
60 % chlorotrifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R503)
2 A 3.1 31 3.1 31 0.11
4.2 42 0.21
10 100 0.76
4.2 42 0.20
10 100 0.66
2601 Cyclobutane 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.63
2602 Dichlorodifluoromethane and
difluoro-1,1 ethane, azeotropic
mixture with approximately
74 % dichlorodifluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R500)
2 A 1.8 18 2 20 1.01
2901 Bromine chloride 2 TOC 1 10 1 10 1.50
3057 Trifluoroacetyl chloride 2 TC 1.3 13 1.5 15 1.17
3070 Ethylene oxide and
dichlorodifluoromethane mixture with
not more than 12.5 % ethylene oxide
2 A 1.5 15 1.6 16 1.09
b Considered as pyrophoric.
– 199 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 200 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
3083 Perchloryl fluoride 2 TO 2.7 27 3.0 30 1.21
3136 Trifluoromethane, refigerated liquid 3 A See 4.3.3.2.4
3138 Ethylene, acetylene propylene in
mixture, refrigerated liquid, containing
at least 71.5 % ethylene with not more
than 22.5 % acetylene and not more
than 6 % propylene
3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
3153 Perfluoro(methyl vinyl ether) 2 F 1.4 14 1.5 15 1.14
3154 Perfluoro(ethyl vinyl ether) 2 F 1 10 1 10 0.98
3156 Compressed gas, oxidizing, n.o.s. 1 O see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
3157 Liquefied gas, oxidizing, n.o.s. 2 O see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3158 Gas, refrigerated liquid, n.o.s. 3 A see 4.3.3.2.4
3159 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane (Refrigerant
gas R134a)
2 A 1.6 16 1.8 18 1.04
3160 Liquefied gas, toxic, flammable, n.o.s.a 2 TF see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3161 Liquefied gas, flammable, n.o.s. 2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3162 Liquefied gas, toxic, n.o.s.a 2 T see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3163 Liquefied gas, n.o.s. 2 A see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3220 Pentafluoroethane
(Refrigerant gas R125)
2 A 4.1 41 4.9 49 0.95
3252 Difluoromethane
(Refrigerant gas R32)
2 F 3.9 39 4.3 43 0.78
3296 Heptafluoropropane
(Refrigerant gas R227)
2 A 1.4 14 1.6 16 1.20
3297 Ethylene oxide and
chlorotetrafluoroethane mixture, with
not more than 8.8 % ethylene oxide
2 A 1 10 1 10 1.16
3298 Ethylene oxide and pentafluoroethane
mixture, with not more than 7.9 %
ethylene oxide
2 A 2.4 24 2.6 26 1.02
3299 Ethylene oxide and tetrafluoroethane
mixture, with not more than 5.6 %
ethylene oxide
2 A 1.5 15 1.7 17 1.03
3300 Ethylene oxide and carbon dioxide
mixture, with more than 87 % ethylene
oxide
2 TF 2.8 28 2.8 28 0.73
3303 Compressed gas, toxic, oxidizing, n.o.s.a 1 TO see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
3304 Compressed gas, toxic, corrosive, n.o.s.a 1 TC see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
3305 Compressed gas, toxic, flammable,
corrosive, n.o.s.a
1 TFC see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
3306 Compressed gas, toxic, oxidizing,
corrosive, n.o.s. a
1 TOC see 4.3.3.2.1 or 4.3.3.2.2
3307 Liquefied gas, toxic, oxidizing, n.o.s.a 2 TO see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3308 Liquefied gas, toxic, corrosive, n.o.s.a 2 TC see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3309 Liquefied gas, toxic, flammable,
corrosive, n.o.s.a
2 TFC see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3310 Liquefied gas, toxic, oxidizing,
corrosive, n.o.s.a
2 TOC see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3311 Gas, refrigerated liquid, oxidizing, n.o.s. 3 O see 4.3.3.2.4
3312 Gas, refrigerated liquid, flammable,
n.o.s.
3 F see 4.3.3.2.4
3318 Ammonia solutions, relative density less
than 0.880 at 15 °C in water, with more
than 50 % ammonia
4 TC see 4.3.3.2.2
3337 Refrigerant gas R404A 2 A 2.9 29 3.2 32 0.84
a Allowed if LC₅₀ equal to or greater than 200 ppm.
– 200 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 201 –
UN
No.
Name Classification
code
Minimum test pressure for tanks Maximum
permissible mass
of contents per
litre of capacity
With thermal
insulation
Without
thermal
insulation
MPa bar MPa bar kg
3338 Refrigerant gas R407A 2 A 2.8 28 3.2 32 0.95
3339 Refrigerant gas R407B 2 A 3.0 30 3.3 33 0.95
3340 Refrigerant gas R407C 2 A 2.7 27 3.0 30 0.95
3354 Insecticide gas, flammable, n.o.s. 2 F see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
3355 Insecticide gas, toxic, flammable, n.o.s.a 2 TF see 4.3.3.2.2 or 4.3.3.2.3
a Allowed if LC₅₀ equal to or greater than 200 ppm.
4.3.3.3 Operation
4.3.3.3.1 When tanks, battery-vehicles or MEGCs are approved for different gases, the change of use shall include
emptying, purging and evacuation operations to the extent necessary for safe operation.
4.3.3.3.2 (Deleted)
4.3.3.3.3 All the elements of a battery-vehicle or MEGC shall contain only one and the same gas.
4.3.3.3.4 When the external overpressure could be greater than the tank resistance to external pressure (e.g. due
to low ambient temperatures), adequate measures shall be taken to protect tanks carrying low pressure
liquefied gases against the risk of deformation, e.g. by filling them with nitrogen or another inert gas in
order to maintain sufficient pressure inside the tank.
4.3.3.4 (Reserved)
4.3.3.5 The actual holding time shall be determined for each
journey of a tank-container carrying a refrigerated
liquefied gas on the basis of the following:
(a) The reference holding time for the refrigerated
liquefied gas to be carried (see 6.8.3.4.10) as
indicated on the plate referred to in 6.8.3.5.4;
(b) The actual filling density;
(c) The actual filling pressure;
(d) The lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting
device(s);
(e) The deterioration of the insulation4.
NOTE: ISO 21014:2006 ‘Cryogenic vessels –
Cryogenic insulation performance’ details methods of
determining the insulation performance of cryogenic
vessels and provides a method of calculating the
holding time.
The date at which the actual holding time ends shall be
entered in the transport document (see 5.4.1.2.2. (d)).
4 Guidance is provided in the European Industrial Gases Association (EIGA) document “Methods to prevent the
premature activation of relief devices on tanks” available at www.eiga.eu.
– 201 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 202 –
4.3.3.6 Tank-containers shall not be offered for carriage:
(a) In an ullage condition liable to produce an
unacceptable hydraulic force due to surge within
the shell;
(b) When leaking;
(c) When damaged to such an extent that the integrity
of the tank-container or its lifting or securing
arrangements may be affected;
(d) Unless the service equipment has been examined
and found to be in good working order;
(e) Unless the actual holding time for the refrigerated
liquefied gas being carried has been determined;
(f) Unless the duration of carriage, after taking into
consideration any delays which might be
encountered, does not exceed the actual holding
time;
(g) Unless the pressure is steady and has been lowered
to a level such that the actual holding time may be
achieved4.
4.3.4 Special provisions applicable to Classes 1 and 3 to 9
4.3.4.1 Coding, rationalized approach and hierarchy of tanks
4.3.4.1.1 Coding of tanks
The four parts of the codes (tank codes) given in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 have the
following meanings:
Part Description Tank code
1 Types of tank L = tank for substances in the liquid state (liquids or solids
handed over for carriage in the molten state);
S = tank for substances in the solid state (powdery or granular).
2 Calculation pressure G = minimum calculation pressure according to the general
requirements of 6.8.2.1.14; or
1.5; 2.65; 4; 10; 15 or 21 = minimum calculation pressure in bar
(see 6.8.2.1.14).
3 Openings
(see 6.8.2.2.2)
A = tank with bottom-filling or bottom-discharge openings with
2 closures;
B = tank with bottom-filling or bottom-discharge openings with
3 closures;
C = tank with top-filling and discharge openings with only
cleaning openings below the surface of the liquid;
D = tank with top-filling and discharge openings with no
openings below the surface of the liquid.
4 Guidance is provided in the European Industrial Gases Association (EIGA) document “Methods to prevent the
premature activation of relief devices on tanks” available at www.eiga.eu.
– 202 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 203 –
Part Description Tank code
4 Safety
valves/devices
V = tank with a breather device, according to 6.8.2.2.6, but no
device protecting against the propagation of a flame; or
non-explosion pressure shock resistant tank ;
F = tank with a breather device, according to 6.8.2.2.6, fitted
with a device protecting against the propagation of a flame;
or
explosion pressure shock resistant tank ;
N = tank without a breather device according to 6.8.2.2.6 and not
hermetically closed;
H = hermetically closed tank (see 1.2.1).
4.3.4.1.2 Rationalized approach for assignment of ADR tank codes to groups of substances and hierarchy of
tanks
NOTE: Certain substances and groups of substances are not included in the rationalized approach,
see 4.3.4.1.3.
Rationalized approach
Tank code Group of permitted substances
Class Classification code Packing group
LIQUIDS
LGAV 3 F2 III
9 M9 III
LGBV 4.1 F2 II, III
5.1 O1 III
9 M6 III
M11 III
and groups of permitted substances for tank code LGAV
LGBF 3 F1 II
vapour pressure at 50 °C ≤ 1.1 bar
F1 III
D II
vapour pressure at 50 °C ≤ 1.1 bar
D III
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV and LGBV
L1.5BN 3 F1 II
vapour pressure at 50 °C > 1.1 bar
F1 III
flash-point < 23 °C, viscous,
vapour pressure at 50 °C > 1.1 bar
boiling point > 35 °C
D II
vapour pressure at 50 °C > 1.1 bar
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV and LGBF
– 203 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 204 –
Tank code Group of permitted substances
Class Classification code Packing group
L4BN 3 F1 I,
III boiling point ≤ 35 °C
FC III
D I
5.1 O1 I, II
OT1 I
8 C1 II, III
C3 II, III
C4 II, III
C5 II, III
C7 II, III
C8 II, III
C9 II, III
C10 II, III
CF1 II
CF2 II
CS1 II
CW1 II
CW2 II
CO1 II
CO2 II
CT1 II, III
CT2 II, III
CFT II
9 M11 III
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF and L1.5BN
L4BH 3 FT1 II, III
FT2 II
FC II
FTC II
6.1 T1 II, III
T2 II, III
T3 II, III
T4 II, III
T5 II, III
T6 II, III
T7 II, III
TF1 II
TF2 II, III
TF3 II
TS II
TW1 II
TW2 II
TO1 II
TO2 II
TC1 II
TC2 II
TC3 II
TC4 II
TFC II
6.2 I3 II
I4
9 M2 II
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN and L4BN
L4DH 4.2 S1 II, III
S3 II, III
ST1 II, III
ST3 II, III
SC1 II, III
SC3 II, III
4.3 W1 II, III
WF1 II, III
WT1 II, III
WC1 II, III
8 CT1 II, III
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN and L4BH
– 204 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 205 –
Tank code Group of permitted substances
Class Classification code Packing group
L10BH 8 C1 I
C3 I
C4 I
C5 I
C7 I
C8 I
C9 I
C10 I
CF1 I
СF2 I
CS1 I
СW1 I
СW2 I
CO1 I
CO2 I
CT1 I
CT2 I
COT I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, and L4BH
L10CH 3 FT1 I
FT2 I
FC I
FTC I
6.1* T1 I
T2 I
T3 I
T4 I
T5 I
T6 I
T7 I
TF1 I
TF2 I
TF3 I
TS I
TW1 I
TO1 I
TC1 I
TC2 I
TC3 I
TC4 I
TFC I
TFW I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, and L10BH
* Substances with an LC₅₀ lower than or equal to 200 ml/m³ and saturated vapour concentration greater than or
equal to 500 LC₅₀ shall be assigned to tank code L15CH.
L10DH 4.3 W1 I
WF1 I
WT1 I
WC1 I
WFC I
5.1 OTC I
8 CT1 I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, L4DH, L10BH
and L10CH
– 205 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 206 –
Tank code Group of permitted substances
Class Classification code Packing group
L15CH 3 FT1 I
6.1** T1 I
T4 I
TF1 I
TW1 I
TO1 I
TC1 I
TC3 I
TFC I
TFW I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, L10BH and
L10CH
** Substances with an LC₅₀ lower than or equal to 200 ml/m³ and saturated vapour concentration greater than or
equal to 500 LC₅₀ shall be assigned to this tank code.
L21DH 4.2 S1 I
S3 I
SW I
ST3 I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes LGAV, LGBV, LGBF, L1.5BN, L4BN, L4BH, L4DH, L10BH,
L10CH, L10DH and L15CH
SOLIDS
SGAV 4.1 F1 III
F3 III
4.2 S2 II, III
S4 III
5.1 O2 II, III
8 C2 II, III
C4 III
C6 III
C8 III
C10 II, III
СT2 III
9 M7 III
M11 II, III
SGAN 4.1 F1 II
F3 II
FT1 II, III
FT2 II, III
FC1 II, III
FC2 II, III
4.2 S2 II
S4 II, III
ST2 II, III
ST4 II, III
SC2 II, III
SC4 II, III
4.3 W2 II, III
WF2 II
WS II, III
WT2 II, III
WC2 II, III
5.1 O2 II, III
OT2 II, III
OC2 II, III
8 C2 II
С4 II
С6 II
С8 II
С10 II
CF2 II
CS2 II
CW2 II
CO2 II
CT2 II
9 M3 III
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes SGAV
– 206 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 207 –
Tank code Group of permitted substances
Class Classification code Packing group
SGAH 6.1 T2 II, III
T3 II, III
T5 II, III
T7 II, III
T9 II
TF3 II
TS II
TW2 II
TO2 II
TC2 II
TC4 II
9 M1 II, III
and groups of permitted substances for tanks codes SGAV and SGAN
S4AH 6.2 I3 II
9 M2 II
and groups of permitted substances for tanks codes SGAV, SGAN and SGAH
S10AN 8 C2 I
C4 I
C6 I
C8 I
C10 I
CF2 I
CS2 I
CW2 I
CO2 I
CT2 I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes SGAV and SGAN
S10AH 6.1 T2 I
T3 I
T5 I
T7 I
TS I
TW2 I
TO2 I
TC2 I
TC4 I
and groups of permitted substances for tank codes SGAV, SGAN, SGAH and S10AN
Hierarchy of tanks
Tanks with tank codes different from those indicated in this table or in Table A of Chapter 3.2 may also
be used provided that any element (number or letter) of parts 1 to 4 of these tank codes correspond to a
level of safety at least equivalent to the corresponding element of the tank code indicated in Table A of
Chapter 3.2, according to the following increasing order:
Part 1: Types of tanks
S L
Part 2: Calculation pressure
G 1.5 2.65 4 10 15 21 bar
Part 3: Openings
A B C D
Part 4: Safety valves/devices
V F N H
For example:
– A tank with the tank code L10CN is authorized for the carriage of a substance to which the tank
code L4BN has been assigned;
– 207 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 208 –
– A tank with the tank code L4BN is authorized for the carriage of a substance to which the tank
code SGAN has been assigned.
NOTE: The hierarchy does not take account of any special provisions for each entry (see 4.3.5 and
6.8.4).
4.3.4.1.3 The following substances and groups of substances in respect of which a “(+)” is given after the tank
code in Column (12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 are subject to special provisions. In that case the alternate
use of the tanks for other substances and groups of substances is permitted only where this is specified
in the certificate of type approval. Higher value tanks according to the provisions at the end of the table
in 4.3.4.1.2 may be used with due regard to the special provisions indicated in Column (13) of Table A
in Chapter 3.2. The requirements for these tanks are given by the following tank codes supplemented
by the relevant special provisions indicated in column (13) of table A in Chapter 3.2.
Class UN No. Name and description Tank code
1 0331 Explosive, blasting, Type B S2.65AN
4.1 2448 Sulphur, molten LGBV
3531 Polymerizing substance, solid, stabilized, N.O.S. SGAN
3533 Polymerizing substance, solid, temperature controlled, N.O.S
3532 Polymerizing substance, liquid, stabilized, N.O.S L4BN
3534 Polymerizing substance, liquid, temperature controlled, N.O.S.
4.2 1381 Phosphorus, white or yellow, dry, under water or in solution L10DH
2447 Phosphorus, white, molten
4.3 1389 Alkali metal amalgam, liquid
L10BN
1391 Alkali metal dispersion or Alkaline earth metal dispersion
1392 Alkaline earth metal amalgam, liquid
1415 Lithium
1420 Potassium metal alloys, liquid
1421 Alkali metal alloy, liquid, N.O.S.
1422 Potassium sodium alloys, liquid
1428 Sodium
2257 Potassium
3401 Alkali metal amalgam, solid
3402 Alkaline earth metal amalgam, solid
3403 Potassium metal alloys, solid
3404 Potassium sodium alloys, solid
3482 Alkali metal dispersion, flammable or Alkaline earth metal dispersion,
flammable
1407 Caesium L10CH
1423 Rubidium
1402 Calcium carbide, packing group I S2.65AN
5.1 1873 Perchloric acid with more than 50 % but not more than 72 % acid, by mass L4DN
2015 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution, stabilized with more than 70 %
hydrogen peroxide L4DV
2014 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution with not less than 20 % but not more
than 60 % hydrogen peroxide
L4BV
2015 Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution, stabilized with more than 60 %
hydrogen peroxide and not more than 70 % hydrogen peroxide
2426 Ammonium nitrate, liquid (hot concentrated solution)
3149 Hydrogen peroxide and peroxyacetic acid mixture, stabilized
3375 Ammonium nitrate emulsion, suspension or gel, intermediate for blasting
explosives, liquid LGAV
3375 Ammonium nitrate emulsion, suspension or gel, intermediate for blasting
explosives, solid SGAV
5.2 3109 Organic peroxide, type F, liquid L4BN
3119 Organic peroxide, type F, liquid, temperature controlled
3110 Organic peroxide, type F, Solid S4AN
3120 Organic peroxide, type F, solid, temperature controlled
6.1 1613 Hydrogen cyanide, aqueous solution L15DH
3294 Hydrogen cyanide solution in alcohol
– 208 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 209 –
Class UN No. Name and description Tank code
7 a All substances special tanks
Minimum requirement for liquids L2.65CN
Minimum requirement for solids S2.65AN
8 1052 Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous
L21DH1744 Bromine or bromine solution
1790 Hydrofluoric acid with more than 85 % hydrogen fluoride
1791 Hypochlorite solution L4BV
1908 Chlorite solution
a Notwithstanding the general requirements of this paragraph, tanks used for radioactive material may also
be used for the carriage of other goods provided the requirements of 5.1.3.2 are complied with.
4.3.4.1.4 Tanks intended for the carriage of liquid wastes complying with the requirements of Chapter 6.10 and
equipped with two closures in accordance with 6.10.3.2, shall be assigned to tank code L4AH. If the
tanks concerned are equipped for the alternate carriage of liquid and solid substances, they shall be
assigned to the combined codes L4AH+S4AH.
4.3.4.2 General provisions
4.3.4.2.1 Where hot substances are loaded, the temperature of the outer surface of the tank or of the thermal
insulation shall not exceed 70 °C during carriage.
4.3.4.2.2 The connecting pipes between independent but
interconnected tanks of a transport unit shall be empty
during carriage. Flexible filling and discharge pipes
which are not permanently connected to the tank shall
be empty during carriage.
4.3.4.2.3 (Reserved)
4.3.5 Special provisions
When they are shown under an entry in Column (13) of Table of A in Chapter 3.2, the following special
provisions apply:
TU1 The tanks shall not be handed over for carriage until the substance has solidified completely
and been covered by an inert gas. Uncleaned empty tanks which have contained these
substances shall be filled with an inert gas.
TU2 The substance shall be covered by an inert gas. Uncleaned empty tanks which have contained
these substances shall be filled with an inert gas.
TU3 The inside of the shell and all parts liable to come into contact with the substance shall be
kept clean. No lubricant capable of combining dangerously with the substance shall be used
for pumps, valves or other devices.
TU4 During carriage, these substances shall be under a layer of inert gas, the gauge pressure of
which shall not be less than 50 kPa (0.5 bar).
Uncleaned empty tanks which have contained these substances shall when handed over for
carriage be filled with an inert gas at a gauge pressure of at least 50 kPa (0.5 bar).
TU5 (Reserved)
TU6 Not authorized for carriage in tanks, battery-vehicles and MEGCs when having a LC₅₀ lower
than 200 ppm.
TU7 The materials used to ensure leakproofness of the joints or for the maintenance of the closures
shall be compatible with the contents.
TU8 An aluminium-alloy tank shall not be used for carriage unless the tank is reserved solely for
such carriage and the acetaldehyde is free from acid.
– 209 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 210 –
TU9 UN No.1203 petrol (gasoline) with a vapour pressure at 50 °C of more than 110 kPa (1.1 bar)
but not above 150 kPa (1.5 bar) may also be carried in tanks designed according to 6.8.2.1.14
(a) and having equipment conforming to 6.8.2.2.6.
TU10 (Reserved)
TU11 During filling, the temperature of this substance shall not exceed 60 °C. A maximum filling
temperature of 80 °C is allowed provided that smoulder spots are prevented and that the
following conditions are met. After filling, the tanks shall be pressurized (e.g. with
compressed air) to check tightness. It shall be ensured that no depressurization takes place
during carriage. Before discharge, it shall be checked if pressure in the tanks is still above
atmospheric. If this is not the case, an inert gas shall be introduced into the tanks prior to
discharge.
TU12 In the event of a change of use, shells and equipment shall be thoroughly cleansed of all
residues before and after the carriage of this substance.
TU13 Tanks shall be free from impurities at the time of filling. Service equipment such as valves
and external piping shall be emptied after filling or discharging.
TU14 The protective caps of closures shall be locked during carriage.
TU15 Tanks shall not be used for the carriage of foodstuffs, articles of consumption or animal feeds.
TU16 When handed over for carriage, uncleaned empty tanks shall be filled with a protective agent
fulfilling one of the following measures:
Protective
agent
Degree of filling
of water
Additional requirements for carriage at low
ambient temperatures
Nitrogena –
Water and
nitrogena
–
Water not less than
96 % and not
more than 98 %
The water shall contain sufficient anti-freeze agent
to prevent it from freezing. The anti-freeze agent
shall be free from corrosive action and not liable to
react with the substance.
a The tank shall be filled with nitrogen in such a way that, even after cooling, the pressure
at no time falls below atmospheric pressure. The tank shall be closed in such a way that no
leakage of gas occurs.
TU17 Only to be carried in battery-vehicles or MEGCs the elements of which are composed of
receptacles.
TU18 The degree of filling shall remain below the level at which, if the contents were raised to a
temperature at which the vapour pressure equalled the opening pressure of the safety valve,
the volume of the liquid would reach 95 % of the tank’s capacity at that temperature. The
provision in 4.3.2.3.4 shall not apply.
TU19 Tanks may be filled to 98 % at the filling temperature and pressure. The provision in 4.3.2.3.4
shall not apply.
TU20 (Reserved)
– 210 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 211 –
TU21 The substance shall be protected by a protective agent in the following ways:
Protective
agent
A layer
of water
in the
tank
Degree of filling of
the substance
(including water if
any) at a
temperature of
60° C shall not
exceed
Additional requirements for carriage at
low ambient temperatures
Nitrogena – 96 % –
Water and
nitrogena
– 98 % The water shall contain sufficient anti-
freeze agent to prevent it from freezing. The
anti-freeze agent shall be free from
corrosive action and not liable to react with
the substance.
Water not less
than
12 cm
98 %
a The remaining space of the tank shall be filled with nitrogen in such a way that, even after cooling,
the pressure at no time falls below atmospheric pressure. The tank shall be closed in such a way that
no leakage of gas occurs.
TU22 Tanks shall be filled to not more than 90 % of their capacity; for liquids, a space of 5 % shall
remain empty when the liquid is at an average temperature of 50 °C.
TU23 The degree of filling shall not exceed 0.93 kg per litre of capacity, if filling is by mass. If
filling is by volume, the degree of filling shall not exceed 85 %.
TU24 The degree of filling shall not exceed 0.95 kg per litre of capacity, if filling is by mass. If
filling is by volume, the degree of filling shall not exceed 85 %.
TU25 The degree of filling shall not exceed 1.14 kg per litre of capacity, if filling is by mass. If
filling is by volume, the degree of filling shall not exceed 85 %.
TU26 The degree of filling shall not exceed 85 %.
TU27 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 98 % of their capacity.
TU28 Tanks shall be filled to not more than 95 % of their capacity at a reference temperature of
15 °C.
TU29 Tanks shall be filled to not more than 97 % of their capacity and the maximum temperature
after filling shall not exceed 140 °C.
TU30 Tanks shall be filled as set out in the test report for the type approval of the tank but shall be
filled to not more than 90 % of their capacity.
TU31 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 1 kg per litre of capacity.
TU32 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 88 % of their capacity.
TU33 Tanks shall be filled to not less than 88 % and not more than 92 % of their capacity or to 2.86
kg per litre of capacity.
TU34 Tanks shall not be filled to more than 0.84 kg per litre of capacity.
TU35 Empty fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), empty demountable tanks and empty tank-containers,
uncleaned, which have contained these substances are not subject to the requirements of ADR
if adequate measures have been taken to nullify any hazard.
TU36 The degree of filling according to 4.3.2.2, at the reference temperature of 15 °C, shall not
exceed 93 % of the capacity.
TU37 Carriage in tanks is limited to substances containing pathogens which are unlikely to be a
serious hazard, and for which, while capable of causing serious infection on exposure,
effective treatment and preventive measures are available and the risk of spread of infection
is limited (i.e. moderate individual risk and low community risk).
– 211 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 212 –
TU38 (Reserved)
TU39 The suitability of the substance for carriage in tanks shall be demonstrated. The method to
evaluate this suitability shall be approved by the competent authority. One method is test 8(d)
in Test Series 8 (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part 1, sub-section 18.7).
Substances shall not be allowed to remain in the tank for any period that could result in
caking. Appropriate measures shall be taken to avoid accumulation and packing of substances
in the tank (e.g. cleaning etc.).
TU40 Only to be carried in battery-vehicles or MEGCs, the elements of which are composed of
seamless receptacles.
TU41 The suitability of the substance for carriage in tanks shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction
of the competent authority of every country through or into which the carriage is performed.
The method to evaluate this suitability shall be approved by the competent authority of any
ADR Contracting Party who may also recognize an approval granted by the competent
authority of a country which is not an ADR Contracting Party provided that this approval has
been granted in accordance with the procedures applicable according to ADR, RID, ADN or
the IMDG Code.
Substances shall not be allowed to remain in the tank for any period that could result in
caking. Appropriate measures shall be taken to avoid accumulation and packing of substances
in the tank (e.g. cleaning etc.).
TU42 Tanks with a shell constructed of aluminium alloy, including those with a protective lining,
shall only be used if the pH value of the substance is not less than 5.0 and not more than 8.0.
TU43 An empty uncleaned tank may be offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last
inspection of the lining for a period not to exceed three months beyond this date for the
purposes of performing the next inspection of the lining prior to refilling (see special
provision TT2 in 6.8.4 (d)).
– 212 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 213 –
CHAPTER 4.4
USE OF FIBRE-REINFORCED PLASTICS (FRP) TANKS, FIXED TANKS
(TANK-VEHICLES), DEMOUNTABLE TANKS, TANK-CONTAINERS
AND TANK SWAP BODIES
NOTE: For portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs), see Chapter 4.2; for fixed tanks (tank-
vehicles), demountable tanks, tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made of metallic materials, and battery-
vehicles and multiple elements gas containers (MEGCs) other than UN MEGCs, see Chapter 4.3; for vacuum operated
waste containers, see Chapter 4.5.
4.4.1 General
The carriage of dangerous substances in fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) tanks is permitted only when
the following conditions are met:
(a) The substance is classified in Class 3, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 8 or 9;
(b) The maximum vapour pressure (absolute pressure) at 50 °C of the substance does not exceed
110 kPa (1.1 bar);
(c) The carriage of the substance in metallic tanks is authorized according to 4.3.2.1.1;
(d) The calculation pressure specified for that substance in part 2 of the tank code given in Column
(12) of Table A in Chapter 3.2 does not exceed 4 bar (see also 4.3.4.1.1); and
(e) The tank complies with the provisions of Chapter 6.13 applicable for the carriage of the
substance.
4.4.2 Operation
4.4.2.1 The provisions of 4.3.2.1.5 to 4.3.2.2.4, 4.3.2.3.3 to 4.3.2.3.6, 4.3.2.4.1, 4.3.2.4.2, 4.3.4.1 and 4.3.4.2
shall apply.
4.4.2.2 The temperature of the substance carried shall not exceed, at the time of filling, the maximum service
temperature indicated on the tank plate referred to in 6.13.6.
4.4.2.3 When applicable to carriage in metallic tanks, the special provisions (TU) of 4.3.5 shall also apply, as
indicated in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2.
– 213 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 215 –
CHAPTER 4.5
USE OF VACUUM OPERATED WASTE TANKS
NOTE: For portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs), see Chapter 4.2; for fixed tanks (tank-
vehicles), demountable tanks, tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made of metallic materials, and battery-
vehicles and multiple elements gas containers (MEGCs) other than UN MEGCs, see Chapter 4.3; for fibre reinforced
plastics tanks, see Chapter 4.4.
4.5.1 Use
4.5.1.1 Wastes consisting of substances in Classes 3, 4.1, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 8 and 9 may be carried in vacuum-
operated waste tanks conforming to Chapter 6.10 if their carriage in fixed tanks, demountable tanks,
tank-containers or tank swap bodies is permitted according to Chapter 4.3. Wastes consisting of
substances assigned to tank code L4BH in Column (12) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 or to another tank
code permitted under the hierarchy in 4.3.4.1.2 may be carried in vacuum operated waste tanks with the
letter “A” or “B” in part 3 of the tank code, as indicated in No. 9.5 of the vehicle approval certificate
conforming to 9.1.3.5.
4.5.1.2 Non waste substances may be carried in vacuum-operated waste tanks under the same conditions as
mentioned under 4.5.1.1.
4.5.2 Operation
4.5.2.1 The provisions of Chapter 4.3 except those of 4.3.2.2.4 and 4.3.2.3.3 apply to the carriage in vacuum
operated waste tanks and are supplemented by the provisions of 4.5.2.2 to 4.5.2.6 below.
4.5.2.2 For carriage of liquids meeting the flash point criteria of Class 3, vacuum-operated waste tanks shall be
filled through filling devices which discharge into the tank at a low level. Measures shall be taken to
minimize the production of spray.
4.5.2.3 When discharging flammable liquids with a flash-point below 23 °C by using air pressure, the
maximum allowed pressure is 100 kPa (1 bar).
4.5.2.4 The use of tanks fitted with an internal piston operating as a compartment wall is allowed only when
the substances on either side of the wall (piston) do not react dangerously with each other (see 4.3.2.3.6).
4.5.2.5 (Reserved)
4.5.2.6 When a vacuum pump/exhauster unit which may provide a source of ignition is used to fill or discharge
flammable liquids, precautions shall be taken to avoid ignition of the substance or to avoid the
propagation of the effects of the ignition outside the tank itself.
– 215 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 217 –
CHAPTER 4.6
(Reserved)
– 217 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 219 –
CHAPTER 4.7
USE OF MOBILE EXPLOSIVES MANUFACTURING UNITS (MEMUs)
NOTE 1: For packagings, see Chapter 4.1; for portable tanks, see Chapter 4.2; for fixed tanks (tank vehicles),
demountable tanks, tank-containers and tank swap bodies with shells made of metallic materials, see Chapter 4.3; for
fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) tanks, see Chapter 4.4; for vacuum operated waste tanks, see Chapter 4.5.
NOTE 2: For requirements concerning construction, equipment, type approval, inspections and tests and marking, see
Chapters 6.7, 6.8, 6.9, 6.11, 6.12 and 6.13.
4.7.1 Use
4.7.1.1 Substances of Classes 3, 5.1, 6.1 and 8 may be carried on MEMUs conforming to Chapter 6.12, in
portable tanks if their carriage is permitted according to Chapter 4.2; or in fixed tanks, demountable
tanks, tank containers or tank swap bodies if their carriage is permitted according to Chapter 4.3; or in
fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP) tanks if their carriage is permitted according to Chapter 4.4; or in bulk
containers, if their carriage is permitted according to Chapter 7.3.
4.7.1.2 Subject to the approval of the competent authority (see 7.5.5.2.3) explosive substances or articles of
Class 1 may be carried in packages, in special compartments conforming to section 6.12.5, if their
packaging is permitted according to Chapter 4.1 and their carriage is permitted according to Chapter
7.2 and 7.5.
4.7.2 Operation
4.7.2.1 The following provisions apply for operation of tanks according to Chapter 6.12:
(a) For tanks with a capacity of 1 000 litres or more, the provisions of Chapter 4.2, Chapter 4.3,
except 4.3.1.4, 4.3.2.3.1, 4.3.3 and 4.3.4, or Chapter 4.4 apply to the carriage on MEMUs, and
are supplemented by the provisions of 4.7.2.2 , 4.7.2.3 and 4.7.2.4 below.
(b) For tanks with a capacity of less than 1 000 litres, the provisions of Chapter 4.2, Chapter 4.3,
except 4.3.1.4, 4.3.2.1, 4.3.2.3.1, 4.3.3 and 4.3.4, or Chapter 4.4 apply to the carriage on
MEMUs, and are supplemented by the provisions of 4.7.2.2, 4.7.2.3 and 4.7.2.4 below.
4.7.2.2 The thickness of the walls of the shell shall not, throughout its use, fall below the minimum figure
prescribed in the appropriate construction requirements.
4.7.2.3 Flexible discharge pipes, whether permanently connected or not, and hoppers shall be empty of mixed
or sensitised explosive substances during carriage.
4.7.2.4 When applicable to carriage in tanks, the special provisions (TU) of 4.3.5 shall also apply as indicated
in Column (13) of Table A in Chapter 3.2.
4.7.2.5 Operators shall ensure that the locks specified in 9.8.8 are used during carriage.
– 219 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
PART 5
Consignment proceduresCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 223 –
CHAPTER 5.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
5.1.1 Application and general provisions
This Part sets forth the provisions for dangerous goods consignments relative to marking, labelling, and
documentation, and, where appropriate, authorization of consignments and advance notifications.
5.1.2 Use of overpacks
5.1.2.1 (a) Unless marks and labels required in Chapter 5.2, except 5.2.1.3 to 5.2.1.6, 5.2.1.7.2 to 5.2.1.7.8
and 5.2.1.10, representative of all dangerous goods in the overpack are visible, the overpack shall
be:
(i) marked with the word “OVERPACK”. The lettering of the “OVERPACK” mark shall be
at least 12 mm high. The mark shall be in an official language of the country of origin
and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German,
unless agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport
operation provide otherwise; and
(ii) labelled and marked with the UN number and other marks, as required for packages in
Chapter 5.2 except 5.2.1.3 to 5.2.1.6, 5.2.1.7.2 to 5.2.1.7.8 and 5.2.1.10, for each item of
dangerous goods contained in the overpack. Each applicable mark or label only needs to
be applied once.
Labelling of overpacks containing radioactive material shall be in accordance with 5.2.2.1.11.
(b) Orientation arrows illustrated in 5.2.1.10 shall be displayed on two opposite sides of overpacks
containing packages which shall be marked in accordance with 5.2.1.10.1, unless the marks
remains visible.
5.1.2.2 Each package of dangerous goods contained in an overpack shall comply with all applicable provisions
of ADR. The intended function of each package shall not be impaired by the overpack.
5.1.2.3 Each package bearing package orientation marks as prescribed in 5.2.1.10 and which is overpacked or
placed in a large packaging shall be oriented in accordance with such marks.
5.1.2.4 The prohibitions on mixed loading also apply to these overpacks.
5.1.3 Empty uncleaned packagings (including IBCs and large packagings), tanks, MEMUs, vehicles
and containers for carriage in bulk
5.1.3.1 Empty uncleaned packagings (including IBCs and large packagings), tanks (including tank-vehicles,
battery-vehicles, demountable tanks, portable tanks, tank-containers, MEGCs), MEMUs, vehicles and
containers for carriage in bulk having contained dangerous goods of the different classes other than
Class 7, shall be marked and labelled as if they were full.
NOTE: For documentation, see Chapter 5.4.
5.1.3.2 Containers, tanks, IBCs, as well as other packagings and overpacks, used for the carriage of radioactive
material shall not be used for the storage or carriage of other goods unless decontaminated below the
level of 0.4 Bq/cm² for beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity alpha emitters and 0.04 Bq/cm² for
all other alpha emitters.
5.1.4 Mixed packing
When two or more dangerous goods are packed within the same outer packaging, the package shall be
labelled and marked as required for each substance or article. If the same label is required for different
goods, it only needs to be applied once.
– 223 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 224 –
5.1.5 General provisions for Class 7
5.1.5.1 Approval of shipments and notification
5.1.5.1.1 General
In addition to the approval of package designs described in Chapter 6.4, multilateral shipment approval
is also required in certain circumstances (5.1.5.1.2 and 5.1.5.1.3). In some circumstances it is also
necessary to notify competent authorities of a shipment (5.1.5.1.4).
5.1.5.1.2 Shipment approvals
Multilateral approval shall be required for:
(a) the shipment of Type B(M) packages not conforming with the requirements of 6.4.7.5 or
designed to allow controlled intermittent venting;
(b) the shipment of Type B(M) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater
than 3 000 A 1 or 3 000 A2, as appropriate, or 1 000 TBq, whichever is the lower;
(c) The shipment of packages containing fissile materials if the sum of the criticality safety indexes
of the packages in a single vehicle or container exceeds 50; and
(d) (Reserved)
(e) the shipment of SCO-III.
except that a competent authority may authorize carriage into or through its country without shipment
approval, by a specific provision in its design approval (see 5.1.5.2.1).
5.1.5.1.3 Shipment approval by special arrangement
A competent authority may approve provisions under which consignments that do not satisfy all the
applicable requirements of ADR may be carried under special arrangement (see 1.7.4).
5.1.5.1.4 Notifications
Notification to competent authorities is required as follows:
(a) Before the first shipment of any package requiring competent authority approval, the consignor
shall ensure that copies of each applicable competent authority certificate applying to that
package design have been submitted to the competent authority of the country of origin of the
shipment and to the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment
is to be carried. The consignor is not required to await an acknowledgement from the competent
authority, nor is the competent authority required to make such acknowledgement of receipt of
the certificate;
(b) For each of the following types of shipments:
(i) Type C packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3 000 A 1
or 3 000 A2, as appropriate, or 1 000 TBq, whichever is the lower;
(ii) Type B(U) packages containing radioactive material with an activity greater than 3 000
A 1 or 3 000 A 2, as appropriate, or 1 000 TBq, whichever is the lower;
(iii) Type B(M) packages;
(iv) Shipment under special arrangement;
The consignor shall notify the competent authority of the country of origin of the shipment and
the competent authority of each country through or into which the consignment is to be carried.
This notification shall be in the possession of each competent authority prior to the
commencement of the shipment, and preferably at least 7 days in advance;
(c) The consignor is not required to send a separate notification if the required information has been
included in the application for approval of shipment (see 6.4.23.2);
– 224 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 225 –
(d) The consignment notification shall include:
(i) sufficient information to enable the identification of the package or packages including
all applicable certificate numbers and identification marks;
(ii) information on the date of shipment, the expected date of arrival and proposed routeing;
(iii) the name(s) of the radioactive material(s) or nuclide(s);
(iv) descriptions of the physical and chemical forms of the radioactive material, or whether it
is special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material; and
(v) the maximum activity of the radioactive contents during carriage expressed in becquerels
(Bq) with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the mass of
fissile material (or of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in grams (g), or
multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity.
5.1.5.2 Certificates issued by the competent authority
5.1.5.2.1 Certificates issued by the competent authority are required for the following:
(a) Designs for:
(i) special form radioactive material;
(ii) low dispersible radioactive material;
(iii) fissile material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f);
(iv) packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride;
(v) packages containing fissile material unless excepted by 2.2.7.2.3.5, 6.4.11.2 or 6.4.11.3;
(vi) Type B(U) packages and Type B(M) packages;
(vii) Type C packages;
(b) Special arrangements;
(c) Certain shipments (see 5.1.5.1.2);
(d) Determination of the basic radionuclide values referred to in 2.2.7.2.2.1 for individual
radionuclides which are not listed in Table 2.2.7.2.2.1 (see 2.2.7.2.2.2 (a));
(e) Alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles (see
2.2.7.2.2.2 (b)).
The certificates shall confirm that the applicable requirements are met, and for design approvals shall
attribute to the design an identification mark.
The certificates of approval for the package design and the shipment may be combined into a single
certificate.
Certificates and applications for these certificates shall be in accordance with the requirements in 6.4.23.
5.1.5.2.2 The consignor shall be in possession of a copy of each applicable certificate.
5.1.5.2.3 For package designs where it is not required that a competent authority issue a certificate of approval,
the consignor shall, on request, make available for inspection by the competent authority, documentary
evidence of the compliance of the package design with all the applicable requirements.
– 225 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 226 –
5.1.5.3 Determination of transport index (TI) and criticality safety index (CSI)
5.1.5.3.1 The transport index (TI) for a package, overpack or container, or for unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I or
SCO-III, shall be the number derived in accordance with the following procedure:
(a) Determine the maximum dose rate in units of millisieverts per hour (mSv/h) at a distance of 1 m
from the external surfaces of the package, overpack, container, or unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I or
SCO-III. The value determined shall be multiplied by 100. For uranium and thorium ores and
their concentrates, the maximum dose rate at any point 1 m from the external surface of the load
may be taken as:
0.4 mSv/h for ores and physical concentrates of uranium and thorium;
0.3 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of thorium;
0.02 mSv/h for chemical concentrates of uranium, other than uranium hexafluoride;
(b) For tanks, containers and unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I and SCO-III, the value determined in
step (a) above shall be multiplied by the appropriate factor from Table 5.1.5.3.1;
(c) The value obtained in steps (a) and (b) above shall be rounded up to the first decimal place (e.g.
1.13 becomes 1.2), except that a value of 0.05 or less may be considered as zero and the resulting
number is the TI value.
Table 5.1.5.3.1: Multiplication factors for tanks, containers
and unpackaged LSA-I, SCO-I and SCO-III
Size of load a Multiplication factor
size of load 1 m² 1
1 m² < size of load 5 m² 2
5 m² < size of load 20 m² 3
20 m² < size of load 10
a Largest cross-sectional area of the load being measured.
5.1.5.3.2 The TI for each rigid overpack, container or vehicle shall be determined as the sum of the TIs of all the
packages contained therein. For a shipment from a single consignor, the consignor may determine the
TI by direct measurement of dose rate.
The TI for a non-rigid overpack shall be determined only as the sum of the TIs of all the packages within
the overpack.
5.1.5.3.3 The criticality safety index for each overpack or container shall be determined as the sum of the CSIs
of all the packages contained. The same procedure shall be followed for determining the total sum of
the CSIs in a consignment or aboard a vehicle.
5.1.5.3.4 Packages, overpacks and containers shall be assigned to either category I-WHITE, II-YELLOW or
III-YELLOW in accordance with the conditions specified in Table 5.1.5.3.4 and with the following
requirements:
(a) For a package, overpack or container, both the transport index and the surface dose rate
conditions shall be taken into account in determining which is the appropriate category. Where
the transport index satisfies the condition for one category but the surface dose rate satisfies the
condition for a different category, the package, overpack or container shall be assigned to the
higher category. For this purpose, category I-WHITE shall be regarded as the lowest category;
(b) The TI shall be determined following the procedures specified in 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2;
(c) If the surface dose rate is greater than 2 mSv/h, the package or overpack shall be carried under
exclusive use and under the provisions of 7.5.11, CV33 (1.3) and (3.5) (a);
(d) A package carried under a special arrangement shall be assigned to category III-YELLOW
except under the provisions of 5.1.5.3.5;
(e) An overpack or container which contains packages carried under special arrangement shall be
assigned to category III-YELLOW except under the provisions of 5.1.5.3.5.
– 226 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 227 –
Table 5.1.5.3.4: Categories of packages, overpacks and containers
Conditions
Transport index Maximum dose rate at any point
on external surface Category
0a Not more than 0.005 mSv/h I-WHITE
More than 0 but not
more than 1a More than 0.005 mSv/h but not more than 0.5 mSv/h II-YELLOW
More than 1 but not
more than 10 More than 0.5 mSv/h but not more than 2 mSv/h III-YELLOW
More than 10 More than 2 mSv/h but not more than 10 mSv/h III-YELLOW b
a If the measured TI is not greater than 0.05, the value quoted may be zero in accordance
with 5.1.5.3.1 (c).
b Shall also be carried under exclusive use except for containers (see Table D in 7.5.11 CV33 (3.3)).
5.1.5.3.5 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment,
the categorization shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design.
5.1.5.4 Specific provisions for excepted packages of radioactive material of Class 7
5.1.5.4.1 Excepted packages of radioactive material of Class 7 shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside
of the packaging with:
(a) The UN number preceded by the letters “UN”;
(b) An identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both; and
(c) The permissible gross mass if this exceeds 50 kg.
5.1.5.4.2 The documentation requirements of Chapter 5.4 do not apply to excepted packages of radioactive
material of Class 7, except that:
(a) The UN number preceded by the letters “UN” and the name and address of the consignor and the
consignee and, if relevant, the identification mark for each competent authority certificate of
approval (see 5.4.1.2.5.1 (g)) shall be shown on a transport document such as a bill of lading, air
waybill or CMR or CIM consignment note;
(b) If relevant, the requirements of 5.4.1.2.5.1 (g), 5.4.1.2.5.3 and 5.4.1.2.5.4 shall apply;
(c) The requirements of 5.4.2 and 5.4.4 shall apply.
5.1.5.4.3 The requirements of 5.2.1.7.8 and 5.2.2.1.11.5 shall apply if relevant.
5.1.5.5 Summary of approval and prior notification requirements
NOTE 1: Before first shipment of any package requiring competent authority approval of the design,
the consignor shall ensure that a copy of the approval certificate for that design has been submitted to
the competent authority of each country en route (see 5.1.5.1.4 (a)).
NOTE 2: Notification required if contents exceed 3 × 10 3 A1, or 3 × 10 3 A2, or 1 000 TBq; (see 5.1.5.1.4
(b)).
NOTE 3: Multilateral approval of shipment required if contents exceed 3 × 10 3 A 1, or 3 × 10 3 A2, or
1 000 TBq, or if controlled intermittent venting is allowed (see 5.1.5.1).
NOTE 4: See approval and prior notification provisions for the applicable package for carrying this
material.
– 227 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 228 –
Subject UN
Number
Competent Authority
approval required
Consignor required to
notify the competent
authorities of the
country of origin and
of the countries en
route a before each
shipment
Reference
Country
of origin
Countries
en route a
Calculation of unlisted A1 and
A 2 values
– Yes Yes No 2.2.7.2.2.2
(a),
5.1.5.2.1 (d)
Excepted packages
– package design
– shipment
2908, 2909,
2910, 2911 No
No
No
No
No
No
—
LSA material b and SCO b
Industrial packages types 1, 2
or 3, non fissile and fissile
excepted
2912, 2913,
3321, 3322
—
– package design
– shipment
No
No
No
No
No
No
Type A packages b, non fissile
and fissile excepted
2915, 3332 —
– package design
– shipment
No
No
No
No
No
No
Type B(U) packages b , non
fissile and fissile excepted
2916 5.1.5.1.4 (b),
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
6.4.22.2- package design
– shipment
Yes
No
No
No
See Note 1
See Note 2
Type B(M) packages b, non
fissile and fissile excepted
2917 5.1.5.1.4 (b),
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
5.1.5.1.2,
6.4.22.3
– package design
– shipment
Yes
See Note 3
Yes
See Note 3
No
Yes
Type C packages b, non fissile
and fissile excepted
3323 5.1.5.1.4 (b),
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
6.4.22.2- package design
– shipment
Yes
No
No
No
See Note 1
See Note 2
Packages for fissile material
– package design
– shipment:
– sum of criticality safety
indexes not more than 50
– sum of criticality safety
indexes greater than 50
2977, 3324,
3325, 3326,
3327, 3328,
3329, 3330,
3331, 3333
Yes c
No d
Yes
Yes c
No d
Yes
No
See Note 2
See Note 2
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
5.1.5.1.2,
6.4.22.4,
6.4.22.5
Special form radioactive
material
– design
– shipment
–
See Note 4
Yes
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
1.6.6.4,
5.1.5.2.1 (a)
6.4.22.5
a Countries from, through or into which the consignment is carried.
b If the radioactive contents are fissile material which is not excepted from the provisions for packages containing
fissile material, then the provisions for fissile material packages apply (see 6.4.11).
c Designs of packages for fissile material may also require approval in respect of one of the other items
in the table.
d Shipments may, however, require approval in respect of one of the other items in the table.
– 228 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 229 –
Subject UN
Number
Competent Authority
approval required
Consignor required to
notify the competent
authorities of the
country of origin and
of the countries en
route a before each
shipment
Reference
Country
of origin
Countries
en route a
Low dispersible radioactive
material
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
6.4.22.5
– design
– shipment
–
See Note 4
Yes
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
Packages containing 0.1 kg or
more of uranium hexafluoride
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
6.4.22.1
– design
– shipment
–
See Note 4
Yes
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
No
See Note 4
Special Arrangement
– shipment
2919, 3331
Yes Yes Yes
1.7.4.2,
5.1.5.2.1 (b),
5.1.5.1.4 (b)
Approved packages designs
subjected to transitional
measures
– See 1.6.6 See 1.6.6 See Note 1 1.6.6.2,
5.1.5.1.4 (b),
5.1.5.2.1 (a),
5.1.5.1.2,
6.4.22.9
Alternative activity limits for
an exempt consignment of
instruments or articles
– Yes Yes No 5.1.5.2.1(e),
6.4.22.7
Fissile material excepted in
accordance with 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f)
– Yes Yes No 5.1.5.2.1 (a)
(iii),
6.4.22.6
a Countries from, through or into which the consignment is carried.
– 229 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 231 –
CHAPTER 5.2
MARKING AND LABELLING
5.2.1 Marking of packages
NOTE 1: For marks related to the construction, testing and approval of packagings, large packagings,
gas receptacles and IBCs, see Part 6.
NOTE 2: In accordance with the GHS, a GHS pictogram not required by ADR should only appear in
carriage as part of a complete GHS label and not independently (see GHS 1.4.10.4.4).
5.2.1.1 Unless provided otherwise in ADR, the UN number corresponding to the dangerous goods contained,
preceded by the letters “UN” shall be clearly and durably marked on each package. The UN number
and the letters “UN” shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packages of 30 l capacity or less or of
30 kg maximum net mass and for cylinders of 60 l water capacity or less when they shall be at least
6 mm in height and except for packages of 5 l capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they
shall be of an appropriate size. In the case of unpackaged articles the mark shall be displayed on the
article, on its cradle or on its handling, storage or launching device.
5.2.1.2 All package marks required by this Chapter:
(a) shall be readily visible and legible;
(b) shall be able to withstand open weather exposure without a substantial reduction in effectiveness.
5.2.1.3 Salvage packagings including large salvage packagings and salvage pressure receptacles shall
additionally be marked with the word “SALVAGE”. The lettering of the “SALVAGE” mark shall be
at least 12 mm high.
5.2.1.4 Intermediate bulk containers of more than 450 litres capacity and large packagings shall be marked on
two opposite sides.
5.2.1.5 Additional provisions for goods of Class 1
For goods of Class 1, packages shall, in addition, bear the proper shipping name as determined in
accordance with 3.1.2. The mark, which shall be clearly legible and indelible, shall be in one or more
languages, one of which shall be French, German or English, unless any agreements concluded between
the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.
5.2.1.6 Additional provisions for goods of Class 2
Refillable receptacles shall bear the following particulars in clearly legible and durable characters:
(a) the UN number and the proper shipping name of the gas or mixture of gases, as determined in
accordance with 3.1.2.
In the case of gases classified under an N.O.S. entry, only the technical name1 of the gas has to
be indicated in addition to the UN number.
In the case of mixtures, not more than the two constituents which most predominantly contribute
to the hazards have to be indicated;
1 Instead of the technical name the use of one of the following names is permitted:
– for UN No. 1078 refrigerant gas, n.o.s: mixture F1, mixture F2, mixture F3;
– for UN No. 1060 methylacetylene and propadiene mixtures, stabilized: mixture P1, mixture P2;
– for UN No. 1965 hydrocarbon gas mixture, liquefied, n.o.s.: mixture A or butane, mixture A01 or butane,
mixture A02 or butane, mixture A0 or butane, mixture A1, mixture B1, mixture B2, mixture B, mixture C or
propane;
– for UN No. 1010 Butadienes, stabilized: 1,2-Butadiene, stabilized, 1,3-Butadiene, stabilized.
– For UN No. 1012 Butylene: 1-butylene, cis-2-butylene, trans-2-butylene, butylenes mixture.
– 231 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 232 –
(b) for compressed gases filled by mass and for liquefied gases, either the maximum filling mass
and the tare of the receptacle with fittings and accessories as fitted at the time of filling, or the
gross mass;
(c) the date (year) of the next periodic inspection.
These particulars can either be engraved or indicated on a durable information disk or label attached on
the receptacle or indicated by an adherent and clearly visible mark such as by printing or by any
equivalent process.
NOTE 1: See also 6.2.2.7.
NOTE 2: For non refillable receptacles, see 6.2.2.8.
5.2.1.7 Special marking provisions for radioactive material
5.2.1.7.1 Each package shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging with an identification
of either the consignor or consignee, or both. Each overpack shall be legibly and durably marked on the
outside of the overpack with an identification of either the consignor or consignee, or both unless these
marks of all packages within the overpack are clearly visible.
5.2.1.7.2 For each package, other than excepted packages, the UN number preceded by the letters “UN” and the
proper shipping name shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging. The marking
of excepted packages shall be as required by 5.1.5.4.1.
5.2.1.7.3 Each package of gross mass exceeding 50 kg shall have its permissible gross mass legibly and durably
marked on the outside of the packaging.
5.2.1.7.4 Each package which conforms to:
(a) a Type IP-1 package, a Type IP-2 package or a Type IP-3 package design shall be legibly and
durably marked on the outside of the packaging with “TYPE IP-1”, “TYPE IP-2” or “TYPE IP‑3”
as appropriate;
(b) a Type A package design shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside of the packaging
with “TYPE A”;
(c) a Type IP-2 package, a Type IP-3 package or a Type A package design shall be legibly and
durably marked on the outside of the packaging with the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in
international road traffic2 of the country of origin of design and either the name of the
manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent authority of the
country of origin of design.
5.2.1.7.5 Each package which conforms to a design approved under one or more of paragraphs 1.6.6.2.1,
5.1.5.2.1, 6.4.22.1 to 6.4.22.4 and 6.4.23.4 to 6.4.23.7 shall be legibly and durably marked on the outside
of the package with the following information:
(a) the identification mark allocated to that design by the competent authority;
(b) a serial number to uniquely identify each packaging which conforms to that design;
(c) “Type B(U)”, “Type B(M)” or “Type C”, in the case of a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C
package design.
5.2.1.7.6 Each package which conforms to a Type B(U), Type B(M) or Type C package design shall have the
outside of the outermost receptacle which is resistant to the effects of fire and water plainly marked by
embossing, stamping or other means resistant to the effects of fire and water with the trefoil symbol
shown in the figure below.
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 232 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 233 –
Basic trefoil symbol with proportions based on a central circle of radius X.
The minimum allowable size of X shall be 4 mm.
Any mark on the package made in accordance with the requirements of 5.2.1.7.4 (a) and (b) and
5.2.1.7.5 (c) relating to the package type that does not relate to the UN number and proper shipping
name assigned to the consignment shall be removed or covered.
5.2.1.7.7 Where LSA-I or SCO-I material is contained in receptacles or wrapping materials and is carried under
exclusive use as permitted by 4.1.9.2.4, the outer surface of these receptacles or wrapping materials
may bear the mark “RADIOACTIVE LSA-I” or “RADIOACTIVE SCO-I”, as appropriate.
5.2.1.7.8 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment,
marking shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of the design.
5.2.1.8 Special marking provisions for environmentally hazardous substances
5.2.1.8.1 Packages containing environmentally hazardous substances meeting the criteria of 2.2.9.1.10 shall be
durably marked with the environmentally hazardous substance mark shown in 5.2.1.8.3 with the
exception of single packagings and combination packagings where such single packagings or inner
packagings of such combination packagings have:
– a quantity of 5 l or less for liquids; or
– a net mass of 5 kg or less for solids.
5.2.1.8.2 The environmentally hazardous substance mark shall be located adjacent to the marks required by
5.2.1.1. The requirements of 5.2.1.2 and 5.2.1.4 shall be met.
5.2.1.8.3 The environmentally hazardous substance mark shall be as shown in Figure 5.2.1.8.3.
– 233 –
.Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Figure 5.2.1.8.3
Environmentally hazardous substance mark
The mark shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The symbol (fish
and tree) shall be black on white or suitable contrasting background. The minimum dimensions shall be
100 mm × 100 mm and the minimum width of the line forming the diamond shall be 2 mm. If the size
of the package so requires, the dimensions/line thickness may be reduced, provided the mark remains
clearly visible. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to
those shown.
NOTE: The labelling provisions of 5.2.2 apply in addition to any requirement for packages to bear the
environmentally hazardous substance mark.
5.2.1.9 Lithium battery mark
5.2.1.9.1 Packages containing lithium cells or batteries prepared in accordance with special provision 188 of
Chapter 3.3 shall be marked as shown in Figure 5.2.1.9.2.
5.2.1.9.2 The mark shall indicate the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”, i.e. ‘UN 3090’ for lithium metal
cells or batteries or ‘UN 3480’ for lithium ion cells or batteries. Where the lithium cells or batteries are
contained in, or packed with, equipment, the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”, i.e. ‘UN 3091’
or ‘UN 3481’ as appropriate shall be indicated. Where a package contains lithium cells or batteries
assigned to different UN numbers, all applicable UN numbers shall be indicated on one or more marks.
Figure 5.2.1.9.2
Lithium battery mark
* Place for UN number(s)
– 234 –
Minimum dimension
100 mm
Minimum dimension
100 mm
Minimum dimension 100 mm
Minimum dimension 100 mm
*Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 235 –
The mark shall be in the form of a rectangle or a square with hatched edging. The dimensions shall be
a minimum of 100 mm wide × 100 mm high and the minimum width of the hatching shall be 5 mm.
The symbol (group of batteries, one damaged and emitting flame, above the UN number for lithium ion
or lithium metal batteries or cells) shall be black on white or suitable contrasting background. The
hatching shall be red. If the size of the package so requires, the dimensions may be reduced to not less
than 100 mm wide × 70 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in
approximate proportion to those shown.
5.2.1.10 Orientation arrows
5.2.1.10.1 Except as provided in 5.2.1.10.2:
(a) combination packagings having inner packagings containing liquids;
(b) single packagings fitted with vents;
(c) closed or open cryogenic receptacles intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases;
and
(d) machinery or apparatus containing liquid dangerous goods when it is required to ensure the
liquid dangerous goods remain in their intended orientation (see special provision 301 of Chapter
3.3);
shall be legibly marked with package orientation arrows which are similar to the illustration shown
below or with those meeting the specifications of ISO 780:1997. The orientation arrows shall appear
on two opposite vertical sides of the package with the arrows pointing in the correct upright direction.
They shall be rectangular and of a size that is clearly visible commensurate with the size of the package.
Depicting a rectangular border around the arrows is optional.
Figure 5.2.1.10.1.1 Figure 5.2.1.10.1.2
Two black or red arrows on white or suitable contrasting background.
The rectangular border is optional.
All features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown.
5.2.1.10.2 Orientation arrows are not required on:
(a) Outer packagings containing pressure receptacles except closed or open cryogenic receptacles;
(b) Outer packagings containing dangerous goods in inner packagings each containing not more
than 120 ml, with sufficient absorbent material between the inner and outer packagings to
completely absorb the liquid contents;
(c) Outer packagings containing Class 6.2 infectious substances in primary receptacles each
containing not more than 50 ml;
(d) Type IP-2, type IP-3, type A, type B(U), type B(M) or type C packages containing Class 7
radioactive material;
(e) Outer packagings containing articles which are leak-tight in all orientations (e.g. alcohol or
mercury in thermometers, aerosols, etc.); or
(f) Outer packagings containing dangerous goods in hermetically sealed inner packagings each
containing not more than 500 ml.
5.2.1.10.3 Arrows for purposes other than indicating proper package orientation shall not be displayed on a
package marked in accordance with this sub-section.
or
– 235 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 236 –
5.2.2 Labelling of packages
5.2.2.1 Labelling provisions
5.2.2.1.1 For each article or substance listed in Table A of Chapter 3.2, the labels shown in Column (5) shall be
affixed unless otherwise provided for by a special provision in Column (6).
5.2.2.1.2 Indelible danger marks corresponding exactly to the prescribed models may be used instead of labels.
5.2.2.1.3 to 5.2.2.1.5 (Reserved)
5.2.2.1.6 Except as provided in 5.2.2.2.1.2, each label shall:
(a) be affixed to the same surface of the package, if the dimensions of the package allow; for
packages of Class1 and 7, near the mark indicating the proper shipping name;
(b) be so placed on the package that it is not covered or obscured by any part or attachment to the
packaging or any other label or marks; and
(c) be displayed next to each other when more than one label is required.
Where a package is of such an irregular shape or small size that a label cannot be satisfactorily affixed,
the label may be attached to the package by a securely affixed tag or other suitable means.
5.2.2.1.7 Intermediate bulk containers of more than 450 litres capacity and large packagings shall be labelled on
two opposite sides.
5.2.2.1.8 (Reserved)
5.2.2.1.9 Special provisions for the labelling of self-reactive substances and organic peroxides
(a) The label conforming to model No. 4.1 also implies that the product may be flammable and
hence no label conforming to model No. 3 is required. In addition, a label conforming to model
No. 1 shall be applied for self-reactive substances Type B, unless the competent authority has
permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because test data have proven
that the self-reactive substance in such a packaging does not exhibit explosive behaviour.
(b) The label conforming to model No. 5.2 also implies that the product may be flammable and
hence no label conforming to model No. 3 is required. In addition, the following labels shall be
applied:
(i) A label conforming to model No. 1 for organic peroxides type B, unless the competent
authority has permitted this label to be dispensed with for a specific packaging because
test data have proven that the organic peroxide in such a packaging does not exhibit
explosive behaviour;
(ii) A label conforming to model No. 8 is required when Packing Group I or II criteria of
Class 8 are met.
For self-reactive substances and organic peroxides mentioned by name, the labels to be affixed are
indicated in the list found in 2.2.41.4 and 2.2.52.4 respectively.
5.2.2.1.10 Special provisions for the labelling of infectious substances packages
In addition to the label conforming to model No. 6.2, infectious substances packages shall bear any
other label required by the nature of the contents.
5.2.2.1.11 Special provisions for the labelling of radioactive material
5.2.2.1.11.1 Except when enlarged labels are used in accordance with 5.3.1.1.3, each package, overpack and
container containing radioactive material shall bear the labels conforming to the applicable models Nos.
7A, 7B or 7C, according to the appropriate category. Labels shall be affixed to two opposite sides on
the outside of the package or overpack or on the outside of all four sides of a container or tank. In
addition, each package, overpack and container containing fissile material, other than fissile material
excepted under the provisions of 2.2.7.2.3.5 shall bear labels conforming to model No.7E; such labels,
where applicable, shall be affixed adjacent to the labels conforming to the applicable model Nos. 7A,
7B or 7C.. Labels shall not cover the marks specified in 5.2.1. Any labels which do not relate to the
contents shall be removed or covered.
– 236 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 237 –
5.2.2.1.11.2 Each label conforming to the applicable model No. 7A, 7B or 7C shall be completed with the following
information.
(a) Contents:
(i) except for LSA-I material, the name(s) of the radionuclide(s) as taken from
Table 2.2.7.2.2.1, using the symbols prescribed therein. For mixtures of radionuclides,
the most restrictive nuclides shall be listed to the extent the space on the line permits.
The group of LSA or SCO shall be shown following the name(s) of the radionuclide(s).
The terms “LSA-II”,”LSA-III”, “SCO-I” and “SCO-II” shall be used for this purpose;
(ii) for LSA-I material, only the term “LSA-I” is necessary; the name of the radionuclide is
not necessary;
(b) Activity: The maximum activity of the radioactive contents during carriage expressed in
becquerels (Bq) with the appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the total
mass of fissile nuclides in units of grams (g), or multiples thereof, may be used in place of
activity;
(c) For overpacks and containers the “contents” and “activity” entries on the label shall bear the
information required in (a) and (b) above, respectively, totalled together for the entire contents
of the overpack or container except that on labels for overpacks or containers containing mixed
loads of packages containing different radionuclides, such entries may read “See Transport
Documents”;
(d) Transport index: The number determined in accordance with 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2 (except for
category I-WHITE).
5.2.2.1.11.3 Each label conforming to the model No. 7E shall be completed with the criticality safety index (CSI)
as stated in the certificate of approval applicable in the countries through or into which the consignment
is carried and issued by the competent authority or as specified in 6.4.11.2 or 6.4.11.3.
5.2.2.1.11.4 For overpacks and containers, the label conforming to model No. 7E shall bear the sum of the criticality
safety indexes of all the packages contained therein.
5.2.2.1.11.5 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment,
labelling shall be in accordance with the certificate of the country of origin of design.
5.2.2.1.12 Special provisions for the labelling of articles containing dangerous goods carried as UN Nos. 3537,
3538, 3539, 3540, 3541, 3542, 3543, 3544, 3545, 3546, 3547 and 3548
5.2.2.1.12.1 Packages containing articles or articles carried unpackaged shall bear labels according to 5.2.2.1
reflecting the hazards established according to 2.1.5, except that for articles that in addition contain
lithium batteries, a lithium battery mark or a label conforming to model No. 9A is not required.
5.2.2.1.12.2 When it is required to ensure articles containing liquid dangerous goods remain in their intended
orientation, orientation arrows meeting 5.2.1.10.1 shall be affixed and visible on at least two opposite
vertical sides of the package or of the unpackaged article where possible, with the arrows pointing in
the correct upright direction.
5.2.2.2 Provisions for labels
5.2.2.2.1 Labels shall satisfy the provisions below and conform, in terms of colour, symbols and general format,
to the models shown in 5.2.2.2.2. Corresponding models required for other modes of transport, with
minor variations which do not affect the obvious meaning of the label, are also acceptable.
NOTE: Where appropriate, labels in 5.2.2.2.2 are shown with a dotted outer boundary as provided for
in 5.2.2.2.1.1. This is not required when the label is applied on a background of contrasting colour.
– 237 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 238 –
5.2.2.2.1.1 Labels shall be configured as shown in Figure 5.2.2.2.1.1.
Figure 5.2.2.2.1.1
Class/division label
* The class or for Classes 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3, the figure “4” or for Classes 6.1 and
6.2, the figure “6”, shall be shown in the bottom corner.
** Additional text/numbers/symbol/letters shall (if mandatory) or may (if
optional) be shown in this bottom half.
*** The class symbol or, for divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6, the division number and
for Model No 7E the word “FISSILE” shall be shown in this top half.
5.2.2.2.1.1.1 Labels shall be displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid
outer boundary line.
5.2.2.2.1.1.2 The label shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The minimum
dimensions shall be 100 mm × 100 mm. There shall be a line inside the edge forming the diamond
which shall be parallel and approximately 5 mm from the outside of that line to the edge of the label.
The line inside the edge on the upper half of the label shall be the same colour as the symbol and the
line inside the edge on the lower half of the label shall be the same colour as the class or division number
in the bottom corner. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion
to those shown.
5.2.2.2.1.1.3 If the size of the package so requires the dimensions may be reduced proportionally, provided the
symbols and other elements of the label remain clearly visible. Dimensions for cylinders shall comply
with 5.2.2.2.1.2.
5.2.2.2.1.2 Cylinders for Class 2 may, on account of their shape, orientation and securing mechanisms for carriage,
bear labels representative of those specified in this section and the environmentally hazardous substance
mark when appropriate, which have been reduced in size, according to the dimensions outlined in
ISO 7225:2005, “Gas cylinders – Precautionary labels”, for display on the non-cylindrical part
(shoulder) of such cylinders.
NOTE: When the diameter of the cylinder is too small to permit the display of the reduced size labels
on the non-cylindrical upper part of the cylinder, the reduced sized labels may be displayed on the
cylindrical part.
Notwithstanding the provisions of 5.2.2.1.6, labels and the environmentally hazardous substance mark
(see 5.2.1.8.3) may overlap to the extent provided for by ISO 7225:2005. However, in all cases, the
primary hazard label and the figures appearing on any label shall remain fully visible and the symbols
recognizable.
Empty uncleaned pressure receptacles for gases of Class 2 may be carried with obsolete or damaged
labels for the purposes of refilling or inspection as appropriate and the application of a new label in
conformity with current regulations or for the disposal of the pressure receptacle.
– 238 –
* * *
* *
*Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 239 –
5.2.2.2.1.3 With the exception of labels for Divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 of Class 1, the upper half of the label shall
contain the pictorial symbol and the lower half shall contain:
(a) For Classes 1, 2, 3, 5.1, 5.2, 7, 8 and 9, the class number;
(b) For Classes 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3, the figure “4”;
(c) For Classes 6.1 and 6.2, the figure “6”.
However for label model No. 9A, the upper half of the label shall only contain the seven vertical stripes
of the symbol and the lower half shall contain the group of batteries of the symbol and the class number.
Except for label model No. 9A, the labels may include text such as the UN number or words describing
the hazard (e.g. “flammable”) in accordance with 5.2.2.2.1.5 provided the text does not obscure or
detract from the other required label elements.
5.2.2.2.1.4 In addition, except for Divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6, labels for Class 1 shall show in the lower half, above
the class number, the division number and the compatibility group letter for the substance or article.
Labels for Divisions 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 shall show in the upper half the division number, and in the lower
half the class number and the compatibility group letter.
5.2.2.2.1.5 On labels other than those for material of Class 7, the optional insertion of any text (other than the class
number) in the space below the symbol shall be confined to particulars indicating the nature of the
hazard and precautions to be taken in handling.
5.2.2.2.1.6 The symbols, text and numbers shall be clearly legible and indelible and shall be shown in black on all
labels except for:
(a) The Class 8 label, where the text (if any) and class number shall appear in white;
(b) Labels with entirely green, red or blue backgrounds where they may be shown in white;
(c) The Class 5.2 label, where the symbol may be shown in white; and
(d) Labels conforming to model No. 2.1 displayed on cylinders and gas cartridges for liquefied
petroleum gases, where they may be shown in the background colour of the receptacle if
adequate contrast is provided.
5.2.2.2.1.7 All labels shall be able to withstand open weather exposure without a substantial reduction in
effectiveness.
5.2.2.2.2 Specimen labels
– 239 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 1 hazard: Explosive substances or articles
1 Divisions 1.1,
1.2, 1.3
Exploding bomb: black Orange 1
(black)
Place for division – to be left blank if
explosive is the subsidiary hazard
Place for compatibility group – to be
left blank if explosive is the subsidiary
hazard
1.4 Division 1.4 1.4: black
Numerals shall be about 30 mm
in height and be about 5 mm
thick (for a label measuring 100
mm × 100 mm)
Orange 1
(black)
Place for compatibility group
1.5 Division 1.5 1.5: black
Numerals shall be about 30 mm
in height and be about 5 mm
thick (for a label measuring 100
mm × 100 mm)
Orange 1
(black)
Place for compatibility group
1.6 Division 1.6 1.6: black
Numerals shall be about 30 mm
in height and be about 5 mm
thick (for a label measuring 100
mm × 100 mm)
Orange 1
(black)
Place for compatibility group
– 240 –
1
* *
*
1
1
1Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 2 hazard: Gases
2.1 Flammable
gases
Flame: black or white (except as
provided for in 5.2.2.2.1.6 d))
Red 2
(black or white)
(except as provided
for in 5.2.2.2.1.6
d))
–
2.2 Non-
flammable,
non-toxic
gases
Gas cylinder: black or white Green 2
(black or white)
–
2.3 Toxic gases Skull and crossbones: black White 2
(black)
–
Class 3 hazard: Flammable liquids
3 – Flame: black or white Red 3
(black or white)
–
– 241 –
2
3 3
2 2
22Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 4.1 hazard: Flammable solids, self-reactive substances, polymerizing substances and solid desensitized explosives
4.1 – Flame: black White with 7
vertical red
stripes
4
(black)
–
Class 4.2 hazard: Substances liable to spontaneous combustion
4.2 – Flame: black Upper half
white, lower
half red
4
(black)
–
Class 4.3 hazard: Substances which, in contact with water emit flammable gases
4.3 – Flame: black or white Blue 4
(black or white)
–
– 242 –
4
4
4 4Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 5.1 hazard: Oxidizing substances
5.1 – Flame over circle: black Yellow 5.1
(black)
–
Class 5.2 hazard: Organic peroxides
5.2 – Flame: black or white Upper half
red, lower
half yellow
5.2
(black)
–
Class 6.1 hazard: Toxic substances
6.1 – Skull and crossbones: black White 6
(black)
–
Class 6.2 hazard: Infectious substances
6.2 – Three crescents superimposed
on a circle: black
White 6
(black)
The lower half of the label may bear the
inscriptions: “INFECTIOUS
SUBSTANCE” and “In the case of
damage or leakage immediately notify
Public Health Authority” in black colour
– 243 –
5.2 5.2
6
6Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 7 hazard: Radioactive material
7A Category I –
WHITE
Trefoil: black White 7
(black)
Text (mandatory), black in lower half of
label:
“RADIOACTIVE”
“CONTENTS …”
“ACTIVITY …”
One red vertical bar shall follow the
word: “RADIOACTIVE”
7B Category II –
YELLOW
Trefoil: black Upper half
yellow with
white
border,
lower half
white
7
(black)
Text (mandatory), black in lower half of
label:
“RADIOACTIVE”
“CONTENTS …”
“ACTIVITY …”
In a black outlined box:
“TRANSPORT INDEX”;
Two red vertical bars shall follow the
word: “RADIOACTIVE”
7C Category III
– YELLOW
Trefoil: black Upper half
yellow with
white
border,
lower half
white
7
(black)
Text (mandatory), black in lower half of
label:
“RADIOACTIVE”
“CONTENTS …”
“ACTIVITY …”
In a black outlined box:
“TRANSPORT INDEX”.
Three red vertical bars shall follow the
word: “RADIOACTIVE”
7E Fissile
material
– White 7
(black)
Text (mandatory): black in upper half of
label: “FISSILE”;
In a black outlined box in the lower half
of label: “CRITICALITY SAFETY
INDEX”
– 244 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 245 –
Label
model
No.
Division or
Category Symbol and symbol colour Background
Figure in bottom
corner (and figure
colour)
Specimen labels Note
Class 8 hazard: Corrosive substances
8 – Liquids, spilling from two glass
vessels and attacking a hand and
a metal: black
Upper half
white, lower
half black
with white
border
8
(white)
–
Class 9 hazard: Miscellaneous dangerous substances and articles
9 – 7 vertical stripes in upper half:
black
White 9 underlined
(black)
–
9A – 7 vertical stripes in upper half:
black;
battery group, one broken and
emitting flame in lower half:
black
White 9 underlined
(black)
–
– 245 –
9
8Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 247 –
CHAPTER 5.3
PLACARDING AND MARKING OF CONTAINERS, BULK CONTAINERS, MEGCs,
MEMUs, TANK-CONTAINERS, PORTABLE TANKS AND VEHICLES
NOTE 1: For marking and placarding of containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers and portable tanks for
carriage in a transport chain including a maritime journey, see also 1.1.4.2.1. If the provisions of 1.1.4.2.1 (c) are
applied, only 5.3.1.3 and 5.3.2.1.1 of this Chapter are applicable.
NOTE 2: In accordance with the GHS, a GHS pictogram not required by ADR should only appear in carriage as part
of a complete GHS label and not independently (see GHS 1.4.10.4.4).
5.3.1 Placarding
5.3.1.1 General provisions
5.3.1.1.1 As and when required in this section, placards shall be affixed to the exterior surface of containers, bulk
containers, MEGCs, MEMUs, tank-containers, portable tanks and vehicles. Placards shall correspond
to the labels required in Column (5) and, where appropriate, Column (6) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for
the dangerous goods contained in the container, bulk containers, MEGC, MEMU, tank-container,
portable tank or vehicle and shall conform to the specifications given in 5.3.1.7. Placards shall be
displayed on a background of contrasting colour, or shall have either a dotted or solid outer boundary
line. The placards shall be weather-resistant and shall ensure durable marking throughout the entire
journey.
5.3.1.1.2 For Class 1, compatibility groups shall not be indicated on placards if the vehicle, container or special
compartments of MEMUs are carrying substances or articles belonging to two or more compatibility
groups. Vehicles, containers or special compartments of MEMUs carrying substances or articles of
different divisions shall bear only placards conforming to the model of the most dangerous division in
the order:
1.1 (most dangerous), 1.5, 1.2, 1.3, 1.6, 1.4 (least dangerous).
When 1.5 D substances are carried with substances or articles of Division 1.2, the vehicle or container
shall be placarded as Division 1.1.
Placards are not required for the carriage of explosives of Division 1.4, compatibility group S.
5.3.1.1.3 For Class 7, the primary hazard placard shall conform to model No. 7D as specified in 5.3.1.7.2. This
placard is not required for vehicles or containers carrying excepted packages and for small containers.
Where both Class 7 labels and placards would be required to be affixed to vehicles, containers, MEGCs,
tank-containers or portable tanks, an enlarged label corresponding to the required label of model No.
7A, 7B or 7C may be displayed instead of placard No.7D to serve both purposes. In that case, the
dimensions shall be not less than 250 mm by 250 mm.
5.3.1.1.4 For Class 9 the placard shall correspond to the label model No. 9 as in 5.2.2.2.2; label model No. 9A
shall not be used for placarding purposes.
5.3.1.1.5 Containers, MEGCs, MEMUs, tank-containers, portable tanks or vehicles containing goods of more
than one class need not bear a subsidiary hazard placard if the hazard represented by that placard is
already indicated by a primary or subsidiary hazard placard.
5.3.1.1.6 Placards which do not relate to the dangerous goods being carried, or residues thereof, shall be removed
or covered.
5.3.1.1.7 When the placarding is affixed to folding panels, they shall be designed and secured so that they cannot
unfold or come loose from the holder during carriage (especially as a result of impacts or unintentional
actions).
– 247 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 248 –
5.3.1.2 Placarding of containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers and portable tanks
NOTE: This sub-section does not apply to swap bodies, except tank swap bodies or swap bodies
carried in combined road/rail transport.
The placards shall be affixed to both sides and at each end of the container, bulk container, MEGC,
tank-container or portable tank and to two opposite sides in the case of flexible bulk containers.
When the tank-container or portable tank has multiple compartments and carries two or more dangerous
goods, the appropriate placards shall be displayed along each side at the position of the relevant
compartments and one placard of each model shown on each side at both ends. If all compartments have
to bear the same placards, these placards need to be displayed only once along each side and at both
ends of the tank container or portable tank.
5.3.1.3 Placarding of vehicles carrying containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers or portable
tanks
NOTE: This sub-section does not apply to the placarding of vehicles carrying swap bodies other than
tank swap bodies or than swap bodies carried in combined road/rail transport; for such vehicles, see
5.3.1.5.
If the placards affixed to the containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers or portable tanks are
not visible from outside the carrying vehicles, the same placards shall also be affixed to both sides and
at the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, no placard need be affixed on the carrying vehicle.
5.3.1.4 Placarding of vehicles for carriage in bulk, tank-vehicles, battery-vehicles, MEMUs and vehicles
with demountable tanks
5.3.1.4.1 Placards shall be affixed to both sides and at the rear of the vehicle.
When the tank-vehicle or the demountable tank carried on the vehicle has multiple compartments and
carries two or more dangerous goods, the appropriate placards shall be displayed along each side at the
position of the relevant compartments and one placard of each model shown on each side at the rear of
the vehicle. If all compartments have to bear the same placards, these placards need be displayed only
once along each side and at the rear of the vehicle.
Where more than one placard is required for the same compartment, these placards shall be displayed
adjacent to each other.
NOTE: When, in the course of an ADR journey or at the end of an ADR journey, a tank semi-trailer is
separated from its tractor to be loaded on board a ship or an inland navigation vessel, placards shall
also be displayed at the front of the semi-trailer.
5.3.1.4.2 MEMUs with tanks and bulk containers shall be placarded in accordance with 5.3.1.4.1 for the
substances contained therein. For tanks with a capacity of less than 1 000 litres placards may be replaced
by labels conforming to 5.2.2.2.
5.3.1.4.3 For MEMUs carrying packages containing substances or articles of Class 1 (other than of Division 1.4,
Compatibility group S), placards shall be affixed to both sides and at the rear of the MEMU.
Special compartments for explosives shall be placarded in accordance with the provisions of 5.3.1.1.2.
The last sentence of 5.3.1.1.2 does not apply.
5.3.1.5 Placarding of vehicles carrying packages only
NOTE: This sub-section applies also to vehicles carrying swap bodies loaded with packages, except
for combined road/rail transport; for combined road/rail transport, see 5.3.1.2 and 5.3.1.3.
5.3.1.5.1 For vehicles carrying packages containing substances or articles of Class 1 (other than of Division 1.4,
compatibility group S), placards shall be affixed to both sides and at the rear of the vehicle.
5.3.1.5.2 For vehicles carrying radioactive material of Class 7 in packagings or IBCs (other than excepted
packages), placards shall be affixed to both sides and at the rear of the vehicle.
– 248 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 249 –
5.3.1.6 Placarding of empty tank-vehicles, battery-vehicles, MEGCs, MEMUs, tank-containers, portable
tanks and empty vehicles and containers for carriage in bulk
5.3.1.6.1 Empty tank-vehicles, vehicles with demountable tanks, battery-vehicles, MEGCs,
MEMUs, tank-containers and portable tanks uncleaned and not degassed, and empty vehicles and
containers for carriage in bulk, uncleaned, shall continue to display the placards required for the
previous load.
5.3.1.7 Specifications for placards
5.3.1.7.1 Except as provided in 5.3.1.7.2 for the Class 7 placard, and in 5.3.6.2 for the environmentally hazardous
substance mark, a placard shall be configured as shown in Figure 5.3.1.7.1.
Figure 5.3.1.7.1
Placard (except for Class 7)
The placard shall be in the form of a square set at an angle of 45° (diamond-shaped). The minimum
dimensions shall be 250 mm × 250 mm (to the edge of the placard). The line inside the edge shall be
parallel and 12.5 mm from the outside of that line to the edge of the placard. The symbol and line inside
the edge shall correspond in colour to the label for the class or division of the dangerous goods in
question. The class or division symbol/numeral shall be positioned and sized in proportion to those
prescribed in 5.2.2.2 for the corresponding class or division of the dangerous goods in question. The
placard shall display the number of the class or division (and for goods in Class 1, the compatibility
group letter) of the dangerous goods in question in the manner prescribed in 5.2.2.2 for the
corresponding label, in digits not less than 25 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all features
shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. The deviations specified in 5.2.2.2.1, second
sentence, 5.2.2.2.1.3, third sentence and 5.2.2.2.1.5 for danger labels also apply to placards.
5.3.1.7.2 The Class 7 placard shall be not less than 250 mm by 250 mm with a black line running 5 mm inside
the edge and parallel with it and is otherwise as shown below (Model No. 7D). The number “7” shall
not be less than 25 mm high. The background colour of the upper half of the placard shall be yellow
and of the lower half white, the colour of the trefoil and the printing shall be black. The use of the word
“RADIOACTIVE” in the bottom half is optional to allow the use of this placard to display the
appropriate UN number for the consignment.
– 249 –
12,5 mm
MINIMUM DIMENSION
250 mm
MINIMUM DIMENSION
250 mmCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Placard for radioactive material of Class 7
(No.7D)
Symbol (trefoil): black;
Background:upper half yellow with white border, lower half white;
The lower half shall show the word “RADIOACTIVE” or alternatively,
the appropriate UN Number, and the figure “7” in the bottom corner.
5.3.1.7.3 For tanks with a capacity of not more than 3 m³ and for small containers, placards may be replaced by
labels conforming to 5.2.2.2. If these labels are not visible from outside the carrying vehicle, placards
according to 5.3.1.7.1 shall also be affixed to both sides and at the rear of the vehicle.
5.3.1.7.4 For Classes 1 and 7, if the size and construction of the vehicle are such that the available surface area
is insufficient to affix the prescribed placards, their dimensions may be reduced to 100 mm on each
side.
5.3.2 Orange-coloured plate marking
5.3.2.1 General orange-coloured plate marking provisions
5.3.2.1.1 Transport units carrying dangerous goods shall display two rectangular orange-coloured plates
conforming to 5.3.2.2.1, set in a vertical plane. They shall be affixed one at the front and the other at
the rear of the transport unit, both perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the transport unit. They shall
be clearly visible.
If a trailer containing dangerous goods is detached from its motor vehicle during carriage of dangerous
goods, an orange-coloured plate shall remain affixed to the rear of the trailer. When tanks are marked
in accordance with 5.3.2.1.3, this plate shall correspond to the most hazardous substance carried in the
tank.
5.3.2.1.2 When a hazard identification number is indicated in Column (20) of table A of Chapter 3.2, tank-
vehicles, battery vehicles or transport units having one or more tanks carrying dangerous goods shall in
addition display on the sides of each tank, each tank compartment or each element of battery vehicles,
clearly visible and parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, orange-coloured plates identical with
those prescribed in 5.3.2.1.1. These orange-coloured plates shall bear the hazard identification number
and the UN number prescribed respectively in Columns (20) and (1) of table A of Chapter 3.2 for each
of the substances carried in the tank, in a compartment of the tank or in an element of a battery vehicle.
For MEMUs these requirements shall only apply to tanks with a capacity of 1 000 litres or more and
bulk containers.
5.3.2.1.3 For tank-vehicles or transport units having one or more tanks carrying substances with UN Nos. 1202,
1203 or 1223, or aviation fuel classified under UN Nos. 1268 or 1863, but no other dangerous substance,
the orange-coloured plates prescribed in 5.3.2.1.2 need not be affixed if the plates affixed to the front
– 250 –
7
10 mm
MINIMUM
5 mm
RADIOACTIVE
MINIMUM DIMENSION
250 mm
MINIMUM DIMENSION
250 mmCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 251 –
and rear in accordance with 5.3.2.1.1 bear the hazard identification number and the UN number
prescribed for the most hazardous substance carried, i.e. the substance with the lowest flash-point.
5.3.2.1.4 When a hazard identification number is indicated in Column (20) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, vehicles,
containers and bulk containers carrying unpackaged solids or articles or packaged radioactive material
with a single UN number required to be carried under exclusive use and no other dangerous goods shall
in addition display on the sides of each vehicle, container or bulk container, clearly visible and parallel
to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, orange-coloured plates identical with those prescribed
in 5.3.2.1.1. These orange-coloured plates shall bear the hazard identification number and the UN
number prescribed respectively in Columns (20) and (1) of table A of Chapter 3.2 for each of the
substances carried in bulk in the vehicle, in the container or in the bulk container or for the packaged
radioactive material when required to be carried under exclusive use in the vehicle or in the container.
5.3.2.1.5 If the orange-coloured plates prescribed in 5.3.2.1.2 and 5.3.2.1.4 affixed to the containers, bulk
containers, tank-containers, MEGCs or portable tanks are not clearly visible from outside the carrying
vehicle, the same plates shall also be affixed to both sides of the vehicle.
NOTE: This paragraph need not be applied to vehicles carrying containers for carriage in bulk, tanks
and MEGCs with a maximum capacity of 3 000 litres.
5.3.2.1.6 For transport units carrying only one dangerous substance and no non-dangerous substance, the orange-
coloured plates prescribed in 5.3.2.1.2, 5.3.2.1.4 and 5.3.2.1.5 shall not be necessary provided that those
displayed at the front and rear in accordance with 5.3.2.1.1 bear the hazard identification number and
the UN number for that substance prescribed respectively in Columns (20) and (1) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2.
5.3.2.1.7 The requirements of 5.3.2.1.1 to 5.3.2.1.5 are also applicable to empty fixed or demountable tanks,
battery-vehicles, tank-containers, portable tanks and MEGCs, uncleaned, not degassed or not
decontaminated, MEMUs, uncleaned as well as to empty vehicles and containers for carriage in bulk,
uncleaned or not decontaminated.
5.3.2.1.8 Orange-coloured plates which do not relate to dangerous goods carried, or residues thereof, shall be
removed or covered. If plates are covered, the covering shall be total and remain effective after 15
minutes’ engulfment in fire.
5.3.2.2 Specifications for the orange-coloured plates
5.3.2.2.1 The orange-coloured plates shall be reflectorized and shall be of 40 cm base and of 30 cm high; they
shall have a black border of 15 mm wide. The material used shall be weather-resistant and ensure
durable marking. The plate shall not become detached from its mount in the event of 15 minutes’
engulfment in fire. It shall remain affixed irrespective of the orientation of the vehicle. The orange-
coloured plates may be separated in their middle with a black horizontal line of 15 mm thickness.
If the size and construction of the vehicle are such that the available surface area is insufficient to affix
these orange-coloured plates, their dimensions may be reduced to a minimum of 300 mm for the base,
120 mm for the height and 10 mm for the black border. In this case, a different set of dimensions within
the specified range may be used for the two orange-coloured plates specified in 5.3.2.1.1.
When reduced dimensions of orange-coloured plates are used for a packaged radioactive material
carried under exclusive use, only the UN number is required and the size of the digits stipulated in
5.3.2.2.2 may be reduced to 65 mm in height and 10 mm in stroke thickness.
For containers carrying dangerous solid substances in bulk and for tank-containers, MEGCs and
portable tanks, the plates prescribed in 5.3.2.1.2, 5.3.2.1.4 and 5.3.2.1.5 may be replaced by a self-
adhesive sheet, by paint or by any other equivalent process. This alternative marking shall conform to
the specifications set in this sub-section except for the provisions concerning resistance to fire
mentioned in 5.3.2.2.1 and 5.3.2.2.2.
NOTE: The colour of the orange plates in conditions of normal use should have chromaticity co-
ordinates lying within the area on the chromaticity diagram formed by joining the following co-
ordinates:
– 251 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Chromaticity co-ordinates of points at the corners of the area on the chromaticity diagram
x
y
0.52
0.38
0.52
0.40
0.578
0.422
0.618
0.38
Luminance factor of reflectorized colour: β > 0.12.
Reference centre E, standard illuminant C, normal incidence 45°, viewed at 0°.
Co-efficient of reflex luminous intensity at an angle of illumination of 5°, viewed at 0.2°: not less than
20 candelas per lux per m².
5.3.2.2.2 The hazard identification number and the UN number shall consist of black digits 100 mm high and of
15 mm stroke thickness. The hazard-identification number shall be inscribed in the upper part of the
plate and the UN number in the lower part; they shall be separated by a horizontal black line, 15 mm in
stroke width, extending from side to side of the plate at mid-height (see 5.3.2.2.3).The hazard
identification number and the UN number shall be indelible and shall remain legible after 15 minute’
engulfment in fire. Interchangeable numbers and letters on plates presenting the hazard identification
number and the UN number shall remain in place during carriage and irrespective of the orientation of
the vehicle.
5.3.2.2.3 Example of orange-coloured plate with hazard identification number and UN number
Background orange.
Border, horizontal line and figures black, 15 mm thickness.
5.3.2.2.4 The permitted tolerances for dimensions specified in this sub-section are ± 10 %.
5.3.2.2.5 When the orange-coloured plate is affixed to folding panels, they shall be designed and secured so that
they cannot unfold or come loose from the holder during carriage (especially as a result of impacts or
unintentional actions).
5.3.2.3 Meaning of hazard identification numbers
5.3.2.3.1 The hazard identification number consists of two or three figures. In general, the figures indicate the
following hazards:
2 Emission of gas due to pressure or to chemical reaction
3 Flammability of liquids (vapours) and gases or self-heating liquid
4 Flammability of solids or self-heating solid
5 Oxidizing (fire-intensifying) effect
6 Toxicity or risk of infection
7 Radioactivity
8 Corrosivity
9 Risk of spontaneous violent reaction
Hazard Identification
number (2 or 3 figures
preceded where
appropriate by the
letter X, see 5.3.2.3)
UN number
(4 figures)
– 252 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 253 –
NOTE: The risk of spontaneous violent reaction within the meaning of figure 9 include the possibility
following from the nature of a substance of a risk of explosion, disintegration and polymerization
reaction following the release of considerable heat or flammable and/or toxic gases.
Doubling of a figure indicates an intensification of that particular hazard.
Where the hazard associated with a substance can be adequately indicated by a single figure,
this is followed by zero.
The following combinations of figures, however, have a special meaning: 22, 323, 333, 362, 382, 423,
44, 446, 462, 482, 539, 606, 623, 642, 823, 842, 90 and 99, see 5.3.2.3.2 below.
If a hazard identification number is prefixed by the letter “X”, this indicates that the substance will react
dangerously with water. For such substances, water may only be used by approval of experts.
For substances of Class 1, the classification code in accordance with Column (3 b) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2, shall be used as the hazard identification number. The classification code consists of:
the division number in accordance with 2.2.1.1.5; and
the compatibility group letter in accordance with 2.2.1.1.6.
5.3.2.3.2 The hazard identification numbers listed in Column (20) of table A of Chapter 3.2 have the following
meanings:
20 asphyxiant gas or gas with no subsidiary hazard
22 refrigerated liquefied gas, asphyxiant
223 refrigerated liquefied gas, flammable
225 refrigerated liquefied gas, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
23 flammable gas
238 gas, flammable corrosive
239 flammable gas, which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
25 oxidizing (fire-intensifying) gas
26 toxic gas
263 toxic gas, flammable
265 toxic gas, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
268 toxic gas, corrosive
28 gas, corrosive
30 flammable liquid (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C, inclusive) or
flammable liquid or solid in the molten state with a flash-point above 60 °C, heated to a
temperature equal to or above its flash-point, or
self-heating liquid
323 flammable liquid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
X323 flammable liquid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases1
33 highly flammable liquid (flash-point below 23 °C)
333 pyrophoric liquid
X333 pyrophoric liquid which reacts dangerously with water1
336 highly flammable liquid, toxic
338 highly flammable liquid, corrosive
X338 highly flammable liquid, corrosive, which reacts dangerously with water1
339 highly flammable liquid which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
36 flammable liquid (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C, inclusive), slightly toxic, or self-
heating liquid, toxic
362 flammable liquid, toxic, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
X362 flammable liquid toxic, which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases1
368 flammable liquid, toxic, corrosive
38 flammable liquid (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C, inclusive), slightly corrosive or
self-heating liquid, corrosive
382 flammable liquid, corrosive, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
1 Water not to be used except by approval of experts.
– 253 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 254 –
X382 flammable liquid, corrosive, which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable
gases1
39 flammable liquid, which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
40 flammable solid, or self-reactive substance, or self-heating substance, or polymerizing
substance
423 solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases, or flammable solid which reacts
with water, emitting flammable gases or self-heating solid which reacts with water,
emitting flammable gases
X423 solid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases, or flammable solid
which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases, or self-heating solid
which reacts dangerously with water, emitting flammable gases1
43 spontaneously flammable (pyrophoric) solid
X432 spontaneously flammable (pyrophoric) solid which reacts dangerously with water,
emitting flammable gases1
44 flammable solid, in the molten state at an elevated temperature
446 flammable solid, toxic, in the molten state, at an elevated temperature
46 flammable or self-heating solid, toxic
462 toxic solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
X462 solid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting toxic gases1
48 flammable or self-heating solid, corrosive
482 corrosive solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
X482 solid which reacts dangerously with water, emitting corrosive gases1
50 oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance
539 flammable organic peroxide
55 strongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance
556 strongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance, toxic
558 strongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance, corrosive
559 strongly oxidizing (fire-intensifying) substance, which can spontaneously lead to violent
reaction
56 oxidizing substance (fire-intensifying), toxic
568 oxidizing substance (fire-intensifying), toxic, corrosive
58 oxidizing substance (fire-intensifying), corrosive
59 oxidizing substance (fire-intensifying) which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
60 toxic or slightly toxic substance
606 infectious substance
623 toxic liquid, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
63 toxic substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C, inclusive)
638 toxic substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C, inclusive), corrosive
639 toxic substance, flammable (flash-point not above 60 °C) which can spontaneously lead
to violent reaction
64 toxic solid, flammable or self-heating
642 toxic solid, which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
65 toxic substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
66 highly toxic substance
663 highly toxic substance, flammable (flash-point not above 60 °C)
664 highly toxic solid, flammable or self-heating
665 highly toxic substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
668 highly toxic substance, corrosive
X668 highly toxic substance, corrosive, which reacts dangerously with water1
669 highly toxic substance which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
68 toxic substance, corrosive
69 toxic or slightly toxic substance, which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
70 radioactive material
768 radioactive material, toxic, corrosive
78 radioactive material, corrosive
80 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance
X80 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, which reacts dangerously with water1
1 Water not to be used except by approval of experts.
– 254 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
823 corrosive liquid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
83 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and
60 °C, inclusive)
X83 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable, (flash-point between 23 °C and
60 °C, inclusive), which reacts dangerously with water1
836 Corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and
60 °C, inclusive) and toxic
839 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and
60 °C inclusive) which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction
X839 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and
60 °C inclusive), which can spontaneously lead to violent reaction and which reacts
dangerously with water1
84 corrosive solid, flammable or self-heating
842 corrosive solid which reacts with water, emitting flammable gases
85 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
856 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying) and toxic
86 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, toxic
88 highly corrosive substance
X88 highly corrosive substance, which reacts dangerously with water1
883 highly corrosive substance, flammable (flash-point between 23 °C and 60 °C inclusive)
884 highly corrosive solid, flammable or self-heating
885 highly corrosive substance, oxidizing (fire-intensifying)
886 highly corrosive substance, toxic
X886 highly corrosive substance, toxic, which reacts dangerously with water1
89 corrosive or slightly corrosive substance, which can spontaneously lead to violent
reaction
90 environmentally hazardous substance; miscellaneous dangerous substances
99 miscellaneous dangerous substance carried at an elevated temperature.
5.3.3 Elevated temperature substance mark
Tank-vehicles, tank-containers, portable tanks, special vehicles or containers or specially equipped
vehicles or containers containing a substance that is carried or handed over for carriage in a liquid state
at or above 100 °C or in a solid state at or above 240 °C shall bear on both sides and at the rear for
vehicles, and on both sides and at each end for containers, tank-containers and portable tanks, the mark
shown in Figure 5.3.3.
Figure 5.3.3
Mark for carriage at elevated temperature
The mark shall be an equilateral triangle. The colour of the mark shall be red. The minimum dimension
of the sides shall be 250 mm. For tank-containers or portable tanks with a capacity of not more than
3 000 litres and with an available surface area insufficient to affix the prescribed marks, the minimum
dimensions of the sides may be reduced to 100 mm. Where dimensions are not specified, all features
1 Water not to be used except by approval of experts.
– 255 –
Minimum dimension 250 mm
Minimum dimension 250 mm
Minimum dimension 250 mmCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 256 –
shall be in approximate proportion to those shown. The mark shall be weather-resistant and shall ensure
durable marking throughout the entire journey.
5.3.4 (Reserved)
5.3.5 (Reserved)
5.3.6 Environmentally hazardous substance mark
5.3.6.1 When a placard is required to be displayed in accordance with the provisions of section 5.3.1,
containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-containers, portable tanks and vehicles containing
environmentally hazardous substances meeting the criteria of 2.2.9.1.10 shall be marked with the
environmentally hazardous substance mark shown in 5.2.1.8.3. This does not apply to the exceptions
listed in 5.2.1.8.1.
5.3.6.2 The environmentally hazardous substance mark for containers, bulk containers, MEGCs, tank-
containers, portable tanks and vehicles shall be as described in 5.2.1.8.3 and Figure 5.2.1.8.3, except
that the minimum dimensions shall be 250 mm × 250 mm. For tank-containers or portable tanks with a
capacity of not more than 3 000 litres and with an available surface area insufficient to affix the
prescribed marks, the minimum dimensions may be reduced to 100 mm × 100 mm. The other provisions
of section 5.3.1 concerning placards shall apply mutatis mutandis to the mark.
– 256 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 257 –
CHAPTER 5.4
DOCUMENTATION
5.4.0 General
5.4.0.1 Unless otherwise specified, any carriage of goods governed by ADR shall be accompanied by the
documentation prescribed in this Chapter, as appropriate.
NOTE: For the list of documentation to be carried on board transport units, see 8.1.2.
5.4.0.2 The use of electronic data processing (EDP) or electronic data interchange (EDI) techniques as an aid
to or instead of paper documentation is permitted, provided that the procedures used for the capture,
storage and processing of electronics data meet the legal requirements as regards the evidential value
and availability of data during transport in a manner at least equivalent to that of paper documentation.
5.4.0.3 When the dangerous goods transport information is given to the carrier by EDP or EDI techniques, the
consignor shall be able to give the information to the carrier as a paper document, with the information
in the sequence required by this Chapter.
5.4.1 Dangerous goods transport document and related information
5.4.1.1 General information required in the transport document
5.4.1.1.1 The transport document(s) shall contain the following information for each dangerous substance,
material or article offered for carriage:
(a) the UN number preceded by the letters “UN”;
(b) the proper shipping name supplemented, when applicable (see 3.1.2.8.1) with the technical name
in brackets (see 3.1.2.8.1.1), as determined in accordance with 3.1.2;
(c) – for substances and articles of Class 1: the classification code given in Column (3b) of
Table A in Chapter 3.2.
When, in Column (5) of Table A in Chapter 3.2, label model numbers other than 1, 1.4,
1.5 and 1.6 are given, these label model numbers, in brackets, shall follow the
classification code;
– for radioactive material of Class 7: the Class number: “7”;
NOTE: For radioactive material with a subsidiary hazard, see also special provision
172 in Chapter 3.3.
– for lithium batteries of UN numbers 3090, 3091, 3480 and 3481: the Class number “9”;
– for other substances and articles: the label model numbers given in Column (5) of Table
A in Chapter 3.2 or applicable according to a special provision referred to in Column (6).
When more than one label model numbers are given, the numbers following the first one
shall be given in brackets. For substances and articles for which no label model is given
in Column (5) of Table A in Chapter 3.2, their class according to Column (3a) shall be
given instead;
(d) where assigned, the packing group for the substance which may be preceded by the letters “PG”
(e.g. “PG II”), or the initials corresponding to the words “Packing Group” in the languages used
according to 5.4.1.4.1;
NOTE: For radioactive material of Class 7 with subsidiary hazards, see special provision 172
(d) in Chapter 3.3.
– 257 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 258 –
(e) the number and a description of the packages when applicable. UN packaging codes may only
be used to supplement the description of the kind of package (e.g. one box (4G));
NOTE: The number, type and capacity of each inner packaging within the outer packaging of
a combination packaging is not required to be indicated.
(f) the total quantity of each item of dangerous goods bearing a different UN number, proper
shipping name or, when applicable, packing group (as a volume or as a gross mass, or as a net
mass as appropriate);
NOTE 1: In the case of intended application of 1.1.3.6, the total quantity and the calculated
value of dangerous goods for each transport category shall be indicated in the transport
document in accordance with 1.1.3.6.3 and 1.1.3.6.4 .
NOTE 2: For dangerous goods in machinery or equipment specified in this Annex, the quantity
indicated shall be the total quantity of dangerous goods contained therein in kilograms or litres
as appropriate.
(g) the name and address of the consignor;
(h) the name and address of the consignee(s). With the agreement of the competent authorities of
the countries concerned by the carriage, when dangerous goods are carried to be delivered to
multiple consignees who cannot be identified at the start of the carriage, the words “Delivery
Sale” may be given instead;
(i) a declaration as required by the terms of any special agreement;
(j) (Reserved)
(k) for carriage that includes passage through tunnels with restrictions for carriage of dangerous
goods, the tunnel restriction code given in Column (15) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, in capitals
within parenthesis, or the mention ‘(─)’ or as specified in a special arrangement in accordance
with 1.7.4.2.
The location and order in which the elements of information required appear in the transport document
is left optional, except that (a), (b), (c), (d) and (k) shall be shown in the order listed above (i.e. (a), (b),
(c), (d), (k)) with no information interspersed, except as provided in ADR.
Examples of such permitted dangerous goods descriptions are:
“UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), I, (C/D)” or
“UN 1098, ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), PG I, (C/D)”
5.4.1.1.2 The information required on a transport document shall be legible.
Although upper case is used in Chapter 3.1 and in Table A in Chapter 3.2 to indicate the elements which
shall be part of the proper shipping name, and although upper and lower case are used in this Chapter
to indicate the information required in the transport document, except for the provisions in 5.4.1.1.1 (k),
the use of upper or of lower case for entering the information in the transport document is left optional.
5.4.1.1.3 Special provisions for wastes
5.4.1.1.3.1 If waste containing dangerous goods (other than radioactive wastes) is being carried, the proper shipping
name shall be preceded by the word “WASTE”, unless this term is part of the proper shipping name,
e.g.:
“UN 1230 WASTE METHANOL, 3 (6.1), II, (D/E)”, or
“UN 1230 WASTE METHANOL, 3 (6.1), PG II, (D/E)”, or
“UN 1993 WASTE FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. (toluene and ethyl alcohol), 3, II, (D/E)”, or
“UN 1993 WASTE FLAMMABLE LIQUID, N.O.S. (toluene and ethyl alcohol), 3, PG II, (D/E)”.
If the provision for waste as set out in 2.1.3.5.5 is applied, the following shall be added to the dangerous
goods description required in 5.4.1.1.1 (a) to (d) and (k):
– 258 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 259 –
“WASTE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2.1.3.5.5” (e.g. “UN 3264, CORROSIVE LIQUID, ACIDIC,
INORGANIC, N.O.S., 8, II, (E), WASTE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2.1.3.5.5”).
The technical name, as prescribed in Chapter 3.3, special provision 274, need not be added.
5.4.1.1.3.2 If it is not possible to measure the exact quantity of the waste at the place of loading, the quantity
according to 5.4.1.1.1 (f) may be estimated for the following cases under the following conditions:
(a) For packagings, a list of packagings including the type and the nominal volume is added to the
transport document;
(b) For containers, the estimation is based on their nominal volume and other available information
(e.g. type of waste, average density, degree of filling);
(c) For vacuum-operated waste tanks, the estimation is justified (e.g. by means of an estimation
provided by the consigner or by vehicle equipment).
Such estimation of the quantity is not allowed for:
– Exemptions for which the exact quantity is essential (e.g. 1.1.3.6);
– Waste containing substances mentioned in 2.1.3.5.3 or substances of Class 4.3;
– Tanks other than vacuum-operated waste tanks.
A statement shall be included in the transport document, as follows:
“QUANTITY ESTIMATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH 5.4.1.1.3.2”.
5.4.1.1.4 (Deleted)
5.4.1.1.5 Special provisions for salvage packagings including large salvage packagings and salvage pressure
receptacles
When dangerous goods are carried in salvage packagings in accordance with 4.1.1.19, including large
salvage packagings, larger size packagings or large packagings of appropriate type and performance
level to be used as a salvage packaging, the words “SALVAGE PACKAGING” shall be added after
the description of the goods in the transport document.
When dangerous goods are carried in salvage pressure receptacles in accordance with 4.1.1.20, the
words “SALVAGE PRESSURE RECEPTACLE” shall be added after the description of the goods in
the transport document.
5.4.1.1.6 Special provision for empty means of containment, uncleaned
5.4.1.1.6.1 For empty means of containment, uncleaned, which contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes
other than Class 7, the words “EMPTY, UNCLEANED” or “RESIDUE, LAST CONTAINED” shall be
indicated before or after the dangerous goods description specified in 5.4.1.1.1 (a) to (d) and (k).
Moreover, 5.4.1.1.1 (f) does not apply.
5.4.1.1.6.2 The special provision of 5.4.1.1.6.1 may be replaced with the provisions of 5.4.1.1.6.2.1, 5.4.1.1.6.2.2
or 5.4.1.1.6.2.3, as appropriate.
5.4.1.1.6.2.1 For empty packagings, uncleaned, which contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes other than
Class 7, including empty uncleaned receptacles for gases with a capacity of not more than 1 000 litres,
the particulars according to 5.4.1.1.1 (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f) are replaced with “EMPTY
PACKAGING”, “EMPTY RECEPTACLE”, “EMPTY IBC” or “EMPTY LARGE PACKAGING”, as
appropriate, followed by the information of the goods last loaded, as described in 5.4.1.1.1 (c).
See example as follows: “EMPTY PACKAGING, 6.1 (3)”.
In addition, in such a case:
– 259 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 260 –
(a) If the dangerous goods last loaded are goods of Class 2, the information prescribed in
5.4.1.1.1 (c) may be replaced by the number of the Class “2”;
(b) If the dangerous goods last loaded are goods of Classes 3, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, 8 or 9, the
information of the goods last loaded, as described in 5.4.1.1.1 (c) may be replaced by the words
“WITH RESIDUES OF […]” followed by the class(es) and subsidiary hazard(s) corresponding
to the different residues, in the class numbering order.
Example:
Empty packagings, uncleaned, having contained goods of Class 3 carried together with empty
packagings, uncleaned, having contained goods of Class 8 with a Class 6.1 subsidiary hazard may be
referred to in the transport document as:
“EMPTY PACKAGINGS, WITH RESIDUES OF 3, 6.1, 8”.
5.4.1.1.6.2.2 For empty means of containment other than packagings, uncleaned, which contain the residue of
dangerous goods of classes other than Class 7 and for empty uncleaned receptacles for gases with a
capacity of more than 1 000 litres, the particulars according to 5.4.1.1.1 (a) to (d) and (k) are preceded
by “EMPTY TANK-VEHICLE”, “EMPTY DEMOUNTABLE TANK”, “EMPTY TANK-
CONTAINER”, “EMPTY PORTABLE TANK”, “EMPTY BATTERY-VEHICLE”, “EMPTY
MEGC”, “EMPTY MEMU”, “EMPTY VEHICLE”, “EMPTY CONTAINER” or “EMPTY
RECEPTACLE”, as appropriate, followed by the words “LAST LOAD:”. Moreover, paragraph
5.4.1.1.1 (f) does not apply.
See examples as follows:
“EMPTY TANK-VEHICLE, LAST LOAD: UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), I, (C/D)” or
“EMPTY TANK-VEHICLE, LAST LOAD: UN 1098 ALLYL ALCOHOL, 6.1 (3), PG I, (C/D)”.
5.4.1.1.6.2.3 When empty means of containment, uncleaned, which contain the residue of dangerous goods of classes
other than Class 7, are returned to the consignor, the transport documents prepared for the full-capacity
carriage of these goods may also be used. In such cases, the indication of the quantity is to be eliminated
(by effacing it, striking it out or any other means) and replaced by the words “EMPTY, UNCLEANED
RETURN”.
5.4.1.1.6.3 (a) If empty tanks, battery- vehicles and MEGCs, uncleaned, are carried to the nearest place where
cleaning or repair can be carried out in accordance with the provisions of 4.3.2.4.3, the
following additional entry shall be made in the transport document: “Carriage in accordance
with 4.3.2.4.3”.
(b) If empty vehicles and containers, uncleaned, are carried to the nearest place where cleaning or
repair can be carried out in accordance with the provisions of 7.5.8.1, the following additional
entry shall be made in the transport document: “Carriage in accordance with 7.5.8.1”.
5.4.1.1.6.4 For the carriage of fixed tanks (tank vehicles), demountable tanks, battery-vehicles, tank-containers and
MEGCs under the conditions of 4.3.2.4.4, the following entry shall be included in the transport
document: “Carriage in accordance with 4.3.2.4.4”.
5.4.1.1.7 Special provisions for carriage in a transport chain including maritime or air carriage
For carriage in accordance with 1.1.4.2.1, a statement shall be included in the transport document, as
follows: “Carriage in accordance with 1.1.4.2.1”.
5.4.1.1.8 and 5.4.1.1.9 (Reserved)
5.4.1.1.10 (Deleted)
– 260 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 261 –
5.4.1.1.11 Special provisions for the carriage of IBCs, tanks, battery-vehicles, portable tanks and MEGCs after
the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection
For carriage in accordance with 4.1.2.2 (b), 4.3.2.3.7 (b), 6.7.2.19.6.1 (b), 6.7.3.15.6.1 (b) or 6.7.4.14.6.1
(b), a statement to this effect shall be included in the transport document, as follows:
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 4.1.2.2 (b)”,
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 4.3.2.3.7 (b)”,
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6.7.2.19.6.1 (b)”,
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6.7.3.15.6.1 (b)”; or
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 6.7.4.14.6.1 (b)” as appropriate.
5.4.1.1.12 (Reserved)
5.4.1.1.13 Special provisions for carriage in multi-compartment tank-vehicles or transport units with more than
one tank
When by derogation from 5.3.2.1.2 a multi-compartment tank-vehicle or a transport unit with more than
one tank is marked in accordance with 5.3.2.1.3, the substances contained in each tank or in each
compartment of a tank shall be specified in the transport document.
5.4.1.1.14 Special provisions for the carriage of substances carried under elevated temperature
If the proper shipping name of a substance which is carried or offered for carriage in a liquid state at a
temperature equal to or exceeding 100 °C, or in a solid state at a temperature equal to or exceeding
240 °C, does not convey the elevated temperature condition (for example, by using the term
“MOLTEN” or “ELEVATED TEMPERATURE” as part of the proper shipping name), the word
“HOT” shall immediately precede the proper shipping name.
5.4.1.1.15 Special provisions for the carriage of stabilized and temperature controled substances
Unless already part of the proper shipping name the word “STABILIZED” shall be added to the proper
shipping name if stabilization is used and the words “TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED” shall be
added to the proper shipping name if stabilization is by temperature control or a combination of chemical
stabilization and temperature control (see 3.1.2.6).
If the words “TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED” are part of the proper shipping name (see also
3.1.2.6), the control and emergency temperatures (see 7.1.7) shall be indicated in the transport
document, as follows:
“Control temperature: ….°C Emergency temperature: …. °C”
5.4.1.1.16 (Deleted)
5.4.1.1.17 Special provisions for the carriage of solids in bulk containers conforming to 6.11.4
When solid substances are carried in bulk containers conforming to 6.11.4, the following statement shall
be shown on the transport document (see NOTE at the beginning of 6.11.4):
“Bulk container BK(x)1 approved by the competent authority of…”
5.4.1.1.18 Special provisions for carriage of environmentally hazardous substances (aquatic environment)
When a substance belonging to one of classes 1 to 9 meets the classification criteria of 2.2.9.1.10, the
transport document shall bear the additional inscription “ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS” or
“MARINE POLLUTANT/ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS”. This additional requirement
does not apply to UN Nos. 3077 and 3082 or for the exceptions listed in 5.2.1.8.1.
1 (x) shall be replaced with “1” or “2” as appropriate.
– 261 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 262 –
The inscription “MARINE POLLUTANT” (according to 5.4.1.4.3 of the IMDG Code) is acceptable
for carriage in a transport chain including maritime carriage.
5.4.1.1.19 Special provisions for carriage of packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned (UN 3509)
For packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned, the proper shipping name specified in 5.4.1.1.1 (b) shall
be complemented with the words “(WITH RESIDUES OF […])” followed by the class(es) and
subsidiary hazard(s) corresponding to the residues, in the class numbering order. Moreover, 5.4.1.1.1
(f) does not apply.
Example: Packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned having contained goods of Class 4.1 packed
together with packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned having contained goods of Class 3 with a Class
6.1 subsidiary hazard should be referred to in the transport document as:
“UN 3509 PACKAGINGS, DISCARDED, EMPTY, UNCLEANED (WITH RESIDUES OF 3, 4.1,
6.1), 9”.
5.4.1.1.20 Special provisions for the carriage of substances classified in accordance with 2.1.2.8
For carriage in accordance with 2.1.2.8, a statement shall be included in the transport document, as
follows “Classified in accordance with 2.1.2.8”.
5.4.1.1.21 Additional information in the case of the application of special provisions
Where, in accordance with a special provision in Chapter 3.3, additional information is necessary, this
additional information shall be included in the transport document.
5.4.1.1.22 (Reserved)
5.4.1.1.23 Special provisions for the carriage of substances carried in molten state
When a substance, which is solid in accordance with the definition in 1.2.1, is offered for carriage in
the molten state, the qualifying word “MOLTEN” shall be added as part of the proper shipping name,
unless it is already part of the proper shipping name (see 3.1.2.5).
5.4.1.1.24 Special provisions for refillable pressure receptacles authorized by the United States of America
Department of Transportation
For carriage in accordance with 1.1.4.7, a statement shall be included in the transport document, as
follows:
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 1.1.4.7.1” or
“CARRIAGE IN ACCORDANCE WITH 1.1.4.7.2”, as appropriate.
5.4.1.2 Additional or special information required for certain classes
5.4.1.2.1 Special provisions for Class 1
(a) The transport document shall indicate, in addition to the requirements in 5.4.1.1.1 (f):
– the total net mass, in kg, of explosive contents2 for each substance or article bearing a
different UN number;
– the total net mass, in kg, of explosive contents2 for all substances and articles covered by
the transport document;
(b) For mixed packing of two different goods, the description of the goods in the transport document
shall include the UN numbers and names printed in capitals in Columns (1) and (2) of Table A
of Chapter 3.2 of both substances or articles. If more than two different goods are contained in
the same package in conformity with the mixed packing provisions given in 4.1.10 special
provisions MP1, MP2 and MP20 to MP24, the transport document shall indicate under the
2 For articles, “explosive contents” means the explosive substance contained in the article.
– 262 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 263 –
description of the goods the UN numbers of all the substances and articles contained in the
package, in the form, “Goods of UN Nos…”;
(c) For the carriage of substances and articles assigned to an n.o.s. entry or the entry “0190
SAMPLES, EXPLOSIVE” or packed conforming to packing instruction P101 of 4.1.4.1, a copy
of the competent authority approval with the conditions of carriage shall be attached to the
transport document. It shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also,
if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German unless
agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide
otherwise;
(d) If packages containing substances and articles of compatibility groups B and D are loaded
together in the same vehicle in accordance with the requirements of 7.5.2.2, a copy of the
competent authority approval of the protective compartment or containment system in
accordance with 7.5.2.2, note a under the table, shall be attached to the transport document. It
shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if that language is not
English, French or German, in English, French or German unless agreements, if any, concluded
between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise;
(e) When explosive substances or articles are carried in packagings conforming to packing
instruction P101, the transport document shall bear the inscription “Packaging approved by the
competent authority of …” (see 4.1.4.1, packing instruction P101);
(f) (Reserved)
(g) When fireworks of UN Nos. 0333, 0334, 0335, 0336 and 0337 are carried, the transport
document shall bear the inscription:
“Classification of fireworks by the competent authority of XX with the firework reference
XX/YYZZZZ”.
The classification approval certificate need not be carried with the consignment, but shall be
made available by the consignor to the carrier or the competent authorities for control purposes.
The classification approval certificate or a copy of it shall be in an official language of the
forwarding country, and also, if that language is not German, English or French, in German,
English or French.
NOTE 1: The commercial or technical name of the goods may be entered additionally to the proper
shipping name in the transport document.
NOTE 2: The classification reference(s) shall consist of the ADR Contracting Party in which the
classification code according to special provision 645 of 3.3.1 was approved, indicated by the
distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic (XX)3, the competent authority
identification (YY) and a unique serial reference (ZZZZ). Examples of such classification references
are:
GB/HSE123456
D/BAM1234.
5.4.1.2.2 Additional provisions for Class 2
(a) For the carriage of mixtures (see 2.2.2.1.1) in tanks (demountable tanks, fixed tanks, portable
tanks, tank-containers or elements of battery-vehicles or of MEGCs), the composition of the
mixture as a percentage of the volume or as a percentage of the mass shall be given. Constituents
below 1 % need not be indicated (see also 3.1.2.8.1.2). The composition of the mixture need not
be given when the technical names authorized by special provisions 581, 582 or 583 are used to
supplement the proper shipping name;
3 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 263 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 264 –
(b) For the carriage of cylinders, tubes, pressure drums, cryogenic receptacles and bundles of
cylinders under the conditions of 4.1.6.10, the following entry shall be included in the transport
document: “Carriage in accordance with 4.1.6.10”.
(c) (Reserved)
(d) In the case of tank-containers or portable tanks carrying refrigerated liquefied gases the
consignor shall enter in the transport document the date at which the actual holding time ends,
in the following format:
“End of holding time: …………… (DD/MM/YYYY)”.
(e) For carriage of UN No. 1012, the transport document shall contain the name of the specific gas
carried (see special provision 398 of Chapter 3.3) in brackets after the proper shipping name.
5.4.1.2.3 Additional provisions for self-reactive substances and polymerizing substances of Class 4.1 and organic
peroxides of Class 5.2
5.4.1.2.3.1 For self-reactive substances or polymerizing substances of Class 4.1 and for organic peroxides of Class
5.2 that require temperature control during carriage (for self-reactive substances see 2.2.41.1.17; for
polymerizing substance see 2.2.41.1.21; for organic peroxides, see 2.2.52.1.15), the control and
emergency temperatures shall be indicated in the transport document, as follows:
“Control temperature: … °C Emergency temperature: … °C”.
5.4.1.2.3.2 When for certain self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 and certain organic peroxides of Class 5.2 the
competent authority has permitted the label conforming to model No.1 to be dispensed with for a
specific packaging (see 5.2.2.1.9), a statement to this effect shall be included in the transport document,
as follows:
“The label conforming to model No. 1 is not required”.
5.4.1.2.3.3 When organic peroxides and self-reactive substances are carried under conditions where approval is
required (for organic peroxides see 2.2.52.1.8, 4.1.7.2.2 and special provision TA2 of 6.8.4; for
self-reactive substances see 2.2.41.1.13 and 4.1.7.2.2, a statement to his effect shall be included in the
transport document, e.g. “Carriage in accordance with 2.2.52.1.8”.
A copy of the competent authority approval with the conditions of carriage shall be attached to the
transport document. It shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if that
language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German unless agreements, if any,
concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.
5.4.1.2.3.4 When a sample of an organic peroxide (see 2.2.52.1.9) or a self-reactive substance (see 2.2.41.1.15) is
carried, a statement to this effect shall be included in the transport document, e.g. “Carriage in
accordance with 2.2.52.1.9”.
5.4.1.2.3.5 When self-reactive substances type G (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II, paragraph 20.4.2 (g))
are carried, the following statement may be given in the transport document: “Not a self-reactive
substance of Class 4.1”.
When organic peroxides type G (see Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part II, paragraph 20.4.3 (g)) are
carried, the following statement may be given in the transport document: “Not a substance of Class
5.2”.
5.4.1.2.4 Additional provisions for Class 6.2
In addition to the information concerning the consignee (see 5.4.1.1.1 (h)), the name and telephone
number of a responsible person shall be indicated.
– 264 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 265 –
5.4.1.2.5 Additional provisions for Class 7
5.4.1.2.5.1 The following information shall be inserted in the transport document for each consignment of Class 7
material, as applicable, in the order given and immediately after the information required under 5.4.1.1.1
(a) to (c) and (k):
(a) The name or symbol of each radionuclide or, for mixtures of radionuclides, an appropriate
general description or a list of the most restrictive nuclides;
(b) A description of the physical and chemical form of the material, or a notation that the material
is special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material. A generic chemical
description is acceptable for chemical form. For radioactive material with a subsidiary hazard,
see sub-paragraph (c) of special provision 172 of Chapter 3.3;
(c) The maximum activity of the radioactive contents during carriage expressed in becquerels (Bq)
with an appropriate SI prefix symbol (see 1.2.2.1). For fissile material, the mass of fissile
material (or mass of each fissile nuclide for mixtures when appropriate) in grams (g), or
appropriate multiples thereof, may be used in place of activity;
(d) The category of the package, overpack or container, as assigned per 5.1.5.3.4, i.e. I-WHITE,
II-YELLOW, III-YELLOW;
(e) The TI as determined per 5.1.5.3.1 and 5.1.5.3.2 (except for category I-WHITE);
(f) For fissile material:
(i) Shipped under one exception of 2.2.7.2.3.5 (a) to (f), reference to that paragraph;
(ii) Shipped under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (c) to (e), the total mass of fissile nuclides;
(iii) Contained in a package for which one of 6.4.11.2 (a) to (c) or 6.4.11.3 is applied, reference
to that paragraph;
(iv) The criticality safety index, where applicable;
(g) The identification mark for each competent authority certificate of approval (special form
radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material, fissile material excepted under
2.2.7.2.3.5 (f), special arrangement, package design, or shipment) applicable to the consignment;
(h) For consignments of more than one package, the information required in 5.4.1.1.1 and in (a) to
(g) above shall be given for each package. For packages in an overpack, container, or vehicle, a
detailed statement of the contents of each package within the overpack, container, or vehicle and,
where appropriate, of each overpack, container, or vehicle shall be included. If packages are to
be removed from the overpack, container, or vehicle at a point of intermediate unloading,
appropriate transport documents shall be made available;
(i) Where a consignment is required to be shipped under exclusive use, the statement
“EXCLUSIVE USE SHIPMENT”; and
(j) For LSA-II and LSA-III substances, SCO-I, SCO-II and SCO-III, the total activity of the
consignment as a multiple of A 2. For radioactive material for which the A2 value is unlimited,
the multiple of A 2 shall be zero.
5.4.1.2.5.2 The consignor shall provide in the transport documents a statement regarding actions, if any, that are
required to be taken by the carrier. The statement shall be in the languages deemed necessary by the
carrier or the authorities concerned, and shall include at least the following information:
(a) Supplementary requirements for loading, stowage, carriage, handling and unloading of the
package, overpack or container including any special stowage provisions for the safe dissipation
of heat (see special provision CV33 (3.2) of 7.5.11), or a statement that no such requirements are
necessary;
(b) Restrictions on the mode of carriage or vehicle and any necessary routeing instructions;
(c) Emergency arrangements appropriate to the consignment.
– 265 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 266 –
5.4.1.2.5.3 In all cases of international carriage of packages requiring competent authority approval of design or
shipment, for which different approval types apply in the different countries concerned by the shipment,
the UN number and proper shipping name required in 5.4.1.1.1 shall be in accordance with the certificate
of the country of origin of design.
5.4.1.2.5.4 The applicable competent authority certificates need not necessarily accompany the consignment. The
consignor shall make them available to the carrier(s) before loading and unloading.
5.4.1.3 (Reserved)
5.4.1.4 Format and language
5.4.1.4.1 The document containing the information in 5.4.1.1 and 5.4.1.2 may be that already required by other
regulations in force for carriage by another mode of carriage. In case of multiple consignees, the name
and address of the consignees and the quantities delivered enabling the nature and quantities carried to
be evaluated at any time, may be entered in other documents which are to be used or in any other
documents made mandatory according to other specific regulations and which shall be on board the
vehicle.
The particulars to be entered in the document shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding
country, and also, if that language is not English, French, or German, in English, French or German,
unless international road carriage tariffs, if any, or agreements concluded between the countries
concerned in the transport operation, provide otherwise.
5.4.1.4.2 If by reason of the size of the load, a consignment cannot be loaded in its entirety on a single transport
unit, at least as many separate documents, or copies of the single document, shall be made out as
transport units loaded. Furthermore, in all cases, separate transport documents shall be made out for
consignments or parts of consignments which may not be loaded together on the same vehicle by reason
of the prohibitions set forth in 7.5.2.
The information relative to the hazards of the goods to be carried (as indicated in 5.4.1.1) may be
incorporated in, or combined with, an existing transport or cargo handling document. The layout of the
information in the document (or the order of transmission of the corresponding data by electronic data
processing (EDP) or electronic data interchange (EDI) techniques) shall be as provided in 5.4.1.1.1.
When an existing transport document or cargo handling document cannot be used for the purposes of
dangerous goods documentation for multimodal transport, the use of documents corresponding to the
example shown in 5.4.5 is considered advisable4.
5.4.1.5 Non-dangerous goods
When goods mentioned by name in Table A of Chapter 3.2, are not subject to ADR because they are
considered as non-dangerous according to Part 2, the consignor may enter in the transport document a
statement to that effect, e.g.: “Not goods of Class …”
NOTE: This provision may be used in particular when the consignor considers that, due to the
chemical nature of the goods (e.g. solutions and mixtures) carried or to the fact that such goods are
deemed dangerous for other regulatory purposes the consignment might be subject to control during
the journey.
4 If used, the relevant recommendations of the UNECE United Nations Centre for Trade Facilitation and Electronic
Business (UN/CEFACT) may be consulted, in particular Recommendation No. 1 (United Nations Layout Key for Trade
Documents) (ECE/TRADE/137, edition 81.3), UN Layout Key for Trade Documents – Guidelines for Applications
(ECE/TRADE/270, edition 2002), Recommendation No. 11 (Documentary Aspects of the International Transport of
Dangerous Goods) (ECE/TRADE/204, edition 96.1 – currently under revision) and Recommendation No. 22 (Layout Key
for Standard Consignment Instructions) (ECE/TRADE/168, edition 1989). Refer also to the UN/CEFACT Summary of
Trade Facilitation Recommendations (ECE/TRADE/346, edition 2006) and the United Nations Trade Data Elements
Directory (UNTDED) (ECE/TRADE/362, edition 2005).
– 266 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 267 –
5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate
If the carriage of dangerous goods in a container precedes a voyage by sea, a “container/vehicle packing
certificate” conforming to section 5.4.2 of the IMDG Code5, 6 shall be provided to the maritime carrier
by those responsible for packing the container.
5 Guidelines for use in practice and in training for loading goods in transport units have also been drawn up by the
International Maritime Organization (IMO), the International Labour Organization (ILO) and the United Nations
Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE) and have been published by IMO (“IMO/ILO/UNECE Code of Practice for
Packing of Cargo Transport Units (CTU Code)”).
6 Section 5.4.2 of the IMDG Code (Amendment 40-20) requires the following:
“5.4.2 Container/vehicle packing certificate
5.4.2.1 When dangerous goods are packed or loaded into any container or vehicle, those responsible for
packing the container or vehicle shall provide a “container/vehicle packing certificate” specifying the
container/vehicle identification number(s) and certifying that the operation has been carried out in accordance
with the following conditions:
.1 The container/vehicle was clean, dry and apparently fit to receive the goods;
.2 Packages which need to be segregated in accordance with applicable segregation requirements have not
been packed together onto or in the container/vehicle [unless approved by the competent authority
concerned in accordance with 7.3.4.1 (of the IMDG Code)];
.3 All packages have been externally inspected for damage, and only sound packages have been loaded;
.4 Drums have been stowed in an upright position, unless otherwise authorized by the competent authority,
and all goods have been properly loaded and, where necessary, adequately braced with securing material
to suit the mode(s) of transport for the intended journey;
.5 Goods loaded in bulk have been evenly distributed within the container/vehicle;
.6 For consignments including goods of class 1 other than division 1.4, the container/vehicle is structurally
serviceable in accordance with 7.1.2 (of the IMDG Code);
.7 The container/vehicle and packages are properly marked, labelled and placarded, as appropriate;
.8 When substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation are used for cooling or conditioning purposes (such as
dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951)), the
container/vehicle is externally marked in accordance with 5.5.3.6 (of the IMDG Code); and
.9 A dangerous goods transport document, as indicated in 5.4.1 (of the IMDG Code), has been received for
each dangerous goods consignment loaded in the container/vehicle.
NOTE: The container/vehicle packing certificate is not required for portable tanks.
5.4.2.2 The information required in the dangerous goods transport document and the container/vehicle packing
certificate may be incorporated into a single document; if not, these documents shall be attached. If the information
is incorporated into a single document, the document shall include a signed declaration such as “It is declared
that the packing of the goods into the container/vehicle has been carried out in accordance with the applicable
provisions”. This declaration shall be dated and the person signing this declaration shall be identified on the
document. Facsimile signatures are acceptable where applicable laws and regulations recognize the legal validity
of facsimile signatures.
5.4.2.3 If the container/vehicle packing certificate is presented to the carrier by means of EDP or EDI
transmission techniques, the signature(s) may be electronic signature(s) or may be replaced by the name(s) (in
capitals) of the person authorized to sign.
5.4.2.4 When the container/vehicle packing certificate is given to a carrier by EDP or EDI techniques and
subsequently the dangerous goods are transferred to a carrier that requires a paper container/vehicle packing
certificate, the carrier shall ensure that the paper document indicates “Original received electronically” and the
name of the signatory shall be shown in capital letters.
– 267 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 268 –
The functions of the transport document required under 5.4.1 and of the “container/vehicle packing
certificate” as provided above may be incorporated into a single document (see for example 5.4.5). If
these functions are incorporated into a single document, the inclusion in the transport document of a
statement that the loading of the container or vehicle has been carried out in accordance with the
applicable modal regulations together with the identification of the person responsible for the
“container/vehicle packing certificate” shall be sufficient.
If the carriage of dangerous goods in a vehicle precedes a voyage by sea, a “container/vehicle packing
certificate” conforming to section 5.4.2 of the IMDG Code5, 6 may also be provided with the transport
document.
5.4.3 Instructions in writing
5.4.3.1 As an aid during an accident emergency situation that may occur or arise during carriage, instructions
in writing in the form specified in 5.4.3.4 shall be carried in the vehicle crew’s cab and shall be readily
available.
5.4.3.2 These instructions shall be provided by the carrier to the vehicle crew in language(s) that each member
can read and understand before the commencement of the journey. The carrier shall ensure that each
member of the vehicle crew concerned understands and is capable of carrying out the instructions
properly.
5.4.3.3 Before the start of the journey, the members of the vehicle crew shall inform themselves of the
dangerous goods loaded and consult the instructions in writing for details on actions to be taken in the
event of an accident or emergency.
5.4.3.4 The instructions in writing shall correspond to the following four page model as regards its form and
contents.
– 268 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 269 –
INSTRUCTIONS IN WRITING ACCORDING TO ADR
Actions in the event of an accident or emergency
In the event of an accident or emergency that may occur or arise during carriage, the members of the vehicle crew shall
take the following actions where safe and practicable to do so:
– Apply the braking system, stop the engine and isolate the battery by activating the master switch where
available;
– Avoid sources of ignition, in particular, do not smoke, use electronic cigarettes or similar devices or switch
on any electrical equipment;
– Inform the appropriate emergency services, giving as much information about the incident or accident and
substances involved as possible;
– Put on the warning vest and place the self-standing warning signs as appropriate;
– Keep the transport documents readily available for responders on arrival;
– Do not walk into or touch spilled substances and avoid inhalation of fumes, smoke, dusts and vapours by
staying up wind;
– Where appropriate and safe to do so, use the fire extinguishers to put out small/initial fires in tyres, brakes
and engine compartments;
– Fires in load compartments shall not be tackled by members of the vehicle crew;
– Where appropriate and safe to do so, use on-board equipment to prevent leakages into the aquatic environment
or the sewage system and to contain spillages;
– Move away from the vicinity of the accident or emergency, advise other persons to move away and follow
the advice of the emergency services;
– Remove any contaminated clothing and used contaminated protective equipment and dispose of it safely.
– 269 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Additional guidance to members of the vehicle crew on the hazard characteristics of
dangerous goods by class and on actions subject to prevailing circumstances
Danger labels and placards Hazard characteristics Additional guidance
(1) (2) (3)
Explosive substances and articles May have a range of properties and effects such as
mass detonation; projection of fragments; intense
fire/heat flux; formation of bright light, loud noise
or smoke.
Sensitive to shocks and/or impacts and/or heat.
Take cover but stay away from windows.
1 1.5 1.6
Explosive substances and articles
Slight risk of explosion and fire. Take cover.
1.4
Flammable gases Risk of fire.
Risk of explosion.
May be under pressure.
Risk of asphyxiation.
May cause burns and/or frostbite.
Containments may explode when heated.
Take cover.
Keep out of low areas.
2.1
Non-flammable, non-toxic gases Risk of asphyxiation.
May be under pressure.
May cause frostbite.
Containments may explode when heated.
Take cover.
Keep out of low areas.
2.2
Toxic gases Risk of intoxication.
May be under pressure.
May cause burns and/or frostbite.
Containments may explode when heated.
Use emergency escape mask.
Take cover.
Keep out of low areas.
2.3
Flammable liquids Risk of fire.
Risk of explosion.
Containments may explode when heated.
Take cover.
Keep out of low areas.
3
Flammable solids, self-reactive
substances, polymerizing substances
and solid desensitized explosives
Risk of fire. Flammable or combustible, may be
ignited by heat, sparks or flames.
May contain self-reactive substances that are
liable to exothermic decomposition in the case of
heat supply, contact with other substances (such as
acids, heavy-metal compounds or amines), friction
or shock. This may result in the evolution of
harmful and flammable gases or vapours or self-
ignition.
Containments may explode when heated.
Risk of explosion of desensitized explosives after
loss of desensitizer.
4.1
Substances liable to spontaneous
combustion Risk of fire by spontaneous combustion if
packages are damaged or contents are spilled.
May react vigorously with water
4.2
Substances which, in contact with
water, emit flammable gases
Risk of fire and explosion in contact with water. Spilled substances should be kept dry by
covering the spillages.
4.3
– 270 –
1
2
1
* *
*
2
11
3
2 2
2
3
4
4
44Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Additional guidance to members of the vehicle crew on the hazard characteristics of
dangerous goods by class and on actions subject to prevailing circumstances
Danger labels and placards Hazard characteristics Additional guidance
(1) (2) (3)
Oxidizing substances
Risk of vigorous reaction, ignition and explosion in
contact with combustible or flammable substances.
Avoid mixing with flammable or combustible
substances (e.g. sawdust).
5.1
Organic peroxides Risk of exothermic decomposition at elevated
temperatures, contact with other substances (such
as acids, heavy-metal compounds or amines),
friction or shock. This may result in the evolution
of harmful and flammable gases or vapours or self-
ignition.
Avoid mixing with flammable or combustible
substances (e.g. sawdust).
5.2
Toxic substances Risk of intoxication by inhalation, skin contact or
ingestion.
Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewerage
system.
Use emergency escape mask.
6.1
Infectious substances Risk of infection.
May cause serious disease in humans or animals.
Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewerage
system.
6.2
Radioactive material
Risk of intake and external radiation. Limit time of exposure.7A 7B
7C 7D
Fissile material
Risk of nuclear chain reaction.
7E
Corrosive substances Risk of burns by corrosion.
May react vigorously with each other, with water
and with other substances.
Spilled substance may evolve corrosive vapours.
Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewerage
system.
8
Miscellaneous dangerous substances
and articles Risk of burns.
Risk of fire.
Risk of explosion.
Risk to the aquatic environment or the sewerage
system.
9 9A
NOTE 1: For dangerous goods with multiple risks and for mixed loads, each applicable entry shall be observed.
NOTE 2: Additional guidance shown in column (3) of the table may be adapted to reflect the classes of dangerous
goods to be carried and their means of transport.
– 271 –
5.2 5.2
6
6
RADIOACTIVE
7
8
9Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Additional guidance to members of the vehicle crew on the hazard characteristics of
dangerous goods, indicated by marks, and on actions subject to prevailing circumstances
Mark Hazard characteristics Additional guidance
(1) (2) (3)
Environmentally hazardous substances
Risk to the aquatic environment or the
sewerage system
Elevated temperature substances
Risk of burns by heat. Avoid contact with hot parts of the transport unit and
the spilled substance.
Equipment for personal and general protection
to carry out general actions and hazard specific emergency actions
to be carried on board the transport unit in accordance with section 8.1.5 of ADR
The following equipment shall be carried on board the transport unit:
– for each vehicle, a wheel chock of a size suited to the maximum mass of the vehicle and to the
diameter of the wheel;
– two self-standing warning signs;
– eye rinsing liquida; and
for each member of the vehicle crew
– a warning vest;
– portable lighting apparatus;
– a pair of protective gloves; and
– eye protection.
Additional equipment required for certain classes:
– an emergency escape mask for each member of the vehicle crew shall be carried on board the
transport unit for danger label numbers 2.3 or 6.1;
– a shovelb;
– a drain sealb;
– a collecting containerb.
a Not required for danger label numbers 1, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3.
b Only required for solids and liquids with danger label numbers 3, 4.1, 4.3, 8 or 9.
– 272 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 273 –
5.4.3.5 Contracting Parties shall provide the UNECE secretariat with the official translation of the instructions
in writing in their national language(s), in accordance with this section. The UNECE secretariat shall
make the national versions of the instructions in writing that it has received available to all Contracting
Parties.
5.4.4 Retention of dangerous goods transport information
5.4.4.1 The consignor and the carrier shall retain a copy of the dangerous goods transport document and
additional information and documentation as specified in ADR, for a minimum period of three months.
5.4.4.2 When the documents are kept electronically or in a computer system, the consignor and the carrier shall
be able to reproduce them in a printed form.
5.4.5 Example of a multimodal dangerous goods form
Example of a form which may be used as a combined dangerous goods declaration and container
packing certificate for multimodal carriage of dangerous goods.
– 273 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
1. Shipper / Consignor /Sender 2. Transport document number
3. 4. Shipper’s reference
Page 1 of Pages
5. Freight Forwarder’s reference
6. Consignee 7. Carrier (to be completed by the carrier)
SHIPPER’S DECLARATION
I hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are fully and accurately described below
by the proper shipping name, and are classified, packaged, marked and labeled /placarded
and are in all respects in proper condition for transport according to the applicable international
and national governmental regulations.
8. This shipment is within the limitations prescribed for: (Delete non-applicable) 9. Additional handling information
PASSENGER AND CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY
CARGO AIRCRAFT
10. Vessel / flight no. and date 11. Port / place of loading
12. Port / place of discharge 13. Destination
14. Shipping marks * Number and kind of packages; description of goods Gross mass (kg) Net mass Cube (m³)
15. Container identification No./ 16. Seal number (s) 17. Container/vehicle size & type 18. Tare (kg) 19. Total gross mass
vehicle registration No. (including tare) (kg)
CONTAINER/VEHICLE PACKING CERTIFICATE 21.RECEIVING ORGANISATION RECEIPT
I hereby declare that the goods described above have been Received the above number of packages/containers/trailers in apparent good order and condition
packed/loaded into the container/vehicle identified above in unless stated hereon: RECEIVING ORGANISATION REMARKS:
accordance with the applicable provisions **
MUST BE COMPLETED AND SIGNED FOR ALL
CONTAINER/VEHICLE LOADS BY PERSON
RESPONSIBLE FOR PACKING/LOADING
20. Name of company Haulier’s name 22. Name of company (OF SHIPPER PREPARING THIS NOTE)
Name / Status of declarant Vehicle reg. no. Name / Status of declarant
Place and date Signature and date Place and date
Signature of declarant DRIVER’S SIGNATURE Signature of declarant
** See 5.4.2.
* FOR DANGEROUS GOODS: you must specify: UN no., proper shipping name, hazard class, packing group (where assigned)
and any other element of information required under applicable national and international regulations
MULTIMODAL DANGEROUS GOODS FORM BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACKCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
MULTIMODAL DANGEROUS GOODS FORM Continuation Sheet
1. Shipper / Consignor /Sender 2. Transport document number
3. 4. Shipper’s reference
Page 1 of Pages
5. Freight Forwarder’s reference
14. Shipping marks * Number and kind of packages; description of goods Gross mass (kg) Net mass Cube (m³)
* FOR DANGEROUS GOODS: you must specify: UN no., proper shipping name, hazard class, packing group (where assigned)
and any other element of information required under applicable national and international regulations
BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACK HATCHINGS BLACKCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 277 –
CHAPTER 5.5
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5.5.1 (Deleted)
5.5.2 Special provisions applicable to fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359)
5.5.2.1 General
5.5.2.1.1 Fumigated cargo transport units (UN 3359) containing no other dangerous goods are not subject to any
provisions of ADR other than those of this section.
5.5.2.1.2 When the fumigated cargo transport unit is loaded with dangerous goods in addition to the fumigant,
any provision of ADR relevant to these goods (including placarding, marking and documentation)
applies in addition to the provisions of this section.
5.5.2.1.3 Only cargo transport units that can be closed in such a way that the escape of gas is reduced to a
minimum shall be used for the carriage of cargo under fumigation.
5.5.2.2 Training
Persons engaged in the handling of fumigated cargo transport units shall be trained commensurate with
their responsibilities.
5.5.2.3 Marking and placarding
5.5.2.3.1 A fumigated cargo transport unit shall be marked with a warning mark, as specified in 5.5.2.3.2, affixed
at each access point in a location where it will be easily seen by persons opening or entering the cargo
transport unit. This mark shall remain on the cargo transport unit until the following provisions are met:
(a) The fumigated cargo transport unit has been ventilated to remove harmful concentrations of
fumigant gas; and
(b) The fumigated goods or materials have been unloaded.
5.5.2.3.2 The fumigation warning mark shall be as shown in Figure 5.5.2.3.2.
Figure 5.5.2.3.2
Fumigation warning mark
The mark shall be a rectangle. The minimum dimensions shall be 400 mm wide × 300 mm high and the
minimum width of the outer line shall be 2 mm. The mark shall be in black print on a white background
– 277 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 278 –
with lettering not less than 25 mm high. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in
approximate proportion to those shown.
5.5.2.3.3 If the fumigated cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated either by opening the doors of the
unit or by mechanical ventilation after fumigation, the date of ventilation shall be marked on the
fumigation warning mark.
5.5.2.3.4 When the fumigated cargo transport unit has been ventilated and unloaded, the fumigation warning
mark shall be removed.
5.5.2.3.5 Placards conforming to model No. 9 (see 5.2.2.2.2) shall not be affixed to a fumigated cargo transport
unit except as required for other Class 9 substances or articles packed therein.
5.5.2.4 Documentation
5.5.2.4.1 Documents associated with the carriage of cargo transport units that have been fumigated and have not
been completely ventilated before carriage shall include the following information:
(a) “UN 3359, fumigated cargo transport unit, 9”, or “UN 3359, fumigated cargo transport unit,
Class 9”;
(b) The date and time of fumigation; and
(c) The type and amount of the fumigant used.
These particulars shall be drafted in an official language of the forwarding country and also, if the
language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German, unless agreements, if any,
concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.
5.5.2.4.2 The documents may be in any form, provided they contain the information required in 5.5.2.4.1. This
information shall be easy to identify, legible and durable.
5.5.2.4.3 Instructions for disposal of any residual fumigant including fumigation devices (if used) shall be
provided.
5.5.2.4.4 A document is not required when the fumigated cargo transport unit has been completely ventilated and
the date of ventilation has been marked on the warning mark (see 5.5.2.3.3 and 5.5.2.3.4).
5.5.3 Special provisions applicable to the carriage of dry ice (UN 1845) and to packages and vehicles
and containers containing substances presenting a risk of asphyxiation when used for cooling or
conditioning purposes (such as dry ice (UN 1845) or nitrogen, refrigerated liquid (UN 1977) or
argon, refrigerated liquid (UN 1951) or nitrogen)
NOTE: In the context of this section the term “conditioning” may be used in a broader scope and
includes protection.
5.5.3.1 Scope
5.5.3.1.1 This section is not applicable to substances which may be used for cooling or conditioning purposes
when carried as a consignment of dangerous goods, except for the carriage of dry ice (UN No. 1845).
When they are carried as a consignment, these substances shall be carried under the relevant entry of
Table A of Chapter 3.2 in accordance with the associated conditions of carriage.
For UN No. 1845, the conditions of carriage specified in this section, except 5.5.3.3.1, apply for all
kinds of carriage, as a coolant, conditioner, or as a consignment. For the carriage of UN No. 1845, no
other provisions of ADR apply.
5.5.3.1.2 This section is not applicable to gases in cooling cycles.
5.5.3.1.3 Dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning tanks or MEGCs during carriage are not subject to
this section.
5.5.3.1.4 Vehicles and containers containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes include
vehicles and containers containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes inside
– 278 –
*Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 279 –
packages as well as vehicles and containers with unpackaged substances used for cooling or
conditioning purposes.
5.5.3.1.5 Sub-sections 5.5.3.6 and 5.5.3.7 only apply when there is an actual risk of asphyxiation in the vehicle
or container. It is for the participants concerned to assess this risk, taking into consideration the hazards
presented by the substances being used for cooling or conditioning, the amount of substance to be
carried, the duration of the journey, the types of containment to be used and the gas concentration limits
given in the note to 5.5.3.3.3.
5.5.3.2 General
5.5.3.2.1 Vehicles and containers in which dry ice (UN 1845) is carried or containing substances used for cooling
or conditioning purposes (other than fumigation) during carriage are not subject to any provisions of
ADR other than those of this section.
5.5.3.2.2 When dangerous goods are loaded in vehicles or containers containing substances used for cooling or
conditioning purposes any provisions of ADR relevant to these dangerous goods apply in addition to
the provisions of this section.
5.5.3.2.3 (Reserved)
5.5.3.2.4 Persons engaged in the handling or carriage of vehicles and containers in which dry ice (UN 1845) is
carried or containing substances used for cooling or conditioning purposes shall be trained
commensurate with their responsibilities.
5.5.3.3 Packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) or a coolant or conditioner
5.5.3.3.1 Packaged dangerous goods requiring cooling or conditioning assigned to packing instructions P203,
P620, P650, P800, P901 or P904 of 4.1.4.1 shall meet the appropriate requirements of that packing
instruction.
5.5.3.3.2 For packaged dangerous goods requiring cooling or conditioning assigned to other packing instructions,
the packages shall be capable of withstanding very low temperatures and shall not be affected or
significantly weakened by the coolant or conditioner. Packages shall be designed and constructed to
permit the release of gas to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture the packaging. The
dangerous goods shall be packed in such a way as to prevent movement after the dissipation of any
coolant or conditioner.
5.5.3.3.3 Packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) or a coolant or conditioner shall be carried in well ventilated
vehicles and containers. Marking according to 5.5.3.6 is not required in this case.
Ventilation is not required, and marking according to 5.5.3.6 is required, if:
– gas exchange between the load compartment and the driver’s cab is prevented; or
– the load compartment is insulated, refrigerated or mechanically refrigerated equipment, for
example as defined in the Agreement on the International Carriage of Perishable Foodstuffs and
on the Special Equipment to be Used for such Carriage (ATP) and separated from the driver’s
cab.
NOTE: In this context “well ventilated” means there is an atmosphere where the carbon dioxide
concentration is below 0.5 % by volume and the oxygen concentration is above 19.5 % by volume.
5.5.3.4 Marking of packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) or a coolant or conditioner
5.5.3.4.1 Packages containing dry ice (UN 1845) as a consignment shall be marked “CARBON DIOXIDE,
SOLID” or “DRY ICE”; packages containing dangerous goods used for cooling or conditioning shall
be marked with the name indicated in Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 of these dangerous goods
followed by the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” as appropriate in an official
language of the country of origin and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English,
French or German, unless agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport
operation provide otherwise.
5.5.3.4.2 The marks shall be durable, legible and placed in such a location and of such a size relative to the
package as to be readily visible.
– 279 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
5.5.3.5 Vehicles and containers containing unpackaged dry ice
5.5.3.5.1 If dry ice in unpackaged form is used, it shall not come into direct contact with the metal structure of a
vehicle or container to avoid embrittlement of the metal. Measures shall be taken to provide adequate
insulation between the dry ice and the vehicle or container by providing a minimum of 30 mm
separation (e.g. by using suitable low heat conducting materials such as timber planks, pallets etc).
5.5.3.5.2 Where dry ice is placed around packages, measures shall be taken to ensure that packages remain in the
original position during carriage after the dry ice has dissipated.
5.5.3.6 Marking of vehicles and containers
5.5.3.6.1 Vehicles and containers containing dry ice (UN 1845) or dangerous goods used for cooling or
conditioning purposes that are not well ventilated shall be marked with a warning mark, as specified in
5.5.3.6.2, affixed at each access point in a location where it will be easily seen by persons opening or
entering the vehicle or container. This mark shall remain on the vehicle or container until the following
provisions are met:
(a) The vehicle or container has been well ventilated to remove harmful concentrations of dry ice
(UN 1845) or coolant or conditioner; and
(b) The dry ice (UN 1845) or cooled or conditioned goods have been unloaded.
As long as the vehicle or container is marked, the necessary precautions have to be taken before entering
it. The necessity of ventilating through the cargo doors or other means (e.g. forced ventilation) has to
be evaluated and included in training of the involved persons.
5.5.3.6.2 The warning mark shall be as shown in Figure 5.5.3.6.2.
Figure 5.5.3.6.2
Asphyxiation warning mark for vehicles and containers
Insert the name indicated in Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 or the name of the asphyxiant
gas used as the coolant/conditioner. The lettering shall be in capitals, all be on one line and shall be at
least 25 mm high. If the length of the proper shipping name is too long to fit in the space provided, the
lettering may be reduced to the maximum size possible to fit. For example: “CARBON DIOXIDE,
SOLID”. Additional information such as “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” may be added.
– 280 –
*
Minimum dimension 250 mm
Minimum dimension 150 mmCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 281 –
The mark shall be a rectangle. The minimum dimensions shall be 150 mm wide × 250 mm high. The
word “WARNING” shall be in red or white and be at least 25 mm high. Where dimensions are not
specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to those shown.
The word “WARNING” and the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER”, as appropriate,
shall be in an official language of the country of origin and also, if that language is not English, French
or German, in English, French or German, unless agreements concluded between the countries
concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.
5.5.3.7 Documentation
5.5.3.7.1 Documents (such as a bill of lading, cargo manifest or CMR/CIM consignment note) associated with
the carriage of vehicles or containers containing or having contained dry ice (UN 1845) or substances
used for cooling or conditioning purposes and have not been completely ventilated before carriage shall
include the following information:
(a) The UN number preceded by the letters “UN”; and
(b) The name indicated in Column (2) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 followed, where appropriate, by
the words “AS COOLANT” or “AS CONDITIONER” in an official language of the country of
origin and also, if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German,
unless agreements, if any, concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation
provide otherwise.
For example: UN 1845, CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID, AS COOLANT.
5.5.3.7.2 The transport document may be in any form, provided it contains the information required in
5.5.3.7.1. This information shall be easy to identify, legible and durable.
5.5.4 Dangerous goods contained in equipment in use or intended for use during carriage, attached to
or placed in packages, overpacks, containers or load compartments
5.5.4.1 Dangerous goods (e.g. lithium batteries, fuel cell cartridges) contained in equipment such as data
loggers and cargo tracking devices, attached to or placed in packages, overpacks, containers or load
compartments are not subject to any provisions of ADR other than the following:
(a) the equipment shall be in use or intended for use during carriage;
(b) the contained dangerous goods (e.g. lithium batteries, fuel cell cartridges) shall meet the
applicable construction and test requirements specified in ADR; and
(c) the equipment shall be capable of withstanding the shocks and loadings normally encountered
during carriage.
5.5.4.2 When such equipment containing dangerous goods is carried as a consignment, the relevant entry of
Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be used and all applicable provisions of ADR shall apply.
– 281 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
PART 6
Requirements for the construction
and testing of packagings,
intermediate bulk containers (IBCs),
large packagings, tanks and bulk containersCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 285 –
CHAPTER 6.1
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION
AND TESTING OF PACKAGINGS
6.1.1 General
6.1.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter do not apply to:
(a) Packages containing radioactive material of Class 7, unless otherwise provided (see 4.1.9);
(b) Packages containing infectious substances of Class 6.2, unless otherwise provided (see Note
under the heading of Chapter 6.3 and packing instructions P621 and P622 of 4.1.4.1);
(c) Pressure receptacles containing gases of Class 2;
(d) Packages whose net mass exceeds 400 kg;
(e) Packagings for liquids, other than combination packagings, with a capacity exceeding 450 litres.
6.1.1.2 The requirements for packagings in 6.1.4 are based on packagings currently used. In order to take into
account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of packagings having
specifications different from those in 6.1.4, provided that they are equally effective, acceptable to the
competent authority and able to successfully fulfil the requirements described in 6.1.1.3 and 6.1.5.
Methods of testing other than those described in this Chapter are acceptable, provided they are
equivalent, and are recognized by the competent authority.
6.1.1.3 Every packaging intended to contain liquids shall successfully undergo a suitable leakproofness test.
This test is part of a quality assurance programme as stipulated in 6.1.1.4 which shows the capability of
meeting the appropriate test level indicated in 6.1.5.4.3:
(a) Before it is first used for carriage;
(b) After remanufacturing or reconditioning, before it is re-used for carriage;
For this test, packagings need not have their own closures fitted.
The inner receptacle of composite packagings may be tested without the outer packaging provided the
test results are not affected.
This test is not necessary for:
– Inner packagings of combination packagings;
– Inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the
symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii);
– Light gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii).
6.1.1.4 Packagings shall be manufactured, reconditioned and tested under a quality assurance programme which
satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each packaging meets the requirements of this
Chapter.
NOTE: ISO 16106:2020 “Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings,
intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001”
provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed.
6.1.1.5 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding
procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required
gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for carriage are capable
of passing the applicable performance tests of this Chapter.
– 285 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 286 –
6.1.2 Code for designating types of packagings
6.1.2.1 The code consists of:
(a) An Arabic numeral indicating the kind of packaging, e.g. drum, jerrican, etc., followed by;
(b) A capital letter(s) in Latin characters indicating the nature of the material, e.g. steel, wood, etc.,
followed where necessary by;
(c) An Arabic numeral indicating the category of packaging within the kind to which the packaging
belongs.
6.1.2.2 In the case of composite packagings, two capital letters in Latin characters are used in sequence in the
second position of the code. The first indicates the material of the inner receptacle and the second that
of the outer packaging.
6.1.2.3 In the case of combination packagings only the code number for the outer packaging is used.
6.1.2.4 The letters “T”, “V” or “W” may follow the packaging code. The letter “T” signifies a salvage packaging
conforming to the requirements of 6.1.5.1.11. The letter “V” signifies a special packaging conforming
to the requirements of 6.1.5.1.7. The letter “W” signifies that the packaging, although of the same type
indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different to that in 6.1.4 and is considered
equivalent under the requirements of 6.1.1.2.
6.1.2.5 The following numerals shall be used for the kinds of packaging:
l. Drum
2. (Reserved)
3. Jerrican
4. Box
5. Bag
6. Composite packaging
7. (Reserved)
0. Light gauge metal packagings
6.1.2.6 The following capital letters shall be used for the types of material:
A. Steel (all types and surface treatments)
B. Aluminium
C. Natural wood
D. Plywood
F. Reconstituted wood
G. Fibreboard
H. Plastics material
L. Textile
M. Paper, multiwall
N. Metal (other than steel or aluminium)
P. Glass, porcelain or stoneware
NOTE: Plastics material is taken to include other polymeric materials such as rubber.
6.1.2.7 The following table indicates the codes to be used for designating types of packagings depending on the
kind of packagings, the material used for their construction and their category; it also refers to the sub-
sections to be consulted for the appropriate requirements:
– 286 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 287 –
Kind Material Category Code Sub-section
1. Drums A. Steel non-removable head 1A1 6.1.4.1
removable head 1A2
B. Aluminium non-removable head 1B1 6.1.4.2
removable head 1B2
D. Plywood 1D 6.1.4.5
G. Fibre 1G 6.1.4.7
H. Plastics non-removable head 1H1 6.1.4.8
removable head 1H2
N. Metal, other than steel or
aluminium
non-removable head 1N1 6.1.4.3
removable head 1N2
2. (Reserved)
3. Jerricans A. Steel non-removable head 3A1 6.1.4.4
removable head 3A2
B. Aluminium non-removable head 3B1 6.1.4.4
removable head 3B2
H. Plastics non-removable head 3H1 6.1.4.8
removable head 3H2
4. Boxes A. Steel 4A 6.1.4.14
B. Aluminium 4B 6.1.4.14
C. Natural wood ordinary 4C1 6.1.4.9
with sift-proof walls 4C2
D. Plywood 4D 6.1.4.10
F. Reconstituted wood 4F 6.1.4.11
G. Fibreboard 4G 6.1.4.12
H. Plastics expanded 4H1 6.1.4.13
solid 4H2
N. Metal, other than steel or
aluminium
4N 6.1.4.14
5. Bags H. Woven plastics without inner liner or coating 5H1
6.1.4.16sift-proof 5H2
water resistant 5H3
H. Plastics film 5H4 6.1.4.17
L. Textile without inner liner or coating 5L1
6.1.4.15sift-proof 5L2
water resistant 5L3
M. Paper multiwall 5M1 6.1.4.18
multiwall, water resistant 5M2
– 287 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 288 –
Kind Material Category Code Sub-section
6. Composite
packagings
H. Plastics receptacle with outer steel drum 6HA1
6.1.4.19
with outer steel crate or box 6HA2
with outer aluminium drum 6HB1
with outer aluminium crate or box 6HB2
with outer wooden box 6HC
with outer plywood drum 6HD1
with outer plywood box 6HD2
with outer fibre drum 6HG1
with outer fibreboard box 6HG2
with outer plastics drum 6HH1
with outer solid plastics box 6HH2
P. Glass, porcelain or
stoneware receptacle
with outer steel drum 6PA1
6.1.4.20
with outer steel crate or box 6PA2
with outer aluminium drum 6PB1
with outer aluminium crate or box 6PB2
with outer wooden box 6PC
with outer plywood drum 6PD1
with outer wickerwork hamper 6PD2
with outer fibre drum 6PG1
with outer fibreboard box 6PG2
with outer expanded plastics
packaging
6PH1
with outer solid plastics
packaging
6PH2
7. (Reserved)
0. Light gauge metal
packagings
A. Steel non-removable head 0A1 6.1.4.22
removable head 0A2
6.1.3 Marking
NOTE 1: The marks indicate that the packaging which bears them correspond to a successfully tested
design type and that it complies with the requirements of this Chapter which are related to the
manufacture, but not to the use, of the packaging. In itself, therefore, the mark does not necessarily
confirm that the packaging may be used for any substance: generally the type of packaging (e.g. steel
drum), its maximum capacity and/or mass, and any special requirements are specified for each
substance in Table A of Chapter 3.2.
NOTE 2: The marks are intended to be of assistance to packaging manufacturers, reconditioners,
packaging users, carriers and regulatory authorities. In relation to the use of a new packaging, the
original marks are a means for its manufacturer(s) to identify the type and to indicate those performance
test regulations that have been met.
NOTE 3: The marks do not always provide full details of the test levels, etc., and these may need to
be taken further into account, e.g. by reference to a test certificate, to test reports or to a register of
successfully tested packagings. For example, a packaging having an X or Y mark may be used for
substances to which a packing group having a lesser degree of danger has been assigned with the
relevant maximum permissible value of the relative density1 determined by taking into account the factor
1.5 or 2.25 indicated in the packaging test requirements in 6.1.5 as appropriate, i.e. packing group I
packaging tested for products of relative density 1.2 could be used as a packing group II packaging for
products of relative density 1.8 or a packing group III packaging for products of relative density 2.7,
provided of course that all the performance criteria can still be met with the higher relative density
product.
1 Relative density (d) is considered to be synonymous with Specific Gravity (SG) and is used throughout this text.
– 288 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 289 –
6.1.3.1 Each packaging intended for use according to the ADR shall bear marks which are durable, legible and
placed in a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible. For packages
with a gross mass of more than 30 kg, the marks or a duplicate thereof shall appear on the top or on a
side of the packaging. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packagings
of 30 l capacity or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and
except for packagings of 5 l capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall be of an
appropriate size.
The marks shall show:
(a) (i) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a
flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant
requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11. This symbol shall not be used
for packagings which comply with the simplified conditions of 6.1.1.3, 6.1.5.3.1 (e),
6.1.5.3.5 (c), 6.1.5.4, 6.1.5.5.1 and 6.1.5.6 (see also (ii) below). For embossed metal
packagings, the capital letters “UN” may be applied instead of the symbol; or
(ii) The symbol “RID/ADR” for composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware) and
light gauge metal packagings conforming to simplified conditions (see 6.1.1.3, 6.1.5.3.1
(e), 6.1.5.3.5 (c), 6.1.5.4, 6.1.5.5.1 and 6.1.5.6);
NOTE: Packagings bearing this symbol are approved for rail, road and inland
waterways transport operations which are subject to the provisions of RID, ADR and
ADN respectively. They are not necessarily accepted for carriage by other modes of
transport or for transport operations by road, rail or inland waterways which are
governed by other regulations.
(b) The code designating the type of packaging according to 6.1.2;
(c) A code in two parts:
(i) a letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been successfully
tested:
X for packing groups I, II and III;
Y for packing groups II and III;
Z for packing group III only;
(ii) the relative density, rounded off to the first decimal, for which the design type has been
tested for packagings without inner packagings intended to contain liquids; this may be
omitted when the relative density does not exceed 1.2. For packagings intended to contain
solids or inner packagings, the maximum gross mass in kilograms.
For light-gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a)
(ii) intended to contain liquids having a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm²/s, the maximum
gross mass in kg;
(d) Either the letter “S” denoting that the packaging is intended for the carriage of solids or inner
packagings or, for packagings (other than combination packagings) intended to contain liquids,
the hydraulic test pressure which the packaging was shown to withstand in kPa rounded down
to the nearest 10 kPa.
For light-gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol “RID/ADR, according to 6.1.3.1(a)
(ii) intended to contain liquids having a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm²/s, the letter “S”;
– 289 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 290 –
(e) The last two digits of the year during which the packaging was manufactured. Packagings of
types 1H and 3H shall also be appropriately marked with the month of manufacture; this may be
marked on the packaging in a different place from the remainder of the marks. An appropriate
method is:
* The last two digits of the year of manufacture may be displayed at that place. In such a
case and when the clock is placed adjacent to the UN design type mark, the indication of the
year in the mark may be waived. However, when the clock is not placed adjacent to the UN
design type mark, the two digits of the year in the mark and in the clock shall be identical.
NOTE: Other methods that provide the minimum required information in a durable, visible and
legible form are also acceptable.
(f) The State authorizing the allocation of the mark, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on
vehicles in international road traffic2;
(g) The name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent
authority.
6.1.3.2 In addition to the durable marks prescribed in 6.1.3.1, every new metal drum of a capacity greater than
100 litres shall bear the marks described in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) on the bottom, with an indication of the
nominal thickness of at least the metal used in the body (in mm, to 0.1 mm), in permanent form (e.g.
embossed). When the nominal thickness of either head of a metal drum is thinner than that of the body,
the nominal thickness of the top head, body, and bottom head shall be marked on the bottom in
permanent form (e.g. embossed), for example “1.0-1.2-1.0” or “0.9-1.0-1.0”. Nominal thickness of metal
shall be determined according to the appropriate ISO standard, for example ISO 3574:1999 for steel.
The marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) shall not be applied in a permanent form except as provided
in 6.1.3.5.
6.1.3.3 Every packaging other than those referred to in 6.1.3.2 liable to undergo a reconditioning process shall
bear the marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form. Marks are permanent if they are able
to withstand the reconditioning process (e.g. embossed). For packagings other than metal drums of a
capacity greater than 100 litres, these permanent marks may replace the corresponding durable marks
prescribed in 6.1.3.1.
6.1.3.4 For remanufactured metal drums, if there is no change to the packaging type and no replacement or
removal of integral structural components, the required marks need not be permanent. Every other
remanufactured metal drum shall bear the marks in 6.1.3.1 (a) to (e) in a permanent form
(e.g. embossed) on the top head or side.
6.1.3.5 Metal drums made from materials (e.g. stainless steel) designed to be reused repeatedly may bear the
marks indicated in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) in a permanent form (e.g. embossed).
6.1.3.6 The marks in accordance with 6.1.3.1 are valid for only one design type or series of design types.
Different surface treatments may fall within the same design type.
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 290 –
12
6
39
1
2
4
5
8
10
11
7
*Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 291 –
A “series of design types” means packagings of the same structural design, wall thickness, material and
cross-section, which differ only in their lesser design heights from the design type approved.
The closures of receptacles shall be identifiable as those referred to in the test report.
6.1.3.7 Marks shall be applied in the sequence of the sub-paragraphs in 6.1.3.1; each mark required in these
sub-paragraphs and when appropriate sub-paragraphs (h) to (j) of 6.1.3.8 shall be clearly separated, e.g.
by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. For examples, see 6.1.3.11.
Any additional marks authorized by a competent authority shall still enable the other marks required in
6.1.3.1 to be correctly identified.
6.1.3.8 After reconditioning a packaging, the reconditioner shall apply to it a durable marking showing, in
sequence, durable marks showing:
(h) The State in which the reconditioning was carried out, indicated by the distinguishing sign used
on vehicles in international road traffic2;
(i) The name of the reconditioner or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent
authority;
(j) The year of reconditioning; the letter “R”; and, for every packaging successfully passing the
leakproofness test in 6.1.1.3, the additional letter “L”.
6.1.3.9 When, after reconditioning, the marks required by 6.1.3.1 (a) to (d) no longer appear on the top head or
the side of a metal drum, the reconditioner also shall apply them in a durable form followed by
6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j). These marks shall not identify a greater performance capability than that for
which the original design type had been tested and marked.
6.1.3.10 Packagings manufactured with recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1 shall be marked “REC”.
This mark shall be placed near the marks prescribed in 6.1.3.1.
6.1.3.11 Examples for marking NEW packagings
4G/Y145/S/02
NL/VL823
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e) as in
6.1.3.1 (f) and (g) For a new fibreboard box
1A1/Y1.4/150/98
NL/VL824
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a new steel drum to
contain liquids
1A2/Y150/S/01
NL/VL825
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a new steel drum to
contain solids, or inner
packagings
4HW/Y136/S/98
NL/VL826
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a new plastics box of
equivalent specification
1A2/Y/100/01
USA/MM5
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a remanufactured steel
drum to contain liquids
RID/ADR/0A1/Y100/89
NL/VL123
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a new light gauge metal
packaging, non-removable
head
RID/ADR/0A2/Y20/S/04
NL/VL124
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
For a new light gauge metal
packaging, removable head,
intended to contain solids, or
liquids with a viscosity at
23 °C exceeding 200 mm²/s.
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 291 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 292 –
6.1.3.12 Examples for marking RECONDITIONED packagings
1A1/Y1.4/150/97
NL/RB/01 RL
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j)
1A2/Y150/S/99
USA/RB/00 R
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.8 (h), (i) and (j)
6.1.3.13 Example for marking SALVAGE packagings
1A2T/Y300/S/01
USA/abc
as in 6.1.3.1 (a) (i), (b), (c), (d) and (e)
as in 6.1.3.1 (f) and (g)
NOTE: The marking, for which examples are given in 6.1.3.11, 6.1.3.12 and 6.1.3.13 may be applied
in a single line or in multiple lines provided the correct sequence is respected.
6.1.3.14 Where a packaging conforms to one or more than one tested packaging design type, including one or
more than one tested IBC or large packaging design type, the packaging may bear more than one mark
to indicate the relevant performance test requirements that have been met. Where more than one mark
appears on a packaging, the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall
appear in its entirety.
6.1.3.15 Certification
By affixing marks in accordance with 6.1.3.1, it is certified that mass-produced packagings correspond
to the approved design type and that the requirements referred to in the approval have been met.
6.1.4 Requirements for packagings
6.1.4.0 General requirements
Any permeation of the substance contained in the packaging shall not constitute a danger under normal
conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.1 Steel drums
1A1 non-removable head
1A2 removable head
6.1.4.1.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel sheet of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation
to the capacity of the drum and to its intended use.
NOTE: In the case of carbon steel drums, “suitable” steels are identified in ISO 3573:1999 “Hot rolled
carbon steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities” and ISO 3574:1999 “Cold-reduced carbon
steel sheet of commercial and drawing qualities”. For carbon steel drums below 100 litres “suitable”
steels in addition to the above standards are also identified in ISO 11949:1995 “Cold-reduced
electrolytic tinplate”, ISO 11950:1995 “Cold-reduced electrolytic chromium/chromium oxide-coated
steel” and ISO 11951:1995 “Cold-reduced blackplate in coil form for the production of tinplate or
electrolytic chromium/chromium oxide-coated steel”.
6.1.4.1.2 Body seams shall be welded on drums intended to contain more than 40 litres of liquid. Body seams
shall be mechanically seamed or welded on drums intended to contain solids or 40 litres or less of
liquids.
6.1.4.1.3 Chimes shall be mechanically seamed or welded. Separate reinforcing rings may be applied.
6.1.4.1.4 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 litres shall, in general, have at least two expanded
rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops
they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be
spot welded.
– 292 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 293 –
6.1.4.1.5 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (1A1) drums
shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable
head type (1A2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and
applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Closure flanges
may be mechanically seamed or welded in place. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with
closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.1.6 Closure devices for removable head (1A2) drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain
secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing
elements shall be used with all removable heads.
6.1.4.1.7 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the
contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings
or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.1.8 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres.
6.1.4.1.9 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.2 Aluminium drums
1B1 non-removable head
1B2 removable head
6.1.4.2.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of aluminium at least 99 % pure or of an aluminium base alloy.
Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and
to its intended use.
6.1.4.2.2 All seams shall be welded. Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of separate
reinforcing rings.
6.1.4.2.3 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 litres shall, in general, have at least two expanded
rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops
they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be
spot welded.
6.1.4.2.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (1B1) drums
shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable
head type (1B2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and
applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Closure flanges
shall be welded in place so that the weld provides a leakproof seam. Gaskets or other sealing elements
shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.2.5 Closure devices for removable head (1B2) drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain
secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing
elements shall be used with all removable heads.
6.1.4.2.6 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the
contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings
or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.2.7 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres.
6.1.4.2.8 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.3 Drums of metal other than aluminium or steel
1N1 non-removable head
1N2 removable head
6.1.4.3.1 The body and heads shall be constructed of a metal or of a metal alloy other than steel or aluminium.
Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of the drum and
to its intended use.
– 293 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 294 –
6.1.4.3.2 Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of separate reinforcing rings. All seams, if
any, shall be joined (welded, solded, etc.) in accordance with the technical state of the art for the used
metal or metal alloy.
6.1.4.3.3 The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 litres shall, in general, have at least two expanded
rolling hoops or, alternatively, at least two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops
they shall be fitted tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops shall not be
spot welded.
6.1.4.3.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (1N1) drums
shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the removable
head type (1N2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums shall be so designed and
applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Closure flanges
shall be joined in place (welded, solded, etc.) in accordance with the technical state of the art for the
used metal or metal alloy so that the seam join is leakproof. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be
used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.3.5 Closure devices for removable head (1N2) drums shall be so designed and applied that they will remain
secure and drums will remain leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing
elements shall be used with all removable heads.
6.1.4.3.6 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the
contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings
or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.3.7 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres.
6.1.4.3.8 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.4 Steel or aluminium jerricans
3A1 steel, non-removable head
3A2 steel, removable head
3B1 aluminium, non-removable head
3B2 aluminium, removable head
6.1.4.4.1 Body and heads shall be constructed of steel sheet, of aluminium at least 99 % pure or of an aluminium
base alloy. Material shall be of a suitable type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of
the jerrican and to its intended use.
6.1.4.4.2 Chimes of steel jerricans shall be mechanically seamed or welded. Body seams of steel jerricans
intended to contain more than 40 litres of liquid shall be welded. Body seams of steel jerricans intended
to contain 40 litres or less shall be mechanically seamed or welded. For aluminium jerricans, all seams
shall be welded. Chime seams, if any, shall be reinforced by the application of a separate reinforcing
ring.
6.1.4.4.3 Openings in non-removable head jerricans (3A1 and 3B1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Jerricans
with larger openings are considered to be of the removable head type (3A2 and 3B2). Closures shall be
so designed that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or
other sealing elements shall be used with closures, unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.4.4 If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not in themselves compatible with the
contents to be carried, suitable internal protective coatings or treatments shall be applied. These coatings
or treatments shall retain their protective properties under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.4.5 Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60 litres.
6.1.4.4.6 Maximum net mass: 120 kg.
– 294 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 295 –
6.1.4.5 Plywood drums
1D
6.1.4.5.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from any defect likely to lessen the
effectiveness of the drum for the purpose intended. If a material other than plywood is used for the
manufacture of the heads, it shall be of a quality equivalent to the plywood.
6.1.4.5.2 At least two-ply plywood shall be used for the body and at least three-ply plywood for the heads; the
plies shall be firmly glued together by a water resistant adhesive with their grain crosswise.
6.1.4.5.3 The body and heads of the drum and their joins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the
drum and to its intended use.
6.1.4.5.4 In order to prevent sifting of the contents, lids shall be lined with kraft paper or some other equivalent
material which shall be securely fastened to the lid and extend to the outside along its full circumference.
6.1.4.5.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 250 litres.
6.1.4.5.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.6 (Deleted)
6.1.4.7 Fibre drums
1G
6.1.4.7.1 The body of the drum shall consist of multiple plies of heavy paper or fibreboard (without corrugations)
firmly glued or laminated together and may include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed
kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc.
6.1.4.7.2 Heads shall be of natural wood, fibreboard, metal, plywood, plastics or other suitable material and may
include one or more protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastics material, etc.
6.1.4.7.3 The body and heads of the drum and their joins shall be of a design appropriate to the capacity of the
drum and to its intended use.
6.1.4.7.4 The assembled packaging shall be sufficiently water resistant so as not to delaminate under normal
conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.7.5 Maximum capacity of drum: 450 litres.
6.1.4.7.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.8 Plastics drums and jerricans
1H1 drums, non-removable head
1H2 drums, removable head
3H1 jerricans, non-removable head
3H2 jerricans, removable head
6.1.4.8.1 The packaging shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in
relation to its capacity and intended use. Except for recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1, no
used material other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be
used. The packaging shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused either by the
substance contained or by ultra-violet radiation. Any permeation of the substance contained in the
package, or recycled plastics material used to produce new packaging, shall not constitute a danger
under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.8.2 If protection against ultra-violet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon
black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and
remain effective throughout the life of the packaging. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or
inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived if
the carbon black content does not exceed 2 % by mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3 %
by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultra-violet radiation is not limited.
– 295 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 296 –
6.1.4.8.3 Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultra-violet radiation may be included in the
composition of the plastics material provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical
properties of the material of the packaging. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived.
6.1.4.8.4 The wall thickness at every point of the packaging shall be appropriate to its capacity and intended use,
taking into account the stresses to which each point is liable to be exposed.
6.1.4.8.5 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head drums (1H1)
and jerricans (3H1) shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Drums and jerricans with larger openings are
considered to be of the removable head type (1H2 and 3H2). Closures for openings in the bodies or
heads of drums and jerricans shall be so designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof
under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets or other sealing elements shall be used with closures unless
the closure is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.8.6 Closure devices for removable head drums and jerricans (1H2 and 3H2) shall be so designed and applied
that they will remain secure and leakproof under normal conditions of carriage. Gaskets shall be used
with all removable heads unless the drum or jerrican design is such that, where the removable head is
properly secured, the drum or jerrican is inherently leakproof.
6.1.4.8.7 The maximum permissible permeability for flammable liquids shall be 0.008 g/l.h at 23 °C
(see 6.1.5.7).
6.1.4.8.8 (Deleted)
6.1.4.8.9 Maximum capacity of drums and jerricans: 1H1, 1H2: 450 litres
3H1, 3H2: 60 litres.
6.1.4.8.10 Maximum net mass: 1H1, 1H2: 400 kg
3H1, 3H2: 120 kg.
6.1.4.9 Boxes of natural wood
4C1 ordinary
4C2 with sift-proof walls
6.1.4.9.1 The wood used shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially
lessen the strength of any part of the box. The strength of the material used and the method of
construction shall be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box. The tops and bottoms may
be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.
6.1.4.9.2 Fastenings shall be resistant to vibration experienced under normal conditions of carriage. End grain
nailing shall be avoided whenever practicable. Joins which are likely to be highly stressed shall be made
using clenched or annular ring nails or equivalent fastenings.
6.1.4.9.3 Box 4C2: each part shall consist of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent
to one piece when one of the following methods of glued assembly is used: Lindermann joint, tongue
and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint or butt joint with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each
joint.
6.1.4.9.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.10 Plywood boxes
4D
6.1.4.10.1 Plywood used shall be at least 3-ply. It shall be made from well seasoned rotary cut, sliced or sawn
veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the box.
The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity
and intended use of the box. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water resistant adhesive. Other
suitable materials may be used together with plywood in the construction of boxes. Boxes shall be firmly
nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices.
6.1.4.10.2 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
– 296 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 297 –
6.1.4.11 Reconstituted wood boxes
4F
6.1.4.11.1 The walls of boxes shall be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board
or other suitable type. The strength of the material used and the method of construction shall be
appropriate to the capacity of the boxes and to their intended use.
6.1.4.11.2 Other parts of the boxes may be made of other suitable material.
6.1.4.11.3 Boxes shall be securely assembled by means of suitable devices.
6.1.4.11.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.12 Fibreboard boxes
4G
6.1.4.12.1 Strong and good quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used,
appropriate to the capacity of the box and to its intended use. The water resistance of the outer surface
shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes
by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m² – see ISO 535:l991.
It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring, and slotted so
as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated
fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings.
6.1.4.12.2 The ends of boxes may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood or other suitable material.
Reinforcements of wooden battens or other suitable material may be used.
6.1.4.12.3 Manufacturing joins in the body of boxes shall be taped, lapped and glued, or lapped and stitched with
metal staples. Lapped joins shall have an appropriate overlap.
6.1.4.12.4 Where closing is effected by gluing or taping, a water resistant adhesive shall be used.
6.1.4.12.5 Boxes shall be designed so as to provide a good fit to the contents.
6.1.4.12.6 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.13 Plastics boxes
4H1 expanded plastics boxes
4H2 solid plastics boxes
6.1.4.13.1 The box shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material and be of adequate strength in relation to
its capacity and intended use. Except for recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1, no used material
other than production residues or regrind from the same manufacturing process may be used. The box
shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to degradation caused either by the substance contained or
by ultra-violet radiation.
6.1.4.13.2 An expanded plastics box shall comprise two parts made of a moulded expanded plastics material, a
bottom section containing cavities for the inner packagings and a top section covering and interlocking
with the bottom section. The top and bottom sections shall be designed so that the inner packagings fit
snugly. The closure cap for any inner packaging shall not be in contact with the inside of the top section
of this box.
6.1.4.13.3 For dispatch, an expanded plastics box shall be closed with a self-adhesive tape having sufficient tensile
strength to prevent the box from opening. The adhesive tape shall be weather resistant and its adhesive
compatible with the expanded plastics material of the box. Other closing devices at least equally
effective may be used.
6.1.4.13.4 For solid plastics boxes, protection against ultra-violet radiation, if required, shall be provided by the
addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible
with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the box. Where use is made of carbon
black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting
– 297 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 298 –
may be waived if the carbon black content does not exceed 2 % by mass or if the pigment content does
not exceed 3 % by mass; the content of inhibitors of ultra-violet radiation is not limited.
6.1.4.13.5 Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultra-violet radiation may be included in the
composition of the plastics material provided that they do not adversely affect the chemical or physical
properties of the material of the box. In such circumstances, retesting may be waived.
6.1.4.13.6 Solid plastics boxes shall have closure devices made of a suitable material of adequate strength and so
designed as to prevent the box from unintentional opening.
6.1.4.13.7 (Deleted)
6.1.4.13.8 Maximum net mass 4H1: 60 kg
4H2: 400 kg.
6.1.4.14 Steel, aluminium or other metal boxes
4A steel boxes
4B aluminium boxes
4N metal, other than steel or aluminium, boxes
6.1.4.14.1 The strength of the metal and the construction of the box shall be appropriate to the capacity of the box
and to its intended use.
6.1.4.14.2 Boxes shall be lined with fibreboard or felt packing pieces or shall have an inner liner or coating of
suitable material, as required. If a double seamed metal liner is used, steps shall be taken to prevent the
ingress of substances, particularly explosives, into the recesses of the seams.
6.1.4.14.3 Closures may be of any suitable type; they shall remain secured under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.14.4 Maximum net mass: 400 kg.
6.1.4.15 Textile bags
5L1 without inner liner or coating
5L2 sift-proof
5L3 water resistant
6.1.4.15.1 The textiles used shall be of good quality. The strength of the fabric and the construction of the bag
shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and to its intended use.
6.1.4.15.2 Bags, sift-proof, 5L2: the bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by the use of:
(a) paper bonded to the inner surface of the bag by a water resistant adhesive such as bitumen; or
(b) plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or
(c) one or more inner liners made of paper or plastics material.
6.1.4.15.3 Bags, water resistant, 5L3: to prevent the entry of moisture the bag shall be made waterproof, for
example by the use of:
(a) separate inner liners of water resistant paper (e.g. waxed kraft paper, tarred paper or
plastics-coated kraft paper); or
(b) plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or
(c) one or more inner liners made of plastics material.
6.1.4.15.4 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.4.16 Woven plastics bags
5H1 without inner liner or coating
5H2 sift-proof
5H3 water resistant
– 298 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 299 –
6.1.4.16.1 Bags shall be made from stretched tapes or monofilaments of a suitable plastics material. The strength
of the material used and the construction of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and
to its intended use.
6.1.4.16.2 If the fabric is woven flat, the bags shall be made by sewing or some other method ensuring closure of
the bottom and one side. If the fabric is tubular, the bag shall be closed by sewing, weaving or some
other equally strong method of closure.
6.1.4.16.3 Bags, sift-proof, 5H2: the bag shall be made sift-proof, for example by means of:
(a) paper or a plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag; or
(b) one or more separate inner liners made of paper or plastics material.
6.1.4.16.4 Bags, water resistant, 5H3: to prevent the entry of moisture, the bag shall be made waterproof, for
example by means of:
(a) separate inner liners of water resistant paper (e.g. waxed kraft paper, double-tarred kraft paper
or plastics-coated kraft paper); or
(b) plastics film bonded to the inner or outer surface of the bag; or
(c) one or more inner plastics liners.
6.1.4.16.5 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.4.17 Plastics film bags
5H4
6.1.4.17.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable plastics material. The strength of the material used and the construction
of the bag shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and to its intended use. Joins and closures shall
withstand pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.17.2 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.4.18 Paper bags
5M1 multiwall
5M2 multiwall, water resistant
6.1.4.18.1 Bags shall be made of a suitable kraft paper or of an equivalent paper with at least three plies, the middle
ply of which may be net-cloth and adhesive bonding to the outer paper plies. The strength of the paper
and the construction of the bags shall be appropriate to the capacity of the bag and to its intended use.
Joins and closures shall be sift-proof.
6.1.4.18.2 Bags 5M2: to prevent the entry of moisture, a bag of four plies or more shall be made waterproof by the
use of either a water resistant ply as one of the two outermost plies or a water resistant barrier made of
a suitable protective material between the two outermost plies; a bag of three plies shall be made
waterproof by the use of a water resistant ply as the outermost ply. Where there is a danger of the
substance contained reacting with moisture or where it is packed damp, a waterproof ply or barrier, such
as double-tarred kraft paper, plastics-coated kraft paper, plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the
bag, or one or more inner plastics liners, shall also be placed next to the substance. Joins and closures
shall be waterproof.
6.1.4.18.3 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
– 299 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 300 –
6.1.4.19 Composite packagings (plastics material)
6HA1 plastics receptacle with outer steel drum
6HA2 plastics receptacle with outer steel crate or box
6HB1 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium drum
6HB2 plastics receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box
6HC plastics receptacle with outer wooden box
6HD1 plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum
6HD2 plastics receptacle with outer plywood box
6HG1 plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum
6HG2 plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box
6HH1 plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum
6HH2 plastics receptacle with outer solid plastics box
6.1.4.19.1 Inner receptacle
6.1.4.19.1.1 The requirements of 6.1.4.8.1 and 6.1.4.8.4 to 6.1.4.8.7 apply to plastics inner receptacles.
6.1.4.19.1.2 The plastics inner receptacle shall fit snugly inside the outer packaging, which shall be free of any
projection that might abrade the plastics material.
6.1.4.19.1.3 Maximum capacity of inner receptacle:
6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1: 250 litres
6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2: 60 litres.
6.1.4.19.1.4 Maximum net mass:
6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1: 400 kg
6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2: 75 kg.
6.1.4.19.2 Outer packaging
6.1.4.19.2.1 Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium drum 6HA1 or 6HB1; the relevant requirements of
6.1.4.1 or 6.1.4.2, as appropriate, apply to the construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.2 Plastics receptacle with outer steel or aluminium crate or box 6HA2 or 6HB2; the relevant requirements
of 6.1.4.14 apply to the construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.3 Plastics receptacle with outer wooden box 6HC; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.9 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.4 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood drum 6HD1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.5 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.5 Plastics receptacle with outer plywood box 6HD2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.10 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.6 Plastics receptacle with outer fibre drum 6HG1; the requirements of 6.1.4.7.1 to 6.1.4.7.4 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.7 Plastics receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6HG2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.12 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.8 Plastics receptacle with outer plastics drum 6HH1; the requirements of 6.1.4.8.1 to 6.1.4.8.6 apply to
the construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.19.2.9 Plastics receptacles with outer solid plastics box (including corrugated plastics material) 6HH2; the
requirements of 6.1.4.13.1 and 6.1.4.13.4 to 6.1.4.13.6 apply to the construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20 Composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware)
6PA1 receptacle with outer steel drum
6PA2 receptacle with outer steel crate or box
6PB1 receptacle with outer aluminium drum
– 300 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 301 –
6PB2 receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box
6PC receptacle with outer wooden box
6PD1 receptacle with outer plywood drum
6PD2 receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper
6PG1 receptacle with outer fibre drum
6PG2 receptacle with outer fibreboard box
6PH1 receptacle with outer expanded plastics packaging
6PH2 receptacle with outer solid plastics packaging
6.1.4.20.1 Inner receptacle
6.1.4.20.1.1 Receptacles shall be of a suitable form (cylindrical or pear-shaped) and be made of good quality material
free from any defect that could impair their strength. The walls shall be sufficiently thick at every point
and free from internal stresses.
6.1.4.20.1.2 Screw-threaded plastics closures, ground glass stoppers or closures at least equally effective shall be
used as closures for receptacles. Any part of the closure likely to come into contact with the contents of
the receptacle shall be resistant to those contents. Care shall be taken to ensure that the closures are so
fitted as to be leakproof and are suitably secured to prevent any loosening during carriage. If vented
closures are necessary, they shall comply with 4.1.1.8.
6.1.4.20.1.3 The receptacle shall be firmly secured in the outer packaging by means of cushioning and/or absorbent
materials.
6.1.4.20.1.4 Maximum capacity of receptacle: 60 litres.
6.1.4.20.1.5 Maximum net mass: 75 kg.
6.1.4.20.2 Outer packaging
6.1.4.20.2.1 Receptacle with outer steel drum 6PA1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.1 apply to the construction
of the outer packaging. The removable lid required for this type of packaging may nevertheless be in
the form of a cap.
6.1.4.20.2.2 Receptacle with outer steel crate or box 6PA2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.14 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging. For cylindrical receptacles the outer packaging shall, when upright,
rise above the receptacle and its closure. If the crate surrounds a pear-shaped receptacle and is of
matching shape, the outer packaging shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap).
6.1.4.20.2.3 Receptacle with outer aluminium drum 6PB1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.2 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.4 Receptacle with outer aluminium crate or box 6PB2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.14 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.5 Receptacle with outer wooden box 6PC; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.9 apply to the construction
of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.6 Receptacle with outer plywood drum 6PD1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.5 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.7 Receptacle with outer wickerwork hamper 6PD2. The wickerwork hamper shall be properly made with
material of good quality. It shall be fitted with a protective cover (cap) so as to prevent damage to the
receptacle.
6.1.4.20.2.8 Receptacle with outer fibre drum 6PG1; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.7.1 to 6.1.4.7.4 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.9 Receptacle with outer fibreboard box 6PG2; the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.12 apply to the
construction of the outer packaging.
6.1.4.20.2.10 Receptacle with outer expanded plastics or solid plastics packaging (6PH1 or 6PH2); the materials of
both outer packagings shall meet the relevant requirements of 6.1.4.13. Outer solid plastics packaging
shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene or some other comparable plastics material. The
removable lid for this type of packaging may nevertheless be in the form of a cap.
– 301 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 302 –
6.1.4.21 Combination packagings
The relevant requirements of section 6.1.4 for the outer packagings to be used, are applicable.
NOTE: For the inner and outer packagings to be used, see the relevant packing instructions in
Chapter 4.1.
6.1.4.22 Light gauge metal packagings
0A1 non-removable-head
0A2 removable-head
6.1.4.22.1 The sheet metal for the body and ends shall be of suitable steel, and of a gauge appropriate to the
capacity and intended use of the packaging.
6.1.4.22.2 The joints shall be welded, at least double-seamed by welting or produced by a method ensuring a
similar degree of strength and leakproofness.
6.1.4.22.3 Inner coatings of zinc, tin, lacquer, etc. shall be tough and shall adhere to the steel at every point,
including the closures.
6.1.4.22.4 Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or heads of non-removable head (0A1)
packagings shall not exceed 7 cm in diameter. Packagings with larger openings shall be considered to
be of the removable-head type (0A2).
6.1.4.22.5 The closures of non-removable-head packagings (0A1) shall either be of the screw-threaded type or be
capable of being secured by a screwable device or a device at least equally effective. The closures of
removable-head packagings (0A2) shall be so designed and fitted that they stay firmly closed and the
packagings remain leakproof in normal conditions of carriage.
6.1.4.22.6 Maximum capacity of packagings: 40 litres.
6.1.4.22.7 Maximum net mass: 50 kg.
6.1.5 Test requirements for packagings
6.1.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests
6.1.5.1.1 The design type of each packaging shall be tested as provided in 6.1.5 in accordance with procedures
established by the competent authority allowing the allocation of the mark and shall be approved by this
competent authority.
6.1.5.1.2 Each packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this Chapter before being
used. A packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of
construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes packagings which
differ from the design type only in their lesser design height.
6.1.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority. For
such tests on paper or fibreboard packagings, preparation at ambient conditions is considered equivalent
to the requirements of 6.1.5.2.3.
6.1.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of
construction of a packaging.
6.1.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects
from a tested type, e.g. smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass; and
packagings such as drums, bags and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external
dimension(s).
6.1.5.1.6 (Reserved)
NOTE: For the conditions for using different inner packagings in an outer packaging and permissible
variations in inner packagings, see 4.1.1.5.1. These conditions do not limit the use of inner packagings
when applying 6.1.5.1.7.
– 302 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 303 –
6.1.5.1.7 Articles or inner packagings of any type for solids or liquids may be assembled and carried without
testing in an outer packaging under the following conditions:
(a) The outer packaging shall have been successfully tested in accordance with 6.1.5.3 with fragile
(e.g. glass) inner packagings containing liquids using the packing group I drop height;
(b) The total combined gross mass of inner packagings shall not exceed one half the gross mass of
inner packagings used for the drop test in (a) above;
(c) The thickness of cushioning material between inner packagings and between inner packagings
and the outside of the packaging shall not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses in the
originally tested packaging; and if a single inner packaging was used in the original test, the
thicknesses of cushioning between inner packagings shall not be less than the thickness of
cushioning between the outside of the packaging and the inner packaging in the original test. If
either fewer or smaller inner packagings are used (as compared to the inner packagings used in
the drop test), sufficient additional cushioning material shall be used to take up void spaces;
(d) The outer packaging shall have passed successfully the stacking test in 6.1.5.6 while empty. The
total mass of identical packages shall be based on the combined mass of inner packagings used
for the drop test in (a) above;
(e) Inner packagings containing liquids shall be completely surrounded with a sufficient quantity of
absorbent material to absorb the entire liquid contents of the inner packagings;
(f) If the outer packaging is intended to contain inner packagings for liquids and is not leakproof, or
is intended to contain inner packagings for solids and is not siftproof, a means of containing any
liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form of a leakproof liner,
plastics bag or other equally efficient means of containment. For packagings containing liquids,
the absorbent material required in (e) above shall be placed inside the means of containing the
liquid contents;
(g) Packagings shall be marked in accordance with 6.1.3 as having been tested to packing group I
performance for combination packagings. The marked gross mass in kilograms shall be the sum
of the mass of the outer packaging plus one half of the mass of the inner packaging(s) as used
for the drop test referred to in (a) above. Such a package mark shall also contain a letter “V” as
described in 6.1.2.4.
6.1.5.1.8 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that
serially-produced packagings meet the requirements of the design type tests. For verification purposes
records of such tests shall be maintained.
6.1.5.1.9 If an inner treatment or coating is required for safety reasons, it shall retain its protective properties even
after the tests.
6.1.5.1.10 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected and with the approval of the competent authority,
several tests may be made on one sample.
6.1.5.1.11 Salvage packagings
Salvage packagings (see 1.2.1) shall be tested and marked in accordance with the requirements
applicable to packing group II packagings intended for the carriage of solids or inner packagings, except
as follows:
(a) The test substance used in performing the tests shall be water, and the packagings shall be filled
to not less than 98 % of their maximum capacity. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags
of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass so long as they are placed so that the test
results are not affected. Alternatively, in performing the drop test, the drop height may be varied
in accordance with 6.1.5.3.5 (b);
(b) Packagings shall, in addition, have been successfully subjected to the leakproofness test at
30 kPa, with the results of this test reflected in the test report required by 6.1.5.8; and
(c) Packagings shall be marked with the letter “T” as described in 6.1.2.4.
– 303 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 304 –
6.1.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing
6.1.5.2.1 Tests shall be carried out on packagings prepared as for carriage including, with respect to combination
packagings, the inner packagings used. Inner or single receptacles or packagings other than bags shall
be filled to not less than 98 % of their maximum capacity for liquids or 95 % for solids. Bags shall be
filled to the maximum mass at which they may be used. For combination packagings where the inner
packaging is designed to carry liquids and solids, separate testing is required for both liquid and solid
contents. The substances or articles to be carried in the packagings may be replaced by other substances
or articles except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance
is used it shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be
carried. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package
mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected.
6.1.5.2.2 In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used, it shall be of similar relative density and
viscosity to those of the substance being carried. Water may also be used for the liquid drop test under
the conditions in 6.1.5.3.5.
6.1.5.2.3 Paper or fibreboard packagings shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a
controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three options, one of which shall be
chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23 ± 2 °C and 50 % ± 2 % r.h. The two other options are 20 ± 2 °C
and 65 % ± 2 % r.h. or 27 ± 2 °C and 65 % ± 2 % r.h.
NOTE: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short-term fluctuations and measurement
limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ± 5 % relative humidity without
significant impairment of test reproducibility.
6.1.5.2.4 (Reserved)
6.1.5.2.5 To check that their chemical compatibility with the liquids is sufficient, plastics drums and jerricans in
accordance with 6.1.4.8 and if necessary composite packagings (plastics material) in accordance
with 6.1.4.19 shall be subjected to storage at ambient temperature for six months, during which time the
test samples shall be kept filled with the goods they are intended to carry.
For the first and last 24 hours of storage, the test samples shall be placed with the closure downwards.
However, packagings fitted with a vent shall be so placed on each occasion for five minutes only. After
this storage the test samples shall undergo the tests prescribed in 6.1.5.3 to 6.1.5.6.
When it is known that the strength properties of the plastics material of the inner receptacles of
composite packagings (plastics material) are not significantly altered by the action of the filling
substance, it shall not be necessary to check that the chemical compatibility is sufficient.
A significant alteration in strength properties means:
(a) distinct embrittlement; or
(b) a considerable decrease in elasticity, unless related to a not less than proportionate increase in
the elongation under load.
Where the behaviour of the plastics material has been established by other means, the above
compatibility test may be dispensed with. Such procedures shall be at least equivalent to the above
compatibility test and be recognized by the competent authority.
NOTE: For plastics drums and jerricans and composite packagings (plastics material) made of
polyethylene, see also 6.1.5.2.6 below.
6.1.5.2.6 For polyethylene drums and jerricans in accordance with 6.1.4.8 and if necessary, polyethylene
composite packagings in accordance with 6.1.4.19, chemical compatibility with filling liquids
assimilated in accordance with 4.1.1.21 may be verified as follows with standard liquids (see 6.1.6).
The standard liquids are representative for the processes of deterioration on polyethylene, as there are
softening through swelling, cracking under stress, molecular degradation and combinations thereof. The
sufficient chemical compatibility of the packagings may be verified by storage of the required test
samples for three weeks at 40 °C with the appropriate standard liquid(s); where this standard liquid is
water, storage in accordance with this procedure is not required. Storage is not required either for test
samples which are used for the stacking test in case of the standard liquids “wetting solution” and “acetic
acid”.
– 304 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 305 –
For the first and last 24 hours of storage, the test samples shall be placed with the closure downwards.
However, packagings fitted with a vent shall be so placed on each occasion for five minutes only. After
this storage, the test samples shall undergo the tests prescribed in 6.1.5.3 to 6.1.5.6.
The compatibility test for tert-Butyl hydroperoxide with more than 40 % peroxide content and
peroxyacetic acids of Class 5.2 shall not be carried out using standard liquids. For these substances,
sufficient chemical compatibility of the test samples shall be verified during a storage period of six
months at ambient temperature with the substances they are intended to carry.
Results of the procedure in accordance with this paragraph from polyethylene packagings can be
approved for an equal design type, the internal surface of which is fluorinated.
6.1.5.2.7 For packagings made of polyethylene, as specified in 6.1.5.2.6, which have passed the test in 6.1.5.2.6,
filling substances other than those assimilated in accordance with 4.1.1.21 may also be approved. Such
approval shall be based on laboratory tests verifying that the effect of such filling substances on the test
specimens is less than that of the appropriate standard liquid(s) taking into account the relevant
processes of deterioration. The same conditions as those set out in 4.1.1.21.2 shall apply with respect to
relative density and vapour pressure.
6.1.5.2.8 Provided that the strength properties of the plastics inner packagings of a combination packaging are
not significantly altered by the action of the filling substance, proof of chemical compatibility is not
necessary. A significant alteration in strength properties means:
(a) Distinct embrittlement;
(b) A considerable decrease in elasticity, unless related to a not less than proportionate increase in
elastic elongation.
6.1.5.3 Drop test 3
6.1.5.3.1 Number of test samples (per design type and manufacturer) and drop orientation
For other than flat drops the centre of gravity shall be vertically over the point of impact.
Where more than one orientation is possible for a given drop test, the orientation most likely to result
in failure of the packaging shall be used.
Packaging No. of test samples Drop orientation
(a) Steel drums
Aluminium drums
Drums of metal other than steel or
aluminium
Steel jerricans
Aluminium jerricans
Plywood drums
Fibre drums
Plastics drums and jerricans
Composite packagings which are
in the shape of a drum
Light gauge metal packagings
Six
(three for each drop)
First drop (using three samples): the
packaging shall strike the target diagonally
on the chime or, if the packaging has no
chime, on a circumferential seam or an edge.
Second drop (using the other three
samples): the packaging shall strike the
target on the weakest part not tested by the
first drop, for example a closure or, for
some cylindrical drums, the welded
longitudinal seam of the drum body
(b) Boxes of natural wood
Plywood boxes
Reconstituted wood boxes
Fibreboard boxes
Plastics boxes
Steel or aluminium boxes
Composite packagings which are in the
shape of a box
Five
(one for each drop)
First drop: flat on the bottom
Second drop: flat on the top
Third drop: flat on the long side
Fourth drop: flat on the short side
Fifth drop: on a corner
3 See ISO Standard 2248.
– 305 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 306 –
Packaging No. of test samples Drop orientation
(c) Bags – single-ply with a side seam Three
(three drops per bag)
First drop: flat on a wide face
Second drop: flat on a narrow face
Third drop: on an end of the bag
(d) Bags – single-ply without a side seam,
or multi-ply
Three
(two drops per bag)
First drop: flat on a wide face
Second drop: on an end of the bag
(e) Composite packagings (glass,
stoneware or porcelain), marked with
the symbol “RID/ADR” according to
6.1.3.1 (a) (ii) and which are in the
shape of a drum or box
Three
(one for each drop)
Diagonally on the bottom chime, or, if there
is no chime, on a circumferential seam or
the bottom edge
6.1.5.3.2 Special preparation of test samples for the drop test
The temperature of the test sample and its contents shall be reduced to –18 °C or lower for the following
packagings:
(a) Plastics drums (see 6.1.4.8);
(b) Plastics jerricans (see 6.1.4.8);
(c) Plastics boxes other than expanded plastics boxes (see 6.1.4.13);
(d) Composite packagings (plastics material) (see 6.1.4.19); and
(e) Combination packagings with plastics inner packagings, other than plastics bags intended to
contain solids or articles.
Where test samples are prepared in this way, the conditioning in 6.1.5.2.3 may be waived. Test liquids
shall be kept in the liquid state by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary.
6.1.5.3.3 Removable head packagings for liquids shall not be dropped until at least 24 hours after filling and
closing to allow for any possible gasket relaxation.
6.1.5.3.4 Target
The target shall be a non-resilient and horizontal surface and shall be:
– Integral and massive enough to be immovable;
– Flat with a surface kept free from local defects capable of influencing the test results;
– Rigid enough to be non-deformable under test conditions and not liable to become damaged by the
tests; and
– Sufficiently large to ensure that the test package falls entirely upon the surface.
6.1.5.3.5 Drop height
For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid or liquid to be carried or with another
substance having essentially the same physical characteristics:
Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
For liquids in single packagings and for inner packagings of combination packagings, if the test is
performed with water:
NOTE: The term water includes water/antifreeze solutions with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 for
testing at – 18 °C.
(a) where the substances to be carried have a relative density not exceeding 1.2:
– 306 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 307 –
Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
(b) where the substances to be carried have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop height shall be
calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to
the first decimal, as follows:
Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III
d × 1.5 (m) d × 1.0 (m) d × 0.67 (m)
(c) for light-gauge metal packagings, marked with symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1(a) (ii)
intended for the carriage of substances having a viscosity at 23 °C greater than 200 mm²/s
(corresponding to a flow time of 30 seconds with an ISO flow cup having a jet orifice of 6 mm
diameter in accordance with ISO Standard 2431:1993)
(i) if the relative density does not exceed 1.2:
Packing group II Packing group III
0.6 m 0.4 m
(ii) where the substances to be carried have a relative density (d) exceeding 1.2 the drop
height shall be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be
carried, rounded up to the first decimal place, as follows:
Packing group II Packing group III
d × 0.5 m d × 0.33 m
6.1.5.3.6 Criteria for passing the test
6.1.5.3.6.1 Each packaging containing liquid shall be leakproof when equilibrium has been reached between the
internal and external pressures, however for inner packagings of combination packagings and except
for inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the symbol
“RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii) it is not necessary that the pressures be equalized.
6.1.5.3.6.2 Where a packaging for solids undergoes a drop test and its upper face strikes the target, the test sample
passes the test if the entire contents are retained by an inner packaging or inner receptacle (e.g. a plastics
bag), even if the closure while retaining its containment function, is no longer sift-proof.
6.1.5.3.6.3 The packaging or outer packaging of a composite or combination packaging shall not exhibit any
damage liable to affect safety during carriage. Inner receptacles, inner packagings, or articles shall
remain completely within the outer packaging and there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from
the inner receptacle(s) or inner packaging(s).
6.1.5.3.6.4 Neither the outermost ply of a bag nor an outer packaging may exhibit any damage liable to affect safety
during carriage.
6.1.5.3.6.5 A slight discharge from the closure(s) upon impact is not considered to be a failure of the packaging
provided that no further leakage occurs.
6.1.5.3.6.6 No rupture is permitted in packagings for goods of Class 1 which would permit the spillage of loose
explosive substances or articles from the outer packaging.
6.1.5.4 Leakproofness test
The leakproofness test shall be performed on all design types of packagings intended to contain liquids;
however, this test is not required for
– Inner packagings of combination packagings;
– Inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the
symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii);
– Light gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii)
intended for substances with a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm²/s.
– 307 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 308 –
6.1.5.4.1 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer.
6.1.5.4.2 Special preparation of test samples for the test: either vented closures shall be replaced by similar non-
vented closures or the vent shall be sealed.
6.1.5.4.3 Test method and pressure to be applied: the packagings including their closures shall be restrained under
water for 5 minutes while an internal air pressure is applied, the method of restraint shall not affect the
results of the test.
The air pressure (gauge) to be applied shall be:
Packing Group I Packing Group II Packing Group III
Not less than 30 kPa
(0.3 bar)
Not less than 20 kPa
(0.2 bar)
Not less than 20 kPa
(0.2 bar)
Other methods at least equally effective may be used.
6.1.5.4.4 Criterion for passing the test: there shall be no leakage.
6.1.5.5 Internal pressure (hydraulic) test
6.1.5.5.1 Packagings to be tested
The internal pressure (hydraulic) test shall be carried out on all design types of metal, plastics and
composite packagings intended to contain liquids. This test is not required for:
– Inner packagings of combination packagings;
– Inner receptacles of composite packagings (glass, porcelain or stoneware), marked with the
symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii);
– Light gauge metal packagings, marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii)
intended for substances with a viscosity at 23 °C exceeding 200 mm²/s.
6.1.5.5.2 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer.
6.1.5.5.3 Special preparation of packagings for testing: either vented closures shall be replaced by similar
non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed.
6.1.5.5.4 Test method and pressure to be applied: metal packagings and composite packagings (glass, porcelain
or stoneware), including their closures, shall be subjected to the test pressure for 5 minutes. Plastics
packagings and composite packagings (plastics material) including their closures shall be subjected to
the test pressure for 30 minutes. This pressure is the one to be included in the mark required
by 6.1.3.1 (d). The manner in which the packagings are supported shall not invalidate the test. The test
pressure shall be applied continuously and evenly; it shall be kept constant throughout the test period.
The hydraulic pressure (gauge) applied, as determined by any one of the following methods, shall be:
(a) not less than the total gauge pressure measured in the packaging (i.e. the vapour pressure of the
filling liquid and the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55 °C,
multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; this total gauge pressure shall be determined on the basis of
a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature of l5 °C; or
(b) not less than 1.75 times the vapour pressure at 50 °C of the liquid to be carried, minus 100 kPa
but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa; or
(c) not less than 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55 °C of the liquid to be carried, minus 100 kPa
but with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa.
6.1.5.5.5 In addition, packagings intended to contain liquids of packing group I shall be tested to a minimum test
pressure of 250 kPa (gauge) for a test period of 5 or 30 minutes depending upon the material of
construction of the packaging.
6.1.5.5.6 Criterion for passing the test: no packaging may leak.
– 308 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 309 –
6.1.5.6 Stacking test
All design types of packagings other than bags, and other than non-stackable composite packagings
(glass, porcelain, or stoneware) marked with the symbol “RID/ADR” according to 6.1.3.1 (a) (ii), shall
be subjected to a stacking test.
6.1.5.6.1 Number of test samples: three test samples per design type and manufacturer.
6.1.5.6.2 Test method: the test sample shall be subjected to a force applied to the top surface of the test sample
equivalent to the total weight of identical packages which might be stacked on it during carriage; where
the contents of the test sample are liquids with relative density different from that of the liquid to be
carried, the force shall be calculated in relation to the latter. The minimum height of the stack including
the test sample shall be 3 metres. The duration of the test shall be 24 hours except that plastics drums,
jerricans, and composite packagings 6HH1 and 6HH2 intended for liquids shall be subjected to the
stacking test for a period of 28 days at a temperature of not less than 40 °C.
For the test in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5, the original filling substance shall be used. For the test in
accordance with 6.1.5.2.6, a stacking test shall be carried out with a standard liquid.
6.1.5.6.3 Criteria for passing the test: no test sample shall leak. In composite packagings or combination
packagings, there shall be no leakage of the filling substance from the inner receptacle or inner
packaging. No test sample shall show any deterioration which could adversely affect transport safety or
any distortion liable to reduce its strength or cause instability in stacks of packages. Plastics packagings
shall be cooled to ambient temperature before the assessment.
6.1.5.7 Supplementary permeability test for plastics drums and jerricans in accordance with 6.1.4.8 and for
composite packagings (plastics material) in accordance with 6.1.4.19 intended for the carriage of
liquids having a flash-point
60 °C, other than 6HA1 packagings
Polyethylene packagings need be subjected to this test only if they are to be approved for the carriage
of benzene, toluene, xylene or mixtures and preparations containing those substances.
6.1.5.7.1 Number of test samples: three packagings per design type and manufacturer.
6.1.5.7.2 Special preparation of the test sample for the test: the test samples are to be pre-stored with the original
filling substance in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5, or, for polyethylene packagings, with the standard liquid
mixture of hydrocarbons (white spirit) in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6.
6.1.5.7.3 Test method: the test samples filled with the substance for which the packaging is to be approved shall
be weighed before and after storage for 28 days at 23 °C and 50 % relative atmospheric humidity. For
polyethylene packagings, the test may be carried out with the standard liquid mixture of hydrocarbons
(white spirit) in place of benzene, toluene or xylene.
6.1.5.7.4 Criterion for passing the test: permeability shall not exceed 0.008 g/l.h.
6.1.5.8 Test Report
6.1.5.8.1 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the
users of the packaging:
1. Name and address of the test facility;
2. Name and address of applicant (where appropriate);
3. A unique test report identification;
4. Date of the test report;
5. Manufacturer of the packaging;
6. Description of the packaging design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.),
including method of manufacture (e.g. blow moulding) and which may include drawing(s) and/or
photograph(s);
7. Maximum capacity;
– 309 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 310 –
8. Characteristics of test contents, e.g. viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for
solids. For plastics packagings subject to the internal pressure test in 6.1.5.5, the temperature of
the water used;
9. Test descriptions and results;
10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory.
6.1.5.8.2 The test report shall contain statements that the packaging prepared as for carriage was tested in
accordance with the appropriate requirements of this section and that the use of other packaging methods
or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent
authority.
6.1.6 Standard liquids for verifying the chemical compatibility testing of polyethylene packagings,
including IBCs, in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6 and 6.5.6.3.5, respectively
6.1.6.1 The following standard liquids shall be used for this plastics material.
(a) Wetting Solution for substances causing severe cracking in polyethylene under stress, in
particular for all solutions and preparations containing wetting agents.
An aqueous solution of 1 % of alkyl benzene sulphonate, or an aqueous solution of 5 %
nonylphenol ethoxylate which has been preliminary stored for at least 14 days at a temperature
of 40 °C before being used for the first time for the tests, shall be used. The surface tension of
this solution shall be 31 to 35 mN/m at 23 °C.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1.20.
A compatibility test with acetic acid is not required if adequate chemical compatibility is proved
with a wetting solution.
For filling substances causing cracking in polyethylene under stress which is resistant to the
wetting solution, adequate chemical compatibility may be proved after preliminary storing for
three weeks at 40 °C in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6, but with the original filling matter;
(b) Acetic acid for substances and preparations causing cracking in polyethylene under stress, in
particular for monocarboxylic acids and monovalent alcohols.
Acetic acid in 98 to 100 % concentration shall be used.
Relative density = 1.05.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1.1.
In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell more than acetic acid and to such
an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by up to 4 %, adequate chemical compatibility
may be proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6
but with the original filling matter;
(c) Normal butyl acetate/normal butyl acetate-saturated wetting solution for substances and
preparations causing polyethylene to swell to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is
increased by about 4 % and at the same time causing cracking under stress, in particular for
phyto-sanitary products, liquid paints and esters. Normal butyl acetate in 98 to 100 %
concentration shall be used for preliminary storage in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6.
For the stacking test in accordance with 6.1.5.6, a test liquid consisting of a 1 to 10 % aqueous
wetting solution mixed with 2 % normal butyl acetate conforming to (a) above shall be used.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1.0.
In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell more than normal butyl acetate
and to such an extent that the polyethylene mass is increased by up to 7.5 %, adequate chemical
compatibility may be proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance
with 6.1.5.2.6 but with the original filling matter;
– 310 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 311 –
(d) Mixture of hydrocarbons (white spirit) for substances and preparations causing polyethylene to
swell, in particular for hydrocarbons, esters and ketones.
A mixture of hydrocarbons having a boiling range 160 °C to 220 °C, relative density 0.78-0.80,
flash-point > 50 °C and an aromatic content 16 % to 21 % shall be used.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density not less than 1.0.
In the case of filling substances causing polyethylene to swell to such an extent that the
polyethylene mass is increased by more than 7.5 %, adequate chemical compatibility may be
proved after preliminary storing for three weeks at 40 °C, in accordance with 6.1.5.2.6 but with
the original filling matter;
(e) Nitric acid for all substances and preparations having an oxidizing effect on polyethylene and
causing molecular degradation identical to or less than 55 % nitric acid.
Nitric acid in a concentration of not less than 55 % shall be used.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1.4.
In the case of filling substances more strongly oxidizing than 55 % nitric acid or causing
degradation of the molecular mass proceed in accordance with 6.1.5.2.5.
The period of use shall be determined in such cases by observing the degree of damage (e.g. two
years for nitric acid in not less than 55 % concentration);
(f) Water for substances which do not attack polyethylene in any of the cases referred to under
(a) to (e), in particular for inorganic acids and lyes, aqueous saline solutions, polyvalent alcohols
and organic substances in aqueous solution.
The stacking test shall be carried out on the basis of a relative density of not less than 1.2.
A design type test with water is not required if adequate chemical compatibility is proved with
wetting solution or nitric acid.
– 311 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 313 –
CHAPTER 6.2
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING OF PRESSURE
RECEPTACLES, AEROSOL DISPENSERS, SMALL RECEPTACLES CONTAINING GAS
(GAS CARTRIDGES) AND FUEL CELL CARTRIDGES CONTAINING LIQUEFIED
FLAMMABLE GAS
NOTE: Aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) and fuel cell cartridges containing
liquefied flammable gas are not subject to the requirements of 6.2.1 to 6.2.5.
6.2.1 General requirements
6.2.1.1 Design and construction
6.2.1.1.1 Pressure receptacles shall be designed, manufactured, tested and equipped in such a way as to withstand
all conditions, including fatigue, to which they will be subjected during normal conditions of carriage
and intended use.
6.2.1.1.2 (Reserved)
6.2.1.1.3 In no case shall the minimum wall thickness be less than that specified in the design and construction
technical standards.
6.2.1.1.4 For welded pressure receptacles, only metals of weldable quality shall be welded.
6.2.1.1.5 The test pressure of pressure receptacle shells and bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with
packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1, or, for a chemical under pressure, with packing instruction P206 of
4.1.4.1. The test pressure for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be in accordance with packing
instruction P203 of 4.1.4.1. The test pressure of a metal hydride storage system shall be in accordance
with packing instruction P205 of 4.1.4.1. The test pressure of a cylinder shell for an adsorbed gas shall
be in accordance with packing instruction P208 of 4.1.4.1.
6.2.1.1.6 Cylinders or cylinder shells assembled in bundles shall be structurally supported and held together as a
unit. Cylinders or cylinder shells shall be secured in a manner that prevents movement in relation to the
structural assembly and movement that would result in the concentration of harmful local stresses.
Manifold assemblies (e.g. manifold, valves, and pressure gauges) shall be designed and constructed
such that they are protected from impact damage and forces normally encountered in carriage.
Manifolds shall have at least the same test pressure as the cylinders. For toxic liquefied gases, each
cylinder shell shall have an isolation valve to ensure that each pressure receptacle can be filled separately
and that no interchange of cylinder contents can occur during carriage.
NOTE: Toxic liquefied gases have the classification codes 2T, 2TF, 2TC, 2TO, 2TFC or 2TOC.
6.2.1.1.7 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided.
6.2.1.1.8 Additional requirements for the construction of closed cryogenic receptacles for refrigerated liquefied
gases
6.2.1.1.8.1 The mechanical properties of the metal used shall be established for each pressure receptacle, including
the impact strength and the bending coefficient.
NOTE: With regard to the impact strength, sub-section 6.8.5.3 gives details of test requirements which
may be used.
6.2.1.1.8.2 The pressure receptacles shall be thermally insulated. The thermal insulation shall be protected against
impact by means of a jacket. If the space between the inner vessel and the jacket is evacuated of air
(vacuum-insulation), the jacket shall be designed to withstand without permanent deformation an
external pressure of at least 100 kPa (1 bar) calculated in accordance with a recognised technical code
or a calculated critical collapsing pressure of not less than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure. If the jacket
is so closed as to be gas-tight (e.g. in the case of vacuum-insulation), a device shall be provided to
prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in the event of inadequate gas-
– 313 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 314 –
tightness of the inner vessel or its service equipment. The device shall prevent moisture from penetrating
into the insulation.
6.2.1.1.8.3 Closed cryogenic receptacles intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases having a boiling
point below –182 °C at atmospheric pressure shall not include materials which may react with oxygen
or oxygen enriched atmospheres in a dangerous manner, when located in parts of the thermal insulation
where there is a risk of contact with oxygen or with oxygen enriched liquid.
6.2.1.1.8.4 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be designed and constructed with suitable lifting and securing
arrangements.
6.2.1.1.9 Additional requirements for the construction of acetylene cylinders
Cylinder shells for UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free, shall be filled
with a porous material, uniformly distributed, of a type that conforms to the requirements and testing
specified by a standard or technical code recognised by the competent authority and which:
(a) Is compatible with the cylinder shell and does not form harmful or dangerous compounds either
with the acetylene or with the solvent in the case of UN 1001; and
(b) Is capable of preventing the spread of decomposition of the acetylene in the porous material.
In the case of UN 1001, the solvent shall be compatible with those parts of the cylinder that are in
contact with it.
6.2.1.2 Materials
6.2.1.2.1 Construction materials of pressure receptacles which are in direct contact with dangerous goods shall
not be affected or weakened by the dangerous goods intended to be carried and shall not cause a
dangerous effect e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous goods.
6.2.1.2.2 Pressure receptacles shall be made of the materials specified in the design and construction technical
standards and the applicable packing instruction for the substances intended for carriage in the pressure
receptacle. The materials shall be resistant to brittle fracture and to stress corrosion cracking as indicated
in the design and construction technical standards.
6.2.1.3 Service equipment
6.2.1.3.1 Service equipment subjected to pressure, excluding porous, absorbent or adsorbent material, pressure
relief devices, pressure gauges or indicators, shall be designed and constructed so that the burst pressure
is at least 1.5 times the test pressure of the pressure receptacle.
6.2.1.3.2 Service equipment shall be configured or designed to prevent damage and unintended opening that
could result in the release of the pressure receptacle contents during normal conditions of handling and
carriage. All closures shall be protected in the same manner as is required for valves in 4.1.6.8. Manifold
piping leading to shut-off valves shall be sufficiently flexible to protect the shut-off valves and the
piping from shearing or releasing the pressure receptacle contents.
6.2.1.3.3 Pressure receptacles which are not capable of being handled manually or rolled, shall be fitted with
handling devices (skids, rings, straps) ensuring that they can be safely handled by mechanical means
and so arranged as not to impair the strength of, nor cause undue stresses in, the pressure receptacle.
6.2.1.3.4 Individual pressure receptacles shall be equipped with pressure relief devices as specified in packing
provision P200 (2) or P205 of 4.1.4.1 or in 6.2.1.3.6.4 and 6.2.1.3.6.5. Pressure-relief devices shall be
designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous
excess pressure. When fitted, pressure relief devices on manifolded horizontal pressure receptacles
filled with flammable gas shall be arranged to discharge freely to the open air in such a manner as to
prevent any impingement of escaping gas upon the pressure receptacle itself under normal conditions
of carriage.
6.2.1.3.5 Pressure receptacles whose filling is measured by volume shall be provided with a level indicator.
– 314 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 315 –
6.2.1.3.6 Additional requirements for closed cryogenic receptacles
6.2.1.3.6.1 Each filling and discharge opening in a closed cryogenic receptacle used for the carriage of flammable
refrigerated liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least two mutually independent shut-off devices in
series, the first being a stop-valve, the second being a cap or equivalent device.
6.2.1.3.6.2 For sections of piping which can be closed at both ends and where liquid product can be trapped, a
method of automatic pressure-relief shall be provided to prevent excess pressure build-up within the
piping.
6.2.1.3.6.3 Each connection on a closed cryogenic receptacle shall be clearly marked to indicate its function (e.g.
vapour or liquid phase).
6.2.1.3.6.4 Pressure-relief devices
6.2.1.3.6.4.1 Every closed cryogenic receptacle shall be provided with at least one pressure-relief device. The
pressure-relief device shall be of the type that will resist dynamic forces including surge.
6.2.1.3.6.4.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles may, in addition, have a frangible disc in parallel with the spring loaded
device(s) in order to meet the requirements of 6.2.1.3.6.5.
6.2.1.3.6.4.3 Connections to pressure-relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass
unrestricted to the pressure-relief device.
6.2.1.3.6.4.4 All pressure-relief device inlets shall under maximum filling conditions be situated in the vapour space
of the closed cryogenic receptacle and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the escaping
vapour is discharged unrestrictedly.
6.2.1.3.6.5 Capacity and setting of pressure-relief devices
NOTE: In relation to pressure-relief devices of closed cryogenic receptacles, maximum allowable
working pressure (MAWP) means the maximum effective gauge pressure permissible at the top of a
loaded closed cryogenic receptacle in its operating position including the highest effective pressure
during filling and discharge.
6.2.1.3.6.5.1 The pressure-relief device shall open automatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully
open at a pressure equal to 110 % of the MAWP. It shall, after discharge, close at a pressure not lower
than 10 % below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower pressures.
6.2.1.3.6.5.2 Frangible discs shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure which is the lower of either the test pressure
or 150 % of the MAWP.
6.2.1.3.6.5.3 In the case of the loss of vacuum in a vacuum-insulated closed cryogenic receptacle the combined
capacity of all pressure-relief devices installed shall be sufficient so that the pressure (including
accumulation) inside the closed cryogenic receptacle does not exceed 120 % of the MAWP.
6.2.1.3.6.5.4 The required capacity of the pressure-relief devices shall be calculated in accordance with an established
technical code recognized by the competent authority1.
6.2.1.4 Approval of pressure receptacles
6.2.1.4.1 The conformity of pressure receptacles shall be assessed at time of manufacture as required by the
competent authority. The technical documentation shall include full specifications on design and
construction, and full documentation on the manufacturing and testing.
6.2.1.4.2 Quality assurance systems shall conform to the requirements of the competent authority.
6.2.1.4.3 Pressure receptacle shells and the inner vessels of closed cryogenic receptacles shall be inspected, tested
and approved by an inspection body.
1 See for example CGA Publications S-1.2-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards-Part 2-Cargo and Portable
Tanks for Compressed Gases” and S-1.1-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards-Part 1-Cylinders for Compressed
Gases”.
– 315 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 316 –
6.2.1.4.4 For refillable cylinders, pressure drums and tubes the conformity assessment of the shell and the
closure(s) may be carried out separately. In these cases, an additional assessment of the final assembly
is not required.
For bundles of cylinders, the cylinder shells and the valve(s) may be assessed separately, but an
additional assessment of the complete assembly is required.
For closed cryogenic receptacles, the inner vessels and the closures may be assessed separately, but an
additional assessment of the complete assembly is required.
For acetylene cylinders, conformity assessment shall comprise either:
(a) One assessment of conformity covering both the cylinder shell and the contained porous
material; or
(b) A separate assessment of conformity for the empty cylinder shell and an additional assessment
of conformity covering the cylinder shell with the contained porous material.
6.2.1.5 Initial inspection and test
6.2.1.5.1 New pressure receptacles, other than closed cryogenic receptacles, metal hydride storage systems and
bundles of cylinders, shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture in
accordance with the applicable design standards or recognised technical codes including the following:
On an adequate sample of pressure receptacle shells:
(a) Testing of the mechanical characteristics of the material of construction;
(b) Verification of the minimum wall thickness;
(c) Verification of the homogeneity of the material for each manufacturing batch;
(d) Inspection of the external and internal conditions;
(e) Inspection of the threads used to fit closures;
(f) Verification of the conformance with the design standard;
For all pressure receptacle shells:
(g) A hydraulic pressure test. Pressure receptacles shall meet the acceptance criteria specified in
the design and construction technical standard or technical code;
NOTE: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be
replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
(h) Inspection and assessment of manufacturing defects and either repairing them or rendering the
pressure receptacle shells unserviceable. In the case of welded pressure receptacle shells,
particular attention shall be paid to the quality of the welds;
(i) An inspection of the marks on the pressure receptacle shells;
(j) In addition, cylinder shells intended for the carriage of UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and
UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, shall be inspected to ensure proper installation and
condition of the porous material and, if applicable, the quantity of solvent.
On an adequate sample of closures:
(k) Verification of materials;
(l) Verification of dimensions;
(m) Verification of cleanliness;
(n) Inspection of completed assembly;
– 316 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 317 –
(o) Verification of the presence of marks.
For all closures:
(p) Testing for leakproofness.
6.2.1.5.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture
in accordance with the applicable design standards or recognized technical codes including the
following:
On an adequate sample of inner vessels:
(a) Testing of the mechanical characteristics of the material of construction;
(b) Verification of the minimum wall thickness;
(c) Inspection of the external and internal conditions;
(d) Verification of the conformance with the design standard or technical code;
(e) Inspection of welds by radiographic, ultrasonic or other suitable non-destructive test method
according to the applicable design and construction standard or technical code.
For all inner vessels:
(f) A hydraulic pressure test. The inner vessel shall meet the acceptance criteria specified in the
design and construction technical standard or technical code;
NOTE: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be
replaced by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
(g) Inspection and assessment of manufacturing defects and either repairing them or rendering the
inner vessel unserviceable;
(h) An inspection of the marks.
On an adequate sample of closures:
(i) Verification of materials;
(j) Verification of dimensions;
(k) Verification of cleanliness;
(l) Inspection of completed assembly;
(m) Verification of the presence of marks.
For all closures:
(n) Testing for leakproofness.
On an adequate sample of completed closed cryogenic receptacles:
(o) Testing the satisfactory operation of service equipment;
(p) Verification of the conformance with the design standard or technical code.
For all completed closed cryogenic receptacles:
(q) Testing for leakproofness.
6.2.1.5.3 For metal hydride storage systems, it shall be verified that the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1
(a), (b), (c), (d), (e) if applicable, (f), (g), (h) and (i) have been performed on an adequate sample of the
pressure receptacle shells used in the metal hydride storage system. In addition, on an adequate sample
of metal hydride storage systems, the inspections and tests specified in 6.2.1.5.1 (c) and (f) shall be
– 317 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 318 –
performed, as well as 6.2.1.5.1 (e), if applicable, and inspection of the external conditions of the metal
hydride storage system.
Additionally, all metal hydride storage systems shall undergo the initial inspections and tests specified
in 6.2.1.5.1 (h) and (i), as well as a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of the
service equipment.
6.2.1.5.4 For bundles of cylinders the cylinder shells and closures shall be subjected to initial inspection and tests
specified in 6.2.1.5.1. An adequate sample of frames shall be proof load tested to two times the
maximum gross weight of the bundles of cylinders.
Additionally, all manifolds of bundle of cylinders shall undergo a hydraulic pressure test and all the
completed bundles of cylinders shall undergo a leakproofness test.
NOTE: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by
a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
6.2.1.6 Periodic inspection and test
6.2.1.6.1 Refillable pressure receptacles, other than cryogenic receptacles, shall be subjected to periodic
inspections and tests by a body authorised by the competent authority, in accordance with the following:
(a) Check of the external conditions of the pressure receptacle and verification of the equipment and
the external marks;
(b) Check of the internal conditions of the pressure receptacle (e.g. internal inspection, verification
of minimum wall thickness);
(c) Checking of the threads either:
(i) if there is evidence of corrosion; or
(ii) if the closures or other service equipment are removed;
(d) A hydraulic pressure test of the pressure receptacle shell and, if necessary, verification of the
characteristics of the material by suitable tests;
(e) Check of service equipment, if to be reintroduced into service. This check may be carried out
separately from the inspection of the pressure receptacle shell; and
(f) A leakproofness test of bundles of cylinders after reassembly.
NOTE 1: With the agreement of the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced
by a test using a gas, where such an operation does not entail any danger.
NOTE 2: For seamless steel cylinder shells and tube shells the check of 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and hydraulic
pressure test of 6.2.1.6.1 (d) may be replaced by a procedure conforming to ISO 16148:2016 “Gas
cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Acoustic emission examination (AT) and
follow-up ultrasonic examination (UT) for periodic inspection and testing”.
NOTE 3: The check of internal conditions of 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and the hydraulic pressure test of 6.2.1.6.1
(d) may be replaced by ultrasonic examination carried out in accordance with ISO 18119:2018 for
seamless steel and seamless aluminium alloy cylinder shells.
NOTE 4: For bundles of cylinders the hydraulic test specified in (d) above shall be carried out on the
cylinder shells and on the manifolds.
NOTE 5: For the periodic inspection and test frequencies, see packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1 or,
for a chemical under pressure, packing instruction P206 of 4.1.4.1.
– 318 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 319 –
6.2.1.6.2 Cylinders intended for the carriage of UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN No. 3374 acetylene,
solvent free, shall be examined only as specified in 6.2.1.6.1 (a), (c) and (e). In addition the condition
of the porous material (e.g. cracks, top clearance, loosening, settlement) shall be examined.
6.2.1.6.3 Pressure relief valves for closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests.
6.2.1.7 Requirements for manufacturers
6.2.1.7.1 The manufacturer shall be technically able and shall possess all resources required for the satisfactory
manufacture of pressure receptacles; this relates in particular to qualified personnel:
(a) To supervise the entire manufacturing process;
(b) To carry out joining of materials; and
(c) To carry out the relevant tests.
6.2.1.7.2 A proficiency test of the manufacturers of pressure receptacle shells and the inner vessels of closed
cryogenic receptacle shall in all instances be carried out by an inspection body approved by the
competent authority of the country of approval. Proficiency testing of manufacturers of closures shall
be carried out if the competent authority requires it. This test shall be carried out either during design
type approval or during production inspection and certification.
6.2.1.8 Requirements for inspection bodies
6.2.1.8.1 Inspection bodies shall be independent from manufacturing enterprises and competent to perform the
tests, inspections and approvals required.
6.2.2 Requirements for UN pressure receptacles
In addition to the general requirements of section 6.2.1, UN pressure receptacles shall comply with the
requirements of this section, including the standards, as applicable. Manufacture of new pressure
receptacles or service equipment according to any particular standard in 6.2.2.1 and 6.2.2.3 is not
permitted after the date shown in the right hand column of the tables.
NOTE 1: UN pressure receptacles constructed according to standards applicable at the date of
manufacture may continue in use subject to the periodic inspection provisions of ADR.
NOTE 2: When EN ISO versions of the following ISO standards are available, they may be used to
fulfil the requirements of 6.2.2.1, 6.2.2.2, 6.2.2.3 and 6.2.2.4.
6.2.2.1 Design, construction and initial inspection and test
6.2.2.1.1 The following standards apply for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of refillable
UN cylinder shells, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system
and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less
than 1 100 MPa
NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section
7.3 of this standard shall not be applied for UN
cylinders.
Until 31
December 2018
ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders — Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
— Design, construction and testing — Part 1: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less
than 1 100 MPa
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
– 319 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 320 –
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 9809-2:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength
greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa
Until 31
December 2018
ISO 9809-2:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength
greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-2:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part
2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized
steel cylinders
Until 31
December 2018
ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders — Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
— Design, construction and testing — Part 3:
Normalized steel cylinders
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-4:2014 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 4: Stainless
steel cylinders with an Rm value of less than 1 100
MPa
Until further
notice
ISO 7866:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy
gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing
NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section
7.2 of this standard shall not be applied for UN
cylinders. Aluminium alloy 6351A – T6 or equivalent
shall not be authorised.
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 7866: 2012 +
Cor 1:2014
Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy
gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing
NOTE: Aluminium alloy 6351A or equivalent shall
not be used.
Until further
notice
ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test
pressure 60 bar and below
Until further
notice
ISO 18172-1:2007 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel
cylinders – Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below
Until further
notice
ISO 20703:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded aluminium-alloy
cylinders – Design, construction and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-1:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction –
Specification and test methods – Part 1: Hoop wrapped
composite gas cylinders
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 11119-1:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Hoop
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-2:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction –
Specification and test methods – Part 2: Fully wrapped
fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with load-
sharing metal liners
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 11119-2:2012
+ Amd 1:2014
Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Fully
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners
Until further
notice
– 320 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 321 –
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11119-3:2002 Gas cylinders of composite construction –
Specification and test methods – Part 3: Fully wrapped
fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders with non-load-
sharing metallic or non-metallic liners
NOTE: This standard shall not be used for linerless
cylinders manufactured from two parts joined together.
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 11119-3:2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Fully
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or
non-metallic liners
NOTE: This standard shall not be used for linerless
cylinders manufactured from two parts joined together.
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-4: 2016 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders –
Design, construction and testing – Part 4: Fully
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders up to
150 l with load-sharing welded metallic liners
Until further
notice
NOTE 1: In the above referenced standards composite cylinder shells shall be designed for a design
life of not less than 15 years..
NOTE 2: Composite cylinder shells with a design life longer than 15 years shall not be filled after 15
years from the date of manufacture, unless the design has successfully passed a service life test
programme. The programme shall be part of the initial design type approval and shall specify
inspections and tests to demonstrate that composite cylinder shells manufactured accordingly remain
safe to the end of their design life. The service life test programme and the results shall be approved by
the competent authority of the country of approval that is responsible for the initial approval of the
cylinder design. The service life of a composite cylinder shell shall not be extended beyond its initial
approved design life.
6.2.2.1.2 The following standards apply for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN tube
shells, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval
shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11120:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes for
compressed gas transport, of water capacity between
150 l and 3 000 l – Design, construction and testing
NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section
7.1 of this standard shall not be applied for UN tubes.
Until 31
December 2022
ISO 11120:2015 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel tubes of water
capacity between 150 l and 3 000 l – Design,
construction and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-1:2012 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Hoop
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-2:2012
+ Amd 1:2014
Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 2: Fully
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l with load-sharing metal liners
Until further
notice
ISO 11119-3:2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite gas cylinders and
tubes – Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Fully
wrapped fibre reinforced composite gas cylinders and
tubes up to 450 l with non-load-sharing metallic or
non-metallic liners
NOTE: This standard shall not be used for linerless
cylinders manufactured from two parts joined together.
Until further
notice
– 321 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 322 –
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11515: 2013 Gas cylinders – Refillable composite reinforced tubes
of water capacity between 450 l and 3 000 l – Design,
construction and testing
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 11515:2013 +
Amd 1:2018
Gas cylinders – Refillable composite reinforced tubes
of water capacity between 450 l and 3000 l – Design,
construction and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-2:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes – Part
2: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength greater than or equal to 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes
Until further
notice
NOTE 1: In the above referenced standards composite tube shells shall be designed for a design life
of not less than 15 years.
NOTE 2: Composite tube shells with a design life longer than 15 years shall not be filled after 15 years
from the date of manufacture, unless the design has successfully passed a service life test programme.
The programme shall be part of the initial design type approval and shall specify inspections and tests
to demonstrate that composite tube shells manufactured accordingly remain safe to the end of their
design life. The service life test programme and the results shall be approved by the competent authority
of the country of approval that is responsible for the initial approval of the tube design. The service life
of a composite tube shell shall not be extended beyond its initial approved design life.
6.2.2.1.3 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of
UN acetylene cylinders, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment
system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
For the cylinder shell:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 9809-1:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less
than 1 100 MPa
NOTE: The note concerning the F factor in section
7.3 of this standard shall not be applied for UN
cylinders.
Until 31
December 2018
ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less
than 1 100 MPa
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-3:2000 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized
steel cylinders
Until 31
December 2018
ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 3: Normalized
steel cylinders
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
3: Normalized steel cylinders and tubes
Until further
notice
– 322 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 323 –
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders – Test
pressure 60 bar and below
Until further
notice
ISO 7866:2012 +
Cor 1:2014
Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless aluminium alloy
gas cylinders – Design, construction and testing
NOTE: Aluminium alloy 6351A or equivalent shall
not be used.
Until further
notice
For the acetylene cylinder including the porous material:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 3807-1:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 1:
Cylinders without fusible plugs
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 3807-2:2000 Cylinders for acetylene – Basic requirements – Part 2:
Cylinders with fusible plugs
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 3807:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Basic
requirements and type testing
Until further
notice
6.2.2.1.4 The following standard applies for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN closed
cryogenic receptacles, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system
and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 21029-1:2004 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated
vessels of not more than 1 000 l volume – Part 1:
Design, fabrication, inspection and tests
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 21029-1:2018
+ Amd 1:2019
Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated
vessels of not more than 1 000 litres volume – Part 1:
Design, fabrication, inspection and tests
Until further
notice
6.2.2.1.5 The following standard applies for the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of UN metal
hydride storage systems, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment
system and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed
in reversible metal hydride
Until 31 December
2026
ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed
in reversible metal hydride
Until further notice
6.2.2.1.6 The following standard applies to the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN bundles
of cylinders. Each cylinder in a UN bundle of cylinders shall be a UN cylinder or UN cylinder shell
complying with the requirements of 6.2.2. The inspection requirements related to the conformity
assessment system and approval for UN bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 10961:2010 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design,
manufacture, testing and inspection
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 10961:2019 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Design,
manufacture, testing and inspection
Until further
notice
NOTE: Changing one or more cylinders or cylinder shells of the same design type, including the same
test pressure, in an existing UN bundle of cylinders does not require a new conformity assessment of
the existing bundle. Service equipment of the bundle of cylinders can also be replaced without requiring
a new conformity assessment if it complies with the design type approval.
6.2.2.1.7 The following standards apply to the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN cylinders
for adsorbed gases except that the inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system
and approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
– 323 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 324 –
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11513:2011 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders
containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas
packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design,
construction, testing, use and periodic inspection
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 11513:2019 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders
containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas
packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design,
construction, testing, use and periodic inspection
Until further
notice
ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders
– Design, construction and testing – Part 1: Quenched
and tempered steel cylinders with tensile strength less
than 1 100 MPa
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders — Design, construction and testing of
refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes — Part
1: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders and tubes
with tensile strength less than 1 100 MPa
Until further
notice
6.2.2.1.8 The following standards apply for the design, construction and initial inspection and test of UN pressure
drums, except that inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and approval
shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5:
Reference Title Applicable for
Manufacture
ISO 21172-1:2015 Gas cylinders – Welded steel pressure drums up to
3 000 litres capacity for the transport of gases –
Design and construction – Part 1: Capacities up to
1 000 litres
NOTE: Irrespective of section 6.3.3.4 of this
standard, welded steel gas pressure drums with dished
ends convex to pressure may be used for the carriage
of corrosive substances provided all applicable
requirements of ADR are met.
Until 31 December
2026
ISO 21172-1:2015
+ Amd 1:2018
Gas cylinders – Welded steel pressure drums up to
3 000 litres capacity for the transport of gases –
Design and construction – Part 1: Capacities up to
1 000 litres
Until further notice
ISO 4706:2008 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders –
Test pressure 60 bar and below
Until further notice
ISO 18172-1:2007 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded stainless steel
cylinders – Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below
Until further notice
6.2.2.1.9 The following standards apply to the design, construction and initial inspection and test of non-refillable
UN cylinders except that the inspection requirements related to the conformity assessment system and
approval shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.5.
Reference Title Applicable for
Manufacture
ISO 11118:1999 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders
– Specification and test methods
Until 31 December
2020
ISO 13340:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder valves for
non-refillable cylinders – Specification and prototype
testing
Until 31 December
2020
ISO 11118:2015 Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders
– Specification and test methods
Until 31 December
2026
ISO 11118:2015
+Amd.1:2019
Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders –
Specification and test methods
Until further notice
– 324 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 325 –
6.2.2.2 Materials
In addition to the material requirements specified in the design and construction standards, and any
restrictions specified in the applicable packing instruction for the gas(es) to be carried (e.g. packing
instruction P200 or P205 of 4.1.4.1), the following standards apply to material compatibility:
Reference Title
ISO 11114-1:2012 +
A1:2017
Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas
contents – Part 1: Metallic materials
ISO 11114-2:2013 Gas cylinders – Compatibility of cylinder and valve materials with gas
contents – Part 2: Non-metallic materials
6.2.2.3 Closures and their protection
The following standards apply to the design, construction, and initial inspection and test of closures and
their protection:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 11117:1998 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and valve guards
for industrial and medical gas cylinders – Design,
construction and tests
Until 31
December 2014
ISO 11117:2008 +
Cor 1:2009
Gas cylinders − Valve protection caps and valve guards
− Design, construction and tests
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 11117:2019 Gas cylinders – Valve protection caps and guards –
Design, construction and tests
Until further
notice
ISO 10297:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable gas cylinder valves –
Specification and type testing
Until 31
December 2008
ISO 10297:2006 Gas cylinders – Refillable gas cylinder valves –
Specification and type testing
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 10297:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and
type testing
Until 31
December 2022
ISO 10297:2014 +
A1:2017
Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Specification and
type testing
Until further
notice
ISO 13340:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder valves for non-
refillable cylinders – Specification and prototype
testing
Until 31
December 2020
ISO 14246:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests
and examination
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 14246:2014 +
A1:2017
Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves – Manufacturing tests
and examinations
Until further
notice
ISO 17871:2015 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinders valves-
Specification and type testing
NOTE: This standard shall not be used for flammable
gases.
Until 31
December 2026
ISO 17871:2020 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinder valves –
Specification and type testing.
Until further
notice
ISO 17879:2017 Gas cylinders – Self-closing cylinder valves –
Specification and type testing
NOTE: This standard shall not be applied to self-
closing valves in acetylene cylinders.
Until further
notice
For UN metal hydride storage systems, the requirements specified in the following standard apply to
closures and their protection:
Reference Title Applicable for
manufacture
ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed
in reversible metal hydride
Until 31 December
2026
ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen absorbed
in reversible metal hydride
Until further notice
– 325 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 326 –
6.2.2.4 Periodic inspection and test
The following standards apply to the periodic inspection and testing of UN cylinders and their closures:
Reference Title Applicable
ISO 6406:2005 Periodic inspection and testing of seamless steel gas
cylinders
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 18119:2018 Gas cylinders – Seamless steel and seamless
aluminium-alloy gas cylinders and tubes – Periodic
inspection and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 10460:2005 Gas cylinders – Welded carbon-steel gas cylinders –
Periodic inspection and testing
NOTE: The repair of welds described in clause 12.1
of this standard shall not be permitted. Repairs
described in clause 12.2 require the approval of the
competent authority which approved the periodic
inspection and test body in accordance with 6.2.2.6.
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 10460:2018 Gas cylinders – Welded aluminium-alloy, carbon and
stainless steel gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and
testing.
Until further
notice
ISO 10461:2005 +
A1:2006
Seamless aluminium-alloy gas cylinders – Periodic
inspection and testing
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 10462:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Periodic
inspection and maintenance
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 10462:2013 +
Amd1:2019
Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Periodic
inspection and maintenance
Until further
notice
ISO 11513:2011 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders
containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas
packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design,
construction, testing, use and periodic inspection
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 11513:2019 Gas cylinders – Refillable welded steel cylinders
containing materials for sub-atmospheric gas
packaging (excluding acetylene) – Design,
construction, testing, use and periodic inspection
Until further
notice
ISO 11623:2015 Gas cylinders – Composite construction – Periodic
inspection and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 22434:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Inspection and
maintenance of cylinder valves
NOTE: These requirements may be met at times other
than at the periodic inspection and test of UN cylinders
Until further
notice
ISO 20475:2018 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Periodic inspection
and testing
Until further
notice
ISO 23088:2020 Gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing of
welded steel pressure drums — Capacities up to 1 000 l
Until further
notice
The following standard applies to the periodic inspection and testing of UN metal hydride storage
systems:
Reference Title Applicable
ISO 16111:2008 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen
absorbed in reversible metal hydride
Until 31
December 2024
ISO 16111:2018 Transportable gas storage devices – Hydrogen
absorbed in reversible metal hydride
Until further
notice
– 326 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 327 –
6.2.2.5 Conformity assessment system and approval for manufacture of pressure receptacles
6.2.2.5.0 Definitions
For the purposes of this sub-section:
Conformity assessment system means a system for competent authority approval of a manufacturer, by
pressure receptacle design type approval, approval of manufacturer’s quality system and approval of
inspection bodies;
Design type means a pressure receptacle design as specified by a particular pressure receptacle standard;
Verify means confirm by examination or provision of objective evidence that specified requirements
have been fulfilled.
NOTE: In this subsection when separate assessment is used, the term pressure receptacle shall refer
to pressure receptacle, pressure receptacle shell, inner vessel of the closed cryogenic receptacle or
closure, as appropriate.
6.2.2.5.1 The requirements of 6.2.2.5 shall be used for the conformity assessments of pressure receptacles.
Paragraph 6.2.1.4.4 gives details of which parts of pressure receptacles may be conformity assessed
separately. However, the requirements of 6.2.2.5 may be replaced by requirements specified by the
competent authority in the following cases:
(a) Conformity assessment of closures;
(b) Conformity assessment of the complete assembly of bundles of cylinders provided the cylinder
shells have been conformity assessed in accordance with the requirements of 6.2.2.5; and
(c) Conformity assessment of the complete assembly of closed cryogenic receptacles provided the
inner vessel has been conformity assessed in accordance with the requirements of 6.2.2.5.
6.2.2.5.2 General requirements
Competent authority
6.2.2.5.2.1 The competent authority that approves the pressure receptacle shall approve the conformity assessment
system for the purpose of ensuring that pressure receptacles conform to the requirements of ADR. In
instances where the competent authority that approves a pressure receptacle is not the competent
authority in the country of manufacture, the marks of the approval country and the country of
manufacture shall be indicated in the pressure receptacle marks (see 6.2.2.7 and 6.2.2.8).
The competent authority of the country of approval shall supply, upon request, evidence demonstrating
compliance to this conformity assessment system to its counterpart in a country of use.
6.2.2.5.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its functions in this conformity assessment system in whole or
in part.
6.2.2.5.2.3 The competent authority shall ensure that a current list of approved inspection bodies and their identity
marks and approved manufacturers and their identity marks is available.
Inspection body
6.2.2.5.2.4 The inspection body shall be approved by the competent authority for the inspection of pressure
receptacles and shall:
(a) Have a staff with an organizational structure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, to
satisfactorily perform its technical functions;
(b) Have access to suitable and adequate facilities and equipment;
(c) Operate in an impartial manner and be free from any influence which could prevent it from
doing so;
(d) Ensure commercial confidentiality of the commercial and proprietary activities of the
manufacturer and other bodies;
– 327 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 328 –
(e) Maintain clear demarcation between actual inspection body functions and unrelated functions;
(f) Operate a documented quality system;
(g) Ensure that the tests and inspections specified in the relevant pressure receptacle standard and
ADR are performed; and
(h) Maintain an effective and appropriate report and record system in accordance with 6.2.2.5.6.
6.2.2.5.2.5 The inspection body shall perform design type approval, pressure receptacle production testing and
inspection, and certification to verify conformity with the relevant pressure receptacle standard
(see 6.2.2.5.4 and 6.2.2.5.5).
Manufacturer
6.2.2.5.2.6 The manufacturer shall:
(a) Operate a documented quality system in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3;
(b) Apply for design type approvals in accordance with 6.2.2.5.4;
(c) Select an inspection body from the list of approved inspection bodies maintained by the
competent authority in the country of approval; and
(d) Maintain records in accordance with 6.2.2.5.6.
Testing laboratory
6.2.2.5.2.7 The testing laboratory shall have:
(a) Staff with an organizational structure, sufficient in number, competence, and skill; and
(b) Suitable and adequate facilities and equipment to perform the tests required by the
manufacturing standard to the satisfaction of the inspection body.
6.2.2.5.3 Manufacturer’s quality system
6.2.2.5.3.1 The quality system shall contain all the elements, requirements, and provisions adopted by the
manufacturer. It shall be documented in a systematic and orderly manner in the form of written policies,
procedures and instructions.
The contents shall in particular include adequate descriptions of:
(a) The organizational structure and responsibilities of personnel with regard to design and product
quality;
(b) The design control and design verification techniques, processes, and procedures that will be
used when designing the pressure receptacles;
(c) The relevant pressure receptacle manufacturing, quality control, quality assurance and process
operation instructions that will be used;
(d) Quality records, such as inspection reports, test data and calibration data;
(e) Management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system arising from the
audits in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3.2;
(f) The process describing how customer requirements are met;
(g) The process for control of documents and their revision;
(h) The means for control of non-conforming pressure receptacles, purchased components, in-
process and final materials; and
(i) Training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel.
– 328 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 329 –
6.2.2.5.3.2 Audit of the quality system
The quality system shall be initially assessed to determine whether it meets the requirements in
6.2.2.5.3.1 to the satisfaction of the competent authority.
The manufacturer shall be notified of the results of the audit. The notification shall contain the
conclusions of the audit and any corrective actions required.
Periodic audits shall be carried out, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, to ensure that the
manufacturer maintains and applies the quality system. Reports of the periodic audits shall be provided
to the manufacturer.
6.2.2.5.3.3 Maintenance of the quality system
The manufacturer shall maintain the quality system as approved in order that it remains adequate and
efficient.
The manufacturer shall notify the competent authority that approved the quality system, of any intended
changes. The proposed changes shall be evaluated in order to determine whether the amended quality
system will still satisfy the requirements in 6.2.2.5.3.1.
6.2.2.5.4 Approval process
Initial design type approval
6.2.2.5.4.1 The initial design type approval shall consist of approval of the manufacturer’s quality system and
approval of the pressure receptacle design to be produced. An application for an initial design type
approval shall meet the requirements of 6.2.2.5.4.2 to 6.2.2.5.4.6 and 6.2.2.5.4.9.
6.2.2.5.4.2 A manufacturer desiring to produce pressure receptacles in accordance with a pressure receptacle
standard and ADR shall apply for, obtain, and retain a design type approval certificate issued by the
competent authority in the country of approval for at least one pressure receptacle design type in
accordance with the procedure given in 6.2.2.5.4.9. This certificate shall, on request, be submitted to
the competent authority of the country of use.
6.2.2.5.4.3 An application shall be made for each manufacturing facility and shall include:
(a) The name and registered address of the manufacturer and in addition, if the application is
submitted by an authorised representative, its name and address;
(b) The address of the manufacturing facility (if different from the above);
(c) The name and title of the person(s) responsible for the quality system;
(d) The designation of the pressure receptacle and the relevant pressure receptacle standard;
(e) Details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority;
(f) The identity of the inspection body for design type approval;
(g) Documentation on the manufacturing facility as specified under 6.2.2.5.3.1; and
(h) The technical documentation required for design type approval, which shall enable verification
of the conformity of the pressure receptacles with the requirements of the relevant pressure
receptacle design standard. The technical documentation shall cover the design and method of
manufacture and shall contain, as far as is relevant for assessment, at least the following:
(i) pressure receptacle design standard, design and manufacturing drawings, showing
components and subassemblies, if any;
(ii) descriptions and explanations necessary for the understanding of the drawings and
intended use of the pressure receptacles;
(iii) a list of the standards necessary to fully define the manufacturing process;
(iv) design calculations and material specifications; and
– 329 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 330 –
(v) design type approval test reports, describing the results of examinations and tests
carried out in accordance with 6.2.2.5.4.9.
6.2.2.5.4.4 An initial audit in accordance with 6.2.2.5.3.2 shall be performed to the satisfaction of the competent
authority.
6.2.2.5.4.5 If the manufacturer is denied approval, the competent authority shall provide written detailed reasons
for such denial.
6.2.2.5.4.6 Following approval, changes to the information submitted under 6.2.2.5.4.3 relating to the initial
approval shall be provided to the competent authority.
Subsequent design type approvals
6.2.2.5.4.7 An application for a subsequent design type approval shall meet the requirements of 6.2.2.5.4.8 and
6.2.2.5.4.9, provided a manufacturer is in the possession of an initial design type approval. In such a
case, the manufacturer’s quality system according to 6.2.2.5.3 shall have been approved during the initial
design type approval and shall be applicable for the new design.
6.2.2.5.4.8 The application shall include:
(a) The name and address of the manufacturer and in addition, if the application is submitted by
an authorised representative, its name and address;
(b) Details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority;
(c) Evidence that initial design type approval has been granted; and
(d) The technical documentation, as described in 6.2.2.5.4.3 (h).
Procedure for design type approval
6.2.2.5.4.9 The inspection body shall:
(a) Examine the technical documentation to verify that:
(i) the design is in accordance with the relevant provisions of the standard, and
(ii) the prototype lot has been manufactured in conformity with the technical
documentation and is representative of the design;
(b) Verify that the production inspections have been carried out as required in accordance with
6.2.2.5.5;
(c) As required by the pressure receptacle standard or technical code, carry out or supervise the
tests of pressure receptacles as required for design type approval;
(d) Perform or have performed the examinations and tests specified in the pressure receptacle
standard to determine that:
(i) the standard has been applied and fulfilled, and
(ii) the procedures adopted by the manufacturer meet the requirements of the standard;
and
(e) Ensure that the various type approval examinations and tests are correctly and competently
carried out.
After prototype testing has been carried out with satisfactory results and all applicable requirements of
6.2.2.5.4 have been satisfied, a design type approval certificate shall be issued, which shall include the
name and address of the manufacturer, results and conclusions of the examination, and the necessary
data for identification of the design type. If it was not possible to evaluate exhaustively the compatibility
of the materials of construction with the contents of the pressure receptacle when the certificate was
issued, a statement that compatibility assessment was not completed shall be included in the design type
approval certificate.
– 330 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 331 –
If the manufacturer is denied a design type approval, the competent authority shall provide written
detailed reasons for such denial.
6.2.2.5.4.10 Modifications to approved design types
The manufacturer shall either:
(a) Inform the issuing competent authority of modifications to the approved design type, where
such modifications do not constitute a new design, as specified in the pressure receptacle
standard; or
(b) Request a subsequent design type approval where such modifications constitute a new design
according to the relevant pressure receptacle standard. This additional approval shall be given
in the form of an amendment to the original design type approval certificate.
6.2.2.5.4.11 Upon request, the competent authority shall communicate to any other competent authority, information
concerning design type approval, modifications of approvals and withdrawn approvals.
6.2.2.5.5 Production inspection and certification
General requirements
An inspection body, or its delegate, shall carry out the inspection and certification of each pressure
receptacle. The inspection body selected by the manufacturer for inspection and testing during
production may be different from the inspection body used for the design type approval testing.
Where it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the inspection body that the manufacturer has trained
competent inspectors, independent of the manufacturing operations, inspection may be performed by
those inspectors. In such a case, the manufacturer shall maintain training records of the inspectors.
The inspection body shall verify that the inspections by the manufacturer, and tests performed on those
pressure receptacles, fully conform to the standard and the requirements of ADR. Should non-
conformance in conjunction with this inspection and testing be determined, the permission to have
inspection performed by the manufacturer’s inspectors may be withdrawn.
The manufacturer shall, after approval by the inspection body, make a declaration of conformity with
the certified design type. The application of the pressure receptacle certification marks shall be
considered a declaration that the pressure receptacle complies with the applicable pressure receptacle
standards and the requirements of this conformity assessment system and ADR. The inspection body
shall affix or delegate the manufacturer to affix the pressure receptacle certification marks and the
registered mark of the inspection body to each approved pressure receptacle.
A certificate of compliance, signed by the inspection body and the manufacturer, shall be issued before
the pressure receptacles are filled.
6.2.2.5.6 Records
Design type approval and certificate of compliance records shall be retained by the manufacturer and
the inspection body for not less than 20 years.
6.2.2.6 Approval system for periodic inspection and test of pressure receptacles
6.2.2.6.1 Definition
For the purposes of this section:
Approval system means a system for competent authority approval of a body performing periodic
inspection and test of pressure receptacles (hereinafter referred to as “periodic inspection and test
body”), including approval of that body’s quality system.
6.2.2.6.2 General requirements
Competent authority
6.2.2.6.2.1 The competent authority shall establish an approval system for the purpose of ensuring that the periodic
inspection and test of pressure receptacles conform to the requirements of ADR. In instances where the
– 331 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 332 –
competent authority that approves a body performing periodic inspection and test of a pressure
receptacle is not the competent authority of the country approving the manufacture of the pressure
receptacle, the marks of the approval country of periodic inspection and test shall be indicated in the
pressure receptacle marks (see 6.2.2.7).
The competent authority of the country of approval for the periodic inspection and test shall supply,
upon request, evidence demonstrating compliance to this approval system including the records of the
periodic inspection and test to its counterpart in a country of use.
The competent authority of the country of approval may terminate the approval certificate referred to in
6.2.2.6.4.1, upon evidence demonstrating non-compliance with the approval system.
6.2.2.6.2.2 The competent authority may delegate its functions in this approval system, in whole or in part.
6.2.2.6.2.3 The competent authority shall ensure that a current list of approved periodic inspection and test bodies
and their identity marks is available.
Periodic inspection and test body
6.2.2.6.2.4 The periodic inspection and test body shall be approved by the competent authority and shall:
(a) Have a staff with an organizational structure, capable, trained, competent, and skilled, to
satisfactorily perform its technical functions;
(b) Have access to suitable and adequate facilities and equipment;
(c) Operate in an impartial manner and be free from any influence which could prevent it from
doing so;
(d) Ensure commercial confidentiality;
(e) Maintain clear demarcation between actual periodic inspection and test body functions and
unrelated functions;
(f) Operate a documented quality system accordance with 6.2.2.6.3;
(g) Apply for approval in accordance with 6.2.2.6.4;
(h) Ensure that the periodic inspections and tests are performed in accordance with 6.2.2.6.5; and
(i) Maintain an effective and appropriate report and record system in accordance with 6.2.2.6.6.
6.2.2.6.3 Quality system and audit of the periodic inspection and test body
6.2.2.6.3.1 Quality system
The quality system shall contain all the elements, requirements, and provisions adopted by the periodic
inspection and test body. It shall be documented in a systematic and orderly manner in the form of
written policies, procedures, and instructions.
The quality system shall include:
(a) A description of the organizational structure and responsibilities;
(b) The relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance, and process operation
instructions that will be used;
(c) Quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates;
(d) Management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system arising from the
audits performed in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2;
(e) A process for control of documents and their revision;
(f) A means for control of non-conforming pressure receptacles; and
– 332 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 333 –
(g) Training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel.
6.2.2.6.3.2 Audit
The periodic inspection and test body and its quality system shall be audited in order to determine
whether it meets the requirements of ADR to the satisfaction of the competent authority.
An audit shall be conducted as part of the initial approval process (see 6.2.2.6.4.3). An audit may be
required as part of the process to modify an approval (see 6.2.2.6.4.6).
Periodic audits shall be conducted, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, to ensure that the
periodic inspection and test body continues to meet the requirements of ADR.
The periodic inspection and test body shall be notified of the results of any audit. The notification shall
contain the conclusions of the audit and any corrective actions required.
6.2.2.6.3.3 Maintenance of the quality system
The periodic inspection and test body shall maintain the quality system as approved in order that it
remains adequate and efficient.
The periodic inspection and test body shall notify the competent authority that approved the quality
system, of any intended changes, in accordance with the process for modification of an approval
in 6.2.2.6.4.6.
6.2.2.6.4 Approval process for periodic inspection and test bodies
Initial approval
6.2.2.6.4.1 A body desiring to perform periodic inspection and test of pressure receptacles in accordance with a
pressure receptacle standard and ADR shall apply for, obtain, and retain an approval certificate issued
by the competent authority.
This written approval shall, on request, be submitted to the competent authority of a country of use.
6.2.2.6.4.2 An application shall be made for each periodic inspection and test body and shall include:
(a) The name and address of the periodic inspection and test body and, if the application is submitted
by an authorised representative, its name and address;
(b) The address of each facility performing periodic inspection and test;
(c) The name and title of the person(s) responsible for the quality system;
(d) The designation of the pressure receptacles, the periodic inspection and test methods, and the
relevant pressure receptacle standards met by the quality system;
(e) Documentation on each facility, the equipment, and the quality system as specified
under 6.2.2.6.3.1;
(f) The qualifications and training records of the periodic inspection and test personnel; and
(g) Details of any refusal of approval of a similar application by any other competent authority.
6.2.2.6.4.3 The competent authority shall:
(a) Examine the documentation to verify that the procedures are in accordance with the requirements
of the relevant pressure receptacle standards and ADR; and
(b) Conduct an audit in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2 to verify that the inspections and tests are carried
out as required by the relevant pressure receptacle standards and ADR, to the satisfaction of the
competent authority.
6.2.2.6.4.4 After the audit has been carried out with satisfactory results and all applicable requirements of 6.2.2.6.4
have been satisfied, an approval certificate shall be issued. It shall include the name of the periodic
inspection and test body, the registered mark, the address of each facility, and the necessary data for
– 333 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 334 –
identification of its approved activities (e.g. designation of pressure receptacles, periodic inspection and
test method and pressure receptacle standards).
6.2.2.6.4.5 If the periodic inspection and test body is denied approval, the competent authority shall provide written
detailed reasons for such denial.
Modifications to periodic inspection and test body approvals
6.2.2.6.4.6 Following approval, the periodic inspection and test body shall notify the issuing competent authority
of any modifications to the information submitted under 6.2.2.6.4.2 relating to the initial approval.
The modifications shall be evaluated in order to determine whether the requirements of the relevant
pressure receptacle standards and ADR will be satisfied. An audit in accordance with 6.2.2.6.3.2 may
be required. The competent authority shall accept or reject these modifications in writing, and an
amended approval certificate shall be issued as necessary.
6.2.2.6.4.7 Upon request, the competent authority shall communicate to any other competent authority, information
concerning initial approvals, modifications of approvals, and withdrawn approvals.
6.2.2.6.5 Periodic inspection and test and certification
The application of the periodic inspection and test marks to a pressure receptacle shall be considered a
declaration that the pressure receptacle complies with the applicable pressure receptacle standards and
the requirements of ADR. The periodic inspection and test body shall affix the periodic inspection and
test marks, including its registered mark, to each approved pressure receptacle (see 6.2.2.7.7).
A record certifying that a pressure receptacle has passed the periodic inspection and test shall be issued
by the periodic inspection and test body, before the pressure receptacle is filled.
6.2.2.6.6 Records
The periodic inspection and test body shall retain records of pressure receptacle periodic inspection and
tests (both passed and failed) including the location of the test facility, for not less than 15 years.
The owner of the pressure receptacle shall retain an identical record until the next periodic inspection
and test unless the pressure receptacle is permanently removed from service.
6.2.2.7 Marking of refillable UN pressure receptacles
NOTE: Marking requirements for UN metal hydride storage systems are given in 6.2.2.9, marking
requirements for UN bundles of cylinders are given in 6.2.2.10 and marking requirements for closures
are given in 6.2.2.11.
6.2.2.7.1 Refillable UN pressure receptacle shells and closed cryogenic receptacles shall be marked clearly and
legibly with certification, operational and manufacturing marks. These marks shall be permanently
affixed (e.g. stamped, engraved, or etched). The marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the
pressure receptacle shell or on a permanently affixed component of the pressure receptacle (e.g. welded
collar or corrosion resistant plate welded on the outer jacket of a closed cryogenic receptacle). Except
for the UN packaging symbol, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for pressure receptacles
with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for pressure receptacles with a diameter
less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the UN packaging symbol shall be 10 mm for pressure
receptacles with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for pressure receptacles with a
diameter less than 140 mm.
6.2.2.7.2 The following certification marks shall be applied:
(a) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible
bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in
Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11. This symbol shall not be used for pressure receptacles
which only conform to the requirements of 6.2.3 to 6.2.5 (see 6.2.3.9);
(b) The technical standard (e.g. ISO 9809-1) used for design, manufacture and testing;
– 334 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 335 –
NOTE: For acetylene cylinders the standard ISO 3807 shall also be marked.
(c) The character(s) identifying the country of approval as indicated by the distinguishing sign used
on vehicles in international road traffic2;
NOTE: For the purpose of this mark the country of approval means the country of the competent
authority that authorized the initial inspection and test of the individual receptacle at the time of
manufacture.
(d) The identity mark or stamp of the inspection body that is registered with the competent authority
of the country authorizing the marking;
(e) The date of the initial inspection, the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits)
separated by a slash (i.e. “/”);
NOTE: When an acetylene cylinder is conformity assessed in accordance with 6.2.1.4.4 (b) and
the inspection bodies for the cylinder shell and the acetylene cylinder are different, their
respective marks (d) are required. Only the initial inspection date (e) of the completed acetylene
cylinder is required. If the country of approval of the inspection body responsible for the initial
inspection and test is different, a second mark (c) shall be applied.
6.2.2.7.3 The following operational marks shall be applied:
(f) The test pressure in bar, preceded by the letters “PH” and followed by the letters “BAR”;
(g) The mass of the empty pressure receptacle including all permanently attached integral parts (e.g.
neck ring, foot ring, etc.) in kilograms, followed by the letters “KG”. This mass shall not include
the mass of closure(s), valve protection cap or valve guard, any coating or porous material for
acetylene. The mass shall be expressed to three significant figures rounded up to the last digit.
For cylinders of less than 1 kg, the mass shall be expressed to two significant figures rounded up
to the last digit. In the case of pressure receptacles for UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved and
UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, at least one decimal shall be shown after the decimal point
and two digits for pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg;
(h) The minimum guaranteed wall thickness of the pressure receptacle in millimetres followed by
the letters “MM”. This mark is not required for pressure receptacles with a water capacity less
than or equal to 1 litre or for composite cylinders or for closed cryogenic receptacles;
(i) In the case of pressure receptacles for compressed gases, UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved, and
UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free, the working pressure in bar, preceded by the letters “PW”.
In the case of closed cryogenic receptacles, the maximum allowable working pressure preceded
by the letters “MAWP”;
NOTE: When a cylinder shell is intended for use as an acetylene cylinder (including the porous
material), the working pressure mark is not required until the acetylene cylinder is completed
(j) In the case of pressure receptacles for liquefied gases, refrigerated liquefied gases and dissolved
gases, the water capacity in litres expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last
digit, followed by the letter “L”. If the value of the minimum or nominal water capacity is an
integer, the figures after the decimal point may be neglected;
(k) In the case of cylinders for UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved:
(i) the tare in kilograms consisting of the total of the mass of the empty cylinder shell, the
service equipment (including porous material) not removed during filling, any coating,
the solvent and the saturation gas expressed to three significant figures rounded down to
the last digit followed by the letters “KG”. At least one decimal shall be shown after the
decimal point. For pressure receptacles of less than 1 kg, the mass shall be expressed to
two significant figures rounded down to the last digit;
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 335 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 336 –
(ii) the identity of the porous material (e.g.: name or trademark); and
(iii) the total mass of the filled acetylene cylinder in kilograms followed by the letters “KG”;
(l) In the case of cylinders for UN No. 3374 acetylene, solvent free:
(i) the tare in kilograms consisting of the total of the mass of the empty cylinder shell, the
service equipment (including porous material) not removed during filling and any coating
expressed to three significant figures rounded down to the last digit followed by the letters
“KG”. At least one decimal shall be shown after the decimal point. For pressure
receptacles of less than 1 kg, the mass shall be expressed to two significant figures
rounded down to the last digit;
(ii) the identity of the porous material (e.g.: name or trademark); and
(iii) the total mass of the filled acetylene cylinder in kilograms followed by the letters “KG”.
6.2.2.7.4 The following manufacturing marks shall be applied:
(m) Identification of the cylinder thread (e.g. 25E). This mark is not required for closed cryogenic
receptacles;
NOTE: Information on marks that may be used for identifying threads for cylinders is given in
ISO/TR 11364, Gas cylinders – Compilation of national and international valve stem/gas
cylinder neck threads and their identification and marking system.
(n) The manufacturer’s mark registered by the competent authority. When the country of
manufacture is not the same as the country of approval, then the manufacturer’s mark shall be
preceded by the character(s) identifying the country of manufacture as indicated by the
distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic2. The country mark and the
manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space or slash;
NOTE: For acetylene cylinders, if the manufacturer of the acetylene cylinder and the
manufacturer of the cylinder shell are different, only the mark of the manufacturer of the
completed acetylene cylinder is required.
(o) The serial number assigned by the manufacturer;
(p) In the case of steel pressure receptacles and composite pressure receptacles with steel liner
intended for the carriage of gases with a risk of hydrogen embrittlement, the letter “H” showing
compatibility of the steel (see ISO 11114-1:2012 + A1:2017);
(q) For composite cylinders and tubes having a limited design life, the letters “FINAL” followed by
the design life shown as the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a
slash (i.e. “/”);
(r) For composite cylinders and tubes having a limited design life greater than 15 years and for
composite cylinders and tubes having non-limited design life, the letters “SERVICE” followed
by the date 15 years from the date of manufacture (initial inspection) shown as the year (four
digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a slash (i.e. “/”).
NOTE: Once the initial design type has passed the service life test programme requirements in
accordance with 6.2.2.1.1 NOTE 2 or 6.2.2.1.2 NOTE 2, future production no longer requires
this initial service life mark. The initial service life mark shall be made unreadable on cylinders
and tubes of a design type that has met the service life test programme requirements.
6.2.2.7.5 The above marks shall be placed in three groups:
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 336 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 337 –
– Manufacturing marks shall be the top grouping and shall appear consecutively in the sequence
given in 6.2.2.7.4 except for the marks described in 6.2.2.7.4 (q) and (r) which shall be adjacent
to the periodic inspection and test marks of 6.2.2.7.7;
– The operational marks in 6.2.2.7.3 shall be the middle grouping and the test pressure (f) shall be
immediately preceded by the working pressure (i) when the latter is required;
– Certification marks shall be the bottom grouping and shall appear in the sequence given
in 6.2.2.7.2.
The following is an example of marking a cylinder.
6.2.2.7.6 Other marks are allowed in areas other than the side wall, provided they are made in low stress areas
and are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. In the case of closed
cryogenic receptacles, such marks may be on a separate plate attached to the outer jacket. Such marks
shall not conflict with required marks.
6.2.2.7.7 In addition to the preceding marks, each refillable pressure receptacle that meets the periodic inspection
and test requirements of 6.2.2.4 shall be marked indicating:
(a) The character(s) identifying the country authorizing the body performing the periodic
inspection and test as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road
traffic2. This mark is not required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the
country approving manufacture;
(b) The registered mark of the body authorised by the competent authority for performing periodic
inspection and test;
(c) The date of the periodic inspection and test, the year (two digits) followed by the month (two
digits) separated by a slash (i.e. “/” ). Four digits may be used to indicate the year.
The above marks shall appear consecutively in the sequence given.
6.2.2.7.8 The marks in accordance with 6.2.2.7.7 may be engraved on a metallic ring affixed to the cylinder or
pressure drum when the valve is installed, and which is removable only by disconnecting the valve from
the cylinder or pressure drum.
6.2.2.7.9 (Deleted)
6.2.2.8 Marking of non-refillable UN cylinders
6.2.2.8.1 Non-refillable UN cylinders shall be marked clearly and legibly with certification and gas or cylinder
specific marks. These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g. stencilled, stamped, engraved, or etched)
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
(m) (n) (o) (p)
25E D MF 765432 H
(i) (f) (g) (j) (h)
PW200 PH300BAR 62.1KG 50L 5.8MM
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
ISO 9809-1 F IB 2000/12
– 337 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 338 –
on the cylinder. Except when stencilled, the marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the
cylinder shell or on a permanently affixed component of the cylinder (e.g. welded collar). Except for
the UN packaging symbol and the “DO NOT REFILL” mark, the minimum size of the marks shall be
5 mm for cylinders with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for cylinders with a
diameter less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the UN packaging symbol shall be 10 mm for
cylinders with a diameter greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for cylinders with a diameter less
than 140 mm. The minimum size of the “DO NOT REFILL” mark shall be 5 mm.
6.2.2.8.2 The marks listed in 6.2.2.7.2 to 6.2.2.7.4 shall be applied with the exception of (g), (h) and (m). The
serial number (o) may be replaced by the batch number. In addition, the words “DO NOT REFILL” in
letters of at least 5 mm in height are required.
6.2.2.8.3 The requirements of 6.2.2.7.5 shall apply.
NOTE: Non-refillable cylinders may, on account of their size, substitute a label for these permanent
marks.
6.2.2.8.4 Other marks are allowed provided they are made in low stress areas other than the side wall and are not
of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. Such marks shall not conflict with
required marks.
6.2.2.9 Marking of UN metal hydride storage systems
6.2.2.9.1 UN metal hydride storage systems shall be marked clearly and legibly with the marks listed below.
These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g. stamped, engraved, or etched) on the metal hydride
storage system. The marks shall be on the shoulder, top end or neck of the metal hydride storage system
or on a permanently affixed component of the metal hydride storage system. Except for the United
Nations packaging symbol, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm for metal hydride storage
systems with a smallest overall dimension greater than or equal to 140 mm and 2.5 mm for metal hydride
storage systems with a smallest overall dimension less than 140 mm. The minimum size of the United
Nations packaging symbol shall be 10 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest overall
dimension greater than or equal to 140 mm and 5 mm for metal hydride storage systems with a smallest
overall dimension less than 140 mm.
6.2.2.9.2 The following marks shall be applied:
(a) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible
bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in
Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11;
(b) “ISO 16111” (the technical standard used for design, manufacture and testing);
(c) The character(s) identifying the country of approval as indicated by the distinguishing sign used
on vehicles in international road traffic2;
NOTE: For the purpose of this mark the country of approval means the country of the competent
authority that authorized the initial inspection and test of the individual system at the time of
manufacture..
(d) The identity mark or stamp of the inspection body that is registered with the competent authority
of the country authorizing the marking;
(e) The date of the initial inspection, the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits)
separated by a slash (i.e. “/”);
(f) The test pressure of the receptacle in bar, preceded by the letters “PH” and followed by the letters
“BAR”;
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 338 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 339 –
(g) The rated charging pressure of the metal hydride storage system in bar, preceded by the letters
“RCP” and followed by the letters “BAR”;
(h) The manufacturer’s mark registered by the competent authority. When the country of
manufacture is not the same as the country of approval, then the manufacturer’s mark shall be
preceded by the character(s) identifying the country of manufacture as indicated by the
distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic2. The country mark and the
manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space or slash;
(i) The serial number assigned by the manufacturer;
(j) In the case of steel receptacles and composite receptacles with steel liner, the letter “H” showing
compatibility of the steel (see ISO 11114-1:2012 + A1:2017); and,
(k) In the case of metal hydride storage systems having limited life, the date of expiry, denoted by
the letters “FINAL” followed by the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits)
separated by a slash (i.e. “/”).
The certification marks specified in (a) to (e) above shall appear consecutively in the sequence given.
The test pressure (f) shall be immediately preceded by the rated charging pressure (g). The
manufacturing marks specified in (h) to (k) above shall appear consecutively in the sequence given.
6.2.2.9.3 Other marks are allowed in areas other than the side wall, provided they are made in low stress areas
and are not of a size and depth that will create harmful stress concentrations. Such marks shall not
conflict with required marks.
6.2.2.9.4 In addition to the preceding marks, each metal hydride storage system that meets the periodic inspection
and test requirements of 6.2.2.4 shall be marked indicating:
(a) The character(s) identifying the country authorizing the body performing the periodic inspection
and test, as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic2.
This mark is not required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the country
approving manufacture;
(b) The registered mark of the body authorised by the competent authority for performing periodic
inspection and test;
(c) The date of the periodic inspection and test, the year (two digits) followed by the month (two
digits) separated by a slash (i.e. “/” ). Four digits may be used to indicate the year.
The above marks shall appear consecutively in the sequence given.
6.2.2.10 Marking of UN bundles of cylinders
6.2.2.10.1 Individual cylinder shells in a bundle of cylinders shall be marked in accordance with 6.2.2.7. Individual
closures in a bundle of cylinders shall be marked in accordance with 6.2.2.11.
6.2.2.10.2 Refillable UN bundles of cylinders shall be marked clearly and legibly with certification, operational,
and manufacturing marks. These marks shall be permanently affixed (e.g. stamped, engraved, or etched)
on a plate permanently attached to the frame of the bundle of cylinders. Except for the UN packaging
symbol, the minimum size of the marks shall be 5 mm. The minimum size of the UN packaging symbol
shall be 10 mm.
6.2.2.10.3 The following marks shall be applied:
(a) The certification marks specified in 6.2.2.7.2 (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e);
(b) The operational marks specified in 6.2.2.7.3 (f), (i), (j) and the total of the mass of the frame of the
bundle and all permanently attached parts (cylinder shells and service equipment). Bundles
intended for the carriage of UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved and UN 3374 acetylene, solvent free
shall bear the tare as specified in clause B.4.2 of ISO 10961:2010; and
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 339 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 340 –
(c) The manufacturing marks specified in 6.2.2.7.4 (n), (o) and, where applicable, (p).
6.2.2.10.4 The marks shall be placed in three groups:
(a) The manufacturing marks shall be the top grouping and shall appear consecutively in the sequence
given in 6.2.2.10.3 (c);
(b) The operational marks in 6.2.2.10.3 (b) shall be the middle grouping and the operational mark
specified in 6.2.2.7.3 (f) shall be immediately preceded by the operational mark specified in
6.2.2.7.3 (i) when the latter is required;
(c) Certification marks shall be the bottom grouping and shall appear in the sequence given in
6.2.2.10.3 (a).
6.2.2.11 Marking of closures for refillable UN pressure receptacles
For closures the following permanent marks shall be applied clearly and legibly, (e.g. stamped, engraved
or etched):
(a) Manufacturer’s identification mark;
(b) Design standard or design standard designation;
(c) Date of manufacture (year and month or year and week) and
(d) The identity mark of the inspection body responsible for the initial inspection and test, if
applicable.
The valve test pressure shall be marked when it is less than the test pressure which is indicated by the
rating of the valve filling connection.
6.2.2.12 Equivalent procedures for conformity assessment and periodic inspection and test
For UN pressure receptacles the requirements of 6.2.2.5 and 6.2.2.6 are considered to have been
complied with when the following procedures are applied:
Procedure Relevant body
Type examination and type approval
certificate issue (1.8.7.2) a
Xa
Supervision of manufacture (1.8.7.3) and
initial inspection and tests (1.8.7.4)
Xa or IS
Periodic inspection (1.8.7.6) Xa or Xb or IS
a When an inspection body is designated by the competent authority to issue the type
approval certificate, the type examination shall be performed by that inspection body.
Each procedure as defined in the table shall be performed by a single relevant body as indicated in the
table.
For separate conformity assessments (e.g. cylinder shell and closure) see 6.2.1.4.4.
Xa means the competent authority or inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according
to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type A.
Xb means inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012
(except clause 8.1.3) type B, working exclusively for the owner or the duty holder responsible for the
pressure receptacles.
IS means an in-house inspection service of the manufacturer or an enterprise with a testing facility under
the surveillance of an inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN ISO/IEC
17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type A. The in-house inspection service shall be independent from
design process, manufacturing operations, repair and maintenance.
– 340 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 341 –
If an in-house inspection service has been used for the initial inspection and tests, the mark specified in
6.2.2.7.2 (d) shall be supplemented with the mark of the in-house inspection service.
If an in-house inspection service has carried out the periodic inspection, the mark specified in 6.2.2.7.7
(b) shall be supplemented with the mark of the in-house inspection service.
6.2.3 General requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles
6.2.3.1 Design and construction
6.2.3.1.1 Pressure receptacles and their closures not designed, constructed, inspected, tested and approved
according to the requirements of 6.2.2 shall be designed, constructed, inspected, tested and approved in
accordance with the general requirements of 6.2.1 as supplemented or modified by the requirements of
this section and those of 6.2.4 or 6.2.5.
6.2.3.1.2 Whenever possible the wall thickness shall be determined by calculation, accompanied, if needed, by
experimental stress analysis. Otherwise the wall thickness may be determined by experimental means.
Appropriate design calculations for the pressure receptacles or pressure receptacle shells including all
permanently attached parts (e.g. neck ring, foot ring, etc.) shall be used to ensure the safety of the
pressure receptacles concerned.
The minimum wall thickness to withstand pressure shall be calculated in particular with regard to:
– The calculation pressures, which shall not be less than the test pressure;
– The calculation temperatures allowing for appropriate safety margins;
– The maximum stresses and peak stress concentrations where necessary;
– Factors inherent to the properties of the material.
6.2.3.1.3 For welded pressure receptacles, only metals of weldable quality whose adequate impact strength at an
ambient temperature of –20 °C can be guaranteed shall be used.
6.2.3.1.4 For closed cryogenic receptacles, the impact strength to be established as required by 6.2.1.1.8.1 shall
be tested as laid down in 6.8.5.3.
6.2.3.1.5 Acetylene cylinders shall not be fitted with fusible plugs or any other pressure relief devices.
6.2.3.2 (Reserved)
6.2.3.3 Service equipment
6.2.3.3.1 Service equipment shall comply with 6.2.1.3.
6.2.3.3.2 Pressure drums may be provided with openings for filling and discharge and with other openings
intended for level gauges, pressure gauges or relief devices. The number of openings shall be kept to a
minimum consistent with safe operations. Pressure drums may also be provided with an inspection
opening, which shall be closed by an effective closure.
6.2.3.3.3 If cylinders are fitted with a device to prevent rolling, this device shall not be integral with the valve
cap.
6.2.3.3.4 Pressure drums which are capable of being rolled shall be equipped with rolling hoops or be otherwise
protected against damage due to rolling (e.g. by corrosion resistant metal sprayed on to the pressure
receptacle surface).
6.2.3.3.5 Bundles of cylinders shall be fitted with appropriate devices ensuring that they can be handled and
carried safely.
6.2.3.3.6 If level gauges, pressure gauges or relief devices are installed, they shall be protected in the same way
as is required for valves in 4.1.6.8.
– 341 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 342 –
6.2.3.4 Initial inspection and test
6.2.3.4.1 New pressure receptacles shall be subjected to testing and inspection during and after manufacture in
accordance with the requirements of 6.2.1.5.
6.2.3.4.2 Specific provisions applying to aluminium alloy pressure receptacle shells
(a) In addition to the initial inspection required by 6.2.1.5.1, it is necessary to test for possible
intercrystalline corrosion of the inside wall of the pressure receptacle shells where use is made
of an aluminium alloy containing copper, or where use is made of an aluminium alloy
containing magnesium and manganese and the magnesium content is greater than 3.5 % or the
manganese content lower than 0.5 %;
(b) In the case of an aluminium/copper alloy the test shall be carried out by the manufacturer at
the time of approval of a new alloy by the competent authority; it shall thereafter be repeated
in the course of production, for each pour of the alloy;
(c) In the case of an aluminium/magnesium alloy the test shall be carried out by the manufacturer
at the time of approval of a new alloy and of the manufacturing process by the competent
authority. The test shall be repeated whenever a change is made in the composition of the alloy
or in the manufacturing process.
6.2.3.5 Periodic inspection and test
6.2.3.5.1 Periodic inspection and test shall be in accordance with 6.2.1.6.
NOTE 1: With the agreement of the competent authority of the country that issued the type approval,
the hydraulic pressure test of each welded steel cylinder shell intended for the carriage of gases of UN
No. 1965, hydrocarbon gas mixture liquefied, n.o.s., with a capacity below 6.5 l may be replaced by
another test ensuring an equivalent level of safety.
NOTE 2: For seamless steel cylinder shells and tube shells the check of 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and the
hydraulic pressure test of 6.2.1.6.1 (d) may be replaced by a procedure conforming to
EN ISO 16148:2016 + A1:2020 “Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel gas cylinders and tubes –
Acoustic emission examination (AT) and follow-up ultrasonic examination (UT) for periodic inspection
and testing”.
NOTE 3: The check of 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and the hydraulic pressure test of 6.2.1.6.1 (d) may be replaced
by ultrasonic examination carried out in accordance with EN ISO 18119:2018 + A1:2021for cylinder
shells and tube shells of seamless steel or seamless aluminium alloy. Notwithstanding clause B.1 of this
standard, all cylinder shells and tube shells whose wall thickness is less than the minimum design wall
thickness shall be rejected.
6.2.3.5.2 Closed cryogenic receptacles shall be subject to periodic inspections and tests in accordance with the
periodicity defined in packing instruction P203 (8) (b) of 4.1.4.1, in accordance with the following:
(a) Check of the external condition of the pressure receptacle and verification of the service
equipment and the external marks;
(b) The leakproofness test.
6.2.3.5.3 General provisions for the substitution of dedicated check(s) for periodic inspection and test required
in 6.2.3.5.1
6.2.3.5.3.1 This paragraph only applies to types of pressure receptacles designed and manufactured in accordance
with the standards referred to in 6.2.4.1 or a technical code in accordance with 6.2.5, and for which the
inherent properties of the design prevent the checks (b) or (d) for periodic inspection and test required
in 6.2.1.6.1 to be applied or the results to be interpreted.
For such pressure receptacles, these check(s) shall be replaced by alternative method(s) related to the
characteristics of the specific design specified under 6.2.3.5.4, and detailed in a special provision of
Chapter 3.3 or a standard referenced in 6.2.4.2.
The alternative methods shall specify which checks and tests according to 6.2.1.6.1 (b) and (d) are to be
substituted.
– 342 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 343 –
The alternative method(s) in combination with the remaining checks according to 6.2.1.6.1 (a) to (e)
shall ensure a level of safety at least equivalent to the safety level for pressure receptacles of a similar
size and use which are periodically inspected and tested in compliance with 6.2.3.5.1.
The alternative method(s) shall moreover detail all the following elements:
– A description of the relevant types of pressure receptacles;
– The procedure for the test(s);
– The specifications of the acceptance criteria;
– A description of the measures to be taken in case of rejection of pressure receptacles.
6.2.3.5.3.2 Non-destructive testing as an alternative method
The check(s) identified in 6.2.3.5.3.1 shall be supplemented or replaced by one (or more) non-
destructive test method(s) to be performed on each individual pressure receptacle.
6.2.3.5.3.3 Destructive testing as an alternative method
If no non-destructive test method leads to an equivalent level of safety, the check(s) identified in
6.2.3.5.3.1, with exception of the check of the internal conditions mentioned in 6.2.1.6.1 b, shall be
supplemented or replaced by one (or more) destructive test method(s) in combination with its statistical
evaluation.
In addition to the elements described above, the detailed method for destructive testing shall document
the following elements:
– A description of the relevant basic population of pressure receptacles;
– A procedure for the random sampling of individual pressure receptacles to be tested;
– A procedure for the statistical evaluation of the test results including rejection criteria;
– A specification for the periodicity of destructive sample tests;
– A description of the measures to be taken if acceptance criteria are met but a safety relevant
degradation of material properties is observed, which shall be used for the determination of the
end of service life;
– A statistical assessment of the level of safety achieved by the alternative method.
6.2.3.5.4 Over-moulded cylinders subject to 6.2.3.5.3.1 shall be subject to periodic inspection and test in
accordance with special provision 674 of Chapter 3.3.
6.2.3.6 Approval of pressure receptacles
6.2.3.6.1 The procedures for conformity assessment and periodic inspection of section 1.8.7 shall be performed
by the relevant body according to the following table.
Procedure Relevant body
Type examination and type approval
certificate issue (1.8.7.2) a
Xa
Supervision of manufacture (1.8.7.3) and
initial inspection and tests (1.8.7.4)
Xa or IS
Periodic inspection (1.8.7.6) Xa or Xb or IS
a The type approval certificate shall be issued by the inspection body that performed the type
examination.
Each procedure as defined in the table shall be performed by a single relevant body as indicated in the
table.
– 343 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 344 –
For separate conformity assessments (e.g. cylinder shell and closure) see 6.2.1.4.4. For non-refillable
pressure receptacles, separate type approval certificates for either the cylinder shell or the closure shall
not be issued.
Xa means the competent authority or inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according
to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type A.
Xb means inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012
(except clause 8.1.3) type B, working exclusively for the owner or the duty holder responsible for the
pressure receptacles.
IS means an in-house inspection service of the manufacturer or an enterprise with a testing facility under
the surveillance of an inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN ISO/IEC
17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type A. The in-house inspection service shall be independent from
design process, manufacturing operations, repair and maintenance.
If an in-house inspection service has been used for the initial inspection and tests, the mark specified in
6.2.2.7.2 (d) shall be supplemented with the mark of the in-house inspection service.
If an in-house inspection service has carried out the periodic inspection, the mark specified in 6.2.2.7.7
(b) shall be supplemented with the mark of the in-house inspection service.
6.2.3.6.2 If the country of approval is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the competent authority mentioned in
6.2.1.7.2 shall be the competent authority of a Contracting Party to ADR.
6.2.3.7 Requirements for manufacturers
6.2.3.7.1 The relevant requirements of 1.8.7 shall be met.
6.2.3.8 Requirements for inspection bodies
The requirements of 1.8.6.3 shall be met.
6.2.3.9 Marking of refillable pressure receptacles
6.2.3.9.1 Marking shall be in accordance with sub-section 6.2.2.7 with the following variations.
6.2.3.9.2 The United Nations packaging symbol specified in 6.2.2.7.2 (a) and the provisions of 6.2.2.7.4 (q) and
(r) shall not be applied.
6.2.3.9.3 The requirements of 6.2.2.7.3 (j) shall be replaced by the following:
(j) The water capacity of the pressure receptacle in litres followed by the letter “L”. In the case of
pressure receptacles for liquefied gases the water capacity in litres shall be expressed to three
significant figures rounded down to the last digit. If the value of the minimum or nominal water
capacity is an integer, the figures after the decimal point may be neglected.
The requirements of 6.2.2.7.4 (n) shall be replaced by the following:
(n) The manufacturer’s mark. When the country of manufacture is not the same as the country of
approval, then the manufacturer’s mark shall be preceded by the character(s) identifying the
country of manufacture as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international
road traffic2. The country mark and the manufacturer’s mark shall be separated by a space or slash.
6.2.3.9.4 The marks specified in 6.2.2.7.3 (g) and (h) and 6.2.2.7.4 (m) are not required for pressure receptacles
for UN No. 1965 hydrocarbon gas mixture, liquefied, n.o.s.
6.2.3.9.5 When marking the date required by 6.2.2.7.7 (c), the month need not be indicated for gases for which
the interval between periodic inspections is 10 years or more (see packing instructions P200 and P203
of 4.1.4.1).
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 344 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 345 –
6.2.3.9.6 The marks in accordance with 6.2.2.7.7 may be engraved on a ring of an appropriate material affixed to
the cylinder or pressure drum when the valve is installed and which is removable only by disconnecting
the valve from the cylinder or pressure drum.
6.2.3.9.7 Marking of bundles of cylinders
6.2.3.9.7.1 Individual cylinders in a bundle of cylinders shall be marked in accordance with 6.2.3.9.1 to 6.2.3.9.6.
6.2.3.9.7.2 Marking of bundles of cylinders shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.10.2 and 6.2.2.10.3, except that the
United Nations packaging symbol specified in 6.2.2.7.2 (a) shall not be applied.
6.2.3.9.7.3 In addition to the preceding marks, each bundle of cylinders that meets the periodic inspection and test
requirements of 6.2.4.2 shall be marked indicating:
(a) The character(s) identifying the country authorizing the body performing the periodic inspection
and test, as indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic2. This
mark is not required if this body is approved by the competent authority of the country approving
manufacture;
(b) The registered mark of the body authorised by the competent authority for performing periodic
inspection and test;
(c) The date of the periodic inspection and test, the year (two digits) followed by the month (two
digits) separated by a slash (i.e. “/”). Four digits may be used to indicate the year.
The above marks shall appear consecutively in the sequence given either on the plate specified in
6.2.2.10.2 or on a separate plate permanently attached to the frame of the bundle of cylinders.
6.2.3.9.8 Marking of closures for refillable pressure receptacles
6.2.3.9.8.1 Marking shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.11.
6.2.3.10 Marking of non-refillable cylinders
6.2.3.10.1 Marking shall be in accordance with 6.2.2.8, except that the United Nations packaging symbol specified
in 6.2.2.7.2 (a) shall not be applied.
6.2.3.11 Salvage pressure receptacles
6.2.3.11.1 To permit the safe handling and disposal of the pressure receptacles carried within the salvage pressure
receptacle, the design may include equipment not otherwise used for cylinders or pressure drums such
as flat heads, quick opening devices and openings in the cylindrical part.
6.2.3.11.2 Instructions on the safe handling and use of the salvage pressure receptacle shall be clearly shown in
the documentation for the application to the competent authority of the country of approval and shall
form part of the approval certificate. In the approval certificate, the pressure receptacles authorized to
be carried in a salvage pressure receptacle shall be indicated. A list of the materials of construction of
all parts likely to be in contact with the dangerous goods shall also be included.
6.2.3.11.3 A copy of the approval certificate shall be delivered by the manufacturer to the owner of a salvage
pressure receptacle.
6.2.3.11.4 The marking of salvage pressure receptacles according to 6.2.3 shall be determined by the competent
authority of the country of approval taking into account suitable marking provisions of 6.2.3.9 as
appropriate. The marks shall include the water capacity and test pressure of the salvage pressure
receptacle.
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 345 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 346 –
6.2.4 Requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles designed, constructed and tested according to
referenced standards
NOTE: Persons or bodies identified in standards as having responsibilities in accordance with ADR
shall meet the requirements of ADR.
6.2.4.1 Design, construction and initial inspection and test
Since 1 January 2009 the use of the referenced standards has been mandatory. Exceptions are dealt with
in 6.2.5.
Type approval certificates shall be issued in accordance with 1.8.7. For the issuance of a type approval
certificate, one standard applicable according to the indication in column (4) shall be chosen from the
table below. If more than one standard may be applied, only one of them shall be chosen.
Column (3) shows the paragraphs of Chapter 6.2 to which the standard conforms.
Column (5) gives the latest date when existing type approvals shall be withdrawn according to
1.8.7.2.2.2; if no date is shown the type approval remains valid until it expires.
Standards shall be applied in accordance with 1.1.5. They shall be applied in full unless otherwise
specified in the table below.
The scope of application of each standard is defined in the scope clause of the standard unless otherwise
specified in the table below.
NOTE: The words “cylinder”, “tube” and “pressure drum” when used in these standards shall be
understood to exclude closures except in the case of non-refillable cylinders.
Reference Title of document
Requirements
the standard
complies with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
for design and construction of pressure receptacles or pressure receptacle shells
Annex I, Parts 1 to 3 to
84/525/EEC
Council directive on the approximation
of the laws of the Member States
relating to seamless steel gas cylinders,
published in the Official Journal of the
European Communities No. L300 of
19.11.1984
NOTE: Notwithstanding the repeal of
the directives 84/525/EEC, 84/526/EEC
and 84/527/EEC as published in the
Official Journal of the European
Communities No. L300 of 19.11.1984
the annexes of these directives remain
applicable as standards for design,
construction and initial inspection and
test for gas cylinders. These annexes
may be found at: https://eur-
lex.europa.eu/oj/direct-access.html.
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
– 346 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 347 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements
the standard
complies with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Annex I, Parts 1 to 3 to
84/526/EEC
Council directive on the approximation
of the laws of the Member States
relating to seamless, unalloyed
aluminium and aluminium alloy gas
cylinders, published in the Official
Journal of the European Communities
No. L300 of 19.11.1984
NOTE: Notwithstanding the repeal of
the directives 84/525/EEC, 84/526/EEC
and 84/527/EEC as published in the
Official Journal of the European
Communities No. L300 of 19.11.1984
the annexes of these directives remain
applicable as standards for design,
construction and initial inspection and
test for gas cylinders. These annexes
may be found at: https://eur-
lex.europa.eu/oj/direct-access.html.
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
Annex I, Parts 1 to 3 to
84/527/EEC
Council directive on the approximation
of the laws of the Member States
relating to welded unalloyed steel gas
cylinders, published in the Official
Journal of the European Communities
No. L300 of 19.11.1984
NOTE: Notwithstanding the repeal of
the directives 84/525/EEC, 84/526/EEC
and 84/527/EEC as published in the
Official Journal of the European
Communities No. L300 of 19.11.1984
the annexes of these directives remain
applicable as standards for design,
construction and initial inspection and
test for gas cylinders. These annexes
may be found at: https://eur-
lex.europa.eu/oj/direct-access.html.
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 1442:1998 + AC:1999 Transportable refillable welded steel
cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) – Design and construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 July
2001 and 30 June
2007
31 December 2012
EN 1442:1998 + A2:2005 Transportable refillable welded steel
cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) – Design and construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2007 and
31 December
2010
EN 1442:2006 + A1:2008 Transportable refillable welded steel
cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) – Design and construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2009 and
31 December
2020
EN 1442:2017 LPG equipment and accessories –
Transportable refillable welded steel
cylinders for LPG – Design and
construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 1800:1998 + AC:1999 Transportable gas cylinders – Acetylene
cylinders – Basic requirements and
definitions
6.2.1.1.9 Between 1 July
2001 and
31 December
2010
EN 1800:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Acetylene
cylinders – Basic requirements,
definitions and type testing
6.2.1.1.9 Between 1 January
2009 and 31
December 2016
EN ISO 3807:2013 Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders –
Basic requirements and type testing
NOTE: Fusible plugs shall not be
fitted.
6.2.1.1.9 Until further
notice
– 347 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 348 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements
the standard
complies with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN 1964-1:1999 Transportable gas cylinders –
Specifications for the design and
construction of refillable transportable
seamless steel gas cylinders of capacity
from 0.5 litres up to 150 litres – Part 1:
Cylinders made of seamless steel with a
Rm value of less than 1 100 MPa
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 31
December 2014
EN 1975:1999 (except
Annex G)
Transportable gas cylinders –
Specifications for the design and
construction of refillable transportable
seamless aluminium and aluminium
alloy gas cylinders of capacity from 0.5
litres up to 150 litres
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 30 June
2005
EN 1975:1999 + A1:2003 Transportable gas cylinders –
Specifications for the design and
construction of refillable transportable
seamless aluminium and aluminium
alloy gas cylinders of capacity from 0.5
litres up to 150 litres
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2009 and 31
December 2016
EN ISO 7866:2012
+ AC:2014
Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless
aluminium alloy gas cylinders –
Design, construction and testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2015 and 31
December 2024
EN ISO 7866:2012 +
A1:2020
Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless
aluminium alloy gas cylinders –
Design, construction and testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN ISO 11120:1999 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless
steel tubes for compressed gas transport
of water capacity between 150 litres
and 3 000 litres – Design, construction
and testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 July
2001 and 30 June
2015
31 December 2015
for tubes marked
with the letter “H”
in accordance with
6.2.2.7.4 (p)
EN ISO 11120:1999
+ A1:2013
Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless
steel tubes for compressed gas transport
of water capacity between 150 litres
and 3 000 litres – Design, construction
and testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2015 and 31
December 2020
EN ISO 11120:2015 Gas cylinders – Refillable seamless steel
tubes of water capacity between 150 l
and 3000 l – Design, construction and
testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 1964-3:2000 Transportable gas cylinders –
Specifications for the design and
construction of refillable transportable
seamless steel gas cylinders of capacity
from 0.5 litre up to 150 litres – Part 3:
Cylinders made of seamless stainless
steel with an Rm value of less than
1 100 MPa
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 12862:2000 Transportable gas cylinders-
Specifications for the design and
construction of refillable transportable
welded aluminium alloy gas cylinders
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
– 348 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 349 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements
the standard
complies with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN 1251-2:2000 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable,
vacuum insulated, of not more than
1 000 litres volume – Part 2: Design,
fabrication, inspection and testing
NOTE: Standards EN 1252-1:1998
and EN 1626 referenced in this
standard are also applicable to closed
cryogenic receptacles for the carriage
of UN No. 1972 (METHANE,
REFRIGERATED LIQUID or
NATURAL GAS, REFRIGERATED
LIQUID).
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 12257:2002 Transportable gas cylinders – Seamless,
hoop wrapped composite cylinders
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 12807:2001
(except Annex A)
Transportable refillable brazed steel
cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) – Design and construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2005 and 31
December 2010
31 December 2012
EN 12807:2008 Transportable refillable brazed steel
cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) – Design and construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2009 and 31
December 2022
EN 12807:2019 LPG equipment and accessories –
Transportable refillable brazed steel
cylinders for liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) – Design and construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 1964-2:2001 Transportable gas cylinders –
Specification for the design and
construction of refillable transportable
seamless steel gas cylinders of water
capacities from 0.5 litre up to and
including 150 litre – Part 2: Cylinders
made of seamless steel with an Rm
value of 1 100 MPa and above
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 31
December 2014
EN ISO 9809-1:2010 Gas cylinders — Refillable seamless
steel gas cylinders — Design,
construction and testing – Part 1:
Quenched and tempered steel cylinders
with tensile strength less than 1100
MPa
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2013 and 31
December 2022
EN ISO 9809-1:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction
and testing of refillable seamless steel
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 1:
Quenched and tempered steel cylinders
and tubes with tensile strength less than
1100 MPa
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN ISO 9809-2:2010 Gas cylinders — Refillable seamless
steel gas cylinders — Design,
construction and testing – Part 2:
Quenched and tempered steel cylinders
with tensile strength greater than or
equal to 1100 MPa
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2013 and 31
December 2022
EN ISO 9809-2:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction
and testing of refillable seamless steel
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 2:
Quenched and tempered steel cylinders
and tubes with tensile strength greater
than or equal to 1100 MPa
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN ISO 9809-3:2010 Gas cylinders — Refillable seamless
steel gas cylinders — Design,
construction and testing – Part 3:
Normalized steel cylinders
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2013 and 31
December 2022
– 349 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 350 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements
the standard
complies with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN ISO 9809-3:2019 Gas cylinders – Design, construction
and testing of refillable seamless steel
gas cylinders and tubes – Part 3:
Normalized steel cylinders and tubes
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 13293:2002 Transportable gas cylinders –
Specification for the design and
construction of refillable transportable
seamless normalised carbon manganese
steel gas cylinders of water capacity up
to 0.5 litre for compressed, liquefied
and dissolved gases and up to 1 litre for
carbon dioxide
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 13322-1:2003 Transportable gas cylinders – Refillable
welded steel gas cylinders – Design and
construction – Part 1: Welded steel
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 30 June
2007
EN 13322-1:2003 +
A1:2006
Transportable gas cylinders – Refillable
welded steel gas cylinders – Design and
construction – Part 1: Welded steel
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 13322-2:2003 Transportable gas cylinders – Refillable
welded stainless steel gas cylinders –
Design and construction – Part 2:
Welded stainless steel
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 30 June
2007
EN 13322-2:2003 +
A1:2006
Transportable gas cylinders – Refillable
welded stainless steel gas cylinders –
Design and construction – Part 2:
Welded stainless steel
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 12245:2002 Transportable gas cylinders – Fully
wrapped composite cylinders
NOTE: This standard shall not be
used for gases classified as LPG.
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until
31 December
2014
31 December 2019,
for cylinders and
tubes without a
liner, manufactured
in two parts joined
together; 31
December 2023, for
cylinders for LPG
EN 12245:2009
+A1:2011
Transportable gas cylinders – Fully
wrapped composite cylinders
NOTE 1: This standard shall not be
used for cylinders and tubes without a
liner, manufactured from two parts
joined together.
NOTE 2: This standard shall not be
used for gases classified as LPG
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2013 and 31
December 2024
31 December 2019,
for cylinders and
tubes without a
liner, manufactured
in two parts joined
together; 31
December 2023, for
cylinders for LPG
EN 12245:2022 Transportable gas cylinders – Fully
wrapped composite cylinders
NOTE: This standard shall not be
used for gases classified as LPG.
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 12205:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Non
refillable metallic gas cylinders
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2005 and 31
December 2017
31 December 2018
EN ISO
11118:2015
Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic
gas cylinders – Specification and test
methods
6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3
and 6.2.3.4
Between 1 January
2017 and 31
December 2024
EN ISO 11118:2015 +
A1:2020
Gas cylinders – Non-refillable metallic
gas cylinders – Specification and test
methods
6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3
and 6.2.3.4
Until further
notice
EN 13110:2002 Transportable refillable welded
aluminium cylinders for liquefied
petroleum gas (LPG) – Design and
construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until
31 December
2014
– 350 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 351 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements
the standard
complies with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN 13110:2012 Transportable refillable welded
aluminium cylinders for liquefied
petroleum gas (LPG) – Design and
construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 14427:2004 Transportable refillable fully wrapped
composite cylinders for liquefied
petroleum gases – Design and
construction
NOTE: This standard applies only to
cylinders equipped with pressure relief
valves.
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2005 and 30 June
2007
EN 14427:2004 +
A1:2005
Transportable refillable composite
cylinders for LPG – Design and
construction
NOTE 1: This standard applies only to
cylinders equipped with pressure relief
valves.
NOTE 2: In 5.2.9.2.1 and 5.2.9.3.1,
both cylinders shall be subject to a
burst test when they show damage
equal to or worse than the rejection
criteria.
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2007 and 31
December 2016
31 December 2023,
for cylinders without
a liner,
manufactured from
two parts joined
together
EN 14427:2014 LPG Equipment and accessories –
Transportable refillable fully wrapped
composite cylinders for LPG – Design
and construction
NOTE: This standard shall not be
used for cylinders without a liner,
manufactured from two parts joined
together.
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2015 and 31
December 2024
31 December 2023,
for cylinders without
a liner,
manufactured from
two parts joined
together
EN 14427:2022 LPG equipment and accessories –
Transportable refillable composite
cylinders for LPG – Design and
construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 14208:2004 Transportable gas cylinders –
Specification for welded pressure
drums up to 1000 litres capacity for the
transport of gases – Design and
construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 14140:2003 Transportable refillable welded steel
cylinders for Liquefied Petroleum Gas
(LPG) – Alternative design and
construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2005 and
31 December
2010
EN 14140:2003 +
A1:2006
LPG equipment and accessories –
Transportable refillable welded steel
cylinders for LPG – Alternative design
and construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2009 and 31
December 2018
EN 14140:2014
+AC:2015
LPG Equipment and accessories –
Transportable refillable welded steel
cylinders for LPG – Alternative design
and construction
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 13769:2003 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder
bundles – Design, manufacture,
identification and testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until 30 June
2007
EN 13769:2003 +
A1:2005
Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder
bundles – Design, manufacture,
identification and testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until
31 December
2014
EN ISO 10961:2012 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles –
Design, manufacture, testing and
inspection
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2013 and 31
December 2022
– 351 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 352 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements
the standard
complies with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN ISO 10961:2019 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles –
Design, manufacture, testing and
inspection
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 14638-1:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Refillable
welded receptacles of a capacity not
exceeding 150 litres – Part 1 Welded
austenitic stainless steel cylinders made
to a design justified by experimental
methods
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 14893:2006 +
AC:2007
LPG equipment and accessories –
Transportable LPG welded steel
pressure drums with a capacity between
150 and 1 000 litres
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2009 and 31
December 2016
EN 14893:2014 LPG equipment and accessories –
Transportable LPG welded steel
pressure drums with a capacity between
150 and 1 000 litres
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 14638-3:2010 +
AC:2012
Transportable gas cylinders —
Refillable welded receptacles of a
capacity not exceeding 150 litres —
Part 3: Welded carbon steel cylinders
made to a design justified by
experimental methods
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 17339:2020 Transportable gas cylinders – Fully
wrapped carbon composite cylinders
and tubes for hydrogen
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
for design and construction of closures
EN 849:1996 (except
Annex A)
Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder
valves – Specification and type testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until 30 June
2003
31 December 2014
EN 849:1996 + A2:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder
valves – Specification and type testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until 30 June
2003
31 December 2016
EN ISO 10297:2006 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder
valves – Specification and type testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2009 and 31
December 2018
EN ISO 10297:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves –
Specification and type testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2015 and
31 December
2020
EN ISO 10297:2014 +
A1:2017
Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves –
Specification and type testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until further
notice
EN ISO 14245:2010 Gas cylinders – Specifications and
testing of LPG cylinder valves – Self-
closing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2013 and 31
December 2022
EN ISO 14245:2019 Gas cylinders – Specifications and
testing of LPG cylinder valves – Self-
closing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2021 and 31
December 2024
EN ISO 14245:2021 Gas Cylinders – Specifications and
testing of LPG cylinder valves – Self-
closing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until further
notice
EN 13152:2001 Specifications and testing of LPG –
Cylinder valves – Self closing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2005 and
31 December
2010
EN 13152:2001 +
A1:2003
Specifications and testing of LPG –
Cylinder valves – Self closing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2009 and
31 December
2014
– 352 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 353 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements
the standard
complies with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN ISO 15995:2010 Gas cylinders – Specifications and
testing of LPG cylinder valves –
Manually operated
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2013 and 31
December 2022
EN ISO 15995:2019 Gas cylinders – Specifications and
testing of LPG cylinder valves –
Manually operated
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2021 and 31
December 2024
EN ISO 15995:2021 Gas Cylinders – Specifications and
testing of LPG cylinder valves –
Manually operated
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until further
notice
EN 13153:2001 Specifications and testing of LPG –
Cylinder valves – Manually operated
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2005 and
31 December
2010
EN 13153:2001 +
A1:2003
Specifications and testing of LPG –
Cylinder valves – Manually operated
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2009 and
31 December
2014
EN ISO 13340:2001 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder
valves for non-refillable cylinders –
Specification and prototype testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2011 and 31
December 2017
31 December 2018
EN 13648-1:2008 Cryogenic vessels – Safety devices for
protection against excessive pressure –
Part 1: Safety valves for cryogenic
service
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 1626:2008 (except
valve category B)
Cryogenic vessels – Valves for
cryogenic service
NOTE: This standard is also
applicable to valves for the carriage of
UN No 1972 (METHANE,
REFRIGERATED LIQUID or
NATURAL GAS, REFRIGERATED
LIQUID).
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 13175:2014 LPG Equipment and accessories –
Specification and testing for Liquefied
Petroleum Gas (LPG) pressure vessel
valves and fittings
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2017 and 31
December 2022
EN 13175:2019 (except
clause 6.1.6)
LPG Equipment and accessories –
Specification and testing for Liquefied
Petroleum Gas (LPG) pressure vessel
valves and fittings
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Between 1 January
2021 and 31
December 2024
EN 13175:2019 +
A1:2020
LPG Equipment and accessories –
Specification and testing for Liquefied
Petroleum Gas (LPG) pressure vessel
valves and fittings
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Until further
notice
EN ISO 17871:2015 Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinder
valves – Specification and type testing
6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3
and 6.2.3.4
Between 1 January
2017 and 31
December 2021
EN ISO 17871:2015 +
A1:2018
Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinder
valves – Specification and type testing
6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3
and 6.2.3.4
Between 1 January
2019 and 31
December 2024
EN ISO
17871:2020
Gas cylinders – Quick-release cylinder
valves – Specification and type testing
6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3
and 6.2.3.4
Until further
notice
EN 13953:2015 LPG equipment and accessories –
Pressure relief valves for transportable
refillable cylinders for Liquefied
Petroleum Gas (LPG)
NOTE: The final sentence of the scope
shall not apply.
6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3
and 6.2.3.4
Between 1 January
2017 and 31
December 2024
– 353 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 354 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements
the standard
complies with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN 13953:2020 LPG Equipment and accessories –
Pressure relief valves for transportable
refillable cylinders for Liquefied
Petroleum Gas (LPG)
6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3
and 6.2.3.4
Until further
notice
EN ISO 14246:2014 Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves –
Manufacturing tests and examinations
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2015 and
31 December
2020
EN ISO 14246:2014 +
A1:2017
Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves –
Manufacturing tests and examinations
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Between 1 January
2019 and 31
December 2024
EN ISO
14246:2022
Gas cylinders – Cylinder valves –
Manufacturing tests and examinations
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN ISO 17879:2017 Gas cylinders – Self-closing cylinder
valves – Specification and type testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 14129:2014 (except
the note in clause 3.11) LPG Equipment and accessories –
Pressure relief valves for LPG pressure
vessels
NOTE: This standard is applicable to
pressure drums.
6.2.3.1, 6.2.3.3
and 6.2.3.4
Until further
notice
EN ISO 23826:2021 Gas cylinders – Ball valves –
Specification and testing
6.2.3.1 and 6.2.3.3 Mandatorily from
1 January 2025
6.2.4.2 Periodic inspection and test
The standards referenced in the table below shall be applied for the periodic inspection and test of
pressure receptacles as indicated in column (3) to meet the requirements of 6.2.3.5. The standards shall
be applied in accordance with 1.1.5.
The use of a referenced standard is mandatory.
When a pressure receptacle is constructed in accordance with the provisions of 6.2.5 the procedure for
periodic inspection if specified in the type approval shall be followed.
Standards shall be applied in full, unless otherwise specified in the table below. If more than one
standard is referenced for the application of the same requirements, only one of them shall be applied.
The scope of application of each standard is defined in the scope clause of the standard unless otherwise
specified in the Table below.
Reference Title of document Applicable
(1) (2) (3)
EN 1251-3:2000 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable, vacuum insulated, of not more than
1 000 litres volume – Part 3: Operational requirements
Until 31 December 2024
EN ISO 21029-2:2015 Cryogenic vessels – Transportable vacuum insulated vessels of not more
than 1 000 litres volume – Part 2: Operational requirements
NOTE: Notwithstanding clause 14 of this standard, pressure relief
valves shall be periodically inspected and tested at intervals not
exceeding 5 years.
Mandatorily from 1
January 2025
EN ISO 18119:2018 Gas cylinders – Seamless steel and seamless aluminium-alloy gas
cylinders and tubes – Periodic inspection and testing
NOTE: Notwithstanding clause B.1 of this standard, all cylinders and
tubes whose wall thickness is less than the minimum design wall
thickness shall be rejected.
Until 31 December 2024
– 354 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 355 –
Reference Title of document Applicable
(1) (2) (3)
EN ISO 18119:2018 +
A1:2021
Gas cylinders – Seamless steel and seamless aluminium-alloy gas
cylinders and tubes – Periodic inspection and testing
NOTE: Notwithstanding clause B.1 of this standard, all cylinders and
tubes whose wall thickness is less than the minimum design wall
thickness shall be rejected.
Mandatorily from
1 January 2025
EN ISO 10462:2013 +
A1:2019
Gas cylinders – Acetylene cylinders – Periodic inspection and
maintenance – Amendment 1
Until further notice
EN ISO 10460:2018 Gas cylinders – Welded aluminium-alloy, carbon and stainless steel gas
cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing
Until further notice
EN ISO 11623:2015 Gas cylinders – Composite construction – Periodic inspection and
testing
Until further notice
EN ISO 22434:2011 Transportable gas cylinders – Inspection and maintenance of cylinder
valves
Until 31 December 2024
EN ISO 22434:2022 Gas cylinders – Inspection and maintenance of valves Mandatorily from 1
January 2025
EN 14876:2007 Transportable gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing of welded
steel pressure drums
Until 31 December 2024
EN ISO 23088:2020 Gas cylinders – Periodic inspection and testing of welded steel pressure
drums – Capacities up to 1 000 l
Mandatorily from 1
January 2025
EN 14912:2015 LPG equipment and accessories – Inspection and maintenance of LPG
cylinder valves at time of periodic inspection of cylinders
Until 31 December 2024
EN
14912:2022
LPG equipment and accessories – Inspection and maintenance of LPG
cylinder valves at time of periodic inspection of cylinders
Mandatorily from 1
January 2025
EN 1440:2016 + A1:2018 +
A2:2020 (except Annex C)
LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable traditional
welded and brazed steel Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) cylinders –
Periodic inspection
Until further notice
EN 16728:2016 + A1:2018 +
A2:2020
LPG equipment and accessories – Transportable refillable LPG
cylinders other than traditional welded and brazed steel cylinders –
Periodic inspection
Until further notice
EN 15888: 2014 Transportable gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Periodic inspection and
testing
Until 31 December 2024
EN ISO 20475:2020 Gas cylinders – Cylinder bundles – Periodic inspection and testing Mandatorily from 1
January 2025
6.2.5 Requirements for non-UN pressure receptacles not designed, constructed and tested according to
referenced standards
To reflect scientific and technical progress or where no standard is referenced in 6.2.2 or 6.2.4, or to
deal with specific aspects not addressed in a standard referenced in 6.2.2 or 6.2.4, the competent
authority may recognize the use of a technical code providing the same level of safety.
In the type approval the issuing body shall specify the procedure for periodic inspections if the standards
referenced in 6.2.2 or 6.2.4 are not applicable or shall not be applied.
As soon as a standard newly referenced in 6.2.2 or 6.2.4 can be applied, the competent authority shall
withdraw its recognition of the relevant technical code. A transitional period ending no later than the
date of entry into force of the next edition of ADR may be applied.
The competent authority shall transmit to the secretariat of UNECE a list of the technical codes that it
recognises and shall update the list if it changes. The list should include the following details: name and
date of the code, purpose of the code and details of where it may be obtained. The secretariat shall make
this information publicly available on its website.
A standard which has been adopted for reference in a future edition of the ADR may be approved by
the competent authority for use without notifying the secretariat of UNECE.
The requirements of 6.2.1, 6.2.3 and the following requirements however shall be met.
NOTE: For this section, the references to technical standards in 6.2.1 shall be considered as references
to technical codes.
– 355 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 356 –
6.2.5.1 Materials
The following provisions contain examples of materials that may be used to comply with the
requirements for materials in 6.2.1.2:
(a) Carbon steel for compressed, liquefied, refrigerated liquefied gases and dissolved gases as well
as for substances not in Class 2 listed in Table 3 of packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1;
(b) Alloy steel (special steels), nickel, nickel alloy (such as monel) for compressed, liquefied,
refrigerated liquefied gases and dissolved gases as well as for substances not in Class 2 listed
in Table 3 of packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1;
(c) Copper for:
(i) gases of classification codes 1A, 1O, 1F and 1TF, whose filling pressure referred to a
temperature of 15 °C does not exceed 2 MPa (20 bar);
(ii) gases of classification code 2A and also UN No. 1033 dimethyl ether; UN No. 1037
ethyl chloride; UN No. 1063 methyl chloride; UN No. 1079 sulphur dioxide;
UN No. 1085 vinyl bromide; UN No. 1086 vinyl chloride; and UN No. 3300 ethylene
oxide and carbon dioxide mixture with more than 87 % ethylene oxide;
(iii) gases of classification codes 3A, 3O and 3F;
(d) Aluminium alloy: see special requirement “a” of packing instruction P200 (10) of 4.1.4.1;
(e) Composite material for compressed, liquefied, refrigerated liquefied gases and dissolved gases;
(f) Synthetic materials for refrigerated liquefied gases; and
(g) Glass for the refrigerated liquefied gases of classification code 3A other than UN No. 2187
carbon dioxide, refrigerated, liquid or mixtures thereof, and gases of classification code 3O.
6.2.5.2 Service equipment
(Reserved)
6.2.5.3 Metal cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders
At the test pressure, the stress in the metal at the most severely stressed point of the pressure receptacle
shell shall not exceed 77 % of the guaranteed minimum yield stress (Re).
“Yield stress” means the stress at which a permanent elongation of 2 per thousand (i.e. 0.2 %) or, for
austenitic steels, 1 % of the gauge length on the test-piece, has been produced.
NOTE: In the case of sheet-metal the axis of the tensile test-piece shall be at right angles to the
direction of rolling. The permanent elongation at fracture, shall be measured on a test-piece of circular
cross-section in which the gauge length “l” is equal to five times the diameter “d” (l = 5d); if test pieces
of rectangular cross-section are used, the gauge length “l” shall be calculated by the formula:
F65.5l o
where F0 indicates the initial cross-sectional area of the test-piece.
Pressure receptacles shall be made of suitable materials which shall be resistant to brittle fracture and
to stress corrosion cracking between –20 °C and +50 °C.
Welds shall be skilfully made and shall afford the fullest safety.
– 356 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 357 –
6.2.5.4 Additional provisions relating to aluminium-alloy pressure receptacles for compressed gases,
liquefied gases, dissolved gases and non pressurized gases subject to special requirements (gas
samples) as well as articles containing gas under pressure other than aerosol dispensers and small
receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges)
6.2.5.4.1 The materials of aluminium-alloy pressure receptacle shells which are to be accepted shall satisfy the
following requirements:
A B C D
Tensile strength,
Rm, in MPa (= N/mm²) 49 to 186 196 to 372 196 to 372 343 to 490
Yield stress, Re, in MPa (= N/mm²) (permanent
set = 0.2 %) 10 to 167 59 to 314 137 to 334 206 to 412
Permanent elongation at fracture (l = 5d),
in % 12 to 40 12 to 30 12 to 30 11 to 16
Bend test (diameter of former d = n e, where e
is the thickness of the test piece) n = 5 (Rm 98)
n = 6 (Rm > 98)
n = 6 (Rm 325)
n = 7 (Rm > 325)
n = 6 (Rm 325)
n = 7 (Rm > 325)
n = 7 (Rm 392)
n = 8 (Rm > 392)
Aluminium Association Series Number a
1 000 5 000 6 000 2 000
a See “Aluminium Standards and Data”, Fifth edition, January 1976, published by the Aluminium Association, 750
Third Avenue, New York.
The actual properties will depend on the composition of the alloy concerned and on the final treatment
of the pressure receptacle shell, but whatever alloy is used the thickness of the pressure receptacle shell
shall be calculated by one of the following formulae:
bar
bar
MPa
MPa
P
1.3
20Re
DP
eor
P
1.3
2Re
DP
e
where
e = minimum thickness of pressure receptacle wall, in mm
P MPa = test pressure, in MPa
P bar = test pressure, in bar
D = nominal external diameter of the pressure receptacle, in mm and
Re = guaranteed minimum proof stress with 0.2 % proof stress, in MPa (= N/mm²)
In addition, the value of the minimum guaranteed proof stress (Re) introduced into the formula is in no
case to be greater than 0.85 times the guaranteed minimum tensile strength (Rm), whatever the type of
alloy used.
NOTE 1: The above characteristics are based on previous experience with the following materials
used for pressure receptacles:
Column A: Aluminium, unalloyed, 99.5 % pure;
Column B: Alloys of aluminium and magnesium;
Column C: Alloys of aluminium, silicon and magnesium, such as ISO/R209-Al-Si-Mg (Aluminium
Association 6351);
Column D: Alloys of aluminium, copper and magnesium.
NOTE 2: The permanent elongation at fracture is measured by means of test-pieces of circular cross-
section in which the gauge length “l” is equal to five times the diameter “d” (l = 5d); if test-pieces of
rectangular section are used the gauge length shall be calculated by the formula:
oF65.5l
where Fo is the initial cross-section area of the test-piece.
NOTE 3: (a) The bend test (see diagram) shall be carried out on specimens obtained by cutting
into two equal parts of width 3e, but in no case less than 25 mm, an annular section
of a cylinder. The specimens shall not be machined elsewhere than on the edges;
(b) The bend test shall be carried out between a mandrel of diameter (d) and two
circular supports separated by a distance of (d + 3e). During the test the inner
faces shall be separated by a distance not greater than the diameter of the mandrel;
– 357 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 358 –
(c) The specimen shall not exhibit cracks when it has been bent inwards around the
mandrel until the inner faces are separated by a distance not greater than the
diameter of the mandrel;
(d) The ratio (n) between the diameter of the mandrel and the thickness of the specimen
shall conform to the values given in the table.
Diagram of bend test
6.2.5.4.2 A lower minimum elongation value is acceptable on condition that an additional test approved by the
competent authority of the country in which the pressure receptacles are made proves that safety of
carriage is ensured to the same extent as in the case of pressure receptacles constructed to comply with
the characteristics given in the table in 6.2.5.4.1 (see also EN ISO 7866:2012 + A1:2020).
6.2.5.4.3 The wall thickness of the pressure receptacles at the thinnest point shall be the following:
– Where the diameter of the pressure receptacle is less than 50 mm: not less than 1.5 mm;
– Where the diameter of the pressure receptacle is from 50 to 150 mm: not less than 2 mm; and
– Where the diameter of the pressure receptacle is more than 150 mm: not less than 3 mm.
6.2.5.4.4 The ends of the pressure receptacles shall have a semicircular, elliptical or “basket-handle” section; they
shall afford the same degree of safety as the body of the pressure receptacle.
6.2.5.5 Pressure receptacles in composite materials
For composite cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders which make use of composite
materials, the construction shall be such that a minimum burst ratio (burst pressure divided by test
pressure) is:
– 1.67 for hoop wrapped pressure receptacles;
– 2.00 for fully wrapped pressure receptacles.
6.2.5.6 Closed cryogenic receptacles
The following requirements apply to the construction of closed cryogenic receptacles for refrigerated
liquefied gases:
6.2.5.6.1 If non-metallic materials are used, they shall resist brittle fracture at the lowest working temperature of
the pressure receptacle and its fittings.
6.2.5.6.2 The pressure relief devices shall be so constructed as to work perfectly even at their lowest working
temperature. Their reliability of functioning at that temperature shall be established and checked by
testing each device or a sample of devices of the same type of construction.
– 358 –
d
e
d+ 3 e approx.Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 359 –
6.2.5.6.3 The vents and pressure relief devices of pressure receptacles shall be so designed as to prevent the liquid
from splashing out.
6.2.6 General requirements for aerosol dispensers, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges)
and fuel cell cartridges containing liquefied flammable gas
6.2.6.1 Design and construction
6.2.6.1.1 Aerosol dispensers (UN No.1950 aerosols) containing only a gas or a mixture of gases, and small
receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) (UN No. 2037), shall be made of metal. This requirement
shall not apply to aerosols and small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) with a maximum
capacity of 100 ml for UN No. 1011 butane. Other aerosol dispensers (UN No.1950 aerosols) shall be
made of metal, synthetic material or glass. Receptacles made of metal and having an outside diameter
of not less than 40 mm shall have a concave bottom.
6.2.6.1.2 The capacity of receptacles made of metal shall not exceed 1 000 ml; that of receptacles made of
synthetic material or of glass shall not exceed 500 ml.
6.2.6.1.3 Each model of receptacles (aerosol dispensers or cartridges) shall, before being put into service, satisfy
a hydraulic pressure test carried out in conformity with 6.2.6.2.
6.2.6.1.4 The release valves and dispersal devices of aerosol dispensers (UN No.1950 aerosols) and the valves of
UN No. 2037 small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) shall ensure that the receptacles are so
closed as to be leakproof and shall be protected against accidental opening. Valves and dispersal devices
which close only by the action of the internal pressure are not to be accepted.
6.2.6.1.5 The internal pressure of aerosol dispensers at 50 °C shall not exceed 1.2 MPa (12 bar) when using
flammable liquefied gases, 1.32 MPa (13.2 bar) when using non-flammable liquefied gases, and 1.5
MPa (15 bar) when using non-flammable compressed or dissolved gases. In case of a mixture of several
gases, the stricter limit shall apply. They shall be so filled that at 50 °C the liquid phase does not exceed
95 % of their capacity. Small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) shall meet the test pressure and
filling requirements of packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1. In addition, the product of test pressure and
water capacity shall not exceed 30 bar.litres for liquefied gases or 54 bar.litres for compressed gases
and the test pressure shall not exceed 250 bar for liquefied gases or 450 bar for compressed gases.
6.2.6.2 Hydraulic pressure test
6.2.6.2.1 The internal pressure to be applied (test pressure) shall be 1.5 times the internal pressure at 50 °C, with
a minimum pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar).
6.2.6.2.2 The hydraulic pressure tests shall be carried out on at least five empty receptacles of each model:
(a) until the prescribed test pressure is reached, by which time no leakage or visible permanent
deformation shall have occurred; and
(b) until leakage or bursting occurs; the dished end, if any, shall yield first and the receptacle shall
not leak or burst until a pressure 1.2 times the test pressure has been reached or passed.
6.2.6.3 Tightness (leakproofness) test
Each filled aerosol dispenser or gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shall be subjected to a test in a hot
water bath in accordance with 6.2.6.3.1 or an approved water bath alternative in accordance with
6.2.6.3.2.
6.2.6.3.1 Hot water bath test
6.2.6.3.1.1 The temperature of the water bath and the duration of the test shall be such that the internal pressure
reaches that which would be reached at 55 °C (50 °C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95 % of the
capacity of the aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or the fuel cell cartridge at 50 °C). If the contents are
sensitive to heat or if the aerosol dispensers, gas cartridges or the fuel cell cartridges are made of plastics
material which softens at this test temperature, the temperature of the bath shall be set at between 20 °C
and 30 °C but, in addition, one aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or the fuel cell cartridge in 2 000 shall
be tested at the higher temperature.
– 359 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 360 –
6.2.6.3.1.2 No leakage or permanent deformation of an aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or the fuel cell cartridge
may occur, except that a plastic aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or the fuel cell cartridge may be
deformed through softening provided that it does not leak.
6.2.6.3.2 Alternative methods
With the approval of the competent authority alternative methods that provide an equivalent level of
safety may be used provided that the requirements of 6.2.6.3.2.1 and, as appropriate, 6.2.6.3.2.2 or
6.2.6.3.2.3 are met.
6.2.6.3.2.1 Quality system
Aerosol dispenser, gas cartridge or the fuel cell cartridge fillers and component manufacturers shall
have a quality system. The quality system shall implement procedures to ensure that all aerosol
dispensers, gas cartridges or the fuel cell cartridges that leak or that are deformed are rejected and not
offered for transport.
The quality system shall include:
(a) A description of the organizational structure and responsibilities;
(b) The relevant inspection and test, quality control, quality assurance, and process operation
instructions that will be used;
(c) Quality records, such as inspection reports, test data, calibration data and certificates;
(d) Management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system;
(e) A process for control of documents and their revision;
(f) A means for control of non-conforming aerosol dispensers, gas cartridges or the fuel cell
cartridges;
(g) Training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel; and
(h) Procedures to ensure that there is no damage to the final product.
An initial audit and periodic audits shall be conducted to the satisfaction of the competent authority.
These audits shall ensure the approved system is and remains adequate and efficient. Any proposed
changes to the approved system shall be notified to the competent authority in advance.
6.2.6.3.2.2 Aerosol dispensers
6.2.6.3.2.2.1 Pressure and leak testing of aerosol dispensers before filling
Each empty aerosol dispenser shall be subjected to a pressure equal to or in excess of the maximum
expected in the filled aerosol dispensers at 55 °C (50 °C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95 % of the
capacity of the receptacle at 50 °C). This shall be at least two-thirds of the design pressure of the aerosol
dispenser. If any aerosol dispenser shows evidence of leakage at a rate equal to or greater than 3.3 × 10‑2
mbar.l.s-1 at the test pressure, distortion or other defect, it shall be rejected.
6.2.6.3.2.2.2 Testing of the aerosol dispensers after filling
Prior to filling the filler shall ensure that the crimping equipment is set appropriately and the specified
propellant is used.
Each filled aerosol dispenser shall be weighed and leak tested. The leak detection equipment shall be
sufficiently sensitive to detect at least a leak rate of 2.0 × 10-3 mbar.l.s-1 at 20 °C.
Any filled aerosol dispenser that shows evidence of leakage, deformation or excessive mass shall be
rejected.
6.2.6.3.2.3 Gas cartridges and fuel cell cartridges
6.2.6.3.2.3.1 Pressure testing of gas cartridges and fuel cell cartridges
– 360 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 361 –
Each gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shall be subjected to a test pressure equal to or in excess of the
maximum expected in the filled receptacle at 55 °C (50 °C if the liquid phase does not exceed 95 % of
the capacity of the receptacle at 50 °C). This test pressure shall be that specified for the gas cartridge or
fuel cell cartridge and shall not be less than two thirds the design pressure of the gas cartridge or fuel
cell cartridge. If any gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shows evidence of leakage at a rate equal to or
greater than 3.3 × 10-2 mbar.l.s -1 at the test pressure or distortion or any other defect, it shall be rejected.
6.2.6.3.2.3.2 Leak testing gas cartridges and fuel cell cartridges
Prior to filling and sealing, the filler shall ensure that the closures (if any), and the associated sealing
equipment are closed appropriately and the specified gas is used.
Each filled gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge shall be checked for the correct mass of gas and shall be
leak tested. The leak detection equipment shall be sufficiently sensitive to detect at least a leak rate of
2.0 × 10 -3 mbar.l.s-1 at 20 °C.
Any gas cartridge or fuel cell cartridge that has gas masses not in conformity with the declared mass
limits or shows evidence of leakage or deformation, shall be rejected.
6.2.6.3.3 With the approval of the competent authority, aerosols and receptacles, small, are not subject to 6.2.6.3.1
and 6.2.6.3.2, if they are required to be sterile but may be adversely affected by water bath testing,
provided:
(a) They contain a non-flammable gas and either
(i) contain other substances that are constituent parts of pharmaceutical products for medical,
veterinary or similar purposes;
(ii) contain other substances used in the production process for pharmaceutical products; or
(iii) are used in medical, veterinary or similar applications;
(b) An equivalent level of safety is achieved by the manufacturer’s use of alternative methods for
leak detection and pressure resistance, such as helium detection and water bathing a statistical
sample of at least 1 in 2000 from each production batch; and
(c) For pharmaceutical products according to (a) (i) and (iii) above, they are manufactured under the
authority of a national health administration. If required by the competent authority, the
principles of Good Manufacturing Practice (GMP) established by the World Health Organization
(WHO)3 shall be followed.
6.2.6.4 Reference to standards
The requirements of this section are deemed to be met if the following standards are complied with:
– for aerosol dispensers (UN No. 1950 aerosols): Annex to Council Directive 75/324/EEC4 as
amended and applicable at the date of manufacture;
– for UN No. 2037, small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) containing UN No. 1965,
hydrocarbon gas mixture n.o.s, liquefied: EN 417:2012 Non-refillable metallic gas cartridges for
liquefied petroleum gases, with or without a valve, for use with portable
appliances – Construction, inspection, testing and marking;
3 WHO Publication: “Quality assurance of pharmaceuticals. A compendium of guidelines and related materials.
Volume 2: Good manufacturing practices and inspection”.
4 Council Directive 75/324/EEC of 20 May 1975 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating
to aerosol dispensers, published in the Official Journal of the European Communities No. L 147 of 9.06.1975.
– 361 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 362 –
– for UN No. 2037 small receptacles containing gas (gas cartridges) containing non-toxic, non-
flammable compressed or liquefied gases: EN 16509:2014 Transportable gas cylinders – Non-
refillable, small transportable, steel cylinders of capacities up to and including 120 ml containing
compressed or liquefied gases (compact cylinders) – Design, construction, filling and testing. In
addition to the marks required by this standard the gas cartridge shall be marked “UN 2037/EN
16509”.
– 362 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 363 –
CHAPTER 6.3
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING OF PACKAGINGS FOR
CLASS 6.2 INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCES OF CATEGORY A (UN Nos. 2814 AND 2900)
NOTE: The requirements of this Chapter don’t apply to packagings used for the carriage of Class 6.2 substances
according to packing instruction P621 of 4.1.4.1.
6.3.1 General
6.3.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter apply to packagings intended for the carriage of infectious substances
of Category A , UN Nos. 2814 and 2900.
6.3.2 Requirements for packagings
6.3.2.1 The requirements for packagings in this section are based on packagings, as specified in 6.1.4, currently
used. In order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use
of packagings having specifications different from those in this Chapter provided that they are equally
effective, acceptable to the competent authority and able to successfully fulfil the requirements
described in 6.3.5. Methods of testing other than those described in ADR are acceptable provided they
are equivalent, and are recognized by the competent authority.
6.3.2.2 Packagings shall be manufactured and tested under a quality assurance programme which satisfies the
competent authority in order to ensure that each packaging meets the requirements of this Chapter.
NOTE: ISO 16106:2020 “Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings,
intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001”
provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed.
6.3.2.3 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding
procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required
gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for carriage are capable
of passing the applicable performance tests of this Chapter.
6.3.3 Code for designating types of packagings
6.3.3.1 The codes for designating types of packagings are set out in 6.1.2.7.
6.3.3.2 The letters “U” or “W” may follow the packaging code. The letter “U” signifies a special packaging
conforming to the requirements of 6.3.5.1.6. The letter “W” signifies that the packaging, although, of
the same type indicated by the code is manufactured to a specification different from that in 6.1.4 and
is considered equivalent under the requirements of 6.3.2.1.
6.3.4 Marking
NOTE 1: The marks indicate that the packaging which bears them corresponds to a successfully tested
design type and that it complies with the requirements of this Chapter which are related to the
manufacture, but not to the use, of the packaging.
NOTE 2: The marks are intended to be of assistance to packaging manufacturers, reconditioners,
packaging users, carriers and regulatory authorities.
NOTE 3: The marks do not always provide full details of the test levels, etc., and these may need to be
taken further into account, e.g. by reference to a test certificate, to test reports or to a register of
successfully tested packagings.
6.3.4.1 Each packaging intended for use according to ADR shall bear marks which are durable, legible and
placed in a location and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible. For packages
with a gross mass of more than 30 kg, the marks or a duplicate thereof shall appear on the top or on a
– 363 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 364 –
side of the packaging. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high, except for packagings
of 30 l capacity or less or of 30 kg maximum net mass, when they shall be at least 6 mm in height and
except for packagings of 5 l capacity or less or of 5 kg maximum net mass when they shall be of an
appropriate size.
6.3.4.2 A packaging that meets the requirements of this section and of 6.3.5 shall be marked with:
(a) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible
bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in
Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11;
(b) The code designating the type of packaging according to the requirements of 6.1.2;
(c) The text “CLASS 6.2”;
(d) The last two digits of the year of manufacture of the packaging;
(e) The state authorizing the allocation of the mark, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on
vehicles in international road traffic1;
(f) The name of the manufacturer or other identification of the packaging specified by the competent
authority;
(g) For packagings meeting the requirements of 6.3.5.1.6, the letter “U”, inserted immediately
following the mark required in (b) above.
6.3.4.3 Marks shall be applied in the sequence shown in 6.3.4.2 (a) to (g); each mark required in these sub-
paragraphs shall be clearly separated, e.g. by a slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable. For
examples, see 6.3.4.4.
Any additional marks authorized by a competent authority shall still enable the marks required in 6.3.4.1
to be correctly identified.
6.3.4.4 Example of marking
4G/CLASS 6.2/06 as in 6.3.4.2 (a), (b), (c) and (d)
S/SP-9989-ERIKSSON as in 6.3.4.2 (e) and (f)
6.3.5 Test requirements for packagings
6.3.5.1 Performance and frequency of tests
6.3.5.1.1 The design type of each packaging shall be tested as provided in this section in accordance with
procedures established by the competent authority allowing the allocation of the mark and shall be
approved by this competent authority.
6.3.5.1.2 Each packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this Chapter before being
used. A packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of
construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes packagings which
differ from the design type only in their lesser design height.
6.3.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority.
6.3.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of
construction of a packaging.
1 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 364 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 365 –
6.3.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of packagings that differ only in minor respects
from a tested type, e.g. smaller sizes or lower net mass of primary receptacles; and packagings such as
drums and boxes which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s).
6.3.5.1.6 Primary receptacles of any type may be assembled within a secondary packaging and carried without
testing in the rigid outer packaging under the following conditions:
(a) The rigid outer packaging shall have been successfully tested in accordance with 6.3.5.2.2 with
fragile (e.g. glass) primary receptacles;
(b) The total combined gross mass of primary receptacles shall not exceed one half the gross mass
of primary receptacles used for the drop test in (a) above;
(c) The thickness of cushioning between primary receptacles and between primary receptacles and
the outside of the secondary packaging shall not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses
in the originally tested packaging; and if a single primary receptacle was used in the original test,
the thickness of cushioning between primary receptacles shall not be less than the thickness of
cushioning between the outside of the secondary packaging and the primary receptacle in the
original test. When either fewer or smaller primary receptacles are used (as compared to the
primary receptacles used in the drop test), sufficient additional cushioning material shall be used
to take up the void spaces;
(d) The rigid outer packaging shall have successfully passed the stacking test in 6.1.5.6 while empty.
The total mass of identical packages shall be based on the combined mass of packagings used in
the drop test in (a) above;
(e) For primary receptacles containing liquids, an adequate quantity of absorbent material to absorb
the entire liquid content of the primary receptacles shall be present;
(f) If the rigid outer packaging is intended to contain primary receptacles for liquids and is not
leakproof, or is intended to contain primary receptacles for solids and is not siftproof, a means
of containing any liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage shall be provided in the form
of a leakproof liner, plastics bag or other equally effective means of containment;
(g) In addition to the marks prescribed in 6.3.4.2 (a) to (f), packagings shall be marked in accordance
with 6.3.4.2 (g).
6.3.5.1.7 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that
serially-produced packagings meet the requirements of the design type tests.
6.3.5.1.8 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected and with the approval of the competent authority,
several tests may be made on one sample.
6.3.5.2 Preparation of packagings for testing
6.3.5.2.1 Samples of each packaging shall be prepared as for carriage, except that a liquid or solid infectious
substance shall be replaced by water or, where conditioning at –18 °C is specified, by water/antifreeze.
Each primary receptacle shall be filled to not less than 98 % of its capacity.
NOTE: The term water includes water/antifreeze solution with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 for
testing at – 18 °C.
– 365 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 366 –
6.3.5.2.2 Tests and number of samples required
Tests required for packaging types
Type of packaging a Tests required
Rigid outer
packaging
Primary
receptacle
Water
spray
6.3.5.3.5.1
Cold
conditioning
6.3.5.3.5.2
Drop
6.3.5.3
Additional
drop
6.3.5.3.5.3
Puncture
6.3.5.4
Stack 6.1.5.6
Plastics Other
No. of
samples
No. of
samples
No. of
samples
No. of
samples
No. of
samples
No. of
samples
Fibreboard
box
x 5 5 10
Required on
one sample
when the
packaging is
intended to
contain dry
ice.
2
Required on
three samples
when testing a
“U”-marked
packaging as
defined in
6.3.5.1.6 for
specific
provisions.
x 5 0 5 2
Fibreboard
drum
x 3 3 6 2
x 3 0 3 2
Plastics box x 0 5 5 2
x 0 5 5 2
Plastics
drum/
jerrican
x 0 3 3 2
x 0 3 3 2
Boxes of
other
material
x 0 5 5 2
x 0 0 5 2
Drums/
jerricans of
other
material
x 0 3 3 2
x 0 0 3 2
a “Type of packaging” categorizes packagings for test purposes according to the kind of packaging and its
material characteristics.
NOTE 1: In instances where a primary receptacle is made of two or more materials, the material most
liable to damage determines the appropriate test.
NOTE 2: The material of the secondary packagings are not taken into consideration when selecting
the test or conditioning for the test.
Explanation for use of the table:
If the packaging to be tested consists of a fibreboard outer box with a plastics primary receptacle, five
samples must undergo the water spray test (see 6.3.5.3.5.1) prior to dropping and another five must be
conditioned to – 18 °C (see 6.3.5.3.5.2) prior to dropping. If the packaging is to contain dry ice then one
further single sample shall be dropped in accordance with 6.3.5.3.5.3.
Packagings prepared as for carriage shall be subjected to the tests in 6.3.5.3 and 6.3.5.4. For outer
packagings, the headings in the table relate to fibreboard or similar materials whose performance may
be rapidly affected by moisture; plastics which may embrittle at low temperature; and other materials
such as metal whose performance is not affected by moisture or temperature.
6.3.5.3 Drop test
6.3.5.3.1 Drop height and target
Samples shall be subjected to free-fall drops from a height of 9 m onto a non-resilient, horizontal, flat,
massive and rigid surface in conformity with 6.1.5.3.4.
6.3.5.3.2 Number of test samples and drop orientation
6.3.5.3.2.1 Where the samples are in the shape of a box, five shall be dropped one in each of the following
orientations:
(a) flat on the base;
(b) flat on the top;
– 366 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 367 –
(c) flat on the longest side;
(d) flat on the shortest side;
(e) on a corner.
6.3.5.3.2.2 Where the samples are in the shape of a drum or a jerrican, three shall be dropped one in each of the
following orientations:
(a) diagonally on the top edge, with the centre of gravity directly above the point of impact;
(b) diagonally on the base edge;
(c) flat on the body or side.
6.3.5.3.3 While the sample shall be released in the required orientation, it is accepted that for aerodynamic reasons
the impact may not take place in that orientation.
6.3.5.3.4 Following the appropriate drop sequence, there shall be no leakage from the primary receptacle(s) which
shall remain protected by cushioning/absorbent material in the secondary packaging.
6.3.5.3.5 Special preparation of test sample for the drop test
6.3.5.3.5.1 Fibreboard – Water spray test
Fibreboard outer packagings: The sample shall be subjected to a water spray that simulates exposure to
rainfall of approximately 5 cm per hour for at least one hour. It shall then be subjected to the test
described in 6.3.5.3.1.
6.3.5.3.5.2 Plastics material – Cold conditioning
Plastics primary receptacles or outer packagings: The temperature of the test sample and its contents
shall be reduced to – 18 °C or lower for a period of at least 24 hours and within 15 minutes of removal
from that atmosphere the test sample shall be subjected to the test described in 6.3.5.3.1. Where the
sample contains dry ice, the conditioning period shall be reduced to 4 hours.
6.3.5.3.5.3 Packagings intended to contain dry ice – Additional drop test
Where the packaging is intended to contain dry ice, a test additional to that specified in 6.3.5.3.1 and,
when appropriate, in 6.3.5.3.5.1 or 6.3.5.3.5.2 shall be carried out. One sample shall be stored so that
all the dry ice dissipates and then that sample shall be dropped in one of the orientations described in
6.3.5.3.2.1 or 6.3.5.3.2.2, as appropriate, which shall be that most likely to result in failure of the
packaging.
6.3.5.4 Puncture test
6.3.5.4.1 Packagings with a gross mass of 7 kg or less
Samples shall be placed on a level hard surface. A cylindrical steel rod with a mass of at least 7 kg, a
diameter of 38 mm and whose impact end edges have a radius not exceeding 6 mm (see Figure
6.3.5.4.2), shall be dropped in a vertical free fall from a height of 1 m, measured from the impact end
to the impact surface of the sample. One sample shall be placed on its base. A second sample shall be
placed in an orientation perpendicular to that used for the first. In each instance the steel rod shall be
aimed to impact the primary receptacle. Following each impact, penetration of the secondary packaging
is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage from the primary receptacle(s).
6.3.5.4.2 Packagings with a gross mass exceeding 7 kg
Samples shall be dropped on to the end of a cylindrical steel rod. The rod shall be set vertically in a
level hard surface. It shall have a diameter of 38 mm and the edges of its upper end shall have a radius
not exceeding 6 mm (see Figure 6.3.5.4.2). The rod shall protrude from the surface a distance at least
equal to that between the centre of the primary receptacle(s) and the outer surface of the outer packaging
with a minimum of 200 mm. One sample shall be dropped with its top face lowermost in a vertical free
fall from a height of 1 m, measured from the top of the steel rod. A second sample shall be dropped
from the same height in an orientation perpendicular to that used for the first. In each instance, the
packaging shall be so orientated that the steel rod would be capable of penetrating the primary
– 367 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 368 –
receptacle(s). Following each impact, penetration of the secondary packaging is acceptable provided
that there is no leakage from the primary receptacle(s).
Figure 6.3.5.4.2
6.3.5.5 Test report
6.3.5.5.1 A written test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available
to the users of the packaging:
1. Name and address of the test facility;
2. Name and address of applicant (where appropriate);
3. A unique test report identification;
4. Date of the test and of the report;
5. Manufacturer of the packaging;
6. Description of the packaging design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.),
including method of manufacture (e.g. blow moulding) and which may include drawing(s) and/or
photograph(s);
7. Maximum capacity;
8. Test contents;
9. Test descriptions and results;
10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory.
6.3.5.5.2 The test report shall contain statements that the packaging prepared as for carriage was tested in
accordance with the appropriate requirements of this Chapter and that the use of other packaging
methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the
competent authority.
– 368 –
Radius 6mm
Dimensions In millimetresCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 369 –
CHAPTER 6.4
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION, TESTING AND APPROVAL
OF PACKAGES FOR RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL AND FOR THE APPROVAL OF
SUCH MATERIAL
6.4.1 (Reserved)
6.4.2 General requirements
6.4.2.1 The package shall be so designed in relation to its mass, volume and shape that it can be easily and
safely carried. In addition, the package shall be so designed that it can be properly secured in or on the
vehicle during carriage.
6.4.2.2 The design shall be such that any lifting attachments on the package will not fail when used in the
intended manner and that, if failure of the attachments should occur, the ability of the package to meet
other requirements of this Annex would not be impaired. The design shall take account of appropriate
safety factors to cover snatch lifting.
6.4.2.3 Attachments and any other features on the outer surface of the package which could be used to lift it
shall be designed either to support its mass in accordance with the requirements of 6.4.2.2 or shall be
removable or otherwise rendered incapable of being used during carriage.
6.4.2.4 As far as practicable, the packaging shall be so designed that the external surfaces are free from
protruding features and can be easily decontaminated.
6.4.2.5 As far as practicable, the outer layer of the package shall be so designed as to prevent the collection and
the retention of water.
6.4.2.6 Any features added to the package at the time of carriage which are not part of the package shall not
reduce its safety.
6.4.2.7 The package shall be capable of withstanding the effects of any acceleration, vibration or vibration
resonance which may arise under routine conditions of carriage without any deterioration in the
effectiveness of the closing devices on the various receptacles or in the integrity of the package as a
whole. In particular, nuts, bolts and other securing devices shall be so designed as to prevent them from
becoming loose or being released unintentionally, even after repeated use.
6.4.2.8 The design of the package shall take into account ageing mechanisms.
6.4.2.9 The materials of the packaging and any components or structures shall be physically and chemically
compatible with each other and with the radioactive contents. Account shall be taken of their behaviour
under irradiation.
6.4.2.10 All valves through which the radioactive contents could escape shall be protected against unauthorized
operation.
6.4.2.11 The design of the package shall take into account ambient temperatures and pressures that are likely to
be encountered in routine conditions of carriage.
6.4.2.12 A package shall be so designed that it provides sufficient shielding to ensure that, under routine
conditions of carriage and with the maximum radioactive contents that the package is designed to
contain, the dose rate at any point on the external surface of the package would not exceed the values
specified in 2.2.7.2.4.1.2, 4.1.9.1.11 and 4.1.9.1.12, as applicable, with account taken of 7.5.11 CV33
(3.3) (b) and (3.5).
6.4.2.13 For radioactive material having other dangerous properties the package design shall take into account
those properties; see 2.1.3.5.3 and 4.1.9.1.5.
6.4.2.14 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding
procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required
– 369 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 370 –
gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for carriage are capable
of passing the applicable performance tests of this Chapter.
6.4.3 (Reserved)
6.4.4 Requirements for excepted packages
An excepted package shall be designed to meet the requirements specified in 6.4.2.1 to 6.4.2.13 and, in
addition, the requirements of 6.4.7.2 if it contains fissile material allowed by one of the provisions of
2.2.7.2.3.5 (a) to (f).
6.4.5 Requirements for Industrial packages
6.4.5.1 Types IP-1, IP-2, and IP-3 packages shall meet the requirements specified in 6.4.2 and 6.4.7.2.
6.4.5.2 A Type IP-2 package shall, if it were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.4 and 6.4.15.5, prevent:
(a) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
(b) More than a 20 % increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the package.
6.4.5.3 A Type IP-3 package shall meet all the requirements specified in 6.4.7.2 to 6.4.7.15.
6.4.5.4 Alternative requirements for Types IP-2 and IP-3 packages
6.4.5.4.1 Packages may be used as Type IP-2 package provided that:
(a) They satisfy the requirements of 6.4.5.1;
(b) They are designed to satisfy the requirements prescribed for packing group I or II in Chapter 6.1;
and
(c) When subjected to the tests required for packing groups I or II in Chapter 6.1, they would
prevent:
(i) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
(ii) More than a 20 % increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the
package.
6.4.5.4.2 Portable tanks may also be used as Types IP-2 or IP-3 packages, provided that:
(a) They satisfy the requirements of 6.4.5.1;
(b) They are designed to satisfy the requirements prescribed in Chapter 6.7 and are capable of
withstanding a test pressure of 265 kPa; and
(c) They are designed so that any additional shielding which is provided shall be capable of
withstanding the static and dynamic stresses resulting from handling and routine conditions of
carriage and of preventing more than a 20 % increase in the maximum dose rate at any external
surface of the portable tanks.
6.4.5.4.3 Tanks, other than portable tanks, may also be used as Types IP-2 or IP-3 packages for carrying LSA-I
and LSA-II as prescribed in Table 4.1.9.2.5, provided that:
(a) They satisfy the requirements of 6.4.5.1;
(b) They are designed to satisfy the requirements prescribed in Chapter 6.8; and
(c) They are designed so that any additional shielding which is provided shall be capable of
withstanding the static and dynamic stresses resulting from handling and routine conditions of
carriage and of preventing more than a 20 % increase in the maximum dose rate at any external
surface of the tanks.
– 370 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 371 –
6.4.5.4.4 Containers with the characteristics of a permanent enclosure may also be used as Types IP-2 or IP-3
packages, provided that:
(a) The radioactive contents are restricted to solid materials;
(b) They satisfy the requirements of 6.4.5.1; and
(c) They are designed to conform to ISO 1496-1:1990: “Series 1 Containers – Specifications and
Testing – Part 1: General Cargo Containers” and subsequent amendments 1:1993, 2:1998,
3:2005, 4:2006 and 5:2006, excluding dimensions and ratings. They shall be designed such that
if subjected to the tests prescribed in that document and the accelerations occurring during
routine conditions of carriage they would prevent:
(i) loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
(ii) more than a 20 % increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the
containers.
6.4.5.4.5 Metal intermediate bulk containers may also be used as Types IP-2 or IP-3 packages provided that:
(a) They satisfy the requirements of 6.4.5.1; and
(b) They are designed to satisfy the requirements prescribed in Chapter 6.5 for packing group I or
II, and if they were subjected to the tests prescribed in that Chapter, but with the drop test
conducted in the most damaging orientation, they would prevent:
(i) loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
(ii) more than a 20 % increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the
intermediate bulk container.
6.4.6 Requirements for packages containing uranium hexafluoride
6.4.6.1 Packages designed to contain uranium hexafluoride shall meet the requirements which pertain to the
radioactive and fissile properties of the material prescribed elsewhere in ADR. Except as allowed
in 6.4.6.4, uranium hexafluoride in quantities of 0.1 kg or more shall also be packaged and carried in
accordance with the provisions of ISO 7195:2005 “Nuclear Energy – Packaging of uranium
hexafluoride (UF6) for transport”, and the requirements of 6.4.6.2 and 6.4.6.3.
6.4.6.2 Each package designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall be designed so that the
package would meet the following requirements:
(a) Withstand without leakage and without unacceptable stress, as specified in ISO 7195:2005, the
structural test as specified in 6.4.21.5 except as allowed in 6.4.6.4;
(b) Withstand without loss or dispersal of the uranium hexafluoride the free drop test specified
in 6.4.15.4; and
(c) Withstand without rupture of the containment system the thermal test specified in 6.4.17.3 except
as allowed in 6.4.6.4.
6.4.6.3 Packages designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride shall not be provided with
pressure relief devices.
6.4.6.4 Subject to multilateral approval, packages designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride
may be carried if the packages are designed:
(a) to international or national standards other than ISO 7195:2005 provided an equivalent level of
safety is maintained; and/or
(b) to withstand without leakage and without unacceptable stress a test pressure of less than 2.76
MPa as specified in 6.4.21.5; and/or
(c) to contain 9 000 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride and the packages do not meet the
requirement of 6.4.6.2 (c).
– 371 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 372 –
In all other respects the requirements specified in 6.4.6.1 to 6.4.6.3 shall be satisfied.
6.4.7 Requirements for Type A packages
6.4.7.1 Type A packages shall be designed to meet the general requirements of 6.4.2 and of 6.4.7.2 to 6.4.7.17.
6.4.7.2 The smallest overall external dimension of the package shall not be less than 10 cm.
6.4.7.3 The outside of the package shall incorporate a feature such as a seal, which is not readily breakable and
which, while intact, will be evidence that it has not been opened.
6.4.7.4 Any tie-down attachments on the package shall be so designed that, under normal and accident
conditions of carriage, the forces in those attachments shall not impair the ability of the package to meet
the requirements of ADR.
6.4.7.5 The design of the package shall take into account temperatures ranging from -40C to +70C for the
components of the packaging. Attention shall be given to freezing temperatures for liquids and to the
potential degradation of packaging materials within the given temperature range.
6.4.7.6 The design and manufacturing techniques shall be in accordance with national or international
standards, or other requirements, acceptable to the competent authority.
6.4.7.7 The design shall include a containment system securely closed by a positive fastening device which
cannot be opened unintentionally or by a pressure which may arise within the package.
6.4.7.8 Special form radioactive material may be considered as a component of the containment system.
6.4.7.9 If the containment system forms a separate unit of the package, the continment system shall be capable
of being securely closed by a positive fastening device which is independent of any other part of the
packaging.
6.4.7.10 The design of any component of the containment system shall take into account, where applicable, the
radiolytic decomposition of liquids and other vulnerable materials and the generation of gas by chemical
reaction and radiolysis.
6.4.7.11 The containment system shall retain its radioactive contents under a reduction of ambient pressure
to 60 kPa.
6.4.7.12 All valves, other than pressure relief valves, shall be provided with an enclosure to retain any leakage
from the valve.
6.4.7.13 A radiation shield which encloses a component of the package specified as a part of the containment
system shall be so designed as to prevent the unintentional release of that component from the shield.
Where the radiation shield and such component within it form a separate unit, the radiation shield shall
be capable of being securely closed by a positive fastening device which is independent of any other
packaging structure.
6.4.7.14 A package shall be so designed that if it were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15, it would prevent:
(a) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
(b) More than a 20 % increase in the maximum dose rate at any external surface of the package.
6.4.7.15 The design of a package intended for liquid radioactive material shall make provision for ullage to
accommodate variations in the temperature of the contents, dynamic effects and filling dynamics.
Type A packages to contain liquids
6.4.7.16 A Type A package designed to contain liquid radioactive material shall, in addition:
(a) Be adequate to meet the conditions specified in 6.4.7.14 (a) above if the package is subjected to
the tests specified in 6.4.16; and
(b) Either
– 372 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 373 –
(i) be provided with sufficient absorbent material to absorb twice the volume of the liquid
contents. Such absorbent material shall be suitably positioned so as to contact the liquid
in the event of leakage; or
(ii) be provided with a containment system composed of primary inner and secondary outer
containment components designed to enclose the liquid contents completely and ensure
their retention, within the secondary outer containment components, even if the primary
inner components leak.
Type A packages to contain gas
6.4.7.17 A Type A package designed for gases shall prevent loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents if the
package were subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.16, except for a Type A package designed for tritium
gas or for noble gases.
6.4.8 Requirements for Type B(U) packages
6.4.8.1 Type B(U) packages shall be designed to meet the requirements specified in 6.4.2, and of 6.4.7.2 to
6.4.7.15, except as specified in 6.4.7.14 (a), and, in addition, the requirements specified in 6.4.8.2
to 6.4.8.15.
6.4.8.2 A package shall be so designed that, under the ambient conditions specified in 6.4.8.5 and 6.4.8.6, heat
generated within the package by the radioactive contents shall not, under normal conditions of carriage,
as demonstrated by the tests in 6.4.15, adversely affect the package in such a way that it would fail to
meet the applicable requirements for containment and shielding if left unattended for a period of one
week. Particular attention shall be paid to the effects of heat, which may cause one or more of the
following:
(a) Alteration of the arrangement, the geometrical form or the physical state of the radioactive
contents or, if the radioactive material is enclosed in a can or receptacle (for example, clad fuel
elements), cause the can, receptacle or radioactive material to deform or melt;
(b) Lessening of the efficiency of the packaging through differential thermal expansion or cracking
or melting of the radiation shielding material;
(c) Acceleration of corrosion when combined with moisture.
6.4.8.3 A package shall be so designed that, under the ambient condition specified in 6.4.8.5 and in the absence
of insolation, the temperature of the accessible surfaces of a package shall not exceed 50 °C, unless the
package is carried under exclusive use.
6.4.8.4 The maximum temperature of any surface readily accessible during carriage of a package under
exclusive use shall not exceed 85 C in the absence of insolation under the ambient conditions specified
in 6.4.8.5. Account may be taken of barriers or screens intended to give protection to persons without
the need for the barriers or screens being subject to any test.
6.4.8.5 The ambient temperature shall be assumed to be 38 C.
6.4.8.6 The solar insolation conditions shall be assumed to be as specified in Table 6.4.8.6.
Table 6.4.8.6: Insolation data
Case Form and location of surface Insolation for 12 hours
per day (W/m²)
1 Flat surfaces carried horizontally-downward facing 0
2 Flat surfaces carried horizontally-upward facing 800
3 Surfaces carried vertically 200a
4 Other downward facing (not horizontal) surfaces 200a
5 All other surfaces 400a
a Alternatively, a sine function may be used, with an absorption coefficient adopted and the effects
of possible reflection from neighbouring objects neglected.
– 373 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 374 –
6.4.8.7 A package which includes thermal protection for the purpose of satisfying the requirements of the
thermal test specified in 6.4.17.3 shall be so designed that such protection will remain effective if the
package is subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15 and 6.4.17.2 (a) and (b) or 6.4.17.2 (b) and (c), as
appropriate. Any such protection on the exterior of the package shall not be rendered ineffective by
ripping, cutting, skidding, abrasion or rough handling.
6.4.8.8 A package shall be so designed that, if it were subjected to:
(a) The tests specified in 6.4.15, it would restrict the loss of radioactive contents to not more
than 10 -6 A 2 per hour; and
(b) The tests specified in 6.4.17.1, 6.4.17.2 (b), 6.4.17.3, and 6.4.17.4 and either the test in
(i) 6.4.17.2 (c), when the package has a mass not greater than 500 kg, an overall density not
greater than 1 000 kg/m³ based on the external dimensions, and radioactive contents
greater than 1 000 A 2 not as special form radioactive material, or
(ii) 6.4.17.2 (a), for all other packages,
it would meet the following requirements:
– retain sufficient shielding to ensure that the dose rate at 1 m from the surface of the package
would not exceed 10 mSv/h with the maximum radioactive contents which the package is
designed to contain; and
– restrict the accumulated loss of radioactive contents in a period of one week to not more than
10 A 2 for krypton-85 and not more than A 2 for all other radionuclides.
Where mixtures of different radionuclides are present, the provisions of 2.2.7.2.2.4 to 2.2.7.2.2.6 shall
apply except that for krypton-85 an effective A2(i) value equal to 10 A 2 may be used. For case (a) above,
the assessment shall take into account the external non-fixed contamination limits of 4.1.9.1.2.
6.4.8.9 A package for radioactive contents with activity greater than 10 5 A 2 shall be so designed that if it were
subjected to the enhanced water immersion test specified in 6.4.18, there would be no rupture of the
containment system.
6.4.8.10 Compliance with the permitted activity release limits shall depend neither upon filters nor upon a
mechanical cooling system.
6.4.8.11 A package shall not include a pressure relief system from the containment system which would allow
the release of radioactive material to the environment under the conditions of the tests specified in 6.4.15
and 6.4.17.
6.4.8.12 A package shall be so designed that if it were at the maximum normal operating pressure and it were
subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15 and 6.4.17, the level of strains in the containment system would
not attain values which would adversely affect the package in such a way that it would fail to meet the
applicable requirements.
6.4.8.13 A package shall not have a maximum normal operating pressure in excess of a gauge pressure
of 700 kPa.
6.4.8.14 A package containing low dispersible radioactive material shall be so designed that any features added
to the low dispersible radioactive material that are not part of it, or any internal components of the
packaging shall not adversely affect the performance of the low dispersible radioactive material.
6.4.8.15 A package shall be designed for an ambient temperature range from -40 C to +38 C.
6.4.9 Requirements for Type B(M) packages
6.4.9.1 Type B(M) packages shall meet the requirements for Type B(U) packages specified in 6.4.8.1, except
that for packages to be carried solely within a specified country or solely between specified countries,
conditions other than those given in 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4 to 6.4.8.6, and 6.4.8.9 to 6.4.8.15 above may be
assumed with the approval of the competent authorities of these countries. The requirements for Type
B(U) packages specified in 6.4.8.4 and 6.4.8.9 to 6.4.8.15 shall be met as far as practicable.
– 374 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 375 –
6.4.9.2 Intermittent venting of Type B(M) packages may be permitted during carriage, provided that the
operational controls for venting are acceptable to the relevant competent authorities.
6.4.10 Requirements for Type C packages
6.4.10.1 Type C packages shall be designed to meet the requirements specified in 6.4.2 and of 6.4.7.2 to 6.4.7.15,
except as specified in 6.4.7.14 (a), and of the requirements specified in 6.4.8.2 to 6.4.8.6, 6.4.8.10 to
6.4.8.15, and, in addition, of 6.4.10.2 to 6.4.10.4.
6.4.10.2 A package shall be capable of meeting the assessment criteria prescribed for tests in 6.4.8.8 (b)
and 6.4.8.12 after burial in an environment defined by a thermal conductivity of 0.33 W.m -1 .K -1 and a
temperature of 38 °C in the steady state. Initial conditions for the assessment shall assume that any
thermal insulation of the package remains intact, the package is at the maximum normal operating
pressure and the ambient temperature is 38 °C.
6.4.10.3 A package shall be so designed that, if it were at the maximum normal operating pressure and subjected
to:
(a) The tests specified in 6.4.15, it would restrict the loss of radioactive contents to not more than
10 -6 A 2 per hour; and
(b) The test sequences in 6.4.20.1,
(i) it would retain sufficient shielding to ensure that the dose rate at 1 m from the surface of
the package would not exceed 10 mSv/h with the maximum radioactive contents which
the package is designed to contain; and
(ii) it would restrict the accumulated loss of radioactive contents in a period of 1 week to not
more than 10 A 2 for krypton-85 and not more than A 2 for all other radionuclides.
Where mixtures of different radionuclides are present, the provisions of 2.2.7.2.2.4 to 2.2.7.2.2.6 shall
apply except that for krypton-85 an effective A2(i) value equal to 10 A 2 may be used. For case (a) above,
the assessment shall take into account the external contamination limits of 4.1.9.1.2.
6.4.10.4 A package shall be so designed that there will be no rupture of the containment system following
performance of the enhanced water immersion test specified in 6.4.18.
6.4.11 Requirements for packages containing fissile material
6.4.11.1 Fissile material shall be carried so as to:
(a) Maintain sub-criticality during routine, normal and accident conditions of carriage; in particular,
the following contingencies shall be considered:
(i) water leaking into or out of packages;
(ii) the loss of efficiency of built-in neutron absorbers or moderators;
(iii) rearrangement of the contents either within the package or as a result of loss from the
package;
(iv) reduction of spaces within or between packages;
(v) packages becoming immersed in water or buried in snow; and
(vi) temperature changes; and
(b) Meet the requirements:
(i) of 6.4.7.2 except for unpackaged material when specifically allowed by 2.2.7.2.3.5 (e);
(ii) prescribed elsewhere in ADR which pertain to the radioactive properties of the material;
(iii) of 6.4.7.3 unless the material is excepted by 2.2.7.2.3.5;
– 375 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 376 –
(iv) of 6.4.11.4 to 6.4.11.14, unless the material is excepted by 2.2.7.2.3.5, 6.4.11.2 or
6.4.11.3.
6.4.11.2 Packages containing fissile material that meet the provisions of subparagraph (d) and one of the
provisions of (a) to (c) below are excepted from the requirements of 6.4.11.4 to 6.4.11.14.
(a) Packages containing fissile material in any form provided that:
(i) The smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 10 cm;
(ii) The criticality safety index of the package is calculated using the following formula:
* Plutonium may be of any isotopic composition provided that the amount of Pu-241 is
less than that of Pu-240 in the package
where the values of Z are taken from Table 6.4.11.2;
(iii) The CSI of any package does not exceed 10;
(b) Packages containing fissile material in any form provided that:
(i) The smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 30 cm;
(ii) The package, after being subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.1 to 6.4.15.6:
– Retains its fissile material contents;
– Preserves the minimum overall outside dimensions of the package to at least 30 cm;
– Prevents the entry of a 10 cm cube;
(iii) The criticality safety index of the package is calculated using the following formula:
* Plutonium may be of any isotopic composition provided that the amount of Pu-241 is
less than that of Pu-240 in the package
where the values of Z are taken from Table 6.4.11.2;
(iv) The criticality safety index of any package does not exceed 10;
(c) Packages containing fissile material in any form provided that:
(i) The smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 10 cm;
(ii) The package, after being subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.1 to 6.4.15.6:
– Retains its fissile material contents;
– Preserves the minimum overall outside dimensions of the package to at least 10 cm;
– Prevents the entry of a 10 cm cube;
(iii) The CSI of the package is calculated using the following formula:
* Plutonium may be of any isotopic composition provided that the amount of Pu-241 is
less than that of Pu-240 in the package
280
(g)packagein*nuclidesfissileotherof
Z
(g)packagein235-Uof
550 MassMass
CSI
280
(g)packagein*nuclidesfissileotherof
Z
(g)packagein235-Uof
250 MassMass
CSI
280
(g)packagein*nuclidesfissileotherof
450
(g)packagein235-Uof
250 MassMass
CSI
– 376 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
r
r
r
– 377 –
(iv) The total mass of fissile nuclides in any package does not exceed 15 g;
(d) The total mass of beryllium, hydrogenous material enriched in deuterium, graphite and other
allotropic forms of carbon in an individual package shall not be greater than the mass of fissile
nuclides in the package except where the total concentration of these materials does not exceed
1 g in any 1 000 g of material. Beryllium incorporated in copper alloys up to 4 % in weight of
the alloy does not need to be considered.
Table 6.4.11.2 Values of Z for calculation of criticality safety index in accordance with 6.4.11.2
Enrichmenta Z
Uranium enriched up to 1.5 % 2200
Uranium enriched up to 5 % 850
Uranium enriched up to 10 % 660
Uranium enriched up to 20 % 580
Uranium enriched up to 100 % 450
a If a package contains uranium with varying enrichments of U-235, then the value
corresponding to the highest enrichment shall be used for Z.
6.4.11.3 Packages containing not more than 1 000 g of plutonium are excepted from the application of 6.4.11.4
to 6.4.11.14 provided that:
(a) Not more than 20 % of the plutonium by mass is fissile nuclides;
(b) The criticality safety index of the package is calculated using the following formula:
(c) If uranium is present with the plutonium, the mass of uranium shall be no more than 1 % of the
mass of the plutonium.
6.4.11.4 Where the chemical or physical form, isotopic composition, mass or concentration, moderation ratio or
density, or geometric configuration is not known, the assessments of 6.4.11.8 to 6.4.11.13 shall be
performed assuming that each parameter that is not known has the value which gives the maximum
neutron multiplication consistent with the known conditions and parameters in these assessments.
6.4.11.5 For irradiated nuclear fuel the assessments of 6.4.11.8 to 6.4.11.13 shall be based on an isotopic
composition demonstrated to provide either:
(a) The maximum neutron multiplication during the irradiation history; or
(b) A conservative estimate of the neutron multiplication for the package assessments. After
irradiation but prior to shipment, a measurement shall be performed to confirm the conservatism
of the isotopic composition.
6.4.11.6 The package, after being subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15, shall:
(a) Preserve the minimum overall outside dimensions of the package to at least 10 cm; and
(b) Prevent the entry of a 10 cm cube.
6.4.11.7 The package shall be designed for an ambient temperature range of -40C to + 38C unless the
competent authority specifies otherwise in the certificate of approval for the package design.
1000
(g)plutoniumofmass
250 CSI
– 377 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 378 –
6.4.11.8 For a package in isolation, it shall be assumed that water can leak into or out of all void spaces of the
package, including those within the containment system. However, if the design incorporates special
features to prevent such leakage of water into or out of certain void spaces, even as a result of error,
absence of leakage may be assumed in respect of those void spaces. Special features shall include either
of the following:
(a) Multiple high standard water barriers, not less than two of which would remain watertight if the
package were subject to the tests prescribed in 6.4.11.13 (b), a high degree of quality control in
the manufacture, maintenance and repair of packagings and tests to demonstrate the closure of
each package before each shipment; or
(b) For packages containing uranium hexafluoride only, with maximum enrichment of 5 mass
percent uranium-235:
(i) packages where, following the tests prescribed in 6.4.11.13 (b), there is no physical
contact between the valve or the plug and any other component of the packaging other
than at its original point of attachment and where, in addition, following the test
prescribed in 6.4.17.3 the valves and the plug remain leaktight; and
(ii) a high degree of quality control in the manufacture, maintenance and repair of packagings
coupled with tests to demonstrate closure of each package before each shipment.
6.4.11.9 It shall be assumed that the confinement system is closely reflected by at least 20 cm of water or such
greater reflection as may additionally be provided by the surrounding material of the packaging.
However, when it can be demonstrated that the confinement system remains within the packaging
following the tests prescribed in 6.4.11.13 (b), close reflection of the package by at least 20 cm of water
may be assumed in 6.4.11.10 (c).
6.4.11.10 The package shall be subcritical under the conditions of 6.4.11.8 and 6.4.11.9 with the package
conditions that result in the maximum neutron multiplication consistent with:
(a) Routine conditions of carriage (incident free);
(b) The tests specified in 6.4.11.12 (b);
(c) The tests specified in 6.4.11.13 (b).
6.4.11.11 (Reserved)
6.4.11.12 For normal conditions of carriage a number “N” shall be derived, such that five times “N” packages
shall be subcritical for the arrangement and package conditions that provide the maximum neutron
multiplication consistent with the following:
(a) There shall not be anything between the packages, and the package arrangement shall be
reflected on all sides by at least 20 cm of water; and
(b) The state of the packages shall be their assessed or demonstrated condition if they had been
subjected to the tests specified in 6.4.15.
6.4.11.13 For accident conditions of carriage a number “N” shall be derived, such that two times “N” packages
shall be subcritical for the arrangement and package conditions that provide the maximum neutron
multiplication consistent with the following:
(a) Hydrogenous moderation between packages, and the package arrangement reflected on all sides
by at least 20 cm of water; and
(b) The tests specified in 6.4.15 followed by whichever of the following is the more limiting:
(i) the tests specified in 6.4.17.2 (b) and, either 6.4.17.2 (c) for packages having a mass not
greater than 500 kg and an overall density not greater than 1 000 kg/m³ based on the
external dimensions, or 6.4.17.2 (a) for all other packages; followed by the test specified
in 6.4.17.3 and completed by the tests specified in 6.4.19.1 to 6.4.19.3; or
(ii) the test specified in 6.4.17.4; and
– 378 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 379 –
(c) Where any part of the fissile material escapes from the containment system following the tests
specified in 6.4.11.13 (b), it shall be assumed that fissile material escapes from each package in
the array and all of the fissile material shall be arranged in the configuration and moderation that
results in the maximum neutron multiplication with close reflection by at least 20 cm of water.
6.4.11.14 The criticality safety index (CSI) for packages containing fissile material shall be obtained by dividing
the number 50 by the smaller of the two values of N derived in 6.4.11.12 and 6.4.11.13 (i.e. CSI =
50/N). The value of the criticality safety index may be zero, provided that an unlimited number of
packages is subcritical (i.e. N is effectively equal to infinity in both cases).
6.4.12 Test procedures and demonstration of compliance
6.4.12.1 Demonstration of compliance with the performance standards required in 2.2.7.2.3.3.1, 2.2.7.2.3.3.2,
2.2.7.2.3.4.1, 2.2.7.2.3.4.2, 2.2.7.2.3.4.3, and 6.4.2 to 6.4.11 must be accomplished by any of the
methods listed below or by a combination thereof:
(a) Performance of tests with specimens representing special form radioactive material, or low
dispersible radioactive material or with prototypes or samples of the packaging, where the
contents of the specimen or the packaging for the tests shall simulate as closely as practicable
the expected range of radioactive contents and the specimen or packaging to be tested shall be
prepared as presented for carriage;
(b) Reference to previous satisfactory demonstrations of a sufficiently similar nature;
(c) Performance of tests with models of appropriate scale incorporating those features which are
significant with respect to the item under investigation when engineering experience has shown
results of such tests to be suitable for design purposes. When a scale model is used, the need
for adjusting certain test parameters, such as penetrator diameter or compressive load, shall be
taken into account;
(d) Calculation, or reasoned argument, when the calculation procedures and parameters are
generally agreed to be reliable or conservative.
6.4.12.2 After the specimen, prototype or sample has been subjected to the tests, appropriate methods of
assessment shall be used to assure that the requirements for the test procedures have been fulfilled in
compliance with the performance and acceptance standards prescribed in 2.2.7.2.3.3.1, 2.2.7.2.3.3.2,
2.2.7.2.3.4.1, 2.2.7.2.3.4.2, 2.2.7.2.3.4.3, and 6.4.2 to 6.4.11.
6.4.12.3 All specimens shall be inspected before testing in order to identify and record faults or damage including
the following:
(a) Divergence from the design;
(b) Defects in manufacture;
(c) Corrosion or other deterioration; and
(d) Distortion of features.
The containment system of the package shall be clearly specified. The external features of the specimen
shall be clearly identified so that reference may be made simply and clearly to any part of such specimen.
6.4.13 Testing the integrity of the containment system and shielding and evaluating criticality safety
After each test or group of tests or sequence of the applicable tests, as appropriate, specified in 6.4.15
to 6.4.21:
(a) Faults and damage shall be identified and recorded;
(b) It shall be determined whether the integrity of the containment system and shielding has been
retained to the extent required in 6.4.2 to 6.4.11 for the package under test; and
– 379 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 380 –
(c) For packages containing fissile material, it shall be determined whether the assumptions and
conditions used in the assessments required by 6.4.11.1 to 6.4.11.14 for one or more packages
are valid.
6.4.14 Target for drop tests
The target for the drop tests specified in 2.2.7.2.3.3.5 (a), 6.4.15.4, 6.4.16 (a), 6.4.17.2 and 6.4.20.2 shall
be a flat, horizontal surface of such a character that any increase in its resistance to displacement or
deformation upon impact by the specimen would not significantly increase the damage to the specimen.
6.4.15 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand normal conditions of carriage
6.4.15.1 The tests are: the water spray test, the free drop test, the stacking test and the penetration test. Specimens
of the package shall be subjected to the free drop test, the stacking test and the penetration test, preceded
in each case by the water spray test. One specimen may be used for all the tests, provided that the
requirements of 6.4.15.2 are fulfilled.
6.4.15.2 The time interval between the conclusion of the water spray test and the succeeding test shall be such
that the water has soaked in to the maximum extent, without appreciable drying of the exterior of the
specimen. In the absence of any evidence to the contrary, this interval shall be taken to be two hours if
the water spray is applied from four directions simultaneously. No time interval shall elapse, however,
if the water spray is applied from each of the four directions consecutively.
6.4.15.3 Water spray test: The specimen shall be subjected to a water spray test that simulates exposure to rainfall
of approximately 5 cm per hour for at least one hour.
6.4.15.4 Free drop test: The specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer maximum damage in respect of
the safety features to be tested.
(a) The height of the drop, measured from the lowest point of the specimen to the upper surface of
the target, shall be not less than the distance specified in Table 6.4.15.4 for the applicable mass.
The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14;
(b) For rectangular fibreboard or wood packages not exceeding a mass of 50 kg, a separate specimen
shall be subjected to a free drop onto each corner from a height of 0.3 m;
(c) For cylindrical fibreboard packages not exceeding a mass of 100 kg, a separate specimen shall
be subjected to a free drop onto each of the quarters of each rim from a height of 0.3 m.
Table 6.4.15.4: Free drop distance for testing packages to normal conditions of carriage
Package mass (kg) Free drop distance (m)
Package mass < 5 000 1.2
5 000 Package mass < 10 000 0.9
10 000 Package mass < 15 000 0.6
15 000 Package mass 0.3
6.4.15.5 Stacking test: Unless the shape of the packaging effectively prevents stacking, the specimen shall be
subjected, for a period of 24 h, to a compressive load equal to the greater of the following:
(a) The equivalent of 5 times the maximum weight of the package; and
(b) The equivalent of 13 kPa multiplied by the vertically projected area of the package.
The load shall be applied uniformly to two opposite sides of the specimen, one of which shall be the
base on which the package would typically rest.
6.4.15.6 Penetration test: The specimen shall be placed on a rigid, flat, horizontal surface which will not move
significantly while the test is being carried out.
– 380 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 381 –
(a) A bar of 3.2 cm in diameter with a hemispherical end and a mass of 6 kg shall be dropped and
directed to fall, with its longitudinal axis vertical, onto the centre of the weakest part of the
specimen, so that, if it penetrates sufficiently far, it will hit the containment system. The bar shall
not be significantly deformed by the test performance;
(b) The height of the drop of the bar, measured from its lower end to the intended point of impact
on the upper surface of the specimen, shall be 1 m.
6.4.16 Additional tests for Type A packages designed for liquids and gases
A specimen or separate specimens shall be subjected to each of the following tests unless it can be
demonstrated that one test is more severe for the specimen in question than the other, in which case one
specimen shall be subjected to the more severe test.
(a) Free drop test: The specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer the maximum damage in
respect of containment. The height of the drop measured from the lowest part of the specimen to
the upper surface of the target shall be 9 m. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14;
(b) Penetration test: The specimen shall be subjected to the test specified in 6.4.15.6 except that the
height of drop shall be increased to 1.7 m from the 1 m specified in 6.4.15.6 (b).
6.4.17 Tests for demonstrating ability to withstand accident conditions in carriage
6.4.17.1 The specimen shall be subjected to the cumulative effects of the tests specified in 6.4.17.2 and 6.4.17.3,
in that order. Following these tests, either this specimen or a separate specimen shall be subjected to the
effect(s) of the water immersion test(s) as specified in 6.4.17.4 and, if applicable, 6.4.18.
6.4.17.2 Mechanical test: The mechanical test consists of three different drop tests. Each specimen shall be
subjected to the applicable drops as specified in 6.4.8.8 or 6.4.11.13. The order in which the specimen
is subjected to the drops shall be such that, on completion of the mechanical test, the specimen shall
have suffered such damage as will lead to the maximum damage in the thermal test which follows.
(a) For drop I, the specimen shall drop onto the target so as to suffer the maximum damage, and the
height of the drop measured from the lowest point of the specimen to the upper surface of the
target shall be 9 m. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14;
(b) For drop II, the specimen shall drop onto a bar rigidly mounted perpendicularly on the target so
as to suffer the maximum damage. The height of the drop measured from the intended point of
impact of the specimen to the upper surface of the bar shall be 1 m. The bar shall be of solid mild
steel of circular cross-section, (15.0 cm ± 0.5 cm) in diameter and 20 cm long unless a longer
bar would cause greater damage, in which case a bar of sufficient length to cause maximum
damage shall be used. The upper end of the bar shall be flat and horizontal with its edge rounded
off to a radius of not more than 6 mm. The target on which the bar is mounted shall be as
described in 6.4.14;
(c) For drop III, the specimen shall be subjected to a dynamic crush test by positioning the specimen
on the target so as to suffer maximum damage by the drop of a 500 kg mass from 9 m onto the
specimen. The mass shall consist of a solid mild steel plate 1 m by 1 m and shall fall in a
horizontal attitude. The lower face of the steel plate shall have its edges and corners rounded off
to a radius of not more than 6 mm. The height of the drop shall be measured from the underside
of the plate to the highest point of the specimen. The target on which the specimen rests shall be
as defined in 6.4.14.
6.4.17.3 Thermal test: The specimen shall be in thermal equilibrium under conditions of an ambient temperature
of 38 C, subject to the solar insolation conditions specified in Table 6.4.8.6 and subject to the design
maximum rate of internal heat generation within the package from the radioactive contents.
Alternatively, any of these parameters are allowed to have different values prior to and during the test,
providing due account is taken of them in the subsequent assessment of package response.
The thermal test shall then consist of:
(a) Exposure of a specimen for a period of 30 minutes to a thermal environment which provides a
heat flux at least equivalent to that of a hydrocarbon fuel/air fire in sufficiently quiescent ambient
– 381 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 382 –
conditions to give a minimum average flame emissivity coefficient of 0.9 and an average
temperature of at least 800 C, fully engulfing the specimen, with a surface absorptivity
coefficient of 0.8 or that value which the package may be demonstrated to possess if exposed to
the fire specified, followed by;
(b) Exposure of the specimen to an ambient temperature of 38 C, subject to the solar insolation
conditions specified in Table 6.4.8.6 and subject to the design maximum rate of internal heat
generation within the package by the radioactive contents for a sufficient period to ensure that
temperatures in the specimen are decreasing in all parts of the specimen and/or are approaching
initial steady state conditions. Alternatively, any of these parameters are allowed to have
different values following cessation of heating, providing due account is taken of them in the
subsequent assessment of package response.
During and following the test the specimen shall not be artificially cooled and any combustion of
materials of the specimen shall be permitted to proceed naturally.
6.4.17.4 Water immersion test: The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 15 m for a
period of not less than eight hours in the attitude which will lead to maximum damage. For
demonstration purposes, an external gauge pressure of at least 150 kPa shall be considered to meet these
conditions.
6.4.18 Enhanced water immersion test for Type B(U) and Type B(M) packages containing more
than 10 5 A 2 and Type C packages
Enhanced water immersion test: The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 200 m
for a period of not less than one hour. For demonstration purposes, an external gauge pressure of at least
2 MPa shall be considered to meet these conditions.
6.4.19 Water leakage test for packages containing fissile material
6.4.19.1 Packages for which water in-leakage or out-leakage to the extent which results in greatest reactivity has
been assumed for purposes of assessment under 6.4.11.8 to 6.4.11.13 shall be excepted from the test.
6.4.19.2 Before the specimen is subjected to the water leakage test specified below, it shall be subjected to the
tests in 6.4.17.2 (b), and either 6.4.17.2 (a) or (c) as required by 6.4.11.13, and the test specified
in 6.4.17.3.
6.4.19.3 The specimen shall be immersed under a head of water of at least 0.9 m for a period of not less than 8
hours and in the attitude for which maximum leakage is expected.
6.4.20 Tests for Type C packages
6.4.20.1 Specimens shall be subjected to the effects of each of the following test sequences in the orders
specified:
(a) The tests specified in 6.4.17.2 (a), 6.4.17.2 (c), 6.4.20.2 and 6.4.20.3; and
(b) The test specified in 6.4.20.4.
Separate specimens are allowed to be used for each of the sequences (a) and (b).
6.4.20.2 Puncture/tearing test: The specimen shall be subjected to the damaging effects of a vertical solid probe
made of mild steel. The orientation of the package specimen and the impact point on the package surface
shall be such as to cause maximum damage at the conclusion of the test sequence specified
in 6.4.20.1 (a).
(a) The specimen, representing a package having a mass less than 250 kg, shall be placed on a target
and subjected to a probe having a mass of 250 kg falling from a height of 3 m above the intended
impact point. For this test the probe shall be a 20 cm diameter cylindrical bar with the striking
end forming a frustum of a right circular cone with the following dimensions: 30 cm height and
2.5 cm in diameter at the top with its edge rounded off to a radius of not more than 6 mm. The
target on which the specimen is placed shall be as specified in 6.4.14;
– 382 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 383 –
(b) For packages having a mass of 250 kg or more, the base of the probe shall be placed on a target
and the specimen dropped onto the probe. The height of the drop, measured from the point of
impact with the specimen to the upper surface of the probe shall be 3 m. For this test the probe
shall have the same properties and dimensions as specified in (a) above, except that the length
and mass of the probe shall be such as to incur maximum damage to the specimen. The target on
which the base of the probe is placed shall be as specified in 6.4.14.
6.4.20.3 Enhanced thermal test: The conditions for this test shall be as specified in 6.4.17.3, except that the
exposure to the thermal environment shall be for a period of 60 minutes.
6.4.20.4 Impact test: The specimen shall be subject to an impact on a target at a velocity of not less than 90 m/s,
at such an orientation as to suffer maximum damage. The target shall be as defined in 6.4.14, except
that the target surface may be at any orientation as long as the surface is normal to the specimen path.
6.4.21 Inspections for packagings designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride
6.4.21.1 Every manufactured packaging and its service and structural equipment shall, either jointly or
separately, undergo an inspection initially before being put into service and periodically thereafter.
These inspections shall be performed and certified by agreement with the competent authority.
6.4.21.2 The initial inspection shall consist of a check of the design characteristics, a structural test, a
leakproofness test, a water capacity test and a check of satisfactory operation of the service equipment.
6.4.21.3 The periodic inspections shall consist of a visual examination, a structural test, a leakproofness test and
a check of satisfactory operation of the service equipment. The maximum intervals for periodic
inspections shall be five years. Packagings which have not been inspected within this five-year period
shall be examined before carriage in accordance with a programme approved by the competent
authority. They shall not be refilled before completion of the full programme for periodic inspections.
6.4.21.4 The check of design characteristics shall demonstrate compliance with the design type specifications
and the manufacturing programme.
6.4.21.5 For the initial structural test, packagings designed to contain 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride
shall be tested hydraulically at an internal pressure of at least 1.38 MPa but, when the test pressure is
less than 2.76 MPa, the design shall require multilateral approval. For retesting packagings, any other
equivalent non-destructive testing may be applied subject to multilateral approval.
6.4.21.6 The leakproofness test shall be performed in accordance with a procedure which is capable of indicating
leakages in the containment system with a sensitivity of 0.1 Pa.l/s (10-6 bar.l/s).
6.4.21.7 The water capacity of the packagings shall be established with an accuracy of 0.25 % at a reference
temperature of 15 °C. The volume shall be stated on the plate described in 6.4.21.8.
6.4.21.8 A plate made of non-corroding metal shall be durably attached to every packaging in a readily accessible
place. The method of attaching the plate must not impair the strength of the packaging. The following
particulars, at least, shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other equivalent method:
– Approval number;
– Manufacturer’s serial number;
– Maximum working pressure (gauge pressure);
– Test pressure (gauge pressure);
– Contents: uranium hexafluoride;
– Capacity in litres;
– Maximum permissible filling mass of uranium hexafluoride;
– Tare mass;
– Date (month, year) of the initial test and the most recent periodic test;
– Stamp of the expert who performed the tests.
– 383 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 384 –
6.4.22 Approvals of package designs and materials
6.4.22.1 The approval of designs for packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride requires that:
(a) Each design that meets the requirements of 6.4.6.4 shall require multilateral approval;
(b) Each design that meets the requirements of 6.4.6.1 to 6.4.6.3 shall require unilateral approval by
the competent authority of the country of origin of the design, unless multilateral approval is
otherwise required by ADR.
6.4.22.2 Each Type B(U) and Type C package design shall require unilateral approval, except that:
(a) A package design for fissile material, which is also subject to 6.4.22.4, 6.4.23.7, and 5.1.5.2.1
shall require multilateral approval; and
(b) A Type B(U) package design for low dispersible radioactive material shall require multilateral
approval.
6.4.22.3 Each Type B(M) package design, including those for fissile material which are also subject to the
requirements of 6.4.22.4, 6.4.23.7, and 5.1.5.2.1 and those for low dispersible radioactive material, shall
require multilateral approval.
6.4.22.4 Each package design for fissile material which is not excepted by any of the paragraphs 2.2.7.2.3.5 (a)
to (f), 6.4.11.2 and 6.4.11.3 shall require multilateral approval.
6.4.22.5 The design for special form radioactive material shall require unilateral approval. The design for low
dispersible radioactive material shall require multilateral approval (see also 6.4.23.8).
6.4.22.6 The design for a fissile material excepted from “FISSILE” classification in accordance with 2.2.7.2.3.5
(f) shall require multilateral approval.
6.4.22.7 Alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles in accordance with
2.2.7.2.2.2 (b) shall require multilateral approval.
6.4.22.8 Any design that requires unilateral approval originating in a country Contracting Party to ADR shall be
approved by the competent authority of this country; if the country where the package design has been
designed is not a Contracting Party to ADR, carriage is possible on condition that:
(a) A certificate has been supplied by this country, proving that the package design satisfies the
technical requirements of ADR, and that this certificate is validated by a competent authority of
an ADR Contracting Party;
(b) If no certificate and no existing package design approval by a country Contracting Party to ADR
has been supplied, the package design is approved by the competent authority of an ADR
Contracting Party.
6.4.22.9 For designs approved under the transitional measures see 1.6.6.
6.4.23 Applications and approvals for radioactive material carriage
6.4.23.1 (Reserved)
6.4.23.2 Applications for approval of shipment
6.4.23.2.1 An application for approval of shipment shall include:
(a) The period of time, related to the shipment, for which the approval is sought;
(b) The actual radioactive contents, the expected modes of carriage, the type of vehicle, and the
probable or proposed route; and
(c) The details of how the precautions and administrative or operational controls, referred to in the
certificate of approval for the package design, if applicable, issued under 5.1.5.2.1 (a) (v), (vi)
or (vii), are to be put into effect.
– 384 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 385 –
6.4.23.2.2 An application for approval of SCO-III shipments shall include:
(a) A statement of the respects in which, and of the reasons why, the consignment is considered
SCO-III;
(b) Justification for choosing SCO-III by demonstrating that:
(i) No suitable packaging currently exists;
(ii) Designing and/or constructing a packaging or segmenting the object is not practically,
technically or economically feasible;
(iii) No other viable alternative exists;
(c) A detailed description of the proposed radioactive contents with reference to their physical and
chemical states and the nature of the radiation emitted;
(d) A detailed statement of the design of the SCO-III, including complete engineering drawings and
schedules of materials and methods of manufacture;
(e) All information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the requirements of 4.1.9.2.4
(e) and the requirements of 7.5.11, CV33 (2), if applicable, are satisfied;
(f) A transport plan;
(g) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3.
6.4.23.3 An application for approval of shipments under special arrangement shall include all the information
necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the overall level of safety in carriage is at least
equivalent to that which would be provided if all the applicable requirements of ADR had been met.
The application shall also include:
(a) A statement of the respects in which, and of the reasons why, the shipment cannot be made in
full accordance with the applicable requirements of ADR; and
(b) A statement of any special precautions or special administrative or operational controls which
are to be employed during carriage to compensate for the failure to meet the applicable
requirements of ADR.
6.4.23.4 An application for approval of Type B(U) or Type C package design shall include:
(a) A detailed description of the proposed radioactive contents with reference to their physical and
chemical states and the nature of the radiation emitted;
(b) A detailed statement of the design, including complete engineering drawings and schedules of
materials and methods of manufacture;
(c) A statement of the tests which have been done and their results, or evidence based on calculative
methods or other evidence that the design is adequate to meet the applicable requirements;
(d) The proposed operating and maintenance instructions for the use of the packaging;
(e) If the package is designed to have a maximum normal operating pressure in excess of 100 kPa
gauge, a specification of the materials of manufacture of the containment system, the samples to
be taken, and the tests to be made;
(f) If the package is to be used for shipment after storage, a justification of considerations to ageing
mechanisms in the safety analysis and within the proposed operating and maintenance
instructions;
(g) Where the proposed radioactive contents are irradiated nuclear fuel, a statement and a
justification of any assumption in the safety analysis relating to the characteristics of the fuel and
a description of any pre-shipment measurement as required by 6.4.11.5 (b);
– 385 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 386 –
(h) Any special stowage provisions necessary to ensure the safe dissipation of heat from the package
considering the various modes of carriage to be used and type of vehicle or container;
(i) A reproducible illustration, not larger than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make-up of the package;
(j) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3; and
(k) For packages which are to be used for shipment after storage, a gap analysis programme
describing a systematic procedure for a periodic evaluation of changes of applicable regulations,
changes in technical knowledge and changes of the state of the package design during storage.
6.4.23.5 An application for approval of a Type B(M) package design shall include, in addition to the general
information required in 6.4.23.4 for Type B(U) packages:
(a) A list of the requirements specified in 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4 to 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.9 to 6.4.8.15 with
which the package does not conform;
(b) Any proposed supplementary operational controls to be applied during carriage not regularly
provided for in this Annex, but which are necessary to ensure the safety of the package or to
compensate for the deficiencies listed in (a) above;
(c) A statement relative to any restrictions on the mode of carriage and to any special loading,
carriage, unloading or handling procedures; and
(d) A statement of the range of ambient conditions (temperature, solar radiation) which are expected
to be encountered during carriage and which have been taken into account in the design.
6.4.23.6 The application for approval of designs for packages containing 0.1 kg or more of uranium hexafluoride
shall include all information necessary to satisfy the competent authority that the design meets the
applicable requirements of 6.4.6.1, and a description of the applicable management system as required
in 1.7.3.
6.4.23.7 An application for a fissile package approval shall include all information necessary to satisfy the
competent authority that the design meets the applicable requirements of 6.4.11.1, and a specification
of the applicable management system as required by 1.7.3.
6.4.23.8 An application for approval of design for special form radioactive material and design for low
dispersible radioactive material shall include:
(a) A detailed description of the radioactive material or, if a capsule, the contents; particular
reference shall be made to both physical and chemical states;
(b) A detailed statement of the design of any capsule to be used;
(c) A statement of the tests which have been done and their results, or evidence based on calculations
to show that the radioactive material is capable of meeting the performance standards, or other
evidence that the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material meets
the applicable requirements of ADR;
(d) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3; and
(e) Any proposed pre-shipment actions for use in the consignment of special form radioactive
material or low dispersible radioactive material.
6.4.23.9 An application for approval of design for fissile material excepted from “FISSILE” classification in
accordance with Table 2.2.7.2.1.1, under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f) shall include:
(a) A detailed description of the material; particular reference shall be made to both physical and
chemical states;
(b) A statement of the tests that have been carried out and their results, or evidence based on
calculation methods to show that the material is capable of meeting the requirements specified
in 2.2.7.2.3.6;
(c) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3;
– 386 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 387 –
(d) A statement of specific actions to be taken prior to shipment.
6.4.23.10 An application for approval of alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or
articles shall include:
(a) An identification and detailed description of the instrument or article, its intended uses and the
radionuclide(s) incorporated;
(b) The maximum activity of the radionuclide(s) in the instrument or article;
(c) Maximum external dose rates arising from the instrument or article;
(d) The chemical and physical forms of the radionuclide(s) contained in the instrument or article;
(e) Details of the construction and design of the instrument or article, particularly as related to the
containment and shielding of the radionuclide in routine, normal and accident conditions of
carriage;
(f) The applicable management system, including the quality testing and verification procedures to
be applied to radioactive sources, components and finished products to ensure that the maximum
specified activity of radioactive material or the maximum dose rates specified for the instrument
or article are not exceeded, and that the instruments or articles are constructed according to the
design specifications;
(g) The maximum number of instruments or articles expected to be shipped per consignment and
annually;
(h) Dose assessments in accordance with the principles and methodologies set out in the Radiation
Protection and Safety of Radiation Sources: International Basic Safety Standards, IAEA Safety
Standards Series No. GSR Part 3, IAEA, Vienna (2014), including individual doses to transport
workers and members of the public and, if appropriate, collective doses arising from routine,
normal and accident conditions of carriage, based on representative carriage scenarios the
consignments are subject to.
6.4.23.11 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority shall be assigned an identification mark.
The identification mark shall be of the following generalized type:
VRI/Number/Type Code
(a) Except as provided in 6.4.23.12 (b), VRI represents the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in
international road traffic1;
(b) The number shall be assigned by the competent authority, and shall be unique and specific with
regard to the particular design or shipment or alternative activity limit for exempt consignment.
The identification mark of the approval of shipment shall be clearly related to the identification
mark of the approval of design;
1 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 387 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 388 –
(c) The following type codes shall be used in the order listed to indicate the types of certificate of
approval issued:
AF Type A package design for fissile material
B(U) Type B(U) package design [B(U) F if for fissile material]
B(M) Type B(M) package design [B(M) F if for fissile material]
C Type C package design (CF if for fissile material)
IF Industrial package design for fissile material
S Special form radioactive material
LD Low dispersible radioactive material
FE Fissile material complying with the requirements of 2.2.7.2.3.6
T Shipment
X Special arrangement
AL Alternative activity limits for an exempt consignment of instruments or articles
In the case of package designs for non-fissile or fissile excepted uranium hexafluoride, where
none of the above codes apply, then the following type codes shall be used:
H(U) Unilateral approval
H(M) Multilateral approval.
6.4.23.12 These identification marks shall be applied as follows:
(a) Each certificate and each package shall bear the appropriate identification mark, comprising the
symbols prescribed in 6.4.23.11 (a), (b) and (c) above, except that, for packages, only the
applicable design type codes shall appear following the second stroke, that is, the “T” or “X”
shall not appear in the identification mark on the package. Where the approval of design and the
approval of shipment are combined, the applicable type codes do not need to be repeated. For
example:
A/132/B(M)F: A Type B(M) package design approved for fissile material, requiring
multilateral approval, for which the competent authority of Austria has
assigned the design number 132 (to be marked on both the package and
on the certificate of approval for the package design);
A/132/B(M)FT: The approval of shipment issued for a package bearing the
identification mark elaborated above (to be marked on the certificate
only);
A/137/X: An approval of special arrangement issued by the competent authority
of Austria, to which the number 137 has been assigned (to be marked
on the certificate only);
A/139/IF: An industrial package design for fissile material approved by the
competent authority of Austria, to which package design number 139
has been assigned (to be marked on both the package and on the
certificate of approval for the package design); and
A/145/H(U): A package design for fissile excepted uranium hexafluoride approved
by the competent authority of Austria, to which package design
number 145 has been assigned (to be marked on both the package and
on the certificate of approval for the package design);
(b) Where multilateral approval is effected by validation in accordance with 6.4.23.20, only the
identification mark issued by the country of origin of the design or shipment shall be used. Where
multilateral approval is effected by issue of certificates by successive countries, each certificate
shall bear the appropriate identification mark and the package whose design was so approved
shall bear all appropriate identification marks. For example:
A/132/B(M)F
CH/28/B(M)F
would be the identification mark of a package which was originally approved by Austria and
was subsequently approved, by separate certificate, by Switzerland. Additional identification
marks would be tabulated in a similar manner on the package;
– 388 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 389 –
(c) The revision of a certificate shall be indicated by a parenthetical expression following the
identification mark on the certificate. For example, A/132/B(M)F (Rev.2) would indicate
revision 2 of the Austrian certificate of approval for the package design; or A/132/B(M)F (Rev.0)
would indicate the original issuance of the Austrian certificate of approval for the package
design. For original issuances, the parenthetical entry is optional and other words such as
“original issuance” may also be used in place of “Rev.0”. Certificate revision numbers may only
be issued by the country issuing the original certificate of approval;
(d) Additional symbols (as may be necessitated by national regulations) may be added in brackets
to the end of the identification mark; for example, A/132/B(M)F (SP503);
(e) It is not necessary to alter the identification mark on the packaging each time that a revision to
the design certificate is made. Such re-marking shall be required only in those cases where the
revision to the package design certificate involves a change in the letter type codes for the
package design following the second stroke.
6.4.23.13 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority for special form radioactive material or low
dispersible radioactive material shall include the following information:
(a) Type of certificate;
(b) The competent authority identification mark;
(c) The issue date and an expiry date;
(d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA
Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the special form
radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material is approved;
(e) The identification of the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive
material;
(f) A description of the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive material;
(g) Design specifications for the special form radioactive material or low dispersible radioactive
material which may include references to drawings;
(h) A specification of the radioactive contents which includes the activities involved and which may
include the physical and chemical form;
(i) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3;
(j) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior
to shipment;
(k) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant;
(l) Signature and identification of the certifying official.
6.4.23.14 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority for material excepted from classification
as “FISSILE” shall include the following information:
(a) Type of certificate;
(b) The competent authority identification mark;
(c) The issue date and an expiry date;
(d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA
Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the exception is
approved;
(e) A description of the excepted material;
(f) Limiting specifications for the excepted material;
– 389 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 390 –
(g) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3;
(h) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior
to shipment;
(i) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant;
(j) Signature and identification of the certifying official;
(k) Reference to documentation that demonstrates compliance with 2.2.7.2.3.6.
6.4.23.15 Each certificate of approval issued by a competent authority for a special arrangement shall include the
following information:
(a) Type of certificate;
(b) The competent authority identification mark;
(c) The issue date and an expiry date;
(d) Mode(s) of carriage;
(e) Any restrictions on the modes of carriage, type of vehicle, container, and any necessary routeing
instructions;
(f) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA
Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the special arrangement
is approved;
(g) The following statement:
“This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the
government of any country through or into which the package will be carried.”;
(h) References to certificates for alternative radioactive contents, other competent authority
validation, or additional technical data or information, as deemed appropriate by the competent
authority;
(i) Description of the packaging by a reference to the drawings or a specification of the design. If
deemed appropriate by the competent authority, a reproducible illustration, not larger than 21
cm by 30 cm, showing the make-up of the package shall also be provided, accompanied by a
brief description of the packaging, including materials of manufacture, gross mass, general
outside dimensions and appearance;
(j) A specification of the authorized radioactive contents, including any restrictions on the
radioactive contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall
include the physical and chemical forms, the activities involved (including those of the various
isotopes, if appropriate), mass in grams (for fissile material or for each fissile nuclide when
appropriate), and whether special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material
or fissile material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f) if applicable;
(k) Additionally, for packages containing fissile material:
(i) a detailed description of the authorized radioactive contents;
(ii) the value of the criticality safety index;
(iii) reference to the documentation that demonstrates the criticality safety of the package;
(iv) any special features, on the basis of which the absence of water from certain void spaces
has been assumed in the criticality assessment;
(v) any allowance (based on 6.4.11.5 (b)) for a change in neutron multiplication assumed in
the criticality assessment as a result of actual irradiation experience; and
(vi) the ambient temperature range for which the special arrangement has been approved;
– 390 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 391 –
(l) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading,
carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions
for the safe dissipation of heat;
(m) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reasons for the special arrangement;
(n) Description of the compensatory measures to be applied as a result of the shipment being under
special arrangement;
(o) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to the use of the packaging or
specific actions to be taken prior to the shipment;
(p) A statement regarding the ambient conditions assumed for purposes of design if these are not in
accordance with those specified in 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6, and 6.4.8.15, as applicable;
(q) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority;
(r) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3;
(s) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant and
to the identity of the carrier;
(t) Signature and identification of the certifying official.
6.4.23.16 Each certificate of approval for a shipment issued by a competent authority shall include the following
information:
(a) Type of certificate;
(b) The competent authority identification mark(s);
(c) The issue date and an expiry date;
(d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA
Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the shipment is
approved;
(e) Any restrictions on the modes of carriage, type of vehicle, container, and any necessary routeing
instructions;
(f) The following statement:
“This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the
government of any country through or into which the package will be carried.”;
(g) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading,
carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions
for the safe dissipation of heat or maintenance of criticality safety;
(h) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to specific actions to be taken prior
to shipment;
(i) Reference to the applicable certificate(s) of approval of design;
(j) A specification of the actual radioactive contents, including any restrictions on the radioactive
contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall include the
physical and chemical forms, the total activities involved (including those of the various isotopes,
if appropriate), mass in grams (for fissile material or for each fissile nuclide when appropriate),
and whether special form radioactive material, low dispersible radioactive material or fissile
material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f) if applicable;;
(k) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority;
(l) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3;
(m) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant;
– 391 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 392 –
(n) Signature and identification of the certifying official.
6.4.23.17 Each certificate of approval of the design of a package issued by a competent authority shall include the
following information:
(a) Type of certificate;
(b) The competent authority identification mark;
(c) The issue date and an expiry date;
(d) Any restriction on the modes of carriage, if appropriate;
(e) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA
Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the design is approved;
(f) The following statement;
“This certificate does not relieve the consignor from compliance with any requirement of the
government of any country through or into which the package will be carried.”;
(g) References to certificates for alternative radioactive contents, other competent authority
validation, or additional technical data or information, as deemed appropriate by the competent
authority;
(h) A statement authorizing shipment where approval of shipment is required under 5.1.5.1.2, if
deemed appropriate;
(i) Identification of the packaging;
(j) Description of the packaging by a reference to the drawings or specification of the design.
If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, a reproducible illustration, not larger
than 21 cm by 30 cm, showing the make-up of the package shall also be provided, accompanied
by a brief description of the packaging, including materials of manufacture, gross mass, general
outside dimensions and appearance;
(k) Specification of the design by reference to the drawings;
(l) A specification of the authorized radioactive content, including any restrictions on the
radioactive contents which might not be obvious from the nature of the packaging. This shall
include the physical and chemical forms, the activities involved (including those of the various
isotopes, if appropriate), mass in grams (for fissile material the total mass of fissile nuclides or
the mass for each fissile nuclide, when appropriate) and whether special form radioactive
material, low dispersible radioactive material or fissile material excepted under 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f), if
applicable;
(m) A description of the containment system;
(n) For package designs containing fissile material which require multilateral approval of the
package design in accordance with 6.4.22.4:
(i) a detailed description of the authorized radioactive contents;
(ii) a description of the confinement system;
(iii) the value of the criticality safety index;
(iv) reference to the documentation that demonstrates the criticality safety of the package;
(v) any special features, on the basis of which the absence of water from certain void spaces
has been assumed in the criticality assessment;
(vi) any allowance (based on 6.4.11.5 (b)) for a change in neutron multiplication assumed in
the criticality assessment as a result of actual irradiation experience; and
(vii) the ambient temperature range for which the package design has been approved;
– 392 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 393 –
(o) For Type B(M) packages, a statement specifying those requirements of 6.4.7.5, 6.4.8.4, 6.4.8.5,
6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.9 to 6.4.8.15 with which the package does not conform and any amplifying
information which may be useful to other competent authorities;
(p) For package designs subject to the transitional provisions in 1.6.6.2.1, a statement specifying
those requirements of ADR applicable as from 1 January 2021 with which the package does not
conform;
(q) For packages containing more than 0.1 kg of uranium hexafluoride, a statement specifying those
prescriptions of 6.4.6.4 which apply if any and any amplifying information which may be useful
to other competent authorities;
(r) A detailed listing of any supplementary operational controls required for preparation, loading,
carriage, unloading and handling of the consignment, including any special stowage provisions
for the safe dissipation of heat;
(s) Reference to information provided by the applicant relating to the use of the packaging or
specific actions to be taken prior to shipment;
(t) A statement regarding the ambient conditions assumed for purposes of design if these are not in
accordance with those specified in 6.4.8.5, 6.4.8.6 and 6.4.8.15, as applicable;
(u) A specification of the applicable management system as required in 1.7.3;
(v) Any emergency arrangements deemed necessary by the competent authority;
(w) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant;
(x) Signature and identification of the certifying official.
6.4.23.18 Each certificate issued by a competent authority for alternative activity limits for an exempt
consignment of instruments or articles according to 5.1.5.2.1 (d) shall include the following information:
(a) Type of certificate;
(b) The competent authority identification mark;
(c) The issue date and an expiry date;
(d) List of applicable national and international regulations, including the edition of the IAEA
Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material under which the exemption is
approved;
(e) The identification of the instrument or article;
(f) A description of the instrument or article;
(g) Design specifications for the instrument or article;
(h) A specification of the radionuclide(s), the approved alternative activity limit(s) for the exempt
consignment(s) of the instrument(s) or article(s);
(i) Reference to documentation that demonstrates compliance with 2.2.7.2.2.2 (b);
(j) If deemed appropriate by the competent authority, reference to the identity of the applicant;
(k) Signature and identification of the certifying official.
6.4.23.19 The competent authority shall be informed of the serial number of each packaging manufactured to a
design approved by them under 1.6.6.2.1, 1.6.6.2.2, 6.4.22.2, 6.4.22.3 and 6.4.22.4.
6.4.23.20 Multilateral approval may be by validation of the original certificate issued by the competent authority
of the country of origin of the design or shipment. Such validation may take the form of an endorsement
on the original certificate or the issuance of a separate endorsement, annex, supplement, etc., by the
competent authority of the country through or into which the shipment is made.
– 393 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 395 –
CHAPTER 6.5
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING
OF INTERMEDIATE BULK CONTAINERS (IBCs)
6.5.1 General requirements
6.5.1.1 Scope
6.5.1.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter apply to intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) the use of which is
expressly authorized for the carriage of certain dangerous goods according to the packing instructions
indicated in Column (8) of Table A in Chapter 3.2. Portable tanks and tank-containers which meet the
requirements of Chapter 6.7 or 6.8 respectively are not considered to be IBCs. IBCs which meet the
requirements of this Chapter are not considered to be containers for the purposes of ADR. The letters
IBC only will be used in the rest of the text to refer to intermediate bulk containers.
6.5.1.1.2 The requirements for IBCs in 6.5.3 are based on IBCs currently in use. In order to take into account
progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of IBCs having specifications
different from those in 6.5.3 and 6.5.5, provided that they are equally effective, acceptable to the
competent authority and able to successfully fulfil the requirements described in 6.5.4 and 6.5.6.
Methods of inspection and testing other than those described in ADR are acceptable, provided they are
equivalent, and are recognized by the competent authority.
6.5.1.1.3 The construction, equipment, testing, marking and operation of IBCs shall be subject to acceptance by
the competent authority of the country in which the IBCs are approved.
NOTE: Parties performing inspections and tests in other countries, after the IBC has been put into
service, need not be accepted by the competent authority of the country in which the IBC has been
approved, but the inspections and tests have to be performed according to the rules specified in the
IBC’s approval.
6.5.1.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of IBCs shall provide information regarding procedures to
be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required gaskets) and
any other components needed to ensure that IBCs as presented for carriage are capable of passing the
applicable performance tests of this Chapter.
6.5.1.2 (Reserved)
6.5.1.3 (Reserved)
6.5.1.4 Designatory code system for IBCs
6.5.1.4.1 The code shall consist of two Arabic numerals as specified in (a), followed by a capital letter(s) specified
in (b), followed, when specified in an individual section, by an Arabic numeral indicating the category
of IBC.
(a) Type For solids, filled or discharged
For liquidsby gravity under pressure of more
than 10 kPa (0.1 bar)
Rigid 11 21 31
Flexible 13 – –
– 395 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 396 –
(b) Materials
A. Steel (all types and surface treatments)
B. Aluminium
C. Natural wood
D. Plywood
F. Reconstituted wood
G. Fibreboard
H. Plastics material
L. Textile
M. Paper, multiwall
N. Metal (other than steel or aluminium).
6.5.1.4.2 For composite IBCs, two capital letters in Latin characters shall be used in sequence in the second
position of the code. The first shall indicate the material of the inner receptacle of the IBC and the
second that of the outer packaging of the IBC.
6.5.1.4.3 The following types and codes of IBC are assigned:
Material Category Code Sub-
section
Metal
A. Steel for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11A
6.5.5.1
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure 21A
for liquids 31A
B. Aluminium for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11B
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure 21B
for liquids 31B
N. Other than steel
or aluminium
for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11N
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure 21N
for liquids 31N
Flexible
H. Plastics woven plastics without coating or liner 13H1
6.5.5.2
woven plastics, coated 13H2
woven plastics with liner 13H3
woven plastics, coated and with liner 13H4
plastics film 13H5
L. Textile without coating or liner 13L1
coated 13L2
with liner 13L3
coated and with liner 13L4
M. Paper multiwall 13M1
multiwall, water resistant 13M2
H. Rigid plastics for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, fitted with
structural equipment
11H1
6.5.5.3
for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, freestanding 11H2
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, fitted
with structural equipment
21H1
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure,
freestanding
21H2
for liquids, fitted with structural equipment 31H1
for liquids, freestanding 31H2
– 396 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 397 –
Material Category Code Sub-
section
HZ. Composite
with plastics inner
receptacle a
for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with rigid
plastics inner receptacle
11HZ1
6.5.5.4
for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with flexible
plastics inner receptacle
11HZ2
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, with
rigid plastics inner receptacle
21HZ1
for solids, filled or discharged under pressure, with
flexible plastics inner receptacle
21HZ2
for liquids, with rigid plastics inner receptacle 31HZ1
for liquids, with flexible plastics inner receptacle 31HZ2
G. Fibreboard for solids, filled or discharged by gravity 11G 6.5.5.5
Wooden
C. Natural wood for solids, filled or discharged by gravity with inner
liner
11C
6.5.5.6
D. Plywood for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with inner
liner
11D
F. Reconstituted
wood
for solids, filled or discharged by gravity, with inner
liner
11F
a The code shall be completed by replacing the letter Z by a capital letter in accordance with
6.5.1.4.1 (b) to indicate the nature of the material used for the outer casing.
6.5.1.4.4 The letter “W” may follow the IBC code. The letter “W” signifies that the IBC, although of the same
type indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from those in 6.5.5 and is
considered equivalent in accordance with the requirements in 6.5.1.1.2.
6.5.2 Marking
6.5.2.1 Primary marking
6.5.2.1.1 Each IBC manufactured and intended for use according to ADR shall bear marks which are durable,
legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible. Letters, numerals and symbols shall be at
least 12 mm high and shall show:
(a) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible
bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in
Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11. For metal IBCs on which the marks are stamped or
embossed, the capital letters “UN” may be applied instead of the symbol;
(b) The code designating the type of IBC according to 6.5.1.4;
(c) A capital letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved:
(i) X for packing groups I, II and III (IBCs for solids only);
(ii) Y for packing groups II and III;
(iii) Z for packing group III only;
(d) The month and year (last two digits) of manufacture;
(e) The State authorizing the allocation of the mark; indicated by the distinguishing sign used on
vehicles in international road traffic1;
(f) The name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the IBC as specified by the
1 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 397 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 398 –
competent authority;
(g) The stacking test load in kg. For IBCs not designed for stacking, the figure “0” shall be shown;
(h) The maximum permissible gross mass in kg.
The primary marks required above shall be applied in the sequence of the subparagraphs above. The
marks required by 6.5.2.2 and any further mark authorized by a competent authority shall still enable
the primary marks to be correctly identified .
Each mark applied in accordance with (a) to (h) and with 6.5.2.2 shall be clearly separated, e.g. by a
slash or space, so as to be easily identifiable.
6.5.2.1.2 IBCs manufactured from recycled plastics material as defined in 1.2.1 shall be marked “REC”. For rigid
IBCs this mark shall be placed near the marks prescribed in 6.5.2.1.1. For the inner receptacle of
composite IBCs, this mark shall be placed near the marks prescribed in 6.5.2.2.4.
6.5.2.1.3 Examples of marking for various types of IBC in accordance with 6.5.2.1.1 (a) to (h) above:
11A/Y/02 99
NL/Mulder 007
5500/1500
For a metal IBC for solids discharged by gravity and made from
steel/for packing groups II and III/ manufactured in February
1999/authorized by the Netherlands/manufactured by Mulder
and of a design type to which the competent authority has
allocated serial number 007/the stacking test load in kg/the
maximum permissible gross mass in kg.
13H3/Z/03 01
F/Meunier 1713
0/1500
For a flexible IBC for solids discharged for instance by gravity
and made from woven plastics with a liner/not designed to be
stacked.
31H1/Y/04 99
GB/9099
10800/1200
For a rigid plastics IBC for liquids made from plastics with
structural equipment withstanding the stack load.
31HA1/Y/05 01
D/Muller 1683
10800/1200
For a composite IBC for liquids with a rigid plastics inner
receptacle and a steel outer casing.
11C/X/01 02
S/Aurigny 9876
3000/910
For a wooden IBC for solids with an inner liner authorized for
packing groups I, II and III solids.
6.5.2.1.4 Where an IBC conforms to one or more than one tested IBC design type, including one or more than
one tested packaging or large packaging design type, the IBC may bear more than one mark to indicate
the relevant performance test requirements that have been met. Where more than one mark appears on
an IBC, the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each mark shall appear in its
entirety.
– 398 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 399 –
6.5.2.2 Additional marking
6.5.2.2.1 Each IBC shall bear the marks required in 6.5.2.1 and, in addition, the following information which
may appear on a corrosion-resistant plate permanently attached in a place readily accessible for
inspection:
Additional marks Category of IBC
Metal Rigid
plastics
Composite Fibreboard Wooden
Capacity in litres a at 20 °C X X X
Tare mass in kg a X X X X X
Test (gauge) pressure, in kPa or
bar a, if applicable
X X
Maximum filling / discharge
pressure in kPa or bar a , if
applicable
X X X
Body material and its minimum
thickness in mm
X
Date of last leakproofness test,
if applicable (month and year)
X X X
Date of last inspection (month
and year)
X X X
Serial number of the
manufacturer
X
a The unit used shall be indicated.
6.5.2.2.2 The maximum permitted stacking load applicable shall be displayed on a symbol as shown in Figure
6.5.2.2.2.1 or Figure 6.5.2.2.2.2. The symbol shall be durable and clearly visible.
Figure 6.5.2.2.2.1 Figure 6.5.2.2.2.2
IBCs capable of being stacked IBCs NOT capable of being stacked
The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm × 100 mm. The letters and numbers indicating the mass
shall be at least 12 mm high. The area within the printer’s marks indicated by the dimensional arrows
shall be square. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to
those shown. The mass marked above the symbol shall not exceed the load imposed during the design
type test (see 6.5.6.6.4) divided by 1.8.
6.5.2.2.3 In addition to the marks required in 6.5.2.1, flexible IBCs may bear a pictogram indicating
recommended lifting methods.
– 399 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 400 –
6.5.2.2.4 Inner receptacles that are of composite IBC design type shall be identified by the application of the
marks indicated in 6.5.2.1.1 (b), (c), (d) where this date is that of the manufacture of the plastics inner
receptacle, (e) and (f). The UN packaging symbol shall not be applied. The marks shall be applied in
the sequence shown in 6.5.2.1.1. They shall be durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be
readily accessible for inspection after assembling the inner receptacle in the outer casing. When the
marks on the inner receptacle are not readily accessible for inspection due to the design of the outer
casing, a duplicate of the required marks on the inner receptacle shall be placed on the outer casing
preceded by the wording “Inner receptacle”. This duplicate shall be durable, legible and placed in a
location so as to be readily accessible for inspection.
The date of the manufacture of the plastics inner receptacle may alternatively be marked on the inner
receptacle adjacent to the remainder of the marks. In such a case, the date may be waived from the
remainder of the marks. An example of an appropriate marking method is:
NOTE 1: Other methods that provide the minimum required information in a durable, visible and
legible form are also acceptable.
NOTE 2: The date of manufacture of the inner receptacle may be different from the marked date of
manufacture (see 6.5.2.1), repair (see 6.5.4.5.3) or remanufacture (see 6.5.2.4) of the composite IBC.
6.5.2.2.5 Where a composite IBCs is designed in such a manner that the outer casing is intended to be dismantled
for carriage when empty (such as for return of the IBC for reuse to the original consignor), each of the
parts intended to be detached when so dismantled shall be marked with the month and year of
manufacture and the name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the IBC as specified
by the competent authority (see 6.5.2.1.1 (f)).
6.5.2.3 Conformity to design type
The marks indicate that IBCs correspond to a successfully tested design type and that the requirements
referred to in the certificate have been met.
6.5.2.4 Marking of remanufactured composite IBCs (31HZ1)
The marks specified in 6.5.2.1.1 and 6.5.2.2 shall be removed from the original IBC or made
permanently illegible and new marks shall be applied to an IBC remanufactured in accordance with
ADR.
6.5.3 Construction requirements
6.5.3.1 General requirements
6.5.3.1.1 IBCs shall be resistant to or adequately protected from deterioration due to the external environment.
6.5.3.1.2 IBCs shall be so constructed and closed that none of the contents can escape under normal conditions
of carriage including the effect of vibration, or by changes in temperature, humidity or pressure.
6.5.3.1.3 IBCs and their closures shall be constructed of materials compatible with their contents, or be protected
internally, so that they are not liable:
(a) To be attacked by the contents so as to make their use dangerous;
(b) To cause the contents to react or decompose, or form harmful or dangerous compounds with the
IBCs.
6.5.3.1.4 Gaskets, where used, shall be made of materials not subject to attack by the contents of the IBCs.
– 400 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 401 –
6.5.3.1.5 All service equipment shall be so positioned or protected as to minimize the risk of escape of the
contents owing to damage during handling and carriage.
6.5.3.1.6 IBCs, their attachments and their service and structural equipment shall be designed to withstand,
without loss of contents, the internal pressure of the contents and the stresses of normal handling and
carriage. IBCs intended for stacking shall be designed for stacking. Any lifting or securing features of
IBCs shall be of sufficient strength to withstand the normal conditions of handling and carriage without
gross distortion or failure and shall be so positioned that no undue stress is caused in any part of the
IBC.
6.5.3.1.7 Where an IBC consists of a body within a framework it shall be so constructed that:
(a) The body does not chafe or rub against the framework so as to cause material damage to the
body;
(b) The body is retained within the framework at all times;
(c) The items of equipment are fixed in such a way that they cannot be damaged if the connections
between body and frame allow relative expansion or movement.
6.5.3.1.8 Where a bottom discharge valve is fitted, it shall be capable of being made secure in the closed position
and the whole discharge system shall be suitably protected from damage. Valves having lever closures
shall be able to be secured against accidental opening and the open or closed position shall be readily
apparent. For IBCs containing liquids, a secondary means of sealing the discharge aperture shall also
be provided, e.g. a blank flange or equivalent device.
6.5.4 Testing, certification and inspection
6.5.4.1 Quality assurance: the IBCs shall be manufactured, remanufactured, repaired and tested under a quality
assurance programme which satisfies the competent authority, in order to ensure that each
manufactured, remanufactured or repaired IBC meets the requirements of this Chapter.
NOTE: ISO 16106:2020 “Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings,
intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001”
provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed.
6.5.4.2 Test requirements: IBCs shall be subject to design type tests and, if applicable, to initial and periodic
inspections and tests in accordance with 6.5.4.4.
6.5.4.3 Certification: in respect of each design type of IBC a certificate and mark (as in 6.5.2) shall be issued
attesting that the design type, including its equipment, meets the test requirements.
6.5.4.4 Inspection and testing
NOTE: See also 6.5.4.5 for tests and inspections on repaired IBCs.
6.5.4.4.1 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC shall be inspected to the satisfaction of the competent
authority:
(a) Before it is put into service (including after remanufactured), and thereafter at intervals not
exceeding five years, with regard to:
(i) conformity to design type including marks;
(ii) internal and external condition;
(iii) proper functioning of service equipment.
Thermal insulation, if any, need be removed only to the extent necessary for a proper
examination of the body of the IBC.
(b) At intervals of not more than two and a half years, with regard to:
(i) external condition;
– 401 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 402 –
(ii) proper functioning of service equipment.
Thermal insulation, if any, need be removed only to the extent necessary for a proper
examination of the body of the IBC.
Each IBC shall correspond in all respects to its design type.
6.5.4.4.2 Every metal, rigid plastics and composite IBC for liquids, or for solids which are filled or discharged
under pressure, shall undergo a suitable leakproofness test. This test is part of a quality assurance
programme as stipulated in 6.5.4.1 which shows the capability of meeting the appropriate test level
indicated in 6.5.6.7.3:
(a) Before it is first used for carriage;
(b) At intervals of not more than two and a half years.
For this test the IBC shall be fitted with the primary bottom closure. The inner receptacle of a composite
IBC may be tested without the outer casing, provided that the test results are not affected.
6.5.4.4.3 A report of each inspection and test shall be kept by the owner of the IBC at least until the next inspection
or test. The report shall include the results of the inspection and test and shall identify the party
performing the inspection and test (see also the marking requirements in 6.5.2.2.1).
6.5.4.4.4 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this Chapter, that
IBCs meet the requirements of the design type tests.
6.5.4.5 Repaired IBCs
6.5.4.5.1 When an IBC is impaired as a result of impact (e.g. accident) or any other cause, it shall be repaired or
otherwise maintained (see definition of “Routine maintenance of IBCs” in 1.2.1), so as to conform to
the design type. The bodies of rigid plastics IBCs and the inner receptacles of composite IBCs that are
impaired shall be replaced.
6.5.4.5.2 In addition to any other testing and inspection requirements in ADR, an IBC shall be subjected to the
full testing and inspection requirements set out in 6.5.4.4, and the required reports shall be prepared,
whenever it is repaired.
6.5.4.5.3 The Party performing the tests and inspections after the repair shall durably mark the IBC near the
manufacturer’s UN design type marks to show:
(a) The State in which the tests and inspections were carried out;
(b) The name or authorized symbol of the party performing the tests and inspections; and
(c) The date (month, year) of the tests and inspections.
6.5.4.5.4 Test and inspections performed in accordance with 6.5.4.5.2 may be considered to satisfy the
requirements for the two and a half and five year periodic tests and inspections.
6.5.5 Specific requirements for IBCs
6.5.5.1 Specific requirements for metal IBCs
6.5.5.1.1 These requirements apply to metal IBCs intended for the carriage of solids and liquids. There are three
categories of metal IBCs:
(a) Those for solids which are filled or discharged by gravity (11A, 11B, 11N);
(b) Those for solids which are filled or discharged at a gauge pressure greater than 10 kPa (0.1 bar)
(21A, 21B, 21N); and
(c) Those for liquids (31A, 31B, 31N).
– 402 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 403 –
6.5.5.1.2 Bodies shall be made of suitable ductile metal in which the weldability has been fully demonstrated.
Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. Low-temperature performance of the material
shall be taken into account when appropriate.
6.5.5.1.3 Care shall be taken to avoid damage by galvanic action due to the juxtaposition of dissimilar metals.
6.5.5.1.4 Aluminium IBCs intended for the carriage of flammable liquids shall have no movable parts, such as
covers, closures, etc., made of unprotected steel liable to rust, which might cause a dangerous reaction
by coming into frictional or percussive contact with the aluminium.
6.5.5.1.5 Metal IBCs shall be made of metals which meet the following requirements:
(a) for steel the elongation at fracture, in %, shall not be less than with an absolute
minimum of 20 %;
where Rm = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the steel to be used, in N/mm²;
(b) for aluminium and its alloy the elongation at fracture, in %, shall not be less than with
an absolute minimum of 8 %.
Specimens used to determine the elongation at fracture shall be taken transversely to the direction
of rolling and be so secured that:
Lo = 5d or
L o =
where: L o = gauge length of the specimen before the test
d = diameter
A = cross-sectional area of test specimen.
6.5.5.1.6 Minimum wall thickness:
Metal IBCs with a capacity of more than 1500 l shall comply with the following minimum wall
thickness requirement:
(a) for a reference steel having a product of Rm A o = 10 000, the wall thickness shall not be less
than:
Wall thickness (T) in mm
Types 11A, 11B, 11N Types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N
Unprotected Protected Unprotected Protected
T = C/2000 + 1.5 T = C/2000 + 1.0 T = C/1000 + 1.0 T = C/2000 + 1.5
where: A o = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the reference steel to be used on
fracture under tensile stress (see 6.5.5.1.5);
C = capacity in litres;
(b) for metals other than the reference steel described in (a), the minimum wall thickness is given
by the following equivalence formula:
where: e 1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the metal to be used (in mm);
e0 = required minimum wall thickness for the reference steel (in mm);
Rm
10000
Rm6
10000
A65.5
3 11
0
1
ARm
e21.4
e
– 403 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 404 –
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be used (in N/mm²)
(see (c));
A 1 = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the metal to be used on fracture
under tensile stress (see 6.5.5.1.5).
However, in no case shall the wall thickness be less than 1.5 mm.
(c) For purposes of the calculation described in (b), the guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the
metal to be used (Rm 1) shall be the minimum value according to national or international material
standards. However, for austenitic steels, the specified value for Rm according to the material
standards may be increased by up to 15 % when a greater value is attested in the material
inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the material in question, the value of
Rm shall be the minimum value attested in the material inspection certificate.
6.5.5.1.7 Pressure-relief requirements: IBCs for liquids shall be capable of releasing a sufficient amount of vapour
in the event of fire engulfment to ensure that no rupture of the body will occur. This can be achieved by
conventional pressure relief devices or by other constructional means. The start-to-discharge pressure
shall not be higher than 65 kPa (0.65 bar) and no lower than the total gauge pressure experienced in the
IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling substance plus the partial pressure of the air or other inert
gases, minus 100 kPa (1 bar)) at 55 °C, determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling as
defined in 4.1.1.4. The required relief devices shall be fitted in the vapour space.
6.5.5.2 Specific requirements for flexible IBCs
6.5.5.2.1 These requirements apply to flexible IBCs of the following types:
13H1 woven plastics without coating or liner
13H2 woven plastics, coated
13H3 woven plastics with liner
13H4 woven plastics, coated and with liner
13H5 plastics film
13L1 textile without coating or liner
13L2 textile, coated
13L3 textile with liner
13L4 textile, coated and with liner
13M1 paper, multiwall
13M2 paper, multiwall, water resistant
Flexible IBCs are intended for the carriage of solids only.
6.5.5.2.2 Bodies shall be manufactured from suitable materials. The strength of the material and the construction
of the flexible IBC shall be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use.
6.5.5.2.3 All materials used in the construction of flexible IBCs of types 13M1 and 13M2 shall, after complete
immersion in water for not less than 24 hours, retain at least 85 % of the tensile strength as measured
originally on the material conditioned to equilibrium at 67 % relative humidity or less.
6.5.5.2.4 Seams shall be formed by stitching, heat sealing, gluing or any equivalent method. All stitched seam-
ends shall be secured.
6.5.5.2.5 Flexible IBCs shall provide adequate resistance to ageing and to degradation caused by ultraviolet
radiation or the climatic conditions, or by the substance contained, thereby rendering them appropriate
to their intended use.
6.5.5.2.6 For flexible plastics IBCs where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided
by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be
compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the body. Where use is made
of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design
type, re-testing may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the
inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction.
6.5.5.2.7 Additives may be incorporated into the material of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to
serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of
the material.
– 404 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 405 –
6.5.5.2.8 No material recovered from used receptacles shall be used in the manufacture of IBC bodies. Production
residues or scrap from the same manufacturing process may, however, be used. Component parts such
as fittings and pallet bases may also be used provided such components have not in any way been
damaged in previous use.
6.5.5.2.9 When filled, the ratio of height to width shall be not more than 2:1.
6.5.5.2.10 The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of
the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and the intended use. Joins and closures shall
be siftproof and capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions
of handling and carriage.
6.5.5.3 Specific requirements for rigid plastics IBCs
6.5.5.3.1 These requirements apply to rigid plastics IBCs for the carriage of solids or liquids. Rigid plastics IBCs
are of the following types:
11H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked,
for solids which are filled or discharged by gravity
11H2 freestanding, for solids which are filled or discharged by gravity
21H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked,
for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure
21H2 freestanding, for solids which are filled or discharged under pressure
31H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the whole load when IBCs are stacked,
for liquids
31H2 freestanding, for liquids.
6.5.5.3.2 The body shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and be of
adequate strength in relation to its capacity and its intended use. Except for recycled plastics material
as defined in 1.2.1, no used material other than production residues or regrind from the same
manufacturing process may be used. The material shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to
degradation caused by the substance contained or, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation. Low
temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any permeation of the substance
contained shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of carriage.
6.5.5.3.3 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon
black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and
remain effective throughout the life of the body. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or
inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may be waived
if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely
affect the physical properties of the material of construction.
6.5.5.3.4 Additives may be incorporated in the material of the body to improve the resistance to ageing or to serve
other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties of the
material.
6.5.5.4 Specific requirements for composite IBCs with plastics inner receptacles
6.5.5.4.1 These requirements apply to composite IBCs for the carriage of solids and liquids of the following types:
11HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged by
gravity
11HZ2 Composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged by
gravity
21HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged under
pressure
21HZ2 Composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for solids filled or discharged under
pressure
31HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid plastics inner receptacle, for liquids
31HZ2 Composite IBCs with a flexible plastics inner receptacle, for liquids.
This code shall be completed by replacing the letter Z by a capital letter in accordance with 6.5.1.4.1
(b) to indicate the nature of the material used for the outer casing.
– 405 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 406 –
6.5.5.4.2 The inner receptacle is not intended to perform a containment function without its outer casing. A “rigid”
inner receptacle is a receptacle which retains its general shape when empty without closures in place
and without benefit of the outer casing. Any inner receptacle that is not “rigid” is considered to be
“flexible”.
6.5.5.4.3 The outer casing normally consists of rigid material formed so as to protect the inner receptacle from
physical damage during handling and carriage but is not intended to perform the containment function.
It includes the base pallet where appropriate.
6.5.5.4.4 A composite IBC with a fully enclosing outer casing shall be so designed that the integrity of the inner
receptacle may be readily assessed following the leakproofness and hydraulic pressure tests.
6.5.5.4.5 IBCs of type 31HZ2 shall be limited to a capacity of not more than 1 250 litres.
6.5.5.4.6 The inner receptacle shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and
be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and its intended use. Except for recycled plastics
material as defined in 1.2.1, no used material other than production residues or regrind from the same
manufacturing process may be used. The material shall be adequately resistant to ageing and to
degradation caused by the substance contained or, where relevant, by ultraviolet radiation. Low
temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any permeation of the substance
contained shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of carriage.
6.5.5.4.7 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon
black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and
remain effective throughout the life of the inner receptacle. Where use is made of carbon black, pigments
or inhibitors, other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be waived
if changes in carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect
the physical properties of the material of construction.
6.5.5.4.8 Additives may be incorporated in the material of the inner receptacle to improve the resistance to ageing
or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties
of the material.
6.5.5.4.9 The inner receptacle of IBCs type 31HZ2 shall consist of at least three plies of film.
6.5.5.4.10 The strength of the material and the construction of the outer casing shall be appropriate to the capacity
of the composite IBC and its intended use.
6.5.5.4.11 The outer casing shall be free of any projection that might damage the inner receptacle.
6.5.5.4.12 Metal outer casings shall be constructed of a suitable metal of adequate thickness.
6.5.5.4.13 Outer casings of natural wood shall be of well seasoned wood, commercially dry and free from defects
that would materially lessen the strength of any part of the casing. The tops and bottoms may be made
of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.
6.5.5.4.14 Outer casings of plywood shall be made of well seasoned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer,
commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the casing. All
adjacent plies shall be glued with water resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used with
plywood for the construction of casings. Casings shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or
ends or be assembled by equally suitable devices.
6.5.5.4.15 The walls of outer casings of reconstituted wood shall be made of water resistant reconstituted wood
such as hardboard, particle board or other suitable type. Other parts of the casings may be made of other
suitable material.
6.5.5.4.16 For fibreboard outer casings, strong and good quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard
(single or multiwall) shall be used appropriate to the capacity of the casing and to its intended use. The
water resistance of the outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test
carried out over 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155
g/m² (see ISO 535:1991). It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without
scoring, and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The
fluting of corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings.
– 406 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 407 –
6.5.5.4.17 The ends of fibreboard outer casings may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood. Reinforcements
of wooden battens may be used.
6.5.5.4.18 Manufacturing joins in the fibreboard outer casing shall be taped, lapped and glued, or lapped and
stitched with metal staples. Lapped joins shall have an appropriate overlap. Where closing is effected
by gluing or taping, a water resistant adhesive shall be used.
6.5.5.4.19 Where the outer casing is of plastics material, the relevant requirements of 6.5.5.4.6 to 6.5.5.4.8 apply,
on the understanding that, in this case, the requirements applicable to the inner receptacle are applicable
to the outer casing of composite IBCs.
6.5.5.4.20 The outer casing of an IBC type 31HZ2 shall enclose the inner receptacle on all sides.
6.5.5.4.21 Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical
handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.5.5.4.22 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that
might be liable to damage in handling.
6.5.5.4.23 The outer casing shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and carriage.
Where a detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage
the IBC.
6.5.5.4.24 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall
be external to the inner receptacle.
6.5.5.4.25 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a
safe manner. Such IBCs shall be designed so that the load is not supported by the inner receptacle.
6.5.5.5 Specific requirements for fibreboard IBCs
6.5.5.5.1 These requirements apply to fibreboard IBCs for the carriage of solids which are filled or discharged
by gravity. Fibreboard IBCs are of the following type: 11G.
6.5.5.5.2 Fibreboard IBCs shall not incorporate top lifting devices.
6.5.5.5.3 The body shall be made of strong and good quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single
or multiwall), appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and to its intended use. The water resistance of the
outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of
30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m² (see
ISO 535:1991). It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring,
and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting or
corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings.
6.5.5.5.4 The walls, including top and bottom, shall have a minimum puncture resistance of 15 J measured
according to ISO 3036:1975.
6.5.5.5.5 Manufacturing joins in the body of IBCs shall be made with an appropriate overlap and shall be taped,
glued, stitched with metal staples or fastened by other means at least equally effective. Where joins are
effected by gluing or taping, a water resistant adhesive shall be used. Metal staples shall pass completely
through all pieces to be fastened and be formed or protected so that any inner liner cannot be abraded
or punctured by them.
6.5.5.5.6 The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of
the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and the intended use. Joins and closures shall
be siftproof and capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions
of handling and carriage.
6.5.5.5.7 Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical
handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.5.5.5.8 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that
might be liable to damage in handling.
– 407 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 408 –
6.5.5.5.9 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and carriage. Where a
detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC.
6.5.5.5.10 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall
be external to the liner.
6.5.5.5.11 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a
safe manner.
6.5.5.6 Specific requirements for wooden IBCs
6.5.5.6.1 These requirements apply to wooden IBCs for the carriage of solids which are filled or discharged by
gravity. Wooden IBCs are of the following types:
11C Natural wood with inner liner
11D Plywood with inner liner
11F Reconstituted wood with inner liner.
6.5.5.6.2 Wooden IBCs shall not incorporate top lifting devices.
6.5.5.6.3 The strength of the materials used and the method of construction of the body shall be appropriate to
the capacity and intended use of the IBC.
6.5.5.6.4 Natural wood shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially
lessen the strength of any part of the IBC. Each part of the IBC shall consist of one piece or be equivalent
thereto. Parts are considered equivalent to one piece when a suitable method of glued assembly is used
(as for instance Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint); or butt joint with
at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint, or when other methods at least equally effective
are used.
6.5.5.6.5 Bodies of plywood shall be at least 3-ply. They shall be made of well seasoned rotary cut, sliced or
sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the
body. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be
used with plywood for the construction of the body.
6.5.5.6.6 Bodies of reconstituted wood shall be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard,
particle board or other suitable type.
6.5.5.6.7 IBCs shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable
devices.
6.5.5.6.8 The liner shall be made of a suitable material. The strength of the material used and the construction of
the liner shall be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and the intended use. Joins and closures shall
be siftproof and capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions
of handling and carriage.
6.5.5.6.9 Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for mechanical
handling with the IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.5.5.6.10 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the IBC that
might be liable to damage in handling.
6.5.5.6.11 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and carriage. Where a
detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the IBC.
6.5.5.6.12 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall
be external to the liner.
6.5.5.6.13 Where IBCs are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the load in a
safe manner.
– 408 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 409 –
6.5.6 Test requirements for IBCs
6.5.6.1 Performance and frequency of tests
6.5.6.1.1 Each IBC design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this Chapter before being used and
being approved by the competent authority allowing the allocation of the mark. An IBC design type is
defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner of construction and means of filling and
discharging but may include various surface treatments. It also includes IBCs which differ from the
design type only in their lesser external dimensions.
6.5.6.1.2 Tests shall be carried out on IBCs prepared for carriage. IBCs shall be filled as indicated in the relevant
sections. The substances to be carried in the IBCs may be replaced by other substances except where
this would invalidate the results of the tests. For solids, when another substance is used it shall have the
same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be carried. It is permissible to
use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, so long as they are
placed so that the test results are not affected.
6.5.6.2 Design type tests
6.5.6.2.1 One IBC of each design type, size, wall thickness and manner of construction shall be submitted to the
tests listed in the order shown in 6.5.6.3.7 and as set out in 6.5.6.4 to 6.5.6.13. These design type tests
shall be carried out as required by the competent authority.
6.5.6.2.2 To prove sufficient chemical compatibility with the contained goods or standard liquids in accordance
with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.5 for rigid plastics IBCs of type 31H2 and for composite IBCs of types 31HH1
and 31HH2, a second IBC can be used when the IBCs are designed to be stacked. In such case both
IBCs shall be subjected to a preliminary storage.
6.5.6.2.3 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of IBCs which differ only in minor respects
from a tested type, e.g. with small reductions in external dimensions.
6.5.6.2.4 If detachable pallets are used in the tests, the test report issued in accordance with 6.5.6.14 shall include
a technical description of the pallets used.
6.5.6.3 Preparation of IBCs for testing
6.5.6.3.1 Paper and fibreboard IBCs and composite IBCs with fibreboard outer casings shall be conditioned for
at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There
are three options, one of which shall be chosen. The preferred atmosphere is 23 2 °C and 50 % 2 %
r.h. The two other options are 20 2 °C and 65 % 2 % r.h.; or 27 2 °C and 65 % 2 % r.h.
NOTE: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short-term fluctuations and measurement
limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to
5 % relative humidity without
significant impairment of test reproducibility.
6.5.6.3.2 Additional steps shall be taken to ascertain that the plastics material used in the manufacture of rigid
plastics IBCs (types 31H1 and 31H2) and composite IBCs (types 31HZ1 and 31HZ2) complies
respectively with the requirements in 6.5.5.3.2 to 6.5.5.3.4 and 6.5.5.4.6 to 6.5.5.4.8.
6.5.6.3.3 To prove there is sufficient chemical compatibility with the contained goods, the sample IBC shall be
subjected to a preliminary storage for six months, during which the samples shall remain filled with the
substances they are intended to contain or with substances which are known to have at least as severe a
stress-cracking, weakening or molecular degradation influence on the plastics materials in question, and
after which the samples shall be submitted to the applicable tests listed in the table in 6.5.6.3.7.
6.5.6.3.4 Where the satisfactory behaviour of the plastics material has been established by other means, the above
compatibility test may be dispensed with. Such procedures shall be at least equivalent to the above
compatibility test and recognized by the competent authority.
6.5.6.3.5 For polyethylene rigid plastics IBCs (types 31H1 and 31H2) in accordance with 6.5.5.3 and composite
IBCs with polyethylene inner receptacle (types 31HZ1 and 31HZ2) in accordance with 6.5.5.4, chemical
compatibility with filling liquids assimilated in accordance with 4.1.1.21 may be verified as follows
with standard liquids (see 6.1.6).
– 409 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 410 –
The standard liquids are representative for the processes of deterioration on polyethylene, as there are
softening through swelling, cracking under stress, molecular degradation and combinations thereof.
The sufficient chemical compatibility of the IBCs may be verified by storage of the required test samples
for three weeks at 40 °C with the appropriate standard liquid(s); where this standard liquid is water,
storage in accordance with this procedure is not required. Storage is not required either for test samples
which are used for the stacking test in case of the standard liquids wetting solution and acetic acid. After
this storage, the test samples shall undergo the tests prescribed in 6.5.6.4 to 6.5.6.9.
The compatibility test for tert-Butyl hydroperoxide with more than 40 % peroxide content and
peroxyacetic acids of Class 5.2 shall not be carried out using standard liquids. For these substances,
sufficient chemical compatibility of the test samples shall be verified during a storage period of six
months at ambient temperature with the substances they are intended to carry.
Results of the procedure in accordance with this paragraph from polyethylene IBCs can be approved
for an equal design type, the internal surface of which is fluorinated.
6.5.6.3.6 For IBC design types, made of polyethylene, as specified in 6.5.6.3.5, which have passed the test in
6.5.6.3.5, the chemical compatibility with filling substances may also be verified by laboratory tests
proving that the effect of such filling substances on the test specimens is less than that of the appropriate
standard liquid(s) taking into account the relevant processes of deterioration. The same conditions as
those set out in 4.1.1.21.2 shall apply with respect to relative density and vapour pressure.
6.5.6.3.7 Design type tests required and sequential order
Type of IBC Vibration f Bottom
lift
Top
lift a
Stacking
b
Leak-
proofness
Hydraulic
pressure
Drop Tear Topple Righting
c
Metal:
11A, 11B, 11N – 1st a 2nd 3rd – – 4th e – – –
21A, 21B, 21N – 1st a 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th e – – –
31A, 31B, 31N 1st 2nd a 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th e – – –
Flexible d – – x c x – – x x x x
Rigid plastics:
11H1, 11H2 – 1st a 2nd 3rd – – 4th – – –
21H1, 21H2 – 1st a 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th – – –
31H1, 31H2 1st 2nd a 3rd 4th g 5th 6th 7th – – –
Composite:
11HZ1, 11HZ2 – 1st a 2nd 3rd – – 4th e – – –
21HZ1, 21HZ2 – 1st a 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th e – – –
31HZ1, 31HZ2 1st 2nd a 3rd 4th g 5th 6th 7th e – – –
Fibreboard – 1st – 2nd – – 3rd – – –
Wooden – 1st – 2nd – – 3rd – – –
a When IBCs are designed for this method of handling.
b When IBCs are designed to be stacked.
c When IBCs are designed to be lifted from the top or the side.
d Required test indicated by x; an IBC which has passed one test may be used for other tests, in any order.
e Another IBC of the same design may be used for the drop test.
f Another IBC of the same design may be used for the vibration test.
g The second IBC in accordance with 6.5.6.2.2 can be used out of the sequential order direct after the preliminary
storage.
6.5.6.4 Bottom lift test
6.5.6.4.1 Applicability
For all fibreboard and wooden IBCs, and for all types of IBC which are fitted with means of lifting from
the base, as a design type test.
– 410 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 411 –
6.5.6.4.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The IBC shall be filled. A load shall be added and evenly distributed. The mass of the filled IBC and
the load shall be 1.25 times the maximum permissible gross mass.
6.5.6.4.3 Method of testing
The IBC shall be raised and lowered twice by a lift truck with the forks centrally positioned and spaced
at three quarters of the dimension of the side of entry (unless the points of entry are fixed). The forks
shall penetrate to three quarters of the direction of entry. The test shall be repeated from each possible
direction of entry.
6.5.6.4.4 Criteria for passing the test
No permanent deformation which renders the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for carriage
and no loss of contents.
6.5.6.5 Top lift test
6.5.6.5.1 Applicability
For all types of IBC which are designed to be lifted from the top and for flexible IBCs designed to be
lifted from the top or the side, as a design type test.
6.5.6.5.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
Metal, rigid plastics and composite IBCs shall be filled. A load shall be added and evenly distributed.
The mass of the filled IBC and the load shall be twice the maximum permissible gross mass. Flexible
IBCs shall be filled with a representative material and then shall be loaded to six times their maximum
permissible gross mass, the load being evenly distributed.
6.5.6.5.3 Methods of testing
Metal and flexible IBCs shall be lifted in the manner for which they are designed until clear of the floor
and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes.
Rigid plastics and composite IBCs shall be lifted:
(a) by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied
vertically, for a period of five minutes; and
(b) by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so that the hoisting forces are applied toward
the centre at 45º to the vertical, for a period of five minutes.
6.5.6.5.4 Other methods of top lift testing and preparation at least equally effective may be used for flexible IBCs.
6.5.6.5.5 Criteria for passing the test
(a) Metal, rigid plastics and composite IBCs: the IBC remains safe for normal conditions of carriage,
there is no observable permanent deformation of the IBC, including the base pallet, if any, and
no loss of contents;
(b) Flexible IBCs: no damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC unsafe for
carriage or handling and no loss of contents.
6.5.6.6 Stacking test
6.5.6.6.1 Applicability
For all types of IBC which are designed to be stacked on each other, as a design type test.
6.5.6.6.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The IBC shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. If the specific gravity of the product
being used for testing makes this impracticable, the IBC shall additionally be loaded so that it is tested
at its maximum permissible gross mass the load being evenly distributed.
– 411 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 412 –
6.5.6.6.3 Method of testing
(a) The IBC shall be placed on its base on level hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed
superimposed test load (see 6.5.6.6.4). For rigid plastics IBCs of type 31H2 and composite IBCs
of types 31HH1 and 31HH2, a stacking test shall be carried out with the original filling substance
or a standard liquid (see 6.1.6) in accordance with 6.5.6.3.3 or 6.5.6.3.5 using the second IBC in
accordance with 6.5.6.2.2 after the preliminary storage. IBCs shall be subjected to the test load
for a period of at least:
(i) 5 minutes, for metal IBCs;
(ii) 28 days at 40 °C, for rigid plastics IBCs of types 11H2, 21H2 and 31H2 and for composite
IBCs with outer casings of plastics material which bear the stacking load (i.e., types
11HH1, 11HH2, 21HH1, 21HH2, 31HH1 and 31HH2);
(iii) 24 hours, for all other types of IBCs;
(b) The load shall be applied by one of the following methods:
(i) one or more IBCs of the same type filled to the maximum permissible gross mass stacked
on the test IBC;
(ii) appropriate weights loaded on to either a flat plate or a reproduction of the base of the
IBC, which is stacked on the test IBC.
6.5.6.6.4 Calculation of superimposed test load
The load to be placed on the IBC shall be 1.8 times the combined maximum permissible gross mass of
the number of similar IBCs that may be stacked on top of the IBC during carriage.
6.5.6.6.5 Criteria for passing the test
(a) All types of IBCs other than flexible IBCs: no permanent deformation which renders the IBC
including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for carriage and no loss of contents;
(b) Flexible IBCs: no deterioration of the body which renders the IBC unsafe for carriage and no
loss of contents.
6.5.6.7 Leakproofness test
6.5.6.7.1 Applicability
For those types of IBC used for liquids or for solids filled or discharged under pressure, as a design type
test and periodic test.
6.5.6.7.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment. Vented closures
shall either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent shall be sealed.
6.5.6.7.3 Method of testing and pressure to be applied
The test shall be carried out for a period of at least 10 minutes using air at a gauge pressure of not less
than 20 kPa (0.2 bar). The air tightness of the IBC shall be determined by a suitable method such as by
air-pressure differential test or by immersing the IBC in water or, for metal IBCs, by coating the seams
and joints with a soap solution. In the case of immersing a correction factor shall be applied for the
hydrostatic pressure.
6.5.6.7.4 Criterion for passing the test
No leakage of air.
– 412 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 413 –
6.5.6.8 Internal pressure (hydraulic) test
6.5.6.8.1 Applicability
For those types of IBCs used for liquids or for solids filled or discharged under pressure, as a design
type test.
6.5.6.8.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The test shall be carried out before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment. Pressure-relief
devices shall be removed and their apertures plugged, or shall be rendered inoperative.
6.5.6.8.3 Method of testing
The test shall be carried out for a period of at least 10 minutes applying a hydraulic pressure not less
than that indicated in 6.5.6.8.4. The IBCs shall not be mechanically restrained during the test.
6.5.6.8.4 Pressures to be applied
6.5.6.8.4.1 Metal IBCs:
(a) For IBCs of types 21A, 21B and 21N, for packing group I solids, a 250 kPa (2.5 bar) gauge
pressure;
(b) For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, for packing groups II or III substances,
a 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure;
(c) In addition, for IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, a 65kPa (0.65 bar) gauge pressure. This test
shall be performed before the 200 kPa (2 bar) test.
6.5.6.8.4.2 Rigid plastics and composite IBCs:
(a) For IBCs of types 21H1, 2lH2, 21HZ1 and 21HZ2: 75 kPa (0.75 bar) (gauge);
(b) For IBCs of types 31H1, 31H2, 31HZ1 and 31HZ2: whichever is the greater of two values, the
first as determined by one of the following methods:
(i) the total gauge pressure measured in the IBC (i.e. the vapour pressure of the filling
substance and the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, minus 100 kPa) at 55 °C
multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; this total gauge pressure shall be determined on the
basis of a maximum degree of filling in accordance with 4.1.1.4 and a filling temperature
of 15 °C;
(ii) 1.75 times the vapour pressure at 50 °C of the substance to be carried minus 100 kPa, but
with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa;
(iii) 1.5 times the vapour pressure at 55 °C of the substance to be carried minus 100 kPa, but
with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa;
and the second as determined by the following method:
(iv) twice the static pressure of the substance to be carried, with a minimum of twice the static
pressure of water;
6.5.6.8.5 Criteria for passing the test(s):
(a) For IBCs of types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N, when subjected to the test pressure
specified in 6.5.6.8.4.1 (a) or (b): no leakage;
(b) For IBCs of types 31A, 31B and 31N, when subjected to the test pressure specified
in 6.5.6.8.4.1 (c): no permanent deformation which renders the IBC unsafe for carriage and no
leakage;
(c) For rigid plastics and composite IBCs: no permanent deformation which would render the IBC
unsafe for carriage and no leakage.
– 413 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 414 –
6.5.6.9 Drop test
6.5.6.9.1 Applicability
For all types of IBCs, as a design type test.
6.5.6.9.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
(a) Metal IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to not less than 95 % of its maximum capacity for solids or
98 % of its maximum capacity for liquids. Pressure-relief devices shall be removed and their
apertures plugged, or shall be rendered inoperative;
(b) Flexible IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to the maximum permissible gross mass, the contents being
evenly distributed;
(c) Rigid plastics and composite IBCs: the IBC shall be filled to not less than 95 % of its maximum
capacity for solids or 98 % of its maximum capacity for liquids. Arrangements provided for
pressure relief may be removed and plugged or rendered inoperative. Testing of IBCs shall be
carried out when the temperature of the test sample and its contents has been reduced to
minus 18 °C or lower. Where test samples of composite IBCs are prepared in this way the
conditioning specified in 6.5.6.3.1 may be waived. Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid state,
if necessary by the addition of anti-freeze. This conditioning may be disregarded if the materials
in question are of sufficient ductility and tensile strength at low temperatures;
(d) Fibreboard and wooden IBCs: The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95 % of its maximum
capacity.
6.5.6.9.3 Method of testing
The IBC shall be dropped on its base onto a non-resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in
conformity with the requirements of 6.1.5.3.4, in such a manner as to ensure that the point of impact is
that part of the base of the IBC considered to be the most vulnerable. IBCs of 0.45 m³ or less capacity
shall also be dropped:
(a) Metal IBCs: on the most vulnerable part other than the part of the base tested in the first drop;
(b) Flexible IBCs: on the most vulnerable side;
(c) Rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard and wooden IBCs: flat on a side, flat on the top and on a
corner.
The same IBC or a different IBC of the same design may be used for each drop.
6.5.6.9.4 Drop height
For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid or liquid to be carried or with another
substance having essentially the same physical characteristics:
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
For liquids if the test is performed with water:
(a) Where the substances to be carried have a relative density not exceeding 1.2:
Packing group II Packing group III
1.2 m 0.8 m
– 414 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 415 –
(b) Where the substances to be carried have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop heights shall
be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried rounded up to
the first decimal as follows:
Packing group II Packing group III
d × 1.0 m d × 0.67 m
6.5.6.9.5 Criteria for passing the test(s):
(a) Metal IBCs: no loss of contents;
(b) Flexible IBCs: no loss of contents. A slight discharge, e.g. from closures or stitch holes, upon
impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs
after the IBC has been raised clear of the ground;
(c) Rigid plastics, composite, fibreboard and wooden IBCs: no loss of contents. A slight discharge
from a closure upon impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no
further leakage occurs;
(d) All IBCs: no damage which renders the IBC unsafe to be carried for salvage or for disposal, and
no loss of contents. In addition, the IBC shall be capable of being lifted by an appropriate means
until clear of the floor for five minutes.
NOTE: The criteria in (d) apply to design types for IBCs manufactured as from 1 January 2011.
6.5.6.10 Tear test
6.5.6.10.1 Applicability
For all types of flexible IBCs, as a design type test.
6.5.6.10.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95 % of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass,
the contents being evenly distributed.
6.5.6.10.3 Method of testing
Once the IBC is placed on the ground, a 100 mm knife score, completely penetrating the wall of a wide
face, is made at a 45° angle to the principal axis of the IBC, halfway between the bottom surface and
the top level of the contents. The IBC shall then be subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed
load equivalent to twice the maximum permissible gross mass. The load shall be applied for at least five
minutes. An IBC which is designed to be lifted from the top or the side shall then, after removal of the
superimposed load, be lifted clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five
minutes.
6.5.6.10.4 Criteria for passing the test
The cut shall not propagate more than 25 % of its original length.
6.5.6.11 Topple test
6.5.6.11.1 Applicability
For all types of flexible IBC, as a design type test.
6.5.6.11.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95 % of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass,
the contents being evenly distributed.
6.5.6.11.3 Method of testing
The IBC shall be caused to topple on to any part of its top on to a rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat and
horizontal surface.
– 415 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 416 –
6.5.6.11.4 Topple height
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
6.5.6.11.5 Criteria for passing the test
No loss of contents. A slight discharge, e.g. from closures or stitch holes, upon impact shall not be
considered to be a failure of the IBC provided that no further leakage occurs.
6.5.6.12 Righting test
6.5.6.12.1 Applicability
For all flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from the top or side, as a design type test.
6.5.6.12.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
The IBC shall be filled to not less than 95 % of its capacity and to its maximum permissible gross mass,
the contents being evenly distributed.
6.5.6.12.3 Method of testing
The IBC, lying on its side, shall be lifted at a speed of at least 0.1 m/s to upright position, clear of the
floor, by one lifting device or by two lifting devices when four are provided.
6.5.6.12.4 Criteria for passing the test
No damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC unsafe for carriage or handling.
6.5.6.13 Vibration test
6.5.6.13.1 Applicability
For all IBCs used for liquids, as a design type test.
NOTE: This test applies to design types for IBCs manufactured after 31 December 2010 (see
also 1.6.1.14).
6.5.6.13.2 Preparation of the IBC for test
A sample IBC shall be selected at random and shall be fitted and closed as for carriage. The IBC shall
be filled with water to not less than 98 % of its maximum capacity.
6.5.6.13.3 Test method and duration
6.5.6.13.3.1 The IBC shall be placed in the centre of the test machine platform with a vertical sinusoidal, double
amplitude (peak-to peak displacement) of 25 mm 5 %. If necessary, restraining devices shall be
attached to the platform to prevent the specimen from moving horizontally off the platform without
restricting vertical movement.
6.5.6.13.3.2 The test shall be conducted for one hour at a frequency that causes part of the base of the IBC to be
momentarily raised from the vibrating platform for part of each cycle to such a degree that a metal shim
can be completely inserted intermittently at, at least, one point between the base of the IBC and the test
platform. The frequency may need to be adjusted after the initial set point to prevent the packaging from
going into resonance. Nevertheless, the test frequency shall continue to allow placement of the metal
shim under the IBC as described in this paragraph. The continuing ability to insert the metal shim is
essential to passing the test. The metal shim used for this test shall be at least 1.6 mm thick, 50 mm
wide, and be of sufficient length to be inserted between the IBC and the test platform a minimum of
100 mm to perform the test.
6.5.6.13.4 Criteria for passing the test
No leakage or rupture shall be observed. In addition, no breakage or failure of structural components,
such as broken welds or failed fastenings, shall be observed.
– 416 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 417 –
6.5.6.14 Test report
6.5.6.14.1 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be made available
to the users of the IBC:
1. Name and address of the test facility;
2. Name and address of applicant (where appropriate);
3. A unique test report identification;
4. Date of the test report;
5. Manufacturer of the IBC;
6. Description of the IBC design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures, thickness, etc.)
including method of manufacture (e.g. blow moulding) and which may include drawing(s) and/or
photograph(s);
7. Maximum capacity;
8. Characteristics of test contents, e.g. viscosity and relative density for liquids and particle size for
solids. For rigid plastics and composite IBCs subject to the hydraulic pressure test in 6.5.6.8, the
temperature of the water used;
9. Test descriptions and results;
10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory.
6.5.6.14.2 The test report shall contain statements that the IBC prepared as for carriage was tested in accordance
with the appropriate requirements of this Chapter and that the use of other packaging methods or
components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent authority.
– 417 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 419 –
CHAPTER 6.6
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION AND TESTING
OF LARGE PACKAGINGS
6.6.1 General
6.6.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter do not apply to:
(a) packagings for Class 2, except large packagings for articles, including aerosols;
(b) packagings for Class 6.2, except large packagings for clinical waste of UN No. 3291;
(c) Class 7 packages containing radioactive material.
6.6.1.2 Large packagings shall be manufactured, tested and remanufactured under a quality assurance
programme which satisfies the competent authority in order to ensure that each manufactured or
remanufactured large packaging meets the requirements of this Chapter.
NOTE: ISO 16106:2020 “Transport packages for dangerous goods – Dangerous goods packagings,
intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) and large packagings – Guidelines for the application of ISO 9001”
provides acceptable guidance on procedures which may be followed.
6.6.1.3 The specific requirements for large packagings in 6.6.4 are based on large packagings currently used.
In order to take into account progress in science and technology, there is no objection to the use of large
packagings having specifications different from those in 6.6.4 provided they are equally effective,
acceptable to the competent authority and able to successfully fulfil the requirements described in 6.6.5.
Methods of testing other than those described in ADR are acceptable provided they are equivalent and
are recognized by the competent authority.
6.6.1.4 Manufacturers and subsequent distributors of packagings shall provide information regarding
procedures to be followed and a description of the types and dimensions of closures (including required
gaskets) and any other components needed to ensure that packages as presented for carriage are capable
of passing the applicable performance tests of this Chapter.
6.6.2 Code for designating types of large packagings
6.6.2.1 The code used for large packagings consist of:
(a) Two Arabic numerals:
50 for rigid large packagings; or
51 for flexible large packagings; and
(b) A capital letter in Latin character indicating the nature of the material, e.g. wood, steel etc. The
capital letters used shall be those shown in 6.1.2.6.
6.6.2.2 The letters “T” or “W” may follow the Large Packaging code. The letter “T” signifies a large salvage
packaging conforming to the requirements of 6.6.5.1.9. The letter “W” signifies that the large packaging,
although of the same type indicated by the code, is manufactured to a specification different from those
in 6.6.4 and is considered equivalent in accordance with the requirements in 6.6.1.3.
– 419 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 420 –
6.6.3 Marking
6.6.3.1 Primary marking
Each large packaging manufactured and intended for use in accordance with the provisions of ADR
shall bear marks which are durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible. Letters,
numerals and symbols shall be at least 12 mm high and shall show:
(a) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible
bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in
Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11. For metal large packagings on which the marks are
stamped or embossed, the capital letters “UN” may be applied instead of the symbol;
(b) The number “50” designating a large rigid packaging or “51” for flexible large packagings,
followed by the material type in accordance with 6.5.1.4.1 (b);
(c) A capital letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved:
X for packing groups I, II and III
Y for packing groups II and III
Z for packing group III only;
(d) The month and year (last two digits) of manufacture;
(e) The State authorizing the allocation of the mark; indicated by the distinguishing sign used on
vehicles in international road traffic1;
(f) The name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the large packagings as
specified by the competent authority;
(g) The stacking test load in kg. For large packagings not designed for stacking the figure “0” shall
be shown;
(h) The maximum permissible gross mass in kilograms.
The primary mark required above shall be applied in the sequence of the sub-paragraphs.
Each mark applied in accordance with (a) to (h) shall be clearly separated, e.g. by a slash or space, so
as to be easily identifiable.
1 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 420 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 421 –
6.6.3.2 Examples of marking
50A/X/05 01/N/PQRS
2500/1000
For a large steel packaging suitable for stacking;
stacking load: 2 500 kg; maximum gross mass: 1 000 kg.
50H/Y/04 02/D/ABCD 987
0/800
For a large plastics packaging not suitable for stacking;
maximum gross mass: 800 kg.
51H/Z/06 01/S/1999
0/500
For a large flexible packaging not suitable for stacking;
maximum gross mass: 500 kg.
50AT/Y/05/01/B/PQRS
2500/1000
For a large steel salvage packaging suitable for stacking;
stacking load: 2 500 kg; maximum gross mass: 1 000 kg.
6.6.3.3 The maximum permitted stacking load applicable shall be displayed on a symbol as shown in Figure
6.6.3.3.1 or Figure 6.6.3.3.2. The symbol shall be durable and clearly visible.
Figure 6.6.3.3.1 Figure 6.6.3.3.2
Large packagings capable Large packagings NOT
of being stacked capable of being stacked
The minimum dimensions shall be 100 mm × 100 mm. The letters and numbers indicating the mass
shall be at least 12 mm high. The area within the printer’s marks indicated by the dimensional arrows
shall be square. Where dimensions are not specified, all features shall be in approximate proportion to
those shown. The mass marked above the symbol shall not exceed the load imposed during the design
type test (see 6.6.5.3.3.4) divided by 1.8.
6.6.3.4 Where a large packaging conforms to one or more than one tested large packaging design type, including
one or more than one tested packaging or IBC design type, the large packaging may bear more than one
mark to indicate the relevant performance test requirements that have been met. Where more than one
mark appears on a large packaging, the marks shall appear in close proximity to one another and each
mark shall appear in its entirety.
6.6.4 Specific requirements for large packagings
6.6.4.1 Specific requirements for metal large packagings
50A steel
50B aluminium
50N metal (other than steel or aluminium)
6.6.4.1.1 The large packaging shall be made of suitable ductile metal in which the weldability has been fully
demonstrated. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. Low-temperature performance
shall be taken into account when appropriate.
6.6.4.1.2 Care shall be taken to avoid damage by galvanic action due to the juxtaposition of dissimilar metals.
– 421 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 422 –
6.6.4.2 Specific requirements for flexible material large packagings
51H flexible plastics
51M flexible paper
6.6.4.2.1 The large packaging shall be manufactured from suitable materials. The strength of the material and the
construction of the flexible large packagings shall be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use.
6.6.4.2.2 All materials used in the construction of flexible large packagings of types 51M shall, after complete
immersion in water for not less than 24 hours, retain at least 85 % of the tensile strength as measured
originally on the material conditioned to equilibrium at 67 % relative humidity or less.
6.6.4.2.3 Seams shall be formed by stitching, heat sealing, glueing or any equivalent method. All stitched
seam-ends shall be secured.
6.6.4.2.4 Flexible large packagings shall provide adequate resistance to ageing and to degradation caused by
ultraviolet radiation or the climatic conditions, or by the substance contained, thereby rendering them
appropriate to their intended use.
6.6.4.2.5 For plastics flexible large packagings where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall
be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives
shall be compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the large packaging.
Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of
the tested design type, re-testing may be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment
content or the inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of
construction.
6.6.4.2.6 Additives may be incorporated into the material of the large packaging to improve the resistance to
ageing or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical
properties of the material.
6.6.4.2.7 When filled, the ratio of height to width shall be not more than 2:1.
6.6.4.3 Specific requirements for plastics large packagings
50H rigid plastics
6.6.4.3.1 The large packaging shall be manufactured from suitable plastics material of known specifications and
be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and its intended use. The material shall be adequately
resistant to ageing and to degradation caused by the substance contained or, where relevant, by
ultraviolet radiation. Low temperature performance shall be taken into account when appropriate. Any
permeation of the substance contained shall not constitute a danger under normal conditions of carriage.
6.6.4.3.2 Where protection against ultraviolet radiation is required, it shall be provided by the addition of carbon
black or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives shall be compatible with the contents and
remain effective throughout the life of the outer packaging. Where use is made of carbon black,
pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, re-testing may
be waived if changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the inhibitor content do not
adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction.
6.6.4.3.3 Additives may be incorporated in the material of the large packaging to improve the resistance to ageing
or to serve other purposes, provided that these do not adversely affect the physical or chemical properties
of the material.
6.6.4.4 Specific requirements for fibreboard large packagings
50G rigid fibreboard
6.6.4 4.1 Strong and good quality solid or double-faced corrugated fibreboard (single or multiwall) shall be used,
appropriate to the capacity of the large packagings and to their intended use. The water resistance of the
outer surface shall be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period
of 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 g/m² – see
ISO 535:1991. It shall have proper bending qualities. Fibreboard shall be cut, creased without scoring,
and slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks or undue bending. The fluting or
corrugated fibreboard shall be firmly glued to the facings.
– 422 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 423 –
6.6.4.4.2 The walls, including top and bottom, shall have a minimum puncture resistance of 15 J measured
according to ISO 3036:1975.
6.6.4.4.3 Manufacturing joins in the outer packaging of large packagings shall be made with an appropriate
overlap and shall be taped, glued, stitched with metal staples or fastened by other means at least equally
effective. Where joins are effected by gluing or taping, a water resistant adhesive shall be used. Metal
staples shall pass completely through all pieces to be fastened and be formed or protected so that any
inner liner cannot be abraded or punctured by them.
6.6.4.4.4 Any integral pallet base forming part of a large packaging or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for
mechanical handling with the large packaging filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.6.4.4.5 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the large
packaging that might be liable to damage in handling.
6.6.4.4.6 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and carriage. Where a
detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the large
packaging.
6.6.4.4.7 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall
be external to the liner.
6.6.4.4.8 Where large packagings are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the
load in a safe manner.
6.6.4.5 Specific requirements for wooden large packagings
50C natural wood
50D plywood
50F reconstituted wood
6.6.4.5.1 The strength of the materials used and the method of construction shall be appropriate to the capacity
and intended use of the large packagings.
6.6.4.5.2 Natural wood shall be well seasoned, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially
lessen the strength of any part of the large packagings. Each part of the large packagings shall consist
of one piece or be equivalent thereto. Parts are considered equivalent to one piece when a suitable
method of glued assembly is used as for instance Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap
or rabbet joint; or butt joint with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint, or when other
methods at least equally effective are used.
6.6.4.5.3 Large packagings of plywood shall be at least 3-ply. They shall be made of well seasoned rotary cut,
sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from defects that would materially lessen the strength
of the large packaging. All adjacent plies shall be glued with water resistant adhesive. Other suitable
materials may be used with plywood for the construction of the large packaging.
6.6.4.5.4 Large packagings of reconstituted wood shall be made of water resistant reconstituted wood such as
hardboard, particle board or other suitable type.
6.6.4.5.5 Large packagings shall be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally
suitable devices.
6.6.4.5.6 Any integral pallet base forming part of a large packaging or any detachable pallet shall be suitable for
mechanical handling with the large packaging filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.6.4.5.7 The pallet or integral base shall be designed so as to avoid any protrusion of the base of the large
packaging that might be liable to damage in handling.
6.6.4.5.8 The body shall be secured to any detachable pallet to ensure stability in handling and carriage. Where a
detachable pallet is used, its top surface shall be free from sharp protrusions that might damage the large
packaging.
6.6.4.5.9 Strengthening devices such as timber supports to increase stacking performance may be used but shall
be external to the liner.
– 423 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 424 –
6.6.4.5.10 Where large packagings are intended for stacking, the bearing surface shall be such as to distribute the
load in a safe manner.
6.6.5 Test requirements for large packagings
6.6.5.1 Performance and frequency of test
6.6.5.1.1 The design type of each large packaging shall be tested as provided in 6.6.5.3 in accordance with
procedures established by the competent authority allowing the allocation of the mark and shall be
approved by this competent authority.
6.6.5.1.2 Each large packaging design type shall successfully pass the tests prescribed in this Chapter before
being used. A large packaging design type is defined by the design, size, material and thickness, manner
of construction and packing, but may include various surface treatments. It also includes large
packagings which differ from the design type only in their lesser design height.
6.6.5.1.3 Tests shall be repeated on production samples at intervals established by the competent authority. For
such tests on fibreboard large packagings, preparation at ambient conditions is considered equivalent to
the provisions of 6.6.5.2.4.
6.6.5.1.4 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification which alters the design, material or manner of
construction of large packagings.
6.6.5.1.5 The competent authority may permit the selective testing of large packagings that differ only in minor
respects from a tested type, e.g. smaller sizes of inner packagings or inner packagings of lower net mass;
and large packagings which are produced with small reductions in external dimension(s).
6.6.5.1.6 (Reserved)
NOTE: For the conditions for assembling different inner packagings in a large packaging and
permissible variations in inner packagings, see 4.1.1.5.1.
6.6.5.1.7 The competent authority may at any time require proof, by tests in accordance with this section, that
serially-produced large packagings meet the requirements of the design type tests.
6.6.5.1.8 Provided the validity of the test results is not affected and with the approval of the competent authority,
several tests may be made on one sample.
6.6.5.1.9 Large salvage packagings
Large salvage packagings shall be tested and marked in accordance with the provisions applicable to
packing group II large packagings intended for the carriage of solids or inner packagings, except as
follows:
(a) The test substance used in performing the tests shall be water, and the large salvage packagings
shall be filled to not less than 98 % of their maximum capacity. It is permissible to use additives,
such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass so long as they are placed so
that the test results are not affected. Alternatively, in performing the drop test, the drop height may
be varied in accordance with 6.6.5.3.4.4.2 (b);
(b) Large salvage packagings shall, in addition, have been successfully subjected to the leakproofness
test at 30 kPa, with the results of this test reflected in the test report required by 6.6.5.4; and
(c) Large salvage packagings shall be marked with the letter “T” as described in 6.6.2.2.
6.6.5.2 Preparation for testing
6.6.5.2.1 Tests shall be carried out on large packagings prepared as for carriage including the inner packagings
or articles used. Inner packagings shall be filled to not less than 98 % of their maximum capacity for
liquids or 95 % for solids. For large packagings where the inner packagings are designed to carry liquids
and solids, separate testing is required for both liquid and solid contents. The substances in the inner
packagings or the articles to be carried in the large packagings may be replaced by other material or
articles except where this would invalidate the results of the tests. When other inner packagings or
articles are used they shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, etc) as the inner packagings or
– 424 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 425 –
articles to be carried. It is permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite
total package mass, so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected.
6.6.5.2.2 In the drop tests for liquids, when another substance is used, it shall be of similar relative density and
viscosity to those of the substance being carried. Water may also be used for the liquid drop test under
the conditions in 6.6.5.3.4.4.
6.6.5.2.3 Large packagings made of plastics materials and large packagings containing inner packagings of plastic
materials – other than bags intended to contain solids or articles – shall be drop tested when the
temperature of the test sample and its contents has been reduced to -18 °C or lower. This conditioning
may be disregarded if the materials in question are of sufficient ductility and tensile strength at low
temperatures. Where test sample are prepared in this way, the conditioning in 6.6.5.2.4 may be waived.
Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid state by the addition of anti-freeze if necessary.
6.6.5.2.4 Large packagings of fibreboard shall be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere having a
controlled temperature and relative humidity (r.h.). There are three options, one of which shall be
chosen.
The preferred atmosphere is 23 °C ± 2 °C and 50 % ± 2 % r.h. The two other options are: 20 °C ± 2 °C
and 65 % ± 2 % r.h.; or 27 °C ± 2 °C and 65 % ± 2 % r.h.
NOTE: Average values shall fall within these limits. Short term fluctuations and measurement
limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ± 5 % relative humidity without
significant impairment of test reproducibility.
6.6.5.3 Test requirements
6.6.5.3.1 Bottom lift test
6.6.5.3.1.1 Applicability
For all types of large packagings which are fitted with means of lifting from the base, as a design type
test.
6.6.5.3.1.2 Preparation of large packaging for test
The large packaging shall be loaded to 1.25 times its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being
evenly distributed.
6.6.5.3.1.3 Method of testing
The large packaging shall be raised and lowered twice by a lift truck with the forks centrally positioned
and spaced at three quarters of the dimension of the side of entry (unless the points of entry are fixed).
The forks shall penetrate to three quarters of the direction of entry. The test shall be repeated from each
possible direction of entry.
6.6.5.3.1.4 Criteria for passing the test
No permanent deformation which renders the large packaging unsafe for carriage and no loss of
contents.
6.6.5.3.2 Top lift test
6.6.5.3.2.1 Applicability
For types of large packagings which are intended to be lifted from the top and fitted with means of
lifting, as a design type test.
6.6.5.3.2.2 Preparation of large packaging for test
The large packaging shall be loaded to twice its maximum permissible gross mass. A flexible large
packaging shall be loaded to six times its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being evenly
distributed.
6.6.5.3.2.3 Method of testing
– 425 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 426 –
The large packaging shall be lifted in the manner for which it is designed until clear of the floor and
maintained in that position for a period of five minutes.
6.6.5.3.2.4 Criteria for passing the test
(a) Metal and rigid plastics large packagings: no permanent deformation which renders the large
packaging, including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for carriage and no loss of contents;
(b) Flexible large packagings: no damage to the large packaging or its lifting devices which renders
the large packaging unsafe for carriage or handling and no loss of contents.
6.6.5.3.3 Stacking test
6.6.5.3.3.1 Applicability
For all types of large packagings which are designed to be stacked on each other, as a design type test.
6.6.5.3.3.2 Preparation of large packaging for test
The large packaging shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.6.5.3.3.3 Method of testing
The large packaging shall be placed on its base on level hard ground and subjected to a uniformly
distributed superimposed test load (see 6.6.5.3.3.4) for a period of at least five minutes, large packagings
of wood, fibreboard and plastics materials for a period of 24 h.
6.6.5.3.3.4 Calculation of superimposed test load
The load to be placed on the large packagings shall be 1.8 times the combined maximum permissible
gross mass of the number of similar large packagings that may be stacked on top of the large packagings
during carriage.
6.6.5.3.3.5 Criteria for passing the test
(a) All types of large packagings other than flexible large packagings: no permanent deformation
which renders the large packaging including the base pallet, if any, unsafe for carriage and no
loss of contents;
(b) Flexible large packagings: no deterioration of the body which renders the large packaging unsafe
for carriage and no loss of contents.
6.6.5.3.4 Drop test
6.6.5.3.4.1 Applicability
For all types of large packagings as a design type test.
6.6.5.3.4.2 Preparation of large packaging for testing
The large packaging shall be filled in accordance with 6.6.5.2.1
6.6.5.3.4.3 Method of testing
The large packaging shall be dropped onto a non resilient, horizontal, flat, massive and rigid surface in
conformity with the requirements of 6.1.5.3.4, in such a manner as to ensure that the point of impact is
that part of the base of the large packaging considered to be the most vulnerable.
6.6.5.3.4.4 Drop height
NOTE: Large packagings for substances and articles of Class 1 shall be tested at the packing group
II performance level.
6.6.5.3.4.4.1 For inner packagings containing solid or liquid substances or articles, if the test is performed with the
solid, liquid or articles to be carried, or with another substance or article having essentially the same
characteristics:
– 426 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 427 –
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
6.6.5.3.4.4.2 For inner packagings containing liquids if the test is performed with water:
(a) Where the substances to be carried have a relative density not exceeding 1.2:
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
1.8 m 1.2 m 0.8 m
(b) Where the substances to be carried have a relative density exceeding 1.2, the drop height shall
be calculated on the basis of the relative density (d) of the substance to be carried, rounded up to
the first decimal, as follows:
Packing group I Packing group II Packing group III
d 1.5 (m) d 1.0 (m) d 0.67 (m)
6.6.5.3.4.5 Criteria for passing the test
6.6.5.3.4.5.1 The large packaging shall not exhibit any damage liable to affect safety during carriage. There shall be
no leakage of the filling substance from inner packaging(s) or article(s).
6.6.5.3.4.5.2 No rupture is permitted in large packagings for articles of Class 1 which would permit the spillage of
loose explosive substances or articles from the large packaging.
6.6.5.3.4.5.3 Where a large packaging undergoes a drop test, the sample passes the test if the entire contents are
retained even if the closure is no longer sift-proof.
6.6.5.4 Certification and test report
6.6.5.4.1 In respect of each design type of large packaging a certificate and mark (as in 6.6.3) shall be issued
attesting that the design type including its equipment meets the test requirements.
6.6.5.4.2 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be made available
to the users of the large packaging:
1. Name and address of the test facility;
2. Name and address of applicant (where appropriate);
3. A unique test report identification;
4. Date of the test report;
5. Manufacturer of the large packaging;
6. Description of the large packaging design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures, thickness,
etc) and/or photograph(s);
7. Maximum capacity/maximum permissible gross mass;
8. Characteristics of test contents, e.g. types and descriptions of inner packagings or articles used;
9. Test descriptions and results;
10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory.
6.6.5.4.3 The test report shall contain statements that the large packaging prepared as for carriage was tested in
accordance with the appropriate provisions of this Chapter and that the use of other packaging methods
or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the competent
authority.
– 427 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 429 –
CHAPTER 6.7
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION,
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF PORTABLE TANKS AND
UN MULTIPLE-ELEMENT GAS CONTAINERS (MEGCs)
NOTE 1: For fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks and tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made
of metallic materials, and battery-vehicles and multiple element gas containers (MEGCs) other than UN MEGCs, see
Chapter 6.8; for vacuum operated waste tanks, see Chapter 6.10; for fixed tanks (tank-vehicles) and demountable tanks
with shells made of fibre-reinforced plastics, see Chapter 6.13.
NOTE 2: The requirements of this Chapter also apply to portable tanks with shells made of fibre-reinforced plastics
(FRP) to the extent indicated in Chapter 6.9.
6.7.1 Application and general requirements
6.7.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter apply to portable tanks intended for the carriage of dangerous goods,
and to MEGCs intended for the carriage of non-refrigerated gases of Class 2, by all modes of carriage.
In addition to the requirements of this Chapter, unless otherwise specified, the applicable requirements
of the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC) 1972, as amended, shall be fulfilled by any
multimodal portable tank or MEGC which meets the definition of a “container” within the terms of that
Convention. Additional requirements may apply to offshore portable tanks or MEGCs that are handled
in open seas.
6.7.1.2 In recognition of scientific and technological advances, the technical requirements of this Chapter may
be varied by alternative arrangements. These alternative arrangements shall offer a level of safety not
less than that given by the requirements of this Chapter with respect to the compatibility with substances
carried and the ability of the portable tank or MEGC to withstand impact, loading and fire conditions.
For international carriage, alternative arrangement portable tanks or MEGCs shall be approved by the
applicable competent authorities.
6.7.1.3 When a substance is not assigned a portable tank instruction (T1 to T23, T50 or T75) in Column (10)
of Table A of in Chapter 3.2, interim approval for carriage may be issued by the competent authority of
the country of origin. The approval shall be included in the documentation of the consignment and
contain as a minimum the information normally provided in the portable tank instructions and the
conditions under which the substance shall be carried.
6.7.2 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for
the carriage of substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to 9
6.7.2.1 Definitions
For the purposes of this section:
Alternative arrangement means an approval granted by the competent authority for a portable tank or
MEGC that has been designed, constructed or tested to technical requirements or testing methods other
than those specified in this Chapter:
Portable tank means a multimodal tank used for the carriage of substances of Class 1 and Classes 3 to
9. The portable tank includes a shell fitted with service equipment and structural equipment necessary
for the carriage of dangerous substances. The portable tank shall be capable of being filled and
discharged without the removal of its structural equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members external
to the shell, and shall be capable of being lifted when full. It shall be designed primarily to be loaded
onto a vehicle, wagon or sea-going or inland navigation vessel and shall be equipped with skids,
mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling. Tank-vehicles, tank-wagons, non-metallic
tanks and intermediate bulk containers (IBCs) are not considered to fall within the definition for portable
tanks;
Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the substance intended for carriage (tank proper),
including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural
equipment;
– 429 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 430 –
Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety, heating, cooling
and insulating devices;
Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to
the shell;
Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that shall be not less than the highest
of the following pressures measured at the top of the shell while in operating position:
(a) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or
(b) The maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed which shall be not less
than the sum of:
(i) the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the substance at 65 °C, minus 1 bar; and
(ii) the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space being determined by
a maximum ullage temperature of 65 °C and a liquid expansion due to an increase in mean
bulk temperature of tr – tf (tf = filling temperature, usually 15 °C; tr = maximum mean bulk
temperature, 50 °C);
Design pressure means the pressure to be used in calculations required by a recognized pressure vessel
code. The design pressure shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures:
(a) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or
(b) The sum of:
(i) the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the substance at 65 °C, minus 1 bar;
(ii) the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space being determined by
a maximum ullage temperature of 65 °C and a liquid expansion due to an increase in mean
bulk temperature of tr – tf (tf = filling temperature usually 15 °C; tr = maximum mean bulk
temperature, 50 °C); and
(iii) a head pressure determined on the basis of the static forces specified in 6.7.2.2.12, but not
less than 0.35 bar; or
(c) Two thirds of the minimum test pressure specified in the applicable portable tank instruction
in 4.2.5.2.6;
Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the hydraulic pressure
test equal to not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The minimum test pressure for portable tanks
intended for specific substances is specified in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6;
Leakproofness test means a test using gas subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective
internal pressure of not less than 25 % of the MAWP;
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the
heaviest load authorized for carriage;
Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm² and an elongation at fracture of 27 %;
Mild steel means a steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 360 N/mm² to 440 N/mm² and
a guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.7.2.3.3.3;
Design temperature range for the shell shall be -40 °C to 50 °C for substances carried under ambient
conditions. For the other substances handled under elevated temperature conditions the design
temperature shall be not less than the maximum temperature of the substance during filling, discharge
or carriage. More severe design temperatures shall be considered for portable tanks subjected to severe
climatic conditions;
Fine grain steel means steel which has a ferritic grain size of 6 or finer when determined in accordance
with ASTM E 112-96 or as defined in EN 10028-3, Part 3;
Fusible element means a non-reclosable pressure relief device that is thermally actuated;
– 430 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 431 –
Offshore portable tank means a portable tank specially designed for repeated use for carriage to, from
and between offshore facilities. An offshore portable tank is designed and constructed in accordance
with the guidelines for the approval of containers handled in open seas specified by the International
Maritime Organization in document MSC/Circ.860.
6.7.2.2 General design and construction requirements
6.7.2.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of a pressure vessel code
recognized by the competent authority. Shells shall be made of metallic materials suitable for forming.
The materials shall in principle conform to national or international material standards. For welded
shells only a material whose weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used. Welds shall be
skilfully made and afford complete safety. When the manufacturing process or the materials make it
necessary, the shells shall be suitably heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in
the heat affected zones. In choosing the material, the design temperature range shall be taken into
account with respect to risk of brittle fracture, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact.
When fine grain steel is used, the guaranteed value of the yield strength shall be not more than
460 N/mm² and the guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile strength shall be not more than
725 N/mm² according to the material specification. Aluminium may only be used as a construction
material when indicated in a portable tank special provision assigned to a specific substance in
Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 or when approved by the competent authority. When aluminium
is authorized, it shall be insulated to prevent significant loss of physical properties when subjected to a
heat load of 110 kW/m² for a period of not less than 30 minutes. The insulation shall remain effective
at all temperatures less than 649 °C and shall be jacketed with a material with a melting point of not
less than 700 °C. Portable tank materials shall be suitable for the external environment in which they
may be carried.
6.7.2.2.2 Portable tank shells, fittings, and pipework shall be constructed from materials which are:
(a) Substantially immune to attack by the substance(s) intended to be carried; or
(b) Properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction; or
(c) Lined with corrosion-resistant material directly bonded to the shell or attached by equivalent
means.
6.7.2.2.3 Gaskets shall be made of materials not subject to attack by the substance(s) intended to be carried.
6.7.2.2.4 When shells are lined, the lining shall be substantially immune to attack by the substance(s) intended to
be carried, homogeneous, non porous, free from perforations, sufficiently elastic and compatible with
the thermal expansion characteristics of the shell. The lining of every shell, shell fittings and piping
shall be continuous, and shall extend around the face of any flange. Where external fittings are welded
to the tank, the lining shall be continuous through the fitting and around the face of external flanges.
6.7.2.2.5 Joints and seams in the lining shall be made by fusing the material together or by other equally effective
means.
6.7.2.2.6 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided.
6.7.2.2.7 The materials of the portable tank, including any devices, gaskets, linings and accessories, shall not
adversely affect the substance(s) intended to be carried in the portable tank.
6.7.2.2.8 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during carriage
and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments.
6.7.2.2.9 Portable tanks shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due
to the contents, and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and
carriage. The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these
loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account.
6.7.2.2.9.1 For portable tanks that are intended for use offshore, the dynamic stresses imposed by handling in open
seas shall be taken into account.
6.7.2.2.10 A shell which is to be equipped with a vacuum-relief device shall be designed to withstand, without
permanent deformation, an external pressure of not less than 0.21 bar above the internal pressure. The
vacuum-relief device shall be set to relieve at a vacuum setting not greater than minus (-) 0.21 bar unless
– 431 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 432 –
the shell is designed for a higher external over pressure, in which case the vacuum-relief pressure of the
device to be fitted shall be not greater than the tank design vacuum pressure. A shell used for the carriage
of solid substances (powdery or granular) of packing groups II or III only, which do not liquefy during
carriage, may be designed for a lower external pressure, subject to the approval of the competent
authority. In this case, the vacuum valve shall be set to relieve at this lower pressure. A shell that is not
to be fitted with a vacuum-relief device shall be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation
an external pressure of not less than 0.4 bar above the internal pressure.
6.7.2.2.11 Vacuum-relief devices used on portable tanks intended for the carriage of substances meeting the flash-
point criteria of Class 3, including elevated temperature substances carried at or above their flash-point,
shall prevent the immediate passage of flame into the shell, or the portable tank shall have a shell capable
of withstanding, without leakage an internal explosion resulting from the passage of flame into the shell.
6.7.2.2.12 Portable tanks and their fastenings shall, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of absorbing
the following separately applied static forces:
(a) In the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1;
(b) Horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is
not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the
acceleration due to gravity (g)1;
(c) Vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1; and
(d) Vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied
by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1.
6.7.2.2.13 Under each of the forces in 6.7.2.2.12, the safety factor to be observed shall be as follows:
(a) For metals having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed
yield strength; or
(b) For metals with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed
0.2 % proof strength and, for austenitic steels, the 1 % proof strength.
6.7.2.2.14 The values of yield strength or proof strength shall be the values according to national or international
material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values of yield strength or
proof strength according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15 % when these greater
values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal
in question, the value of yield strength or proof strength used shall be approved by the competent
authority.
6.7.2.2.15 Portable tanks shall be capable of being electrically earthed when intended for the carriage of substances
meeting the flash-point criteria of Class 3 including elevated temperature substances carried at or above
their flash-point. Measures shall be taken to prevent dangerous electrostatic discharge.
6.7.2.2.16 When required for certain substances by the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in
Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 or by a portable tank special provision
indicated in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3, portable tanks shall be
provided with additional protection, which may take the form of additional shell thickness or a higher
test pressure, the additional shell thickness or higher test pressure being determined in the light of the
inherent risks associated with the carriage of the substances concerned.
6.7.2.2.17 Thermal insulation directly in contact with the shell intended for substances carried at elevated
temperature shall have an ignition temperature at least 50 °C higher than the maximum design
temperature of the tank.
6.7.2.3 Design criteria
6.7.2.3.1 Shells shall be of a design capable of being stress-analysed mathematically or experimentally by
resistance strain gauges, or by other methods approved by the competent authority.
1 For calculation purposes g = 9.81 m/s2.
– 432 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 433 –
6.7.2.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed to withstand a hydraulic test pressure not less than 1.5 times
the design pressure. Specific requirements are laid down for certain substances in the applicable portable
tank instruction indicated in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 or by a
portable tank special provision indicated in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in
4.2.5.3. Attention is drawn to the minimum shell thickness requirements specified in 6.7.2.4.1 to
6.7.2.4.10.
6.7.2.3.3 For metals exhibiting a clearly defined yield point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength
(0.2 % proof strength, generally, or 1 % proof strength for austenitic steels) the primary membrane
stress (sigma) in the shell shall not exceed 0.75 Re or 0.50 Rm, whichever is lower, at the test pressure,
where:
Re = yield strength in N/mm², or 0.2 % proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1 % proof
strength;
Rm = minimum tensile strength in N/mm².
6.7.2.3.3.1 The values of Re and Rm to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or
international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values for Re
and Rm according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15 % when greater values are
attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal in question,
the values of Re and Rm used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body.
6.7.2.3.3.2 Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio of more than 0.85 are not allowed for the construction of welded shells.
The values of Re and Rm to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material
inspection certificate.
6.7.2.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less
than 10 000/Rm with an absolute minimum of 16 % for fine grain steels and 20 % for other steels.
Aluminium and aluminium alloys used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture,
in %, of not less than 10 000/6Rm with an absolute minimum of 12 %.
6.7.2.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actual values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis
of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling. The
permanent elongation at fracture shall be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross sections in
accordance with ISO 6892:1998 using a 50 mm gauge length.
6.7.2.4 Minimum shell thickness
6.7.2.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the greater thickness based on:
(a) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with the requirements of 6.7.2.4.2
to 6.7.2.4.10;
(b) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with the recognized pressure vessel code
including the requirements in 6.7.2.3; and
(c) The minimum thickness specified in the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in Column
(10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6 or by a portable tank special provision
indicated in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3.
6.7.2.4.2 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of shells not more than 1.80 m in diameter
shall be not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used.
Shells more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 6 mm thick in the reference steel or of
equivalent thickness in the metal to be used, except that for powdered or granular solid substances of
packing group II or III the minimum thickness requirement may be reduced to not less than 5 mm thick
in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used.
6.7.2.4.3 When additional protection against shell damage is provided, portable tanks with test pressures less than
2.65 bar may have the minimum shell thickness reduced, in proportion to the protection provided, as
approved by the competent authority. However, shells not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not
less than 3 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Shells
more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 4 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent
thickness in the metal to be used.
– 433 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 434 –
6.7.2.4.4 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of all shells shall be not less than 3 mm thick
regardless of the material of construction.
6.7.2.4.5 The additional protection referred to in 6.7.2.4.3 may be provided by overall external structural
protection, such as suitable “sandwich” construction with the outer sheathing (jacket) secured to the
shell, double wall construction or by enclosing the shell in a complete framework with longitudinal and
transverse structural members.
6.7.2.4.6 The equivalent thickness of a metal other than the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6.7.2.4.2
shall be determined using the following formula:
where:
e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be used;
e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in the applicable portable
tank instruction indicated in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in
4.2.5.2.6 or by a portable tank special provision indicated in Column (11) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3;
Rm 1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm²) of the metal to be used (see 6.7.2.3.3);
A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to
national or international standards.
6.7.2.4.7 When in the applicable portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6, a minimum thickness of 8 mm or 10 mm
is specified, it shall be noted that these thicknesses are based on the properties of the reference steel and
a shell diameter of 1.80 m. When a metal other than mild steel (see 6.7.2.1) is used or the shell has a
diameter of more than 1.80 m, the thickness shall be determined using the following formula:
where:
e 1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be used;
e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in the applicable portable
tank instruction indicated in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in
4.2.5.2.6 or by a portable tank special provision indicated in Column (11) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3;
d 1 = diameter of the shell (in m), but not less than 1.80 m;
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm²) of the metal to be used (see 6.7.2.3.3);
A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to
national or international standards.
6.7.2.4.8 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than that prescribed in 6.7.2.4.2, 6.7.2.4.3 and 6.7.2.4.4. All
parts of the shell shall have a minimum thickness as determined by 6.7.2.4.2 to 6.7.2.4.4. This thickness
shall be exclusive of any corrosion allowance.
6.7.2.4.9 When mild steel is used (see 6.7.2.1), calculation using the formula in 6.7.2.4.6 is not required.
6.7.2.4.10 There shall be no sudden change of plate thickness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the
cylindrical portion of the shell.
3 11
o
1
ARm
21.4e
e
3 11
1o
1
ARm8,1
d21.4e
e
– 434 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 435 –
6.7.2.5 Service equipment
6.7.2.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or
damaged during handling and carriage. When the connection between the frame and the shell allows
relative movement between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such
movement without risk of damage to working parts. The external discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-
off devices), the internal stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being
wrenched off by external forces (for example using shear sections). The filling and discharge devices
(including flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against
unintended opening.
6.7.2.5.2 All openings in the shell, intended for filling or discharging the portable tank shall be fitted with a
manually operated stop-valve located as close to the shell as reasonably practicable. Other openings,
except for openings leading to venting or pressure-relief devices, shall be equipped with either a
stop-valve or another suitable means of closure located as close to the shell as reasonably practicable.
6.7.2.5.3 All portable tanks shall be fitted with a manhole or other inspection openings of a suitable size to allow
for internal inspection and adequate access for maintenance and repair of the interior. Compartmented
portable tanks shall have a manhole or other inspection openings for each compartment.
6.7.2.5.4 As far as reasonably practicable, external fittings shall be grouped together. For insulated portable tanks,
top fittings shall be surrounded by a spill collection reservoir with suitable drains.
6.7.2.5.5 Each connection to a portable tank shall be clearly marked to indicate its function.
6.7.2.5.6 Each stop-valve or other means of closure shall be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less
than the MAWP of the shell taking into account the temperatures expected during carriage. All
stop-valves with screwed spindles shall close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel. For other
stop-valves the position (open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated. All
stop-valves shall be designed to prevent unintentional opening.
6.7.2.5.7 No moving parts, such as covers, components of closures, etc., shall be made of unprotected corrodible
steel when they are liable to come into frictional or percussive contact with aluminium portable tanks
intended for the carriage of substances meeting the flash-point criteria of Class 3 including elevated
temperature substances carried at or above their flash-point.
6.7.2.5.8 Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal
expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. All piping shall be of a suitable metallic
material. Welded pipe joints shall be used wherever possible.
6.7.2.5.9 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong metal union. The melting point of
brazing materials shall be no lower than 525 °C. The joints shall not decrease the strength of the tubing
as may happen when cutting threads.
6.7.2.5.10 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fittings shall be not less than the highest of four times the
MAWP of the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a
pump or other device (except pressure-relief devices).
6.7.2.5.11 Ductile metals shall be used in the construction of valves and accessories.
6.7.2.5.12 The heating system shall be designed or controlled so that a substance cannot reach a temperature at
which the pressure in the tank exceeds its MAWP or causes other hazards (e.g. dangerous thermal
decomposition).
6.7.2.5.13 The heating system shall be designed or controlled so that power for internal heating elements shall not
be available unless the heating elements are completely submerged. The temperature at the surface of
the heating elements for internal heating equipment, or the temperature at the shell for external heating
equipment shall, in no case, exceed 80 % of the autoignition temperature (in °C) of the substance
carried.
6.7.2.5.14 If an electrical heating system is installed inside the tank, it shall be equipped with an earth leakage
circuit breaker with a releasing current of less than 100 mA.
6.7.2.5.15 Electrical switch cabinets mounted to tanks shall not have a direct connection to the tank interior and
shall provide protection of at least the equivalent of type IP56 according to IEC 144 or IEC 529.
– 435 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 436 –
6.7.2.6 Bottom openings
6.7.2.6.1 Certain substances shall not be carried in portable tanks with bottom openings. When the applicable
portable tank instruction identified in Column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6
indicates that bottom openings are prohibited there shall be no openings below the liquid level of the
shell when it is filled to its maximum permissible filling limit. When an existing opening is closed it
shall be accomplished by internally and externally welding one plate to the shell.
6.7.2.6.2 Bottom discharge outlets for portable tanks carrying certain solid, crystallizable or highly viscous
substances shall be equipped with not less than two serially fitted and mutually independent shut-off
devices. The design of the equipment shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its
authorized body and shall include:
(a) An external stop-valve, fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable, and so designed as
to prevent any unintended opening through impact or other inadvertent act; and
(b) A liquid tight closure at the end of the discharge pipe, which may be a bolted blank flange or a
screw cap.
6.7.2.6.3 Every bottom discharge outlet, except as provided in 6.7.2.6.2, shall be equipped with three serially
fitted and mutually independent shut-off devices. The design of the equipment shall be to the satisfaction
of the competent authority or its authorized body and include:
(a) A self-closing internal stop-valve, that is a stop-valve within the shell or within a welded flange
or its companion flange, such that:
(i) The control devices for the operation of the valve are designed so as to prevent any
unintended opening through impact or other inadvertent act;
(ii) The valve may be operable from above or below;
(iii) If possible, the setting of the valve (open or closed) shall be capable of being verified
from the ground;
(iv) Except for portable tanks having a capacity of not more than 1 000 litres, it shall be
possible to close the valve from an accessible position of the portable tank that is remote
from the valve itself; and
(v) The valve shall continue to be effective in the event of damage to the external device for
controlling the operation of the valve;
(b) An external stop-valve fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable; and
(c) A liquid tight closure at the end of the discharge pipe, which may be a bolted blank flange or a
screw cap.
6.7.2.6.4 For a lined shell, the internal stop-valve required by 6.7.2.6.3 (a) may be replaced by an additional
external stop-valve. The manufacturer shall satisfy the requirements of the competent authority or its
authorized body.
6.7.2.7 Safety-relief devices
6.7.2.7.1 All portable tanks shall be fitted with at least one pressure-relief device. All relief devices shall be
designed, constructed and marked to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body.
– 436 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 437 –
6.7.2.8 Pressure-relief devices
6.7.2.8.1 Every portable tank with a capacity not less than 1 900 litres and every independent compartment of a
portable tank with a similar capacity, shall be provided with one or more pressure-relief devices of the
spring-loaded type and may in addition have a frangible disc or fusible element in parallel with the
spring-loaded devices except when prohibited by reference to 6.7.2.8.3 in the applicable portable tank
instruction in 4.2.5.2.6. The pressure-relief devices shall have sufficient capacity to prevent rupture of
the shell due to over pressurization or vacuum resulting from filling, discharging, or from heating of the
contents.
6.7.2.8.2 Pressure-relief devices shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of liquid and
the development of any dangerous excess pressure.
6.7.2.8.3 When required for certain substances by the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in Column
(10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.2.6, portable tanks shall have a pressure-relief
device approved by the competent authority. Unless a portable tank in dedicated service is fitted with
an approved relief device constructed of materials compatible with the substance carried, the relief
device shall comprise a frangible disc preceding a spring-loaded pressure-relief device. When a
frangible disc is inserted in series with the required pressure-relief device, the space between the
frangible disc and the pressure-relief device shall be provided with a pressure gauge or suitable tell-tale
indicator for the detection of disc rupture, pinholing, or leakage which could cause a malfunction of the
pressure-relief system. The frangible disc shall rupture at a nominal pressure 10 % above the start to
discharge pressure of the relief device.
6.7.2.8.4 Every portable tank with a capacity less than 1 900 litres shall be fitted with a pressure-relief device
which may be a frangible disc when this disc complies with the requirements of 6.7.2.11.1. When no
spring-loaded pressure-relief device is used, the frangible disc shall be set to rupture at a nominal
pressure equal to the test pressure. In addition, fusible elements conforming to 6.7.2.10.1 may also be
used.
6.7.2.8.5 When the shell is fitted for pressure discharge, the inlet line shall be provided with a suitable
pressure-relief device set to operate at a pressure not higher than the MAWP of the shell, and a
stop-valve shall be fitted as close to the shell as reasonably practicable.
6.7.2.9 Setting of pressure-relief devices
6.7.2.9.1 It shall be noted that the pressure-relief devices shall operate only in conditions of excessive rise in
temperature, since the shell shall not be subject to undue fluctuations of pressure during normal
conditions of carriage (see 6.7.2.12.2).
6.7.2.9.2 The required pressure-relief device shall be set to start-to-discharge at a nominal pressure of five-sixths
of the test pressure for shells having a test pressure of not more than 4.5 bar and 110 % of two-thirds of
the test pressure for shells having a test pressure of more than 4.5 bar. After discharge the device shall
close at a pressure not more than 10 % below the pressure at which the discharge starts. The device shall
remain closed at all lower pressures. This requirement does not prevent the use of vacuum-relief or
combination pressure-relief and vacuum-relief devices.
6.7.2.10 Fusible elements
6.7.2.10.1 Fusible elements shall operate at a temperature between 100 °C and 149 °C on condition that the
pressure in the shell at the fusing temperature will be not more than the test pressure. They shall be
placed at the top of the shell with their inlets in the vapour space and when used for transport safety
purposes, they shall not be shielded from external heat. Fusible elements shall not be used on portable
tanks with a test pressure which exceeds 2.65 bar unless specified by special provision TP36 in Column
(11) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. Fusible elements used on portable tanks intended for the carriage of
elevated temperature substances shall be designed to operate at a temperature higher than the maximum
temperature that will be experienced during carriage and shall be to the satisfaction of the competent
authority or its authorized body.
6.7.2.11 Frangible discs
6.7.2.11.1 Except as specified in 6.7.2.8.3, frangible discs shall be set to rupture at a nominal pressure equal to the
test pressure throughout the design temperature range. Particular attention shall be given to the
requirements of 6.7.2.5.1 and 6.7.2.8.3 if frangible discs are used.
– 437 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 438 –
6.7.2.11.2 Frangible discs shall be appropriate for the vacuum pressures which may be produced in the portable
tank.
6.7.2.12 Capacity of pressure-relief devices
6.7.2.12.1 The spring-loaded pressure-relief device required by 6.7.2.8.1 shall have a minimum cross sectional
flow area equivalent to an orifice of 31.75 mm diameter. Vacuum-relief devices, when used, shall have
a cross sectional flow area not less than 284 mm².
6.7.2.12.2 The combined delivery capacity of the pressure relief system (taking into account the reduction of the
flow when the portable tank is fitted with frangible-discs preceding spring-loaded pressure-relief
devices or when the spring-loaded pressure-relief devices are provided with a device to prevent the
passage of the flame), in condition of complete fire engulfment of the portable tank shall be sufficient
to limit the pressure in the shell to 20 % above the start-to-discharge pressure of the pressure limiting
device. Emergency pressure-relief devices may be used to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed.
These devices may be fusible, spring loaded or frangible disc components, or a combination of spring-
loaded and frangible disc devices. The total required capacity of the relief devices may be determined
using the formula in 6.7.2.12.2.1 or the table in 6.7.2.12.2.3.
6.7.2.12.2.1 To determine the total required capacity of the relief devices, which shall be regarded as being the sum
of the individual capacities of all the contributing devices, the following formula shall be used:
where:
Q = minimum required rate of discharge in cubic metres of air per second (m³/s) at standard
conditions: 1 bar and 0 °C (273 K);
F = is a coefficient with the following value:
for uninsulated shells: F = 1;
for insulated shells: F = U(649 – t)/13.6 but in no case is less than 0.25
where:
U = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation, in kW.m-2
. K -1 , at 38 °C;
t = actual temperature of the substance during filling (in °C); when this
temperature is unknown, let t = 15 °C;
The value of F given above for insulated shells may be taken provided that the insulation is in
accordance with 6.7.2.12.2.4;
A = total external surface area of shell in m²;
Z = the gas compressibility factor in the accumulating condition (when this factor is unknown,
let Z =1.0);
T = absolute temperature in Kelvin (°C + 273) above the pressure-relief devices in the
accumulating condition;
L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liquid, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating condition;
M = molecular mass of the discharged gas;
C = a constant which is derived from one of the following formulae as a function of the ratio
k of specific heats:
M
ZT
LC
FA
12.4Q
0.82
v
p
c
c
k
– 438 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 439 –
where:
cp is the specific heat at constant pressure; and
cv is the specific heat at constant volume.
When k > 1:
When k = 1 or k is unknown:
where e is the mathematical constant 2.7183
C may also be taken from the following table:
k C k C k C
1.00 0.607 1.26 0.660 1.52 0.704
1.02 0.611 1.28 0.664 1.54 0.707
1.04 0.615 1.30 0.667 1.56 0.710
1.06 0.620 1.32 0.671 1.58 0.713
1.08 0.624 1.34 0.674 1.60 0.716
1.10 0.628 1.36 0.678 1.62 0.719
1.12 0.633 1.38 0.681 1.64 0.722
1.14 0.637 1.40 0.685 1.66 0.725
1.16 0.641 1.42 0.688 1.68 0.728
1.18 0.645 1.44 0.691 1.70 0.731
1.20 0.649 1.46 0.695 2.00 0.770
1.22 0.652 1.48 0.698 2.20 0.793
1.24 0.656 1.50 0.701
6.7.2.12.2.2 As an alternative to the formula above, shells designed for the carriage of liquids may have their relief
devices sized in accordance with the table in 6.7.2.12.2.3. This table assumes an insulation value of
F = 1 and shall be adjusted accordingly when the shell is insulated. Other values used in determining
this table are:
M = 86.7 T = 394 K
L = 334.94 kJ/kg C = 0.607
Z = 1
6.7.2.12.2.3 Minimum required rate of discharge, Q, in cubic metres per air per second at 1 bar and 0 °C (273 K)
A
Exposed area
(square metres)
Q
(cubic metres of
air per second)
A
Exposed area
(square metres)
Q
(cubic metres of
air per second)
2 0.230 37.5 2.539
3 0.320 40 2.677
4 0.405 42.5 2.814
5 0.487 45 2.949
6 0.565 47.5 3.082
7 0.641 50 3.215
8 0.715 52.5 3.346
9 0.788 55 3.476
1k
1k
1k
2
kC
607.0
e
1
C
– 439 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 440 –
A
Exposed area
(square metres)
Q
(cubic metres of
air per second)
A
Exposed area
(square metres)
Q
(cubic metres of
air per second)
10 0.859 57.5 3.605
12 0.998 60 3.733
14 1.132 62.5 3.860
16 1.263 65 3.987
18 1.391 67.5 4.112
20 1.517 70 4.236
22.5 1.670 75 4.483
25 1.821 80 4.726
27.5 1.969 85 4.967
30 2.115 90 5.206
32.5 2.258 95 5.442
35 2.400 100 5.676
6.7.2.12.2.4 Insulation systems, used for the purpose of reducing venting capacity, shall be approved by the
competent authority or its authorized body. In all cases, insulation systems approved for this purpose
shall:
(a) Remain effective at all temperatures up to 649 °C; and
(b) Be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 700 °C or greater.
6.7.2.13 Marking of pressure-relief devices
6.7.2.13.1 Every pressure-relief device shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following particulars:
(a) The pressure (in bar or kPa) or temperature (in °C) at which it is set to discharge;
(b) The allowable tolerance at the discharge pressure for spring-loaded devices;
(c) The reference temperature corresponding to the rated pressure for frangible discs;
(d) The allowable temperature tolerance for fusible elements; and
(e) The rated flow capacity of the spring-loaded pressure relief devices, frangible discs or fusible
elements in standard cubic metres of air per second (m³/s);
(f) The cross sectional flow areas of the spring loaded pressure-relief devices, frangible discs and
fusible elements in mm².
When practicable, the following information shall also be shown:
(g) The manufacturer’s name and relevant catalogue number of the device.
6.7.2.13.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the spring-loaded pressure-relief devices shall be determined
according to ISO 4126-1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004.
6.7.2.14 Connections to pressure-relief devices
6.7.2.14.1 Connections to pressure-relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass
unrestricted to the safety device. No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the
pressure-relief devices except where duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons
and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked
so that at least one of the duplicate devices is always in use. There shall be no obstruction in an opening
leading to a vent or pressure-relief device which might restrict or cut-off the flow from the shell to that
device. Vents or pipes from the pressure-relief device outlets, when used, shall deliver the relieved
vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving devices.
– 440 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 441 –
6.7.2.15 Siting of pressure-relief devices
6.7.2.15.1 Each pressure-relief device inlet shall be situated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal
and transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable. All pressure-relief device inlets shall under
maximum filling conditions be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so
arranged as to ensure the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly. For flammable substances, the
escaping vapour shall be directed away from the shell in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the
shell. Protective devices which deflect the flow of vapour are permissible provided the required relief-
device capacity is not reduced.
6.7.2.15.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent access to the pressure-relief devices by unauthorized persons
and to protect the devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning.
6.7.2.16 Gauging devices
6.7.2.16.1 Glass level-gauges and gauges made of other fragile material, which are in direct communication with
the contents of the tank shall not be used.
6.7.2.17 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments
6.7.2.17.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during
carriage. The forces specified in 6.7.2.2.12 and the safety factor specified in 6.7.2.2.13 shall be
considered in this aspect of the design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are
acceptable.
6.7.2.17.2 The combined stresses caused by portable tank mountings (e.g. cradles, framework, etc.) and portable
tank lifting and tie-down attachments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the shell.
Permanent lifting and tie-down attachments shall be fitted to all portable tanks. Preferably they shall be
fitted to the portable tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the shell at the
points of support.
6.7.2.17.3 In the design of supports and frameworks the effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into
account.
6.7.2.17.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable of being closed off. The means of closing forklift pockets shall be a
permanent part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework. Single compartment
portable tanks with a length less than 3.65 m need not have closed off forklift pockets provided that:
(a) The shell including all the fittings are well protected from being hit by the forklift blades; and
(b) The distance between the centres of the forklift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of
the portable tank.
6.7.2.17.5 When portable tanks are not protected during carriage, according to 4.2.1.2, the shells and service
equipment shall be protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral
or longitudinal impact or overturning. External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release
of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings. Examples of
protection include:
(a) Protection against lateral impact which may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on
both sides at the level of the median line;
(b) Protection of the portable tank against overturning which may consist of reinforcement rings or
bars fixed across the frame;
(c) Protection against rear impact which may consist of a bumper or frame;
(d) Protection of the shell against damage from impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in
accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995.
6.7.2.18 Design approval
6.7.2.18.1 The competent authority or its authorized body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new
design of a portable tank. This certificate shall attest that a portable tank has been surveyed by that
authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the requirements of this Chapter and where
– 441 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 442 –
appropriate, the provisions for substances provided in Chapter 4.2 and in Table A of Chapter 3.2.
When a series of portable tanks are manufactured without change in the design, the certificate shall be
valid for the entire series. The certificate shall refer to the prototype test report, the substances or group
of substances allowed to be carried, the materials of construction of the shell and lining (when
applicable) and an approval number. The approval number shall consist of the distinguishing sign or
mark of the State in whose territory the approval was granted, indicated by the distinguishing sign used
on vehicles in international road traffic2, and a registration number. Any alternative arrangements
according to 6.7.1.2 shall be indicated on the certificate. A design approval may serve for the approval
of smaller portable tanks made of materials of the same kind and thickness, by the same fabrication
techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances.
6.7.2.18.2 The prototype test report for the design approval shall include at least the following:
(a) The results of the applicable framework test specified in ISO 1496-3:1995;
(b) The results of the initial inspection and test according to 6.7.2.19.3; and
(c) The results of the impact test in 6.7.2.19.1, when applicable.
6.7.2.19 Inspection and testing
6.7.2.19.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of container in the International Convention for Safe Containers
(CSC), 1972, as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a
representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the
Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part IV, Section 41.
6.7.2.19.2 The shell and items of equipment of each portable tank shall be inspected and tested before being put
into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year
intervals (5 year periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2.5 year
periodic inspection and test) midway between the 5 year periodic inspections and tests. The 2.5 year
inspection and test may be performed within 3 months of the specified date. An exceptional inspection
and test shall be performed regardless of the date of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary
according to 6.7.2.19.7.
6.7.2.19.3 The initial inspection and test of a portable tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an
internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the substances
to be carried, and a pressure test. Before the portable tank is placed into service, a leakproofness test
and a check of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed. When the
shell and its fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly
to a leakproofness test.
6.7.2.19.4 The 5-year periodic inspection and test shall include an internal and external examination and, as a
general rule, a hydraulic pressure test. For tanks only used for the carriage of solid substances, other
than toxic or corrosive substances that do not liquefy during carriage, the hydraulic pressure test may
be replaced by a suitable pressure test at 1.5 times the MAWP, subject to competent authority approval.
Sheathing, thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable
appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. When the shell and equipment have been pressure-tested
separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test.
6.7.2.19.5 The intermediate 2.5 year periodic inspection and test shall at least include an internal and external
examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the substances intended to be carried,
a leakproofness test and a check of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment. Sheathing,
thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the
condition of the portable tank. For portable tanks intended for the carriage of a single substance, the 2.5
year internal examination may be waived or substituted by other test methods or inspection procedures
specified by the competent authority or its authorized body.
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 442 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 443 –
6.7.2.19.6 Inspection and test of portable tanks and filling after the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection
and test
6.7.2.19.6.1 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last 5 year or
2.5 year periodic inspection and test as required by 6.7.2.19.2. However, a portable tank filled prior to
the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test may be carried for a period not to exceed three
months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In addition, a portable tank may
be carried after the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection:
(a) After emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or
inspection prior to refilling; and
(b) Unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months
beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of
dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be
mentioned in the transport document.
6.7.2.19.6.2 Except as provided for in 6.7.2.19.6.1, portable tanks which have missed the timeframe for their
scheduled 5 year or 2.5-year periodic inspection and test may only be filled and offered for carriage if
a new 5-year periodic inspection and test is performed according to 6.7.2.19.4.
6.7.2.19.7 The exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or
corroded areas, or leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity
of the portable tank. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test shall depend on the amount of
damage or deterioration of the portable tank. It shall include at least the 2.5 year inspection and test
according to 6.7.2.19.5.
6.7.2.19.8 The internal and external examinations shall ensure that:
(a) The shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or
any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for carriage.
The wall thickness shall be verified by appropriate measurement if this inspection indicates a
reduction of wall thickness;
(b) The piping, valves, heating/cooling system, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects,
or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for filling,
discharge or carriage;
(c) Devices for tightening manhole covers are operative and there is no leakage at manhole covers
or gaskets;
(d) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or
tightened;
(e) All emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect
that could prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves
shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation;
(f) Linings, if any, are inspected in accordance with criteria outlined by the lining manufacturer;
(g) Required marks on the portable tank are legible and in accordance with the applicable
requirements; and
(h) The framework, supports and arrangements for lifting the portable tank are in a satisfactory
condition.
6.7.2.19.9 The inspections and tests in 6.7.2.19.1, 6.7.2.19.3, 6.7.2.19.4, 6.7.2.19.5 and 6.7.2.19.7 shall be
performed or witnessed by an expert approved by the competent authority or its authorized body.
When the pressure test is a part of the inspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on
the data plate of the portable tank. While under pressure, the portable tank shall be inspected for any
leaks in the shell, piping or equipment.
6.7.2.19.10 In all cases when cutting, burning or welding operations on the shell have been effected, that work shall
be to the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body taking into account the pressure
– 443 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 444 –
vessel code used for the construction of the shell. A pressure test to the original test pressure shall be
performed after the work is completed.
6.7.2.19.11 When evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service
until it has been corrected and the test is repeated and passed. .
6.7.2.20 Marking
6.7.2.20.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corrosion resistant metal plate permanently attached to the
portable tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection. When for reasons of portable tank
arrangements the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at
least the information required by the pressure vessel code. As a minimum, at least the following
information shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method:
(a) Owner information
(i) Owner’s registration number;
(b) Manufacturing information
(i) Country of manufacture;
(ii) Year of manufacture;
(iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark;
(iv) Manufacturer’s serial number;
(c) Approval information
(i) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a
flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant
requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11;
(ii) Approval country;
(iii) Authorized body for the design approval;
(iv) Design approval number;
(v) Letters ‘AA’, if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6.7.1.2);
(vi) Pressure vessel code to which the shell is designed;
(d) Pressures
(i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3;
(ii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3;
(iii) Initial pressure test date (month and year);
(iv) Identification mark of the initial pressure test witness;
(v) External design pressure4 (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3;
(vi) MAWP for heating/cooling system (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3 (when applicable);
3 The unit used shall be indicated.
4 See 6.7.2.2.10.
– 444 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 445 –
(e) Temperatures
(i) Design temperature range (in °C)3;
(f) Materials
(i) Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s);
(ii) Equivalent thickness in reference steel (in mm)3;
(iii) Lining material (when applicable);
(g) Capacity
(i) Tank water capacity at 20 °C (in litres)3;
This indication is to be followed by the symbol “S” when the shell is divided by surge
plates into sections of not more than 7 500 litres capacity;
(ii) Water capacity of each compartment at 20 °C (in litres)3 (when applicable, for multi-
compartment tanks).
This indication is to be followed by the symbol “S” when the compartment is divided by
surge plates into sections of not more than 7 500 litres capacity;
(h) Periodic inspections and tests
(i) Type of the most recent periodic test (2.5-year, 5-year or exceptional);
(ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month and year);
(iii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3 of the most recent periodic test (if applicable);
(iv) Identification mark of the authorized body who performed or witnessed the most recent
test.
3 The unit used shall be indicated.
– 445 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 446 –
Figure 6.7.2.20.1: Example of a plate for marking
Owner’s registration number
MANUFACTURING INFORMATION
Country of manufacture
Year of manufacture
Manufacturer
Manufacturer’s serial number
APPROVAL INFORMATION
Approval country
Authorized body for design approval
Design approval number ‘AA’ (if applicable)
Shell design code (pressure vessel code)
PRESSURES
MAWP bar or kPa
Test pressure bar or kPa
Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp:
External design pressure bar or kPa
MAWP for heating/cooling system
(when applicable) bar or kPa
TEMPERATURES
Design temperature range °C to °C
MATERIALS
Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s)
Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm
Lining material (when applicable)
CAPACITY
Tank water capacity at 20 °C litres ‘S’ (if applicable)
Water capacity of compartment at 20 °C (when
applicable, for multi-compartment tanks) litres ‘S’ (if applicable)
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS / TESTS
Test type Test date Witness stamp and
test pressurea Test type Test date Witness stamp and
test pressurea
(mm/yyyy) bar or kPa (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa
a Test pressure if applicable.
6.7.2.20.2 The following particulars shall be durably marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate
firmly secured to the portable tank:
Name of the operator
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) ___________ kg
Unladen (tare) mass ___________ kg
Portable tank instruction in accordance with 4.2.5.2.6
NOTE: For the identification of the substances being carried, see also Part 5.
6.7.2.20.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved for handling in open seas, the words “OFFSHORE
PORTABLE TANK” shall be marked on the identification plate.
– 446 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 447 –
6.7.3 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for
the carriage of non-refrigerated liquefied gases
NOTE: These requirements also apply to portable tanks intended for the carriage of chemicals under
pressure (UN Nos. 3500, 3501, 3502, 3503, 3504 and 3505).
6.7.3.1 Definitions
For the purposes of this section:
Alternative arrangement means an approval granted by the competent authority for a portable tank or
MEGC that has been designed, constructed or tested to technical requirements or testing methods other
than those specified in this Chapter;
Portable tank means a multimodal tank having a capacity of more than 450 litres used for the carriage
of non-refrigerated liquefied gases of Class 2. The portable tank includes a shell fitted with service
equipment and structural equipment necessary for the carriage of gases. The portable tank shall be
capable of being filled and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment. It shall possess
stabilizing members external to the shell, and shall be capable of being lifted when full. It shall be
designed primarily to be loaded onto a vehicle, wagon or sea-going or inland navigation vessel and shall
be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling. Tank-vehicles, tank-
wagons, non-metallic tanks, intermediate bulk containers (IBCs), gas cylinders and large receptacles
are not considered to fall within the definition for portable tanks;
Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the non-refrigerated liquefied gas intended for
carriage (tank proper), including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or
external structural equipment;
Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety and insulating
devices;
Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to
the shell;
Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that shall be not less than the highest
of the following pressures measured at the top of the shell while in operating position, but in no case
less than 7 bar:
(a) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or
(b) The maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed, which shall be:
(i) for a non-refrigerated liquefied gas listed in the portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6,
the MAWP (in bar) given in T50 portable tank instruction for that gas;
(ii) for other non-refrigerated liquefied gases, not less than the sum of:
– the absolute vapour pressure (in bar) of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas at the
design reference temperature minus 1 bar; and
– the partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the ullage space being determined
by the design reference temperature and the liquid phase expansion due to an
increase of the mean bulk temperature of tr -tf (tf = filling temperature, usually 15 °C,
tr = maximum mean bulk temperature, 50 °C);
(iii) for chemicals under pressure, the MAWP (in bar) given in T50 portable tank instruction
for the liquefied gas portion of the propellants listed in T50 in 4.2.5.2.6;
Design pressure means the pressure to be used in calculations required by a recognized pressure vessel
code. The design pressure shall be not less than the highest of the following pressures:
(a) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during filling or discharge; or
(b) The sum of:
– 447 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 448 –
(i) the maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is designed as defined in (b) of
the MAWP definition (see above); and
(ii) a head pressure determined on the basis of the static forces specified in 6.7.3.2.9, but not
less than 0.35 bar;
Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the pressure test;
Leakproofness test means a test using gas subjecting the shell and its service equipment to an effective
internal pressure of not less than 25 % of the MAWP;
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the
heaviest load authorized for carriage;
Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm² and an elongation at fracture of 27 %;
Mild steel means a steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 360 N/mm² to 440 N/mm² and
a guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.7.3.3.3.3;
Design temperature range for the shell shall be -40 °C to 50 °C for non-refrigerated liquefied gases
carried under ambient conditions. More severe design temperatures shall be considered for portable
tanks subjected to severe climatic conditions;
Design reference temperature means the temperature at which the vapour pressure of the contents is
determined for the purpose of calculating the MAWP. The design reference temperature shall be less
than the critical temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas or liquefied gas propellants of
chemicals under pressure intended to be carried to ensure that the gas at all times is liquefied. This value
for each portable tank type is as follows:
(a) Shell with a diameter of 1.5 metres or less: 65 °C;
(b) Shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 metres:
(i) without insulation or sun shield: 60 °C;
(ii) with sun shield (see 6.7.3.2.12): 55 °C; and
(iii) with insulation (see 6.7.3.2.12) : 50 °C;
Filling density means the average mass of non-refrigerated liquefied gas per litre of shell capacity (kg/l).
The filling density is given in portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6.
6.7.3.2 General design and construction requirements
6.7.3.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of a pressure vessel code
recognized by the competent authority. Shells shall be made of steel suitable for forming. The materials
shall in principle conform to national or international material standards. For welded shells, only a
material whose weldability has been fully demonstrated shall be used. Welds shall be skilfully made
and afford complete safety. When the manufacturing process or the materials make it necessary, the
shells shall be suitability heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat
affected zones. In choosing the material the design temperature range shall be taken into account with
respect to risk of brittle fracture, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact. When fine
grain steel is used, the guaranteed value of the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm² and the
guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm² according
to the material specification. Portable tank materials shall be suitable for the external environment in
which they may be carried.
6.7.3.2.2 Portable tank shells, fittings and pipework shall be constructed of materials which are:
(a) Substantially immune to attack by the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended to be
carried; or
(b) Properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction.
6.7.3.2.3 Gaskets shall be made of materials compatible with the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended to
be carried.
– 448 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 449 –
6.7.3.2.4 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided.
6.7.3.2.5 The materials of the portable tank, including any devices, gaskets, and accessories, shall not adversely
affect the non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) intended for carriage in the portable tank.
6.7.3.2.6 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during carriage
and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments.
6.7.3.2.7 Portable tanks shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due
to the contents, and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and
carriage. The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these
loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account.
6.7.3.2.8 Shells shall be designed to withstand an external pressure of at least 0.4 bar (gauge pressure) above the
internal pressure without permanent deformation. When the shell is to be subjected to a significant
vacuum before filling or during discharge it shall be designed to withstand an external pressure of at
least 0.9 bar (gauge pressure) above the internal pressure and shall be proven at that pressure.
6.7.3.2.9 Portable tanks and their fastenings shall, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of absorbing
the following separately applied static forces:
(a) In the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1;
(b) Horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is
not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the
acceleration due to gravity (g)1;
(c) Vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1; and
(d) Vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied
by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1.
6.7.3.2.10 Under each of the forces in 6.7.3.2.9, the safety factor to be observed shall be as follows:
(a) For steels having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed
yield strength; or
(b) For steels with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed
0.2 % proof strength and, for austenitic steels, the 1 % proof strength.
6.7.3.2.11 The values of yield strength or proof strength shall be the values according to national or international
material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values of yield strength and
proof strength according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15 % when these greater
values are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the steel
in question, the value of yield strength or proof strength used shall be approved by the competent
authority.
6.7.3.2.12 When the shells intended for the carriage of non-refrigerated liquefied gases are equipped with thermal
insulation, the thermal insulation systems shall satisfy the following requirements:
(a) It shall consist of a shield covering not less than the upper third but not more than the upper half
of the surface of the shell and separated from the shell by an air space about 40 mm across;
(b) It shall consist of a complete cladding of adequate thickness of insulating materials protected so
as to prevent the ingress of moisture and damage under normal conditions of carriage and so as
to provide a heat transfer coefficient of not more than 0.67 (W.m-2 .K -1 );
(c) When the protective covering is so closed as to be gas-tight, a device shall be provided to prevent
any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in the event of inadequate gas
tightness of the shell or of its items of equipment; and
(d) The thermal insulation shall not inhibit access to the fittings and discharge devices.
1 For calculation purposes g = 9.81 m/s2.
– 449 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 450 –
6.7.3.2.13 Portable tanks intended for the carriage of flammable non-refrigerated liquefied gases shall be capable
of being electrically earthed.
6.7.3.3 Design criteria
6.7.3.3.1 Shells shall be of a circular cross-section.
6.7.3.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed to withstand a test pressure not less than 1.3 times the design
pressure. The shell design shall take into account the minimum MAWP values provided in portable tank
instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6 for each non-refrigerated liquefied gas intended for carriage. Attention is
drawn to the minimum shell thickness requirements for these shells specified in 6.7.3.4.
6.7.3.3.3 For steels exhibiting a clearly defined yield point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength (0.2 %
proof strength, generally, or 1 % proof strength for austenitic steels) the primary membrane stress
(sigma) in the shell shall not exceed 0.75 Re or 0.50 Rm, whichever is lower, at the test pressure, where:
Re = yield strength in N/mm², or 0.2 % proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1 % proof stress;
Rm = minimum tensile strength in N/mm².
6.7.3.3.3.1 The values of Re and Rm to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or
international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values for Re
and Rm according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15 % when these greater values
are attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the steel in
question, the values of Re and Rm used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized
body.
6.7.3.3.3.2 Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio of more than 0.85 are not allowed for the construction of welded shells.
The values of Re and Rm to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material
inspection certificate.
6.7.3.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less
than 10 000/Rm with an absolute minimum of 16 % for fine grain steels and 20 % for other steels.
6.7.3.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actual values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis
of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling. The
permanent elongation at fracture shall be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross sections in
accordance with ISO 6892:1998 using a 50 mm gauge length.
6.7.3.4 Minimum shell thickness
6.7.3.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the greater thickness based on:
(a) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with the requirements in 6.7.3.4; and
(b) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with the recognized pressure vessel code
including the requirements in 6.7.3.3.
In addition, any relevant portable tank special provision indicated in Column (11) of Table A of Chapter
3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3 shall be taken into account.
6.7.3.4.2 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of shells of not more than 1.80 m in diameter
shall be not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the steel to be used.
Shells of more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 6 mm thick in the reference steel or of
equivalent thickness in the steel to be used.
6.7.3.4.3 The cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of all shells shall be not less than 4 mm thick
regardless of the material of construction.
6.7.3.4.4 The equivalent thickness of a steel other than the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6.7.3.4.2
shall be determined using the following formula:
1
3 1
o
1 ARm
e4,21
e
– 450 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 451 –
where:
e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the steel to be used;
e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) for the reference steel specified in 6.7.3.4.2;
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm²) of the steel to be used (see 6.7.3.3.3);
A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the steel to be used according to
national or international standards.
6.7.3.4.5 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than that prescribed in 6.7.3.4.1 to 6.7.3.4.3. All parts of the
shell shall have a minimum thickness as determined by 6.7.3.4.1 to 6.7.3.4.3. This thickness shall be
exclusive of any corrosion allowance.
6.7.3.4.6 When mild steel is used (see 6.7.3.1), calculation using the formula in 6.7.3.4.4 is not required.
6.7.3.4.7 There shall be no sudden change of plate thickness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the
cylindrical portion of the shell.
6.7.3.5 Service equipment
6.7.3.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or
damaged during handling and carriage. When the connection between the frame and the shell allows
relative movement between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such
movement without risk of damage to working parts. The external discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-
off devices), the internal stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being
wrenched off by external forces (for example using shear sections). The filling and discharge devices
(including flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against
unintended opening.
6.7.3.5.2 All openings with a diameter of more than 1.5 mm in shells of portable tanks, except openings for
pressure-relief devices, inspection openings and closed bleed holes, shall be fitted with at least three
mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first being an internal stop-valve, excess flow valve
or equivalent device, the second being an external stop-valve and the third being a blank flange or
equivalent device.
6.7.3.5.2.1 When a portable tank is fitted with an excess flow valve, the excess flow valve shall be so fitted that its
seating is inside the shell or inside a welded flange or, when fitted externally, its mountings shall be
designed so that in the event of impact its effectiveness shall be maintained. The excess flow valves
shall be selected and fitted so as to close automatically when the rated flow specified by the
manufacturer is reached. Connections and accessories leading to or from such a valve shall have a
capacity for a flow more than the rated flow of the excess flow valve.
6.7.3.5.3 For filling and discharge openings, the first shut-off device shall be an internal stop-valve and the second
shall be a stop-valve placed in an accessible position on each discharge and filling pipe.
6.7.3.5.4 For filling and discharge bottom openings of portable tanks intended for the carriage of flammable
and/or toxic non-refrigerated liquefied gases or chemicals under pressure the internal stop-valve shall
be a quick closing safety device which closes automatically in the event of unintended movement of the
portable tank during filling or discharge or fire engulfment. Except for portable tanks having a capacity
of not more than 1 000 litres, it shall be possible to operate this device by remote control.
6.7.3.5.5 In addition to filling, discharge and gas pressure equalizing orifices, shells may have openings in which
gauges, thermometers and manometers can be fitted. Connections for such instruments shall be made
by suitable welded nozzles or pockets and not be screwed connections through the shell.
6.7.3.5.6 All portable tanks shall be fitted with manholes or other inspection openings of suitable size to allow
for internal inspection and adequate access for maintenance and repair of the interior.
– 451 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 452 –
6.7.3.5.7 External fittings shall be grouped together so far as reasonably practicable.
6.7.3.5.8 Each connection on a portable tank shall be clearly marked to indicate its function.
6.7.3.5.9 Each stop-valve or other means of closure shall be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less
than the MAWP of the shell taking into account the temperatures expected during carriage. All
stop-valves with a screwed spindle shall close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel.
For other stop-valves the position (open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated.
All stop-valves shall be designed to prevent unintentional opening.
6.7.3.5.10 Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal
expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. All piping shall be of suitable metallic
material. Welded pipe joints shall be used wherever possible.
6.7.3.5.11 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong metal union. The melting point of
brazing materials shall be no lower than 525 °C. The joints shall not decrease the strength of tubing as
may happen when cutting threads.
6.7.3.5.12 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fittings shall be not less than the highest of four times the
MAWP of the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a
pump or other device (except pressure-relief devices).
6.7.3.5.13 Ductile metals shall be used in the construction of valves and accessories.
6.7.3.6 Bottom openings
6.7.3.6.1 Certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases shall not be carried in portable tanks with bottom openings
when portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6 indicates that bottom openings are not allowed. There
shall be no openings below the liquid level of the shell when it is filled to its maximum permissible
filling limit.
6.7.3.7 Pressure-relief devices
6.7.3.7.1 Portable tanks shall be provided with one or more spring-loaded pressure-relief devices. The pressure-
relief devices shall open automatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully open at a
pressure equal to 110 % of the MAWP. These devices shall, after discharge, close at a pressure not
lower than 10 % below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower
pressures. The pressure-relief devices shall be of a type that will resist dynamic forces including liquid
surge. Frangible discs not in series with a spring-loaded pressure-relief device are not permitted.
6.7.3.7.2 Pressure-relief devices shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and
the development of any dangerous excess pressure.
6.7.3.7.3 Portable tanks intended for the carriage of certain non-refrigerated liquefied gases identified in portable
tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6 shall have a pressure-relief device approved by the competent authority.
Unless a portable tank in dedicated service is fitted with an approved relief device constructed of
materials compatible with the load, such device shall comprise a frangible disc preceding a spring-
loaded device. The space between the frangible disc and the device shall be provided with a pressure
gauge or a suitable tell-tale indicator. This arrangement permits the detection of disc rupture, pinholing
or leakage which could cause a malfunction of the pressure-relief device. The frangible discs shall
rupture at a nominal pressure 10 % above the start-to-discharge pressure of the relief device.
6.7.3.7.4 In the case of multi-purpose portable tanks, the pressure-relief devices shall open at a pressure indicated
in 6.7.3.7.1 for the gas having the highest maximum allowable pressure of the gases allowed to be
carried in the portable tank.
6.7.3.8 Capacity of relief devices
6.7.3.8.1 The combined delivery capacity of the relief devices shall be sufficient that, in the event of total fire
engulfment, the pressure (including accumulation) inside the shell does not exceed 120 % of the
MAWP. Spring-loaded relief devices shall be used to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed. In the
case of multi-purpose tanks, the combined delivery capacity of the pressure-relief devices shall be taken
for the gas which requires the highest delivery capacity of the gases allowed to be carried in portable
tanks.
– 452 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 453 –
6.7.3.8.1.1 To determine the total required capacity of the relief devices, which shall be regarded as being the sum
of the individual capacities of the several devices, the following formula shall be used:
where:
Q = minimum required rate of discharge in cubic metres of air per second (m³/s) at standard
conditions: 1 bar and 0 °C (273 K);
F = is a coefficient with the following value:
for uninsulated shells: F = 1;
for insulated shells: F = U(649-t)/13.6 but in no case is less than 0.25
where:
U = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation, in kW.m-2
.K -1 , at 38 °C;
t = actual temperature of the non-refrigerated liquefied gas during filling (°C);
when this temperature is unknown, let t=15 °C;
The value of F given above for insulated shells may be taken provided that the insulation
is in accordance with 6.7.3.8.1.2;
where:
A = total external surface area of shell in square metres;
Z = the gas compressibility factor in the accumulating condition (when this
factor is unknown, let Z =1.0);
T = absolute temperature in Kelvin (°C + 273) above the pressure relief devices
in the accumulating condition;
L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liquid, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating
condition;
M = molecular mass of the discharged gas;
C = a constant which is derived from one of the following formulae as a
function of the ratio k of specific heats
where
cp is the specific heat at constant pressure; and
cv is the specific heat at constant volume.
when k > 1:
M
ZT
LC
FA
12.4Q
0.82
v
p
c
c
k
1k
1k
1k
2
kC
– 453 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 454 –
when k = 1 or k is unknown:
where e is the mathematical constant 2.7183
C may also be taken from the following table:
k C k C k C
1.00 0.607 1.26 0.660 1.52 0.704
1.02 0.611 1.28 0.664 1.54 0.707
1.04 0.615 1.30 0.667 1.56 0.710
1.06 0.620 1.32 0.671 1.58 0.713
1.08 0.624 1.34 0.674 1.60 0.716
1.10 0.628 1.36 0.678 1.62 0.719
1.12 0.633 1.38 0.681 1.64 0.722
1.14 0.637 1.40 0.685 1.66 0.725
1.16 0.641 1.42 0.688 1.68 0.728
1.18 0.645 1.44 0.691 1.70 0.731
1.20 0.649 1.46 0.695 2.00 0.770
1.22 0.652 1.48 0.698 2.20 0.793
1.24 0.656 1.50 0.701
NOTE: This formula applies only to non-refrigerated liquefied gases which have critical temperatures
well above the temperature at the accumulating condition. For gases which have critical temperatures
near or below the temperature at the accumulating condition, the calculation of the pressure-relief
device delivery capacity shall consider further thermodynamic properties of the gas (see, e.g. CGA S-
1.2-2003 Pressure Relief Device Standards – Part 2 – Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed
Gases).
6.7.3.8.1.2 Insulation systems, used for the purpose of reducing the venting capacity, shall be approved by the
competent authority or its authorized body. In all cases, insulation systems approved for this purpose
shall:
(a) Remain effective at all temperatures up to 649 °C; and
(b) Be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 700 °C or greater.
6.7.3.9 Marking of pressure-relief devices
6.7.3.9.1 Every pressure-relief device shall be plainly and permanently marked with the following particulars:
(a) The pressure (in bar or kPa) at which it is set to discharge;
(b) The allowable tolerance at the discharge pressure for spring-loaded devices;
(c) The reference temperature corresponding to the rated pressure for frangible discs;
(d) The rated flow capacity of the device in standard cubic metres of air per second (m³/s); and
(e) The cross sectional flow areas of the spring loaded pressure-relief devices and frangible discs in
mm².
When practicable, the following information shall also be shown:
(f) The manufacturer’s name and relevant catalogue number of the device.
6.7.3.9.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the pressure-relief devices shall be determined according to
ISO 4126-1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004.
607.0
e
1
C
– 454 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 455 –
6.7.3.10 Connections to pressure-relief devices
6.7.3.10.1 Connections to pressure-relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass
unrestricted to the safety device. No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the pressure-
relief devices except when duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons and the stop-
valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked so that at
least one of the duplicate devices is always operable and capable of meeting the requirements of 6.7.3.8.
There shall be no obstruction in an opening leading to a vent or pressure-relief device which might
restrict or cut-off the flow from the shell to that device. Vents from the pressure-relief devices, when
used, shall deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-
pressure on the relieving device.
6.7.3.11 Siting of pressure-relief devices
6.7.3.11.1 Each pressure-relief device inlet shall be situated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal
and transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable. All pressure relief device inlets shall under
maximum filling conditions be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so
arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly. For flammable non-
refrigerated liquefied gases, the escaping vapour shall be directed away from the shell in such a manner
that it cannot impinge upon the shell. Protective devices which deflect the flow of vapour are
permissible provided the required relief-device capacity is not reduced.
6.7.3.11.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent access to the pressure-relief devices by unauthorized persons
and to protect the devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning.
6.7.3.12 Gauging devices
6.7.3.12.1 Unless a portable tank is intended to be filled by weight it shall be equipped with one or more gauging
devices. Glass level-gauges and gauges made of other fragile material, which are in direct
communication with the contents of the shell shall not be used.
6.7.3.13 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments
6.7.3.13.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during
carriage. The forces specified in 6.7.3.2.9 and the safety factor specified in 6.7.3.2.10 shall be
considered in this aspect of the design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are
acceptable.
6.7.3.13.2 The combined stresses caused by portable tank mountings (e.g. cradles, frameworks, etc.) and portable
tank lifting and tie-down attachments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the shell.
Permanent lifting and tie-down attachments shall be fitted to all portable tanks. Preferably they shall be
fitted to the portable tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the shell at the
points of support.
6.7.3.13.3 In the design of supports and frameworks the effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into
account.
6.7.3.13.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable of being closed off. The means of closing forklift pockets shall be a
permanent part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework. Single compartment
portable tanks with a length less than 3.65 m need not have closed off forklift pockets provided that:
(a) The shell and all the fittings are well protected from being hit by the forklift blades; and
(b) The distance between the centres of the forklift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of
the portable tank.
6.7.3.13.5 When portable tanks are not protected during carriage, according to 4.2.2.3, the shells and service
equipment shall be protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral
or longitudinal impact or overturning. External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release
of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings. Examples of
protection include:
(a) Protection against lateral impact which may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on
both sides at the level of the median line;
– 455 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 456 –
(b) Protection of the portable tank against overturning which may consist of reinforcement rings or
bars fixed across the frame;
(c) Protection against rear impact which may consist of a bumper or frame;
(d) Protection of the shell against damage from impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in
accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995.
6.7.3.14 Design approval
6.7.3.14.1 The competent authority or its authorized body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new
design of a portable tank. This certificate shall attest that a portable tank has been surveyed by that
authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the requirements of this Chapter and where
appropriate the provisions for gases provided in portable tank instruction T50 in 4.2.5.2.6. When a series
of portable tanks are manufactured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the
entire series. The certificate shall refer to the prototype test report, the gases allowed to be carried, the
materials of construction of the shell and an approval number. The approval number shall consist of the
distinguishing sign or mark of the State in whose territory the approval was granted, indicated by the
distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic2, and a registration number. Any
alternative arrangements according to 6.7.1.2 shall be indicated on the certificate. A design approval
may serve for the approval of smaller portable tanks made of materials of the same kind and thickness,
by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent closures and other
appurtenances.
6.7.3.14.2 The prototype test report for the design approval shall include at least the following:
(a) The results of the applicable framework test specified in ISO 1496-3:1995;
(b) The results of the initial inspection and test in 6.7.3.15.3; and
(c) The results of the impact test in 6.7.3.15.1, when applicable.
6.7.3.15 Inspection and testing
6.7.3.15.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of container in the International Convention for Safe Containers
(CSC), 1972, as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a
representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the
Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part IV, Section 41.
6.7.3.15.2 The shell and items of equipment of each portable tank shall be inspected and tested before being put
into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year
intervals (5 year periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2.5 year
periodic inspection and test) midway between the 5 year periodic inspections and tests. The 2.5 year
inspection and test may be performed within 3 months of the specified date. An exceptional inspection
and test shall be performed regardless of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according
to 6.7.3.15.7.
6.7.3.15.3 The initial inspection and test of a portable tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an
internal and external examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the non-
refrigerated liquefied gases to be carried, and a pressure test referring to the test pressures according to
6.7.3.3.2. The pressure test may be performed as a hydraulic test or by using another liquid or gas with
the agreement of the competent authority or its authorized body. Before the portable tank is placed into
service, a leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also
be performed. When the shell and its fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be
subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test. All welds subject to full stress level in the
shell shall be inspected during the initial test by radiographic, ultrasonic, or another suitable non-
destructive test method. This does not apply to the jacket.
6.7.3.15.4 The 5 year periodic inspection and test shall include an internal and external examination and, as a
general rule, a hydraulic pressure test. Sheathing, thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 456 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 457 –
to the extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. When the shell and
equipment have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to a
leakproofness test.
6.7.3.15.5 The intermediate 2.5 year periodic inspection and test shall at least include an internal and external
examination of the portable tank and its fittings with due regard to the non-refrigerated liquefied gases
intended to be carried, a leakproofness test and a check of the satisfactory operation of all service
equipment. Sheathing thermal insulation and the like shall be removed only to the extent required for
reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. For portable tanks intended for the carriage of a
single non-refrigerated liquefied gas, the 2.5 year internal examination may be waived or substituted by
other test methods or inspection procedures specified by the competent authority or its authorized body.
6.7.3.15.6 Inspection and test of portable tanks and filling after the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection
and test
6.7.3.15.6.1 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last 5 year or
2.5 year periodic inspection and test as required by 6.7.3.15.2. However a portable tank filled prior to
the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test may be carried for a period not to exceed three
months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In addition, a portable tank may
be carried after the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection:
(a) After emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or
inspection prior to refilling; and
(b) Unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months
beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of
dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be
mentioned in the transport document.
6.7.3.15.6.2 Except as provided for in 6.7.3.15.6.1, portable tanks which have missed the timeframe for their
scheduled 5 year or 2.5-year periodic inspection and test may only be filled and offered for carriage if
a new 5-year periodic inspection and test is performed according to 6.7.3.15.4.
6.7.3.15.7 The exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or
corroded areas, or leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity
of the portable tank. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test shall depend on the amount of
damage or deterioration of the portable tank. It shall include at least the 2.5 year inspection and test
according to 6.7.3.15.5.
6.7.3.15.8 The internal and external examinations shall ensure that:
(a) The shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or
any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for carriage.
The wall thickness shall be verified by appropriate measurement if this inspection indicates a
reduction of wall thickness;
(b) The piping, valves, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, or any other conditions,
including leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or carriage;
(c) Devices for tightening manhole covers are operative and there is no leakage at manhole covers
or gaskets;
(d) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or
tightened;
(e) All emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect
that could prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves
shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation;
(f) Required marks on the portable tank are legible and in accordance with the applicable
requirements; and
(g) The framework, the supports and the arrangements for lifting the portable tank are in satisfactory
condition.
– 457 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 458 –
6.7.3.15.9 The inspections and tests in 6.7.3.15.1, 6.7.3.15.3, 6.7.3.15.4, 6.7.3.15.5 and 6.7.3.15.7 shall be
performed or witnessed by an expert approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. When
the pressure test is a part of the inspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the
data plate of the portable tank. While under pressure, the portable tank shall be inspected for any leaks
in the shell, piping or equipment.
6.7.3.15.10 In all cases when cutting, burning or welding operations on the shell have been effected, that work shall
be to the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body taking into account the pressure
vessel code used for the construction of the shell. A pressure test to the original test pressure shall be
performed after the work is completed.
6.7.3.15.11 When evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service
until it has been corrected and the pressure test is repeated and passed.
6.7.3.16 Marking
6.7.3.16.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corrosion resistant metal plate permanently attached to the
portable tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection. When for reasons of portable tank
arrangements the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at
least the information required by the pressure vessel code. As a minimum, at least the following
information shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method:
(a) Owner information
(i) Owner’s registration number;
(b) Manufacturing information
(i) Country of manufacture;
(ii) Year of manufacture;
(iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark;
(iv) Manufacturer’s serial number;
(c) Approval information
(i) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a
flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant
requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11;
(ii) Approval country;
(iii) Authorized body for the design approval;
(iv) Design approval number;
(v) Letters ‘AA’, if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6.7.1.2);
(vi) Pressure vessel code to which the shell is designed;
(d) Pressures
(i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3;
(ii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3;
(iii) Initial pressure test date (month and year);
3 The unit used shall be indicated.
– 458 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 459 –
(iv) Identification mark of the initial pressure test witness;
(v) External design pressure5 (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3;
(e) Temperatures
(i) Design temperature range (in °C)3;
(ii) Design reference temperature (in °C)3;
(f) Materials
(i) Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s);
(ii) Equivalent thickness in reference steel (in mm)3;
(g) Capacity
(i) Tank water capacity at 20 °C (in litres)3;
(h) Periodic inspections and tests
(i) Type of the most recent periodic test (2.5-year, 5-year or exceptional);
(ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month and year);
(iii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3 of the most recent periodic test (if applicable);
(iv) Identification mark of the authorized body who performed or witnessed the most recent
test.
5 See 6.7.3.2.8.
3 The unit used shall be indicated.
– 459 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 460 –
Figure 6.7.3.16.1: Example of a plate for marking
Owner’s registration number
MANUFACTURING INFORMATION
Country of manufacture
Year of manufacture
Manufacturer
Manufacturer’s serial number
APPROVAL INFORMATION
Approval country
Authorized body for design approval
Design approval number ‘AA’ (if applicable)
Shell design code (pressure vessel code)
PRESSURES
MAWP bar or kPa
Test pressure bar or kPa
Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp:
External design pressure bar or kPa
TEMPERATURES
Design temperature range °C to °C
Design reference temperature °C
MATERIALS
Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s)
Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm
CAPACITY
Tank water capacity at 20 °C litres
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS / TESTS
Test type Test date Witness stamp and
test pressurea Test type Test date Witness stamp and
test pressurea
(mm/yyyy) bar or kPa (mm/yyyy) bar or kPa
a Test pressure if applicable.
6.7.3.16.2 The following information shall be durably marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate
firmly secured to the portable tank:
Name of the operator
Name of non-refrigerated liquefied gas(es) permitted for carriage
Maximum permissible load mass for each non-refrigerated liquefied gas permitted ________kg
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM)__________kg
Unladen (tare) mass_________kg
Portable tank instruction in accordance with 4.2.5.2.6
NOTE: For the identification of the non-refrigerated liquefied gases being carried, see also Part 5.
6.7.3.16.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved for handling in open seas, the words “OFFSHORE
PORTABLE TANK” shall be marked on the identification plate.
– 460 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 461 –
6.7.4 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for
the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases
6.7.4.1 Definitions
For the purposes of this section:
Alternative arrangement means an approval granted by the competent authority for a portable tank or
MEGC that has been designed, constructed or tested to technical requirements or testing methods other
than those specified in this Chapter;
Portable tank means a thermally insulated multimodal tank having a capacity of more than 450 litres
fitted with service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the carriage of refrigerated
liquefied gases. The portable tank shall be capable of being filled and discharged without the removal
of its structural equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members external to the tank, and shall be capable
of being lifted when full. It shall be designed primarily to be loaded onto a vehicle, wagon or sea-going
or inland navigation vessel and shall be equipped with skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate
mechanical handling. Tank-vehicles, tank-wagons, non-metallic tanks, intermediate bulk containers
(IBCs), gas cylinders and large receptacles are not considered to fall within the definition for portable
tanks;
Tank means a construction which normally consists of either :
(a) A jacket and one or more inner shells where the space between the shell(s) and the jacket is
exhausted of air (vacuum insulation) and may incorporate a thermal insulation system; or
(b) A jacket and an inner shell with an intermediate layer of solid thermally insulating material (e.g.
solid foam);
Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the refrigerated liquefied gas intended for
carriage, including openings and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external
structural equipment;
Jacket means the outer insulation cover or cladding which may be part of the insulation system;
Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting, safety, pressurizing,
cooling and thermal insulation devices;
Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to
the shell;
Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means the maximum effective gauge pressure
permissible at the top of the shell of a loaded portable tank in its operating position including the highest
effective pressure during filling and discharge;
Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the shell during the pressure test;
Leakproofness test means a test using gas subjecting the shell and its service equipment, to an effective
internal pressure not less than 90 % of the MAWP;
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the portable tank and the
heaviest load authorized for carriage;
Holding time means the time that will elapse from the establishment of the initial filling condition until
the pressure has risen due to heat influx to the lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting device(s);
Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm² and an elongation at fracture of 27 %;
Minimum design temperature means the temperature which is used for the design and construction of
the shell not higher than the lowest (coldest) temperature (service temperature) of the contents during
normal conditions of filling, discharge and carriage.
– 461 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 462 –
6.7.4.2 General design and construction requirements
6.7.4.2.1 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of a pressure vessel code
recognized by the competent authority. Shells and jackets shall be made of metallic materials suitable
for forming. Jackets shall be made of steel. Non-metallic materials may be used for the attachments and
supports between the shell and jacket, provided their material properties at the minimum design
temperature are proven to be sufficient. The materials shall in principle conform to national or
international material standards. For welded shells and jackets only materials whose weldability has
been fully demonstrated shall be used. Welds shall be skilfully made and afford complete safety. When
the manufacturing process or the materials make it necessary, the shell shall be suitably heat treated to
guarantee adequate toughness in the weld and in the heat affected zones. In choosing the material, the
minimum design temperature shall be taken into account with respect to risk of brittle fracture, to
hydrogen embrittlement, to stress corrosion cracking and to resistance to impact. When fine grain steel
is used, the guaranteed value of the yield strength shall be not more than 460 N/mm² and the guaranteed
value of the upper limit of the tensile strength shall be not more than 725 N/mm² in accordance with the
material specifications. Portable tank materials shall be suitable for the external environment in which
they may be carried.
6.7.4.2.2 Any part of a portable tank, including fittings, gaskets and pipe-work, which can be expected normally
to come into contact with the refrigerated liquefied gas carried shall be compatible with that refrigerated
liquefied gas.
6.7.4.2.3 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided.
6.7.4.2.4 The thermal insulation system shall include a complete covering of the shell(s) with effective insulating
materials. External insulation shall be protected by a jacket so as to prevent the ingress of moisture and
other damage under normal carriage conditions.
6.7.4.2.5 When a jacket is so closed as to be gas-tight, a device shall be provided to prevent any dangerous
pressure from developing in the insulation space.
6.7.4.2.6 Portable tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases having a boiling point below
minus (-) 182 °C at atmospheric pressure shall not include materials which may react with oxygen or
oxygen enriched atmospheres in a dangerous manner, when located in parts of the thermal insulation
when there is a risk of contact with oxygen or with oxygen enriched fluid.
6.7.4.2.7 Insulating materials shall not deteriorate unduly in service.
6.7.4.2.8 A reference holding time shall be determined for each refrigerated liquefied gas intended for carriage
in a portable tank.
6.7.4.2.8.1 The reference holding time shall be determined by a method recognized by the competent authority on
the basis of the following:
(a) The effectiveness of the insulation system, determined in accordance with 6.7.4.2.8.2;
(b) The lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting device(s);
(c) The initial filling conditions;
(d) An assumed ambient temperature of 30 °C;
(e) The physical properties of the individual refrigerated liquefied gas intended to be carried.
6.7.4.2.8.2 The effectiveness of the insulation system (heat influx in watts) shall be determined by type testing the
portable tank in accordance with a procedure recognized by the competent authority. This test shall
consist of either:
(a) A constant pressure test (for example at atmospheric pressure) when the loss of refrigerated
liquefied gas is measured over a period of time; or
(b) A closed system test when the rise in pressure in the shell is measured over a period of time.
– 462 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 463 –
When performing the constant pressure test, variations in atmospheric pressure shall be taken into
account. When performing either tests corrections shall be made for any variation of the ambient
temperature from the assumed ambient temperature reference value of 30 °C.
NOTE: For the determination of the actual holding time before each journey, refer to 4.2.3.7.
6.7.4.2.9 The jacket of a vacuum-insulated double-wall tank shall have either an external design pressure not less
than 100 kPa (1 bar) (gauge pressure) calculated in accordance with a recognized technical code or a
calculated critical collapsing pressure of not less than 200 kPa (2 bar) (gauge pressure). Internal and
external reinforcements may be included in calculating the ability of the jacket to resist the external
pressure.
6.7.4.2.10 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure base during carriage
and with suitable lifting and tie-down attachments.
6.7.4.2.11 Portable tanks shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due
to the contents, and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and
carriage. The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these
loads through the expected life of the portable tank, have been taken into account.
6.7.4.2.12 Portable tanks and their fastenings under the maximum permissible load shall be capable of absorbing
the following separately applied static forces:
(a) In the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1;
(b) Horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is
not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the
acceleration due to gravity (g)1;
(c) Vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1; and
(d) Vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied
by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1.
6.7.4.2.13 Under each of the forces in 6.7.4.2.12, the safety factor to be observed shall be as follows:
(a) For materials having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the
guaranteed yield strength; and
(b) For materials with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the
guaranteed 0.2 % proof strength or, in case of austenitic steels, the 1 % proof strength.
6.7.4.2.14 The values of yield strength or proof strength shall be the values according to national or international
material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values according to the
material standards may be increased by up to 15 % when greater values are attested in the material
inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal in question, or when non-metallic
materials are used the values of yield strength or proof strength shall be approved by the competent
authority.
6.7.4.2.15 Portable tanks intended for the carriage of flammable refrigerated liquefied gases shall be capable of
being electrically earthed.
6.7.4.3 Design criteria
6.7.4.3.1 Shells shall be of a circular cross section.
6.7.4.3.2 Shells shall be designed and constructed to withstand a test pressure not less than 1.3 times the MAWP.
For shells with vacuum insulation the test pressure shall not be less than 1.3 times the sum of the MAWP
and 100 kPa (1 bar). In no case shall the test pressure be less than 300 kPa (3 bar) (gauge pressure).
Attention is drawn to the minimum shell thickness requirements, specified in 6.7.4.4.2 to 6.7.4.4.7.
6.7.4.3.3 For metals exhibiting a clearly defined yield point or characterized by a guaranteed proof strength
(0.2 % proof strength, generally, or 1 % proof strength for austenitic steels) the primary membrane stress
1 For calculation purposes g = 9.81 m/s2.
– 463 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 464 –
(sigma) in the shell shall not exceed 0.75 Re or 0.50 Rm, whichever is lower, at the test pressure,
where:
Re = yield strength in N/mm², or 0.2 % proof strength or, for austenitic steels, 1 % proof
strength;
Rm = minimum tensile strength in N/mm².
6.7.4.3.3.1 The values of Re and Rm to be used shall be the specified minimum values according to national or
international material standards. When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values for Re
and Rm according to the material standards may be increased by up to 15 % when greater values are
attested in the material inspection certificate. When no material standard exists for the metal in question,
the values of Re and Rm used shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body.
6.7.4.3.3.2 Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio of more than 0.85 are not allowed for the construction of welded shells.
The values of Re and Rm to be used in determining this ratio shall be the values specified in the material
inspection certificate.
6.7.4.3.3.3 Steels used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture, in %, of not less
than 10 000/Rm with an absolute minimum of 16 % for fine grain steels and 20 % for other steels.
Aluminium and aluminium alloys used in the construction of shells shall have an elongation at fracture,
in %, of not less than 10 000/6Rm with an absolute minimum of 12 %.
6.7.4.3.3.4 For the purpose of determining actual values for materials, it shall be noted that for sheet metal, the axis
of the tensile test specimen shall be at right angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling. The
permanent elongation at fracture shall be measured on test specimens of rectangular cross sections in
accordance with ISO 6892:1988 using a 50 mm gauge length.
6.7.4.4 Minimum shell thickness
6.7.4.4.1 The minimum shell thickness shall be the greater thickness based on:
(a) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with the requirements in 6.7.4.4.2
to 6.7.4.4.7; or
(b) The minimum thickness determined in accordance with the recognized pressure vessel code
including the requirements in 6.7.4.3.
6.7.4.4.2 Shells of not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 5 mm thick in the reference steel or of
equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Shells of more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less
than 6 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used.
6.7.4.4.3 Shells of vacuum-insulated tanks of not more than 1.80 m in diameter shall be not less than 3 mm thick
in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Such shells of more than 1.80
m in diameter shall be not less than 4 mm thick in the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the
metal to be used.
6.7.4.4.4 For vacuum-insulated tanks, the aggregate thickness of the jacket and the shell shall correspond to the
minimum thickness prescribed in 6.7.4.4.2, the thickness of the shell itself being not less than the
minimum thickness prescribed in 6.7.4.4.3.
6.7.4.4.5 Shells shall be not less than 3 mm thick regardless of the material of construction.
6.7.4.4.6 The equivalent thickness of a metal other than the thickness prescribed for the reference steel in 6.7.4.4.2
and 6.7.4.4.3 shall be determined using the following formula:
where:
e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be used;
e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in 6.7.4.4.2 and 6.7.4.4.3;
3 11
o
1
ARm
e4.21
e
– 464 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 465 –
Rm 1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm²) of the metal to be used (see 6.7.4.3.3);
A 1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the metal to be used according to
national or international standards.
6.7.4.4.7 In no case shall the wall thickness be less than that prescribed in 6.7.4.4.1 to 6.7.4.4.5. All parts of the
shell shall have a minimum thickness as determined by 6.7.4.4.1 to 6.7.4.4.6. This thickness shall be
exclusive of any corrosion allowance.
6.7.4.4.8 There shall be no sudden change of plate thickness at the attachment of the ends (heads) to the
cylindrical portion of the shell.
6.7.4.5 Service equipment
6.7.4.5.1 Service equipment shall be so arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off or
damaged during handling and carriage. When the connection between the frame and the tank or the
jacket and the shell allows relative movement, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such
movement without risk of damage to working parts. The external discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-
off devices), the stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off
by external forces (for example using shear sections). The filling and discharge devices (including
flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended
opening.
6.7.4.5.2 Each filling and discharge opening in portable tanks used for the carriage of flammable refrigerated
liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least three mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first
being a stop-valve situated as close as reasonably practicable to the jacket, the second being a stop-valve
and the third being a blank flange or equivalent device. The shut-off device closest to the jacket shall
be a quick closing device, which closes automatically in the event of unintended movement of the
portable tank during filling or discharge or fire engulfment. This device shall also be possible to operate
by remote control.
6.7.4.5.3 Each filling and discharge opening in portable tanks used for the carriage of non-flammable refrigerated
liquefied gases shall be fitted with at least two mutually independent shut-off devices in series, the first
being a stop-valve situated as close as reasonably practicable to the jacket, the second a blank flange or
equivalent device.
6.7.4.5.4 For sections of piping which can be closed at both ends and where liquid product can be trapped, a
method of automatic pressure relief shall be provided to prevent excess pressure build-up within the
piping.
6.7.4.5.5 Vacuum insulated tanks need not have an opening for inspection.
6.7.4.5.6 External fittings shall be grouped together so far as reasonably practicable.
6.7.4.5.7 Each connection on a portable tank shall be clearly marked to indicate its function.
6.7.4.5.8 Each stop-valve or other means of closure shall be designed and constructed to a rated pressure not less
than the MAWP of the shell taking into account the temperature expected during carriage. All stop-
valves with a screwed spindle shall be closed by a clockwise motion of the handwheel. In the case of
other stop-valves the position (open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated. All
stop-valves shall be designed to prevent unintentional opening.
6.7.4.5.9 When pressure-building units are used, the liquid and vapour connections to that unit shall be provided
with a valve as close to the jacket as reasonably practicable to prevent the loss of contents in case of
damage to the pressure-building unit.
6.7.4.5.10 Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal
expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. All piping shall be of a suitable material.
To prevent leakage due to fire, only steel piping and welded joints shall be used between the jacket and
the connection to the first closure of any outlet. The method of attaching the closure to this connection
shall be to the satisfaction of the competent authority or its authorized body. Elsewhere pipe joints shall
be welded when necessary.
– 465 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 466 –
6.7.4.5.11 Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong metal union. The melting point of
brazing materials shall be no lower than 525 °C. The joints shall not decrease the strength of the tubing
as may happen when cutting threads.
6.7.4.5.12 The materials of construction of valves and accessories shall have satisfactory properties at the lowest
operating temperature of the portable tank.
6.7.4.5.13 The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fittings shall be not less than the highest of four times the
MAWP of the shell or four times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action of a
pump or other device (except pressure-relief devices).
6.7.4.6 Pressure-relief devices
6.7.4.6.1 Every shell shall be provided with not less than two independent spring-loaded pressure-relief devices.
The pressure-relief devices shall open automatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and be fully
open at a pressure equal to 110 % of the MAWP. These devices shall, after discharge, close at a pressure
not lower than 10 % below the pressure at which discharge starts and shall remain closed at all lower
pressures. The pressure-relief devices shall be of the type that will resist dynamic forces including surge.
6.7.4.6.2 Shells for non-flammable refrigerated liquefied gases and hydrogen may in addition have frangible discs
in parallel with the spring-loaded devices as specified in 6.7.4.7.2 and 6.7.4.7.3.
6.7.4.6.3 Pressure-relief devices shall be designed to prevent the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and
the development of any dangerous excess pressure.
6.7.4.6.4 Pressure-relief devices shall be approved by the competent authority or its authorized body.
6.7.4.7 Capacity and setting of pressure-relief devices
6.7.4.7.1 In the case of the loss of vacuum in a vacuum-insulated tank or of loss of 20 % of the insulation of a
tank insulated with solid materials, the combined capacity of all pressure-relief devices installed shall
be sufficient so that the pressure (including accumulation) inside the shell does not exceed 120 % of the
MAWP.
6.7.4.7.2 For non-flammable refrigerated liquefied gases (except oxygen) and hydrogen, this capacity may be
achieved by the use of frangible discs in parallel with the required safety-relief devices. Frangible discs
shall rupture at nominal pressure equal to the test pressure of the shell.
6.7.4.7.3 Under the circumstances described in 6.7.4.7.1 and 6.7.4.7.2 together with complete fire engulfment the
combined capacity of all pressure-relief devices installed shall be sufficient to limit the pressure in the
shell to the test pressure.
6.7.4.7.4 The required capacity of the relief devices shall be calculated in accordance with a well-established
technical code recognized by the competent authority6.
6.7.4.8 Marking of pressure-relief devices
6.7.4.8.1 Every pressure-relief device shall be plainly and permanently marked with the following particulars:
(a) The pressure (in bar or kPa) at which it is set to discharge;
(b) The allowable tolerance at the discharge pressure for spring-loaded devices;
(c) The reference temperature corresponding to the rated pressure for frangible discs;
(d) The rated flow capacity of the device in standard cubic meters of air per second (m³/s); and
(e) The cross sectional flow areas of the spring loaded pressure-relief devices and frangible discs in
mm².
When practicable, the following information shall also be shown:
6 See for example CGA S-1.2-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards – Part 2 – Cargo and Portable Tanks for
Compressed Gases”.
– 466 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 467 –
(f) The manufacturer’s name and relevant catalogue number of the device.
6.7.4.8.2 The rated flow capacity marked on the pressure-relief devices shall be determined according to
ISO 4126-1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004.
6.7.4.9 Connections to pressure-relief devices
6.7.4.9.1 Connections to pressure-relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass
unrestricted to the safety device. No stop-valve shall be installed between the shell and the pressure-
relief devices except when duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons and the stop-
valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open or the stop-valves are interlocked so that the
requirements of 6.7.4.7 are always fulfilled. There shall be no obstruction in an opening leading to a
vent or pressure-relief device which might restrict or cut-off the flow from the shell to that device.
Pipework to vent the vapour or liquid from the outlet of the pressure-relief devices, when used, shall
deliver the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the
relieving device.
6.7.4.10 Siting of pressure-relief devices
6.7.4.10.1 Each pressure-relief device inlet shall be situated on top of the shell in a position as near the longitudinal
and transverse centre of the shell as reasonably practicable. All pressure-relief device inlets shall under
maximum filling conditions be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so
arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly. For refrigerated liquefied
gases, the escaping vapour shall be directed away from the tank and in such a manner that it cannot
impinge upon the tank. Protective devices which deflect the flow of vapour are permissible provided
the required relief-device capacity is not reduced.
6.7.4.10.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent access to the devices by unauthorized persons and to protect the
devices from damage caused by the portable tank overturning.
6.7.4.11 Gauging devices
6.7.4.11.1 Unless a portable tank is intended to be filled by weight, it shall be equipped with one or more gauging
devices. Glass level-gauges and gauges made of other fragile material, which are in direct
communication with the contents of the shell shall not be used.
6.7.4.11.2 A connection for a vacuum gauge shall be provided in the jacket of a vacuum-insulated portable tank.
6.7.4.12 Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments
6.7.4.12.1 Portable tanks shall be designed and constructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during
carriage. The forces specified in 6.7.4.2.12 and the safety factor specified in 6.7.4.2.13 shall be
considered in this aspect of the design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are
acceptable.
6.7.4.12.2 The combined stresses caused by portable tank mountings (e.g. cradles, frameworks, etc.) and portable
tank lifting and tie-down attachments shall not cause excessive stress in any portion of the tank.
Permanent lifting and tie-down attachments shall be fitted to all portable tanks. Preferably they shall be
fitted to the portable tank supports but may be secured to reinforcing plates located on the tank at the
points of support.
6.7.4.12.3 In the design of supports and frameworks the effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into
account.
6.7.4.12.4 Forklift pockets shall be capable of being closed off. The means of closing forklift pockets shall be a
permanent part of the framework or permanently attached to the framework. Single compartment
portable tanks with a length less than 3.65 m need not have closed off forklift pockets provided that:
(a) The tank and all the fittings are well protected from being hit by the forklift blades; and
(b) The distance between the centres of the forklift pockets is at least half of the maximum length of
the portable tank.
6.7.4.12.5 When portable tanks are not protected during carriage, according to 4.2.3.3, the shells and service
equipment shall be protected against damage to the shell and service equipment resulting from lateral
– 467 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 468 –
or longitudinal impact or overturning. External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release
of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings. Examples of
protection include:
(a) Protection against lateral impact which may consist of longitudinal bars protecting the shell on
both sides at the level of the median line;
(b) Protection of the portable tank against overturning which may consist of reinforcement rings or
bars fixed across the frame;
(c) Protection against rear impact which may consist of a bumper or frame;
(d) Protection of the shell against damage from impact or overturning by use of an ISO frame in
accordance with ISO 1496-3:1995;
(e) Protection of the portable tank from impact or overturning by a vacuum insulation jacket.
6.7.4.13 Design approval
6.7.4.13.1 The competent authority or its authorized body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new
design of a portable tank. This certificate shall attest that a portable tank has been surveyed by that
authority, is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the requirements of this Chapter. When a series
of portable tanks are manufactured without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the
entire series. The certificate shall refer to the prototype test report, the refrigerated liquefied gases
allowed to be carried, the materials of construction of the shell and jacket and an approval number. The
approval number shall consist of the distinguishing sign or mark of the State in whose territory the
approval was granted, indicated by the distinguishing sign for use in international road traffic2, and a
registration number. Any alternative arrangements according to 6.7.1.2 shall be indicated on the
certificate. A design approval may serve for the approval of smaller portable tanks made of materials of
the same kind and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with identical supports, equivalent
closures and other appurtenances.
6.7.4.13.2 The prototype test report for the design approval shall include at least the following:
(a) The results of the applicable frame-work test specified in ISO 1496-3:1995;
(b) The results of the initial inspection and test in 6.7.4.14.3; and
(c) The results of the impact test in 6.7.4.14.1, when applicable.
6.7.4.14 Inspection and testing
6.7.4.14.1 Portable tanks meeting the definition of container in the International Convention for Safe Containers
(CSC), 1972, as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a
representative prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the
Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part IV, Section 41.
6.7.4.14.2 The tank and items of equipment of each portable tank shall be inspected and tested before being put
into service for the first time (initial inspection and test) and thereafter at not more than five-year
intervals (5 year periodic inspection and test) with an intermediate periodic inspection and test (2.5 year
periodic inspection and test) midway between the 5 year periodic inspections and tests. The 2.5 year
inspection and test may be performed within 3 months of the specified date. An exceptional inspection
and test shall be performed regardless of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according
to 6.7.4.14.7.
6.7.4.14.3 The initial inspection and test of a portable tank shall include a check of the design characteristics, an
internal and external examination of the portable tank shell and its fittings with due regard to the
refrigerated liquefied gases to be carried, and a pressure test referring to the test pressures according to
6.7.4.3.2. The pressure test may be performed as a hydraulic test or by using another liquid or gas with
the agreement of the competent authority or its authorized body. Before the portable tank is placed into
service, a leakproofness test and a check of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 468 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 469 –
be performed. When the shell and its fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be
subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test. All welds subject to full stress level shall be
inspected during the initial test by radiographic, ultrasonic, or another suitable non-destructive test
method. This does not apply to the jacket.
6.7.4.14.4 The 5 and 2.5 year periodic inspections and tests shall include an external examination of the portable
tank and its fittings with due regard to the refrigerated liquefied gases carried, a leakproofness test, a
check of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment and a vacuum reading, when applicable. In
the case of non-vacuum insulated tanks, the jacket and insulation shall be removed during the 2.5 year
and the 5 year periodic inspections and tests but only to the extent necessary for a reliable appraisal.
6.7.4.14.5 (Deleted)
6.7.4.14.6 Inspection and test of portable tanks and filling after the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection
and test
6.7.4.14.6.1 A portable tank may not be filled and offered for carriage after the date of expiry of the last 5 year or
2.5 year periodic inspection and test as required by 6.7.4.14.2. However a portable tank filled prior to
the date of expiry of the last periodic inspection and test may be carried for a period not to exceed three
months beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection. In addition, a portable tank may
be carried after the date of expiry of the last periodic test and inspection:
(a) After emptying but before cleaning, for purposes of performing the next required test or
inspection prior to refilling; and
(b) Unless otherwise approved by the competent authority, for a period not to exceed six months
beyond the date of expiry of the last periodic test or inspection, in order to allow the return of
dangerous goods for proper disposal or recycling. Reference to this exemption shall be
mentioned in the transport document.
6.7.4.14.6.2 Except as provided for in 6.7.4.14.6.1, portable tanks which have missed the timeframe for their
scheduled 5 year or 2.5-year periodic inspection and test may only be filled and offered for carriage if
a new 5-year periodic inspection and test is performed according to 6.7.4.14.4.
6.7.4.14.7 The exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the portable tank shows evidence of damaged or
corroded areas, leakage, or any other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity
of the portable tank. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test shall depend on the amount of
damage or deterioration of the portable tank. It shall include at least the 2.5 year inspection and test
according to 6.7.4.14.4.
6.7.4.14.8 The internal examination during the initial inspection and test shall ensure that the shell is inspected for
pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions, that might
render the portable tank unsafe for carriage.
6.7.4.14.9 The external examination shall ensure that:
(a) The external piping, valves, pressurizing/cooling systems when applicable and gaskets are
inspected for corroded areas, defects, or any other conditions, including leakage, that might
render the portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or carriage;
(b) There is no leakage at any manhole covers or gaskets;
(c) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or
tightened;
(d) All emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect
that could prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves
shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation;
(e) Required marks on the portable tank are legible and in accordance with the applicable
requirements; and
(f) The framework, the supports and the arrangements for lifting the portable tank are in satisfactory
condition.
– 469 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 470 –
6.7.4.14.10 The inspections and tests in 6.7.4.14.1, 6.7.4.14.3, 6.7.4.14.4 and 6.7.4.14.7 shall be performed or
witnessed by an expert approved by the competent authority or its authorized body. When the pressure
test is a part of the inspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of
the portable tank. While under pressure, the portable tank shall be inspected for any leaks in the shell,
piping or equipment.
6.7.4.14.11 In all cases when cutting, burning or welding operations on the shell of a portable tank have been
effected, that work shall be to the approval of the competent authority or its authorized body taking into
account the pressure vessel code used for the construction of the shell. A pressure test to the original
test pressure shall be performed after the work is completed.
6.7.4.14.12 When evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the portable tank shall not be returned to service
until it has been corrected and the test is repeated and passed.
6.7.4.15 Marking
6.7.4.15.1 Every portable tank shall be fitted with a corrosion resistant metal plate permanently attached to the
portable tank in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection. When for reasons of portable tank
arrangements the plate cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell shall be marked with at
least the information required by the pressure vessel code. As a minimum, at least the following
information shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method:
(a) Owner information
(i) Owner’s registration number;
(b) Manufacturing information
(i) Country of manufacture;
(ii) Year of manufacture;
(iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark;
(iv) Manufacturer’s serial number;
(c) Approval information
(i) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a
flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant
requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11;
(ii) Approval country;
(iii) Authorized body for the design approval;
(iv) Design approval number;
(v) Letters ‘AA’, if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6.7.1.2);
(vi) Pressure vessel code to which the shell is designed;
(d) Pressures
(i) MAWP (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3;
(ii) Test pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3;
(iii) Initial pressure test date (month and year);
3 The unit used shall be indicated.
– 470 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 471 –
(iv) Identification mark of the initial pressure test witness;
(e) Temperatures
(i) Minimum design temperature (in °C)3;
(f) Materials
(i) Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s);
(ii) Equivalent thickness in reference steel (in mm)3;
(g) Capacity
(i) Tank water capacity at 20 °C (in litres)3;
(h) Insulation
(i) Either “Thermally insulated” or “Vacuum insulated” (as applicable);
(ii) Effectiveness of the insulation system (heat influx) (in Watts)3;
(i) Holding times – for each refrigerated liquefied gas permitted to be carried in the portable tank
(i) Name, in full, of the refrigerated liquefied gas;
(ii) Reference holding time (in days or hours)3;
(iii) Initial pressure (in bar gauge or kPa gauge)3;
(iv) Degree of filling (in kg)3;
(j) Periodic inspections and tests
(i) Type of the most recent periodic test (2.5-year, 5-year or exceptional);
(ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month and year);
(iii) Identification mark of the authorized body who performed or witnessed the most recent
test.
3 The unit used shall be indicated.
– 471 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 472 –
Figure 6.7.4.15.1: Example of a plate for marking
Owner’s registration number
MANUFACTURING INFORMATION
Country of manufacture
Year of manufacture
Manufacturer
Manufacturer’s serial number
APPROVAL INFORMATION
Approval country
Authorized body for design approval
Design approval number ‘AA’ (if applicable)
Shell design code (pressure vessel code)
PRESSURES
MAWP bar or kPa
Test pressure bar or kPa
Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp:
TEMPERATURES
Minimum design temperature °C
MATERIALS
Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s)
Equivalent thickness in reference steel mm
CAPACITY
Tank water capacity at 20 °C litres
INSULATION
‘Thermally insulated’ or ‘Vacuum insulated’ (as applicable)
Heat influx Watts
HOLDING TIMES
Refrigerated liquefied gas(es)
permitted Reference holding time Initial pressure Degree of
filling
days or hours bar or kPa kg
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS / TESTS
Test type Test date Witness stamp Test type Test date Witness stamp
(mm/yyyy) (mm/yyyy)
6.7.4.15.2 The following particulars shall be durably marked either on the portable tank itself or on a metal plate
firmly secured to the portable tank.
Name of the owner and the operator
Name of the refrigerated liquefied gas being carried (and minimum mean bulk temperature)
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM)________kg
Unladen (tare) mass________kg
Actual holding time for gas being carried ______days (or hours)
Portable tank instruction in accordance with 4.2.5.2.6
NOTE: For the identification of the refrigerated liquefied gas(es) being carried, see also Part 5.
6.7.4.15.3 If a portable tank is designed and approved for handling in open seas, the words “OFFSHORE
PORTABLE TANK” shall be marked on the identification plate.
– 472 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 473 –
6.7.5 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of UN multiple-element gas
containers (MEGCs) intended for the carriage of non-refrigerated gases
6.7.5.1 Definitions
For the purposes of this section:
Alternative arrangement means an approval granted by the competent authority for a portable tank or
MEGC that has been designed, constructed or tested to technical requirements or testing methods other
than those specified in this Chapter;
Elements are cylinders, tubes or bundles of cylinders;
Leakproofness test means a test using gas subjecting the elements and the service equipment of the
MEGC to an effective internal pressure of not less than 20 % of the test pressure;
Manifold means an assembly of piping and valves connecting the filling and/or discharge openings of
the elements;
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass of the MEGC and the
heaviest load authorized for carriage;
UN Multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) are multimodal assemblies of cylinders, tubes and
bundles of cylinders which are interconnected by a manifold and which are assembled within a
framework. The MEGC includes service equipment and structural equipment necessary for the carriage
of gases;
Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, discharge, venting and safety devices;
Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective and stabilizing members external to
the elements.
6.7.5.2 General design and construction requirements
6.7.5.2.1 The MEGC shall be capable of being filled and discharged without the removal of its structural
equipment. It shall possess stabilizing members external to the elements to provide structural integrity
for handling and carriage. MEGCs shall be designed and constructed with supports to provide a secure
base during carriage and with lifting and tie-down attachments which are adequate for lifting the MEGC
including when filled to its maximum permissible gross mass. The MEGC shall be designed to be loaded
onto a vehicle, wagon or sea-going or inland navigation vessel and shall be equipped with skids,
mountings or accessories to facilitate mechanical handling.
6.7.5.2.2 MEGCs shall be designed, manufactured and equipped in such a way as to withstand all conditions to
which they will be subjected during normal conditions of handling and carriage. The design shall take
into account the effects of dynamic loading and fatigue.
6.7.5.2.3 Elements of an MEGC shall be made of seamless steel or composite construction and be constructed
and tested according to 6.2.1 and 6.2.2. All of the elements in an MEGC shall be of the same design
type.
6.7.5.2.4 Elements of MEGCs, fittings and pipework shall be:
(a) Compatible with the substances intended to be carried (see ISO 11114-1:2012 + A1:2017 and
ISO 11114-2:2013); or
(b) Properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction.
6.7.5.2.5 Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage by galvanic action shall be avoided.
6.7.5.2.6 The materials of the MEGC, including any devices, gaskets, and accessories, shall not adversely affect
the gas(es) intended for carriage in the MEGC.
6.7.5.2.7 MEGCs shall be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due to the
contents, and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal conditions of handling and carriage.
– 473 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 474 –
The design shall demonstrate that the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these loads
through the expected life of the multiple-element gas container, have been taken into account.
6.7.5.2.8 MEGCs and their fastenings shall, under the maximum permissible load, be capable of withstanding the
following separately applied static forces:
(a) In the direction of travel: twice the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1;
(b) Horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: the MPGM (when the direction of travel is
not clearly determined, the forces shall be equal to twice the MPGM) multiplied by the
acceleration due to gravity (g)1;
(c) Vertically upwards: the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1; and
(d) Vertically downwards: twice the MPGM (total loading including the effect of gravity) multiplied
by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1.
6.7.5.2.9 Under the forces defined in 6.7.5.2.8, the stress at the most severely stressed point of the elements shall
not exceed the values given in either the relevant standards of 6.2.2.1 or, if the elements are not designed,
constructed and tested according to those standards, in the technical code or standard recognised or
approved by the competent authority of the country of use (see 6.2.5).
6.7.5.2.10 Under each of the forces in 6.7.5.2.8, the safety factor for the framework and fastenings to be observed
shall be as follows:
(a) for steels having a clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed
yield strength; or
(b) for steels with no clearly defined yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed
0.2 % proof strength and, for austenitic steels, the 1 % proof strength.
6.7.5.2.11 MEGCs intended for the carriage of flammable gases shall be capable of being electrically earthed.
6.7.5.2.12 The elements shall be secured in a manner that prevents undesired movement in relation to the structure
and the concentration of harmful localized stresses.
6.7.5.3 Service equipment
6.7.5.3.1 Service equipment shall be configured or designed to prevent damage that could result in the release of
the pressure receptacle contents during normal conditions of handling and carriage. When the
connection between the frame and the elements allows relative movement between the sub-assemblies,
the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement without damage to working parts. The
manifolds, the discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices), and the stop-valves shall be protected
from being wrenched off by external forces. Manifold piping leading to shut-off valves shall be
sufficiently flexible to protect the valves and the piping from shearing, or releasing the pressure
receptacle contents. The filling and discharge devices (including flanges or threaded plugs) and any
protective caps shall be capable of being secured against unintended opening.
6.7.5.3.2 Each element intended for the carriage of toxic gases (gases of groups T, TF, TC, TO, TFC and TOC)
shall be fitted with a valve. The manifold for liquefied toxic gases (gases of classification codes 2T,
2TF, 2TC, 2TO, 2TFC and 2TOC) shall be so designed that the elements can be filled separately and
be kept isolated by a valve capable of being sealed. For the carriage of flammable gases (gases of
group F), the elements shall be divided into groups of not more than 3 000 litres each isolated by a
valve.
6.7.5.3.3 For filling and discharge openings of the MEGC, two valves in series shall be placed in an accessible
position on each discharge and filling pipe. One of the valves may be a non-return valve. The filling
and discharge devices may be fitted to a manifold. For sections of piping which can be closed at both
ends and where a liquid product can be trapped, a pressure-relief valve shall be provided to prevent
excessive pressure build-up. The main isolation valves on an MEGC shall be clearly marked to indicate
their directions of closure. Each stop-valve or other means of closure shall be designed and constructed
to withstand a pressure equal to or greater than 1.5 times the test pressure of the MEGC. All stop-valves
with screwed spindles shall close by a clockwise motion of the handwheel. For other stop-valves, the
1 For calculation purposes g = 9.81 m/s2.
– 474 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 475 –
position (open and closed) and direction of closure shall be clearly indicated. All stop-valves shall be
designed and positioned to prevent unintentional opening. Ductile metals shall be used in the
construction of valves or accessories.
6.7.5.3.4 Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid damage due to expansion and
contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. Joints in tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong
metal union. The melting point of brazing materials shall be no lower than 525 °C. The rated pressure
of the service equipment and of the manifold shall be not less than two thirds of the test pressure of the
elements.
6.7.5.4 Pressure-relief devices
6.7.5.4.1 The elements of MEGCs used for the carriage of UN No. 1013 carbon dioxide and UN No. 1070 nitrous
oxide shall be divided into groups of not more than 3 000 litres each isolated by a valve. Each group
shall be fitted with one or more pressure relief devices. If so required by the competent authority of the
country of use, MEGCs for other gases shall be fitted with pressure relief devices as specified by that
competent authority.
6.7.5.4.2 When pressure relief devices are fitted, every element or group of elements of an MEGC that can be
isolated shall then be fitted with one or more pressure relief devices. Pressure relief devices shall be of
a type that will resist dynamic forces including liquid surge and shall be designed to prevent the entry
of foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous excess pressure.
6.7.5.4.3 MEGCs used for the carriage of certain non-refrigerated gases identified in portable tank instruction
T50 in 4.2.5.2.6 may have a pressure-relief device as required by the competent authority of the country
of use. Unless an MEGC in dedicated service is fitted with an approved pressure relief device
constructed of materials compatible with the gas carried, such a device shall comprise a frangible disc
preceding a spring-loaded device. The space between the frangible disc and the spring-loaded device
may be equipped with a pressure gauge or a suitable telltale indicator. This arrangement permits the
detection of disc rupture, pinholing or leakage which could cause a malfunction of the pressure relief
device. The frangible disc shall rupture at a nominal pressure 10 % above the start-to-discharge pressure
of the spring-loaded device.
6.7.5.4.4 In the case of multi-purpose MEGCs used for the carriage of low-pressure liquefied gases, the pressure-
relief devices shall open at a pressure as specified in 6.7.3.7.1 for the gas having the highest maximum
allowable working pressure of the gases allowed to be carried in the MEGC.
6.7.5.5 Capacity of pressure relief devices
6.7.5.5.1 The combined delivery capacity of the pressure relief devices when fitted shall be sufficient that, in the
event of total fire engulfment of the MEGC, the pressure (including accumulation) inside the elements
does not exceed 120 % of the set pressure of the pressure relief device. The formula provided in CGA
S-1.2-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards – Part 2 – Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed
Gases” shall be used to determine the minimum total flow capacity for the system of pressure relief
devices. CGA S-1.1-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards – Part 1 – Cylinders for Compressed Gases”
may be used to determine the relief capacity of individual elements. Spring-loaded pressure relief
devices may be used to achieve the full relief capacity prescribed in the case of low pressure liquefied
gases. In the case of multi-purpose MEGCs, the combined delivery capacity of the pressure-relief
devices shall be taken for the gas which requires the highest delivery capacity of the gases allowed to
be carried in the MEGC.
6.7.5.5.2 To determine the total required capacity of the pressure relief devices installed on the elements for the
carriage of liquefied gases, the thermodynamic properties of the gas shall be considered (see, for
example, CGA S-1.2-2003 “Pressure Relief Device Standards – Part 2 – Cargo and Portable Tanks for
Compressed Gases” for low pressure liquefied gases and CGA S-1.1-2003 “Pressure Relief Device
Standards – Part 1 – Cylinders for Compressed Gases” for high pressure liquefied gases).
6.7.5.6 Marking of pressure-relief devices
6.7.5.6.1 Pressure relief devices shall be clearly and permanently marked with the following:
(a) The manufacturer’s name and relevant catalogue number;
(b) The set pressure and/or the set temperature;
– 475 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 476 –
(c) The date of the last test.
(d) The cross sectional flow areas of the spring loaded pressure-relief devices and frangible discs in
mm².
6.7.5.6.2 The rated flow capacity marked on spring loaded pressure relief devices for low pressure liquefied gases
shall be determined according to ISO 4126-1:2004 and ISO 4126-7:2004.
6.7.5.7 Connections to pressure-relief devices
6.7.5.7.1 Connections to pressure-relief devices shall be of sufficient size to enable the required discharge to pass
unrestricted to the pressure relief device. No stop-valve shall be installed between the element and the
pressure-relief devices, except when duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons,
and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open, or the stop-valves are interlocked
so that at least one of the duplicate devices is always operable and capable of meeting the requirements
of 6.7.5.5. There shall be no obstruction in an opening leading to or leaving from a vent or pressure-
relief device which might restrict or cut-off the flow from the element to that device. The opening
through all piping and fittings shall have at least the same flow area as the inlet of the pressure relief
device to which it is connected. The nominal size of the discharge piping shall be at least as large as
that of the pressure relief device outlet. Vents from the pressure-relief devices, when used, shall deliver
the relieved vapour or liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the relieving
device.
6.7.5.8 Siting of pressure-relief devices
6.7.5.8.1 Each pressure relief device shall, under maximum filling conditions, be in communication with the
vapour space of the elements for the carriage of liquefied gases. The devices, when fitted, shall be so
arranged as to ensure that the escaping vapour is discharged upwards and unrestrictedly as to prevent
any impingement of escaping gas or liquid upon the MEGC, its elements or personnel. For flammable,
pyrophoric and oxidizing gases, the escaping gas shall be directed away from the element in such a
manner that it cannot impinge upon the other elements. Heat resistant protective devices which deflect
the flow of gas are permissible provided the required pressure relief device capacity is not reduced.
6.7.5.8.2 Arrangements shall be made to prevent access to the pressure-relief devices by unauthorized persons
and to protect the devices from damage caused by the MEGC overturning.
6.7.5.9 Gauging devices
6.7.5.9.1 When an MEGC is intended to be filled by mass, it shall be equipped with one or more gauging devices.
Level-gauges made of glass or other fragile material shall not be used.
6.7.5.10 MEGC supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down attachments
6.7.5.10.1 MEGCs shall be designed and constructed with a support structure to provide a secure base during
carriage. The forces specified in 6.7.5.2.8 and the safety factor specified in 6.7.5.2.10 shall be considered
in this aspect of the design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are acceptable.
6.7.5.10.2 The combined stresses caused by element mountings (e.g. cradles, frameworks, etc.) and MEGC lifting
and tie-down attachments shall not cause excessive stress in any element. Permanent lifting and tie-
down attachments shall be fitted to all MEGCs. In no case shall mountings or attachments be welded
onto the elements.
6.7.5.10.3 In the design of supports and frameworks, the effects of environmental corrosion shall be taken into
account.
6.7.5.10.4 When MEGCs are not protected during carriage, according to 4.2.4.3, the elements and service
equipment shall be protected against damage resulting from lateral or longitudinal impact or
overturning. External fittings shall be protected so as to preclude the release of the elements’ contents
upon impact or overturning of the MEGC on its fittings. Particular attention shall be paid to the
protection of the manifold. Examples of protection include:
(a) Protection against lateral impact which may consist of longitudinal bars;
(b) Protection against overturning which may consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the
frame;
– 476 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 477 –
(c) Protection against rear impact which may consist of a bumper or frame;
(d) Protection of the elements and service equipment against damage from impact or overturning by
use of an ISO frame in accordance with the relevant provisions of ISO 1496-3:1995.
6.7.5.11 Design approval
6.7.5.11.1 The competent authority or its authorized body shall issue a design approval certificate for any new
design of an MEGC. This certificate shall attest that the MEGC has been surveyed by that authority, is
suitable for its intended purpose and meets the requirements of this Chapter, the applicable provisions
for gases of Chapter 4.1 and of packing instruction P200. When a series of MEGCs are manufactured
without change in the design, the certificate shall be valid for the entire series. The certificate shall refer
to the prototype test report, the materials of construction of the manifold, the standards to which the
elements are made and an approval number. The approval number shall consist of the distinguishing
sign or mark of the country granting the approval, indicated by the distinguishing sign used on vehicles
in international road traffic2, and a registration number. Any alternative arrangements according to
6.7.1.2 shall be indicated on the certificate. A design approval may serve for the approval of smaller
MEGCs made of materials of the same type and thickness, by the same fabrication techniques and with
identical supports, equivalent closures and other appurtenances.
6.7.5.11.2 The prototype test report for the design approval shall include at least the following:
(a) The results of the applicable framework test specified in ISO 1496-3:1995;
(b) The results of the initial inspection and test specified in 6.7.5.12.3;
(c) The results of the impact test specified in 6.7.5.12.1; and
(d) Certification documents verifying that the cylinders and tubes comply with the applicable
standards.
6.7.5.12 Inspection and testing
6.7.5.12.1 MEGCs meeting the definition of container in the International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC),
1972, as amended, shall not be used unless they are successfully qualified by subjecting a representative
prototype of each design to the Dynamic, Longitudinal Impact Test prescribed in the Manual of Tests
and Criteria, Part IV, Section 41.
6.7.5.12.2 The elements and items of equipment of each MEGC shall be inspected and tested before being put into
service for the first time (initial inspection and test). Thereafter, MEGCs shall be inspected at no more
than five-year intervals (5 year periodic inspection). An exceptional inspection and test shall be
performed, regardless of the last periodic inspection and test, when necessary according to 6.7.5.12.5.
6.7.5.12.3 The initial inspection and test of an MEGC shall include a check of the design characteristics, an external
examination of the MEGC and its fittings with due regard to the gases to be carried, and a pressure test
performed at the test pressures according to packing instruction P200 of 4.1.4.1. The pressure test of the
manifold may be performed as a hydraulic test or by using another liquid or gas with the agreement of
the competent authority or its authorized body. Before the MEGC is placed into service, a leakproofness
test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment shall also be performed. When the
elements and their fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after
assembly to a leakproofness test.
6.7.5.12.4 The 5-year periodic inspection and test shall include an external examination of the structure, the
elements and the service equipment in accordance with 6.7.5.12.6. The elements and the piping shall be
tested at the periodicity specified in packing instruction P200 and in accordance with the provisions
described in 6.2.1.6. When the elements and equipment have been pressure-tested separately, they shall
be subjected together after assembly to a leakproofness test.
6.7.5.12.5 An exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the MEGC shows evidence of damaged or
corroded areas, leakage, or other conditions that indicate a deficiency that could affect the integrity of
2 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 477 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 478 –
the MEGC. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test shall depend on the amount of damage or
deterioration of the MEGC. It shall include at least the examinations required under 6.7.5.12.6.
6.7.5.12.6 The examinations shall ensure that:
(a) The elements are inspected externally for pitting, corrosion, abrasions, dents, distortions, defects
in welds or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the MEGC unsafe for
carriage;
(b) The piping, valves, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, and other conditions,
including leakage, that might render the MEGC unsafe for filling, discharge or carriage;
(c) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or
tightened;
(d) All emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect
that could prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves
shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation;
(e) Required marks on the MEGC are legible and in accordance with the applicable requirements;
and
(f) The framework, the supports and the arrangements for lifting the MEGC are in satisfactory
condition.
6.7.5.12.7 The inspections and tests in 6.7.5.12.1, 6.7.5.12.3, 6.7.5.12.4 and 6.7.5.12.5 shall be performed or
witnessed by a body authorized by the competent authority. When the pressure test is a part of the
inspection and test, the test pressure shall be the one indicated on the data plate of the MEGC. While
under pressure, the MEGC shall be inspected for any leaks in the elements, piping or equipment.
6.7.5.12.8 When evidence of any unsafe condition is discovered, the MEGC shall not be returned to service until
it has been corrected and the applicable tests and verifications are passed.
6.7.5.13 Marking
6.7.5.13.1 Every MEGC shall be fitted with a corrosion resistant metal plate permanently attached to the MEGC
in a conspicuous place readily accessible for inspection. The metal plate shall not be affixed to the
elements. The elements shall be marked in accordance with Chapter 6.2. As a minimum, at least the
following information shall be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method:
(a) Owner information
(i) Owner’s registration number;
(b) Manufacturing information
(i) Country of manufacture;
(ii) Year of manufacture;
(iii) Manufacturer’s name or mark;
(iv) Manufacturer’s serial number;
(c) Approval information
(i) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a
flexible bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant
requirements in Chapter 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11;
(ii) Approval country;
(iii) Authorized body for the design approval;
(iv) Design approval number;
– 478 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 479 –
(v) Letters ‘AA’, if the design was approved under alternative arrangements (see 6.7.1.2);
(d) Pressures
(i) Test pressure (in bar gauge)3;
(ii) Initial pressure test date (month and year);
(iii) Identification mark of the initial pressure test witness;
(e) Temperatures
(i) Design temperature range (in °C)3;
(f) Elements / Capacity
(i) Number of elements;
(ii) Total water capacity (in litres)3;
(g) Periodic inspections and tests
(i) Type of the most recent periodic test (5-year or exceptional);
(ii) Date of the most recent periodic test (month and year);
(iii) Identification mark of the authorized body who performed or witnessed the most recent
test.
3 The unit used shall be indicated.
– 479 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 480 –
Figure 6.7.5.13.1: Example of a plate for marking
Owner’s registration number
MANUFACTURING INFORMATION
Country of manufacture
Year of manufacture
Manufacturer
Manufacturer’s serial number
APPROVAL INFORMATION
Approval country
Authorized body for design approval
Design approval number ‘AA’ (if applicable)
PRESSURES
Test pressure bar
Initial pressure test date: (mm/yyyy) Witness stamp:
TEMPERATURES
Design temperature range °C to °C
ELEMENTS / CAPACITY
Number of elements
Total water capacity litres
PERIODIC INSPECTIONS / TESTS
Test type Test date Witness stamp Test type Test date Witness stamp
(mm/yyyy) (mm/yyyy)
6.7.5.13.2 The following information shall be durably marked on a metal plate firmly secured to the MEGC:
Name of the operator
Maximum permissible load mass ________ kg
Working pressure at 15°C: ________ bar gauge
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) __________ kg
Unladen (tare) mass _________ kg
– 480 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 481 –
CHAPTER 6.8
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT,
TYPE APPROVAL, INSPECTIONS AND TESTS, AND MARKING
OF FIXED TANKS (TANK-VEHICLES), DEMOUNTABLE TANKS AND
TANK-CONTAINERS AND TANK SWAP BODIES, WITH SHELLS MADE OF
METALLIC MATERIALS, AND BATTERY-VEHICLES AND MULTIPLE ELEMENT
GAS CONTAINERS (MEGCs)
NOTE 1: For portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) see Chapter 6.7, for fibre-reinforced
plastics tanks see Chapter 6.9 or Chapter 6.13, as appropriate, for vacuum operated waste tanks see Chapter 6.10.
NOTE 2: For fixed tanks (tank-vehicles) and demountable tanks with additive devices, see special provision 664 of
Chapter 3.3.
NOTE 3: In this chapter, “inspection body” means a body conforming to 1.8.6.
6.8.1 Scope and general provisions
6.8.1.1 The requirements across the whole width of the page apply both to fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), to
demountable tanks and battery-vehicles, and to tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs. Those
contained in a single column apply only:
– to fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), to demountable tanks and battery-vehicles (left hand column);
– to tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs (right hand column).
6.8.1.2 These requirements shall apply to
fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks and
battery-vehicles
tank-containers, tank swap bodies and MEGCs
used for the carriage of gaseous, liquid, powdery or granular substances.
6.8.1.3 Section 6.8.2 sets out the requirements applicable to fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), to demountable tanks,
tank-containers, tank swap bodies intended for the carriage of substances of all classes and battery-
vehicles and MEGCs for gases of Class 2. Sections 6.8.3 to 6.8.5 contain special requirements
supplementing or modifying the requirements of section 6.8.2.
6.8.1.4 For provisions concerning use of these tanks, see Chapter 4.3.
6.8.1.5 Conformity assessment, type approval and inspections procedures
The following provisions describe how to apply the procedures in 1.8.7.
NOTE: These provisions apply, subject to the compliance of the inspection bodies with the provisions
of 1.8.6, and without prejudice to rights and obligations, in particular notification and recognition,
fixed for them by agreements or legal acts (e.g. Directive 2010/35/EU) otherwise binding on
Contracting Parties to ADR.
For the purpose of this sub-section the term “country of registration” means:
– the Contracting Party to ADR of registration
of the vehicle on which the tank is mounted;
– for demountable tanks, the Contracting Party
to ADR where the owner’s or operator’s
company is registered.
– the Contracting Party to ADR where the owner’s or
operator’s company is registered;
– if the owner’s or operator’s company is not known,
the Contracting Party to ADR of the competent
authority that approved the inspection body which
performed the initial inspection. Notwithstanding
1.6.4.57 these inspection bodies shall be accredited
– 481 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 482 –
according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause
8.1.3) Type A.
The conformity assessment of the tank shall verify that all its components conform to the requirements
of ADR, irrespective of where they have been manufactured.
6.8.1.5.1 Type examination according to 1.8.7.2.1
(a) The manufacturer of the tank shall engage a single inspection body approved or recognized by
the competent authority of either the country of manufacture or the first country of registration
of the first tank manufactured according to that type to take responsibility for the type
examination. If the country of manufacture is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the manufacturer
shall engage a single inspection body approved or recognized by the competent authority of the
country of registration of the first tank manufactured according to that type to take responsibility
for the type examination.
NOTE: Until 31 December 2028, the type examination shall be performed by an inspection
body approved or recognized by the country of registration.
(b) If the type examination of the service equipment is performed separately from the tank according
to 6.8.2.3.1, the manufacturer of the service equipment shall engage single inspection body
approved or recognized by a Contracting Party to ADR to take responsibility for the type
examination.
6.8.1.5.2 Type approval certificate issue according to 1.8.7.2.2
Only the competent authority that approved or recognized the inspection body that performed the type
examination shall issue the type approval certificate.
However, when an inspection body is designated by the competent authority to issue the type approval
certificate the type examination shall be performed by that inspection body.
6.8.1.5.3 Supervision of manufacture according to 1.8.7.3
(a) For the supervision of manufacture, the manufacturer of the tank shall engage a single inspection
body approved or recognized either by the competent authority of the country of registration or
the country of manufacture. If the country of manufacture is not a Contracting Party to ADR, a
manufacturer shall engage a single inspection body approved or recognized by the competent
authority of the country of registration.
(b) If the type examination of the service equipment is performed separately from the tank, the
manufacturer of the service equipment shall engage a single inspection body approved or
recognized by the competent authority of a Contracting Party to ADR. The manufacturer may
use an in-house inspection service according to 1.8.7.7 to perform the procedures of 1.8.7.3.
6.8.1.5.4 Initial inspection and tests according to 1.8.7.4
(a) The manufacturer of the tank shall engage a single inspection body approved or recognized by
the competent authority of the country of registration or the country of manufacture to take
responsibility for the initial inspection and tests. If the country of manufacture is not a
Contracting Party to ADR, a manufacturer shall engage a single inspection body approved or
recognized by the competent authority of the country of registration to take responsibility for the
initial inspection and tests.
NOTE: Until 31 December 2032, the initial inspection shall be performed by an inspection body
approved or recognized by the country of registration.
(b) If the service equipment is type approved separately from the tank, the manufacturer of the
service equipment shall engage the same single inspection body engaged for the purposes of
6.8.1.5.3 (b) to take responsibility for the initial inspection and tests. The manufacturer may use
an in-house inspection service according to 1.8.7.7 to perform the procedures of 1.8.7.4.
– 482 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 483 –
6.8.1.5.5 Entry into service verification according to 1.8.7.5
The competent authority of the country of first
registration may require, on an occasional basis, an
entry into service verification of the tank to verify
conformity with the applicable requirements.
When the country of registration of a tank-vehicle is
changed, the competent authority of the Contracting
Party to ADR to which the tank-vehicle is transferred
may require, on an occasional basis, an entry into
service verification of the tank.
The competent authority of the country of first
registration may require, on an occasional
basis, an entry into service verification of the
tank to verify conformity with the applicable
requirements.
When the country of registration of a tank-
container is changed, the competent authority
of the Contracting Party to ADR to which the
tank-container is transferred may require, on an
occasional basis an entry into service
verification.
To perform the entry into service verification, the owner or operator of the tank shall engage a single
inspection body different to the inspection bodies engaged for the type examination, supervision of
manufacture or initial inspection. The inspection body engaged for the entry into service verification
shall be approved by the competent authority of the country of registration or, if no such inspection
body exists, the inspection body shall be recognized by the competent authority of the country of
registration. The entry into service verification shall consider the condition of the tank and shall ensure
that the requirements of ADR are fulfilled.
6.8.1.5.6 Intermediate, periodic or exceptional inspection according to 1.8.7.6
The intermediate or periodic or exceptional inspection shall be performed:
in the country of registration by an inspection body
approved or recognized by the competent authority
of that country. Exceptional inspections may
alternatively be performed in the country of
manufacture by an inspection body approved or
recognized by the competent authority of the country
of manufacture or the country of registration.
by an inspection body approved or recognized
by the competent authority of the Contracting
Party to ADR where the inspection takes place
or by an inspection body approved or
recognized by the competent authority of the
country of registration.
The owner or operator of the tank, or its authorized representative, shall engage a single inspection body
for each intermediate, periodic or exceptional inspection.
6.8.2 Requirements applicable to all classes
6.8.2.1 Construction
Basic principles
6.8.2.1.1 Shells, their attachments and their service and structural equipment shall be designed to withstand
without loss of contents (other than quantities of gas escaping through any degassing vents):
– static and dynamic stresses in normal conditions of carriage as defined in 6.8.2.1.2 and
6.8.2.1.13;
– prescribed minimum stresses as defined in 6.8.2.1.15.
– 483 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 484 –
6.8.2.1.2 The tanks and their fastenings shall be capable of
absorbing, under the maximum permissible load, the
forces exerted by:
– in the direction of travel: twice the total mass;
– at right angles to the direction of travel: the
total mass;
– vertically upwards: the total mass;
– vertically downwards: twice the total mass.
Tank-containers1 and their fastenings shall,
under the maximum permissible load be capable
of absorbing the forces equal to those exerted by:
– in the direction of travel: twice the total
mass;
– horizontally at right angles to the direction
of travel: the total mass; (where the
direction of travel is not clearly determined,
twice the total mass in each direction);
– vertically upwards: the total mass;
– vertically downwards: twice the total
mass.
6.8.2.1.3 The walls of the shells shall have at least the thickness specified in
6.8.2.1.17 to 6.8.2.1.21 6.8.2.1.17 to 6.8.2.1.20.
6.8.2.1.4 Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of standards listed in
6.8.2.6 or of a technical code recognized by the competent authority, in accordance with 6.8.2.7, in
which the material is chosen and the shell thickness determined taking into account maximum and
minimum filling and working temperatures, but the following minimum requirements of 6.8.2.1.6 to
6.8.2.1.26 shall be met.
6.8.2.1.5 Tanks intended to contain certain dangerous substances shall be provided with additional protection.
This may take the form of additional thickness of the shell (increased calculation pressure) determined
in the light of the dangers inherent in the substances concerned or of a protective device (see the special
provisions of 6.8.4).
6.8.2.1.6 Welds shall be skilfully made and shall afford the fullest safety. The execution and checking of welds
shall comply with the requirements of 6.8.2.1.23.
6.8.2.1.7 Measures shall be taken to protect shells against the risk of deformation as a result of a negative internal
pressure. Shells, other than shells according to 6.8.2.2.6, designed to be equipped with vacuum valves
shall be able to withstand, without permanent deformation, an external pressure of not less than 21 kPa
(0.21 bar) above the internal pressure. Shells used for the carriage of solid substances (powdery or
granular) of packing groups II or III only, which do not liquefy during carriage, may be designed for a
lower external pressure but not less than 5 kPa (0.05 bar). The vacuum valves shall be set to relieve at
a vacuum setting not greater than the tank’s design vacuum pressure. Shells, which are not designed to
be equipped with a vacuum valve shall be able to withstand, without permanent deformation an external
pressure of not less than 40 kPa (0.4 bar) above the internal pressure.
Materials for shells
6.8.2.1.8 Shells shall be made of suitable metallic materials which, unless other temperature ranges are prescribed
in the various classes, shall be resistant to brittle fracture and to stress corrosion cracking between –
20 C and +50 C.
6.8.2.1.9 The materials of shells or of their protective linings which are in contact with the contents shall not
contain substances liable to react dangerously (see “Dangerous reaction” in 1.2.1) with the contents, to
form dangerous compounds, or appreciably to weaken the material.
If contact between the substance carried and the material used for the construction of the shell entails a
progressive decrease in the shell thickness, this thickness shall be increased at manufacture by an
appropriate amount. This additional thickness to allow for corrosion shall not be taken into consideration
in calculating the shell thickness.
1 See also 7.1.3.
– 484 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 485 –
6.8.2.1.10 For welded shells only materials of faultless weldability whose adequate impact strength at an ambient
temperature of –20 °C can be guaranteed, particularly in the weld seams and the zones adjacent thereto,
shall be used.
If fine-grained steel is used, the guaranteed value of the yield strength Re shall not exceed 460 N/mm²
and the guaranteed value of the upper limit of tensile strength Rm shall not exceed 725 N/mm², in
accordance with the specifications of the material.
6.8.2.1.11 Ratios of Re/Rm exceeding 0.85 are not allowed for steels used in the construction of welded shells.
Re = apparent yield strength for steels having a clearly-defined yield point or
guaranteed 0.2 % proof strength for steels with no clearly-defined yield point (1 % for
austenitic steels)
Rm = tensile strength.
The values specified in the inspection certificate for the material shall be taken as a basis in determining
this ratio in each case.
6.8.2.1.12 For steel, the elongation at fracture, in % shall be not less than
2
N/mminstrengthtensiledetermined
00010
but in any case for fine-grained steels it shall be not less than 16 % and not less than 20 % for other
steels.
For aluminium alloys the elongation at fracture shall be not less than 12 %2.
Calculation of the shell thickness
6.8.2.1.13 The pressure on which the shell thickness is based shall not be less than the calculation pressure, but
the stresses referred to in 6.8.2.1.1 shall also be taken into account, and, if necessary, the following
stresses:
In the case of vehicles in which the tank
constitutes a stressed self-supporting member,
the shell shall be designed to withstand the
stresses thus imposed in addition to stresses from
other sources.
Under these stresses, the stress at the most
severely stressed point of the shell and its
fastenings shall not exceed the value defined in
6.8.2.1.16.
Under each of these stresses the safety factors to
be observed shall be the following:
– for metals having a clearly-defined yield
point: a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the
apparent yield strength; or
– for metals with no clearly-defined yield
point: a safety factor of 1.5 in relation to the
guaranteed 0.2 % proof strength (1 %
maximum elongation for austenitic steels).
6.8.2.1.14 The calculation pressure is in the second part of the code (see 4.3.4.1) according to Column (12) of
Table A of Chapter 3.2.
When “G” appears, the following requirements shall apply:
2 In the case of sheet metal the axis of the tensile test-piece shall be at right angles to the direction of rolling. The
permanent elongation at fracture shall be measured on test-pieces of circular cross-section in which the gauge length l
is equal to five times the diameter d (l = 5d); if test-pieces of rectangular section are used, the gauge length shall be
calculated by the formula oF65,5l , where F o indicates the initial cross-section area of the test-piece.
– 485 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 486 –
(a) Gravity-discharge shells intended for the carriage of substances having a vapour pressure not
exceeding 110 kPa (1.1 bar) (absolute pressure) at 50 °C shall be designed for a calculation
pressure of twice the static pressure of the substance to be carried but not less than twice the
static pressure of water;
(b) Pressure-filled or pressure-discharge shells intended for the carriage of substances having a
vapour pressure not exceeding 110 kPa (1.1 bar) (absolute pressure) at 50 °C shall be designed
for a calculation pressure equal to 1.3 times the filling or discharge pressure;
When the numerical value of the minimum calculation pressure is given (gauge pressure) the shell shall
be designed for this pressure which shall not be less than 1.3 times the filling or discharge pressure. The
following minimum requirements shall apply in these cases:
(c) Shells intended for the carriage of substances having a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa
(1.1 bar) at 50 °C and a boiling point of more than 35 °C shall, whatever their filling or discharge
system, be designed for a calculation pressure of not less than 150 kPa (1.5 bar) gauge pressure
or 1.3 times the filling or discharge pressure, whichever is the higher;
(d) Shells intended for the carriage of substances having a boiling point of not more than 35 °C shall,
whatever their filling or discharge system, be designed for a calculation pressure equal to 1.3
times the filling or discharge pressure but not less than 0.4 MPa (4 bar) (gauge pressure).
6.8.2.1.15 At the test pressure, the stress at the most severely stressed point of the shell shall not exceed the
material-dependent limits prescribed below. Allowance shall be made for any weakening due to the
welds.
6.8.2.1.16 For all metals and alloys, the stress at the test pressure shall be lower than the smaller of the values
given by the following formulae:
0.75 Re or 0.5 Rm
where
Re = apparent yield strength for steels having a clearly-defined yield point; or
guaranteed 0.2 % proof strength for steels with no clearly-defined yield point (1 % for
austenitic steels)
Rm = tensile strength.
The values of Re and Rm to be used shall be specified minimum values according to material standards.
If no material standard exists for the metal or alloy in question, the values of Re and Rm used shall be
approved by the competent authority.
When austenitic steels are used, the specified minimum values according to the material standards may
be exceeded by up to 15 % if these higher values are attested in the inspection certificate. The minimum
values shall, however, not be exceeded when the formula given in 6.8.2.1.18 is applied.
Minimum shell thickness
6.8.2.1.17 The shell thickness shall not be less than the greater of the values determined by the following formulae:
2
DP
e T
2
DP
e C
– 486 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 487 –
where:
e = minimum shell thickness in mm
P T = test pressure in MPa
P C = calculation pressure in MPa as specified in 6.8.2.1.14
D = internal diameter of shell in mm
= permissible stress, as defined in 6.8.2.1.16, in N/mm²
= a coefficient not exceeding 1, allowing for any weakening due to welds, and linked to the
inspection methods defined in 6.8.2.1.23.
The thickness shall in no case be less than that defined in
6.8.2.1.18 to 6.8.2.1.21. 6.8.2.1.18 to 6.8.2.1.20.
6.8.2.1.18 Shells of circular cross-section3 not more than 1.80
m in diameter other than those referred to in
6.8.2.1.21, shall not be less than 5 mm thick if of
mild steel4, or of equivalent thickness if of another
metal.
Shells shall be not less than 5 mm thick if of mild
steel4 (in conformity with the requirements of
6.8.2.1.11 and 6.8.2.1.12) or of equivalent
thickness if of another metal.
Where the diameter is more than 1.80 m, this
thickness shall be increased to 6 mm except in the
case of shells intended for the carriage of powdery
or granular substances, if the shell is of mild steel4,
or to an equivalent thickness if of another metal.
Where the diameter is more than 1.80 m, this
thickness shall be increased to 6 mm except in the
case of tanks intended for the carriage of powdery
or granular substances, if the shell is of mild steel4
or to an equivalent thickness if of another metal.
Whatever the metal used, the shell thickness shall
in no case be less than 3 mm, or 4.5 mm if the tank
is an extra-large tank-container.
“Equivalent thickness” means the thickness obtained by the following formula5:
3 For shells not of a circular cross-section, for example box-shaped or elliptical shells, the indicated diameters
shall correspond to those calculated on the basis of a circular cross-section of the same area. For such shapes of
cross-section the radius of convexity of the shell wall shall not exceed 2 000 mm at the sides or 3 000 mm at the top and
bottom. However, the cross section of shells according to 6.8.2.1.14 (a) may contain recesses or protrusions such as
sumps, cut-outs or recessed manhole constructions. They may be constructed of flat or shaped (concave or convex)
sheet metal. Dents and other unintended deformations shall not be regarded as recesses or protrusions. See the
“Guideline for the application of footnote 3 of ADR 6.8.2.1.18” on the website of the UNECE secretariat
(https://unece.org/guidelines-telematics-application-standards-construction-and-approval-vehicles-calculation-risks).
4 For the definitions of “mild steel” and “reference steel” see 1.2.1. “Mild steel” in this case also covers a steel
referred to in EN material standards as “mild steel”, with a minimum tensile strength between 360 N/mm² and
490 N/mm² and a minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.8.2.1.12.
5 This formula is derived from the general formula:
3
2
m1
0m0
01 A1R
AR
ee
where
e1 = minimum shell thickness for the metal chosen, in mm;
eo = minimum shell thickness for mild steel, in mm, according to 6.8.2.1.18 and 6.8.2.1.19;
Rm0 = 370 (tensile strength for reference steel, see definition 1.2.1, in N/mm²);
A 0 = 27 (elongation at fracture for reference steel, in %);
Rm1 = minimum tensile strength of the metal chosen, in N/mm²; and
A 1 = minimum elongation at fracture of the metal chosen under tensile stress, in %.
– 487 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 488 –
3 2
11m
0
1
AR
e464
e
6.8.2.1.19 Where protection of the tank against damage
through lateral impact or overturning is provided
according to 6.8.2.1.20, the competent authority
may allow the aforesaid minimum thicknesses to be
reduced in proportion to the protection provided;
however, the said thicknesses shall not be less than
3 mm in the case of mild steel4, or than an equivalent
thickness in the case of other materials, for shells not
more than 1.80 m in diameter. For shells with a
diameter exceeding 1.80 m the aforesaid minimum
thickness shall be increased to 4 mm in the case of
mild steel4 and to an equivalent thickness in the case
of other metals.
Where protection of the tank against damage is
provided according to 6.8.2.1.20, the competent
authority may allow the aforesaid minimum
thicknesses to be reduced in proportion to the
protection provided; however, the said
thicknesses shall be not less than 3 mm in the case
of mild steel4, or than an equivalent thickness in
the case of other materials, for shells not more
than 1.80 m in diameter. For shells of a diameter
exceeding 1.80 m this minimum thickness shall
be increased to 4 mm in the case of mild steel4,
and to an equivalent thickness in the case of other
metals.
Equivalent thickness means the thickness given by
the formula in 6.8.2.1.18.
Except in cases for which 6.8.2.1.21 provide, the
thickness of shells with protection against damage in
accordance with 6.8.2.1.20 (a) or (b) shall not be less
than the values given in the table below.
Equivalent thickness means the thickness given
by the formula in 6.8.2.1.18.
The thickness of shells with protection against
damage in accordance with 6.8.2.1.20 shall not be
less than the values given in the table below.
Diameter of shell 1.80 m > 1.80 m
Minimum
thickness of
shells
Austenitic stainless steels 2.5 mm 3 mm
Austenitic-ferritic stainless
steels 3 mm 3.5 mm
Other steels 3 mm 4 mm
Aluminium alloys 4 mm 5 mm
Pure aluminium of 99.80 % 6 mm 8 mm
6.8.2.1.20 For tanks built after 1 January 1990, there is
protection against damage as referred to in
6.8.2.1.19 when the following measures or
equivalent6 measures are adopted:
(a) For tanks intended for the carriage of
powdery or granular substances, the
protection against damage shall satisfy the
competent authority.
(b) For tanks intended for the carriage of other
substances, there is protection against
damage when:
The protection referred to in 6.8.2.1.19 may
consist of:
– overall external structural protection as in
“sandwich” construction where the sheathing is
secured to the shell; or
– a structure in which the shell is supported by a
complete skeleton including longitudinal and
transverse structural members; or
– double-wall construction.
1. For shells with a circular or elliptical
cross-section having a maximum
radius of curvature of 2 m, the shell is
equipped with strengthening members
comprising partitions, surge-plates or
external or internal rings, so placed that
at least one of the following conditions
is met:
Where the tanks are made with double walls, the
space between being evacuated of air, the
aggregate thickness of the outer metal wall and
the shell wall shall correspond to the minimum
wall thickness prescribed in 6.8.2.1.18, the
thickness of the wall of the shell itself being not
4 For the definitions of “mild steel” and “reference steel” see 1.2.1. “Mild steel” in this case also covers a steel
referred to in EN material standards as “mild steel”, with a minimum tensile strength between 360 N/mm² and
490 N/mm² and a minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.8.2.1.12.
6 Equivalent measures means measures given in standards referenced in 6.8.2.6.
– 488 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 489 –
– Distance between two adjacent
strengthening elements of not more
than 1.75 m.
less than the minimum thickness prescribed in
6.8.2.1.19.
Where tanks are made with double walls with an
intermediate layer of solid materials at least
50 mm thick, the outer wall shall have a thickness
of not less than 0.5 mm if it is made of mild steel4
or at least 2 mm if it is made of a plastics material
reinforced with glass fibre. Solid foam with an
impact absorption capacity such as that, for
example, of polyurethane foam, may be used as
the intermediate layer of solid material.
– Capacity contained between two
partitions or surge-plates of not
more than 7 500 l.
The vertical cross-section of a ring,
with the associated coupling, shall have
a section modulus of at least 10 cm³.
External rings shall not have projecting
edges with a radius of less than
2.5 mm.
Partitions and surge-plates shall
conform to the requirements of
6.8.2.1.22.
The thickness of the partitions and
surge-plates shall in no case be less
than that of the shell.
2. For tanks made with double walls, the
space between being evacuated of air,
the aggregate thickness of the outer
metal wall and the shell wall
corresponds to the wall thickness
prescribed in 6.8.2.1.18, and the
thickness of the wall of the shell itself
is not less than the minimum thickness
prescribed in 6.8.2.1.19.
3. For tanks made with double walls
having an intermediate layer of solid
materials at least 50 mm thick, the
outer wall has a thickness of at least
0.5 mm of mild steel4 or at least 2 mm
of a plastics material reinforced with
glass fibre. Solid foam (with an impact
absorption capacity like that, for
example, of polyurethane foam) may
be used as the intermediate layer of
solid material.
4. Shells of forms other than in 1,
especially box-shaped shells, are
provided, all round the mid-point of
their vertical height and over at least
30 % of their height with a protection
designed in such a way as to offer
specific resilience at least equal to that
of a shell constructed in mild steel4 of a
thickness of 5 mm (for a shell diameter
not exceeding 1.80 m) or 6 mm (for a
shell diameter exceeding 1.80 m). The
protection shall be applied in a durable
manner to the shell.
4 For the definitions of “mild steel” and “reference steel” see 1.2.1. “Mild steel” in this case also covers a steel
referred to in EN material standards as “mild steel”, with a minimum tensile strength between 360 N/mm² and 490
N/mm² and a minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.8.2.1.12.
– 489 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 490 –
This requirement shall be considered to
have been met without further proof of
the specific resilience when the
protection involves the welding of a
plate of the same material as the shell to
the area to be strengthened, so that the
minimum wall thickness is in
accordance with 6.8.2.1.18.
This protection is dependent upon the
possible stresses exerted on mild steel3
shells in the event of an accident, where
the ends and walls have a thickness of at
least 5 mm for a diameter not exceeding
1.80 m or at least 6 mm for a diameter
exceeding 1.80 m. If another metal is
used, the equivalent thickness shall be
obtained in accordance with the formula
in 6.8.2.1.18.
For demountable tanks this protection is not
required when they are protected on all sides by
the drop sides of the carrying vehicle.
6.8.2.1.21 The thickness of shells designed in accordance
with 6.8.2.1.14 (a) which either are of not more
than 5 000 litres capacity or are divided into
leakproof compartments of not more than 5 000
litres unit capacity may be adjusted to a level
which, unless prescribed otherwise in 6.8.3 or
6.8.4, shall however not be less than the
appropriate value shown in the following table:
Maximum
radius of
curvature
of shell
(m)
Capacity of
shell or shell
compartment
(m³)
Minimum
thickness
(mm)
Mild steel
2 5.0 3
2 – 3 3.5 3
> 3.5 but 5.0 4
Where a metal other than mild steel4 is used, the
thickness shall be determined by the equivalence
formula given in 6.8.2.1.18 and shall not be less
than the values given in the following table:
4 For the definitions of “mild steel” and “reference steel” see 1.2.1. “Mild steel” in this case also covers a steel
referred to in EN material standards as “mild steel”, with a minimum tensile strength between 360 N/mm² and 490
N/mm² and a minimum elongation at fracture conforming to 6.8.2.1.12.
– 490 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 491 –
Maximum
radius of
curvature of
shell (m)
2 2-3 2-3
Capacity of
shell or shell
compartment
(m³)
5.0 3.5
> 3.5
but
5.0
Minimum
thickness
of shell
Austenitic
stainless
steels
2.5 mm 2.5 mm 3 mm
Austenitic-
ferritic
stainless
steels
3 mm 3 mm 3.5 mm
Other steels 3 mm 3 mm 4 mm
Aluminium
alloys 4 mm 4 mm 5 mm
Pure
aluminium at
99.80 %
6 mm 6 mm 8 mm
The thickness of the partitions and surge-plates
shall in no case be less than that of the shell.
6.8.2.1.22 Surge-plates and partitions shall be dished, with a
depth of dish of not less than 10 cm, or shall be
corrugated, profiled or otherwise reinforced to
give equivalent strength. The area of the surge
plate shall be at least 70 % of the cross-sectional
area of the tank in which the surge-plate is fitted.
Welding and inspection of welds
6.8.2.1.23 The inspection body performing inspections in accordance with 6.8.2.4.1 or 6.8.2.4.4, shall verify and
confirm the ability of the manufacturer or the maintenance or repair shop to perform welding
operations and the operation of a weld quality assurance system. Welding shall be performed by
qualified welders using a qualified welding process whose effectiveness (including any heat
treatments required) has been demonstrated by tests.
The following checks shall be carried out for welds made by each welding process used by the
manufacturer in accordance with the value of the coefficient λ used in determining the thickness of
the shell in 6.8.2.1.17:
– 491 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 492 –
= 0.8: All weld beads shall so far as possible be inspected visually on both faces and shall
be subjected to non-destructive checks. The non-destructive checks shall include all
weld “Tee” junctions, all inserts used to avoid welds crossing and all welds in the
knuckle area of the tank ends. The total length of welds to be examined shall not be
less than:
10 % of the length of all the longitudinal welds,
10 % of the length of all the circumferential welds,
10 % of the length of all the circumferential welds in the tank ends, and
10 % of the length of all the radial welds in the tank ends.
= 0.9: All weld beads shall so far as possible be inspected visually on both faces and shall
be subjected to non-destructive checks. The non-destructive checks shall include all
connections, all inserts used to avoid welds crossing, all welds in the knuckle area of
the tank ends and all welds for the assembly of large-diameter items of equipment.
The total length of welds to be examined shall not be less than:
100 % of the length of all the longitudinal welds,
25 % of the length of all the circumferential welds,
25 % of the length of all the circumferential welds in the tank ends, and
25 % of the length of all the radial welds in the tank ends.
= 1: All weld beads throughout their length shall be subjected to non-destructive checks
and shall so far as possible be inspected visually on both faces. A weld test-piece
shall be taken.
The non-destructive checks of the circumferential, longitudinal and radial welds shall be carried out
by radiography or by ultrasound. Other welds allowed in the appropriate design and construction
standard shall be tested using alternative methods in accordance with the relevant standard(s)
referenced in 6.8.2.6.2. The checks shall confirm that the quality of the welding is appropriate to the
stresses.
In the cases of either λ = 0.8 or λ = 0.9, when the presence of an unacceptable defect is detected in a
portion of a weld, the non-destructive checks shall be extended to a portion of equal length on both
sides of the portion that contains the defect. If the non-destructive checks detect an additional defect
that is unacceptable, non-destructive checks shall be extended to all remaining welds of the same type
of welding process.
Welds made during repairs or alterations shall be assessed as above and in accordance with the non-
destructive tests specified in the relevant standard(s) referenced in 6.8.2.6.2.
Where there are doubts regarding the quality of welds, including the welds made to repair any defects
revealed by the non-destructive checks, additional checks of the welds may be required.
Other construction requirements
6.8.2.1.24 The protective lining shall be so designed that its leakproofness remains intact, whatever the
deformation liable to occur in normal conditions of carriage (see 6.8.2.1.2).
6.8.2.1.25 The thermal insulation shall be so designed as not to hinder access to, or the operation of, filling and
discharge devices and safety valves.
6.8.2.1.26 If shells intended for the carriage of flammable liquids having a flash-point of not more than 60 °C
are fitted with non-metallic protective linings (inner layers), the shells and the protective linings shall
be so designed that no danger of ignition from electrostatic charges can occur.
– 492 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 493 –
6.8.2.1.27 Shells intended for the carriage of liquids having
a flash-point of not more than 60 °C or for the
carriage of flammable gases, or of UN No.1361
carbon or UN No.1361 carbon black, packing
group II, shall be linked to the chassis by means
of at least one good electrical connection. Any
metal contact capable of causing electrochemical
corrosion shall be avoided. Shells shall be
provided with at least one earth fitting
clearly marked with the symbol ” “, capable
of being electrically connected.
All parts of a tank-container intended for the
carriage of liquids having a flash-point of not
more than 60 °C, flammable gases, or UN
No.1361 carbon or UN No.1361 carbon black,
packing group II, shall be capable of being
electrically earthed. Any metal contact capable of
causing electrochemical corrosion shall be
avoided.
6.8.2.1.28 Protection of fittings mounted on the upper part
of the tank
The fittings and accessories mounted on the upper
part of the tank shall be protected against damage
caused by overturning. This protection may take
the form of strengthening rings, protective
canopies or transverse or longitudinal members so
shaped that effective protection is given.
6.8.2.1.29 (Reserved)
6.8.2.2 Items of equipment
6.8.2.2.1 Suitable non-metallic materials may be used to manufacture service and structural equipment. Welded
elements shall be attached to the shell in such a way that tearing of the shell is prevented.
The items of equipment shall be so arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off
or damaged during carriage or handling. They shall exhibit a suitable degree of safety comparable to
that of the shells themselves, and shall in particular:
– be compatible with the substances carried; and
– meet the requirements of 6.8.2.1.1.
Piping shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to thermal
expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration.
As many operating parts as possible shall be
served by the smallest possible number of
openings in the shell. The leakproofness of the
service equipment including the closure (cover)
of the inspection openings shall be ensured even
in the event of overturning of the tank, taking into
account the forces generated by an impact (such
as acceleration and dynamic pressure). Limited
release of the tank contents due to a pressure peak
during the impact is however allowed.
The leakproofness of the service equipment shall
be ensured even in the event of the overturning of
the tank-container.
The gaskets shall be made of a material compatible with the substance carried and shall be replaced
as soon as their effectiveness is impaired, for example as a result of ageing.
Gaskets ensuring the leakproofness of fittings requiring manipulation during normal use of tanks shall
be so designed and arranged that manipulation of the fittings incorporating them does not damage
them.
– 493 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 494 –
6.8.2.2.2 Each bottom-filling or bottom-discharge opening in tanks which are referred to, in Column (12) of
Table A of Chapter 3.2, with a tank code including the letter “A” in its third part (see 4.3.4.1.1) shall
be equipped with at least two mutually independent closures, mounted in series, comprising
– an external stop-valve with piping made of a malleable metal material and
– a closing device at the end of each pipe which may be a screw-threaded plug, a blank flange or
an equivalent device. This closing device shall be sufficiently tight so that the substance is
contained without loss. Measures shall be taken to enable the safe release of pressure in the
discharge pipe before the closing device is completely removed.
Each bottom-filling or bottom-discharge opening in tanks which are referred to, in Column (12) of
Table A of Chapter 3.2, with a tank code including the letter “B” in its third part (see 4.3.3.1.1 or
4.3.4.1.1) shall be equipped with at least three mutually independent closures, mounted in series,
comprising
– an internal stop-valve, i.e. a stop-valve mounted inside the shell or in a welded flange or
companion flange;
– an external stop-valve or an equivalent device7
one at the end of each pipe as near as possible to the shell
and
– a closing device at the end of each pipe which may be a screw-threaded plug, a blank flange or
an equivalent device. This closing device shall be sufficiently tight so that the substance is
contained without loss. Measures shall be taken to enable the safe release of pressure in the
discharge pipe before the closing device is completely removed.
However, in the case of tanks intended for the carriage of certain crystallizable or highly viscous
substances and shells fitted with a protective lining, the internal stop-valve may be replaced by an
external stop-valve provided with additional protection.
The internal stop-valve shall be operable either from above or from below. Its setting – open or closed
– shall so far as possible in each case be capable of being verified from the ground. Internal stop-valve
control devices shall be so designed as to prevent any unintended opening through impact or an
inadvertent act.
The internal shut-off device shall continue to be effective in the event of damage to the external control
device.
In order to avoid any loss of contents in the event of damage to the external fittings (pipes, lateral shut-
off devices), the internal stop-valve and its seating shall be protected against the danger of being
wrenched off by external stresses or shall be so designed as to resist them. The filling and discharge
devices (including flanges or threaded plugs) and protective caps (if any) shall be capable of being
secured against any unintended opening.
The position and/or direction of closure of shut-off devices shall be clearly apparent8.
All openings of tanks which are referred to in Column (12) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, by a tank code
including letter “C” or “D” in its third part (see 4.3.3.1.1 and 4.3.4.1.1) shall be situated above the
surface level of the liquid. These tanks shall have no pipes or pipe connections below the surface level
of the liquid. The cleaning openings (fist-holes) are, however, permitted in the lower part of the shell
for tanks referred to by a tank code including letter “C” in its third part. This opening shall be capable
of being sealed by a flange so closed as to be leakproof and whose design shall be approved by the
competent authority.
7 In the case of tank-containers of less than 1 m³ capacity, the external stop-valve or other equivalent device may
be replaced by a blank flange.
8 The mode of operation of dry break couplings is self-closing. Consequently, an open/closed indicator is not
necessary. This type of closure shall only be used as a second or third closure.
– 494 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 495 –
6.8.2.2.3 Tanks that are not hermetically closed may be fitted with vacuum valves to avoid an unacceptable
negative internal pressure; these vacuum-relief valves shall be set to relieve at a vacuum setting not
greater than the vacuum pressure for which the tank has been designed (see 6.8.2.1.7). Hermetically
closed tanks shall not be fitted with vacuum valves. However, tanks of the tank code SGAH, S4AH or
L4BH, fitted with vacuum valves which open at a negative pressure of not less than 21 kPa (0.21 bar)
shall be considered as being hermetically closed. For tanks intended for the carriage of solid substances
(powdery or granular) of packing groups II or III only, which do not liquefy during transport, the
negative pressure may be reduced to not less than 5 kPa (0.05 bar).
Vacuum valves and breather devices (see 6.8.2.2.6) used on tanks intended for the carriage of
substances meeting the flash-point criteria of Class 3, shall prevent the immediate passage of flame
into the shell by means of a suitable protective device, or the shell of the tank shall be explosion
pressure shock resistant, which means being capable of withstanding without leakage, but allowing
deformation, an explosion resulting from the passage of the flame.
If the protective device consists of a suitable flame trap or flame arrester, it shall be positioned as close
as possible to the shell or the shell compartment. For multi-compartment tanks, each compartment shall
be protected separately.
Flame arresters for breather devices shall be suitable for the vapour emitted by the substances carried
(maximum experimental safety gap – MESG), temperature range and application. They shall meet the
requirements and tests of EN ISO 16852:2016 (Flame arresters – Performance requirements, test
methods and limits for use) for the situations given in the table below:
Application/Installation Testing requirements
Direct communication with atmosphere EN ISO 16852:2016, 7.3.2.1
Communication to pipe work system EN ISO 16852:2016, 7.3.3.2 (applies to
valve/flame arrester combinations when tested
together)
EN ISO 16852:2016, 7.3.3.3 (applies to flame
arresters tested independently of the valves)
6.8.2.2.4 The shell or each of its compartments shall be provided with an opening large enough to permit
inspection.
These openings for extra-large tank-containers
intended for the carriage of substances in the liquid
state which are not divided by partitions or surge
plates into sections of not more than 7 500 litres
capacity shall be provided with closures designed
for a test pressure of at least 0.4 MPa (4 bar).
Hinged dome covers shall not be permitted for
extra-large tank-containers with a test pressure of
more than 0.6 MPa (6 bar).
6.8.2.2.5 (Reserved)
6.8.2.2.6 Tanks intended for the carriage of liquids having a vapour pressure of not more than 110 kPa (1.1 bar)
(absolute) at 50 oC shall have a breather device and a safety device to prevent the contents from spilling
out if the tank overturns; otherwise they shall conform to 6.8.2.2.7 or 6.8.2.2.8.
6.8.2.2.7 Tanks intended for the carriage of liquids having a vapour pressure of more than 110 kPa (1.1 bar) at
50 °C and a boiling point of more than 35 °C shall have a safety valve set at not less than 150 kPa (1.5
bar) (gauge pressure) and which shall be fully open at a pressure not exceeding the test pressure;
otherwise they shall conform to 6.8.2.2.8.
– 495 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 496 –
6.8.2.2.8 Tanks intended for the carriage of liquids having a boiling point of not more than 35 °C shall have a
safety valve set at not less than 300 kPa (3 bar) gauge pressure and which shall be fully open at a
pressure not exceeding the test pressure; otherwise they shall be hermetically closed9.
6.8.2.2.9 Movable parts such as covers, closures, etc., which are liable to come into frictional or percussive
contact with aluminium shells intended for the carriage of flammable liquids having a flash-point of not
more than 60 °C or for the carriage of flammable gases shall not be made of unprotected corrodible
steel.
6.8.2.2.10 If tanks required to be hermetically closed are equipped with safety valves, these shall be preceded by
a bursting disc and the following conditions shall be observed:
Except for tanks intended for the carriage of compressed, liquefied or dissolved gases where the
arrangement of the bursting disc and safety valve satisfy the requirements of 6.8.3.2.9, burst pressures
of the bursting disc shall satisfy the following requirements:
– the minimum burst pressure at 20 °C, tolerances included, shall be greater than or equal to 0.8
times the test pressure;
– the maximum burst pressure at 20 °C, tolerances included, shall be less than or equal to 1.1 times
the test pressure; and
– the burst pressure at the maximum service temperature shall be greater than the maximum
working pressure.
A pressure gauge or another suitable indicator shall be provided in the space between the bursting disc
and the safety valve, to enable detection of any rupture, perforation or leakage of the disc.
6.8.2.2.11 Glass level-gauges and level-gauges made of other fragile material, which are in direct communication
with the contents of the shell, shall not be used.
6.8.2.3 Type examination and type approval
6.8.2.3.1 Type examination
The provisions in 1.8.7.2.1 shall be applied.
A manufacturer of service equipment for which a standard is listed in the table in 6.8.2.6.1 or 6.8.3.6
may request a separate type examination. This separate type examination shall be taken into account
during the type examination of the tank.
6.8.2.3.2 Type approval
The competent authority shall issue in respect of each new type of tank-vehicle, demountable tank, tank-
container, tank swap body, battery-vehicle or MEGC a certificate attesting that the type, including
fastenings, which has been examined, is suitable for the purpose for which it is intended and meets the
construction requirements of 6.8.2.1, the equipment requirements of 6.8.2.2 and the special conditions
for the classes of substances carried.
The certificate shall show in addition to the items listed in 1.8.7.2.2.1:
– an approval number for the type which shall consist of the distinguishing sign used on vehicles
in international road traffic10 of the State in whose territory the approval was granted and a
registration number;
– the tank code in accordance with 4.3.3.1.1 or 4.3.4.1.1;
9 For the definition of “hermetically closed tank” see 1.2.1.
10 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 496 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 497 –
– the alphanumerical codes of special provisions of construction (TC), equipment (TE) and type
approval (TA) of 6.8.4 which are shown in column (13) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for those
substances for the carriage of which the tank has been approved;
– if required, the substances and/or group of substances for the carriage of which the tank has been
approved. These shall be shown with their chemical name or the corresponding collective entry
(see 2.1.1.2), together with their classification (class, classification code and packing group).
With the exception of substances of Class 2 and those listed in 4.3.4.1.3, the listing of approved
substances may be dispensed with. In such cases, groups of substances permitted on the basis of
the tank code shown in the rationalised approach in 4.3.4.1.2 shall be accepted for carriage taking
into account any relevant special provision.
NOTE: Annex B of EN 12972:2018 describing the type as well as the list of authorized service
equipment for the tank type, or equivalent documents shall be attached to or included in the certificate.
The substances referred to in the certificate or the groups of substances approved according to the
rationalised approach shall, in general, be compatible with the characteristics of the tank. A reservation
shall be included in the certificate if it was not possible to investigate this compatibility exhaustively
when the type approval was issued.
A copy of the certificate shall be attached to the tank record of each tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC
constructed (see 4.3.2.1.7).
When the manufacturer of service equipment had a separate type examination carried out and when the
manufacturer requests it, the competent authority shall issue a certificate attesting that the type which
has been examined meets the standard listed in the table in 6.8.2.6.1 or 6.8.3.6.
6.8.2.3.3 If the tanks, battery-vehicles or MECGs are manufactured in series without modification this approval
shall be valid for the tanks, battery-vehicles or MECGs manufactured in series or according to the
prototype.
A type approval may however serve for the approval of tanks with limited variations of the design that
either reduce the loads and stresses on the tanks (e.g. reduced pressure, reduced mass, reduced volume)
or increase the safety of the structure (e.g. increased shell thickness, more surge-plates, decreased
diameter of openings). The limited variations shall be clearly described in the type approval certificate.
6.8.2.3.4 In accordance with 1.8.7.2.2.3, the competent authority shall issue a supplementary approval certificate
for the modification in the case of a modification of a tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC with a valid,
expired or withdrawn type approval.
6.8.2.4 Inspections and tests
6.8.2.4.1 Shells and their equipment shall either together or separately undergo an initial inspection before being
put into service. This inspection shall include:
– a check of conformity to the approved type;
– a check of the design characteristics11
– an examination of the internal and external conditions;
– a hydraulic pressure test12 at the test pressure indicated on the plate prescribed in 6.8.2.5.1; and
– a leakproofness test and a check of satisfactory operation of the equipment.
Except in the case of Class 2, the test pressure for the hydraulic pressure test depends on the calculation
pressure and shall be at least equal to the pressure indicated below:
11 The check of the design characteristics shall also include, for shells requiring a test pressure of 1 MPa (10 bar)
or higher, the taking of weld test-pieces (work samples) in accordance with 6.8.2.1.23 and the tests prescribed in 6.8.5.
12 In special cases, if agreed by the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a pressure
test using gas, or if agreed by the inspection body, by using another liquid, where such an operation does not present
any danger.
– 497 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 498 –
Calculation pressure (bar) Test pressure (bar)
G13 G13
1.5 1.5
2.65 2.65
4 4
10 4
15 4
21 10 (414)
The minimum test pressures for Class 2 are given in the table of gases and gas mixtures in 4.3.3.2.5.
The hydraulic pressure test shall be carried out on the shell as a whole and separately on each
compartment of compartmented shells.
The test shall be carried out on each compartment
at a pressure at least equal to:
– 1.3 times the maximum working pressure;
or
– 1.3 times the static pressure of the
substance to be carried but not less than
1.3 times the static pressure of water with
a minimum of 20 kPa (0.2 bar) for
gravity-discharge tanks according to
6.8.2.1.14 (a).
The hydraulic pressure test shall be carried out before the installation of a thermal insulation as may
be necessary.
If the shells and their equipment are tested separately, they shall be jointly subjected to a leakproofness
test after assembly in accordance with 6.8.2.4.3.
The leakproofness test shall be carried out separately on each compartment of compartmented shells.
6.8.2.4.2 Shells and their equipment shall undergo periodic inspections no later than every
six years. five years.
These periodic inspections shall include:
– An external and internal examination;
– A leakproofness test in accordance with 6.8.2.4.3 of the shell with its equipment and check of the
satisfactory operation of all the equipment;
– As a general rule, a hydraulic pressure test12 (for the test pressure for the shells and compartments if
applicable, see 6.8.2.4.1).
Sheathing for thermal or other insulation shall be removed only to the extent required for reliable
appraisal of the characteristics of the shell.
In the case of tanks intended for the carriage of powdery or granular substances, and with the agreement
of the inspection body, the periodic hydraulic pressure tests may be omitted and replaced by
13 G = minimum calculation pressure according to the general requirements of 6.8.2.1.14 (see 4.3.4.1).
14 Minimum test pressure for UN No. 1744 bromine or UN No. 1744 bromine solution.
12 In special cases, if agreed by the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a pressure
test using gas, or if agreed by the inspection body, by using another liquid, where such an operation does not present
any danger.
– 498 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 499 –
leakproofness tests in accordance with 6.8.2.4.3, at an effective internal pressure at least equal to the
maximum working pressure.
Protective linings shall be visually examined for defects. In case defects appear the condition of the
lining shall be evaluated by appropriate test(s).
6.8.2.4.3 Shells and their equipment shall undergo intermediate inspections no later than
three years two and a half years
after the initial inspection and each periodic inspection.
However, the intermediate inspection may be performed at any time before the specified date.
If an intermediate inspection is performed more than three months before the specified date, another
intermediate inspection shall be performed no later than
three years two and a half years
after this earlier date or alternatively a periodic inspection may be performed in accordance with
6.8.2.4.2.
These intermediate inspections shall include a leakproofness test of the shell with its equipment and
check of the satisfactory operation of all the equipment. For this purpose the tank shall be subjected to
an effective internal pressure at least equal to the maximum working pressure. For tanks intended for
the carriage of liquids or solids in the granular or powdery state, when a gas is used for the leakproofness
test it shall be carried out at a pressure at least equal to 25 % of the maximum working pressure. In all
cases, it shall not be less than 20 kPa (0.2 bar) (gauge pressure).
For tanks equipped with breather devices and a safety device to prevent the contents spilling out if the
tank overturns, the leakproofness test shall be carried out at a pressure at least equal to the static pressure
of the densest substance to be carried, the static pressure of water or 20 kPa (0.2 bar) whichever is the
highest.
The leakproofness test shall be carried out separately on each compartment of compartmented shells.
Protective linings shall be visually examined for defects. In case defects appear the condition of the
lining shall be evaluated by appropriate test(s).
6.8.2.4.4 When the safety of the tank or of its equipment may have been impaired as a result of repairs, alterations
or accident, an exceptional inspection shall be carried out. If an exceptional inspection fulfilling the
requirements of 6.8.2.4.2 has been performed, then the exceptional inspection may be considered to be
a periodic inspection. If an exceptional inspection fulfilling the requirements of 6.8.2.4.3 has been
performed then the exceptional inspection may be considered to be an intermediate inspection.
6.8.2.4.5 Certificates shall be issued by the inspection body referred to in 6.8.1.5.4 or 6.8.1.5.6 and shall show
the results of the inspections in accordance with 6.8.2.4.1 to 6.8.2.4.4, even in the case of negative
results. These certificates shall refer to the list of the substances permitted for carriage in this tank or to
the tank code and the alphanumeric codes of special provisions in accordance with 6.8.2.3.2.
A copy of these certificates shall be attached to the tank record of each tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC
tested (see 4.3.2.1.7).
6.8.2.5 Marking
6.8.2.5.1 Every tank shall be fitted with a corrosion-resistant metal plate permanently attached to the tank in a
place readily accessible for inspection. The following particulars at least shall be marked on the plate
by stamping or by any other similar method. These particulars may be engraved directly on the walls of
the shell itself, if the walls are so reinforced that the strength of the shell is not impaired15:
15 Add the units of measurement after the numerical values.
– 499 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 500 –
– approval number;
– manufacturer’s name or mark;
– manufacturer’s serial number;
– year of manufacture;
– test pressure (gauge pressure);
– external design pressure (see 6.8.2.1.7);
– capacity of the shell – in the case of multiple-compartment shells, the capacity of each
compartment –, followed by the symbol “S” when the shells or the compartments of more than
7 500 litres are divided by surge plates into sections of not more than 7 500 litres capacity;
– design temperature (only if above +50 °C or below -20 °C);
– date and type of the most recent inspection: “month, year” followed by a “P” when the inspection
is the initial inspection or a periodic inspection in accordance with 6.8.2.4.1 and 6.8.2.4.2, or
“month, year” followed by an “L” when the inspection is an intermediate inspection in
accordance with 6.8.2.4.3;
– stamp of the inspection body that carried out the inspection;
– material of the shell and reference to materials standards, if available and, where appropriate, the
protective lining;
– test pressure on the shell as a whole and test
pressure by compartment in MPa or bar
(gauge pressure) where the pressure by
compartment is less than the pressure on the
shell.
In addition, the maximum working pressure allowed shall be inscribed on pressure-filled or pressure-
discharge tanks.
6.8.2.5.2 The following particulars shall be inscribed on the
tank-vehicle (on the tank itself or on plates)15:
– name of owner or operator;
– unladen mass of the tank-vehicle; and
– maximum permissible mass of the tank-
vehicle.
The following particulars shall be inscribed on a
demountable tank (on the tank itself or on plates)15:
– name of owner or operator;
– “demountable tank”;
– tare of the tank;
– maximum permissible gross mass of the tank;
– for the substances according to 4.3.4.1.3, the
proper shipping name of the substance(s)
accepted for carriage;
– tank code according to 4.3.4.1.1; and
– for substances other than those according to
4.3.4.1.3, the alphanumeric codes of all special
provisions TC and TE which are shown in column
The following particulars shall be inscribed on
the tank-container (on the tank itself or on
plates)15:
– names of owner and of operator;
– capacity of the shell;
– tare;
– maximum permissible gross mass;
– for the substances according to 4.3.4.1.3, the
proper shipping name of the substance(s)
accepted for carriage;
– tank code according to 4.3.4.1.1; and
– for substances other than those according to
4.3.4.1.3, the alphanumeric codes of all
special provisions TC and TE which are
shown in column (13) of Table A of Chapter
3.2 for the substances to be carried in the tank.
15 Add the units of measurement after the numerical values.
– 500 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 501 –
(13) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for the substances
to be carried in the tank.
6.8.2.6 Requirements for tanks which are designed, constructed, inspected and tested according to referenced
standards
NOTE: Persons or bodies identified in standards as having responsibilities in accordance with ADR
shall meet the requirements of ADR.
6.8.2.6.1 Design and construction
Since 1 January 2009 the use of the referenced standards has been mandatory. Exceptions are dealt with
in 6.8.2.7 and 6.8.3.7.
Type approval certificates shall be issued in accordance with 1.8.7 and 6.8.2.3. For the issuance of a
type approval certificate, one standard applicable according to the indication in column (4) shall be
chosen from the table below. If more than one standard may be applied, only one of them shall be
chosen.
Column (3) shows the paragraphs of Chapter 6.8 to which the standard conforms.
Column (5) gives the latest date when existing type approvals shall be withdrawn according to
1.8.7.2.2.2; if no date is shown the type approval remains valid until it expires.
Standards shall be applied in accordance with 1.1.5. They shall be applied in full unless otherwise
specified in the table below.
The scope of application of each standard is defined in the scope clause of the standard unless otherwise
specified in the table below.
– 501 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 502 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements the
standard complies
with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date
for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
For design and construction of tanks
EN 14025:2003 +
AC:2005
Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Metallic pressure tanks – Design and
construction
6.8.2.1 Between 1
January 2005 and
30 June 2009
EN 14025:2008 Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Metallic pressure tanks – Design and
construction
6.8.2.1 and 6.8.3.1 Between 1 July
2009 and
31 December
2016
EN 14025:2013 Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Metallic pressure tanks – Design and
construction
6.8.2.1 and 6.8.3.1 Between 1
January 2015 and
31 December
2018
EN 14025:2013+
A1:2016 (except Annex
B)
Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Metallic pressure tanks – Design and
construction
6.8.2.1 and 6.8.3.1 Between 1
January 2017 and
31 December
2021
EN 14025:2018 +
AC:2020 Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Metallic pressure tanks – Design and
construction
NOTE: Materials of shells shall at least be
attested by a type 3.1 certificate issued in
accordance with standard EN 10204.
6.8.2.1 and 6.8.3.1 Until further
notice
EN 12972:2018 Tanks for transport of dangerous goods –
Testing, inspection and marking of metallic
tanks
6.8.2.3 Mandatorily
from 1 January
2022
EN 13094:2004 Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Metallic tanks with a working pressure
not exceeding 0.5 bar – Design and
construction
6.8.2.1 Between 1
January 2005 and
31 December
2009
EN 13094:2008 +
AC:2008
Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Metallic tanks with a working pressure
not exceeding 0.5 bar – Design and
construction
6.8.2.1 Between 1
January 2010 and
31 December
2018
EN 13094:2015 Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Metallic tanks with a working pressure
not exceeding 0.5 bar – Design and
construction
NOTE: The guideline on the website of the
secretariat of the United Nations Economic
Commission for Europe
(https://unece.org/guidelines-telematics-
application-standards-construction-and-
approval-vehicles-calculation-risks) also
applies.
6.8.2.1 Between 1
January 2017 and
31 December
2024
EN 13094:2020 +
A1:2022
Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Metallic gravity-discharge Design and
construction
6.8.2.1 Until further
notice
EN 12493:2001 (except
Annex C)
Welded steel tanks for liquefied petroleum
gas (LPG) – Road tankers – Design and
manufacture
NOTE: Road tankers is to be understood
in the meaning of “fixed tanks” and
“demountable tanks” as per ADR.
6.8.2.1 (with the
exception of
6.8.2.1.17); 6.8.2.4.1
(with the exclusion of
the leakproofness
test); 6.8.2.5.1,
6.8.3.1 and 6.8.3.5.1
Between
1 January 2005
and 31 December
2010
31 December
2012
– 502 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 503 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements the
standard complies
with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date
for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN 12493:2008 (except
Annex C)
LPG equipment and accessories – Welded
steel tanks for liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) – Road tankers – Design and
manufacture
NOTE: Road tankers is to be understood
in the meaning of “fixed tanks” and
“demountable tanks” as per ADR.
6.8.2.1 (with the
exception of
6.8.2.1.17), 6.8.2.5,
6.8.3.1, 6.8.3.5,
6.8.5.1 to 6.8.5.3
Between
1 January 2010
and 31 December
2013
31 December
2014
EN 12493:2008 +
A1:2012 (except Annex
C)
LPG equipment and accessories –Welded
steel tanks for liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) – Road tankers – Design and
manufacture
NOTE: Road tankers is to be understood
in the meaning of “fixed tanks” and
“demountable tanks” as per ADR.
6.8.2.1 (with the
exception of
6.8.2.1.17), 6.8.2.5,
6.8.3.1, 6.8.3.5,
6.8.5.1 to 6.8.5.3
Until 31
December 2013
31 December
2015
EN 12493:2013 (except
Annex C)
LPG equipment and accessories – Welded
steel tanks for liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) – Road tankers – Design and
manufacture
NOTE: Road tankers is to be understood
in the meaning of “fixed tanks” and
“demountable tanks” as per ADR.
6.8.2.1, 6.8.2.5,
6.8.3.1, 6.8.3.5,
6.8.5.1 to 6.8.5.3
Between 1
January 2015 and
31 December
2017
31 December
2018
EN 12493:2013 +
A1:2014 + AC:2015
(except Annex C)
LPG equipment and accessories – Welded
steel tanks for liquefied petroleum gas
(LPG) – Road tankers – Design and
manufacture
NOTE: Road tankers is to be understood
in the meaning of “fixed tanks” and
“demountable tanks” as per ADR.
6.8.2.1, 6.8.2.5,
6.8.3.1, 6.8.3.5,
6.8.5.1 to 6.8.5.3
Between 1
January 2017 and
31 December
2022
EN 12493:2013+
A2:2018 (except Annex
C)
LPG equipment and accessories – Welded
steel pressure vessels for LPG road tankers
– Design and manufacture
NOTE: Road tanker is to be understood in
the meaning of “fixed tanks” and
“demountable tanks” as per ADR.
6.8.2.1, 6.8.2.5
6.8.3.1, 6.8.3.5
6.8.5.1 to 6.8.5.3
Between 1
January 2021 and
31 December
2024
EN 12493:2020 (except
Annex C) LPG equipment and accessories – Welded
steel pressure vessels for LPG road tankers
– Design and construction
NOTE: Road tankers is to be understood
in the meaning of “fixed tanks” and
“demountable tanks” as per ADR.
6.8.2.1, 6.8.2.5,
6.8.3.1, 6.8.3.5,
6.8.5.1 to 6.8.5.3
Until further
notice
EN 13530-2:2002 Cryogenic vessels – Large transportable
vacuum insulated vessels – Part 2: Design,
fabrication, inspection and testing
6.8.2.1 (with the
exception of
6.8.2.1.17), 6.8.2.4,
6.8.3.1 and 6.8.3.4
Between
1 January 2005
and 30 June 2007
EN 13530-2:2002 +
A1:2004
Cryogenic vessels – Large transportable
vacuum insulated vessels – Part 2: Design,
fabrication, inspection and testing
NOTE: Standards EN 1252-1:1998 and
EN 1626 referenced in this standard are
also applicable to closed cryogenic
receptacles for the carriage of UN No. 1972
(METHANE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID or
NATURAL GAS, REFRIGERATED
LIQUID)..
6.8.2.1 (with the
exception of
6.8.2.1.17), 6.8.2.4,
6.8.3.1 and 6.8.3.4
Until further
notice
– 503 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 504 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements the
standard complies
with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date
for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN 14398-2:2003
(except Table 1)
Cryogenic vessels – Large transportable
non-vacuum insulated vessels – Part 2:
Design, fabrication, inspection and testing
NOTE: This standard shall not be used for
those gases which are carried at
temperatures below -100 °C.
6.8.2.1 (with the
exception of
6.8.2.1.17, 6.8.2.1.19
and 6.8.2.1.20),
6.8.2.4, 6.8.3.1 and
6.8.3.4
Between
1 January 2005
and 31 December
2016
EN 14398-2:2003 +
A2:2008
Cryogenic vessels – Large transportable
non-vacuum insulated vessels – Part 2:
Design, fabrication, inspection and testing
NOTE: This standard shall not be used for
those gases which are carried at
temperatures below -100 °C.
6.8.2.1 (with the
exception of
6.8.2.1.17, 6.8.2.1.19
and 6.8.2.1.20),
6.8.2.4, 6.8.3.1 and
6.8.3.4
Until further
notice
For equipment
EN 14432:2006 Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Tank equipment for the transport of liquid
chemicals – Product discharge and air inlet
valves
6.8.2.2.1 Between 1
January 2009 and
31 December
2018
EN 14432:2014 Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Tank equipment for the transport of liquid
chemicals and liquefied gases – Product
discharge and air inlet valves
NOTE: This standard may also be used for
gravity-discharge tanks.
6.8.2.2.1, 6.8.2.2.2
and 6.8.2.3.2
Until further
notice
EN 14433:2006 Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Tank equipment for the transport of liquid
chemicals – Foot valves
6.8.2.2.1 Between
1 January 2009
and 31 December
2018
EN 14433:2014 Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Tank equipment for the transport of liquid
chemicals and liquefied gases – Foot valves
NOTE: This standard may also be used for
gravity-discharge tanks.
6.8.2.2.1, 6.8.2.2.2
and 6.8.2.3.2
Until further
notice
EN 12252:2000 Equipping of LPG road tankers
NOTE: Road tankers is to be understood
in the meaning of “fixed tanks” and
“demountable tanks” as per ADR.
6.8.3.2 (with the
exception of
6.8.3.2.3)
Between
1 January 2005
and 31 December
2010
31 December
2012
EN 12252:2005 +
A1:2008
LPG equipment and accessories –
Equipping of LPG road tankers
NOTE: Road tankers is to be understood
in the meaning of “fixed tanks” and
“demountable tanks” as per ADR.
6.8.3.2 (with the
exception of
6.8.3.2.3) and
6.8.3.4.9
Between 1
January 2011 and
31 December
2018
EN 12252:2014 LPG Equipment and accessories –
Equipping of LPG road tankers
NOTE 1: Road tanker is to be understood
in the meaning of “fixed tanks” and
“demountable tanks” as per ADR.
NOTE 2: Safety valves are mandatory
from 1 January 2024.
6.8.3.2 and 6.8.3.4.9 Between 1
January 2017 and
31 December
2024
EN
12252:2022
LPG equipment and accessories –
Equipping of LPG road tankers
NOTE 1: Road tankers is to be understood
in the meaning of “fixed tanks” and
“demountable tanks” as per ADR.
NOTE 2: Safety valves are mandatory
from 1 January 2024.
6.8.3.2 and 6.8.3.4.9 Until further
notice
EN 14129:2014 LPG Equipment and accessories – Pressure
relief valves for LPG pressure vessels
6.8.2.1.1 and 6.8.3.2.9 Until further
notice
– 504 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 505 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements the
standard complies
with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date
for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN 1626:2008 (except
valve category B)
Cryogenic vessels – Valves for cryogenic
service
NOTE: This standard is also applicable to
valves for the carriage of UN No 1972
(METHANE, REFRIGERATED LIQUID or
NATURAL GAS, REFRIGERATED
LIQUID).
6.8.2.4 and 6.8.3.4 Until further
notice
EN 13648-1:2008 Cryogenic vessels – Safety devices for
protection against excessive pressure – Part
1: Safety valves for cryogenic service
6.8.2.4, 6.8.3.2.12 and
6.8.3.4
Until further
notice
EN 13082:2001 Tanks for transport of dangerous goods –
Service equipment for tanks – Vapour
transfer valve
6.8.2.2 and 6.8.2.4.1 Between
1 January 2005
and 30 June 2013
31 December
2014
EN 13082:2008
+ A1:2012
Tanks for transport of dangerous goods –
Service equipment for tanks – Vapour
transfer valve
6.8.2.2 and 6.8.2.4.1 Until further
notice
EN 13308:2002 Tanks for transport of dangerous goods –
Service equipment for tanks – Non pressure
balanced footvalve
6.8.2.2 and 6.8.2.4.1 Until further
notice
EN 13314:2002 Tanks for transport of dangerous goods –
Service equipment for tanks – Fill hole
cover
6.8.2.2 and 6.8.2.4.1 Until further
notice
EN 13316:2002 Tanks for transport of dangerous goods –
Service equipment for tanks –Pressure
balanced footvalve
6.8.2.2 and 6.8.2.4.1 Until further
notice
EN 13317:2002 (except
for the figure and table
B.2 in Annex B) (The
material shall meet the
requirements of standard
EN 13094:2004, Clause
5.2)
Tanks for transport of dangerous goods –
Service equipment for tanks – Manhole
cover assembly
6.8.2.2 and 6.8.2.4.1 Between
1 January 2005
and 31 December
2010
31 December
2012
EN 13317:2002 +
A1:2006
Tanks for transport of dangerous goods –
Service equipment for tanks – Manhole
cover assembly
6.8.2.2 and 6.8.2.4.1 Between 1
January 2009 and
31 December
2021
EN 13317:2018 Tanks for transport of dangerous goods –
Service equipment for tanks – Manhole
cover assembly
6.8.2.2 and 6.8.2.4.1 Until further
notice
EN 14595:2005 Tanks for transport of dangerous goods –
Service equipment for tanks – Pressure and
vacuum breather vent
6.8.2.2 and 6.8.2.4.1 Between
1 January 2007
and 31 December
2020
EN 14595:2016 Tanks for transport of dangerous goods –
Service equipment – Breather device
6.8.2.2 and 6.8.2.4.1 Until further
notice
EN 16257:2012 Tanks for the transport of dangerous goods
– Service equipment – Footvalve sizes other
than 100 mm dia (nom)
6.8.2.2.1 and 6.8.2.2.2 Until further
notice
EN 13175:2014 LPG Equipment and accessories –
Specification and testing for Liquefied
Petroleum Gas (LPG) pressure vessel
valves and fittings
6.8.2.1.1, 6.8.2.2,
6.8.2.4.1 and 6.8.3.2.3
Between 1
January 2017 and
31 December
2022
EN 13175:2019 (except
clause 6.1.6)
LPG Equipment and accessories –
Specification and testing for Liquefied
Petroleum Gas (LPG) pressure vessel
valves and fittings
6.8.2.1.1, 6.8.2.2,
6.8.2.4.1 and 6.8.3.2.3
Between 1
January 2021 and
31 December
2024
– 505 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 506 –
Reference Title of document
Requirements the
standard complies
with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date
for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN 13175:2019 +
A1:2020
LPG Equipment and accessories –
Specification and testing for Liquefied
Petroleum Gas (LPG) pressure vessel
valves and fittings
6.8.2.1.1, 6.8.2.2,
6.8.2.4.1 and 6.8.3.2.3
Until further
notice
EN ISO 23826:2021 Gas cylinders – Ball valves – Specification
and testing
6.8.2.1.1 and 6.8.2.2.1 Mandatorily
from 1 January
2025
6.8.2.6.2 Type examination, inspection and test
The use of a referenced standard is mandatory.
One standard applicable according to the indication in column (4) shall be chosen from the table below
for the type examination and the inspection and test of tanks.
Column (3) shows the paragraphs of Chapter 6.8 to which the standard conforms.
The standards shall be applied in accordance with 1.1.5.
The scope of application of each standard is defined in the scope clause of the standard unless otherwise
specified in the Table below.
Reference Title of document
Requirements the
standard complies
with
Applicable
(1) (2) (3) (4)
EN 12972:2018 Tanks for transport of dangerous goods – Testing,
inspection and marking of metallic tanks
6.8.2.1.23, 6.8.2.4,
6.8.3.4
Until further notice
EN 14334:2014 LPG equipment and accessories – Inspection and
testing of LPG road tankers
6.8.2.4 (except
6.8.2.4.1), 6.8.3.4.2
and 6.8.3.4.9
Until further notice
– 506 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 507 –
6.8.2.7 Requirements for tanks which are not designed, constructed, inspected and tested according to
referenced standards
To reflect scientific and technical progress or where no standard is referenced in 6.8.2.6 or to deal with
specific aspects not addressed in a standard referenced in 6.8.2.6, the competent authority may recognize
the use of a technical code providing the same level of safety. Tanks shall, however, comply with the
minimum requirements of 6.8.2.
As soon as a standard newly referenced in 6.8.2.6 can be applied, the competent authority shall withdraw
its recognition of the relevant technical code. A transitional period ending no later than the date of entry
into force of the next edition of ADR may be applied.
The competent authority shall transmit to the secretariat of UNECE a list of the technical codes that it
recognises and shall update the list if it changes. The list should include the following details: name and
date of the code, purpose of the code and details of where it may be obtained. The secretariat shall make
this information publicly available on its website.
A standard which has been adopted for reference in a future edition of the ADR may be approved by
the competent authority for use without notifying the UNECE secretariat.
For testing, inspection and marking, the applicable standard referenced in 6.8.2.6 may also be used.
6.8.3 Special requirements applicable to Class 2
6.8.3.1 Construction of shells
6.8.3.1.1 Shells intended for the carriage of compressed or liquefied gases or dissolved gases shall be made of
steel. In the case of weldless shells, by derogation from 6.8.2.1.12 a minimum elongation at fracture of
14 % and also a stress lower than or equal to limits hereafter given according to the material may be
accepted:
(a) When the ratio Re/Rm (of the minimum guaranteed characteristics after heat treatment) is higher
than 0.66 without exceeding 0.85:
0.75 Re;
(b) When the ratio Re/Rm (of the minimum guaranteed characteristics after heat treatment) is higher
than 0.85:
0.5 Rm.
6.8.3.1.2 The requirements of 6.8.5 apply to the materials and construction of welded shells.
6.8.3.1.3 (Reserved)
Construction of battery-vehicles and MEGCs
6.8.3.1.4 Cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders, as elements of a battery-vehicle or MEGC,
shall be constructed in accordance with Chapter 6.2.
NOTE 1: Bundles of cylinders which are not elements of a battery-vehicle or of a MEGC shall be
subject to the requirements of Chapter 6.2.
NOTE 2: Tanks as elements of battery-vehicles and MEGCs shall be constructed in accordance with
6.8.2.1 and 6.8.3.1.
NOTE 3: Demountable tanks16 are not to be considered elements of battery-vehicles or MEGCs.
6.8.3.1.5 Elements and their fastenings
of battery vehicles and the frame of MEGCs
16 For the definition of “demountable tank” see 1.2.1.
– 507 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 508 –
shall be capable of absorbing under the maximum permissible load the forces defined in 6.8.2.1.2. Under
each force the stress at the most severely stressed point of the element and its fastenings shall not exceed
the value defined in 6.2.5.3 for cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders and for tanks
the value of defined in 6.8.2.1.16.
6.8.3.2 Items of equipment
6.8.3.2.1 The discharge pipes of tanks shall be capable of being closed by blank flanges or some other equally
reliable device. For tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases, these blank flanges
or other equally reliable devices may be fitted with pressure-release openings of a maximum diameter
of 1.5 mm.
6.8.3.2.2 Shells intended for the carriage of liquefied gases may be provided with, in addition to the openings
prescribed in 6.8.2.2.2 and 6.8.2.2.4, openings for the fitting of gauges, thermometers, manometers and
with bleed holes, as required for their operation and safety.
6.8.3.2.3 The internal stop-valve of all filling and all discharge openings of tanks
with a capacity greater than 1 m³
intended for the carriage of liquefied flammable or toxic gases shall be instant-closing and shall close
automatically in the event of an unintended movement of the tank or in the event of fire. It shall also be
possible to operate the internal stop-valve by remote control.
However on tanks intended for the carriage of
liquefied non-toxic flammable gases, the
internal stop-valve with remote control may be
replaced by a non-return valve for filling
openings into the vapour phase of the tank only.
The non-return valve shall be positioned
internally in the tank, be spring loaded so that
the valve is closed if the pressure in the filling
line is equal to or lower than the pressure in the
tank and be equipped with appropriate sealing17.
6.8.3.2.4 All openings, other than those accommodating safety valves and closed bleed holes, of tanks intended
for the carriage of liquefied flammable and/or toxic gases shall, if their nominal diameter is more than
1.5 mm, shall be equipped with an internal shut-off device.
6.8.3.2.5 Notwithstanding the requirements of 6.8.2.2.2, 6.8.3.2.3 and 6.8.3.2.4, tanks intended for the carriage
of refrigerated liquefied gases may be equipped with external devices in place of internal devices if the
external devices afford protection against external damage at least equivalent to that afforded by the
wall of the shell.
6.8.3.2.6 If there are thermometers, they shall not project directly into the gas or liquid through the shell.
6.8.3.2.7 Filling and discharge openings situated in the upper part of tanks shall be equipped with, in addition to
what is prescribed in 6.8.3.2.3, a second, external, closing device. This device shall be capable of being
closed by a blank flange or some other equally reliable device.
6.8.3.2.8 Safety valves shall meet the requirements of 6.8.3.2.9 to 6.8.3.2.12 below:
6.8.3.2.9 Tanks intended for the carriage of flammable liquefied gases shall be fitted with safety valves. Tanks
intended for the carriage of compressed gases, non-flammable liquefied gases or dissolved gases, may
be fitted with safety valves. Safety valves, where fitted, shall meet the requirements of 6.8.3.2.9.1 to
6.8.3.2.9.5.
6.8.3.2.9.1 Safety valves shall be capable of opening automatically under a pressure between 0.9 and 1.0 times the
test pressure of the tank to which they are fitted. They shall be of such a type as to resist dynamic
stresses, including liquid surge. The use of dead weight or counterweight valves is prohibited. The
17 The use of metal to metal sealing is not permitted.
– 508 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 509 –
required capacity of the safety valves shall be calculated in accordance with the formula contained in
6.7.3.8.1.1 and the safety valve shall conform at least to the requirement of 6.7.3.9.
Safety valves shall be designed to prevent or be protected from the entry of water or other foreign matter
which may impair their correct functioning. Any protection shall not impair their performance.
6.8.3.2.9.2 If tanks required to be hermetically closed are equipped with safety valves, these shall be preceded by
a bursting disc and the following conditions shall be met:
(a) The minimum burst pressure at 20 °C, tolerances included, shall be greater than or equal to 1.0
times the test pressure;
(b) The maximum burst pressure at 20 °C, tolerances included, shall be equal to 1.1 times the test
pressure; and
(c) The bursting disc shall not reduce the required discharge capacity or correct operation of the
safety valve.
A pressure gauge or another suitable indicator shall be provided in the space between the bursting disc
and the safety valve, to enable detection of any rupture, perforation or leakage of the disc.
6.8.3.2.9.3 Safety valves shall be directly connected to the shell or directly connected to the outlet of the bursting
disc.
6.8.3.2.9.4 Each safety valve inlet shall be situated on top of the shell in a position as near to the transverse centre
of the shell as reasonably practicable. All safety valve inlets shall, under maximum filling conditions,
be situated in the vapour space of the shell and the devices shall be so arranged as to ensure that the
escaping vapour is discharged unrestrictedly. For flammable liquefied gases, the escaping vapour shall
be directed away from the shell in such a manner that it cannot impinge upon the shell. Protective
devices which deflect the flow of vapour are permissible provided the required safety valve capacity is
not reduced.
6.8.3.2.9.5 Arrangements shall be made to protect the safety valves from damage caused by the tank overturning
or striking overhead obstacles. Where possible, safety valves shall not project outside of the profile of
the shell.
6.8.3.2.9.6 Safety valve mark
6.8.3.2.9.6.1 Tanks fitted with safety valves in accordance with 6.8.3.2.9.1 to 6.8.3.2.9.5 shall display the mark as
set out in 6.8.3.2.9.6.3 to 6.8.3.2.9.6.6.
6.8.3.2.9.6.2 Tanks not fitted with safety valves in accordance with 6.8.3.2.9.1 to 6.8.3.2.9.5 shall not display the
mark as set out in 6.8.3.2.9.6.3 to 6.8.3.2.9.6.6.
6.8.3.2.9.6.3 The mark shall consist of a white square with minimum dimensions of 250 mm × 250 mm. The line
inside the edge shall be black, parallel and approximately 12.5 mm from the outside of that line to the
outside edge of the mark. The letters “SV” shall be black, a minimum of 120 mm high and have a
minimum stroke thickness of 12 mm.
– 509 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 510 –
6.8.3.2.9.6.4 For demountable tanks For tank-containers
with a capacity of not more than 3 000 litres the mark may be reduced in size to not less than 120 mm
× 120 mm. The line inside the edge shall be black, parallel and approximately 6 mm from the outside
of that line to the outside edge of the mark. The letters “SV” shall be black, a minimum of 60 mm high
and have a minimum stroke thickness of 6 mm.
6.8.3.2.9.6.5 The material used shall be weather-resistant and it shall be ensured that the mark is durable. The mark
shall not become detached from its mount in the event of 15 minutes’ engulfment in fire. It shall remain
affixed irrespective of the orientation of the tank.
6.8.3.2.9.6.6 The letters “SV” shall be indelible and shall remain legible after 15 minutes’ engulfment in fire.
6.8.3.2.9.6.7 The marks shall be displayed on both sides and
the rear of fixed tanks (tank-vehicles) and on
both sides and both ends of demountable tanks.
The marks shall be displayed on both sides and both
ends of tank-containers. For tank-containers with a
capacity of not more than 3 000 litres the marks may
be displayed either on both sides or on both ends.
6.8.3.2.10 Where tanks are intended for carriage by sea, the requirements of 6.8.3.2.9 shall not prohibit the fitting
of safety valves conforming to the IMDG Code.
6.8.3.2.11 Tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases shall be equipped with two or more
independent safety valves capable of opening at the maximum working pressure indicated on the tank.
Two of these safety valves shall be individually sized to allow the gases formed by evaporation during
normal operation to escape from the tank in such a way that the pressure does not at any time exceed
by more than 10 % the working pressure indicated on the tank.
One of the safety valves may be replaced by a bursting disc which shall be such as to burst at the test
pressure.
In the event of loss of the vacuum in a double-walled tank, or of destruction of 20 % of the insulation
of a single-walled tank, the combination of the pressure relief devices shall permit an outflow such that
the pressure in the shell cannot exceed the test pressure. The provisions of 6.8.2.1.7 shall not apply to
vacuum-insulated tanks.
6.8.3.2.12 These pressure relief devices of tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases shall be
so designed as to function faultlessly even at their lowest working temperature. The reliability of their
operation at that temperature shall be established and checked either by testing each device or by testing
a specimen device of each design-type.
6.8.3.2.13 The valves of demountable tanks that can be rolled
shall be provided with protective caps.
– 510 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 511 –
Thermal insulation
6.8.3.2.14 If tanks intended for the carriage of liquefied gases are equipped with thermal insulation, such insulation
shall consist of either:
– a sun shield covering not less than the upper third but not more than the upper half of the tank
surface and separated from the shell by an air space at least 4 cm across; or
– a complete cladding, of adequate thickness, of insulating materials.
6.8.3.2.15 Tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases shall be thermally insulated. Thermal
insulation shall be ensured by means of a continuous sheathing. If the space between the shell and the
sheathing is under vacuum (vacuum insulation), the protective sheathing shall be so designed as to
withstand without deformation an external pressure of at least 100 kPa (1 bar) (gauge pressure). By
derogation from the definition of “calculation pressure” in 1.2.1, external and internal reinforcing
devices may be taken into account in the calculations. If the sheathing is so closed as to be gas-tight, a
device shall be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the insulating layer in
the event of inadequate gas-tightness of the shell or of its items of equipment. The device shall prevent
the infiltration of moisture into the heat-insulating sheath.
For type testing of the effectiveness of the
insulation system, see 6.8.3.4.11.
6.8.3.2.16 Tanks intended for the carriage of liquefied gases having a boiling point below -182 C at atmospheric
pressure shall not include any combustible material either in the thermal insulation or in the means of
attachment.
The means of attachment for vacuum insulated tanks may, with the approval of the competent authority,
contain plastics substances between the shell and the sheathing.
6.8.3.2.17 By derogation from the requirements of 6.8.2.2.4 shells intended for the carriage of refrigerated
liquefied gases need not have an inspection opening.
Items of equipment for battery-vehicles and MEGCs
6.8.3.2.18 Service and structural equipment shall be configured or designed to prevent damage that could result in
the release of the pressure receptacle contents during normal conditions of handling and carriage. When
the connection between the frame of the battery-vehicle or MEGC and the elements allows relative
movement between the sub-assemblies, the equipment shall be so fastened as to permit such movement
without damage to working parts. Manifold piping leading to shut-off valves shall be sufficiently
flexible to protect the valves and the piping from shearing, or releasing the pressure receptacle contents.
The filling and discharge devices (including flanges or threaded plugs) and any protective caps shall be
capable of being secured against unintended opening.
6.8.3.2.19 In order to avoid any loss of content in the event of damage, the manifolds, the discharge fittings (pipe
sockets, shut-off devices), and the stop-valves shall be protected or arranged from being wrenched off
by external forces or designed to withstand them.
6.8.3.2.20 The manifold shall be designed for service in a temperature range of -20 C to +50 C.
The manifold shall be designed, constructed and installed so as to avoid the risk of damage due to
thermal expansion and contraction, mechanical shock and vibration. All piping shall be of suitable
metallic material. Welded pipe joints shall be used wherever possible.
Joints in copper tubing shall be brazed or have an equally strong metal union. The melting point of
brazing materials shall be no lower than 525 °C. The joints shall not decrease the strength of tubing as
may happen when cutting threads.
6.8.3.2.21 Except for UN No.1001 acetylene, dissolved, the permissible maximum stress of the manifolding
arrangement at the test pressure of the receptacles shall not exceed 75 % of the guaranteed yield strength
of the material.
The necessary wall thickness of the manifolding arrangement for the carriage of UN No.1001 acetylene,
dissolved shall be calculated according to an approved code of practice.
– 511 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 512 –
NOTE: For the yield strength, see 6.8.2.1.11.
6.8.3.2.22 By derogation from the requirements of 6.8.3.2.3, 6.8.3.2.4 and 6.8.3.2.7, for cylinders, tubes, pressure
drums and bundles of cylinders (frames) forming a battery-vehicle or MEGC, the required closing
devices may be provided for within the manifolding arrangement.
6.8.3.2.23 If one of the elements is equipped with a safety valve and shut-off devices are provided between the
elements, every element shall be so equipped.
6.8.3.2.24 The filling and discharge devices may be affixed to a manifold.
6.8.3.2.25 Each element, including each individual cylinder of a bundle, intended for the carriage of toxic gases,
shall be capable of being isolated by a shut-off valve.
6.8.3.2.26 Battery-vehicles or MEGCs intended for the carriage of toxic gases shall not have safety valves, unless
the safety valves are preceded by a bursting disc. In the latter case, the arrangement of the bursting disc
and safety valve shall be satisfactory to the competent authority.
6.8.3.2.27 When battery-vehicles or MEGCs are intended for carriage by sea, the requirements of 6.8.3.2.26 shall
not prohibit the fitting of safety valves conforming to the IMDG Code.
6.8.3.2.28 Receptacles which are elements of a battery-vehicle or MEGC intended for the carriage of flammable
gases shall be combined in groups of not more than 5 000 litres which are capable of being isolated by
a shut-off valve.
Each element of a battery-vehicle or MEGC intended for the carriage of flammable gases, when
consisting of tanks conforming to this Chapter, shall be capable of being isolated by a shut-off valve.
6.8.3.3 Type examination and type approval
No special requirements.
6.8.3.4 Inspections and tests
6.8.3.4.1 The materials of every welded shell with the exception of cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and cylinders
as part of bundles of cylinders which are elements of a battery-vehicle or of a MEGC shall be tested
according to the method described in 6.8.5.
6.8.3.4.2 The basic requirements for the test pressure are given in 4.3.3.2.1 to 4.3.3.2.4 and the minimum test
pressures are given in the table of gases and gas mixtures in 4.3.3.2.5.
6.8.3.4.3 The first hydraulic pressure test shall be carried out before thermal insulation is placed in position. When
the shell, its fittings, piping and items of equipment have been tested separately, the tank shall be
subjected to a leakproofness test after assembly.
6.8.3.4.4 The capacity of each shell intended for the carriage of compressed gases filled by mass, liquefied gases
or dissolved gases shall be determined, under the supervision of an inspection body, by weighing or
volumetric measurement of the quantity of water which fills the shell; the measurement of shell capacity
shall be accurate to within 1 %. Determination by a calculation based on the dimensions of the shell is
not permitted. The maximum filling masses allowed in accordance with packing instruction P200 or
P203 in 4.1.4.1 as well as 4.3.3.2.2 and 4.3.3.2.3 shall be prescribed by an inspection body.
6.8.3.4.5 Checking of the welds shall be carried out in accordance with the =1 requirements of 6.8.2.1.23.
6.8.3.4.6 For tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases:
(a) By derogation from the requirements of 6.8.2.4.2, the periodic inspections shall be performed no
later than
six years eight years
after the initial inspection and thereafter no later than every 12 years;
(b) By derogation from the requirements of 6.8.2.4.3, the intermediate inspections shall be
performed no later than six years after each periodic inspection.
– 512 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 513 –
6.8.3.4.7 In the case of vacuum-insulated tanks, the hydraulic-pressure test and the check of the internal condition
may, with the consent of the inspection body, be replaced by a leakproofness test and measurement of
the vacuum.
6.8.3.4.8 If, at the time of periodic inspections, openings have been made in shells intended for the carriage of
refrigerated liquefied gases, the method by which they are hermetically closed before the shells are
returned to service shall be approved by the inspection body and shall ensure the integrity of the shell.
6.8.3.4.9 Leakproofness tests of tanks intended for the carriage of gases shall be performed at a pressure of not
less than:
– For compressed gases, liquefied gases and dissolved gases: 20 % of the test pressure;
– For refrigerated liquefied gases: 90 % of the maximum working pressure.
Holding times for tank-containers carrying refrigerated liquefied gases
6.8.3.4.10 The reference holding time for tank-containers carrying
refrigerated liquefied gases shall be determined on the
basis of the following:
(a) The effectiveness of the insulation system,
determined in accordance with 6.8.3.4.11;
(b) The lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting
device(s);
(c) The initial filling conditions;
(d) An assumed ambient temperature of 30 °C;
(e) The physical properties of the individual
refrigerated liquefied gas intended to be carried.
6.8.3.4.11 The effectiveness of the insulation system (heat influx
in Watts) shall be determined by type testing the tank-
containers. This test shall consist of either:
(a) A constant pressure test (for example at atmospheric
pressure) during which the loss of refrigerated
liquefied gas is measured over a period of time; or
(b) A closed system test during which the rise in
pressure in the shell is measured over a period of
time.
When performing the constant pressure test, variations
in atmospheric pressure shall be taken into account.
When performing either test corrections shall be made
for any variation of the ambient temperature from the
assumed ambient temperature reference value of 30 °C.
NOTE: ISO 21014:2006 “Cryogenic vessels —
Cryogenic insulation performance” details methods of
determining the insulation performance of cryogenic
vessels and provides a method of calculating the holding
time.
– 513 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 514 –
Inspections and tests for battery-vehicles and MEGCs
6.8.3.4.12 The elements and items of equipment of each battery-vehicle or MEGC shall be inspected and tested
either together or separately before being put into service for the first time (initial inspection and test).
Thereafter battery-vehicles or MEGCs the elements of which are receptacles shall be inspected at not
more than five-year intervals. Battery-vehicles and MEGCs the elements of which are tanks shall be
inspected according to 6.8.2.4.2 and 6.8.2.4.3. An exceptional inspection and test shall be performed
regardless of the last periodic inspection and test when necessary according to 6.8.3.4.16.
6.8.3.4.13 The initial inspection shall include:
– a check of conformity to the approved type;
– a check of the design characteristics;
– an examination of the internal and external conditions;
– a hydraulic pressure test12 at the test pressure indicated on the plate prescribed in 6.8.3.5.10;
– a leakproofness test at the maximum working pressure; and
– a check of satisfactory operation of the equipment.
When the elements and their fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected
together after assembly to a leakproofness test.
6.8.3.4.14 Cylinders, tubes and pressure drums and cylinders as part of bundles of cylinders shall be tested
according to packing instruction P200 or P203 in 4.1.4.1.
The test pressure of the manifold of the battery-vehicle or MEGC shall be the same as that of the
elements of the battery-vehicle or MEGC. The pressure test of the manifold may be performed as a
hydraulic test or by using another liquid or gas with the agreement of the competent authority. By
derogation from this requirement, the test pressure for the manifold of battery-vehicle or MEGC shall
not be less than 300 bar for UN No. 1001 acetylene, dissolved.
6.8.3.4.15 The periodic inspection shall include a leakproofness test at the maximum working pressure and an
external examination of the structure, the elements and the service equipment without disassembling.
The elements and the piping shall be tested at the periodicity defined in packing instruction P200 of
4.1.4.1 and in accordance with the requirements of 6.2.1.6 and 6.2.3.5 respectively. When the elements
and equipment have been pressure-tested separately, they shall be subjected together after assembly to
a leakproofness test.
6.8.3.4.16 An exceptional inspection and test is necessary when the battery-vehicle or MEGC shows evidence of
damaged or corroded areas, or leakage, or any other conditions, that indicate a deficiency that could
affect the integrity of the battery-vehicle or MEGC. The extent of the exceptional inspection and test
and, if deemed necessary, the disassembling of elements shall depend on the amount of damage or
deterioration of the battery-vehicle or MEGC. It shall include at least the examinations required under
6.8.3.4.17.
6.8.3.4.17 The examinations shall ensure that:
(a) The elements are inspected externally for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, dents, distortions,
defects in welds or any other conditions, including leakage, that might render the battery-vehicles
or MEGCs unsafe for transport;
(b) The piping, valves, and gaskets are inspected for corroded areas, defects, and other conditions,
including leakage, that might render battery-vehicles or MEGCs unsafe for filling, discharge or
transport;
12 In special cases, if agreed by the competent authority, the hydraulic pressure test may be replaced by a pressure
test using gas, or if agreed by the inspection body, by using another liquid, where such an operation does not present
any danger.
– 514 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 515 –
(c) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or blank flange are replaced or
tightened;
(d) All emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, distortion and any damage or defect
that could prevent their normal operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves
shall be operated to demonstrate proper operation;
(e) Required marks on the battery-vehicles or MEGCs are legible and in accordance with the
applicable requirements; and
(f) Any framework, supports and arrangements for lifting the battery-vehicles or MEGCs are in
satisfactory condition.
6.8.3.4.18 The tests, inspections and checks in accordance with 6.8.3.4.12 to 6.8.3.4.17 shall be carried out by the
inspection body. Certificates shall be issued showing the results of these operations, even in the case of
negative results.
These certificates shall refer to the list of the substances permitted for carriage in this battery-vehicle or
MEGC in accordance with 6.8.2.3.2.
A copy of these certificates shall be attached to the tank record of each tank, battery-vehicle or MEGC
tested (see 4.3.2.1.7).
6.8.3.5 Marking
6.8.3.5.1 The following additional particulars shall be marked by stamping or by any other similar method on the
plate prescribed in 6.8.2.5.1, or directly on the walls of the shell itself if the walls are so reinforced that
the strength of the tank is not impaired.
– 515 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 516 –
6.8.3.5.2 On tanks intended for the carriage of only one substance:
– the proper shipping name of the gas and, in addition for gases classified under an n.o.s. entry,
the technical name18;
This indication shall be supplemented:
– in the case of tanks intended for the carriage of compressed gases filled by volume (pressure),
by an indication of the maximum filling pressure at 15 °C permitted for the tank; and
– in the case of tanks intended for the carriage of compressed gases filled by mass, and of liquefied
gases, refrigerated liquefied gases or dissolved gases by an indication of the maximum
permissible load mass in kg and of the filling temperature if below –20 °C.
6.8.3.5.3 On multipurpose tanks:
– the proper shipping names of the gases and, in addition for gases classified under an n.o.s. entry,
the technical name18 of the gases for whose carriage the tank is approved.
These particulars shall be supplemented by an indication of the maximum permissible load mass in kg
for each gas.
6.8.3.5.4 On tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases:
– the maximum working pressure allowed.
– reference holding time (in days or hours) for
each gas15;
– the associated initial pressures (in bar gauge
or kPa gauge)15
6.8.3.5.5 On tanks equipped with thermal insulation:
– the inscription “thermally insulated” or “thermally insulated by vacuum”.
6.8.3.5.6 In addition to the particulars prescribed in
6.8.2.5.2, the following shall be inscribed on the
tank-vehicle (on the tank itself or on plates)15:
In addition to the particulars prescribed in
6.8.2.5.2, the following shall be inscribed on the
tank-container (on the tank itself or on plates)15:
(a) – the tank code according to the certificate (see 6.8.2.3.2) with the actual test pressure of
the tank;
– the inscription: “minimum filling temperature allowed: …”;
(b) where the tank is intended for the carriage of one substance only:
-2 the proper shipping name of the gas and, in addition for gases classified under an n.o.s.
entry, the technical name18;
– for compressed gases which are filled by mass, and for liquefied gases, refrigerated
liquefied gases or dissolved gases, the maximum permissible load mass in kg;
15 Add the units of measurement after the numerical values.
18 Instead of the proper shipping name or, if applicable, of the proper shipping name of the n.o.s. entry followed by
the technical name, the use of the following names is permitted:
– for UN No. 1078 refrigerant gas, n.o.s: mixture F1, mixture F2, mixture F3;
– for UN No. 1060 methylacetylene and propadiene mixtures, stabilized: mixture P1, mixture P2;
– for UN No. 1965 hydrocarbon gas mixture, liquefied, n.o.s: mixture A, mixture A01, mixture A02,
mixture A0, mixture A1, mixture B1, mixture B2, mixture B, mixture C. The names customary in the trade
and mentioned in 2.2.2.3, Classification code 2F, UN No. 1965, Note 1 may be used only as a complement;
– for UN No. 1010 Butadienes, stabilized: 1,2-Butadiene, stabilized, 1,3-Butadiene, stabilized.
– for UN No. 1012 Butylene: 1-butylene, cis-2-butylene, trans-2-butylene, butylenes mixture.
– 516 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 517 –
(c) where the tank is a multipurpose tank:
– the proper shipping name of the gas and, for gases classified under an n.o.s. entry,
the technical name18 of all gases to whose carriage the tank is assigned with an indication
of the maximum permissible load mass in kg for each of them;
(d) where the shell is equipped with thermal insulation:
– the inscription “thermally insulated” (or “thermally insulated by vacuum”), in an official
language of the country of registration and also, if that language is not English, French or
German, in English, French or German, unless any agreements concluded between the
countries concerned in the transport operation provide otherwise.
6.8.3.5.7 (Reserved)
6.8.3.5.8 These particulars shall not be required in the case of
a vehicle carrying demountable tanks.
6.8.3.5.9 (Reserved)
Marking of battery-vehicles and MEGCs
6.8.3.5.10 Every battery-vehicle and every MEGC shall be fitted with a corrosion-resistant metal plate
permanently attached in a place readily accessible for inspection. The following particulars at least shall
be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other similar method15:
– approval number;
– manufacturer’s name or mark;
– manufacturer’s serial number;
– year of manufacture;
– test pressure (gauge pressure)
– design temperature (only if above +50 °C or below -20 °C);
– date (month and year) of initial inspection and most recent periodic inspection in accordance
with 6.8.3.4.12 and 6.8.3.4.15;
– stamp of the inspection body that carried out the inspection.
15 Add the units of measurement after the numerical values.
18 Instead of the proper shipping name or, if applicable, of the proper shipping name of the n.o.s. entry followed by
the technical name, the use of the following names is permitted:
– for UN No. 1078 refrigerant gas, n.o.s: mixture F1, mixture F2, mixture F3;
– for UN No. 1060 methylacetylene and propadiene mixtures, stabilized: mixture P1, mixture P2;
– for UN No. 1965 hydrocarbon gas mixture, liquefied, n.o.s: mixture A, mixture A01, mixture A02,
mixture A0, mixture A1, mixture B1, mixture B2, mixture B, mixture C. The names customary in the trade
and mentioned in 2.2.2.3, Classification code 2F, UN No. 1965, Note 1 may be used only as a complement;
– for UN No. 1010 Butadienes, stabilized: 1,2-Butadiene, stabilized, 1,3-Butadiene, stabilized.
– for UN No. 1012 Butylene: 1-butylene, cis-2-butylene, trans-2-butylene, butylenes mixture.
– 517 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 518 –
6.8.3.5.11 The following particulars shall be inscribed on the
battery-vehicle itself or on a plate15:
– names of owner or of operator;
– number of elements;
– total capacity of the elements;
and for battery-vehicles filled by mass:
– unladen mass;
– maximum permissible mass.
The following particulars shall be inscribed either
on the MEGC itself or on a plate15:
– names of owner and of operator;
– number of elements;
– total capacity of the elements;
– maximum permissible laden mass;
– the tank code according to the certificate of
approval (see 6.8.2.3.2) with the actual test
pressure of the MEGC;
– the proper shipping name of the gases, and
in addition, for gases classified under an
n.o.s. entry, the technical name16 of the
gases for whose carriage the MEGC is
used;
and for MEGCs filled by mass:
– tare.
6.8.3.5.12 The frame of a battery-vehicle or MEGC shall bear near the filling point a plate specifying:
– the maximum filling pressure15 at 15 °C allowed for elements intended for compressed gases;
– the proper shipping name of the gas in accordance with Chapter 3.2 and, in addition for gases
classified under an n.o.s. entry, the technical name18;
and, in addition, in the case of liquefied gases:
– the permissible maximum load per element15.
6.8.3.5.13 Cylinders, tubes and pressure drums, and cylinders as part of bundles of cylinders, shall be marked
according to 6.2.2.7. These receptacles need not be labelled individually with the danger labels as
required in Chapter 5.2.
Battery-vehicles and MEGCs shall be placarded and marked according to Chapter 5.3.
6.8.3.6 Requirements for battery-vehicles and MEGCs which are designed, constructed, inspected and tested
according to referenced standards
NOTE: Persons or bodies identified in standards as having responsibilities in accordance with ADR
shall meet the requirements of ADR.
Since 1 January 2009 the use of the referenced standards has been mandatory. Exceptions are dealt with
in 6.8.3.7
Type approval certificates shall be issued in accordance with 1.8.7 and 6.8.2.3. For the issuance of a
type approval certificate, one standard applicable according to the indication in column (4) shall be
15 Add the units of measurements after the numerical values.
18 Instead of the proper shipping name or, if applicable, of the proper shipping name of the n.o.s. entry followed by
the technical name, the use of the following names is permitted:
– for UN No. 1078 refrigerant gas, n.o.s: mixture F1, mixture F2, mixture F3;
– for UN No. 1060 methylacetylene and propadiene mixtures, stabilized: mixture P1, mixture P2;
– for UN No. 1965 hydrocarbon gas mixture, liquefied, n.o.s: mixture A, mixture A01, mixture A02,
mixture A0, mixture A1, mixture B1, mixture B2, mixture B, mixture C. The names customary in the trade
and mentioned in 2.2.2.3, Classification code 2F, UN No. 1965, Note 1 may be used only as a
complement;
– for UN No. 1010 Butadienes, stabilized: 1,2-Butadiene, stabilized, 1,3-Butadiene, stabilized.
– for UN No. 1012 Butylene: 1-butylene, cis-2-butylene, trans-2-butylene, butylenes mixture.
– 518 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 519 –
chosen from the table below. If more than one standard may be applied, only one of them shall be
chosen.
Column (3) shows the paragraphs of Chapter 6.8 to which the standard conforms.
Column (5) gives the latest date when existing type approvals shall be withdrawn according to
1.8.7.2.2.2; if no date is shown the type approval remains valid until it expires.
Standards shall be applied in accordance with 1.1.5. They shall be applied in full unless otherwise
specified in the table below.
The scope of application of each standard is defined in the scope clause of the standard unless otherwise
specified in the Table below.
Reference Title of document
Requirements
the standard
complies with
Applicable for
new type
approvals or for
renewals
Latest date for
withdrawal of
existing type
approvals
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EN 13807:2003 Transportable gas cylinders – Battery vehicles
– Design, manufacture, identification and
testing
NOTE: Where appropriate this standard may
also be applied to MEGCs which consist of
pressure receptacles.
6.8.3.1.4 and
6.8.3.1.5,
6.8.3.2.18 to
6.8.3.2.26,
6.8.3.4.12 to
6.8.3.4.14 and
6.8.3.5.10 to
6.8.3.5.13
Between 1
January 2005 and
31 December
2020
EN 13807:2017 Transportable gas cylinders – Battery vehicles
and multiple-element gas containers
(MEGCs) – Design, manufacture,
identification and testing
6.8.3.1.4,
6.8.3.1.5,
6.8.3.2.18 to
6.8.3.2.28,
6.8.3.4.12 to
6.8.3.4.14 and
6.8.3.5.10 to
6.8.3.5.13
Until further
notice
EN ISO 23826:2021 Gas cylinders – Ball valves – Specification
and testing
6.8.2.1.1 and
6.8.2.2.1
Mandatorily from
1 January 2025
6.8.3.7 Requirements for battery-vehicles and MEGCs which are not designed, constructed, inspected and
tested according to referenced standards
To reflect scientific and technical progress or where no standard is referenced in 6.8.3.6 or to deal with
specific aspects not addressed in a standard referenced in 6.8.3.6, the competent authority may recognize
the use of a technical code providing the same level of safety. Battery-vehicles and MEGCs shall,
however, comply with the minimum requirements of 6.8.3.
As soon as a standard newly referenced in 6.8.3.6 can be applied, the competent authority shall withdraw
its recognition of the relevant technical code. A transitional period ending no later than the date of entry
into force of the next edition of ADR may be applied.
The procedure for periodic inspections shall be specified in the type approval if the standards referenced
in 6.2.2, 6.2.4 or 6.8.2.6 are not applicable or shall not be applied.
The competent authority shall transmit to the secretariat of UNECE a list of the technical codes that it
recognises and shall update the list if it changes. The list should include the following details: name and
date of the code, purpose of the code and details of where it may be obtained. The secretariat shall make
this information publicly available on its website.
A standard which has been adopted for reference in a future edition of the ADR may be approved by
the competent authority for use without notifying the UNECE secretariat.
– 519 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 520 –
6.8.4 Special provisions
NOTE 1: For liquids having a flash-point of not more than 60 °C and for flammable gases, see also
6.8.2.1.26, 6.8.2.1.27 and 6.8.2.2.9.
NOTE 2: For requirements for tanks subjected to a pressure test of not less than 1 MPa (10 bar) or
for tanks intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases, see 6.8.5.
When they are shown under an entry in Column (13) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, the following special
provisions apply:
(a) Construction (TC)
TC1 The requirements of 6.8.5 are applicable to the materials and construction of these shells.
TC2 Shells, and their items of equipment, shall be made of aluminium not less than
99.5 % pure or of suitable steel not liable to cause hydrogen peroxide to decompose.
Where shells are made of aluminium not less than 99.5 % pure, the wall
thickness need not exceed 15 mm, even where calculation in accordance with 6.8.2.1.17
gives a higher value.
TC3 The shells shall be made of austenitic steel.
TC4 Shells shall be provided with an enamel or equivalent protective lining if the material of
the shell is attacked by UN No. 3250 chloroacetic acid.
TC5 Shells shall be provided with a lead lining not less than 5 mm thick or an equivalent lining.
TC6 The wall thickness of tanks made of aluminium not less than 99 % pure or aluminium
alloy need not exceed 15 mm even where calculation in accordance with 6.8.2.1.17 gives
a higher value.
TC7 The effective minimum thickness of the shell shall not be less than 3 mm.
TC8 The shells shall be made of aluminium or aluminium alloy. The shells may be designed
for an external design pressure of not less than 5 kPa (0.05 bar).
(b) Items of equipment (TE)
TE1 (Deleted)
TE2 (Deleted)
TE3 Tanks shall in addition meet the following requirements. The heating device shall not
penetrate into, but shall be exterior to the shell. However, a pipe used for extracting the
phosphorus may be equipped with a heating jacket. The device heating the jacket shall be
so regulated as to prevent the temperature of the phosphorus from exceeding the filling
temperature of the shell. Other piping shall enter the shell in its upper part; openings shall
be situated above the highest permissible level of the phosphorus and be capable of being
completely enclosed under lockable caps. The tank shall be equipped with a gauging
system for verifying the level of the phosphorus and, if water is used as a protective agent,
with a fixed gauge mark showing the highest permissible level of the water.
TE4 Shells shall be equipped with thermal insulation made of materials which are not readily
flammable.
TE5 If shells are equipped with thermal insulation, such insulation shall be made of materials
which are not readily flammable.
TE6 Tanks may be equipped with a device of a design which precludes its obstruction by the
substance carried and which prevents leakage and the build-up of excess overpressure or
underpressure inside the shell.
TE7 The shell-discharge system shall be equipped with two mutually independent shut-off
devices mounted in series, the first taking the form of a quick-closing internal
– 520 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 521 –
stop-valve of an approved type and the second that of an external stop-valve, one at each
end of the discharge pipe. A blank flange, or another device providing the same measure
of security, shall also be fitted at the outlet of each external stop-valve. The internal stop-
valve shall be such that if the pipe is wrenched off the stop-valve will remain integral
with the shell and in the closed position.
TE8 The connections to the external pipe-sockets of tanks shall be made of materials not liable
to cause decomposition of hydrogen peroxide.
TE9 Tanks shall be fitted in their upper part with a shut-off device preventing any build-up of
excess pressure inside the shell due to the decomposition of the substances carried, any
leakage of liquid, and any entry of foreign matter into the shell.
TE10 The shut-off devices of tanks shall be so designed as to preclude obstruction of the devices
by the solidified substance during carriage. Where tanks are sheathed in thermally-
insulating material, the material shall be of an inorganic nature and entirely free from
combustible matter.
TE11 Shells and their service equipment shall be so designed as to prevent the entry of foreign
matter, leakage of liquid or any building up of dangerous excess pressure inside the shell
due to the decomposition of the substances carried. A safety valve preventing the entry
of foreign matter also fulfils this provision.
TE12 Tanks shall be equipped with thermal insulation complying with the requirements of
6.8.3.2.14. If the SADT of the organic peroxide in the tank is 55 °C or less, or the tank is
constructed of aluminium, the shell shall be completely insulated. The sun shield and any
part of the tank not covered by it, or the outer sheathing of a complete lagging, shall be
painted white or finished in bright metal. The paint shall be cleaned before each transport
journey and renewed in case of yellowing or deterioration. The thermal insulation shall
be free from combustible matter. Tanks shall be fitted with temperature sensing devices.
Tanks shall be fitted with safety valves and emergency pressure-relief devices. Vacuum-
relief devices may also be used. Emergency pressure-relief devices shall operate at
pressures determined according to both the properties of the organic peroxide and the
construction characteristics of the tank. Fusible elements shall not be permitted in the
body of the shell.
Tanks shall be fitted with spring-loaded safety valves to prevent significant pressure
build-up within the shell of the decomposition products and vapours released at a
temperature of 50 °C. The capacity and start-to-discharge pressure of the safety-valve(s)
shall be based on the results of the tests specified in special provision TA2. The start-to-
discharge pressure shall however in no case be such that liquid could escape from the
valve(s) if the tank were overturned.
The emergency-relief devices may be of the spring-loaded or frangible types designed to
vent all the decomposition products and vapours evolved during a period of not less than
one hour of complete fire-engulfment as calculated by the following formula:
q = 70961 × F × A 0.82
where:
q = heat absorption [W]
A = wetted area [m²]
F = insulation factor
F = l for non-insulated tanks, or
stankinsulatedfor
47032
)T-(923U
F P0
where:
– 521 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 522 –
K = heat conductivity of insulation layer [Wꞏm -1ꞏK -1 ]
L = thickness of insulation layer [m]
U = K/L = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation [Wꞏm -2ꞏK -1 ]
TPO = temperature of peroxide at relieving conditions [K]
The start-to-discharge pressure of the emergency-relief device(s) shall be higher than that
above specified and based on the results of the tests referred to in special provision TA2.
The emergency-relief devices shall be dimensioned in such a way that the maximum
pressure in the tank never exceeds the test pressure of the tank.
NOTE: An example of a method to determine the size of emergency-relief devices is
given in Appendix 5 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria.
For tanks equipped with thermal insulation consisting of a complete cladding, the
capacity and setting of the emergency-relief device(s) shall be determined assuming a
loss of insulation from 1 % of the surface area.
Vacuum-relief devices and spring-loaded safety valves of tanks shall be provided with
flame arresters unless the substances to be carried and their decomposition products are
non-combustible. Due attention shall be paid to the reduction of the relief capacity caused
by the flame arrester.
TE13 Tanks shall be thermally insulated and fitted with a heating device on the outside.
TE14 Tanks shall be equipped with thermal insulation. The thermal insulation directly in
contact with the shell and/or components of the heating system shall have an ignition
temperature at least 50 °C higher than the maximum temperature for which the tank was
designed.
TE15 (Deleted)
TE16 (Reserved)
TE17 (Reserved)
TE18 Tanks intended for the carriage of substances filled at a temperature higher than 190 °C
shall be equipped with deflectors placed at right angles to the upper filling openings, so
as to avoid a sudden localized increase in wall temperature during filling.
TE19 Fittings and accessories mounted in the
upper part of the tank shall be either:
– inserted in a recessed housing; or
– equipped with an internal safety valve;
or
– shielded by a cap, or by transverse
and/or longitudinal members, or by
other equally effective devices, so
profiled that in the event of overturning
the fittings and accessories will not be
damaged.
Fittings and accessories mounted in the lower
part of the tank:
– 522 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 523 –
Pipe-sockets, lateral shut-off devices, and all
discharge devices shall either be recessed by
at least 200 mm from the extreme outer edge
of the tank or be protected by a rail having a
coefficient of inertia of not less than 20 cm³
transversally to the direction of travel; their
ground clearance shall be not less than
300 mm with the tank full.
Fittings and accessories mounted on the rear
face of the tank shall be protected by the
bumper prescribed in 9.7.6. Their height
above the ground shall be such that they are
adequately protected by the bumper
TE20 Notwithstanding the other tank-codes which are permitted in the hierarchy of tanks of the
rationalized approach in 4.3.4.1.2, tanks shall be equipped with a safety valve.
TE21 The closures shall be protected with lockable caps.
TE22 (Reserved)
TE23 Tanks shall be equipped with a device of a design which precludes its obstruction by the
substance carried and which prevents leakage and the build-up of excess overpressure or
underpressure inside the shell.
TE24 If tanks, intended for the carriage and
handling of bitumen, are equipped with a
spray bar at the end of the discharge pipe,
the closing device, as required by
6.8.2.2.2, may be replaced by a shut-off
valve, situated on the discharge pipe and
preceding the spray bar.
TE25 (Reserved)
TE26 All filling and discharge connections, including those in the vapour phase, of tanks
intended for the carriage of flammable refrigerated liquefied gases shall be equipped with
an instant closing automatic stop-valve (see 6.8.3.2.3) as close as possible to the tank.
(c) Type approval (TA)
TA1 Tanks shall not be approved for the carriage of organic substances.
TA2 This substance may be carried in fixed or demountable tanks or tank-containers under the
conditions laid down by the competent authority of the country of origin, if, on the basis
of the tests mentioned below, the competent authority is satisfied that such a transport
operation can be carried out safely. If the country of origin is not party to ADR, these
conditions shall be recognized by the competent authority of the first ADR country
reached by the consignment.
For the type approval tests shall be undertaken:
– to prove the compatibility of all materials normally in contact with the substance
during carriage;
– to provide data to facilitate the design of the emergency pressure-relief devices and
safety valves taking into account the design characteristics of the tank; and
– to establish any special requirements necessary for the safe carriage of the substance.
The test results shall be included in the report for the type approval.
– 523 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 524 –
TA3 This substance may be carried only in tanks with the tank code LGAV or SGAV; the
hierarchy in 4.3.4.1.2 is not applicable.
TA4 The conformity assessment procedures of section 1.8.7 shall be applied by the competent
authority or the inspection body conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN
ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except clause 8.1.3) type A.
TA5 This substance may be carried only in tanks with the tank code S2.65AN(+); the hierarchy
in 4.3.4.1.2 is not applicable.
(d) Tests (TT)
TT1 Tanks of pure aluminium need to be subjected to the initial and periodic hydraulic
pressure tests at a pressure of only 250 kPa (2.5 bar) (gauge pressure).
TT2 The condition of the lining of shells shall be inspected every year by an inspection body,
which shall inspect the inside of the shell (see special provision TU43 in 4.3.5).
TT3 By derogation from the requirements of 6.8.2.4.2, periodic inspections shall be performed
no later than every eight years and shall include a thickness check using suitable
instruments. For such tanks, the leakproofness test and check for which provision is made
in 6.8.2.4.3 shall be performed no later than every four years.
TT4 (Reserved)
TT5 The hydraulic pressure tests shall be performed no later than every
3 years. 2½ years.
TT6 The periodic inspection shall be
performed no later than every
3 years.
TT7 Notwithstanding the requirements of 6.8.2.4.2, the periodic internal inspection may be
replaced by a programme approved by the competent authority.
TT8 Tanks on which the proper shipping name required for the entry UN 1005 AMMONIA,
ANHYDROUS is marked in accordance with 6.8.3.5.1 to 6.8.3.5.3 and constructed of
fine-grained steel with a yield strength of more than 400 N/mm² in accordance with the
material standard, shall be subjected at each periodic inspection according to 6.8.2.4.2, to
magnetic particle inspections to detect surface cracking.
For the lower part of each shell at least 20 % of the length of each circumferential and
longitudinal weld shall, together with all nozzle welds and any repair or ground areas, be
inspected.
If the mark of the substance on the tank or tank plate is removed, a magnetic particle
inspection shall be carried out and these actions recorded in the inspection certificate
attached to the tank record.
Such magnetic particle inspections shall be carried out by a competent person qualified
for this method according to EN ISO 9712:2012 (Non-destructive testing – Qualification
and certification of NDT personnel – General principles).
TT9 For inspections and tests (including supervision of the manufacture) the procedures of
section 1.8.7 shall be applied by the competent authority or the inspection body
conforming to 1.8.6.3 and accredited according to EN ISO/IEC 17020:2012 (except
clause 8.1.3) type A.
TT10 The periodic inspections according to 6.8.2.4.2 shall be performed no later than:
every three years. | every two and a half years.
– 524 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 525 –
TT11 For fixed tanks (tank-vehicles)
and demountable tanks used
exclusively for the carriage of
LPG, with carbon steel shells and
service equipment, the hydraulic
pressure test, may, at the time of
the periodic inspection and at the
request of the applicant, be
replaced by the non-destructive
testing (NDT) techniques listed
below. These techniques may be
used either singularly or in
combination as deemed suitable
by the competent authority or the
inspection body (see special
provision TT9):
– EN ISO 17640:2018 – Non-
destructive testing of welds –
Ultrasonic testing –
Techniques, testing levels and
assessment;
– EN ISO 17638:2016 – Non-
destructive testing of welds –
Magnetic particle testing, with
acceptance of indications in
accordance with
EN ISO 23278:2015 – Non-
destructive testing of welds –
Magnetic particle testing.
Acceptance levels;
– EN ISO 17643:2015 – Non-
destructive testing of welds –
Eddy current examination of
welds by complex plane
analysis;
– EN ISO 16809:2019 – Non-
destructive testing – Ultrasonic
thickness measurement.
Personnel involved in NDT shall be
qualified, certified and have the
appropriate theoretical and practical
knowledge of the non-destructive
tests they perform, specify,
supervise, monitor or evaluate in
accordance with:
– EN ISO 9712:2012 – Non-
destructive testing –
Qualification and certification
of NDT personnel.
After direct application of heat such
as welding or cutting to the pressure
containing elements of the tank a
hydraulic test shall be carried out in
addition to any prescribed NDT.
– 525 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 526 –
NDT shall be performed on the
areas of the shell and equipment
listed in the table below:
Irrespective of the original design and
construction standard or technical code
used for the tank, the defect acceptance
levels shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant parts of EN
14025:2018 (Tanks for the transport of
dangerous goods – metallic pressure
tanks – design and construction), EN
12493:2013 + A2:2020 (LPG equipment
and accessories – welded steel pressure
vessels for LPG road tankers – design
and construction), EN ISO 23278:2015
(Non-destructive testing of welds –
magnetic particle testing of welds –
acceptance levels) or the acceptance
standard referenced in the applicable
NDT standard.
If an unacceptable defect is found in the
tank by NDT methods it shall be
repaired and retested. It is not permitted
to hydraulic test the tank without
undertaking the required repairs.
The results of the NDT shall be recorded
and retained for the lifetime of the tank.
(e) Marking (TM)
NOTE: These particulars shall be in an official language of the country of approval, and also,
if that language is not English, French or German, in English, French or German, unless any
agreements concluded between the countries concerned in the transport operation provide
otherwise.
TM1 Tanks shall bear in addition to the particulars prescribed in 6.8.2.5.2, the words: “Do not
open during carriage. Liable to spontaneous combustion” (see also the Note above).
TM2 Tanks shall bear in addition to the particulars prescribed in 6.8.2.5.2, the words: “Do not
open during carriage. Gives off flammable gases on contact with water” (see also the
Note above).
Area of shell and equipment NDT
Shell longitudinal butt welds
100 % NDT, using
one or more of the
following
techniques:
ultrasonic, magnetic
particle or eddy
current testing
Shell circumferential butt welds
Attachments, manway, nozzles and
opening welds (internal) direct to
the shell
High stress areas of fastening
doubling plates (over the end of the
saddle horn, plus 400 mm down
each side)
Piping and other equipment welds
Shell, areas that cannot be visually
inspected from the outside
Ultrasonic thickness
survey, from inside,
on a 150 mm
(maximum) spaced
grid
– 526 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 527 –
TM3 Tanks shall also bear, on the plate prescribed in 6.8.2.5.1, the proper shipping name and
the maximum permissible load mass in kg for this substance.
TM4 For tanks the following additional particulars shall be marked by stamping or by any other
similar method on the plate prescribed in 6.8.2.5.2 or directly on the shell itself, if the
walls are so reinforced that the strength of the tank is not impaired: the chemical name
with the approved concentration of the substance concerned.
TM5 Tanks shall bear, in addition to the particulars referred to in 6.8.2.5.1 the date (month,
year) of the most recent inspection of the internal condition of the shell.
TM6 (Reserved)
TM7 The trefoil symbol, as described in 5.2.1.7.6, shall be marked by stamping or any other
equivalent method on the plate described in 6.8.2.5.1. This trefoil may be engraved
directly on the walls of the shell itself, if the walls are so reinforced that the strength of
the shell is not impaired.
6.8.5 Requirements concerning the materials and construction of fixed welded tanks, demountable
welded tanks, and welded shells of tank-containers for which a test pressure of not less than 1
MPa (10 bar) is required, and of fixed welded tanks, demountable welded tanks and welded shells
of tank-containers intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases of Class 2
6.8.5.1 Materials and shells
6.8.5.1.1 (a) Shells intended for the carriage of :
– compressed, liquefied gases or dissolved gases of Class 2;
– UN Nos. 1380, 2845, 2870, 3194 and 3391 to 3394 of Class 4.2; and
– UN No. 1052 hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous and UN No.1790 hydrofluoric acid with
more than 85 % hydrogen fluoride of Class 8
shall be made of steel;
(b) Shells constructed of fine-grained steels for the carriage of:
– corrosive gases of Class 2 and UN No. 2073 ammonia solution; and
– UN No. 1052 hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous and UN No.1790 hydrofluoric acid with more
than 85 % hydrogen fluoride of Class 8
shall be heat-treated for thermal stress relief;
(c) Shells intended for the carriage of refrigerated liquefied gases of Class 2, shall be made of steel,
aluminium, aluminium alloy, copper or copper alloy (e.g. brass). However, shells made of copper
or copper alloy shall be allowed only for gases containing no acetylene; ethylene, however, may
contain not more than 0.005 % acetylene;
(d) Only materials appropriate to the lowest and highest working temperatures of the shells and of
their fittings and accessories may be used.
6.8.5.1.2 The following materials shall be allowed for the manufacture of shells:
(a) Steels not subject to brittle fracture at the lowest working temperature (see 6.8.5.2.1):
– mild steels (except for refrigerated liquefied gases of Class 2);
– fine-grained steels, down to a temperature of -60 °C;
– nickel steels (with a nickel content of 0.5 to 9 %), down to a temperature
of –196 °C, depending on the nickel content;
– austenitic chrome-nickel steels, down to a temperature of -270 °C;
– 527 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 528 –
– austenitic-ferritic stainless steels, down to a temperature of -60 °C;
(b) Aluminium not less than 99.5 % pure or aluminium alloys (see 6.8.5.2.2);
(c) Deoxidized copper not less than 99.9 % pure, or copper alloys having a copper content of over
56 % (see 6.8.5.2.3).
6.8.5.1.3 (a) Shells made of steel, aluminium or aluminium alloys shall be either seamless or welded;
(b) Shells made of austenitic steel, copper or copper alloy may be hard-soldered.
6.8.5.1.4 The fittings and accessories may either be screwed to the shells or be secured thereto as follows:
(a) Shells made of steel, aluminium or aluminium alloy: by welding;
(b) Shells made of austenitic steel, of copper or of copper alloy: by welding or hard-soldering.
6.8.5.1.5 The construction of shells and their attachment to the vehicle, to the underframe or in the container
frame shall be such as to preclude with certainty any such reduction in the temperature of the load-
bearing components as would be likely to render them brittle. The means of attachment of shells shall
themselves be so designed that even when the shell is at its lowest working temperature they still possess
the necessary mechanical properties.
6.8.5.2 Test requirements
6.8.5.2.1 Steel shells
The materials used for the manufacture of shells and the weld beads shall, at their lowest working
temperature, but at least at -20 °C, meet at least the following requirements as to impact strength:
– The tests shall be carried out with test-pieces having a V-shaped notch;
– The minimum impact strength (see 6.8.5.3.1 to 6.8.5.3.3) for test-pieces with the longitudinal
axis at right angles to the direction of rolling and a V-shaped notch (conforming to ISO R 148)
perpendicular to the plate surface, shall be 34 J/cm² for mild steel (which, because of existing
ISO standards, may be tested with test-pieces having the longitudinal axis in the direction of
rolling); fine-grained steel; ferritic alloy steel Ni < 5 %, ferritic alloy steel 5 % Ni 9 %;
austenitic Cr – Ni steel; or austenitic-ferritic stainless steel;
– In the case of austenitic steels, only the weld bead need be subjected to an impact-strength test;
– For working temperatures below -196 °C the impact-strength test is not performed at the lowest
working temperature, but at -196 °C.
6.8.5.2.2 Shells made of aluminium or aluminium alloy
The seams of shells shall meet the requirements laid down by the competent authority.
6.8.5.2.3 Shells made of copper or copper alloy
It is not necessary to carry out tests to determine whether the impact strength is adequate.
6.8.5.3 Impact-strength tests
6.8.5.3.1 For sheets less than 10 mm but not less than 5 mm thick, test-pieces having a cross-section of 10 mm ×
e mm, where “e” represents the thickness of the sheet, shall be used. Machining to 7.5 mm or 5 mm is
permitted if it is necessary. The minimum value of 34 J/cm² shall be required in every case.
NOTE: No impact-strength test shall be carried out on sheets less than 5 mm thick, or on their weld
seams.
6.8.5.3.2 (a) For the purpose of testing sheets, the impact strength shall be determined on three test-pieces.
Test-pieces shall be taken at right angles to the direction of rolling; however, for mild steel they
may be taken in the direction of rolling.
(b) For testing weld seams the test-pieces shall be taken as follows:
– 528 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 529 –
when e 10 mm:
three test-pieces with the notch at the centre of the weld;
three test-pieces with the notch in the centre of the heat affected zone (the V-notch to cross the fusion
boundary at the centre of the specimen);
when 10 mm < e 20 mm:
three test-pieces from the centre of the weld;
three test-pieces from the heat affected zone (the V-notch to cross the fusion boundary at the centre of
the specimen);
when e > 20 mm
two sets of three test-pieces, one set on the upper face, one set on the lower face at each of the points
indicated below (the V-notch to cross the fusion boundary at the centre of the specimen for those taken
from the heat affected zone)
Center of the weld Heat affected zone
Heat affected zone
Center of the weld
Center of the weld
– 529 –
e
2
e
e
2
eCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 530 –
6.8.5.3.3 (a) For sheets, the average of the three tests shall meet the minimum value of 34 J/cm² indicated in
6.8.5.2.1; not more than one of the individual values may be below the minimum value and then
not below 24 J/cm²;
(b) For welds, the average value obtained from the three test-pieces taken at the centre of the weld
shall not be below the minimum value of 34 J/cm²; not more than one of the individual values
may be below the minimum value and then not below 24 J/cm²;
(c) For the heat affected zone (the V-notch to cross the fusion boundary at the centre of the
specimen) the value obtained from not more than one of the three test-pieces may be below the
minimum value of 34 J/cm², though not below 24 J/cm².
6.8.5.3.4 If the requirements prescribed in 6.8.5.3.3 are not met, one retest only may be done if:
(a) the average value of the first three tests is below the minimum value of 34 J/cm²; or
(b) more than one of the individual values is less than the minimum value of 34 J/cm² but not below
24 J/cm².
6.8.5.3.5 In a repeated impact test on sheets or welds, none of the individual values may be below 34 J/cm². The
average value of all the results of the original test and of the retest should be equal to or more than the
minimum of 34 J/cm².
On a repeated impact strength test on the heat-affected zone, none of the individual values may be below
34 J/cm².
6.8.5.4 Reference to standards
The requirements of 6.8.5.2 and 6.8.5.3 shall be deemed to have been complied with if the following
relevant standards have been applied:
EN ISO 21028-1:2016 Cryogenic vessels – Toughness requirements for materials at cryogenic
temperature – Part 1: Temperatures below -80 °C.
EN ISO 21028-2:2018 Cryogenic vessels – Toughness requirements for materials at cryogenic
temperature – Part 2: Temperatures between -80 °C and -20 °C.
Heat affected zone
– 530 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 531 –
CHAPTER 6.9
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, INSPECTION AND TESTING
OF PORTABLE TANKS WITH SHELLS MADE OF FIBRE-REINFORCED PLASTICS
(FRP) MATERIALS
6.9.1 Application and general requirements
6.9.1.1 The requirements of section 6.9.2 apply to portable tanks with an FRP shell intended for the carriage of
dangerous goods of Classes 1, 3, 5.1, 6.1, 6.2, 8 and 9 by all modes of transport. In addition to the
requirements of this Chapter, unless otherwise specified, the applicable requirements of the
International Convention for Safe Containers (CSC) 1972, as amended, shall be fulfilled by any
multimodal portable tank with FRP shell which meets the definition of a “container” within the terms
of that Convention.
6.9.1.2 The requirements of this Chapter do not apply to offshore portable tanks.
6.9.1.3 The requirements of Chapter 4.2 and section 6.7.2 apply to FRP portable tank shells except for those
concerning the use of metal materials for the construction of a portable tank shell and additional
requirements stated in this Chapter.
6.9.1.4 In recognition of scientific and technological advances, the technical requirements of this Chapter may
be varied by alternative arrangements. These alternative arrangements shall offer a level of safety not
less than that given by the requirements of this Chapter with respect to compatibility with substances
carried and the ability of the FRP portable tank to withstand impact, loading and fire conditions. For
international carriage, alternative arrangement FRP portable tanks shall be approved by the applicable
competent authorities.
6.9.2 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of FRP portable tanks
6.9.2.1 Definitions
For the purposes of this section, the definitions of 6.7.2.1 apply except for definitions related to metal
materials (“Fine grain steel”, “Mild steel” and “Reference steel”) for the construction of the shell of a
portable tank.
Additionally, the following definitions apply to portable tanks with an FRP shell:
External layer means the part of the shell which is directly exposed to the atmosphere;
Fibre-reinforced plastics (FRP), see 1.2.1;
Filament winding means a process for constructing FRP structures in which continuous reinforcements
(filament, tape, or other), either previously impregnated with a matrix material or impregnated during
winding, are placed over a rotating mandrel. Generally, the shape is a surface of revolution and may
include ends (heads);
FRP shell means a closed part of cylindrical shape with an interior volume intended for carriage of
chemical substances;
FRP tank means a portable tank constructed with an FRP shell and ends (heads), service equipment,
safety relief devices and other installed equipment;
Glass transition temperature (T g) means a characteristic value of the temperature range over which the
glass transition takes place;
Hand layup means a process for moulding reinforced plastics in which reinforcement and resin are
placed on a mould;
Liner means a layer on the inner surface of an FRP shell preventing contact with the dangerous goods
being carried;
– 531 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 532 –
Mat means a fibre reinforcement made of random, chopped or twisted fibres bonded together as sheets
of various length and thickness;
Parallel shell-sample means an FRP specimen, which must be representative of the shell, constructed
in parallel to the shell construction if it is not possible to use cut-outs from the shell itself. The parallel
shell-sample may be flat or curved;
Representative sample means a sample cut out from the shell;
Resin infusion means an FRP construction method by which dry reinforcement is placed into a matched
mould, single sided mould with vacuum bag, or otherwise, and liquid resin is supplied to the part through
the use of external applied pressure at the inlet and/or application of full or partial vacuum pressure at
the vent;
Structural layer means FRP layers of a shell required to sustain the design loads;
Veil means a thin mat with high absorbency used in FRP product plies where polymeric matrix surplus
fraction content is required (surface evenness, chemical resistance, leakage-proof, etc.).
6.9.2.2 General design and construction requirements
6.9.2.2.1 The requirements of 6.7.1 and 6.7.2.2 apply to FRP portable tanks. For areas of the shell that are made
from FRP, the following requirements of Chapter 6.7 are exempt: 6.7.2.2.1, 6.7.2.2.9.1, 6.7.2.2.13 and
6.7.2.2.14. Shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of a pressure
vessel code, applicable to FRP materials, recognized by the competent authority.
In addition, the following requirements apply.
6.9.2.2.2 Manufacturer’s quality system
6.9.2.2.2.1 The quality system shall contain all the elements, requirements, and provisions adopted by the
manufacturer. It shall be documented in a systematic and orderly manner in the form of written policies,
procedures, and instructions.
6.9.2.2.2.2 The contents shall in particular include adequate descriptions of:
(a) The organizational structure and responsibilities of personnel with regard to design and product
quality;
(b) The design control and design verification techniques, processes, and procedures that will be
used when designing the portable tanks;
(c) The relevant manufacturing, quality control, quality assurance and process operation instructions
that will be used;
(d) Quality records, such as inspection reports, test data and calibration data;
(e) Management reviews to ensure the effective operation of the quality system arising from the
audits in accordance with 6.9.2.2.2.4;
(f) The process describing how customer requirements are met;
(g) The process for control of documents and their revision;
(h) The means for control of non-conforming portable tanks, purchased components, in-process and
final materials; and
(i) Training programmes and qualification procedures for relevant personnel.
6.9.2.2.2.3 Under the quality system, the following minimum requirements shall be met for each FRP portable tank
manufactured:
(a) Use of an inspection and test plan (ITP);
(b) Visual inspections;
– 532 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 533 –
(c) Verification of fibre orientation and mass fraction by means of documented control process;
(d) Verification of fibre and resin quality and characteristics by means of certificates or other
documentation;
(e) Verification of liner quality and characteristics by means of certificates or other documentation;
(f) Verification of whichever is applicable of formed thermoplastic resin characteristic or degree of
cure of thermoset resin, by direct or indirect means (e.g. Barcol test or differential scanning
calorimetry) to be determined in accordance with 6.9.2.7.1.2 (h), or by creep testing of a
representative sample or parallel shell-sample in accordance with 6.9.2.7.1.2 (e) for a period of
100 hours;
(g) Documentation of whichever is applicable of thermoplastic resin forming processes or thermoset
resin cure and post-cure processes; and
(h) Retention and archiving of shell samples for future inspection and shell verification (e.g. from
manhole cut out) for a period of 5 years.
6.9.2.2.2.4 Audit of the quality system
The quality system shall be initially assessed to determine whether it meets the requirements in
6.9.2.2.2.1 to 6.9.2.2.2.3 to the satisfaction of the competent authority.
The manufacturer shall be notified of the results of the audit. The notification shall contain the
conclusions of the audit and any corrective actions required.
Periodic audits shall be carried out, to the satisfaction of the competent authority, to ensure that the
manufacturer maintains and applies the quality system. Reports of the periodic audits shall be provided
to the manufacturer.
6.9.2.2.2.5 Maintenance of the quality system
The manufacturer shall maintain the quality system as approved in order that it remains adequate and
efficient.
The manufacturer shall notify the competent authority that approved the quality system of any intended
changes. The proposed changes shall be evaluated to determine whether the amended quality system
will still satisfy the requirements in 6.9.2.2.2.1 to 6.9.2.2.2.3.
6.9.2.2.3 FRP Shells
6.9.2.2.3.1 FRP shells shall have a secure connection with structural elements of the portable tank frame. FRP shell
supports and attachments to the frame shall cause no local stress concentrations exceeding the design
allowables of the shell structure in accordance with the provisions stated in this Chapter for all operating
and test conditions.
6.9.2.2.3.2 Shells shall be made of suitable materials, capable of operating within a minimum design temperature
range of -40 °С to +50 °С, unless temperature ranges are specified for specific more severe climatic or
operating conditions (e.g. heating elements), by the competent authority of the country where the
transport operation is being performed.
6.9.2.2.3.3 If a heating system is installed, it shall comply with 6.7.2.5.12 to 6.7.2.5.15 and with the following
requirements:
(a) The maximum operating temperature of the heating elements integrated or connected to the shell
shall not exceed the maximum design temperature of the tank;
(b) The heating elements shall be designed, controlled and utilized so that the temperature of the
carried substance cannot exceed the maximum design temperature of the tank or a value at which
the internal pressure exceeds MAWP; and
(c) Structures of the tank and its heating elements shall allow examination of the shell with respect
to possible effects of overheating.
– 533 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 534 –
6.9.2.2.3.4 Shells shall consist of the following elements:
– Liner;
– Structural layer;
– External layer.
NOTE: The elements may be combined if all applicable functional criteria are met.
6.9.2.2.3.5 The liner is the inner element of the shell designed as the primary barrier to provide for the long-term
chemical resistance in relation to the substances to be carried, to prevent any dangerous reaction with
the contents or the formation of dangerous compounds and any substantial weakening of the structural
layer owing to the diffusion of products through the liner. Chemical compatibility shall be verified in
accordance with 6.9.2.7.1.3.
The liner may be an FRP liner or a thermoplastic liner.
6.9.2.2.3.6 FRP liners shall consist of the following two components:
(a) Surface layer (“gel-coat”): adequate resin rich surface layer, reinforced with a veil, compatible
with the resin and contents. This layer shall have a maximum fibre mass content of 30 % and
have a minimum thickness of 0.25 mm and a maximum thickness of 0.60 mm;
(b) Strengthening layer(s): layer or several layers with a minimum thickness of 2 mm, containing a
minimum of 900 g/m² of glass mat or chopped fibres with a mass content in glass of not less than
30 % unless equivalent safety is demonstrated for a lower glass content.
6.9.2.2.3.7 If the liner consists of thermoplastic sheets, they shall be welded together in the required shape, using a
qualified welding procedure and personnel. Welded liners shall have a layer of electrically conductive
media placed against the non-liquid contact surface of the welds to facilitate spark testing. Durable
bonding between liners and the structural layer shall be achieved by the use of an appropriate method.
6.9.2.2.3.8 The structural layer shall be designed to withstand the design loads according to 6.7.2.2.12, 6.9.2.2.3.1,
6.9.2.3.2, 6.9.2.3.4 and 6.9.2.3.6.
6.9.2.2.3.9 The external layer of resin or paint shall provide adequate protection of the structural layers of the tank
from environmental and service exposure, including to UV radiation and salt fog, and occasional splash
exposure to cargoes.
6.9.2.2.3.10 Resins
The processing of the resin mixture shall be carried out in compliance with the recommendations of the
supplier. These resins can be:
– Unsaturated polyester resins;
– Vinyl ester resins;
– Epoxy resins;
– Phenolic resins;
– Thermoplastic resins.
The resin heat distortion temperature (HDT), determined in accordance with 6.9.2.7.1.1 shall be at least
20 °C higher than the maximum design temperature of the shell as defined in 6.9.2.2.3.2, but shall in
any case not be lower than 70 °C.
6.9.2.2.3.11 Reinforcement material
The reinforcement material of the structural layers shall be selected such that they meet the requirements
of the structural layer.
– 534 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 535 –
For the liner glass fibres of at a minimum type C or ECR according to ISO 2078:1993 + Amd 1:2015
shall be used. Thermoplastic veils may only be used for the liner when their compatibility with the
intended contents has been demonstrated.
6.9.2.2.3.12 Additives
Additives necessary for the treatment of the resin, such as catalysts, accelerators, hardeners and
thixotropic substances as well as materials used to improve the tank, such as fillers, colours, pigments
etc. shall not cause weakening of the material, taking into account lifetime and temperature expectancy
of the design.
6.9.2.2.3.13 FRP shells, their attachments and their service and structural equipment shall be designed to withstand
the loads mentioned in 6.7.2.2.12, 6.9.2.2.3, 6.9.2.3.2, 6.9.2.3.4 and 6.9.2.3.6 without loss of contents
(other than quantities of gas escaping through any degassing vents) during the design lifetime.
6.9.2.2.3.14 Special requirements for the carriage of substances with a flash-point of not more than 60 °C
6.9.2.2.3.14.1 FRP tanks used for the carriage of flammable liquids with a flash-point of not more than 60 °C shall be
constructed to ensure the elimination of static electricity from the various component parts to avoid the
accumulation of dangerous charges.
6.9.2.2.3.14.2 The electrical surface resistance of the inside and outside of the shell as established by measurements
shall not be higher than 10⁹ Ω. This may be achieved by the use of additives in the resin or interlaminate
conducting sheets, such as metal or carbon network.
6.9.2.2.3.14.3 The discharge resistance to earth as established by measurements shall not be higher than 10⁷ Ω.
6.9.2.2.3.14.4 All components of the shell shall be electrically connected to each other and to the metal parts of the
service and structural equipment of the tank and to the vehicle. The electrical resistance between
components and equipment in contact with each other shall not exceed 10 Ω.
6.9.2.2.3.14.5 The electrical surface-resistance and discharge resistance shall be measured initially on each
manufactured tank or a specimen of the shell in accordance with the procedure recognized by the
competent authority. In the event of damage to the shell, requiring repair, the electrical resistance shall
be re-measured.
6.9.2.2.3.15 The tank shall be designed to withstand, without significant leakage, the effects of a full engulfment in
fire for 30 minutes as specified by the test requirements in 6.9.2.7.1.5. Testing may be waived with the
agreement of the competent authority, where sufficient proof can be provided by tests with comparable
tank designs.
6.9.2.2.3.16 Construction process for FRP shells
6.9.2.2.3.16.1 Filament winding, hand layup, resin infusion or other appropriate composite production processes shall
be used for construction of FRP shells.
6.9.2.2.3.16.2 The weight of the fibre reinforcement shall conform to that set forth in the procedure specification with
a tolerance of +10 % and −0 %. One or more of the fibre types specified in 6.9.2.2.3.11 and in the
procedure specification shall be used for reinforcement of shells.
6.9.2.2.3.16.3 The resin system shall be one of the resin systems specified in 6.9.2.2.3.10. No filler, pigment or dye
additions shall be used which will interfere with the natural colour of the resin except as permitted by
the procedure specification.
6.9.2.3 Design criteria
6.9.2.3.1 FRP shells shall be of a design capable of being stress-analysed mathematically or experimentally by
resistance strain gauges or by other methods approved by the competent authority.
6.9.2.3.2 FRP shells shall be designed and constructed to withstand the test pressure. Specific provisions are laid
down for certain substances in the applicable portable tank instruction indicated in column (10) of Table
A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5, or by a portable tank special provision indicated in column (11)
of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and described in 4.2.5.3. The minimum wall thickness of the FRP shell shall
not be less than that specified in 6.9.2.4.
– 535 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 536 –
6.9.2.3.3 At the specified test pressure the maximum tensile relative deformation measured in mm/mm in the
shell shall not result in the formation of microcracks, and therefore not be greater than the first measured
point of elongation based fracture or damage of the resin, measured during tensile tests prescribed under
6.9.2.7.1.2 (c).
6.9.2.3.4 For internal test pressure, external design pressure specified in 6.7.2.2.10, static loads specified in
6.7.2.2.12 and static gravity loads caused by the contents with the maximum density specified for the
design and at maximum filling degree, failure criteria (FC) in the longitudinal direction, circumferential
direction, and any other in-plane direction of the composite layup shall not exceed the following value:
�� � 1
𝐾𝐾
where:
𝐾𝐾 � 𝐾𝐾� � 𝐾𝐾� � 𝐾𝐾� � 𝐾𝐾� � 𝐾𝐾� � 𝐾𝐾�
where:
K shall have a minimum value of 4;
K0 is a strength factor. For the general design the value for K0 shall be equal to or more than 1.5.
The value of K0 shall be multiplied by a factor of two, unless the shell is provided with protection
against damage consisting of a complete metal skeleton including longitudinal and transverse
structural members;
K1 is a factor related to the deterioration in the material properties due to creep and ageing. It shall
be determined by the formula:
𝐾𝐾� � 1
𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼
where α is the creep factor and β is the ageing factor determined in accordance with 6.9.2.7.1.2
(e) and (f), respectively. When used in calculation, factors α and β shall be between 0 and 1.
Alternatively, a conservative value of K1 = 2 may be applied for the purpose of undertaking the
numerical validation exercise in 6.9.2.3.4 (this does not remove the need to perform testing to
determine α and β);
K2 is a factor related to the service temperature and the thermal properties of the resin, determined
by the following equation, with a minimum value of 1:
K2 = 1.25 – 0.0125 (HDT – 70)
where HDT is the heat distortion temperature of the resin, in °C;
K3 is a factor related to the fatigue of the material; the value of K3 = 1.75 shall be used unless
otherwise agreed with the competent authority. For the dynamic design as outlined in 6.7.2.2.12
the value of K3 = 1.1 shall be used;
K4 is a factor related to resin curing and has the following values:
1.0 where curing is carried out in accordance with an approved and documented process, and
the quality system described under 6.9.2.2.2 includes verification of degree of cure for
each FRP portable tank using a direct measurement approach, such as differential
scanning calorimetry (DSC) determined via ISO 11357-2:2016, as per 6.9.2.7.1.2 (h);
1.1 where thermoplastic resin forming or thermoset resin curing is carried out in accordance
with an approved and documented process, and the quality system described under
6.9.2.2.2 includes verification of whichever is applicable formed thermoplastic resin
characteristics or degree of cure of thermoset resin, for each FRP portable tank using an
indirect measurement approach as per 6.9.2.7.1.2 (h), such as Barcol testing via ASTM
D2583:2013-03 or EN 59:2016, HDT via ISО 75-1:2013, thermo-mechanical analysis
(TMA) via ISO 11359-1:2014, or dynamic thermo-mechanical analysis (DMA) via ISO
6721-11:2019;
– 536 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 537 –
1.5 in other cases.
K5 is a factor related to the portable tank instruction in 4.2.5.2.6:
1.0 for T1to T19;
1.33 for T20;
1.67 for T21 to T22.
A design validation exercise using numerical analysis and a suitable composite failure criterion is to be
undertaken to verify that the stresses in the plies in the shell are below the allowables. Suitable
composite failure criteria include, but are not limited to, Tsai-Wu, Tsai-Hill, Hashin, Yamada-Sun,
Strain Invariant Failure Theory, Maximum Strain, or Maximum Stress. Other relations for the strength
criteria are allowed upon agreement with the competent authority. The method and results of this design
validation exercise are to be submitted to the competent authority.
The allowables are to be determined using experiments to derive parameters required by the chosen
failure criteria combined with factor of safety K, the strength values measured as per 6.9.2.7.1.2 (c), and
the maximum elongation strain criteria prescribed in 6.9.2.3.5. The analysis of joints is to be undertaken
in accordance with the allowables determined in 6.9.2.3.7 and the strength values measured as per
6.9.2.7.1.2 (g). Buckling is to be considered in accordance with 6.9.2.3.6. Design of openings and
metallic inclusions is to be considered in accordance with 6.9.2.3.8.
6.9.2.3.5 At any of the stresses as defined in 6.7.2.2.12 and 6.9.2.3.4, the resulting elongation in any direction
shall not exceed the value indicated in the following table or one tenth of the elongation at fracture of
the resin determined by ISO 527-2:2012, whichever is lower.
Examples of known limits are presented in the table below.
Type of resin Maximum strain in tension (%)
Unsaturated polyester or phenolic 0.2
Vinylester 0.25
Epoxy 0.3
Thermoplastic See 6.9.2.3.3
6.9.2.3.6 For the external design pressure the minimum safety factor for linear buckling analysis of the shell shall
be as defined in the applicable pressure vessel code but not less than three.
6.9.2.3.7 The adhesive bondlines and/or overlay laminates used in the joints, including the end joints, connection
between the equipment and shell, the joints of the surge plates and the partitions with the shell shall be
capable of withstanding the loads of 6.7.2.2.12, 6.9.2.2.3.1, 6.9.2.3.2, 6.9.2.3.4 and 6.9.2.3.6. In order
to avoid concentrations of stresses in the overlay lamination, the applied taper shall not be steeper than
1:6. The shear strength between the overlay laminate and the tank components to which it is bonded
shall not be less than:
𝜏𝜏 � � 𝑄𝑄
𝑙𝑙 � 𝜏𝜏 �
𝐾𝐾
where:
τR is the interlaminar shear strength according to ISO 14130:1997 and Cor 1:2003;
Q is the load per unit width of the interconnection;
K is the safety factor determined as per 6.9.2.3.4;
l is the length of the overlay laminate;
γ is the notch factor relating average joint stress to peak joint stress at failure initiation location.
Other calculation methods for the joints are allowed following approval with the competent authority.
6.9.2.3.8 Metallic flanges and their closures are permitted to be used in FRP shells, under design requirements of
6.7.2. Openings in the FRP shell shall be reinforced to provide at least the same safety factors against
– 537 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 538 –
the static and dynamic stresses as specified in 6.7.2.2.12, 6.9.2.3.2, 6.9.2.3.4 and 6.9.2.3.6 as that for
the shell itself. The number of openings shall be minimized. The axis ratio of oval-shaped openings
shall be not more than 2.
If metallic flanges or componentry are integrated into the FRP shell using bonding, then the
characterisation method stated in 6.9.2.3.7 shall apply to the joint between the metal and FRP. If the
metallic flanges or componentry are fixed in an alternative fashion, e.g. threaded fastener connections,
then the appropriate provisions of the relevant pressure vessel standard shall apply.
6.9.2.3.9 Check calculations of the strength of the shell shall be performed by finite element method simulating
the shell layups, joints within FRP shell, joints between the FRP shell and the container frame, and
openings. Treatment of singularities shall be undertaken using an appropriate method according to the
applicable pressure vessel code.
6.9.2.4 Minimum wall thickness of the shell
6.9.2.4.1 Minimum thickness of the FRP shell shall be confirmed by check calculations of the strength of the
shell considering strength requirements given in 6.9.2.3.4.
6.9.2.4.2 Minimum thickness of the FRP shell structural layers shall be determined in accordance with 6.9.2.3.4,
however, in any case the minimum thickness of the structural layers shall be at least 3 mm.
6.9.2.5 Equipment components for portable tanks with FRP shell
Service equipment, bottom openings, pressure relief devices, gauging devices, supports, frameworks,
lifting and tie-down attachments of portable tanks shall meet the requirements of 6.7.2.5 to 6.7.2.17. If
any other metallic features are required to be integrated into the FRP shell, then the provisions of
6.9.2.3.8 shall apply.
6.9.2.6 Design approval
6.9.2.6.1 Design approval of FRP portable tanks shall be as per 6.7.2.18 requirements. The following additional
requirements apply to FRP portable tanks.
6.9.2.6.2 The prototype test report for the purpose of the design approval shall additionally include the following:
(a) Results of the material tests used for FRP shell fabrication in accordance with 6.9.2.7.1
requirements;
(b) Results of the ball drop test in accordance with the requirements of 6.9.2.7.1.4.
(c) Results the fire resistance test in accordance with provisions of 6.9.2.7.1.5.
6.9.2.6.3 A service life inspection programme shall be established, which shall be a part of the operation manual,
to monitor the condition of the tank at periodic inspections. The inspection programme shall focus on
the critical stress locations identified in the design analysis performed under 6.9.2.3.4. The inspection
method shall take into account the potential damage mode at the critical stress location (e.g. tensile
stress or interlaminate stress). The inspection shall be a combination of visual and non-destructive
testing (e.g. acoustic emissions, ultrasonic evaluation, thermographic). For heating elements, the service
life inspection programme shall allow an examination of the shell or its representative locations to take
into account the effects of overheating.
6.9.2.6.4 A representative prototype tank shall be subjected to tests as specified below. For this purpose, service
equipment may be replaced by other items if necessary.
6.9.2.6.4.1 The prototype shall be inspected for compliance with the design type specification. This shall include
an internal and external inspection and measurement of the main dimensions.
6.9.2.6.4.2 The prototype, equipped with strain gauges at all locations of high strain, as identified by the design
validation exercise in accordance with 6.9.2.3.4, shall be subjected to the following loads and the strain
shall be recorded:
(a) Filled with water to the maximum filling degree. The measuring results shall be used to calibrate
the design calculations according to 6.9.2.3.4;
– 538 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 539 –
(b) Filled with water to the maximum filling degree and subjected to static loads in all three
directions mounted by the base corner castings without additional mass applied external to the
shell. For comparison with the design calculation according to 6.9.2.3.4 the strains recorded shall
be extrapolated in relation to the quotient of the accelerations required in 6.7.2.2.12 and
measured;
(c) Filled with water and subjected to the specified test pressure. Under this load, the shell shall
exhibit no visual damage or leakage.
The stress corresponding to the measured strain level shall not exceed the minimum factor of safety
calculated in 6.9.2.3.4 under any of these loading conditions.
6.9.2.7 Additional provisions applicable to FRP portable tanks
6.9.2.7.1 Material testing
6.9.2.7.1.1 Resins
Resin tensile elongation shall be determined in accordance with ISО 527-2:2012. The heat distortion
temperature (HDT) of the resin shall be determined in accordance with ISO 75-1:2013.
6.9.2.7.1.2 Shell-samples
Prior to testing, all coatings shall be removed from the samples. If shell samples are not possible then
parallel shell-samples may be used. The tests shall cover:
(a) The thickness of the laminates of the central shell wall and the ends;
(b) The mass content and composition of composite reinforcement by ISO 1172:1996 or ISO
14127:2008, as well as orientation and arrangement of reinforcement layers;
(c) The tensile strength, elongation at fracture and modulus of elasticity according to ISO 527-
4:1997 or ISO 527-5:2009 for the circumferential and longitudinal directions of the shell. For
areas of the FRP shell, tests shall be performed on representative laminates in accordance with
ISO 527-4:1997 or ISO 527-5:2009, to permit evaluation of the suitability of safety factor (K).
A minimum of six specimens per measure of tensile strength shall be used, and the tensile
strength shall be taken as the average minus two standard deviations;
(d) The bending deflection and strength shall be established by the three-point or four-point bending
test according to ISO 14125:1998 + Amd 1:2011 using a sample with a minimum width of 50
mm and a support distance of at least 20 times the wall thickness. A minimum of five specimens
shall be used.
(e) The creep factor α determined by taking the average result of at least two specimens with the
configuration described in (d), subject to creep in three-point or four-point bending, at the
maximum design temperature nominated under 6.9.2.2.3.2, for a period of 1 000 hours. The
following test is to be undertaken for each specimen:
(i) Place specimen into bending apparatus, unloaded, in oven set to maximum design
temperature and allow to acclimatise for a period of not less than 60 minutes;
(ii) Load specimen bending in accordance with ISO 14125:1998 + Amd 1:2011 at flexural
stress equal to the strength determined in (d) divided by four. Maintain mechanical load
at maximum design temperature without interruption for not less than 1 000 hours;
(iii) Measure the initial deflection six minutes after full load application in (e) (ii). Specimen
shall remain loaded in test rig;
(iv) Measure the final deflection 1 000 hours after full load application in (e) (ii); and
(v) Calculate the creep factor α by dividing the initial deflection from (e) (iii) by the final
deflection from (e) (iv);
(f) The ageing factor β determined by taking the average result of at least two specimens with the
configuration described in (d), subject to loading in static three-point or four-point bending, in
– 539 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 540 –
conjunction with immersion in water at the maximum design temperature nominated under
6.9.2.2.3.2 for a period of 1 000 hours. The following test is to be undertaken for each specimen:
(i) Prior to testing or conditioning, specimens shall be dried in an oven at 80 °C for a period
of 24 hours;
(ii) The specimen shall be loaded in three-point or four-point bending at ambient temperature,
in accordance with ISO 14125:1998 + Amd 1:2011, at the flexural stress level equal to
the strength determined in (d) divided by four. Measure the initial deflection six minutes
after full load application. Remove specimen from test rig;
(iii) Immerse unloaded specimen in water at the maximum design temperature for a period of
not less than 1 000 hours without interruption to the water conditioning period. When
conditioning period has lapsed, remove specimens, keep damp at ambient temperature,
and complete (f) (iv) within three days;
(iv) The specimen shall be subject to second round of static loading, in a manner identical to
(f) (ii). Measure the final deflection six minutes after full load application. Remove
specimen from test rig; and
(v) Calculate the ageing factor β by dividing the initial deflection from (f) (ii) by the final
deflection from (f) (iv);
(g) The interlaminar shear strength of the joints measured by testing representative samples in
accordance with ISO 14130:1997;
(h) The efficiency of whichever is applicable of thermoplastic resin forming characteristics or
thermoset resin cure and post-cure processes for laminates determined using one or more of the
following methods:
(i) Direct measurement of formed thermoplastic resin characteristics or thermoset resin
degree of cure: glass transition temperature (Tg) or melting temperature (Tm) determined
using differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) via ISO 11357-2:2016; or
(ii) Indirect measurement of formed thermoplastic resin characteristics or thermoset resin
degree of cure:
– HDT via ISО 75-1:2013;
– Tg or Tm using thermo-mechanical analysis (TMA) via ISO 11359-1:2014;
– Dynamic thermo-mechanical analysis (DMA) via ISO 6721-11:2019;
– Barcol testing via ASTM D2583:2013-03 or EN 59:2016.
6.9.2.7.1.3 The chemical compatibility of the liner and chemical contact surfaces of service equipment with the
substances to be carried shall be demonstrated by one of the following methods. This demonstration
shall account for all aspects of the compatibility of the materials of the shell and its equipment with the
substances to be carried, including chemical deterioration of the shell, initiation of critical reactions of
the contents and dangerous reactions between both.
(a) In order to establish any deterioration of the shell, representative samples taken from the shell,
including any liners with welds, shall be subjected to the chemical compatibility test according
to EN 977:1997 for a period of 1 000 hours at 50 °C or the maximum temperature at which a
particular substance is approved for carriage. Compared with a virgin sample, the loss of strength
and elasticity modulus measured by the bending test according to EN 978:1997 shall not exceed
25 %. Cracks, bubbles, pitting effects as well as separation of layers and liners and roughness
shall not be acceptable;
(b) Certified and documented data of positive experiences on the compatibility of filling substances
in question with the materials of the shell with which they come into contact at given
temperatures, times and other relevant service conditions;
(c) Technical data published in relevant literature, standards or other sources, acceptable to the
competent authority;
– 540 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 541 –
(d) Upon agreement with the competent authority other methods of chemical compatibility
verification may be used.
6.9.2.7.1.4 Ball drop test as per EN 976-1:1997
The prototype shall be subjected to the ball drop test according to EN 976-1:1997, No. 6.6. No visible
damage inside or outside the tank shall occur.
6.9.2.7.1.5 Fire resistance test
6.9.2.7.1.5.1 A representative prototype tank with its service and structural equipment in place and filled to 80 % of
its maximum capacity with water, shall be exposed to a full engulfment in fire for 30 minutes, caused
by an open heating oil pool fire or any other type of fire with the same effect. The fire shall be equivalent
to a theoretical fire with a flame temperature of 800 °C, emissivity of 0.9 and to the tank a heat transfer
coefficient of 10 W/(m²K) and surface absorptivity of 0.8. A minimum net heat flux of 75 kW/m² shall
be calibrated according to ISO 21843:2018. The dimensions of the pool shall exceed those of the tank
by at least 50 cm to each side and the distance between fuel level and tank shall be between 50 cm and
80 cm. The rest of the tank below liquid level, including openings and closures, shall remain leakproof
except for drips.
6.9.2.8 Inspection and testing
6.9.2.8.1 Inspection and testing of portable FRP tanks shall be carried out as per provisions of 6.7.2.19. In
addition, welded thermoplastic liners shall be spark tested under a suitable standard, after pressure tests
performed in accordance with the periodic inspections specified in 6.7.2.19.4.
6.9.2.8.2 In addition, the initial and periodic inspections shall follow the service life inspection programme and
any associated inspection methods per 6.9.2.6.3.
6.9.2.8.3 The initial inspection and test shall verify that construction of the tank is made in accordance with the
quality system required by 6.9.2.2.2.
6.9.2.8.4 Additionally, during inspection of the shell the position of the areas heated by heating elements shall be
indicated or marked, be available on design drawings or shall be made visible by a suitable technique
(e.g. infrared). Examination of the shell shall take into account the effects of overheating, corrosion,
erosion, overpressure and mechanical overloading.
6.9.2.9 Retention of samples
Shell samples (e.g. from manhole cut out) for each tank manufactured shall be maintained for future
inspection and shell verification for a period of five years from the date of the initial inspection and test
and until successful completion of the required five-year periodic inspection.
6.9.2.10 Marking
6.9.2.10.1 The requirements of 6.7.2.20.1 apply to portable tanks with an FRP shell except those of 6.7.2.20.1 (f)
(ii).
6.9.2.10.2 The information required in 6.7.2.20.1 (f) (i) shall be “Shell structural material: Fibre-reinforced plastic”
the reinforcement fibre e.g. “Reinforcement: E-glass” and resin e.g. “Resin: Vinyl Ester”.
6.9.2.10.3 Requirements of provision 6.7.2.20.2 apply to portable tank with an FRP shell.
– 541 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 543 –
CHAPTER 6.10
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT,
TYPE APPROVAL, INSPECTION AND MARKING OF
VACUUM-OPERATED WASTE TANKS
NOTE 1: For portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) see Chapter 6.7; for fixed tanks (tank-
vehicles), demountable tanks and tank containers and tank swap bodies, with shells made of metallic materials, and
battery-vehicles and multiple element gas containers (MEGCs) other than UN MEGCs see Chapter 6.8; for fibre-
reinforced plastic tanks see Chapter 6.9 or Chapter 6.13, as appropriate.
NOTE 2: This Chapter applies to fixed tanks, demountable tanks, tank-containers and tank swap bodies.
6.10.1 General
6.10.1.1 Definition
NOTE: A tank which fully complies with the requirements of Chapter 6.8 is not considered to be a
“vacuum-operated waste tank”.
6.10.1.1.1 The term “protected area” means the areas located as follows:
(a) The lower part of the tank in a zone which extends over a 60 o angle on either side of the lower
generating line;
(b) The top part of the tank in a zone which extends over a 30° angle on either side of the top
generating line;
(c) On the end front of the tank on motor vehicles;
(d) On the rear end of the tank inside the protection volume formed by the device stipulated in 9.7.6.
6.10.1.2 Scope
6.10.1.2.1 The special requirements of 6.10.2 to 6.10.4 complete or modify Chapter 6.8 and are applied to vacuum-
operated waste tanks.
Vacuum-operated waste tanks may be equipped with openable ends, if the requirements of Chapter 4.3
allow bottom discharge of the substances to be carried (indicated by letters “A” or “B” in Part 3 of the
tank code given in Column (12) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, in accordance with 4.3.4.1.1).
Vacuum-operated waste tanks shall comply with all requirements of Chapter 6.8, except where
overtaken by special requirements in this Chapter. However the requirements of 6.8.2.1.19, 6.8.2.1.20,
and 6.8.2.1.21 shall not apply.
6.10.2 Construction
6.10.2.1 Tanks shall be designed for a calculation pressure equal to 1.3 times the filling or discharge pressure
but not less than 400 kPa (4 bar) (gauge pressure). For the carriage of substances for which a higher
calculation pressure of the tank is specified in Chapter 6.8, this higher pressure shall apply.
6.10.2.2 Tanks shall be designed to withstand a negative internal pressure of 100 kPa (1 bar).
6.10.3 Items of equipment
6.10.3.1 The items of equipment shall be so arranged as to be protected against the risk of being wrenched off
or damaged during carriage or handling. This requirement can be fulfilled by placing the items of
equipment in a so called “protected area” (see 6.10.1.1.1).
6.10.3.2 The bottom discharge of shells may be constituted by external piping with a stop-valve fitted as close
to the shell as practicable and a second closure which may be a blank flange or other equivalent device.
– 543 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 544 –
6.10.3.3 The position and closing direction of the stop-valve(s) connected to the shell, or to any compartment in
the case of compartmented shells, shall be unambiguous, and be able to be checked from the ground.
6.10.3.4 In order to avoid any loss of contents in the event of damage to the external filling and discharge fittings
(pipes, lateral shut-off devices), the internal stop-valve, or the first external stop-valve (where
applicable), and its seatings shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by external
stresses or shall be so designed as to withstand them. The filling and discharge devices (including
flanges or threaded plugs) and protective caps (if any) shall be capable of being secured against any
unintended opening.
6.10.3.5 The tanks may be equipped with openable ends. Openable ends shall comply with the following
conditions:
(a) The ends shall be designed to be secured leaktight when closed;
(b) Unintentional opening shall not be possible;
(c) Where the opening mechanism is power operated the end shall remain securely closed in the
event of a power failure;
(d) A safety or breakseal device shall be incorporated to ensure that the openable end cannot be
opened when there is still a residual over pressure in the tank. This requirement does not apply
to openable ends which are power-operated, where the movement is positively controlled. In this
case the controls shall be of the dead-man type and be so positioned that the operator can observe
the movement of the openable end at all times and is not endangered during opening and closing
of the openable end; and
(e) Provisions shall be made to protect the openable end and prevent it from being forced open
during a roll-over of the vehicle, tank-container or tank swap body.
6.10.3.6 Vacuum-operated waste tanks which are fitted with an internal piston to assist in the cleaning of the
tank or discharging shall be provided with stop-devices to prevent the piston in every operational
position being ejected from the tank when a force equivalent to the maximum working pressure of the
tank is applied to the piston. The maximum working pressure for tanks or compartments with pneumatic
operated piston shall not exceed 100 kPa (1.0 bar). The internal piston shall be constructed in a manner
and of materials which will not cause an ignition source when the piston is moved.
The internal piston may be used as a compartment provided it is secured in position. Where any of the
means by which the internal piston is secured is external to the tank, it shall be placed in a position not
liable to accidental damage.
6.10.3.7 The tanks may be equipped with suction booms if:
(a) The boom is fitted with an internal or external stop-valve fixed directly to the shell, or directly
to a bend that is welded to the shell; a rotation crown wheel can be fitted between the shell or the
bend and the external stop valve, if this rotation crown wheel is located in the protected area and
the stop-valve control device is protected with a housing or cover against the danger of being
wrenched off by external loads;
(b) The stop-valve mentioned in (a) is so arranged that carriage with the valve in an open position is
prevented; and
(c) The boom is constructed in such a way that the tank will not leak as a result of accidental impact
on the boom.
6.10.3.8 The tanks shall be fitted with the following additional service equipment:
(a) The outlet of a pump/exhauster unit shall be so arranged as to ensure that any flammable or toxic
vapours are diverted to a place where they will not cause a danger;
NOTE: This requirement may, for example, be complied with by the use of a vertical pipe
discharging at the top, or a low-level outlet with a connection which allows attachment of a hose.
(b) A device to prevent immediate passage of flame shall be fitted to all openings of a vacuum
pump/exhauster unit which may provide a source of ignition and which is fitted on a tank used
– 544 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 545 –
for the carriage of flammable wastes, or the tank shall be explosion pressure shock resistant,
which means being capable of withstanding without leakage, but allowing deformation, an
explosion resulting from the passage of the flame;
(c) Pumps which can deliver a positive pressure shall have a safety device fitted in the pipework
which can be pressurised. The safety device shall be set to discharge at a pressure not exceeding
the maximum working pressure of the tank;
(d) A stop-valve shall be fitted between the shell, or the outlet of the overfill prevention device fitted
to the shell, and the pipework connecting the shell to the pump/exhauster unit;
(e) The tank shall be fitted with a suitable pressure/vacuum manometer which shall be mounted in
a position where it can be easily read by the person operating the pump/exhauster unit. A
distinguishing line shall be marked on the scale to indicate the maximum working pressure of
the tank;
(f) The tank, or in case of compartmented tanks, every compartment, shall be equipped with a level
indicating device. Glass level-gauges and level-gauges of other suitable transparent material may
be used as level indicating devices provided:
(i) they form a part of the tank wall and have a resistance to the pressure comparable to that
of the tank; or they are fitted external to the tank;
(ii) the top and bottom connections to the tank are equipped with shut-off valves fixed directly
to the shell and so arranged that carriage with the valves in an open position is prevented;
(iii) are suitable for operation at the maximum working pressure of the tank; and
(iv) are placed in a position where they will not be liable to accidental damage.
6.10.3.9 The shells of vacuum-operated waste tanks shall be fitted with a safety valve preceded by a bursting
disc.
The valve shall be capable of opening automatically at a pressure between 0.9 and 1.0 times the test
pressure of the tank to which it is fitted. The use of dead weight or counterweight valves is prohibited.
The bursting disc shall burst at the earliest when the initial opening pressure of the valve is reached and
at the latest when this pressure reaches the test pressure of the tank to which it is fitted.
Safety devices shall be of such a type as to resist dynamic stresses, including liquid surge.
The space between the bursting disc and the safety valve shall be provided with a pressure gauge or
suitable tell-tale indicator for the detection of disc rupture, pinholing or leakage wich could cause a
malfunction of the safety valve.
6.10.4 Inspection
Vacuum-operated waste tanks shall be subject no later than every three years for fixed tanks or
demountable tanks and no later than every two and a half years for tank-containers and tank swap bodies
to an examination of the internal condition, in addition to the inspection according to 6.8.2.4.3.
– 545 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 547 –
CHAPTER 6.11
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION,
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF BULK CONTAINERS
6.11.1 (Reserved)
6.11.2 Application and general requirements
6.11.2.1 Bulk containers and their service and structural equipment shall be designed and constructed to
withstand, without loss of contents, the internal pressure of the contents and the stresses of normal
handling and carriage.
6.11.2.2 Where a discharge valve is fitted, it shall be capable of being made secure in the closed position and the
whole discharge system shall be suitably protected from damage. Valves having lever closures shall be
able to be secured against unintended opening and the open or closed position shall be readily apparent.
6.11.2.3 Code for designating types of bulk container
The following table indicates the codes to be used for designating types of bulk containers:
Types of bulk containers Code
Sheeted bulk container BK1
Closed bulk container BK2
Flexible bulk container BK3
6.11.2.4 In order to take account of progress in science and technology, the use of alternative arrangements which
offer at least equivalent safety as provided by the requirements of this chapter may be considered by the
competent authority.
6.11.3 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of containers conforming to the
CSC used as BK1 or BK2 bulk containers
6.11.3.1 Design and construction requirements
6.11.3.1.1 The general design and construction requirements of this sub-section are deemed to be met if the bulk
container complies with the requirements of ISO 1496-4:1991 “Series 1 Freight containers-
Specification and testing – Part 4: Non pressurized containers for dry bulk” and the container is
siftproof.
6.11.3.1.2 Containers designed and tested in accordance with ISO 1496-1:1990 “Series 1 Freight containers-
Specification and testing – Part 1: General cargo containers for general purposes” shall be equipped with
operational equipment which is, including its connection to the container, designed to strengthen the
end walls and to improve the longitudinal restraint as necessary to comply with the test requirements of
ISO 1496-4:1991 as relevant.
6.11.3.1.3 Bulk containers shall be siftproof. Where a liner is used to make the container siftproof it shall be made
of a suitable material. The strength of material used for, and the construction of, the liner shall be
appropriate to the capacity of the container and its intended use. Joins and closures of the liner shall
withstand pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of handling and carriage. For
ventilated bulk containers any liner shall not impair the operation of ventilating devices.
6.11.3.1.4 The operational equipment of bulk containers designed to be emptied by tilting shall be capable of
withstanding the total filling mass in the tilted orientation.
6.11.3.1.5 Any movable roof or side or end wall or roof section shall be fitted with locking devices with securing
devices designed to show the locked state to an observer at ground level.
– 547 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 548 –
6.11.3.2 Service equipment
6.11.3.2.1 Filling and discharge devices shall be so constructed and arranged as to be protected against the risk of
being wrenched off or damaged during carriage and handling. The filling and discharge devices shall
be capable of being secured against unintended opening. The open and closed position and direction of
closure shall be clearly indicated.
6.11.3.2.2 Seals of openings shall be so arranged as to avoid any damage by the operation, filling and emptying of
the bulk container.
6.11.3.2.3 Where ventilation is required bulk containers shall be equipped with means of air exchange, either by
natural convection, e.g. by openings, or active elements, e.g. fans. The ventilation shall be designed to
prevent negative pressures in the container at all times. Ventilating elements of bulk containers for the
carriage of flammable substances or substances emitting flammable gases or vapours shall be designed
so as not to be a source of ignition.
6.11.3.3 Inspection and testing
6.11.3.3.1 Containers used, maintained and qualified as bulk containers in accordance with the requirements of
this section shall be tested and approved in accordance with the CSC.
6.11.3.3.2 Containers used and qualified as bulk containers shall be inspected periodically according to the CSC.
6.11.3.4 Marking
6.11.3.4.1 Containers used as bulk containers shall be marked with a Safety Approval Plate in accordance with the
CSC.
6.11.4 Requirements for the design, construction and approval of BK1 or BK2 bulk containers other
than containers conforming to the CSC
NOTE: When containers conforming to the provisions of this section are used for the carriage of solids
in bulk, the following statement shall be shown on the transport document:
“Bulk container BK(x) approved by the competent authority of ……”. (see 5.4.1.1.17).
6.11.4.1 Bulk containers covered in this section include skips, offshore bulk containers, bulk bins, swap bodies,
trough shaped containers, roller containers, and load compartments of vehicles.
NOTE: These bulk containers also include containers conforming to IRS 50591 (Roller units for
horizontal transhipment – Technical conditions governing their use in international traffic)1 and IRS
50592 (Intermodal Transport Units (other than semi-trailers) for vertical transhipment and suitable for
carriage on wagons – Minimum requirements)2 published by UIC as mentioned in 7.1.3 which do not
conform to the CSC.
6.11.4.2 These bulk containers shall be designed and constructed so as to be strong enough to withstand the
shocks and loadings normally encountered during carriage including, as applicable, transhipment
between modes of transport.
6.11.4.3 (Reserved)
6.11.4.4 These bulk containers shall be approved by the competent authority and the approval shall include the
code for designating types of bulk containers in accordance with 6.11.2.3 and the requirements for
inspection and testing as appropriate.
6.11.4.5 Where it is necessary to use a liner in order to retain the dangerous goods it shall meet the provisions of
6.11.3.1.3.
1 First edition of IRS (International Railway Solution) applicable as from 1 June 2020.
2 Second edition of IRS (International Railway Solution) applicable as from 1 December 2020.
– 548 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 549 –
6.11.5 Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of BK3 flexible bulk containers
6.11.5.1 Design and construction requirements
6.11.5.1.1 Flexible bulk containers shall be sift-proof.
6.11.5.1.2 Flexible bulk containers shall be completely closed to prevent the release of contents.
6.11.5.1.3 Flexible bulk containers shall be waterproof.
6.11.5.1.4 Parts of the flexible bulk container which are in direct contact with dangerous goods:
(a) shall not be affected or significantly weakened by those dangerous goods;
(b) shall not cause a dangerous effect, e.g. catalysing a reaction or reacting with the dangerous
goods; and
(c) shall not allow permeation of the dangerous goods that could constitute a danger under normal
conditions of carriage.
6.11.5.2 Service equipment and handling devices
6.11.5.2.1 Filling and discharge devices shall be so constructed as to be protected against damage during carriage
and handling. The filling and discharge devices shall be secured against unintended opening.
6.11.5.2.2 Slings of the flexible bulk container, if fitted, shall withstand pressure and dynamic forces, which can
appear in normal conditions of handling and carriage.
6.11.5.2.3 The handling devices shall be strong enough to withstand repeated use.
6.11.5.3 Inspection and testing
6.11.5.3.1 The design type of each flexible bulk container shall be tested as provided for in 6.11.5 in accordance
with procedures established by the competent authority allowing the allocation of the mark and shall be
approved by this competent authority.
6.11.5.3.2 Tests shall also be repeated after each modification of the design type, which alters the
design, material or manner of construction of a flexible bulk container.
6.11.5.3.3 Tests shall be carried out on flexible bulk containers prepared as for carriage. Flexible bulk containers
shall be filled to the maximum mass at which they may be used and the contents shall be evenly
distributed. The substances to be carried in the flexible bulk container may be replaced by other
substances except where this would invalidate the results of the test. When another substance is used it
shall have the same physical characteristics (mass, grain size, etc.) as the substance to be carried. It is
permissible to use additives, such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total mass of the flexible
bulk container so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected.
6.11.5.3.4 Flexible bulk containers shall be manufactured and tested under a quality assurance programme which
satisfies the competent authority, in order to ensure that each manufactured flexible bulk container meets
the requirements of this Chapter.
6.11.5.3.5 Drop test
6.11.5.3.5.1 Applicability
For all types of flexible bulk containers, as a design type test.
6.11.5.3.5.2 Preparation for testing
The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.11.5.3.5.3 Method of testing
The flexible bulk container shall be dropped onto a target surface that is non-resilient and horizontal.
The target surface shall be:
– 549 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 550 –
(a) Integral and massive enough to be immovable;
(b) Flat with a surface kept free from local defects capable of influencing the test results;
(c) Rigid enough to be non-deformable under test conditions and not liable to become damaged by
the tests; and
(d) Sufficiently large to ensure that the test flexible bulk container falls entirely upon the surface.
Following the drop, the flexible bulk container shall be restored to the upright position for observation.
6.11.5.3.5.4 Drop height shall be:
Packing group III: 0.8 m
6.11.5.3.5.5 Criteria for passing the test
(a) There shall be no loss of contents. A slight discharge, e.g. from closures or stitch holes, upon
impact shall not be considered to be a failure of the flexible bulk container provided that no
further leakage occurs after the container has been restored to the upright position;
(b) There shall be no damage, which renders the flexible bulk container unsafe to be carried for
salvage or for disposal.
6.11.5.3.6 Top lift test
6.11.5.3.6.1 Applicability
For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test.
6.11.5.3.6.2 Preparation for testing
Flexible bulk containers shall be filled to six times the maximum net mass, the load being evenly
distributed.
6.11.5.3.6.3 Method of testing
A flexible bulk container shall be lifted in the manner for which it is designed until clear of the floor
and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes.
6.11.5.3.6.4 Criteria for passing the test
There shall be no damage to the flexible bulk container or its lifting devices which renders the flexible
bulk container unsafe for carriage or handling, and no loss of contents.
6.11.5.3.7 Topple test
6.11.5.3.7.1 Applicability
For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test.
6.11.5.3.7.2 Preparation for testing
The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.11.5.3.7.3 Method of testing
Flexible bulk container shall be toppled onto any part of its top by lifting the side furthest from the drop
edge upon a target surface that is non-resilient and horizontal. The target surface shall be:
(a) Integral and massive enough to be immovable;
(b) Flat with a surface kept free from local defects capable of influencing the test results;
(c) Rigid enough to be non-deformable under test conditions and not liable to become damaged by
the tests; and
– 550 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 551 –
(d) Sufficiently large to ensure that the tested flexible bulk container falls entirely upon the surface.
6.11.5.3.7.4 For all flexible bulk containers, the topple height is specified as follows:
Packing group III: 0.8 m
6.11.5.3.7.5 Criterion for passing the test
There shall be no loss of contents. A slight discharge, e.g. from closures or stitch holes, upon impact
shall not be considered to be a failure of the flexible bulk container provided that no further leakage
occurs.
6.11.5.3.8 Righting test
6.11.5.3.8.1 Applicability
For all types of flexible bulk containers designed to be lifted by the top or side part, as a design type
test.
6.11.5.3.8.2 Preparation for testing
The flexible bulk container shall be filled to not less than 95 % of its capacity and to its maximum
permissible gross mass.
6.11.5.3.8.3 Method of testing
The flexible bulk container, lying on its side, shall be lifted at a speed of at least 0.1 m/s to an upright
position, clear of the floor, by no more than half of the lifting devices.
6.11.5.3.8.4 Criterion for passing the test
There shall be no damage to the flexible bulk container or its lifting devices which renders the flexible
bulk container unsafe for carriage or handling.
6.11.5.3.9 Tear test
6.11.5.3.9.1 Applicability
For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test.
6.11.5.3.9.2 Preparation for testing
The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.11.5.3.9.3 Method of testing
With the flexible bulk container placed on the ground, a 300 mm cut shall be made, completely
penetrating all layers of the flexible bulk container on a wall of a wide face. The cut shall be made at a
45º angle to the principal axis of the flexible bulk container, halfway between the bottom surface and
the top level of the contents. The flexible bulk container shall then be subjected to a uniformly
distributed superimposed load equivalent to twice the maximum gross mass. The load must be applied
for at least fifteen minutes. A flexible bulk container which is designed to be lifted from the top or the
side shall, after removal of the superimposed load, be lifted clear of the floor and maintained in that
position for a period of fifteen minutes.
6.11.5.3.9.4 Criterion for passing the test
The cut shall not propagate more than 25 % of its original length.
6.11.5.3.10 Stacking test
6.11.5.3.10.1 Applicability
For all types of flexible bulk containers as a design type test.
6.11.5.3.10.2 Preparation for testing
– 551 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 552 –
The flexible bulk container shall be filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
6.11.5.3.10.3 Method of testing
The flexible bulk container shall be subjected to a force applied to its top surface that is four times the
design load-carrying capacity for 24 hours.
6.11.5.3.10.4 Criterion for passing the test
There shall be no loss of contents during the test or after removal of the load.
6.11.5.4 Test report
6.11.5.4.1 A test report containing at least the following particulars shall be drawn up and shall be available to the
users of the flexible bulk container:
1. Name and address of the test facility;
2. Name and address of applicant (where appropriate);
3. Unique test report identification;
4. Date of the test report;
5. Manufacturer of the flexible bulk container;
6. Description of the flexible bulk container design type (e.g. dimensions, materials, closures,
thickness, etc) and/or photograph(s);
7. Maximum capacity/maximum permissible gross mass;
8. Characteristics of test contents, e.g. particle size for solids;
9. Test descriptions and results;
10. The test report shall be signed with the name and status of the signatory.
6.11.5.4.2 The test report shall contain statements that the flexible bulk container prepared as for carriage was
tested in accordance with the appropriate provisions of this Chapter and that the use of other containment
methods or components may render it invalid. A copy of the test report shall be available to the
competent authority.
6.11.5.5 Marking
6.11.5.5.1 Each flexible bulk container manufactured and intended for use according to the provisions of ADR
shall bear marks that are durable, legible and placed in a location so as to be readily visible. Letters,
numerals and symbols shall be at least 24 mm high and shall show:
(a) The United Nations packaging symbol .
This symbol shall not be used for any purpose other than certifying that a packaging, a flexible
bulk container, a portable tank or a MEGC complies with the relevant requirements in Chapters
6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 or 6.11;
(b) The code BK3;
(c) A capital letter designating the packing group(s) for which the design type has been approved:
Z for packing group III only;
(d) The month and year (last two digits) of manufacture;
(e) The character(s) identifying the country authorizing the allocation of the mark; as indicated by
the distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international road traffic3;
3 Distinguishing sign of the State of registration used on motor vehicles and trailers in international road traffic,
e.g. in accordance with the Geneva Convention on Road Traffic of 1949 or the Vienna Convention on Road Traffic of
1968.
– 552 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 553 –
(f) The name or symbol of the manufacturer and other identification of the flexible bulk container
as specified by the competent authority;
(g) The stacking test load in kg;
(h) The maximum permissible gross mass in kg.
Marks shall be applied in the sequence shown in (a) to (h); each mark, required in these subparagraphs,
shall be clearly separated, e.g. by a slash or space and presented in a way that ensures that all of the
parts of the mark are easily identified.
6.11.5.5.2 Example of marking
BK3/Z/11 09
RUS/NTT/MK-14-10
56000/14000
– 553 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 555 –
CHAPTER 6.12
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT, TYPE APPROVAL,
INSPECTIONS AND TESTS, AND MARKING OF TANKS, BULK CONTAINERS AND
SPECIAL COMPARTMENTS FOR EXPLOSIVES OF MOBILE EXPLOSIVES
MANUFACTURING UNITS (MEMUs)
NOTE 1: For portable tanks, see Chapter 6.7; for fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks, tank-containers and
tank swap bodies, with shells made of metallic materials, see Chapter 6.8; for fibre-reinforced plastics tanks see Chapter
6.9 or Chapter 6.13, as appropriate; for vacuum operated waste tanks see Chapter 6.10; for bulk containers see Chapter
6.11.
NOTE 2: This Chapter applies to fixed tanks, demountable tanks, tank-containers, tank swap bodies, which do not
comply with all requirements of the Chapters mentioned in Note 1 as well as bulk containers and special compartments
for explosives.
6.12.1 Scope
The requirements of this Chapter are applicable to tanks, bulk containers and special compartments
intended for the carriage of dangerous goods on MEMUs.
6.12.2 General provisions
6.12.2.1 Tanks shall meet the requirements of Chapter 6.8, notwithstanding the minimum capacity defined in
section 1.2.1 for fixed tanks, as modified by the special provisions of this Chapter.
6.12.2.2 Bulk containers intended for the carriage of dangerous goods on MEMUs shall comply with the
requirements for bulk containers of type BK2.
6.12.2.3 Where a single tank or bulk container contains more than one substance each substance shall be
separated by at least two walls with drained air space between.
6.12.3 Tanks
6.12.3.1 Tanks with a capacity of 1 000 litres or more
6.12.3.1.1 These tanks shall meet the requirements of section 6.8.2.
6.12.3.1.2 For UN Nos. 1942 and 3375, the tank shall meet the requirements of Chapters 4.3 and 6.8 concerning
breather devices and, in addition, shall have bursting discs or other suitable means of emergency
pressure relief, approved by the competent authority of the country of use.
6.12.3.1.3 For shells not of a circular cross-section, for example box-shaped or elliptical shells, which cannot be
calculated according to 6.8.2.1.4 and standards or technical code mentioned therein, the ability to
withstand the permissible stress may be demonstrated by a pressure test specified by the competent
authority.
These tanks shall meet the requirements of sub-section 6.8.2.1 other than 6.8.2.1.3, 6.8.2.1.4 and
6.8.2.1.13 to 6.8.2.1.22.
The thickness of these shells shall not be less than the values given in the table below:
Material Minimum thickness
Austenitic stainless steels 2.5 mm
Other steels 3 mm
Aluminium alloys 4 mm
Pure aluminium of 99.80 % 6 mm
– 555 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 556 –
Protection of the tank against damage through lateral impact or overturning shall be provided.
Protection shall be provided according to 6.8.2.1.20 or the competent authority shall approve alternative
protection measures.
6.12.3.1.4 By derogation from the requirements of 6.8.2.5.2 tanks do not need to be marked with the tank code
and the special provisions, as applicable.
6.12.3.2 Tanks with a capacity of less than 1 000 litres
6.12.3.2.1 The construction of these tanks shall meet the requirements of sub-section 6.8.2.1 other than 6.8.2.1.3,
6.8.2.1.4, 6.8.2.1.6, 6.8.2.1.10 to 6.8.2.1.23 and 6.8.2.1.28.
6.12.3.2.2 The equipment of these tanks shall meet the requirements of 6.8.2.2.1. For UN Nos. 1942 and 3375, the
tank shall meet the requirements of Chapters 4.3 and 6.8 concerning breather devices and, in addition,
shall have bursting discs or other suitable means of emergency pressure relief, approved by the
competent authority of the country of use.
6.12.3.2.3 The thickness of these shells shall not be less than the values given in the table below:
Material Minimum thickness
Austenitic stainless steels 2.5 mm
Other steels 3 mm
Aluminium alloys 4 mm
Pure aluminium of 99.80 % 6 mm
6.12.3.2.4 Tanks may have constructional parts that are without a radius of convexity. Alternative supportive
measures may be curved walls, corrugated walls or ribs. In at least one direction the distance between
parallel supports on each side of the tank shall not be greater than 100 times the wall thickness.
6.12.3.2.5 Welds shall be skilfully made and shall afford the fullest safety. Welding shall be performed by skilled
welders using a welding process whose effectiveness (including any heat treatments required) has been
demonstrated by test.
6.12.3.2.6 The requirements of 6.8.2.4 do not apply. However, the initial and periodic inspections of these tanks
shall be carried out under the responsibility of the user or owner of the MEMU. Shells and their
equipment shall be subject to visual examination of their external and internal condition and a
leakproofness test to the satisfaction of the competent authority no later than every three years.
6.12.3.2.7 The requirements for type approval of 6.8.2.3 and for marking of 6.8.2.5 do not apply.
6.12.4 Items of equipment
6.12.4.1 Tanks with bottom discharge for UN 1942 and UN 3375 shall have at least two closures. One of these
closures may be the product mixing or discharge pump or auger.
6.12.4.2 Any piping after the first closure shall be of a fusible material (i.e. rubber hose) or have fusible elements.
6.12.4.3 In order to avoid any loss of contents in the event of damage to the external pumps and discharge fittings
(pipes), the first closure and its seatings shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by
external stresses or shall be so designed as to withstand them. The filling and discharge devices
(including flanges or threaded plugs) and protective caps (if any) shall be capable of being secured
against any unintended opening.
6.12.4.4 Breather devices in accordance with 6.8.2.2.6 on tanks for UN 3375 may be substituted by “goose
necks”. Such equipment shall be protected against the danger of being wrenched off by external stresses
or shall be so designed as to withstand them.
– 556 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 557 –
6.12.5 Special compartments for explosives
Compartments for packages of explosives containing detonators and/or detonator assemblies and those
containing substances or articles of compatibility group D shall be designed to provide effective
segregation such that there is no danger of transmission of detonation from the detonators and/or
detonator assemblies to the substances or articles of compatibility group D. Segregation shall be
achieved by the use of separate compartments or by placing one of the two types of explosive in a
special containment system. Either method of segregation shall be approved by the competent authority.
If the material used for the compartment is metal, the complete inside of the compartment shall be
covered with materials providing suitable fire resistance. The explosives compartments shall be located
where they are protected from impact and from damage on rough terrain and dangerous interaction with
other dangerous goods on board and from ignition sources on the vehicle e.g. exhausts etc.
NOTE: Materials classified as class B-s3-d2 according to standard EN 13501-1:2007 + A1:2009 are
deemed to fulfil the fire resistance requirement.
– 557 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 559 –
CHAPTER 6.13
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, EQUIPMENT,
TYPE APPROVAL, TESTING AND MARKING OF FIBRE-REINFORCED PLASTICS
(FRP) FIXED TANKS (TANK-VEHICLES) AND DEMOUNTABLE TANKS
NOTE: For portable tanks and UN multiple-element gas containers (MEGCs) see Chapter 6.7; for FRP portable tanks
see Chapter 6.9; for fixed tanks (tank-vehicles), demountable tanks and tank-containers and tank swap bodies, with shells
made of metallic materials, and battery-vehicles and multiple element gas containers (MEGCs) other than UN MEGCs
see Chapter 6.8; for vacuum operated waste tanks see Chapter 6.10.
6.13.1 General
6.13.1.1 FRP tanks shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with a quality system in accordance
with 6.9.2.2.2; in particular, lamination work and welding of thermoplastic liners shall only be carried
out by qualified personnel in accordance with a procedure recognized by the competent authority.
6.13.1.2 For the design and testing of FRP tanks, the provisions of 6.8.2.1.1, 6.8.2.1.7, 6.8.2.1.13, 6.8.2.1.14 (a)
and (b), 6.8.2.1.25, 6.8.2.1.27, 6.8.2.1.28 and 6.8.2.2.3 shall also apply.
6.13.1.3 For the stability of tank-vehicles, the requirements of 9.7.5.1 shall apply.
6.13.2 Construction
6.13.2.1 FRP shells shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the requirements of 6.9.2.2.3.2 to
6.9.2.2.3.7 and 6.9.2.3.6.
6.13.2.2 The structural layer of the shell is the zone specially designed according to 6.13.2.4 and 6.13.2.5 to
withstand the mechanical stresses. This part normally consists of several fibre-reinforced layers in
determined orientations.
6.13.2.2.1 The external layer of resin or paint is the part of the shell which is directly exposed to the atmosphere.
It shall be capable of withstanding exterior conditions, in particular the occasional contact with the
substance to be carried. The resin shall contain fillers or additives to provide protection against
deterioration of the structural layer of the shell by ultra-violet radiation.
6.13.2.3 Raw materials
6.13.2.3.1 All materials used for the manufacture of FRP tanks shall be of known origin and specifications.
6.13.2.3.2 Resins
The requirements of 6.9.2.2.3.10 shall apply.
6.13.2.3.3 Reinforcement fibres
The requirements of 6.9.2.2.3.11 shall apply.
6.13.2.3.4 Thermoplastic liner material
Thermoplastic liners, such as unplastified polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U), polypropylene (PP),
polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) etc. may be used as lining materials.
6.13.2.3.5 Additives
The requirements of 6.9.2.2.3.12 shall apply.
6.13.2.4 Shells, their attachments and their service and structural equipment shall be designed to withstand
without loss of contents (other than quantities of gas escaping through any degassing vents) during the
design lifetime:
– the static and dynamic loads in normal conditions of carriage;
– 559 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 560 –
– the prescribed minimum loads as defined in 6.13.2.5 to 6.13.2.9.
6.13.2.5 At the pressures as indicated in 6.8.2.1.14 (a) and (b), and under the static gravity forces caused by the
contents with maximum density specified for the design and at maximum filling degree, failure criteria
(FC) in the longitudinal direction, circumferential direction, and any other in-plane direction of the
composite layup shall not exceed the following value:
�� � 1
𝐾𝐾
where:
𝐾𝐾 � � � 𝐾𝐾� � 𝐾𝐾� � 𝐾𝐾� � 𝐾𝐾�
where:
K shall have a minimum value of 4;
S is the safety coefficient. For the general design, if the tanks are referred to in Column (12) of
Table A of Chapter 3.2 by a tank code including the letter “G” in its second part (see 4.3.4.1.1),
the value for S shall be equal to or more than 1.5. For tanks intended for the carriage of substances
which require an increased safety level, i.e. if the tanks are referred to in Column (12) of Table
A of Chapter 3.2 by a tank code including the number “4” in its second part (see 4.3.4.1.1), the
value of S shall be multiplied by a factor of two, unless the shell is provided with protection
against damage consisting of a complete metal skeleton including longitudinal and transverse
structural members;
K0 is a factor related to the deterioration in the material properties due to creep and ageing and as a
result of the chemical action of the substances to be carried. It shall be determined by the formula:
𝐾𝐾� � 1
𝛼𝛼𝛼𝛼
where α is the creep factor and β is the ageing factor determined in accordance with 6.13.4.2.2
(e) and (f), respectively. Alternatively, a conservative value of K0 = 2 may be applied. When
used in calculation, factors α and β shall be between 0 and 1;
K1 is a factor related to the service temperature and the thermal properties of the resin, determined
by the following equation, with a minimum value of 1:
K1 = 1.25 – 0.0125 (HDT – 70)
where HDT is the heat distortion temperature of the resin, in ºC;
K2 is a factor related to the fatigue of the material; the value of K2 = 1.75 shall be used unless
otherwise agreed with the competent authority. For the dynamic design as outlined in 6.8.2.1.2
the value of K2 = 1.1 shall be used;
K3 is a factor related to resine curing and has the following values:
1.0 where curing is carried out in accordance with an approved and documented process, and
the quality system described under 6.9.2.2.2 includes verification of degree of cure for
each FRP tank using a direct measurement approach, such as differential scanning
calorimetry (DSC) determined via ISO 11357-2:2016, as per 6.13.4.2.2 (h) (i);
1.1 where thermoplastic resin forming or thermoset resin curing is carried out in accordance
with an approved and documented process, and the quality system described under
6.13.1.2 includes verification of whichever is applicable formed thermoplastic resin
characteristics or degree of cure of thermoset resin, for each FRP tank using an indirect
measurement approach as per 6.13.4.2.2 (h) (ii), such as Barcol testing via ASTM
D2583:2013-03 or EN 59:2016, HDT via ISО 75-1:2020, thermo-mechanical analysis
(TMA) via ISO 11359-1:2014, or dynamic thermo-mechanical analysis (DMA) via ISO
6721-11:2019;
1.5 in other cases.
– 560 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 561 –
A design validation exercise using numerical analysis and a suitable composite failure criterion is to be
undertaken to verify that that the stresses in the plies in the shell are below the allowables. Suitable
composite failure criteria include, but are not limited to, Tsai-Wu, Tsai-Hill, Hashin, Yamada-Sun,
Strain Invariant Failure Theory, Maximum Strain or Maximum Stress. Other relations for the strength
criteria are allowed upon agreement with the competent authority. The method and results of this design
validation exercise are to be submitted to the competent authority.
The allowables are to be determined using experiments to derive parameters required by the chosen
failure criteria combined with factor of safety K, the strength values measured as per 6.13.4.2.2 (c), and
the maximum elongation strain criteria prescribed in 6.13.2.6. The analysis of joints is to be undertaken
in accordance with the allowables determined in 6.13.2.9 and the strength values measured as per
6.13.4.2.2 (g). Buckling is to be considered in accordance with 6.9.2.3.6. Design of openings and
metallic inclusions is to be considered in accordance with 6.13.2.10.
6.13.2.6 At any of the stresses as defined in 6.8.2.1.2 and 6.13.2.5, the resulting elongation in any direction shall
not exceed the value indicated in the following table or one tenth of the elongation at fracture of the
resin determined by EN ISO 527-2:2012, whichever is lower.
Examples of known limits are presented in the table below.
Type of resin Maximum strain in tension (%)
Unsaturated polyester or phenolic 0.2
Vinylester 0.25
Epoxy 0.3
Thermoplastic See 6.13.2.7
6.13.2.7 At the specified test pressure, which shall not be less than the relevant calculation pressure as specified
in 6.8.2.1.14 (a) and (b) the maximum strain in the shell shall not be greater than the elongation at
fracture of the resin.
6.13.2.8 The shell shall be capable of withstanding the ball drop test according to 6.13.4.3.3 without any visible
internal or external defects.
6.13.2.9 The adhesive bondlines and/or overlay laminates used in the joints, including the end joints, the joints
of the surge plates and the partitions with the shell shall be capable of withstanding the static and
dynamic stresses mentioned above. In order to avoid concentrations of stresses in the overlay
lamination, the applied tapper shall not be steeper than 1:6.
The shear strength between the overlay laminate and the tank components to which it is bonded shall
not be less than:
𝜏𝜏 � � 𝑄𝑄
𝑙𝑙 � 𝜏𝜏 �
𝐾𝐾
where:
τR is the interlaminar shear strength according to ISO 14130:1997 and Cor 1:2003;
Q is the load per unit width that the joint shall carry under the static and dynamic loads;
K is the factor calculated in accordance with 6.13.2.5 for the static and dynamic stresses;
l is the length of the overlay laminate;
γ is the notch factor relating average joint stress to peak joint stress at failure initiation location.
6.13.2.10 Metallic flanges and their closures are permitted to be used in FRP shells, under design requirements of
6.8.2. Openings in the shell shall be reinforced to provide at least the same safety factors against the
static and dynamic stresses as specified in 6.13.2.5 as that for the shell itself. The number of openings
shall be minimized. The axis ratio of oval-shaped openings shall be not more than 2.
If metallic flanges or componentry are integrated into the FRP shell using bonding, then the
characterisation method stated in 6.13.2.9 shall apply to the joint between the metal and FRP. If the
metallic flanges or componentry are fixed in an alternative fashion, e.g. threaded fastener connections,
then the appropriate provisions of the relevant pressure vessel standard shall apply.
– 561 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 562 –
6.13.2.11 For the design of flanges and pipework attached to the shell, handling forces and the fastening of bolts
shall also be taken into account.
6.13.2.12 Check calculations of the strength of the shell shall be performed by finite element method simulating
the shell layups, joints within FRP shell, joints between the FRP shell, the attachments and the structure
equipment, and openings.
6.13.2.13 The tank shall be designed to withstand, without significant leakage, the effects of a full engulfment in
fire for 30 minutes as specified by the test requirements in 6.13.4.3.4. Testing may be waived with the
agreement of the competent authority, where sufficient proof can be provided by tests with comparable
tank designs.
6.13.2.14 Special requirements for the carriage of substances with a flash-point of not more than 60 °C
6.13.2.14.1 FRP tanks used for the carriage of substances with a flash-point of not more than 60°C shall fulfil the
requirements of 6.9.2.2.3.14.
6.13.2.14.2 The electrical surface-resistance and discharge resistance shall be measured initially on each
manufactured tank or a specimen of the shell in accordance with a procedure recognized by the
competent authority.
6.13.2.14.3 The discharge resistance to earth of each tank shall be measured as part of the periodic inspection in
accordance with a procedure recognized by the competent authority.
6.13.3 Items of equipment
6.13.3.1 The requirements of 6.8.2.2.1, 6.8.2.2.2, 6.8.2.2.4 and 6.8.2.2.6 to 6.8.2.2.8 shall apply.
6.13.3.2 In addition, when they are shown under an entry in Column (13) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, the special
provisions of 6.8.4 (b) (TE) shall also apply.
6.13.4 Type testing and approval
6.13.4.1 For any design of a FRP tank type, its materials and a representative prototype shall be subjected to the
design type testing as outlined below.
6.13.4.2 Material testing
6.13.4.2.1 The elongation at fracture according to EN ISO 527-2:2012 and the heat distortion temperature
according to EN ISO 75-1:2020 shall be determined for the resins to be used.
6.13.4.2.2 The following characteristics shall be determined for samples cut out of the shell. Samples manufactured
in parallel may only be used, if it is not possible to use cut-outs from the shell. Prior to testing, any liner
shall be removed.
The tests shall cover:
(a) The thickness of the laminates of the central shell wall and the ends;
(b) The mass content and composition of composite reinforcement by EN ISO 1172:1998 or ISO
14127:2008, orientation and arrangement of reinforcement layers;
(c) The tensile strength, elongation at fracture and modulus of elasticity according to EN ISO 527-
4:1997 or EN ISO 527-5:2009 for the circumferential and longitudinal directions of the shell.
For areas of the FRP shell, tests shall be performed on representative laminates in accordance
with EN ISO 527-4:1997 or EN ISO 527-5:2009, to permit evaluation of the suitability of safety
factor (K). A minimum of six specimens per measure of tensile strength shall be used, and the
tensile strength shall be taken as the average minus two standard deviations;
(d) The bending strength and deflection established by the bending creep test according to EN ISO
14125:1998 + AC:2002 + A1:2011 for a period of 1 000 hours using a sample with a minimum
width of 50 mm and a support distance of at least 20 times the wall thickness;
– 562 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 563 –
(e) The creep factor α determined by taking the average result of at least two specimens with the
configuration described in (d), subject to creep in three-point or four-point bending, at the
maximum design temperature nominated under 6.13.2.1, for a period of 1 000 hours. The
following test is to be undertaken for each specimen:
(i) Place specimen into bending apparatus, unloaded, in oven set to maximum design
temperature and allow to acclimatise for a period of not less than 60 minutes;
(ii) Load specimen bending in accordance with EN ISO 14125:1998 + AC:2002 + A1:2011
at flexural stress equal to the strength determined in (d) divided by four. Maintain
mechanical load at maximum design temperature without interruption for not less than
1 000 hours;
(iii) Measure the initial deflection six minutes after full load application in (e) (ii). Specimen
shall remain loaded in test rig;
(iv) Measure the final deflection 1 000 hours after full load application in (e) (ii); and
(v) Calculate the creep factor α by dividing the initial deflection from (e) (iii) by the final
deflection from (e) (iv);
(f) The ageing factor β determined by taking the average result of at least two specimens with the
configuration described in (d), subject to loading in static three-point or four-point bending, in
conjunction with immersion in water at the maximum design temperature nominated under
6.13.2.1 for a period of 1 000 hours. The following test is to be undertaken for each specimen:
(i) Prior to testing or conditioning, specimens shall be dried in an oven at 80 °C for a period
of 24 hours;
(ii) The specimen shall be loaded in three-point or four-point bending at ambient temperature,
in accordance with to EN ISO 14125:1998 + AC:2002 + A1:2011, at the flexural stress
level equal to the strength determined in (d) divided by four. Measure the initial deflection
6 minutes after full load application. Remove specimen from test rig;
(iii) Immerse unloaded specimen in water at the maximum design temperature for a period of
not less than 1 000 hours without interruption to the water conditioning period. When
conditioning period has lapsed, remove specimens, keep damp at ambient temperature,
and complete (f) (iv) within three days;
(iv) The specimen shall be subject to second round of static loading, in a manner identical to
(f) (ii). Measure the final deflection six minutes after full load application. Remove
specimen from test rig; and
(v) Calculate the ageing factor β by dividing the initial deflection from (f) (ii) by the final
deflection from (f) (iv);
(g) The interlaminar shear strength of the joints measured by testing representative samples in
accordance with EN ISO 14130:1997;
(h) The efficiency of whichever is applicable of thermoplastic resin forming characteristics or
thermoset resin cure and post-cure processes for laminates determined using one or more of the
following methods:
(i) Direct measurement formed thermoplastic resin characteristics or thermoset resin degree
of cure: glass transition temperature (Tg) or melting temperature (T m) determined using
differential scanning calorimetry (DSC) via EN ISO 11357-2:2020; or
(ii) Indirect measurement of formed thermoplastic resin characteristics or thermoset resin
degree of cure:
– HDT via EN ISО 75-1:2020;
– Tg or Tm using thermo-mechanical analysis (TMA) via ISO 11359-1:2014;
– Dynamic thermo-mechanical analysis (DMA) via ISO 6721-11:2019:
– 563 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 564 –
– Barcol testing via ASTM D2583:2013-03 or EN 59:2016.
6.13.4.2.3 The requirements of 6.9.2.7.1.3 on the chemical compatibility shall apply.
6.13.4.3 Type testing
A representative prototype tank shall be subjected to tests as specified below. For this purpose service
equipment may be replaced by other items if necessary.
6.13.4.3.1 The prototype shall be inspected for compliance with the design type specification. This shall include
an internal and external visual inspection and measurement of the main dimensions.
6.13.4.3.2 The prototype, equipped with strain gauges at all locations where a comparison with the design
calculation is required, shall be subjected to the following loads and the strains shall be recorded:
(a) Filled with water to the maximum filling degree. The measuring results shall be used to calibrate
the design calculation according to 6.13.2.5;
(b) Filled with water to the maximum filling degree and subjected to accelerations in all three
directions by means of driving and braking exercises with the prototype attached to a vehicle.
For comparison with the design calculation according to 6.13.2.5 the strains recorded shall be
extrapolated in relation to the quotient of the accelerations required in 6.8.2.1.2 and measured;
(c) Filled with water and subjected to the specified test pressure. Under this load, the shell shall
exhibit no visual damage or leakage.
6.13.4.3.3 The requirements of 6.9.2.7.1.4 on the ball drop test shall apply.
6.13.4.3.4 The requirements of 6.9.2.7.1.5 on the fire resistance test shall apply.
6.13.4.4 Type approval
6.13.4.4.1 The competent authority shall issue in respect of each new type of tank an approval attesting that the
design is suitable for the purpose for which it is intended and meets the construction and equipment
requirements of this chapter as well as the special provisions applicable to the substances to be carried.
6.13.4.4.2 The approval shall be based on the calculation and the test report, including all material and prototype
test results and its comparison with the design calculation, and shall refer to the design type specification
and the quality system.
6.13.4.4.3 The approval shall include the substances or group of substances for which compatibility with the shell
is provided. Their chemical names or the corresponding collective entry (see 2.1.1.2), and their class
and classification code shall be indicated.
6.13.4.4.4 In addition, it shall include design and threshold values (such as life-time, service temperature range,
working and test pressures, material data) specified and all precautions to be taken for the manufacture,
testing, type approval, marking and use of any tank, manufactured in accordance with the approved
design type.
6.13.4.4.5 A service life inspection programme shall be established, which shall be a part of the operation manual,
to monitor the condition of the tank at periodic inspections. The inspection programme shall focus on
the critical stress locations identified in the design analysis performed under 6.13.2.5. The inspection
method shall take into account the potential damage mode at the critical stress location (e.g. tensile
stress or interlaminate stress). The inspection shall be a combination of visual and non-destructive
testing (e.g., acoustic emissions, ultrasonic evaluation, thermographic). For heating elements, the
service life inspection programme shall allow an examination of the shell or its representative locations
to take into account the effects of overheating.
6.13.5 Inspections
6.13.5.1 For every tank, manufactured in conformity with the approved design, material tests and inspections
shall be performed as specified below.
– 564 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 565 –
6.13.5.1.1 The material tests according to 6.13.4.2.2, except for the tensile test and for a reduction of the testing
time for the bending creep test to 100 hours shall be performed with samples taken from the shell.
Samples manufactured in parallel may only be used, if no cut-outs from the shell are possible. The
approved design values shall be met.
6.13.5.1.2 The initial inspection and test shall verify that construction of the tank is made in accordance with the
quality system required by 6.9.2.2.2. Shells and their equipment shall either together or separately
undergo an initial inspection before being put into service. This inspection shall include:
(a) a check of conformity to the approved design;
(b) a check of the design characteristics;
(c) an internal and external examination;
(d) a hydraulic pressure test at the test pressure indicated on the plate prescribed in 6.8.2.5.1;
(e) a check of operation of the equipment;
(f) a leakproofness test, if the shell and its equipment have been pressure tested separately.
6.13.5.2 For the periodic inspection of tanks the requirements of 6.8.2.4.2 to 6.8.2.4.4 shall apply. In addition,
the inspection in accordance with 6.8.2.4.3 shall include an examination of the internal condition of the
shell.
6.13.5.3 In addition, the initial and periodic inspections shall follow the service life inspection programme and
any associated inspection methods per 6.13.4.4.5.
6.13.5.4 The inspections and tests in accordance with 6.13.5.1 and 6.13.5.2 shall be carried out by the inspection
body. Certificates shall be issued showing the results of these operations. These certificates shall refer
to the list of the substances permitted for carriage in this shell in accordance with 6.13.4.4.
6.13.6 Marking
6.13.6.1 The requirements of 6.8.2.5 shall apply to the marking of FRP tanks, with the following amendments:
(a) the tank plate may also be laminated to the shell or be made of suitable plastics materials;
(b) the design temperature range shall always be marked;
(c) where a tank code is required in accordance with 6.8.2.5.2, the second part of the tank code shall
indicate the highest value of the calculation pressure for the substance(s) permitted for carriage
according to the type approval certificate.
6.13.6.2 The information required on materials shall be “Shell structural material: Fibre-reinforced plastic”, the
reinforcement fibre e.g. “Reinforcement: E-glass”, and resin e.g. “Resin: Vinyl Ester”.
6.13.6.3 In addition, when they are shown under an entry in Column (13) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, the special
provisions of 6.8.4 (e) (TM) shall also apply.
– 565 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
–
PART 7
Provisions concerning the conditions of
carriage, loading, unloading
and handlingCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
-Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 569 –
CHAPTER 7.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
7.1.1 The carriage of dangerous goods is subject to the mandatory use of a particular type of transport
equipment in accordance with the provisions of this Chapter and Chapter 7.2 for carriage in packages,
Chapter 7.3 for carriage in bulk and Chapter 7.4 for carriage in tanks. In addition, the provisions of
Chapter 7.5 concerning loading, unloading and handling shall be observed.
Columns (16), (17) and (18) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 show the particular provisions of this Part that
apply to specific dangerous goods.
7.1.2 In addition to the provisions of this Part, vehicles used for the carriage of dangerous goods shall, as
regards their design, construction and, if appropriate, their approval, conform to the relevant
requirements of Part 9.
7.1.3 Large containers, portable tanks, MEGCs and tank-containers which meet the definition of “container”
given in the CSC (1972), as amended, or in IRS 50591 (Roller units for horizontal transhipment –
Technical conditions governing their use in international traffic)1 and IRS 50592 (Intermodal Transport
Units (other than semi-trailers) for vertical transhipment and suitable for carriage on wagons –
Minimum requirements)2 published by UIC may not be used to carry dangerous goods unless the large
container or the frame of the portable tank, MEGC or tank-container satisfies the provisions of the CSC
or of IRS 50591 and IRS 50592 of UIC.
7.1.4 (Deleted)
7.1.5 Large containers shall meet the requirements concerning the body of the vehicle laid down in this Part
and, if appropriate, those laid down in Part 9 for the load in question; the body of the vehicle need not
then satisfy those provisions.
However, large containers carried on vehicles whose platforms have insulation and heat-resistant
qualities which satisfy those requirements need not then satisfy the said requirements.
This provision also applies to small containers for the carriage of explosive substances and articles of
Class 1.
7.1.6 Subject to the provisions of the last part of the first sentence of 7.1.5, the fact that dangerous goods are
contained in one or more containers shall not affect the conditions to be met by the vehicle by reason of
the nature and quantities of the dangerous goods carried.
1 First edition of IRS (International Railway Solution) applicable as from 1 June 2020.
2 Second edition of IRS (International Railway Solution) applicable as from 1 December 2020.
– 569 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 570 –
7.1.7 Special provisions applicable to the carriage of self-reactive substances of Class 4.1, organic
peroxides of Class 5.2 and substances stabilized by temperature control (other than self-reactive
substances and organic peroxides)
7.1.7.1 All self-reactive substances, organic peroxides and polymerizing substances shall be protected from
direct sunlight and all sources of heat, and placed in adequately ventilated areas.
7.1.7.2 Where a number of packages are assembled in a container or closed vehicle, the total quantity of
substance, the type and number of packages and the stacking arrangement shall not create an explosion
hazard.
7.1.7.3 Temperature control provisions
7.1.7.3.1 These provisions apply to certain self-reactive substances when required by 2.2.41.1.17, and certain
organic peroxides when required by 2.2.52.1.15 and certain polymerizing substances when required by
2.2.41.1.21 or special provision 386 of Chapter 3.3 which may only be carried under conditions where
the temperature is controlled.
7.1.7.3.2 These provisions also apply to the carriage of substances for which:
(a) The proper shipping name as indicated in column 2 of Table A of Chapter 3.2 or according to
3.1.2.6 contains the words “TEMPERATURE CONTROLLED”; and
(b) The SADT or SAPT determined for the substance (with or without chemical stabilization) as
offered for carriage is:
(i) 50 °C or less for single packagings and IBCs; or
(ii) 45 °C or less for tanks.
When chemical inhibition is not used to stabilize a reactive substance which may generate dangerous
amounts of heat and gas, or vapour, under normal carriage conditions, this substance needs to be carried
under temperature control. These provisions do not apply to substances which are stabilized by the
addition of chemical inhibitors such that the SADT or the SAPT is greater than that prescribed in (b) (i)
or (ii), above.
7.1.7.3.3 In addition, if a self-reactive substance or organic peroxide or a substance the proper shipping name of
which contains the word “STABILIZED” and which is not normally required to be carried under
temperature control is carried under conditions where the temperature may exceed 55 °C, it may require
temperature control.
7.1.7.3.4 The “control temperature” is the maximum temperature at which the substance can be safely carried. It
is assumed that during carriage the temperature of the immediate surroundings of the package does not
exceed 55 °C and attains this value for a relatively short time only during each period of 24 hours. In
the event of loss of temperature control, it may be necessary to implement emergency procedures. The
“emergency temperature” is the temperature at which such procedures shall be implemented.
7.1.7.3.5 Derivation of control and emergency temperatures
Type of
receptacle
SADT a /SAPTa Control temperature Emergency temperature
Single
packagings
and IBCs
20 °C or less
over 20 °C to 35 °C
over 35 °C
20 °C below SADT/SAPT
15 °C below SADT/SAPT
10 °C below SADT/SAPT
10 °C below SADT/SAPT
10 °C below SADT/SAPT
5 °C below SADT/SAPT
Tanks ≤ 45 °C 10 °C below SADT/SAPT 5 °C below SADT/SAPT
a i.e. the SADT/SAPT of the substance as packed for carriage.
7.1.7.3.6 The control and emergency temperatures are derived using the table in 7.1.7.3.5 from the SADT or from
the SAPT which are defined as the lowest temperatures at which self-accelerating decomposition or
self-accelerating polymerization may occur with a substance in the packaging, IBC or tank as used in
carriage. An SADT or SAPT shall be determined in order to decide if a substance shall be subjected to
temperature control during carriage. Provisions for the determination of the SADT and SAPT are given
in Part II, section 28 of the Manual of Tests and Criteria.
– 570 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 571 –
7.1.7.3.7 Control and emergency temperatures, where appropriate, are provided for currently assigned self-
reactive substances in 2.2.41.4 and for currently assigned organic peroxide formulations in 2.2.52.4.
7.1.7.3.8 The actual carriage temperature may be lower than the control temperature but shall be selected so as
to avoid dangerous separation of phases.
7.1.7.4 Carriage under temperature control
7.1.7.4.1 Maintenance of the prescribed temperature is an essential feature of the safe carriage of substances
stabilized by temperature control. In general, there shall be:
(a) Thorough inspection of the cargo transport unit prior to loading;
(b) Instructions to the carrier about the operation of the refrigeration system including a list of the
suppliers of coolant available en route;
(c) Procedures to be followed in the event of loss of control;
(d) Regular monitoring of operating temperatures; and
(e) Provision of a back-up refrigeration system or spare parts.
7.1.7.4.2 Any control and temperature sensing devices in the refrigeration system shall be readily accessible and
all electrical connections weather-proof. The temperature of air space within the cargo transport unit
shall be measured by two independent sensors and the output shall be recorded so that temperature
changes are readily detectable. The temperature shall be checked every four to six hours and logged.
When substances having a control temperature of less than +25 °C are carried, the cargo transport unit
shall be equipped with visible and audible alarms, powered independently of the refrigeration system,
set to operate at or below the control temperature.
7.1.7.4.3 If during carriage the control temperature is exceeded, an alert procedure shall be initiated involving
any necessary repairs to the refrigeration equipment or an increase in the cooling capacity (e.g. by
adding liquid or solid refrigerants). The temperature shall also be checked frequently and preparations
made for implementation of the emergency procedures. If the emergency temperature is reached, the
emergency procedures shall be initiated.
7.1.7.4.4 The suitability of a particular means of temperature control for carriage depends on a number of factors.
Factors to be considered include:
(a) The control temperature(s) of the substance(s) to be carried;
(b) The difference between the control temperature and the anticipated ambient temperature
conditions;
(c) The effectiveness of the thermal insulation;
(d) The duration of carriage; and
(e) Allowance of a safety margin for delays.
7.1.7.4.5 Suitable methods for preventing the control temperature being exceeded are, in order of increasing
control capability:
(a) Vehicle, container, packaging or overpack with thermal insulation provided that the initial
temperature of the substance(s) to be carried is sufficiently below the control temperature;
(b) Vehicle, container, packaging or overpack with thermal insulation and coolant system provided
that:
(i) An adequate quantity of non-flammable coolant (e.g. liquid nitrogen or solid carbon
dioxide), allowing a reasonable margin for delay, is carried or a means of replenishment
is assured;
(ii) Liquid oxygen or air is not used as coolant;
(iii) There is a uniform cooling effect even when most of the coolant has been consumed; and
– 571 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 572 –
(iv) The need to ventilate the transport unit before entering is clearly indicated by a warning
on the door(s) of the transport unit;
(c) Vehicle or container with thermal insulation and single mechanical refrigeration provided that
for substance(s) to be carried with a flash point lower than the sum of the emergency temperature
plus 5 °C explosion-proof electrical fittings, EEx IIB T3 are used within the cooling
compartment to prevent ignition of flammable vapours from the substances;
(d) Vehicle or container with thermal insulation and combined mechanical refrigeration system with
coolant system; provided that:
(i) The two systems are independent of one another;
(ii) The provisions in (b) and (c) are complied with;
(e) Vehicle or container with thermal insulation and dual mechanical refrigeration system; provided
that:
(i) Apart from the integral power supply unit, the two systems are independent of one
another;
(ii) Each system alone is capable of maintaining adequate temperature control; and
(iii) For substance(s) to be carried with a flash point lower than the sum of the emergency
temperature plus 5 °C explosion-proof electrical fittings, EEx IIB T3, are used within the
cooling compartment to prevent ignition of flammable vapours from the substances.
7.1.7.4.6 The methods described in 7.1.7.4.5 (d) and (e) may be used for all organic peroxides and self-reactive
substances and polymerizing substances.
The method described in 7.1.7.4.5 (c) may be used for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances
of Types C, D, E and F and, when the maximum ambient temperature to be expected during carriage
does not exceed the control temperature by more than 10 °C, for organic peroxides and self-reactive
substances of Type B and polymerizing substances.
The method described in 7.1.7.4.5 (b) may be used for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances
of Types C, D, E and F and polymerizing substances when the maximum ambient temperature to be
expected during carriage does not exceed the control temperature by more than 30 °C.
The method described in 7.1.7.4.5 (a) may be used for organic peroxides and self-reactive substances
of Types C, D, E and F and polymerizing substances when the maximum ambient temperature to be
expected during carriage is at least 10 °C below the control temperature.
7.1.7.4.7 Insulated, refrigerated and mechanically refrigerated containers intended for the carriage of temperature
controlled substances shall conform to the following conditions:
(a) The overall heat transfer coefficient of an insulated container shall be not more than 0.4 W/m²/K;
(b) The refrigerant used shall not be flammable; and
(c) Where containers are provided with vents or ventilation valves care shall be taken to ensure that
refrigeration is not impaired by the vents or ventilation valves.
Where substances are required to be carried in insulated, refrigerated or mechanically-refrigerated
vehicles, these vehicles shall satisfy the requirements of Chapter 9.6.
7.1.7.4.8 If substances are contained in protective packagings filled with a coolant, they shall be loaded in closed
or sheeted vehicles or closed or sheeted containers. If the vehicles or containers used are closed they
shall be adequately ventilated. Sheeted vehicles and containers shall be fitted with sideboards and a
tailboard. The sheets of these vehicles and containers shall be of an impermeable and non-combustible
material.
– 572 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 573 –
CHAPTER 7.2
PROVISIONS CONCERNING CARRIAGE IN PACKAGES
7.2.1 Unless otherwise provided in 7.2.2 to 7.2.4, packages may be loaded:
(a) in closed vehicles or in closed containers; or
(b) in sheeted vehicles or in sheeted containers; or
(c) in open vehicles or in open containers.
7.2.2 Packages comprising packagings made of materials sensitive to moisture shall be loaded on to closed
or on to sheeted vehicles or into closed or sheeted containers.
7.2.3 (Reserved)
7.2.4 When they are shown under an entry in Column (16) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, the following special
provisions apply:
V1 Packages shall be loaded on to closed or sheeted vehicles or into closed or sheeted containers.
V2 (1) Packages shall only be loaded on to EX/II or EX/III vehicles which satisfy the relevant
requirements of Part 9. The choice of vehicle depends on the quantity to be carried, which
is limited per transport unit in accordance with the provisions concerning loading (see
7.5.5.2). Where a transport unit consists of an EX/II vehicle and an EX/III vehicle, both
carrying explosive substances or articles, the quantity limit of 7.5.5.2.1 applicable for an
EX/II transport unit applies for the entire transport unit.
(2) Trailers, except semi-trailers, which satisfy the requirements for EX/II or EX/III vehicles
may be drawn by motor vehicles which do not satisfy those requirements.
For carriage in containers, see also 7.1.3 to 7.1.6.
Where substances or articles of Class 1 in quantities requiring a transport unit made up of
EX/III vehicle(s) are being carried in containers to or from harbour areas, rail terminals
or airports of arrival or departure as part of a multimodal journey, a transport unit made
up of EX/II vehicle(s) may be used instead, provided that the containers being carried
comply with the appropriate requirements of the IMDG Code, the RID or the ICAO
Technical Instructions.
V3 For free-flowing powdery substances and for fireworks the floor of a container shall have a non-
metallic surface or covering.
V4 (Reserved)
V5 Packages may not be carried in small containers.
V6 (Deleted)
V7 (Reserved)
V8 See 7.1.7.
NOTE: This special provision V8 does not apply to substances referred to in 3.1.2.6 when
substances are stabilized by the addition of chemical inhibitors such that the SADT is greater
than 50 °C. In this case, temperature control may be required under conditions of carriage where
the temperature may exceed 55 °C.
V9 (Reserved)
V10 IBCs shall be carried in closed or sheeted vehicles or closed or sheeted containers.
– 573 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 574 –
V11 IBCs other than metal or rigid plastics IBCs shall be carried in closed or sheeted vehicles or
closed or sheeted containers.
V12 IBCs of type 31HZ2 (31HA2, 31HB2, 31HN2, 31HD2 and 31HH2) shall be carried in closed
vehicles or containers.
V13 When packed in 5H1, 5L1 or 5 M1 bags, shall be carried in closed vehicles or containers.
V14 Aerosols carried for the purposes of reprocessing or disposal under special provision 327 in
Chapter 3.3 shall only be carried in ventilated or open vehicles or containers.
V15 IBCs shall be carried in closed vehicles or in closed containers.
– 574 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 575 –
CHAPTER 7.3
PROVISIONS CONCERNING CARRIAGE IN BULK
7.3.1 General provisions
7.3.1.1 Goods may not be carried in bulk in bulk containers, containers or vehicles unless:
(a) either a special provision, identified by the code “BK” or a reference to a specific paragraph,
explicitly authorizing this mode of carriage is indicated in column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2
and the relevant conditions of 7.3.2 are satisfied in addition to those of this section; or
(b) a special provision, identified by the code “VC” or a reference to a specific paragraph, explicitly
authorizing this mode of carriage is indicated in column (17) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 and the
conditions of this special provision, together with any additional provision identified by the code
“AP”, as laid down in 7.3.3 are satisfied in addition to those of this section.
Nevertheless, empty packagings, uncleaned, may be carried in bulk if this mode of carriage is not
explicitly prohibited by other provisions of ADR.
NOTE: For carriage in tanks, see Chapters 4.2 and 4.3.
7.3.1.2 Substances which may become liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during carriage, are not
permitted for carriage in bulk.
7.3.1.3 Bulk containers, containers or bodies of vehicles shall be siftproof and shall be so closed that none of
the contents can escape under normal conditions of carriage including the effect of vibration, or by
changes of temperature, humidity or pressure.
7.3.1.4 Substances shall be loaded and evenly distributed in a manner that minimises movement that could
result in damage to the bulk container, container or vehicle or leakage of the dangerous goods.
7.3.1.5 Where venting devices are fitted they shall be kept clear and operable.
7.3.1.6 Substances shall not react dangerously with the material of the bulk container, container, vehicle,
gaskets, equipment including lids and tarpaulins and with protective coatings which are in contact with
the contents or significantly weaken them. Bulk containers, containers or vehicles shall be so
constructed or adapted that the goods cannot penetrate between wooden floor coverings or come into
contact with those parts of the bulk container, container or vehicle that may be affected by the materials
or residues thereof.
7.3.1.7 Before being filled and handed over for carriage, each bulk container, container or vehicle shall be
inspected and cleaned to ensure that it does not contain any residue on the interior or exterior of the bulk
container, container or vehicle that could:
– cause a dangerous reaction with the substance intended for carriage;
– detrimentally affect the structural integrity of the bulk container, container or vehicle; or
– affect the dangerous goods retention capabilities of the bulk container, container or vehicle.
7.3.1.8 During carriage, no dangerous residues shall adhere to the outer surfaces of bulk containers, containers
or of the bodies of vehicles.
7.3.1.9 If several closure systems are fitted in series, the system which is located nearest to the substance to be
carried shall be closed first before filling.
7.3.1.10 Empty bulk containers, containers or vehicles which have carried a dangerous solid substance in bulk
shall be treated in the same manner as is required by ADR for a filled bulk container, container or
vehicle, unless adequate measures have been taken to nullify any hazard.
7.3.1.11 If bulk containers, containers or vehicles are used for the carriage in bulk of goods liable to cause a dust
explosion, or evolve flammable vapours (e. g. for certain wastes) measures shall be taken to exclude
– 575 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 576 –
sources of ignition and prevent dangerous electrostatic discharge during carriage, filling or discharge of
the substance.
7.3.1.12 Substances, for example wastes, which may react dangerously with one another and substances of
different classes and goods not subject to ADR, which are liable to react dangerously with one another
shall not be mixed together in the same bulk container, container or vehicle. Dangerous reactions are:
(a) Combustion and/or evolution of considerable heat;
(b) Emission of flammable and/or toxic gases;
(c) Formation of corrosive liquids; or
(d) Formation of unstable substances.
7.3.1.13 Before a bulk container, container or vehicle is filled it shall be visually examined to ensure it is
structurally serviceable, its interior walls, ceiling and floors are free from protrusions or damage and
that any inner liners or substance retaining equipment are free from rips, tears or any damage that would
compromise its cargo retention capabilities. Structurally serviceable means the bulk container, container
or vehicle does not have major defects in its structural components, such as top and bottom side rails,
top and bottom end rails, door sill and header, floor cross members, corner posts, and corner fittings in
a bulk container or container. Major defects include:
(a) Bends, cracks or breaks in the structural or supporting members, or any damage to service or
operational equipment that affect the integrity of the bulk container, container or of the body of
the vehicle;
(b) Any distortion of the overall configuration or any damage to lifting attachments or handling
equipment interface features great enough to prevent proper alignment of handling equipment,
mounting and securing on a chassis or wagon or vehicle, or insertion into ships’ cells; and, where
applicable
(c) Door hinges, door seals and hardware that are seized, twisted, broken, missing, or otherwise
inoperative.
7.3.2 Provisions for the carriage in bulk when the provisions of 7.3.1.1 (a) are applied
7.3.2.1 In addition to the general provisions of section 7.3.1, the provisions of this section are applicable. The
codes BK1, BK2 and BK3 in column (10) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 have the following meanings:
BK1: Carriage in bulk in sheeted bulk containers is permitted;
BK2: Carriage in bulk in closed bulk containers is permitted.
BK3: Carriage in flexible bulk containers is permitted
7.3.2.2 The bulk container used shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 6.11.
7.3.2.3 Goods of Class 4.2
The total mass carried in a bulk container shall be such that its spontaneous ignition temperature is
greater than 55 °C.
7.3.2.4 Goods of Class 4.3
These goods shall be carried in bulk containers which are waterproof.
7.3.2.5 Goods of Class 5.1
Bulk containers shall be so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood
or any other incompatible material.
– 576 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 577 –
7.3.2.6 Goods of Class 6.2
7.3.2.6.1 Animal material containing infectious substances (UN Nos. 2814, 2900 and 3373) is authorized for
carriage in bulk containers provided the following conditions are met:
(a) Sheeted bulk containers BK1 are permitted provided that they are not filled to maximum
capacity to avoid substances coming into contact with the sheeting. Closed bulk containers BK2
are also permitted;
(b) Closed and sheeted bulk containers, and their openings, shall be leak-proof by design or by the
fitting of a suitable liner;
(c) The animal material shall be thoroughly treated with an appropriate disinfectant before loading
prior to carriage;
(d) Sheeted bulk containers shall be covered by an additional top liner weighted down by absorbent
material treated with an appropriate disinfectant;
(e) Closed or sheeted bulk containers shall not be re-used until after they have been thoroughly
cleaned and disinfected.
NOTE: Additional provisions may be required by appropriate national health authorities.
7.3.2.6.2 Wastes of Class 6.2 (UN 3291)
(a) (Reserved);
(b) Closed bulk containers and their openings shall be leakproof by design. These bulk containers
shall have non porous interior surfaces and shall be free from cracks or other features which
could damage packagings inside, impede disinfection or permit inadvertent release;
(c) Wastes of UN No. 3291 shall be contained within the closed bulk container in UN type tested
and approved sealed leakproof plastics bags tested for solids of packing group II and marked in
accordance with 6.1.3.1. Such plastics bags shall be capable of passing the tests for tear and
impact resistance according to ISO 7765-1:1988 “Plastics film and sheeting – Determination of
impact resistance by the free-falling dart method – Part 1: Staircase methods” and ISO 6383-
2:1983 “Plastics – Film and sheeting – Determination of tear resistance. Part 2: Elmendorf
method”. Each bag shall have an impact resistance of at least 165 g and a tear resistance of at
least 480 g in both parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the bag. The
maximum net mass of each plastics bag shall be 30 kg;
(d) Single articles exceeding 30 kg such as soiled mattresses may be carried without the need for a
plastics bag when authorized by the competent authority;
(e) Wastes of UN No. 3291 which contain liquids shall only be carried in plastics bags containing
sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire amount of liquid without it spilling in the bulk
container;
(f) Wastes of UN No. 3291 containing sharp objects shall only be carried in UN type tested and
approved rigid packagings meeting the provisions of packing instructions P621, IBC620 or
LP621;
(g) Rigid packagings specified in packing instructions P621, IBC620 or LP621 may also be used.
They shall be properly secured to prevent damage during normal conditions of carriage. Wastes
carried in rigid packagings and plastics bags together in the same closed bulk container shall be
adequately segregated from each other, e.g. by suitable rigid barriers or dividers, mesh nets or
otherwise securing, such that they prevent damage to the packagings during normal conditions
of carriage;
(h) Wastes of UN No. 3291 in plastics bags shall not be compressed in a closed bulk container in
such a way that bags may be rendered no longer leakproof;
(i) The closed bulk container shall be inspected for leakage or spillage after each journey. If any
wastes of UN No. 3291 have leaked or been spilled in the closed bulk container, it shall not be
re-used until after it has been thoroughly cleaned and, if necessary, disinfected or decontaminated
– 577 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 578 –
with an appropriate agent. No other goods shall be carried together with UN No. 3291 other than
medical or veterinary wastes. Any such other wastes carried in the same closed bulk container
shall be inspected for possible contamination.
7.3.2.7 Material of Class 7
For the carriage of unpackaged radioactive material, see 4.1.9.2.4.
7.3.2.8 Goods of Class 8
These goods shall be carried in bulk containers which are watertight.
7.3.2.9 Goods of Class 9
7.3.2.9.1 For UN 3509, only closed bulk containers (code BK2) may be used. Bulk containers shall be made leak
tight or fitted with a leak tight and puncture resistant sealed liner or bag, and shall have a means of
retaining any free liquid that might escape during carriage, e.g. absorbent material. Packagings,
discarded, empty, uncleaned with residues of Class 5.1 shall be carried in bulk containers which have
been so constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any other
combustible material.
7.3.2.10 Use of flexible bulk containers
NOTE: Flexible bulk containers marked in accordance with 6.11.5.5 but which were approved in a
country which is not a Contracting Party to ADR may nevertheless be used for carriage under ADR.
7.3.2.10.1 Before a flexible bulk container is filled it shall be visually examined to ensure it is structurally
serviceable, its textile slings, load-bearing structure straps, body fabric, lock device parts including metal
and textile parts are free from protrusions or damage and that inner liners are free from rips, tears or any
damage.
7.3.2.10.2 For flexible bulk containers, the period of use permitted for the carriage of dangerous goods shall be two
years from the date of manufacture of the flexible bulk container.
7.3.2.10.3 A venting device shall be fitted if a dangerous accumulation of gases may develop within the flexible
bulk container. The vent shall be so designed that the penetration of foreign substances or ingress of
water is prevented under normal conditions of carriage.
7.3.2.10.4 Flexible bulk containers shall be filled in such a way that when loaded the ratio of height to width does
not exceed 1.1. The maximum gross mass of the flexible bulk containers shall not exceed 14 tonnes.
7.3.3 Provisions for carriage in bulk when the provisions of 7.3.1.1 (b) are applied
7.3.3.1 In addition to the general provisions of section 7.3.1, the provisions of this section are applicable, when
they are shown under an entry in column (17) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. Sheeted or closed vehicles or
sheeted or closed containers used under this section need not be in conformity with the requirements of
Chapter 6.11. The codes VC1, VC2 and VC3 in column (17) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 have the
following meanings:
VC1 Carriage in bulk in sheeted vehicles, sheeted containers or sheeted bulk containers is
permitted;
VC2 Carriage in bulk in closed vehicles, closed containers or closed bulk containers is permitted;
VC3 Carriage in bulk is permitted in specially equipped vehicles or containers in accordance with
standards specified by the competent authority of the country of origin. If the country of
origin is not a Contracting Party to ADR, the conditions laid down shall be recognized by the
competent authority of the first country Contracting Party to ADR reached by the
consignment.
NOTE: Where a VC1 code is shown in column (17) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, a BK1 bulk container
may therefore also be used for land transport provided the additional provisions in 7.3.3.2 are fulfilled.
Where a VC2 code is shown in column (17) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, a BK2 bulk container may
therefore also be used for land transport provided the additional provisions in 7.3.3.2 are fulfilled.
– 578 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 579 –
7.3.3.2 When the VC bulk codes are used, the following additional provisions shown in column (17) of Table
A of Chapter 3.2 shall apply:
7.3.3.2.1 Goods of Class 4.1
AP1 Vehicles and containers shall have a metal body and where fitted the sheet shall be non-
combustible.
AP2 Vehicles and containers shall have adequate ventilation.
7.3.3.2.2 Goods of Class 4.2
AP1 Vehicles and containers shall have a metal body and where fitted the sheet shall be non-
combustible.
7.3.3.2.3 Goods of Class 4.3
AP2 Vehicles and containers shall have adequate ventilation.
AP3 Sheeted vehicles and sheeted containers shall be used only when the substance is in pieces
(not in powder, granular, dust or ashes form).
AP4 Closed vehicles and closed containers shall be equipped with hermetically closed openings
used for filling and discharging to prevent the exit of gas and exclude the ingress of moisture.
AP5 The cargo doors of the closed vehicles or closed containers shall be marked with the following
in letters not less than 25 mm high:
“WARNING
NO VENTILATION
OPEN WITH CAUTION”
This shall be in a language considered appropriate by the consignor.
7.3.3.2.4 Goods of Class 5.1
AP6 If the vehicle or container is made of wood or other combustible material, an impermeable
surfacing resistant to combustion or a coating of sodium silicate or similar substance shall be
provided. Sheeting shall also be impermeable and non-combustible.
AP7 Carriage in bulk shall only be as a full load.
7.3.3.2.5 Goods of Class 6.1
AP7 Carriage in bulk shall only be as a full load.
7.3.3.2.6 Goods of Class 8
AP7 Carriage in bulk shall only be as a full load.
AP8 The design of the load compartment of vehicles or containers shall take account of any
residual currents and impacts from the batteries.
The load compartments of vehicles or containers shall be of steel resistant to the corrosive substances
contained in the batteries. Less resistant steels may be used when there is a sufficiently great wall
thickness or a plastics lining/layer resistant to the corrosive substances.
NOTE: Steel exhibiting a maximum rate of progressive reduction of 0.1 mm per year under the effects
of the corrosive substances may be considered as resistant.
The load compartments of vehicles or containers shall not be loaded above the top of their walls.
Carriage is also permitted in small plastics containers which shall be capable of withstanding, when
fully loaded, a drop from a height of 0.8 m onto a hard surface at -18 °C, without breakage.
– 579 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 580 –
7.3.3.2.7 Goods of Class 9
AP2 Vehicles and containers shall have adequate ventilation.
AP9 Carriage in bulk is permitted for solids (substances or mixtures, such as preparations or
wastes) containing on average not more than 1 000 mg/kg of substance to which this UN
number is assigned. At no point of the load shall the concentration of this substance or these
substances be higher than 10 000 mg/kg.
AP10 Vehicles and containers shall be made leak tight or fitted with a leak tight and puncture
resistant sealed liner or bag, and shall have a means of retaining any free liquid that might
escape during carriage, e.g. absorbent material. Packagings, discarded, empty, uncleaned
with residues of Class 5.1 shall be carried in vehicles and containers which have been so
constructed or adapted that the goods cannot come into contact with wood or any other
combustible material.
– 580 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 581 –
CHAPTER 7.4
PROVISIONS CONCERNING CARRIAGE IN TANKS
7.4.1 Dangerous goods may only be carried in tanks when a portable tank instruction is shown in column (10)
or when a tank code is shown in column (12) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, or when a competent authority
has issued an approval in accordance with the conditions specified in 6.7.1.3. The carriage shall be in
accordance with the provisions of Chapters 4.2, 4.3, 4.4 or 4.5 as applicable. The vehicles, whether they
be rigid vehicles, drawing vehicles, trailers or semi-trailers, shall satisfy the relevant requirements of
Chapters 9.1, 9.2 and 9.7 concerning the vehicle to be used, as indicated in Column (14) of Table A in
Chapter 3.2.
7.4.2 The vehicles designated by the codes EX/III, FL or AT in 9.1.1.2 shall be used as follows:
– Where an EX/III vehicle is prescribed, only an EX/III vehicle may be used;
– Where a FL vehicle is prescribed, only an FL vehicle may be used;
– Where an AT vehicle is prescribed, AT and FL vehicles may be used.
– 581 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 583 –
CHAPTER 7.5
PROVISIONS CONCERNING LOADING, UNLOADING AND HANDLING
7.5.1 General provisions concerning loading, unloading and handling
7.5.1.1 The vehicle and the vehicle crew, as well as the container(s), bulk-container(s), MEGC(s), tank-
container(s) or portable tank(s) if any, shall comply with the regulatory provisions (especially those
concerning safety, security, cleanliness and satisfactory operation of the equipment used in loading and
unloading) upon arrival at the loading and unloading sites, which include container terminals.
7.5.1.2 Unless otherwise specified in ADR, the loading shall not be carried out if:
– an examination of the documents; or
– a visual inspection of the vehicle or of the container(s), bulk-container(s), MEGC(s), tank-
container(s) or portable tank(s) if any, as well as of their equipment used in loading and
unloading,
shows that the vehicle and the vehicle crew, a container, a bulk-container, a MEGC, a tank-container, a
portable tank or their equipment do not comply with the regulatory provisions. The interior and the
exterior of a vehicle or container shall be inspected prior to loading to ensure that there is no damage
that could affect its integrity or that of the cargo to be loaded in it.
The cargo transport unit shall be checked to ensure it is structurally serviceable, that it is free of possible
residues incompatible with the cargo and that the interior floor, walls and ceiling, where applicable, are
free from protrusions or deterioration that could affect the cargo inside and that large containers are free
of damages that affect the weather-tight integrity of the container, when required.
Structurally serviceable means that the cargo transport unit is free from major defects in its structural
components. Structural components of cargo transport units for multimodal purpose are e.g. top and
bottom side rails, top and bottom end rails, corner posts, corner fittings and, for large containers, door
sill, door header and floor cross members. Major defects include:
(a) Bends, cracks or breaks in structural or supporting members and any damage to service or
operational equipment that affect the integrity of the cargo transport unit;
(b) Any distortion of the over-all configuration or any damage to lifting attachments or handling
equipment interface features great enough to prevent proper alignment of handling equipment,
mounting and securing on a chassis or wagon or vehicle, or insertion into ships’ cells; and, where
applicable;
(c) Door hinges, door seals and hardware that are seized, twisted, broken, missing or otherwise
inoperative.
7.5.1.3 Unless otherwise specified in ADR, the unloading shall not be carried out, if the above-mentioned
inspections reveal deficiencies that might affect the safety or the security of the unloading.
7.5.1.4 In accordance with the special provisions of 7.3.3 or 7.5.11, in conformity with Columns (17) and (18)
of Table A of Chapter 3.2, certain dangerous goods shall only be forwarded as a “full load” (see
definition in 1.2.1). In such a case, the competent authorities may require the vehicle or large container
used for such carriage to be loaded at only one point and unloaded at only one point.
7.5.1.5 When orientation arrows are required packages and overpacks shall be oriented in accordance with such
marks.
NOTE: Liquid dangerous goods shall be loaded below dry dangerous goods whenever practicable.
7.5.1.6 All means of containment shall be loaded and unloaded in conformity with a handling method for which
they have been designed and, where required, tested.
– 583 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 584 –
7.5.2 Mixed loading prohibition
7.5.2.1 Packages bearing different danger labels shall not be loaded together in the same vehicle or container
unless mixed loading is permitted according to the following Table based on the danger labels they bear.
NOTE 1: In accordance with 5.4.1.4.2, separate transport documents shall be drawn up for
consignments that cannot be loaded together in the same vehicle or container.
NOTE 2: For packages containing substances or articles only of Class 1 and bearing a label
conforming to models Nos. 1, 1.4, 1.5 or 1.6, irrespective of any other danger labels required for these
packages, mixed loading shall be permitted in accordance with 7.5.2.2. The Table in 7.5.2.1 shall only
apply when such packages are loaded together with packages containing substances or articles of other
classes.
Labels Nos. 1 1.4 1.5 1.6 2.1,
2.2,
2.3
3 4.1 4.1
+ l
4.2 4.3 5.1 5.2 5.2
+ 1
6.1 6.2 7 A,
B, C
8 9,
9A
1
See 7.5.2.2
d b
1.4 a a a a a a a a a a a a
b
c
1.5 b
1.6 b
2.1, 2.2, 2.3 a X X X X X X X X X X X X
3 a X X X X X X X X X X X X
4.1 a X X X X X X X X X X X X
4.1 + 1 X
4.2 a X X X X X X X X X X X X
4.3 a X X X X X X X X X X X X
5.1 d a X X X X X X X X X X X X
5.2 a X X X X X X X X X X X X X
5.2 + 1 X X
6.1 a X X X X X X X X X X X X
6.2 a X X X X X X X X X X X X
7A, B, C a X X X X X X X X X X X X
8 a X X X X X X X X X X X X
9, 9A b a
b
c
b b X X X X X X X X X X X X
X Mixed loading permitted.
a Mixed loading permitted with 1.4S substances and articles.
b Mixed loading permitted between goods of Class 1 and life-saving appliances of Class 9 (UN Nos. 2990, 3072 and
3268).
c Mixed loading permitted between safety devices, pyrotechnic of Division 1.4, compatibility group G, (UN No.
0503) and safety devices, electrically initiated of Class 9 (UN No. 3268).
d Mixed loading permitted between blasting explosives (except UN No. 0083 explosive, blasting, type C) and
ammonium nitrate (UN Nos. 1942 and 2067), ammonium nitrate emulsion or suspension or gel (UN No. 3375)
and alkali metal nitrates and alkaline earth metal nitrates provided the aggregate is treated as blasting explosives
under Class 1 for the purposes of placarding, segregation, stowage and maximum permissible load. Alkali metal
nitrates include caesium nitrate (UN 1451), lithium nitrate (UN 2722), potassium nitrate (UN 1486), rubidium
nitrate (UN 1477) and sodium nitrate (UN 1498). Alkaline earth metal nitrates include barium nitrate (UN 1446),
– 584 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 585 –
beryllium nitrate (UN 2464), calcium nitrate (UN 1454), magnesium nitrate (UN 1474) and strontium nitrate (UN
1507).
7.5.2.2 Packages containing substances or articles of Class 1, bearing a label conforming to models Nos. 1, 1.4,
1.5 or 1.6 which are assigned to different compatibility groups shall not be loaded together in the same
vehicle or container, unless mixed loading is permitted in accordance with the following Table for the
corresponding compatibility groups.
Compatibility
Group A B C D E F G H J L N S
A X
B X a X
C X X X X b c X
D a X X X X b c X
E X X X X b c X
F X X
G X X X X X
H X X
J X X
L d
N b c b c b c b X
S X X X X X X X X X X
X Mixed loading permitted.
a Packages containing articles of compatibility group B and those containing substances or
articles of compatibility group D may be loaded together on one vehicle or in one container
provided they are effectively segregated such that there is no danger of transmission of
detonation from the articles of compatibility group B to the substances or articles of
compatibility group D. Segregation shall be achieved by the use of separate compartments or by
placing one of the two types of explosive in a special containment system. Either method of
segregation shall be approved by the competent authority.
b Different types of articles of division 1.6, compatibility group N, may be carried together as
articles of division 1.6, compatibility group N, only when it is proven by testing or analogy that
there is no additional hazard of sympathetic detonation between the articles. Otherwise they
should be treated as hazard division 1.1.
c When articles of compatibility group N are carried with substances or articles of compatibility
groups C, D or E, the articles of compatibility group N should be considered as having the
characteristics of compatibility group D.
d Packages containing substances and articles of Compatibility Group L may be loaded together
on one vehicle or in one container with packages containing the same type of substances and
articles of that compatibility group.
7.5.2.3 For the purpose of the application of the prohibitions of mixed loading on one vehicle, no account shall
be taken of substances contained in closed containers with complete sides. Nevertheless, the mixed
loading prohibitions laid down in 7.5.2.1 concerning mixed loading of packages bearing labels
conforming to models Nos. 1, 1.4, 1.5 or 1.6 with other packages, and in 7.5.2.2 concerning mixed
loading of explosives of different compatibility groups shall also apply between dangerous goods
contained in a container and the other dangerous goods loaded on the same vehicle, whether or not the
latter goods are enclosed in one or more other containers.
– 585 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 586 –
7.5.2.4 Mixed loading of dangerous goods packed in limited quantities with any type of explosive substances
and articles, except those of Division 1.4 and UN Nos. 0161 and 0499, is prohibited.
7.5.3 (Reserved)
7.5.4 Precautions with respect to foodstuffs, other articles of consumption and animal feeds
If special provision CV28 is indicated for a substance or article in Column (18) of Table A of
Chapter 3.2, precautions with respect to foodstuffs, other articles of consumption and animal feeds shall
be taken as follows.
Packages as well as uncleaned empty packagings, including large packagings and intermediate bulk
containers (IBCs), bearing labels conforming to models Nos. 6.1 or 6.2 and those bearing labels
conforming to model No. 9 containing goods of UN Nos. 2212, 2315, 2590, 3151, 3152 or 3245, shall
not be stacked on or loaded in immediate proximity to packages known to contain foodstuffs, other
articles of consumption or animal feeds in vehicles, in containers and at places of loading, unloading or
transhipment.
When these packages, bearing the said labels, are loaded in immediate proximity of packages known to
contain foodstuffs, other articles of consumption or animal feeds, they shall be kept apart from the latter:
(a) By complete partitions which should be as high as the packages bearing the said labels;
(b) By packages not bearing labels conforming to models Nos. 6.1, 6.2 or 9 or packages bearing
labels conforming to model No.9 but not containing goods of UN Nos. 2212, 2315, 2590, 3151,
3152 or 3245; or
(c) By a space of at least 0.8 m;
unless the packages bearing the said labels are provided with an additional packaging or are completely
covered (e.g. by a sheeting, a fibreboard cover or other measures).
7.5.5 Limitation of the quantities carried
7.5.5.1 If the provisions below, or the additional provisions of 7.5.11 to be applied according to Column (18)
of Table A of Chapter 3.2 require a limitation of the quantity of specific goods that can be carried, the
fact that dangerous goods are contained in one or more containers shall not affect the mass limitations
per transport unit laid down by these provisions.
7.5.5.2 Limitations with respect to explosive substances and articles
7.5.5.2.1 Substances and quantities carried
The total net mass in kg of explosive substance (or in the case of explosive articles, the total net mass
of explosive substance contained in all the articles combined) which may be carried on one transport
unit shall be limited as indicated in the table below (see also 7.5.2.2 as regards the prohibition of mixed
loading):
Maximum permissible net mass in kg of explosive in Class 1 goods per transport unit
Transport
Unit
Division 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
and 1.6
Empty
uncleaned
packagingsCompatibility
group
1.1A Other
than 1.1A
Other
than 1.4S
1.4S
EX/II a 6.25 1 000 3 000 5 000 15 000 Unlimited 5 000 Unlimited
EX/III a 18.75 16 000 16 000 16 000 16 000 Unlimited 16 000 Unlimited
a For the description of EX/II and EX/III vehicles see Part 9.
– 586 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 587 –
7.5.5.2.2 Where substances and articles of different divisions of Class 1 are loaded on one transport unit in
conformity with the prohibitions of mixed loading contained in 7.5.2.2, the load as a whole shall be
treated as if it belonged to the most dangerous division (in the order 1.1, 1.5, 1.2, 1.3, 1.6, 1.4). However,
the net mass of explosives of compatibility group S shall not count towards the limitation of quantities
carried.
Where substances classified as 1.5D are carried on one transport unit together with substances or articles
of division 1.2, the entire load shall be treated for carriage as if it belonged to division 1.1.
7.5.5.2.3 Carriage of explosives on MEMUs
Carriage of explosives on MEMUs is only permitted subject to the following conditions:
(a) The competent authority shall authorize the transport operation within its territory;
(b) The type and quantity of packaged explosives carried shall be limited to those necessary for the
quantity of material to be manufactured on the MEMU, and in any case shall not exceed:
– 200 kg of explosives of compatibility group D; and
– a total of 400 units of detonators or detonator assemblies, or a mixture of both,
unless otherwise approved by the competent authority;
(c) Packaged explosives shall only be carried in compartments that meet the requirements of 6.12.5;
(d) No other dangerous goods may be carried in the same compartment as the packaged explosives;
(e) Packaged explosives shall only be loaded onto the MEMU once the loading of other dangerous
goods has been completed and immediately prior to carriage;
(f) When mixed loading is permitted between explosives and substances of Class 5.1 (UN 1942 and
UN 3375) the aggregate is treated as blasting explosives under Class 1 for the purposes of
segregation, stowage and maximum permissible load.
7.5.5.3 Limitations with respect to organic peroxides, self-reactive substances and polymerizing substances
The maximum quantity of organic peroxides of Class 5.2 and self-reactive substances of Class 4.1 of
Types B, C, D, E or F and of polymerizing substances of Class 4.1 is limited to 20 000 kg per transport
unit.
7.5.6 (Reserved)
7.5.7 Handling and stowage
7.5.7.1 Where appropriate the vehicle or container shall be fitted with devices to facilitate securing and handling
of the dangerous goods. Packages containing dangerous substances and unpackaged dangerous articles
shall be secured by suitable means capable of restraining the goods (such as fastening straps, sliding
slatboards, adjustable brackets) in the vehicle or container in a manner that will prevent any movement
during carriage which would change the orientation of the packages or cause them to be damaged. When
dangerous goods are carried with other goods (e.g. heavy machinery or crates), all goods shall be
securely fixed or packed in the vehicles or containers so as to prevent the release of dangerous goods.
Movement of packages may also be prevented by filling any voids by the use of dunnage or by blocking
and bracing. Where restraints such as banding or straps are used, these shall not be over-tightened to
cause damage or deformation of the package1. The requirements of this paragraph are deemed to be
complied with if the cargo is secured in accordance with standard EN 12195-1:2010.
7.5.7.2 Packages shall not be stacked unless designed for that purpose. Where different design types of packages
that have been designed for stacking are to be loaded together, consideration shall be given to their
1 Guidance on the stowage of dangerous goods can be found in the IMO/ILO/UNECE Code of Practice for
Packing of Cargo Transport Units (CTU Code) (see e.g., Chapter 9 Packing cargo into CTUs and Chapter 10
Additional advice on the packing of dangerous goods) and in the “European Best Practice Guidelines on Cargo
Securing for Road Transport” published by the European Commission. Other guidance is also available from
competent authorities and industry bodies.
– 587 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 588 –
compatibility for stacking with each other. Where necessary, stacked packages shall be prevented from
damaging the package below by the use of load-bearing devices.
7.5.7.3 During loading and unloading, packages containing dangerous goods shall be protected from being
damaged.
NOTE: Particular attention shall be paid to the handling of packages during their preparation for
carriage, the type of vehicle or container on which they are to be carried and to the method of loading
or unloading, so that accidental damage is not caused through dragging or mishandling the packages.
7.5.7.4 The provisions of 7.5.7.1 shall also apply to the loading, stowage and removal of containers, tank-
containers, portable tanks and MEGCs on to and from vehicles. When tank-containers, portable tanks
and MEGCs do not include, by construction, corner castings as defined in ISO 1496-1 Series 1 freight
containers – Specification and testing – Part 1: General cargo containers for general purposes, it shall
be verified that the systems used on the tank-containers, portable tanks or MEGCs are compatible with
the system on the vehicle and in compliance with the requirements in 9.7.3.
7.5.7.5 Members of the vehicle crew may not open a package containing dangerous goods.
7.5.7.6 Loading of flexible bulk containers
7.5.7.6.1 Flexible bulk containers shall be carried within a vehicle or container with rigid sides and ends that
extend at least two-thirds of the height of the flexible bulk container. The vehicles used for carriage
shall be equipped with a vehicle stability function approved in accordance with UN Regulation No. 132.
NOTE: When loading flexible bulk containers in a vehicle or container particular attention shall be
paid to the guidance on the handling and stowage of dangerous goods referred to in 7.5.7.1.
7.5.7.6.2 Flexible bulk containers shall be secured by suitable means capable of restraining them in the vehicle
or container in a manner that will prevent any movement during carriage which would change the
position of the flexible bulk container or cause it to be damaged. Movement of the flexible bulk
containers may also be prevented by filling any voids by the use of dunnage or by blocking and bracing.
Where restraints such as banding or straps are used, these shall not be over-tightened to cause damage
or deformation to the flexible bulk containers.
7.5.7.6.3 Flexible bulk containers shall not be stacked.
7.5.8 Cleaning after unloading
7.5.8.1 If, when a vehicle or container which has contained packaged dangerous goods is unloaded, some of
the contents are found to have escaped, the vehicle or container shall be cleaned as soon as possible and
in any case before reloading.
If it is not possible to do the cleaning locally, the vehicle or container shall be carried, with due regard
to adequate safety, to the nearest suitable place where cleaning can be carried out.
Carriage is adequately safe if suitable measures have been taken to prevent the uncontrolled release of
the dangerous goods that have escaped.
7.5.8.2 Vehicles or containers which have been loaded with dangerous goods in bulk shall be properly cleaned
before reloading unless the new load consists of the same dangerous goods as the preceding load.
7.5.9 Prohibition of smoking
Smoking shall be prohibited during handling operations in the vicinity of vehicles or containers and
inside the vehicles or containers. This prohibition of smoking is also applicable to the use of electronic
cigarettes and similar devices.
2 UN Regulation No. 13 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles of categories M, N and O with
regards to braking).
– 588 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 589 –
7.5.10 Precautions against electrostatic charges
In the case of flammable gases, or liquids with a flash-point of 60 °C or below, or UN No. 1361, carbon
or carbon black, packing group II, a good electrical connection from the chassis of the vehicle, the
portable tank or the tank-container to earth shall be established before tanks are filled or emptied. In
addition, the rate of filling shall be limited.
7.5.11 Additional provisions applicable to certain classes or specific goods
In addition to the provisions of sections 7.5.1 to 7.5.10, the following provisions shall apply when they
are shown under an entry indicated in Column (18) of Table A of Chapter 3.2.
CV1 (1) The following operations are prohibited:
(a) Loading or unloading goods in a public place in a built-up area without special
permission from the competent authorities;
(b) Loading or unloading goods in a public place elsewhere than in a built-up area
without prior notice thereof having been given to the competent authorities,
unless these operations are urgently necessary for reasons of safety.
(2) If, for any reason, handling operations have to be carried out in a public place, then
substances and articles of different kinds shall be separated according to the labels.
CV2 (1) Before loading, the loading surface of the vehicle or container shall be thoroughly
cleaned.
(2) The use of fire or naked flame shall be prohibited on vehicles and containers carrying
goods, in their vicinity and during the loading and unloading of these goods.
CV3 See 7.5.5.2.
CV4 Substances and articles of compatibility group L shall only be carried as a full load.
CV5 to CV8 (Reserved)
CV9 Packages shall not be thrown or subjected to impact.
Receptacles shall be so stowed in the vehicle or container that they cannot overturn or fall.
CV10 Cylinders as defined in 1.2.1, shall be laid parallel to or at right angles to the longitudinal
axis of the vehicle or container; however, those situated near the forward transverse wall shall
be laid at right angles to the said axis.
Short cylinders of large diameter (about 30 cm and over) may be stowed longitudinally with
their valve-protecting devices directed towards the middle of the vehicle or container.
Cylinders which are sufficiently stable or are carried in suitable devices effectively
preventing them from overturning may be placed upright.
Cylinders which are laid flat shall be securely and appropriately wedged, attached or secured
so that they cannot shift.
CV11 Receptacles shall always be placed in the position for which they were designed and be
protected against any possibility of being damaged by other packages.
CV12 When pallets loaded with articles are stacked, each tier of pallets shall be evenly distributed
over the lower tier, if necessary by the interposition of a material of adequate strength.
CV13 If any substances have leaked and been spilled in a vehicle or container, it may not be re-
used until after it has been thoroughly cleaned and, if necessary, disinfected or
decontaminated. Any other goods and articles carried in the same vehicle or container shall
be examined for possible contamination.
CV14 Goods shall be shielded from direct sunlight and heat during carriage.
– 589 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 590 –
Packages shall be stored only in cool, well-ventilated places away from heat sources.
CV15 See 7.5.5.3.
CV16 to CV19 (Reserved)
CV20 The provisions of Chapter 5.3 and 7.1.7.4.7 and 7.1.7.4.8 as well as special provision V1 of
Chapter 7.2 shall not apply provided that the substance is packaged in accordance with
packing method OP1 or OP2 of packing instruction P520 in 4.1.4.1, as required, and the total
quantity of substances to which this derogation applies per transport unit is limited to 10 kg.
CV21 The transport unit shall be thoroughly inspected prior to loading.
Before carriage, the carrier shall be informed:
– about the operation of the refrigeration system, including a list of the suppliers of
coolant available en route;
– procedures to be followed in the event of loss of temperature control.
In the case of temperature control in accordance with the methods described in 7.1.7.4.5 (b)
or (d), a sufficient quantity of non-flammable refrigerant (e.g. liquid nitrogen or dry ice),
including a reasonable margin for possible delays, shall be carried unless a means of
replenishment is assured.
Packages shall be so stowed as to be readily accessible.
The specified control temperature shall be maintained during the whole transport operation,
including loading and unloading, as well as any intermediate stops.
CV22 Packages shall be loaded so that a free circulation of air within the loading space provides a
uniform temperature of the load. If the contents of one vehicle or large container exceed
5 000 kg of flammable solids, of polymerizing substances and/or organic peroxides, the load
shall be divided into stacks of not more than 5 000 kg separated by air spaces of at least
0.05 m.
CV23 When handling packages, special measures shall be taken to ensure that they do not come
into contact with water.
CV24 Before loading, vehicles and containers shall be thoroughly cleaned and in particular be free
of any combustible debris (straw, hay, paper, etc.).
The use of readily flammable materials for stowing packages is prohibited.
CV25 (1) Packages shall be so stowed that they are readily accessible.
(2) When packages are to be carried at an ambient temperature of not more than 15 °C or
refrigerated, the temperature shall be maintained when unloading or during storage.
(3) Packages shall be stored only in cool places away from sources of heat.
CV26 The wooden parts of a vehicle or container which have come into contact with these
substances shall be removed and burnt.
CV27 (1) Packages shall be so stowed that they are readily accessible.
(2) When packages are to be carried refrigerated, the functioning of the cooling chain
shall be ensured when unloading or during storage.
(3) Packages shall only be stored in cool places away from sources of heat.
CV28 See 7.5.4.
CV29 to CV32 (Reserved)
– 590 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 591 –
CV33 NOTE 1: “Critical group” means a group of members of the public which is reasonably
homogeneous with respect to its exposure for a given radiation source and given exposure
pathway and is typical of individual receiving the highest effective dose by the given exposure
pathway from the given source.
NOTE 2: “Members of the public” means in a general sense, any individuals in the
population except when subject to occupational or medical exposure.
NOTE 3: “Workers” are any persons who work, whether full time, part-time or temporarily,
for an employer and who have recognised rights and duties in relation to occupational
radiation protection.
(1) Segregation
(1.1) Packages, overpacks, containers and tanks containing radioactive material and
unpacked radioactive material shall be segregated during carriage:
(a) from workers in regularly occupied working areas:
(i) in accordance with Table A below; or
(ii) by distances calculated using a dose criterion of 5 mSv in a year
and conservative model parameters;
NOTE: Workers subject to individual monitoring for the purposes of
radiation protection shall not be considered for the purposes of
segregation.
(b) from members of the public, in areas where the public has regular
access:
(i) in accordance with Table A below; or
(ii) by distances calculated using a dose criterion of 1 mSv in a year
and conservative model parameters;
(c) from undeveloped photographic film and mailbags:
(i) in accordance with Table B below; or
(ii) by distances calculated using a radiation exposure criterion for
undeveloped photographic film due to the transport of
radioactive material for 0.1 mSv per consignment of such film;
and
NOTE: Mailbags shall be assumed to contain undeveloped film and
plates and therefore be separated from radioactive material in the same
way.
(d) from other dangerous goods in accordance with 7.5.2.
– 591 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 592 –
Table A: Minimum distances between packages of category II-YELLOW or of
category III-YELLOW and persons
Sum of transport
indexes not more
than
Exposure time per year (hours)
Areas where members of the
public have regular access
Regularly occupied working
areas
50 250 50 250
Segregation distance in metres, no shielding material
intervening, from:
2 1 3 0.5 1
4 1.5 4 0.5 1.5
8 2.5 6 1.0 2.5
12 3 7.5 1.0 3
20 4 9.5 1.5 4
30 5 12 2 5
40 5.5 13.5 2.5 5.5
50 6.5 15.5 3 6.5
Table B: Minimum distances between packages of category
II-YELLOW or of category III-YELLOW and packages bearing the
word “FOTO”, or mailbags
Total number of
packages not
more than
Sum of
transport
indexes not
more than
Journey or storage duration, in hours
Category 1 2 4 10 24 48 120 240
III-
yellow
II-
yellow Minimum distances in metres
0.2 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 3
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 3 5
1 1 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 3 5 7
2 2 0.5 1 1 1.5 3 4 7 9
4 4 1 1 1.5 3 4 6 9 13
8 8 1 1.5 2 4 6 8 13 18
1 10 10 1 2 3 4 7 9 14 20
2 20 20 1.5 3 4 6 9 13 20 30
3 30 30 2 3 5 7 11 16 25 35
4 40 40 3 4 5 8 13 18 30 40
5 50 50 3 4 6 9 14 20 32 45
(1.2) Category II-YELLOW or III-YELLOW packages or overpacks shall not be
carried in compartments occupied by passengers, except those exclusively
reserved for couriers specially authorized to accompany such packages or
overpacks.
(1.3) No persons other than members of the vehicle crew shall be permitted in
vehicles carrying packages, overpacks or containers bearing category II-
YELLOW or III-YELLOW labels.
(2) Activity limits
The total activity in a vehicle, for carriage of LSA material or SCO in Industrial
Packages Type 1 (Type IP-1), Type 2 (Type IP-2), Type 3 (Type IP-3) or unpackaged,
shall not exceed the limits shown in Table C below. For SCO-III, the limits in
Table C below may be exceeded provided that the transport plan contains precautions
which are to be employed during carriage to obtain an overall level of safety at least
equivalent to that which would be provided if the limits had been applied.
– 592 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 593 –
Table C: Vehicle activity limits for LSA material and SCO in
industrial packages or unpackaged
Nature of material or object Activity limit for vehicle
LSA-I No limit
LSA-II and LSA-III
non-combustible solids No limit
LSA-II and LSA-III
combustible solids,
and all liquids and gases
100 A 2
SCO 100 A 2
(3) Stowage during carriage and storage in transit
(3.1) Consignments shall be securely stowed.
(3.2) Provided that its average surface heat flux does not exceed 15 W/m² and that
the immediately surrounding cargo is not in bags, a package or overpack may
be carried or stored among packaged general cargo without any special
stowage provisions except as may be specifically required by the competent
authority in an applicable certificate of approval.
(3.3) Loading of containers and accumulation of packages, overpacks and containers
shall be controlled as follows:
(a) Except under the condition of exclusive use, and for consignments of
LSA-I material, the total number of packages, overpacks and containers
aboard a single vehicle shall be so limited that the total sum of the
transport indexes aboard the vehicle does not exceed the values shown
in Table D below;
(b) The dose rate under routine conditions of carriage shall not exceed
2 mSv/h at any point on the external surface of the vehicle or container,
and 0.1 mSv/h at 2 m from the external surface of the vehicle or
container, except for consignments carried under exclusive use, for
which the dose rate limits around the vehicle are set forth in (3.5) (b)
and (c);
(c) The total sum of the criticality safety indexes in a container and aboard
a vehicle shall not exceed the values shown in Table E below.
Table D: Transport Index limits for containers and vehicles not under exclusive
use
Type of container or
vehicle
Limit on total sum of transport indexes in a container
or aboard a vehicle
Small container 50
Large container 50
Vehicle 50
Table E: Criticality Safety Index for containers and vehicles containing fissile
material
Type of container
or vehicle
Limit on total sum of criticality safety indexes
Not under exclusive use Under exclusive use
Small container 50 n.a.
Large container 50 100
Vehicle 50 100
– 593 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 594 –
(3.4) Any package or overpack having either a transport index greater than 10, or
any consignment having a criticality safety index greater than 50, shall be
carried only under exclusive use.
(3.5) For consignments under exclusive use, the dose rate shall not exceed:
(a) 10 mSv/h at any point on the external surface of any package or
overpack, and may only exceed 2 mSv/h provided that:
(i) the vehicle is equipped with an enclosure which, during routine
conditions of carriage, prevents the access of unauthorized
persons to the interior of the enclosure;
(ii) provisions are made to secure the package or overpack so that
its position within the vehicle enclosure remains fixed during
routine conditions of carriage, and
(iii) there is no loading or unloading during the shipment;
(b) 2 mSv/h at any point on the outer surfaces of the vehicle, including the
upper and lower surfaces, or, in the case of an open vehicle, at any point
on the vertical planes projected from the outer edges of the vehicle, on
the upper surface of the load, and on the lower external surface of the
vehicle; and
(c) 0.1 mSv/h at any point 2 m from the vertical planes represented by the
outer lateral surfaces of the vehicle, or, if the load is carried in an open
vehicle, at any point 2 m from the vertical planes projected from the
outer edges of the vehicle.
(4) Additional requirements relating to carriage and storage in transit of fissile material
(4.1) Any group of packages, overpacks, and containers containing fissile material
stored in transit in any one storage area shall be so limited that the total sum of
the CSIs in the group does not exceed 50. Each group shall be stored so as to
maintain a spacing of at least 6 m from other such groups.
(4.2) Where the total sum of the criticality safety indexes on board a vehicle or in a
container exceeds 50, as permitted in Table E above, storage shall be such as
to maintain a spacing of at least 6 m from other groups of packages, overpacks
or containers containing fissile material or other vehicles carrying radioactive
material.
(4.3) Fissile material meeting one of the provisions (a) to (f) of 2.2.7.2.3.5 shall meet
the following requirements:
(a) Only one of the provisions (a) to (f) of 2.2.7.2.3.5 is allowed per
consignment;
(b) Only one approved fissile material in packages classified in accordance
with 2.2.7.2.3.5 (f) is allowed per consignment unless multiple
materials are authorized in the certificate of approval;
(c) Fissile material in packages classified in accordance with 2.2.7.2.3.5 (c)
shall be carried in a consignment with no more than 45 g of fissile
nuclides;
(d) Fissile material in packages classified in accordance with 2.2.7.2.3.5 (d)
shall be carried in a consignment with no more than 15 g of fissile
nuclides;
(e) Unpackaged or packaged fissile material classified in accordance with
2.2.7.2.3.5 (e) shall be carried under exclusive use on a vehicle with no
more than 45 g of fissile nuclides.
– 594 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 595 –
(5) Damaged or leaking packages, contaminated packagings
(5.1) If it is evident that a package is damaged or leaking, or if it is suspected that
the package may have leaked or been damaged, access to the package shall be
restricted and a qualified person shall, as soon as possible, assess the extent of
contamination and the resultant dose rate of the package. The scope of the
assessment shall include the package, the vehicle, the adjacent loading and
unloading areas, and, if necessary, all other material which has been carried in
the vehicle. When necessary, additional steps for the protection of people,
property and the environment, in accordance with provisions established by
the competent authority, shall be taken to overcome and minimize the
consequences of such leakage or damage.
(5.2) Packages damaged or leaking radioactive contents in excess of allowable limits
for normal conditions of carriage may be removed to an acceptable interim
location under supervision, but shall not be forwarded until repaired or
reconditioned and decontaminated.
(5.3) A vehicle and equipment used regularly for the carriage of radioactive material
shall be periodically checked to determine the level of contamination. The
frequency of such checks shall be related to the likelihood of contamination
and the extent to which radioactive material is carried.
(5.4) Except as provided in paragraph (5.5), any vehicle, or equipment or part
thereof which has become contaminated above the limits specified in 4.1.9.1.2
in the course of carriage of radioactive material, or which shows a dose rate in
excess of 5 μSv/h at the surface, shall be decontaminated as soon as possible
by a qualified person and shall not be re-used unless the following conditions
are fulfilled:
(a) the non-fixed contamination shall not exceed the limits specified in
4.1.9.1.2;
(b) the dose rate resulting from the fixed contamination shall not exceed 5
Sv/h at the surface.
(5.5) A container or vehicle dedicated to the carriage of unpackaged radioactive
material under exclusive use shall be excepted from the requirements of the
previous paragraph (5.4) and in 4.1.9.1.4 solely with regard to its internal
surfaces and only for as long as it remains under that specific exclusive use.
(6) Other provisions
Where a consignment is undeliverable, the consignment shall be placed in a safe
location and the competent authority shall be informed as soon as possible and a
request made for instructions on further action.
CV34 Prior to carriage of pressure receptacles it shall be ensured that the pressure has not risen due
to potential hydrogen generation.
CV35 If bags are used as single packagings, they shall be adequately separated to allow for the
dissipation of heat.
CV36 Packages shall preferably be loaded in open or ventilated vehicles or open or ventilated
containers. If this is not feasible and packages are carried in other closed vehicles or
containers, gas exchange between the load compartment and the driver’s cab shall be
prevented and the cargo doors of the vehicles or containers shall be marked with the
following in letters not less than 25 mm high:
“WARNING
NO VENTILATION
OPEN WITH CAUTION”
This shall be in a language considered appropriate by the consignor.
– 595 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 596 –
For UN Nos. 2211 and 3314 this mark is not required when the vehicle or container is already
marked according to special provision 965 of the IMDG Code3.
CV37 Before loading, these by-products shall be cooled to ambient temperature, unless they have
been calcined to remove moisture. Vehicles and containers containing bulk loads shall be
adequately ventilated and protected against ingress of water throughout the journey. The
cargo doors of the closed vehicles and closed containers shall be marked with the following
in letters not less than 25 mm high:
“WARNING
CLOSED MEANS OF CONTAINMENT
OPEN WITH CAUTION”
This shall be in a language considered appropriate by the consignor.
3 Warning mark including the words “CAUTION – MAY CONTAIN FLAMMABLE VAPOUR” with lettering not
less than 25 mm high, affixed at each access point in a location where it will be easily seen by persons prior to opening
or entering the vehicle or container.
– 596 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
ANNEX B
PROVISIONS CONCERNING TRANSPORT
EQUIPMENT
AND TRANSPORT OPERATIONSCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
PART 8
Requirements for vehicle crews, equipment,
operation and documentationCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 601 –
CHAPTER 8.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING TRANSPORT UNITS
AND EQUIPMENT ON BOARD
8.1.1 Transport units
A transport unit loaded with dangerous goods may in no case include more than one trailer (or
semi-trailer).
8.1.2 Documents to be carried on the transport unit
8.1.2.1 In addition to the documents required under other regulations, the following documents shall be carried
on the transport unit:
(a) The transport documents prescribed in 5.4.1, covering all the dangerous goods carried;
(b) The instructions in writing prescribed in 5.4.3;
(c) (Reserved);
(d) Means of identification, which include a photograph, for each member of the vehicle crew, in
accordance with 1.10.1.4.
8.1.2.2 Where the provisions of ADR require the following documents to be drawn up, they shall likewise be
carried on the transport unit:
(a) The certificate of approval referred to in 9.1.3 for each transport unit or element thereof;
(b) The driver’s training certificate prescribed in 8.2.1;
(c) A copy of the competent authority approval, when required in 5.4.1.2.1 (c) or (d) or 5.4.1.2.3.3.
8.1.2.3 The instructions in writing prescribed in 5.4.3 shall be kept readily available.
8.1.2.4 (Deleted)
8.1.3 Placarding and marking
Transport units carrying dangerous goods shall be placarded and marked in conformity with
Chapter 5.3.
– 601 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 602 –
8.1.4 Fire-fighting equipment
8.1.4.1 The following table shows the minimum provisions for portable fire extinguishers for the inflammability
Classes1 A, B and C that apply to transport units carrying dangerous goods except for those referred to
in 8.1.4.2:
(1)
Transport unit
maximum
permissible mass
(2)
Minimum
number of
fire
extinguishers
(3)
Minimum
total capacity
per transport
unit
(4)
Extinguisher suitable for
engine or cab fire. At least
one with a minimum
capacity of:
(5)
Additional
extinguisher(s)
requirement. At least
one extinguisher shall
have a minimum
capacity of:
≤ 3.5 tonnes 2 4 kg 2 kg 2 kg
> 3.5 tonnes
≤ 7.5 tonnes
2 8 kg 2 kg 6 kg
> 7.5 tonnes 2 12 kg 2 kg 6 kg
The capacities are for dry powder devices (or an equivalent capacity for any other suitable extinguishing
agent).
8.1.4.2 Transport units carrying dangerous goods in accordance with 1.1.3.6 shall be equipped with one portable
fire extinguisher for the inflammability classes1 A, B and C, with a minimum capacity of 2 kg dry
powder (or an equivalent capacity for any other suitable extinguishing agent).
8.1.4.3 The portable fire extinguishers shall be suitable for use on a vehicle and shall comply with the relevant
requirements of EN 3 Portable fire extinguishers, Part 7 (EN 3-7:2004 + A1:2007).
If the vehicle is equipped with a fixed fire extinguisher, automatic or easily brought into action for
fighting a fire in the engine, the portable extinguisher need not be suitable for fighting a fire in the
engine. The extinguishing agents shall be such that they are not liable to release toxic gases into the
driver’s cab or under the influence of the heat of the fire.
8.1.4.4 The portable fire extinguishers conforming to the provisions of 8.1.4.1 or 8.1.4.2 shall be fitted with a
seal which allows verifying that they have not been used.
The fire extinguishers shall be subjected to inspections in accordance with authorized national standards
in order to guarantee their functional safety. They shall bear a mark of compliance with a standard
recognized by a competent authority and a mark indicating the date (month, year) of the next inspection
or of the maximum permissible period of use, as applicable.
8.1.4.5 The fire extinguishers shall be installed on the transport units in a way that they are easily accessible to
the vehicle crew. The installation shall be carried out in such a way that the fire extinguishers shall be
protected against effects of the weather so that their operational safety is not affected. During carriage,
the date required in 8.1.4.4 shall not have expired.
8.1.5 Miscellaneous equipment and equipment for personal protection
8.1.5.1 Each transport unit carrying dangerous goods shall be provided with items of equipment for general and
personal protection in accordance with 8.1.5.2. The items of equipment shall be selected in accordance
with the danger label number of the goods loaded. The label numbers can be identified through the
transport document.
1 For the definition of the inflammability classes, see Standard EN 2:1992 + A1:2004 Classification of fires.
– 602 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 603 –
8.1.5.2 The following equipment shall be carried on board the transport unit:
– For each vehicle, a wheel chock of a size suited to the maximum mass of the vehicle and to the
diameter of the wheel;
– Two self-standing warning signs;
– Eye rinsing liquid2; and
for each member of the vehicle crew
– A warning vest (e.g. as described in the EN ISO 20471 standard);
– Portable lighting apparatus conforming to the provisions of 8.3.4;
– A pair of protective gloves; and
– Eye protection (e.g. protective goggles).
8.1.5.3 Additional equipment required for certain classes:
– An emergency escape mask3 for each member of the vehicle crew shall be carried on board the
transport unit for danger label numbers 2.3 or 6.1;
– A shovel4;
– A drain seal4;
– A collecting container4.
2 Not required for danger label numbers 1, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3.
3 For example an emergency escape mask with a combined gas/dust filter of the A1B1E1K1-P1 or A2B2E2K2-P2
type which is similar to that described in the EN 14387:2004 + A1:2008 standard.
4 Only required for solids and liquids with danger label numbers 3, 4.1, 4.3, 8 or 9.
– 603 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 605 –
CHAPTER 8.2
REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE TRAINING OF THE VEHICLE CREW
8.2.1 Scope and general requirements concerning the training of drivers
8.2.1.1 Drivers of vehicles carrying dangerous goods shall hold a certificate issued by the competent authority
stating that they have participated in a training course and passed an examination on the particular
requirements that have to be met during carriage of dangerous goods.
8.2.1.2 Drivers of vehicles carrying dangerous goods shall attend a basic training course. Training shall be
given in the form of a course approved by the competent authority. Its main objectives are to make
drivers aware of hazards arising in the carriage of dangerous goods and to give them basic information
indispensable for minimizing the likelihood of an incident taking place and, if it does, to enable them to
take measures which may prove necessary for their own safety and that of the public and the
environment, for limiting the effects of an incident. This training, which shall include individual
practical exercises, shall act as the basis of training for all categories of drivers covering at least the
subjects defined in 8.2.2.3.2. The competent authority may approve basic training courses limited to
specific dangerous goods or to a specific class or classes. These restricted basic training courses shall
not confer the right to attend the training courses referred to in 8.2.1.4.
8.2.1.3 Drivers of vehicles or MEMUs carrying dangerous goods in fixed tanks or demountable tanks with
a capacity exceeding 1 m³, drivers of battery-vehicles with a total capacity exceeding 1 m³ and drivers
of vehicles or MEMUs carrying dangerous goods in tank-containers, portable tanks or MEGCs with an
individual capacity exceeding 3 m³ on a transport unit, shall attend a specialization training course for
carriage in tanks covering at least the subjects defined in 8.2.2.3.3. The competent authority may
approve tank specialization training courses limited to specific dangerous goods or to a specific class or
classes. These restricted tank specialization training courses shall not confer the right to attend the
training courses referred to in 8.2.1.4.
8.2.1.4 Drivers of vehicles carrying dangerous goods of Class 1, other than substances and articles of Division
1.4, compatibility group S, or Class 7 shall attend specialization training courses covering at least the
subjects defined in 8.2.2.3.4 or 8.2.2.3.5, as applicable.
8.2.1.5 All training courses, practical exercises, examinations and the role of competent authorities shall comply
with the provisions of 8.2.2.
8.2.1.6 All training certificates conforming to the requirements of this section and issued in accordance with
8.2.2.8 by the competent authority of a Contracting Party shall be accepted during their period of validity
by the competent authorities of other Contracting Parties.
8.2.2 Special requirements concerning the training of drivers
8.2.2.1 The necessary knowledge and skills shall be imparted by training covering theoretical courses and
practical exercises. The knowledge shall be tested in an examination.
8.2.2.2 The training body shall ensure that the training instructors have a good knowledge of, and take into
consideration, recent developments in regulations and training requirements relating to the carriage of
dangerous goods. The training shall be practice-related. The training programme shall conform with the
approval referred to in 8.2.2.6, on the subjects set out in 8.2.2.3.2 to 8.2.2.3.5. The training shall also
include individual practical exercises (see 8.2.2.3.8).
8.2.2.3 Structure of training
8.2.2.3.1 Training shall be given in the form of a basic training course and, when applicable, specialization
training courses. Basic training courses and specialization training courses may be given in the form of
comprehensive training courses, conducted integrally, on the same occasion and by the same training
body.
– 605 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 606 –
8.2.2.3.2 Subjects to be covered by the basic training course shall be, at least:
(a) General requirements governing the carriage of dangerous goods;
(b) Main types of hazard;
(c) Information on environmental protection in the control of the transfer of wastes;
(d) Preventive and safety measures appropriate to the various types of hazard;
(e) What to do after an accident (first aid, road safety, basic knowledge about the use of protective
equipment, instructions in writing, etc.);
(f) Marking, labelling, placarding and orange-coloured plate marking;
(g) What a driver should and should not do during the carriage of dangerous goods;
(h) Purpose and the method of operation of technical equipment on vehicles;
(i) Prohibitions on mixed loading in the same vehicle or container;
(j) Precautions to be taken during loading and unloading of dangerous goods;
(k) General information concerning civil liability;
(l) Information on multimodal transport operations;
(m) Handling and stowage of packages;
(n) Traffic restrictions in tunnels and instructions on behaviour in tunnels (prevention of incidents,
safety, action in the event of fire or other emergencies, etc.);
(o) Security awareness.
8.2.2.3.3 Subjects to be covered by the specialization training course for carriage in tanks shall be, at least:
(a) Behaviour of vehicles on the road, including movements of the load;
(b) Specific requirements of the vehicles;
(c) General theoretical knowledge of the various and different filling and discharge systems;
(d) Specific additional provisions applicable to the use of those vehicles (certificates of approval,
approval marking, placarding and orange-coloured plate marking, etc.).
8.2.2.3.4 Subjects to be covered by the specialization training course for the carriage of substances and articles
of Class 1 shall be, at least:
(a) Specific hazards related to explosive and pyrotechnical substances and articles;
(b) Specific requirements concerning mixed loading of substances and articles of Class 1.
8.2.2.3.5 Subjects to be covered by the specialization training course for the carriage of radioactive material of
Class 7 shall be, at least:
(a) Specific hazards related to ionizing radiation;
(b) Specific requirements concerning packing, handling, mixed loading and stowage of radioactive
material;
(c) Special measures to be taken in the event of an accident involving radioactive material.
8.2.2.3.6 Teaching units are intended to last 45 minutes.
8.2.2.3.7 Normally, not more than eight teaching units are permitted on each training day.
– 606 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 607 –
8.2.2.3.8 The individual practical exercises shall take place in connection with the theoretical training, and shall
at least cover first aid, fire-fighting and what to do in case of an incident or accident.
8.2.2.4 Initial training programme
8.2.2.4.1 The minimum duration of the theoretical element of each initial training course or part of the
comprehensive training course shall be as follows:
Basic training course 18 teaching units
Specialization training course for carriage in tanks 12 teaching units
Specialization training course for carriage of substances and articles
of Class 1
8 teaching units
Specialization training course for carriage of radioactive material
of Class 7
8 teaching units
For the basic training course and the specialization training course for carriage in tanks, additional
teaching units are required for practical exercises referred to in 8.2.2.3.8 which will vary depending on
the number of drivers under instruction.
8.2.2.4.2 The total duration of the comprehensive training course may be determined by the competent authority,
who shall maintain the duration of the basic training course and the specialization training course for
tanks, but may supplement it with shortened specialization training courses for Classes 1 and 7.
8.2.2.5 Refresher training programme
8.2.2.5.1 Refresher training undertaken at regular intervals serves the purpose of bringing the drivers’ knowledge
up to date; it shall cover new technical, legal and substance-related developments.
8.2.2.5.2 The duration of the refresher training including individual practical exercises shall be of at least two
days for comprehensive training courses, or at least one half the duration allocated to the corresponding
initial basic or initial specialization training courses as specified in 8.2.2.4.1 for individual training
courses.
8.2.2.5.3 A driver may replace a refresher training course and examination with the corresponding initial training
course and examination.
8.2.2.6 Approval of training
8.2.2.6.1 The training courses shall be subject to approval by the competent authority.
8.2.2.6.2 Approval shall only be given with regard to applications submitted in writing.
8.2.2.6.3 The following documents shall be attached to the application for approval:
(a) A detailed training programme specifying the subjects taught and indicating the time schedule
and planned teaching methods;
(b) Qualifications and fields of activities of the teaching personnel;
(c) Information on the premises where the courses take place and on the teaching materials as well
as on the facilities for the practical exercises;
(d) Conditions of participation in the courses, such as number of participants.
8.2.2.6.4 The competent authority shall organize the supervision of training and examinations.
8.2.2.6.5 Approval shall be granted in writing by the competent authority subject to the following conditions:
(a) The training shall be given in conformity with the application documents;
(b) The competent authority shall be granted the right to send authorized persons to be present at the
training courses and examinations;
– 607 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 608 –
(c) The competent authority shall be advised in time of the dates and the places of the individual
training courses;
(d) The approval may be withdrawn if the conditions of approval are not complied with.
8.2.2.6.6 The approval document shall indicate whether the courses concerned are basic or specialization training
courses, initial or refresher training courses, and whether they are limited to specific dangerous goods
or a specific class or classes.
8.2.2.6.7 If the training body, after a training course has been given approval, intends to make any alterations
with respect to such details as were relevant to the approval, it shall seek permission in advance from
the competent authority. This applies in particular to changes concerning the training programme.
8.2.2.7 Examinations
8.2.2.7.1 Examinations for the basic training course
8.2.2.7.1.1 After completion of the basic training, including the practical exercises, an examination shall be held
on the corresponding basic training course.
8.2.2.7.1.2 In the examination, the candidate has to prove that he has the knowledge, insight and skill for the
practice of professional driver of vehicles carrying dangerous goods as provided in the basic training
course.
8.2.2.7.1.3 For this purpose the competent authority shall prepare a catalogue of questions which refer to the items
summarized in 8.2.2.3.2. Questions in the examination shall be drawn from this catalogue. The
candidates shall not have any knowledge of the questions selected from the catalogue prior to the
examination.
8.2.2.7.1.4 A single examination for comprehensive training courses may be held.
8.2.2.7.1.5 Each competent authority shall supervise the modalities of the examination; including, if necessary, the
infrastructure and organisation of electronic examinations in accordance with 8.2.2.7.1.8, if these are to
be carried out.
8.2.2.7.1.6 The examination shall take the form of a written examination or a combination of a written and oral
examination. Each candidate shall be asked at least 25 written questions for the basic training course. If
the examination follows a refresher training course, at least 15 written questions shall be asked. The
duration of these examinations shall be at least 45 and 30 minutes respectively. The questions may be
of a varying degree of difficulty and be allocated a different weighting.
8.2.2.7.1.7 Every examination shall be invigilated. Any manipulation and deception shall be ruled out as far as
possible. Authentication of the candidate shall be ensured. All examination documents shall be recorded
and kept as a print-out or electronically as a file.
8.2.2.7.1.8 Written examinations may be performed, in whole or in part, as electronic examinations, where the
answers are recorded and evaluated using electronic data processing (EDP) processes, provided the
following conditions are met:
(a) The hardware and software shall be checked and accepted by the competent authority;
(b) Proper technical functioning shall be ensured. Arrangements as to whether and how the
examination can be continued shall be made for a failure of the devices and applications. No aids
shall be available on the input devices (e.g. electronic search function), the equipment provided
shall not allow the candidates to communicate with any other device during the examination;
(c) Final inputs of each candidate shall be logged. The determination of the results shall be
transparent;
(d) Electronic media may be used only if provided by the examining body. There shall be no means
of a candidate introducing further data to the electronic media provided; the candidate may only
answer the questions posed.
– 608 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 609 –
8.2.2.7.2 Examinations for specialization training courses for carriage in tanks or carriage of substances and
articles of Class 1 or radioactive material of Class 7
8.2.2.7.2.1 After having sat the examination on the basic training course and after having attended the specialization
training course for carriage in tanks or carriage of substances and articles of Class 1 or radioactive
material of Class 7, the candidate shall be allowed to take part in the examination corresponding to the
training.
8.2.2.7.2.2 This examination shall be held and supervised on the same basis as in 8.2.2.7.1. The catalogue of
questions shall refer to the items summarized in 8.2.2.3.3, 8.2.2.3.4 or 8.2.2.3.5, as appropriate.
8.2.2.7.2.3 With respect to each specialization training examination, at least 15 written questions shall be asked. If
the examination follows a refresher training course, at least 10 written questions shall be asked. The
duration of these examinations shall be at least 30 and 20 minutes respectively.
8.2.2.7.2.4 If an examination is based on a restricted basic training course, this limits the examination of the
specialization training course to the same scope.
8.2.2.8 Certificate of driver’s training
8.2.2.8.1 The certificate referred to in 8.2.1.1 shall be issued:
(a) After completion of a basic training course, provided the candidate has successfully passed the
examination in accordance with 8.2.2.7.1;
(b) If applicable, after completion of a specialization training course for carriage in tanks or carriage
of substances and articles of Class 1 or radioactive material of Class 7, or after having acquired
the knowledge referred to in special provisions S1 and S11 in Chapter 8.5, provided the candidate
has successfully passed an examination in accordance with 8.2.2.7.2;
(c) If applicable, after completion of a restricted basic or restricted tank specialization training
course, provided the candidate has successfully passed the examination in accordance with
8.2.2.7.1 or 8.2.2.7.2. The certificate issued shall clearly indicate its limited scope of validity to
the relevant dangerous goods or class(es).
8.2.2.8.2 The date of validity of a driver training certificate shall be five years from the date the driver passes an
initial basic or initial comprehensive training examination.
The certificate shall be renewed if the driver furnishes proof of participation in refresher training in
accordance with 8.2.2.5 and has passed an examination in accordance with 8.2.2.7 in the following
cases:
(a) In the twelve months before the date of expiry of the certificate. The competent authority shall
issue a new certificate, valid for five years, the period of validity of which shall begin with the
date of expiry of the previous certificate;
(b) Prior to the twelve months before the date of expiry of the certificate. The competent authority
shall issue a new certificate, valid for five years, the period of validity of which shall begin from
the date on which the refresher examination was passed.
Where a driver extends the scope of his certificate during its period of validity, by meeting the
requirements of 8.2.2.8.1 (b) and (c), the period of validity of a new certificate shall remain that of the
previous certificate. When a driver has passed a specialization training examination, the specialization
shall be valid until the date of expiry of the certificate.
8.2.2.8.3 The certificate shall have the layout of the model shown in 8.2.2.8.5. Its dimensions shall be in
accordance with ISO 7810:2003 ID-1 and it shall be made of plastic. The colour shall be white with
black lettering. It shall include an additional security feature such as a hologram, UV printing or
guilloche patterns.
8.2.2.8.4 The certificate shall be prepared in the language(s) or one of the languages of the country of the
competent authority which issued the certificate. If none of these languages is English, French or
German, the title of the certificate, the title of item 8 and the titles on the back shall also be drawn up in
English, French or German.
– 609 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 610 –
8.2.2.8.5 Model for the training certificate for drivers of vehicles carrying dangerous goods
Front
Back
* Replace the text with appropriate data.
** Distinguishing sign used on vehicles in international traffic (for Parties to the 1968 Convention on
Road Traffic or the 1949 Convention on Road Traffic, as notified to the Secretary General of the United
Nations in accordance with respectively article 45(4) or annex 4 of these conventions).
8.2.2.8.6 Contracting Parties shall provide the UNECE secretariat with an example of the national model for any
certificate intended for issue in accordance with this section. Contracting Parties shall also provide
explanatory notes to enable the verification of conformity of certificates against the examples provided.
The secretariat shall make this information available on its website.
8.2.3 Training of persons other than the drivers holding a certificate in accordance with 8.2.1, involved
in the carriage of dangerous goods by road
Persons whose duties concern the carriage of dangerous goods by road shall have received training in
the requirements governing the carriage of such goods appropriate to their responsibilities and duties
according to Chapter 1.3. This requirement shall apply to individuals such as personnel who are
employed by the road vehicle operator or the consignor, personnel who load or unload dangerous goods,
personnel in freight forwarding or shipping agencies and drivers of vehicles other than drivers holding
a certificate in accordance with 8.2.1, involved in the carriage of dangerous goods by road.
ADR DRIVER TRAINING CERTIFICATE
1. (CERTIFICATE No.)*
2. (SURNAME)*
3. (OTHER NAME(S))*
4. (DATE OF BIRTH dd/mm/yyyy)*
5. (NATIONALITY)*
6. (DRIVER SIGNATURE)*
7. (ISSUING BODY)*
8. VALID TO: (dd/mm/yyyy)*
**
(Insert
driver
photograph)*
VALID FOR CLASS(ES) OR UN Nos.:
TANKS OTHER THAN TANKS
9. (Enter Class 10. (Enter Class
or UN Number(s))* or UN Number(s))*
– 610 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 611 –
CHAPTER 8.3
MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS TO BE COMPLIED
WITH BY THE VEHICLE CREW
8.3.1 Passengers
Apart from members of the vehicle crew, no passengers may be carried in transport units carrying
dangerous goods.
8.3.2 Use of fire-fighting appliances
Members of the vehicle crew shall know how to use the fire-fighting appliances.
8.3.3 Prohibition on opening packages
A driver or a driver’s assistant may not open a package containing dangerous goods.
8.3.4 Portable lighting apparatus
The portable lighting apparatus used shall not exhibit any metal surface liable to produce sparks.
8.3.5 Prohibition on smoking
Smoking shall be prohibited during handling operations in the vicinity of vehicles and inside the
vehicles. This prohibition of smoking is also applicable to the use of electronic cigarettes and similar
devices.
8.3.6 Running the engine during loading or unloading
Except where the engine has to be used to drive the pumps or other appliances for loading or unloading
the vehicle and the laws of the country in which the vehicle is operating permit such use, the engine
shall be shut off during loading and unloading operations.
8.3.7 Use of the parking brakes and wheel chocks
No vehicles carrying dangerous goods may be parked without the parking brakes being applied. Trailers
without braking devices shall be restrained from moving by applying at least one wheel chock as
described in 8.1.5.2.
8.3.8 Use of cables
In the case of a transport unit equipped with an anti-lock braking system, consisting of a motor vehicle
and a trailer with a maximum mass exceeding 3.5 tonnes, the connections referred to in sub-section
9.2.2.6 shall be connecting the towing vehicle and the trailer at all times during carriage.
– 611 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 613 –
CHAPTER 8.4
REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE SUPERVISION OF VEHICLES
8.4.1 Vehicles carrying dangerous goods in the quantities shown in special provisions S1 (6) and S14 to S24
of Chapter 8.5 for a given substance according to Column (19) of Table A of Chapter 3.2 shall be
supervised or alternatively may be parked, unsupervised, in a secure depot or secure factory premises.
If such facilities are not available, the vehicle, after having been properly secured, may be parked in an
isolated position meeting the requirements of (a), (b) or (c) below:
(a) A vehicle park supervised by an attendant who has been notified of the nature of the load and
the whereabouts of the driver;
(b) A public or private vehicle park where the vehicle is not likely to suffer damage from other
vehicles; or
(c) A suitable open space separated from the public highway and from dwellings, where the public
does not normally pass or assemble.
The parking facilities permitted in (b) shall be used only if those described in (a) are not available, and
those described in (c) may be used only if facilities described in (a) and (b) are not available.
8.4.2 Loaded MEMUs shall be supervised or alternatively may be parked, unsupervised, in a secure depot or
secure factory premises. Empty uncleaned MEMUs are exempted from this requirement.
– 613 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 615 –
CHAPTER 8.5
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS RELATING TO PARTICULAR
CLASSES OR SUBSTANCES
In addition to the requirements of Chapters 8.1 to 8.4, when reference is made to them in Column (19)
of Table A of Chapter 3.2, the following requirements shall apply to the carriage of the substances or
articles concerned. In the event of conflict with the requirements of Chapters 8.1 to 8.4, the requirements
of this Chapter shall take precedence.
S1: Requirements concerning the carriage of explosive substances and articles (Class 1)
(1) Special training of drivers
If, according to other regulations applicable in the country of a Contracting Party, a driver has
followed equivalent training under a different regime or for a different purpose, covering the
subjects defined in 8.2.2.3.4, the specialization training course may be totally or partially
dispensed with.
(2) Approved official
If the national regulations so provide, the competent authority of a country contracting party to
ADR may require an approved official to be carried in the vehicle at the carrier’s expense.
(3) Prohibition of smoking, fire and naked flame
Smoking, the use of fire or of naked flames shall be prohibited on vehicles carrying substances
and articles of Class 1, in their vicinity and during the loading and unloading of these substances
and articles. This prohibition of smoking is also applicable to the use of electronic cigarettes and
similar devices.
(4) Places of loading and unloading
(a) Loading or unloading of substances and articles of Class 1 shall not take place in a public
place in a built-up area without special permission from the competent authorities;
(b) Loading or unloading of substances and articles of Class 1 in a public space elsewhere
than in a built-up area without prior notice thereof having been given to the competent
authorities shall be prohibited, unless operations are urgently necessary for reasons of
safety;
(c) If, for any reason, handling operations have to be carried out in a public place, then
substances and articles of different kinds shall be separated according to the labels;
(d) When vehicles carrying substances and articles of Class 1 are obliged to stop for loading
or unloading operations in a public place, a distance of at least 50 m shall be maintained
between the stationary vehicles. This distance shall not apply to vehicles belonging to the
same transport unit.
(5) Convoys
(a) When vehicles carrying substances and articles of Class 1 travel in convoy, a distance of
not less than 50 m shall be maintained between each transport unit and the next;
(b) The competent authority may lay down rules for the order or composition of convoys.
– 615 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 616 –
(6) Supervision of vehicles
The requirements of Chapter 8.4 shall be applicable only when substances and articles of Class
1 having a total net mass of explosive substance above the limits set below are carried in a
vehicle:
Division 1.1: 0 kg
Division 1.2: 0 kg
Division 1.3, compatibility group C: 0 kg
Division 1.3, other than compatibility group C: 50 kg
Division 1.4, other than those listed below: 50 kg
Division 1.5: 0 kg
Division 1.6: 50 kg
Substances and articles of Division 1.4 belonging to UN numbers 0104, 0237,0255,
0267, 0289, 0361, 0365, 0366, 0440, 0441, 0455, 0456, 0500, 0512 and 0513: 0 kg
For mixed loads the lowest limit applicable to any of the substances or articles carried shall be
used for the load as a whole.
In addition, these substances and articles, when subject to the provisions in 1.10.3, shall be
supervised in accordance with the security plan in 1.10.3.2 at all times to prevent any malicious
act and to alert the driver and the competent authorities in the event of loss or fire.
Empty uncleaned packagings are exempted.
(7) Locking of vehicles
Doors and rigid covers in the load compartments of EX/II vehicles and all openings in the load
compartments of EX/III vehicles carrying substances and articles of Class 1 shall be locked
during transport, except for the periods of loading and unloading.
S2: Additional requirements concerning the carriage of flammable liquids or gases
(1) Portable lighting apparatus
The load compartment of closed vehicles carrying liquids having a flash-point of not more than
60 °C or flammable substances or articles of Class 2, shall not be entered by persons carrying
portable lighting apparatus other than those so designed and constructed that they cannot ignite
any flammable vapours or gases which may have penetrated into the interior of the vehicle.
(2) Operation of combustion heaters during loading or unloading
The operation of combustion heaters of vehicles of type FL (see Part 9) is forbidden during
loading and unloading and at loading sites.
(3) Precautions against electrostatic charges
In the case of vehicles of type FL (see Part 9), a good electrical connection from the vehicle
chassis to earth shall be established before tanks are filled or emptied. In addition, the rate of
filling shall be limited.
S3: Special provisions concerning the carriage of infectious substances
The requirements of the table columns (2), (3) and (5) in 8.1.4.1 and the requirements in 8.3.4 shall not
apply.
S4: See 7.1.7.
NOTE: This special provision S4 does not apply to substances referred to in 3.1.2.6 when substances
are stabilized by the addition of chemical inhibitors such that the SADT is greater than 50 °C. In this
case, temperature control may be required under conditions of carriage where the temperature may
exceed 55 °C.
S5: Special provisions common to the carriage of radioactive material of Class 7 in excepted packages
(UN Nos. 2908, 2909, 2910 and 2911) only
The requirements of the instructions in writing of 8.1.2.1 (b) and of 8.2.1, 8.3.1 and 8.3.4 shall not apply.
– 616 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 617 –
S6: Special provisions common to the carriage of radioactive material of Class 7 other than in
excepted packages
The provisions of 8.3.1 shall not apply to vehicles carrying only packages, overpacks or containers
bearing category I-WHITE labels.
The provisions of 8.3.4 shall not apply provided there is no subsidiary hazard.
Other additional requirements or special provisions
S7: (Deleted)
S8: When a transport unit is loaded with more than 2 000 kg of these substances, stops for service
requirements shall as far as possible not be made near inhabited places or frequented places. A longer
stop near such places is permissible only with the consent of the competent authorities.
S9: During the carriage of these substances, stops for service requirements shall as far as possible not be
made near inhabited places or frequented places. A longer stop near such places is permissible only with
the consent of the competent authorities.
S10: During the period April to October, when a vehicle is stationary, the packages shall, if the legislation of
the country in which the vehicle is halted so requires, be effectively protected against the action of the
sun, e.g. by means of sheets placed not less than 20 cm above the load.
S11: If, according to other regulations applicable in the country of a Contracting Party, a driver has followed
equivalent training under a different regime or for a different purpose covering the subjects defined in
8.2.2.3.5, the specialization training course may be totally or partially dispensed with.
S12: If the total number of packages containing radioactive material carried in the transport unit does not
exceed 10, the sum of the transport indexes does not exceed 3 and there are no subsidiary hazards, the
requirements in 8.2.1 concerning the training of drivers need not be applied. However, drivers shall then
receive appropriate training in the requirements governing the carriage of radioactive material,
commensurate with their duties. This training shall provide them with an awareness of the radiation
hazards involved in the carriage of radioactive material. Such awareness training shall be confirmed by
a certificate provided by their employer. See also 8.2.3.
S13: (Deleted)
S14: The provisions of Chapter 8.4 concerning the supervision of vehicles shall apply for vehicles carrying
any amount of these substances.
S15: The provisions of Chapter 8.4 concerning the supervision of vehicles shall apply for vehicles carrying
any amount of these substances. However, the provisions of Chapter 8.4 need not be applied when the
loaded compartment is locked or the packages carried are otherwise protected against any illicit
unloading.
S16: The provisions of Chapter 8.4 concerning the supervision of vehicles shall apply when the total mass of
these substances in the vehicle exceeds 500 kg.
In addition, vehicles carrying more than 500 kg of these substances, when subject to the provisions in
1.10.3, shall be supervised in accordance with the security plan in 1.10.3.2 at all times to prevent any
malicious act and to alert the driver and competent authorities in the event of loss or fire.
S17: The provisions of Chapter 8.4 concerning the supervision of vehicles shall apply when the total mass of
these substances in the vehicle exceeds 1 000 kg.
S18: The provisions of Chapter 8.4 concerning the supervision of vehicles shall apply when the total mass of
such substances in the vehicle exceeds 2 000 kg.
S19: The provisions of Chapter 8.4 concerning the supervision of vehicles shall apply when the total mass of
such substances in the vehicle exceeds 5 000 kg.
S20: The provisions of Chapter 8.4 concerning the supervision of vehicles shall apply when the total mass or
volume of these substances in the vehicle exceeds 10 000 kg as packaged goods or 3 000 litres in tanks.
– 617 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 618 –
S21: The provisions of Chapter 8.4 concerning the supervision of vehicles shall apply to all material, in
whatever mass. However, the provisions of Chapter 8.4 need not be applied where:
(a) The loaded compartment is locked or the packages carried are otherwise protected against illicit
unloading; and
(b) The dose rate does not exceed 5Sv/h at any accessible point on the outer surface of the vehicle.
In addition, these goods, when subject to the provisions in 1.10.3, shall be supervised in accordance
with the security plan in 1.10.3.2 at all times to prevent any malicious act and to alert the driver and the
competent authorities in the event of loss or fire.
S22: The provisions of Chapter 8.4 concerning the supervision of vehicles shall apply when the total mass or
volume of these substances in the vehicle exceeds 5 000 kg as packaged goods or 3 000 litres in tanks.
S23: The provisions of Chapter 8.4 concerning the supervision of vehicles shall apply when this substance is
carried in bulk or in tanks and when the total mass or volume in the vehicle exceeds 3 000 kg or
3 000 litres, as applicable.
S24: The provisions of Chapter 8.4 concerning the supervision of vehicles shall apply when the total mass of
these substances in the vehicle exceeds 100 kg.
– 618 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 619 –
CHAPTER 8.6
ROAD TUNNEL RESTRICTIONS FOR THE PASSAGE OF VEHICLES
CARRYING DANGEROUS GOODS
8.6.1 General provisions
The provisions of this Chapter apply when the passage of vehicles through road tunnels is restricted in
accordance with 1.9.5.
8.6.2 Road signs or signals governing the passage of vehicles carrying dangerous goods
The tunnel category, assigned in accordance with 1.9.5.1 by the competent authority to a given road
tunnel for the purpose of restricting the passage of transport units carrying dangerous goods, shall be
indicated as follows by means of road signs and signals:
Sign and signal Tunnel category
No sign Tunnel category A
Sign with an additional panel bearing a letter B Tunnel category B
Sign with an additional panel bearing a letter C Tunnel category C
Sign with an additional panel bearing a letter D Tunnel category D
Sign with an additional panel bearing a letter E Tunnel category E
8.6.3 Tunnel restriction codes
8.6.3.1 The restrictions for the transport of specific dangerous goods through tunnels are based on the tunnel
restriction code of these goods, indicated in Column (15) of Table A of Chapter 3.2. The tunnel
restriction codes are put between brackets at the bottom of the cell. When ‘(─)’ is indicated instead of
one of the tunnel restriction codes, the dangerous goods are not subject to any tunnel restriction; for the
dangerous goods assigned to UN Nos. 2919 and 3331, restrictions to the passage through tunnels may,
however, be part of the special arrangement approved by the competent authority(ies) on the basis of
1.7.4.2.
8.6.3.2 When a transport unit contains dangerous goods to which different tunnel restriction codes have been
assigned, the most restrictive of these tunnel restriction codes shall be assigned to the whole load.
8.6.3.3 Dangerous goods carried in accordance with 1.1.3 are not subject to the tunnel restrictions and shall not
be taken into account when determining the tunnel restriction code to be assigned to the whole load of
a transport unit, except if the transport unit is required to be marked in accordance with 3.4.13 subject
to 3.4.14.
8.6.4 Restrictions for the passage of transport units carrying dangerous goods through tunnels
The restrictions for passage through tunnels shall apply:
– to transport units for which marking is required by 3.4.13 subject to 3.4.14, through tunnels of
category E; and
– to transport units for which an orange-coloured plate marking is required according to 5.3.2, in
accordance with the table below once the tunnel restriction code to be assigned to the whole load
of the transport unit has been determined.
– 619 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 620 –
Tunnel restriction code
of the whole load
Restriction
B Passage forbidden through tunnels of category B, C, D and E
B1000C Carriage where the total net explosive mass per transport unit
– exceeds 1000 kg: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category
B, C, D and E;
– does not exceed 1000 kg: Passage forbidden through tunnels of
category C, D and E
B/D Tank carriage: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category B, C, D
and E;
Other carriage: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category D and E
B/E Tank carriage: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category B, C, D
and E;
Other carriage: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category E
C Passage forbidden through tunnels of category C, D and E
C5000D Carriage where the total net explosive mass per transport unit
– exceeds 5000 kg: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category
C, D and E;
– does not exceed 5000 kg: Passage forbidden through tunnels of
category D and E
C/D Tank carriage: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category C, D and
E;
Other carriage: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category D and E
C/E Tank carriage: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category C, D
and E;
Other carriage: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category E
D Passage forbidden through tunnels of category D and E
D/E Bulk or tank carriage: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category D
and E;
Other carriage: Passage forbidden through tunnels of category E
E Passage forbidden through tunnels of category E
– Passage allowed through all tunnels (For UN Nos. 2919 and 3331, see
also 8.6.3.1).
NOTE 1: For example, the passage of a transport unit carrying UN 0161, powder, smokeless,
classification code 1.3C, tunnel restriction code C5000D, in a quantity representing a total net
explosive mass of 3000 kg is forbidden in tunnels of categories D and E.
NOTE 2: Dangerous goods packed in limited quantities carried in containers or transport units
marked in accordance with the IMDG Code are not subject to the restrictions for passage through
tunnels of category E when the total gross mass of the packages containing dangerous goods packed in
limited quantities does not exceed 8 tonnes per transport unit.
– 620 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
PART 9
Requirements concerning the construction and
approval of vehiclesCopyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 623 –
CHAPTER 9.1
SCOPE, DEFINITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
FOR THE APPROVAL OF VEHICLES
9.1.1 Scope and definitions
9.1.1.1 Scope
The requirements of Part 9 shall apply to vehicles of categories N and O, as defined in the Consolidated
Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3)1, intended for the carriage of dangerous goods.
These requirements refer to vehicles, as regards their construction, type approval, ADR approval and
annual technical inspection.
9.1.1.2 Definitions
For the purposes of Part 9:
“Vehicle” means any vehicle, whether complete, incomplete or completed, intended for the carriage of
dangerous goods by road;
“EX/II vehicle” or “EX/III vehicle” means a vehicle intended for the carriage of explosive substances
and articles (Class 1);
“FL vehicle” means:
(a) A vehicle intended for the carriage of liquids having a flash-point of not more than 60 °C (with
the exception of diesel fuel complying with standard EN 590:2013 + A1:2017, gas oil, and
heating oil (light) – UN No. 1202 – with a flash-point as specified in standard EN 590:2013 +
A1:2017) in fixed tanks or demountable tanks with a capacity exceeding 1 m³ or in tank-
containers or portable tanks with an individual capacity exceeding 3 m³; or
(b) A vehicle intended for the carriage of flammable gases in fixed tanks or demountable tanks
with a capacity exceeding 1 m³ or in tank-containers, portable tanks or MEGCs with an
individual capacity exceeding 3 m³; or
(c) A battery-vehicle with a total capacity exceeding 1 m³ intended for the carriage of flammable
gases; or
(d) A vehicle intended for the carriage of hydrogen peroxide, stabilized or hydrogen peroxide,
aqueous solution stabilized with more than 60 % hydrogen peroxide (Class 5.1, UN No. 2015)
in fixed tanks or demountable tanks with a capacity exceeding 1 m³ or in tank-containers or
portable tanks with an individual capacity exceeding 3 m³;
“AT vehicle” means:
(a) A vehicle, other than EX/III or FL vehicle or than a MEMU, intended for the carriage of
dangerous goods in fixed tanks or demountable tanks with a capacity exceeding 1 m³ or in
tank-containers, portable tanks or MEGCs with an individual capacity exceeding 3 m³; or
(b) A battery-vehicle with a total capacity exceeding 1 m³ other than a FL vehicle;
“MEMU” means a vehicle meeting the definition of mobile explosives manufacturing unit in 1.2.1.
“Complete vehicle” means any vehicle which does not need any further completion (e.g. one stage built
vans, lorries, tractors, trailers);
“Incomplete vehicle” means any vehicle which still needs completion in at least one further stage (e.g.
chassis-cab, trailer chassis);
1 United Nations document ECE/TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.3.
– 623 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 624 –
“Completed vehicle” means any vehicle which is the result of a multi-stage process (e.g. chassis or
chassis-cab fitted with a bodywork);
“Type-approved vehicle” means any vehicle which has been approved in accordance with UN
Regulation No. 1052;
“ADR approval” means certification by a competent authority of a Contracting Party that a single vehicle
intended for the carriage of dangerous goods satisfies the relevant technical requirements of this Part as
an EX/II, EX/III, FL or AT vehicle or as a MEMU.
9.1.2 Approval of EX/II, EX/III, FL and AT vehicles and MEMUs
NOTE: No special certificates of approval shall be required for vehicles other than EX/II, EX/III, FL,
and AT vehicles and MEMUs, apart from those required by the general safety regulations normally
applicable to vehicles in the country of origin.
9.1.2.1 General
EX/II, EX/III, FL and AT vehicles and MEMUs shall comply with the relevant requirements of this
Part.
Every complete or completed vehicle shall be subjected to a first inspection by the competent authority
in accordance with the administrative requirements of this Chapter to verify conformity with the
relevant technical requirements of Chapters 9.2 to 9.8.
The competent authority may waive the first inspection for a tractor for a semi-trailer type-approved in
accordance with 9.1.2.2 for which the manufacturer, his duly accredited representative or a body
recognised by the competent authority has issued a declaration of conformity with the requirements of
Chapter 9.2.
The conformity of the vehicle shall be certified by the issue of a certificate of approval in accordance
with 9.1.3.
When vehicles are required to be fitted with an endurance braking system, the manufacturer of the
vehicle or his duly accredited representative shall issue a declaration of conformity with the relevant
prescriptions of Annex 5 of UN Regulation No. 133. This declaration shall be presented at the first
technical inspection.
9.1.2.2 Requirements for type-approved vehicles
At the request of the vehicle manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, vehicles subject to ADR
approval according to 9.1.2.1 may be type-approved by a competent authority. The relevant technical
requirements of Chapter 9.2 shall be considered to be fulfilled if a type approval certificate has been
issued by a competent authority in accordance with UN Regulation No. 1052 provided that the technical
requirements of the said Regulation correspond to those of Chapter 9.2 of this Part and provided that no
modification of the vehicle alters its validity. In the case of MEMUs, the type approval mark affixed in
accordance with UN Regulation No. 105 may identify the vehicle as either MEMU or EX/III. MEMUs
need only be identified as such on the certificate of approval issued in accordance with 9.1.3.
This type approval, granted by one Contracting Party, shall be accepted by the other Contracting Parties
as ensuring the conformity of the vehicle when the single vehicle is submitted for inspection for ADR
approval.
At the inspection for ADR approval, only those parts of the type-approved incomplete vehicle which
have been added or modified in the process of completion shall be inspected for compliance with the
applicable requirements of Chapter 9.2.
2 UN Regulation No. 105 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles intended for the carriage of
dangerous goods with regard to their specific constructional features).
3 UN Regulation No. 13 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles of categories M, N and O with
regards to braking).
– 624 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 625 –
9.1.2.3 Annual technical inspection
EX/II, EX/III, FL and AT vehicles and MEMUs shall be subject to an annual technical inspection in
their country of registration to make sure that they conform to the relevant requirements of this Part,
and to the general safety regulations (concerning brakes, lighting, etc.) in force in their country of
registration.
The conformity of the vehicle shall be certified either by the extension of validity of the certificate of
approval or by the issue of a new certificate of approval in accordance with 9.1.3.
9.1.3 Certificate of approval
9.1.3.1 Conformity of EX/II, EX/III, FL and AT vehicles and MEMUs with the requirements of this Part is
subject to a certificate of approval (certificate of ADR approval)4 issued by the competent authority of
the country of registration for each vehicle whose inspection yields satisfactory results or has resulted
in the issue of a declaration of conformity with the requirements of Chapter 9.2 in accordance with
9.1.2.1.
9.1.3.2 A certificate of approval issued by the competent authority of one Contracting Party for a vehicle
registered in the territory of that Contracting Party shall be accepted, so long as its validity continues,
by the competent authorities of the other Contracting Parties.
9.1.3.3 The certificate of approval shall have the same layout as the model shown in 9.1.3.5. Its dimensions
shall be 210 mm × 297 mm (format A4). Both front and back may be used. The colour shall be white,
with a pink diagonal stripe.
It shall be drawn up in the language or one of the languages of the country issuing it. If that language
is not English, French or German, the title of the certificate of approval and any remarks under No. 11
shall also be drawn up in English, French or German.
The certificate of approval for a vacuum-operated waste tank-vehicle shall bear the following remark:
“vacuum-operated waste tank-vehicle”.
The certificate for FL or EX/III vehicles in compliance with the requirements of 9.7.9 shall bear the
following remark under No. 11: “Vehicle in compliance with 9.7.9 of ADR”.
9.1.3.4 The validity of a certificate of approval shall expire not later than one year after the date of the technical
inspection of the vehicle preceding the issue of the certificate. The next approval term shall, however,
be related to the last nominal expiry date, if the technical inspection is performed within one month
before or after that date.
The vehicle shall not be used for the carriage of dangerous goods after the nominal expiry date until the
vehicle has a valid certificate of approval.
However, these provisions shall not mean that tank inspections have to be carried out at intervals shorter
than those laid down in Chapters 6.8, 6.10 or 6.13.
4 Guidelines for completing the certificate of approval may be consulted on the website of the secretariat of the
United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (https://unece.org/guidelines-telematics-application-standards-
construction-and-approval-vehicles-calculation-risks) .
– 625 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 626 –
9.1.3.5 Model for certificate of approval for vehicles carrying certain dangerous goods
CERTIFICATE OF APPROVAL FOR VEHICLES
CARRYING CERTAIN DANGEROUS GOODS
This certificate testifies that the vehicle specified below fulfils the conditions prescribed by the
Agreement concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR).
1. Certificate No.: 2. Vehicle manufacturer: 3. Vehicle Identification No.: 4. Registration number (if any):
5. Name and business address of carrier, operator or owner:
6. Description of vehicle: 1
7. Vehicle designation(s) according to 9.1.1.2 of ADR:2
EX/II EX/III FL AT MEMU
8. Endurance braking system: 3
□ Not applicable
□ The effectiveness according to 9.2.3.1.2 of ADR is sufficient for a total mass of the transport unit of ____t4
9. Description of the fixed tank(s)/battery-vehicle (if any):
9.1 Manufacturer of the tank:
9.2 Approval number of the tank/battery-vehicle:
9.3 Tank manufacturer’s serial number/Identification of elements of battery-vehicle:
9.4 Year of manufacture:
9.5 Tank code according to 4.3.3.1 or 4.3.4.1 of ADR:
9.6 Special provisions TC and TE according to 6.8.4 of ADR (if applicable)6:
10. Dangerous goods authorised for carriage:
The vehicle fulfils the conditions required for the carriage of dangerous goods assigned to the vehicle designation(s)
in No. 7.
10.1 In the case of an EX/II
or EX/III vehicle 3
□ goods of Class 1 including compatibility group J
�□ goods of Class 1 excluding compatibility group J
10.2 In the case of a tank-vehicle/battery-vehicle 3
□ only the substances permitted under the tank code and any special provisions specified in No. 9 may be
carried5
or
□ only the following substances (Class, UN number, and if necessary packing group and proper shipping
name) may be carried:
Only substances which are not liable to react dangerously with the materials of the shell, gaskets, equipment and
protective linings (if applicable) may be carried.
11. Remarks:
12. Valid until: Stamp of issuing service
Place, Date, Signature
1 According to the definitions for power-driven vehicles and for trailers of categories N and O as defined in the
Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3) or in Directive 2007/46/EC.
2 Strike out what is not appropriate.
3 Mark the appropriate.
4 Enter appropriate value. A value of 44t will not limit the “registration / in-service maximum permissible mass”
indicated in the registration document(s).
5 Substances assigned to the tank code specified in No. 9 or to another tank code permitted under the hierarchy
in 4.3.3.1.2 or 4.3.4.1.2, taking account of the special provision(s), if any.
6 Not required when the authorized substances are listed in No. 10.2.
– 626 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 627 –
13. Extensions of validity
Validity extended until Stamp of issuing service, place, date, signature:
NOTE: This certificate shall be returned to the issuing service when the vehicle is taken out of service; if the vehicle
is transferred to another carrier, operator or owner, as specified in No. 5; on expiry of the validity of the certificate;
and if there is a material change in one or more essential characteristics of the vehicle.
– 627 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 629 –
CHAPTER 9.2
REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE CONSTRUCTION
OF VEHICLES
9.2.1 Compliance with the requirements of this Chapter
9.2.1.1 EX/II, EX/III, FL and AT vehicles shall comply with the requirements of this Chapter, according to the
table below.
For vehicles other than of EX/II, EX/III, FL and AT:
– the requirements of 9.2.3.1.1 (Braking equipment in accordance with UN Regulation No. 13 or
Directive 71/320/EEC) are applicable to all vehicles first registered (or which entered into
service if the registration is not mandatory) after 30 June 1997;
– the requirements of 9.2.5 (Speed limitation device in accordance with UN Regulation No. 89 or
Directive 92/24/EEC) are applicable to all motor vehicles with a maximum mass exceeding 12
tonnes first registered after 31 December 1987 and all motor vehicles with a
maximum mass exceeding 3.5 tonnes but not more than 12 tonnes first registered
after 31 December 2007.
– 629 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
VEHICLES COMMENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS EX/II EX/III AT FL
9.2.2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
9.2.2.1 General provisions X X X X
9.2.2.2.1 Cables X X X X
9.2.2.2.2 Additional protection Xa X X b X a Applicable to vehicles with a maximum mass exceeding 3.5 tonnes first registered (or
which entered into service if registration is not mandatory) after 31 March 2018.
b Applicable for vehicles first registered (or which entered into service if registration is
not mandatory) after 31 March 2018.
9.2.2.3 Fuses and circuit breakers Xb X X X b Applicable to vehicles first registered (or which entered into service if registration is
not mandatory) after 31 March 2018.
9.2.2.4 Batteries X X X X
9.2.2.5 Lighting X X X X
9.2.2.6 Electrical connections between motor
vehicles and trailers
X c X X b X b Applicable to vehicles first registered (or which entered into service if registration is
not mandatory) after 31 March 2018.
c Applicable to motor vehicles intended to draw trailers with a maximum mass
exceeding 3.5 tonnes and trailers with a maximum mass exceeding 3.5 tonnes first
registered (or which entered into service if registration is not mandatory) after 31
March 2018.
9.2.2.7 Voltage X X
9.2.2.8 Battery master switch X X
9.2.2.9 Permanently energized circuits
9.2.2.9.1 X
9.2.2.9.2 X
– 630 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
VEHICLES COMMENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS EX/II EX/III AT FL
9.2.3 BRAKING EQUIPMENT
9.2.3.1 General provisions X X X X
Anti-lock braking system X e X d,e X d,e X d,e d Applicable to motor vehicles (tractors and rigid vehicles) with a maximum mass
exceeding 16 tonnes and motor vehicles authorized to tow trailers (i.e. full-trailers,
semi-trailers and centre axle-trailers) with a maximum mass exceeding 10 tonnes.
Motor vehicles shall be equipped with a category 1 anti-lock braking system.
Applicable to trailers (i.e. full-trailers, semi-trailers and centre axle-trailers) with a
maximum mass exceeding 10 tonnes. Trailers shall be equipped with a category A
anti-lock braking system.
e Applicable to all motor vehicles and applicable to trailers with a maximum mass
exceeding 3.5 tonnes, first registered (or which entered into service if registration is
not mandatory) after 31 March 2018.
Endurance braking system X f X g X g X g f Applicable to motor vehicles with a maximum mass exceeding 16 tonnes or
authorized to tow a trailer with a maximum mass exceeding 10 tonnes first registered
after 31 March 2018. The endurance braking system shall be of type IIA.
g Applicable to motor vehicles with a maximum mass exceeding 16 tonnes or
authorized to tow a trailer with a maximum mass exceeding 10 tonnes. The endurance
braking system shall be of type IIA.
9.2.4 PREVENTION OF FIRE RISKS
9.2.4.3 Fuel tanks and cylinders X X X
9.2.4.4 Engine X X X
9.2.4.5 Exhaust system X X X
9.2.4.6 Electric power train X
9.2.4.7 Vehicle endurance braking X f X X X f Applicable to motor vehicles with a maximum mass exceeding 16 tonnes or
authorized to tow a trailer with a maximum mass exceeding 10 tonnes first registered
after 31 March 2018. The endurance braking system shall be of type IIA.
9.2.4.8 Combustion heaters
9.2.4.8.1
9.2.4.8.2
9.2.4.8.5
X h X h X h X h h Applicable to motor vehicles equipped after 30 June 1999. Mandatory compliance by
1 January 2010 for vehicles equipped before 1 July 1999. If the date of equipping is
not available the date of first registration of the vehicle shall be used instead.
9.2.4.8.3
9.2.4.8.4
X h h Applicable to motor vehicles equipped after 30 June 1999. Mandatory compliance by
1 January 2010 for vehicles equipped before 1 July 1999. If the date of equipping is
not available the date of first registration of the vehicle shall be used instead.
– 631 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
VEHICLES COMMENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS EX/II EX/III AT FL
9.2.4.8.6 X X
9.2.5 SPEED LIMITATION DEVICE X i X i X i X i i Applicable to motor vehicles with a maximum mass exceeding 12 tonnes first
registered after 31 December 1987, and all motor vehicles with a maximum mass
exceeding 3.5 tonnes but not more than 12 tonnes first registered after 31 December
2007.
9.2.6 COUPLING DEVICES OF
MOTOR VEHICLES AND
TRAILERS
X X X j X j j Applicable to coupling devices of motor vehicles and trailers first registered (or which
entered into service if registration is not mandatory) after 31 March 2018.
9.2.7 PREVENTION OF OTHER RISKS
CAUSED BY FUELS
X X
– 632 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 633 –
9.2.1.2 MEMUs shall comply with the requirements of this Chapter applicable to EX/III-vehicles.
9.2.2 Electrical equipment
9.2.2.1 General provisions
The installation shall be so designed, constructed and protected that it cannot provoke any unintended
ignition or short circuit under normal conditions of use of vehicles.
The electrical installation , with the exception of the electric power train in compliance with the technical
provisions of UN Regulation No. 1001, as amended at least by the 03 series of amendments, shall meet
the provisions of 9.2.2.2 to 9.2.2.9 in accordance with the table of 9.2.1.
9.2.2.2 Wiring
9.2.2.2.1 Cables
No cable in an electrical circuit shall carry a current in excess of that for which the cable is designed.
Conductors shall be adequately insulated.
The cables shall be suitable for the conditions in the area of the vehicle, such as temperature range and
fluid compatibility conditions as they are intended to be used.
The cables shall be in conformity with standard ISO 6722-1:2011 + Cor 01:2012, ISO 6722-2:2013,
ISO 19642-3:2019, ISO 19642-4:2019, ISO 19642-5:2019 or ISO 19642-6:2019.
Cables shall be securely fastened and positioned to be protected against mechanical and thermal stresses.
9.2.2.2.2 Additional protection
Cables located to the rear of the driver’s cab and on trailers shall be additionally protected to minimize
any unintended ignition or short-circuit in the event of an impact or deformation.
The additional protection shall be suitable for the conditions during normal use of the vehicle.
The additional protection is complied with if multicore cables in conformity with ISO 14572:2011“,
ISO 19642-7:2019, ISO 19642-8, ISO 19642-9 or ISO 19642:10:2019 are used or one of the examples
in figures 9.2.2.2.2.1 to 9.2.2.2.2.4 below or another configuration that offers equally effective
protection.
1 UN Regulation No. 100 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to specific
requirements for the electric power train).
– 633 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 634 –
Cables of wheel speed sensors do not need additional protection.
EX/II vehicles being one stage built panel vans where the wiring behind the driver’s cab is protected by
the body are deemed to comply with this requirement.
9.2.2.3 Fuses and circuit breakers
All circuits shall be protected by fuses or automatic circuit breakers, except for the following:
– From the starter battery to the cold start system;
– From the starter battery to the alternator;
– From the alternator to the fuse or circuit breaker box;
Figure 9.2.2.2.2.1
Figure 9.2.2.2.2.2
Figure 9.2.2.2.2.3
Figure 9.2.2.2.2.4
Corrugated polyamide conduit
Corrugated polyamide conduit
Polyurethane sheath With inner sheath
Outer layer
Metal-threaded protection
Inner layer
Separate
insulated
wires
Separate
insulated
wires
Separate
insulated
wires
Insulating sheath
Separate
insulated
wires
– 634 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 635 –
– From the starter battery to the starter motor;
– From the starter battery to the power control housing of the endurance braking system (see 9.2.3.1.2),
if this system is electrical or electromagnetic;
– From the starter battery to the electrical lifting mechanism for lifting the bogie axle.
The above unprotected circuits shall be as short as possible.
9.2.2.4 Batteries
Battery terminals shall be electrically insulated or the battery shall be covered by an insulating cover.
Batteries which may develop ignitable gas and are not located under the engine bonnet, shall be fitted
in a vented box.
9.2.2.5 Lighting
Light sources with a screw cap shall not be used.
9.2.2.6 Electrical connections between motor vehicles and trailers
9.2.2.6.1 Electrical connections shall be designed to prevent:
– Ingress of moisture and dirt; the connected parts shall have a protection degree of at least IP 54 in
accordance with IEC 60529;
– Accidental disconnection; connectors shall fulfil the requirements given in clause 5.6 of
ISO 4091:2003.
9.2.2.6.2 Requirements of 9.2.2.6.1 are deemed to be met:
– for connectors standardized for specific purposes according to ISO 12098:20042, ISO 7638:20032,
EN 15207:2014 or ISO 25981:20082;
– where the electrical connections are part of an automatic coupling system (see UN Regulation
No.553).
9.2.2.6.3 Electrical connections for other purposes concerning the proper functioning of the vehicles or their
equipment may be used provided they comply with the requirements of 9.2.2.6.1.
9.2.2.7 Voltage
The nominal voltage of the electrical system shall not exceed 25 V A.C. or 60 V D.C.
Higher voltages are allowed in galvanically isolated parts of the electrical system provided those parts
are not located within a perimeter of at least 0.5 metres from the outside of the load compartment or
tank.
Additionally systems working on a voltage higher than 1000 V A.C. or 1500 V D.C. shall be integrated
in an enclosed housing.
If Xenon lights are used only those having integrated starters are allowed.
9.2.2.8 Battery master switch
9.2.2.8.1 A switch for breaking the electrical circuits shall be placed as close to the battery as practicable. If a
single pole switch is used it shall be placed in the supply lead and not in the earth lead.
9.2.2.8.2 A control device to facilitate the disconnecting and reconnecting functions of the switch shall be
installed in the driver’s cab. It shall be readily accessible to the driver and be distinctively marked. It
shall be protected against inadvertent operation by either adding a protective cover, by using a dual
2 ISO 4009, referred to in this standard, need not be applied.
3 UN Regulation No. 55 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of
combinations of vehicles).
– 635 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 636 –
movement control device or by other suitable means. Additional control devices may be installed
provided they are distinctively marked and protected against inadvertent operation. If the control
device(s) are electrically operated, the circuits of the control device(s) are subject to the requirements
of 9.2.2.9.
9.2.2.8.3 The switch shall break the circuits within 10 seconds after activation of the control device.
9.2.2.8.4 The switch shall have a casing with protection degree IP 65 in accordance with IEC Standard 60529.
9.2.2.8.5 The cable connections on the switch shall have protection degree IP 54 in accordance with IEC 60529.
However, this does not apply if these connections are contained in a housing which may be the battery
box. In this case it is sufficient to insulate the connections against short circuits, for example with a
rubber cap.
9.2.2.9 Permanently energized circuits
9.2.2.9.1 (a) Those parts of the electrical installation including the leads which shall remain energized when
the battery master switch is open, shall be suitable for use in hazardous areas. Such equipment
shall meet the general requirements of IEC 60079, parts 0 and 144 and the additional
requirements applicable from IEC 60079, parts 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 11, 15, 18, 26 or 28;
(b) For the application of IEC 60079 part 144, the following classification shall be used:
Permanently energized electrical equipment including the leads which is not subject to 9.2.2.4
and 9.2.2.8 shall meet the requirements for Zone 1 for electrical equipment in general or meet
the requirements for Zone 2 for electrical equipment situated in the driver’s cab. The
requirements for explosion group IIC, temperature class T6 shall be met.
However, for permanently energized electrical equipment installed in an environment where
the temperature caused by non-electrical equipment situated in that environment exceeds
the T6 temperature limit, the temperature classification of the permanently energized electrical
equipment shall be at least that of the T4 temperature class.
(c) The supply leads for permanently energised equipment shall either comply with the provisions
of IEC 60079, part 7 (“Increased safety”) and be protected by a fuse or automatic circuit breaker
placed as close to the source of power as practicable or, in the case of “intrinsically safe
equipment”, they shall be protected by a safety barrier placed as close to the source of power
as practicable.
9.2.2.9.2 Bypass connections to the battery master switch for electrical equipment which must remain energized
when the battery master switch is open shall be protected against overheating by suitable means, such
as a fuse, a circuit breaker or a safety barrier (current limiter).
9.2.3 Braking equipment
9.2.3.1 General provisions
9.2.3.1.1 Motor vehicles and trailers intended for use as transport units for dangerous goods shall fulfil all relevant
technical requirements of UN Regulation No.135, as amended, in accordance with the dates of
application specified therein. Vehicles equipped with an electric regenerative braking system shall fulfil
all relevant technical requirements of UN Regulation No. 135, as amended at least by the 11 series of
amendments, as applicable.
9.2.3.1.2 EX/II, EX/III, FL and AT vehicles shall fulfil the requirements of UN Regulation No.135, Annex 5.
9.2.3.2 (Deleted)
4 The requirements of IEC 60079 part 14 do not take precedence over the requirement of this Part.
5 UN Regulation No. 13 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles of categories M, N and O with
regard to braking).
– 636 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 637 –
9.2.4 Prevention of fire risks
9.2.4.1 General provisions
The following technical provisions shall apply in accordance with the table of 9.2.1.
9.2.4.2 (Deleted)
9.2.4.3 Fuel tanks and cylinders
NOTE: 9.2.4.3 likewise applies to fuel tanks and cylinders used for hybrid vehicles which include an
electric power train in the mechanical driveline of the internal combustion engine or use an internal
combustion engine to drive a generator to energize the electric power train.
The fuel tanks and cylinders supplying the engine of the vehicle shall meet the following requirements:
(a) In the event of any leakage under normal conditions of carriage, the liquid fuel or the liquid
phase of a gaseous fuel shall drain to the ground and not come into contact with the load or hot
parts of the vehicle;
(b) Fuel tanks for liquid fuels shall meet the requirements of UN Regulation No. 346; fuel tanks
containing petrol shall be equipped with an effective flame trap at the filler opening or with a
closure enabling the opening to be kept hermetically sealed. Fuel tanks and cylinders for LNG
and for CNG respectively shall meet the relevant requirements of UN Regulation No. 1107. Fuel
tanks for LPG shall meet the relevant requirements of UN Regulation No. 678.
(c) The discharge opening(s) of pressure relief devices and/or pressure relief valves of fuel tanks
containing gaseous fuels shall be directed away from air intakes, fuel tanks, the load or hot parts
of the vehicle and shall not impinge on enclosed areas, other vehicles, exterior-mounted systems
with air intake (i.e. air-conditioning systems), engine intakes, or engine exhaust. Pipes of the
fuel system shall not be fixed on the shell containing the load.
9.2.4.4 Engine
NOTE: 9.2.4.4 likewise applies to hybrid vehicles which include an electric power train in the
mechanical driveline of the internal combustion engine or use an internal combustion engine to drive a
generator to energize the electric power train.
The engine propelling the vehicle shall be so equipped and situated to avoid any danger to the load
through heating or ignition. The use of CNG or LNG as fuel shall be permitted only if the specific
components for CNG and LNG are approved according to UN Regulation No. 1107 and meet the
provisions of 9.2.2. The installation on the vehicle shall meet the technical requirements of 9.2.2 and
UN Regulation No. 1107. The use of LPG as fuel shall be permitted only if the specific components for
LPG are approved according to UN Regulation No. 678 and meet the provisions of 9.2.2. The installation
on the vehicle shall meet the technical requirements of 9.2.2 and UN Regulation No. 678. In the case of
EX/II and EX/III vehicles the engine shall be of compression-ignition construction using only liquid
fuels with a flashpoint above 55 °C. Gases shall not be used.
6 UN Regulation No. 34 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the prevention of
fire risks)
7 UN Regulation No. 110 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of:
I. Specific components of motor vehicles using compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas
(LNG) in their propulsion systems;
II. Vehicles with regard to the installation of specific components of an approved type for the use of
compressed natural gas (CNG) and/or liquefied natural gas (LNG) in their propulsion system).
8 UN Regulation No. 67 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of:
I. Approval of specific equipment of vehicles of category M and N using liquefied petroleum gases in their
propulsion system
II. Approval of vehicles of category M and N fitted with specific equipment for the use of liquefied petroleum
gases in their propulsion system with regard to the installation of such equipment)
– 637 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 638 –
9.2.4.5 Exhaust system
The exhaust system (including the exhaust pipes) shall be so directed or protected to avoid any danger
to the load through heating or ignition. Parts of the exhaust system situated directly below the fuel tank
(diesel) shall have a clearance of at least 100 mm or be protected by a thermal shield.
9.2.4.6 Electric power train
NOTE: 9.2.4.6 likewise applies to hybrid vehicles that include an electric power train in the
mechanical driveline of an internal combustion engine. Electric power trains shall not be used for EX
and FL vehicles.
The electric power train shall meet the requirements of UN Regulation No. 1001, as amended at least
by the 03 series of amendments. Measures shall be taken to prevent any danger to the load by heating
or ignition.
9.2.4.7 Vehicle endurance braking
Vehicles equipped with endurance braking systems emitting high temperatures placed behind the rear
wall of the driver’s cab shall be equipped with a thermal shield securely fixed and located between this
system and the tank or load so as to avoid any heating, even local, of the tank wall or the load.
In addition, the thermal shield shall protect the braking system against any outflow or leakage, even
accidental, of the load. For instance, a protection including a twin-shell shield shall be considered
satisfactory.
9.2.4.8 Combustion heaters
9.2.4.8.1 Combustion heaters shall comply with the relevant technical requirements of UN Regulation No. 1229,
as amended, in accordance with the dates of application specified therein and the provisions of 9.2.4.8.2
to 9.2.4.8.6 applicable according to the table in 9.2.1.
9.2.4.8.2 The combustion heaters and their exhaust gas routing shall be designed, located, protected or covered
so as to prevent any unacceptable risk of heating or ignition of the load. This requirement shall be
considered as fulfilled if the fuel tank and the exhaust system of the appliance conform to provisions
similar to those prescribed for fuel tanks and exhaust systems of vehicles in 9.2.4.3 and 9.2.4.5
respectively.
9.2.4.8.3 The combustion heaters shall be put out of operation by at least the following methods:
(a) Intentional manual switching off from the driver’s cab;
(b) Stopping of the vehicle engine; in this case the heating device may be restarted manually by the
driver;
(c) Start up of a feed pump on the motor vehicle for the dangerous goods carried.
9.2.4.8.4 Afterrunning is permitted after the combustion heaters have been put out of operation. For the methods
of 9.2.4.8.3 (b) and (c) the supply of combustion air shall be interrupted by suitable measures after an
afterrunning cycle of not more than 40 seconds. Only heaters shall be used for which proof has been
furnished that the heat exchanger is resistant to the reduced afterrunning cycle of 40 seconds for the
time of their normal use.
9.2.4.8.5 The combustion heater shall be switched on manually. Programming devices shall be prohibited.
9.2.4.8.6 Combustion heaters with gaseous fuels are not permitted.
1 UN Regulation No. 100 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to specific
requirements for the electric power train).
9 UN Regulation No. 122 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles of categories M, N and O with
regard to their heating systems)
– 638 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 639 –
9.2.5 Speed limitation device
Motor vehicles (rigid vehicles and tractors for semi-trailers) with a maximum mass exceeding 3.5
tonnes, shall be equipped with a speed limitation device or function according to the technical
requirements of UN Regulation No. 8910, as amended. The device or function shall be set in such a way
that the speed cannot exceed 90 km/h.
9.2.6 Coupling devices of motor vehicles and trailers
Coupling devices of motor vehicles and trailers shall comply with the technical requirements of UN
Regulation No. 553 as amended, in accordance with the dates of application specified therein.
9.2.7 Prevention of other risks caused by fuels
9.2.7.1 Fuel systems for engines fuelled by LNG shall be so equipped and situated to avoid any danger to the
load due to the gas being refrigerated.
10 UN Regulation No.89 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of:
I. Vehicles with regard to limitation of their maximum speed or their adjustable speed limitation function
II. Vehicles with regard to the installation of a speed limiting device (SLD) or adjustable speed limitation
device (ASLD) of an approved type
III. Speed limitation devices (SLD) and adjustable speed limitation device (ASLD))
3 UN Regulation No. 55 (Uniform provisions concerning the approval of mechanical coupling components of
combinations of vehicles).
– 639 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 641 –
CHAPTER 9.3
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING COMPLETE OR
COMPLETED EX/II OR EX/III VEHICLES INTENDED FOR THE CARRIAGE OF
EXPLOSIVE SUBSTANCES AND ARTICLES (CLASS 1) IN PACKAGES
9.3.1 Materials to be used in the construction of vehicle bodies
No materials likely to form dangerous compounds with the explosive substances carried shall be used
in the construction of the body.
9.3.2 Combustion heaters
9.3.2.1 Combustion heaters may only be installed on EX/II and EX/III vehicles for heating of the driver’s cab
or the engine.
9.3.2.2 Combustion heaters shall meet the requirements of 9.2.4.8.1, 9.2.4.8.2, 9.2.4.8.5 and 9.2.4.8.6.
9.3.2.3 The switch of the combustion heater may be installed outside the driver’s cab.
It is not necessary to prove that the heat exchanger is resistant to the reduced afterrunning cycle.
9.3.2.4 No combustion heaters or fuel tanks, power sources, combustion air or heating air intakes as well as
exhaust tube outlets required for the operation of the combustion heater shall be installed in the load
compartment.
9.3.3 EX/II vehicles
The vehicles shall be designed, constructed and equipped so that the explosives are protected from
external hazards and the weather. They shall be either closed or sheeted. Sheeting shall be resistant to
tearing and be of impermeable material, not readily flammable1. It shall be tautened so as to cover the
loading area on all sides.
All openings in the load compartment of closed vehicles shall have lockable, close-fitting doors or rigid
covers. The driver’s compartment shall be separated from the load compartment by a continuous wall.
9.3.4 EX/III vehicles
9.3.4.1 The vehicles shall be designed, constructed and equipped so that the explosives are protected from
external hazards and the weather. These vehicles shall be closed. The driver’s compartment shall be
separated from the load compartment by a continuous wall. The loading surface shall be continuous.
Load restraint anchorage points may be installed. All joints shall be sealed. All openings shall be capable
of being locked. They shall be so constructed and placed as to overlap at the joints.
9.3.4.2 The body shall be made from heat and flame resistant materials with a minimum thickness of 10 mm.
Materials classified as Class B-s3-d2 according to standard EN 13501-1:2007 + A1:2009 are deemed
to fulfil this requirement.
If the material used for the body is metal, the complete inside of the body shall be covered with materials
fulfilling the same requirement.
1 In the case of flammability, this requirement will be deemed to be met if, in accordance with the procedure
specified in ISO standard 3795:1989 ‘Road vehicles, and tractors and machinery for agriculture and forestry –
Determination of burning behaviour of interior materials’, samples of the sheeting have a burn rate not exceeding 100
mm/min.
– 641 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 642 –
9.3.5 Engine and load compartment
The engine propelling an EX/II or EX/III vehicle shall be placed forward of the front wall of the load
compartment; it may nevertheless be placed under the load compartment, provided this is done in such
a way that any excess heat does not constitute a hazard to the load by raising the temperature on the
inner surface of the load compartment above 80 °C.
9.3.6 External heat sources and load compartment
The exhaust system of EX/II and EX/III vehicles or others parts of these complete or completed vehicles
shall be so constructed and situated that any excess heat shall not constitute a hazard to the load by
raising the temperature on the inner surface of the load compartment above 80 °C.
9.3.7 Electrical equipment
9.3.7.1 The electrical installation shall meet the relevant requirements of 9.2.2.1, 9.2.2.2 9.2.2.3, 9.2.2.4,
9.2.2.5, 9.2.2.6, 9.2.2.7, 9.2.2.8 and 9.2.2.9.2.
9.3.7.2 The electrical installation in the load compartment shall be dust-protected at least IP 54 according to
IEC 60529 or equivalent. In the case of carriage of items and articles of compatibility group J, protection
to at least IP 65 according to IEC 60529 or equivalent shall be provided.
9.3.7.3 No wiring shall be positioned inside the load compartment. Electrical equipment accessible from the
inside of the load compartment shall be sufficiently protected from mechanical impact from the inside.
– 642 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 643 –
CHAPTER 9.4
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE
BODIES OF COMPLETE OR COMPLETED VEHICLES INTENDED FOR THE
CARRIAGE OF DANGEROUS GOODS IN PACKAGES (OTHER THAN EX/II AND
EX/III VEHICLES)
9.4.1 Combustion heaters shall meet the following requirements:
(a) The switch may be installed outside the driver’s cab;
(b) The device may be switched off from outside the load compartment; and
(c) It is not necessary to prove that the heat exchanger is resistant to the reduced afterrunning cycle.
9.4.2 If the vehicle is intended for the carriage of dangerous goods for which a label conforming to models
Nos. 1, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 3, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1 or 5.2 is prescribed, no fuel tanks, power sources, combustion air
or heating air intakes as well as exhaust tube outlets required for the operation of the combustion heater
shall be installed in the load compartment. It shall be ensured that the heating air outlet cannot be
blocked by cargo. The temperature to which packages are heated shall not exceed 50º C. Heating devices
installed inside the load compartments shall be designed so as to prevent the ignition of an explosive
atmosphere under operating conditions.
9.4.3 Additional requirements concerning the construction of the bodies of vehicles intended for the carriage
of given dangerous goods or specific packagings may be included in Part 7, Chapter 7.2 in accordance
with the indications in Column (16) of Table A of Chapter 3.2, for a given substance.
– 643 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 645 –
CHAPTER 9.5
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE CONSTRUCTION OF
THE BODIES OF COMPLETE OR COMPLETED VEHICLES INTENDED
FOR THE CARRIAGE OF DANGEROUS SOLIDS IN BULK
9.5.1 Combustion heaters shall meet the following requirements:
(a) The switch may be installed outside the driver’s cab;
(b) The device may be switched off from outside the load compartment; and
(c) It is not necessary to prove that the heat exchanger is resistant to the reduced afterrunning cycle.
9.5.2 If the vehicle is intended for the carriage of dangerous goods for which a label conforming to models
Nos. 4.1, 4.3 or 5.1 is prescribed, no fuel tanks, power sources, combustion air or heating air intakes as
well as exhaust tube outlets required for the operation of the combustion heater shall be installed in the
load compartment. It shall be ensured that the heating air outlet cannot be blocked by cargo. The
temperature to which the load is heated shall not exceed 50 °C. Heating devices installed inside the load
compartments shall be designed so as to prevent the ignition of an explosive atmosphere under operating
conditions.
9.5.3 The bodies of vehicles intended for the carriage of dangerous solids in bulk shall meet the requirements
of Chapter 6.11 and 7.3, as appropriate, including those of 7.3.2 or 7.3.3 which may be applicable in
accordance with the indications in columns (10) or (17) respectively of Table A of Chapter 3.2 for a
given substance.
– 645 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 647 –
CHAPTER 9.6
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING COMPLETE OR
COMPLETED VEHICLES INTENDED FOR THE CARRIAGE OF TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLED SUBSTANCES
9.6.1 Insulated, refrigerated and mechanically-refrigerated vehicles intended for the carriage of temperature
controlled substances shall conform to the following conditions:
(a) the vehicle shall be such and so equipped as regards its insulation and means of refrigeration,
that the control temperature prescribed in 2.2.41.1.17 and 2.2.52.1.15 and in 2.2.41.4 and
2.2.52.4 for the substance to be carried is not exceeded. The overall heat transfer coefficient shall
be not more than 0.4 W/m²K;
(b) the vehicle shall be so equipped that vapours from the substances or the coolant carried cannot
penetrate into the driver’s cab;
(c) a suitable device shall be provided enabling the temperature prevailing in the loading space to
be determined at any time from the cab;
(d) the loading space shall be provided with vents or ventilating valves if there is any risk of a
dangerous excess pressure arising therein. Care shall be taken where necessary to ensure that
refrigeration is not impaired by the vents or ventilating valves;
(e) the refrigerant shall not be flammable; and
(f) the refrigerating appliance of a mechanically refrigerated vehicle shall be capable of operating
independently of the engine used to propel the vehicle.
9.6.2 Suitable methods to prevent the control temperature from being exceeded are listed in 7.1.7.4.5.
Depending on the method used, additional provisions concerning the construction of vehicle bodies may
be included in Chapter 7.2.
– 647 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 649 –
CHAPTER 9.7
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING FIXED TANKS (TANK-VEHICLES),
BATTERY-VEHICLES AND COMPLETE OR COMPLETED VEHICLES USED FOR
THE CARRIAGE OF DANGEROUS GOODS IN DEMOUNTABLE TANKS WITH A
CAPACITY GREATER THAN 1 m³ OR IN TANK-CONTAINERS, PORTABLE TANKS
OR MEGCs OF A CAPACITY GREATER THAN 3 m³ (EX/III, FL AND AT VEHICLES)
9.7.1 General provisions
9.7.1.1 In addition to the vehicle proper, or the units of running gear used in its stead, a tank-vehicle comprises
one or more shells, their items of equipment and the fittings for attaching them to the vehicle or to the
running-gear units.
9.7.1.2 Once the demountable tank has been attached to the carrier vehicle, the entire unit shall meet the
requirements prescribed for tank-vehicles.
9.7.2 Requirements concerning tanks
9.7.2.1 Fixed tanks or demountable tanks made of metal shall meet the relevant requirements of Chapter 6.8.
9.7.2.2 Elements of battery-vehicles and of MEGCs shall meet the relevant requirements of Chapter 6.2 in the
case of cylinders, tubes, pressure drums and bundles of cylinders and the requirements of Chapter 6.8
in the case of tanks.
9.7.2.3 Tank-containers made of metal shall meet the requirements of Chapter 6.8, portable tanks shall meet
the requirements of Chapter 6.7 or, if applicable, those of the IMDG Code (see 1.1.4.2).
9.7.2.4 Tanks made of fibre-reinforced plastics material shall meet the requirements of Chapter 6.9 or Chapter
6.13, as appropriate.
9.7.2.5 Vacuum-operated waste tanks shall meet the requirements of Chapter 6.10.
9.7.3 Fastening
9.7.3.1 Fastenings shall be designed to withstand static and dynamic stresses in normal conditions of carriage.
Fastenings also include any supporting frames used for mounting the structural equipment (see
definition in 1.2.1) to the vehicle.
9.7.3.2 Fastenings in the case of tank-vehicles, battery-vehicles and vehicles carrying tank-containers,
demountable tanks, portable tanks, MEGCs or UN MEGCs shall be capable of absorbing, under the
maximum permissible load, the following separately applied static forces:
– In the direction of travel: twice the total mass multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1;
– Horizontally, at right angles to the direction of travel: the total mass multiplied by the
acceleration due to gravity (g)1;
– Vertically upwards: the total mass multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1;
– Vertically downwards: twice the total mass multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity (g)1.
NOTE: The requirements of this paragraph do not apply to twist lock tie-down devices in compliance
with ISO 1161:2016 “Series 1 freight containers — Corner and intermediate fittings – Specifications”.
However, the requirements apply to any frames or other devices used for support of such fastenings on
the vehicle.
9.7.3.3 For tank-vehicles, battery-vehicles and vehicles carrying demountable tanks, the fastenings shall
withstand the minimum stresses as defined in 6.8.2.1.11 to 6.8.2.1.13, 6.8.2.1.15 and 6.8.2.1.16.
1 For calculation purposes g = 9.81 m/s2.
– 649 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 650 –
9.7.4 Electrical bonding of FL vehicles
Tanks made of metal or of fibre-reinforced plastics material of FL tank-vehicles and battery elements
of FL battery-vehicles shall be linked to the chassis by means of at least one good electrical connection.
Any metal contact capable of causing electrochemical corrosion shall be avoided.
NOTE: See also 6.13.1.2 and 6.13.2.14.3.
9.7.5 Stability of tank-vehicles
9.7.5.1 The overall width of the ground-level bearing surface (distance between the outer points of contact with
the ground of the right-hand tyre and the left-hand tyre of the same axle) of the axle with greatest width
shall be at least equal to 90 % of the height of the centre of gravity of the laden tank-vehicle. In an
articulated vehicle the mass on the axles of the load-carrying unit of the laden semi-trailer shall not
exceed 60 % of the nominal total laden mass of the complete articulated vehicle.
9.7.5.2 In addition, tank-vehicles with fixed tanks with a capacity of more than 3 m³ intended for the carriage
of dangerous goods in the liquid or molten state tested with a pressure of less than 4 bar, shall comply
with the technical requirements of UN Regulation No. 1112 for lateral stability, as amended, in
accordance with the dates of application specified therein. The requirements are applicable to tank-
vehicles which are first registered as from 1 July 2003.
9.7.6 Rear protection of vehicles
A bumper sufficiently resistant to rear impact shall be fitted over the full width of the tank at the rear of
the vehicle. There shall be a clearance of at least 100 mm between the rear wall of the tank and the rear
of the bumper (this clearance being measured from the rearmost point of the tank wall or from projecting
fittings or accessories in contact with the substance being carried). Vehicles with a tilting shell for the
carriage of powdery or granular substances and a vacuum-operated waste tank with a tilting shell with
rear discharge do not require a bumper if the rear fittings of the shell are provided with a means of
protection which protects the shell in the same way as a bumper.
NOTE 1: This provision does not apply to vehicles used for the carriage of dangerous goods in
tank-containers, MEGCs or portable tanks.
NOTE 2: For the protection of tanks against damage by lateral impact or overturning, see 6.8.2.1.20
and 6.8.2.1.21 or, for portable tanks, 6.7.2.4.3 and 6.7.2.4.5.
9.7.7 Combustion heaters
9.7.7.1 Combustion heaters shall meet the requirements of 9.2.4.8.1, 9.2.4.8.2, 9.2.4.8.5 and the following:
(a) The switch may be installed outside the driver’s cab;
(b) The device may be switched off from outside the load compartment; and
(c) It is not necessary to prove that the heat exchanger is resistant to the reduced afterrunning cycle.
In addition for FL vehicles, they shall meet the requirements of 9.2.4.8.3 and 9.2.4.8.4.
9.7.7.2 If the vehicle is intended for the carriage of dangerous goods for which a label conforming to models
Nos. 1.5, 3, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1 or 5.2 is prescribed, no fuel tanks, power sources, combustion air or heating air
intakes as well as exhaust tube outlets required for the operation of the combustion heater shall be
installed in the load compartment. It shall be ensured that the heating air outlet cannot be blocked by
cargo. The temperature to which the load is heated shall not exceed 50 °C. Heating devices installed
inside the load compartments shall be designed so as to prevent the ignition of an explosive atmosphere
under operating conditions.
2 UN Regulation No. 111: Uniform provisions concerning the approval of tank-vehicles of categories N and O with
regard to rollover stability.
– 650 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 651 –
9.7.8 Electrical equipment
9.7.8.1 The electrical installation on FL vehicles shall meet the relevant requirements of 9.2.2.1, 9.2.2.2, 9.2.2.4,
9.2.2.5, 9.2.2.6, 9.2.2.8 and 9.2.2.9.1.
However additions to or modifications of the electrical installations of the vehicle shall meet the
requirements for the electrical apparatus of the relevant group and temperature class according to the
substances to be carried.
NOTE: For transitional provisions, see also 1.6.5.
9.7.8.2 Electrical equipment on FL vehicles, situated in areas where an explosive atmosphere is, or may be
expected to be, present in such quantities as to require special precautions, shall be suitable for use in a
hazardous area. Such equipment shall meet the general requirements of IEC 60079 parts 0 and 14 and
the additional requirements applicable from IEC 60079 parts 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 11, 18, 26 or 28. The
requirements for the electrical apparatus of the relevant group and temperature class according to the
substances to be carried shall be met.
For the application of IEC 60079 part 14, the following classification shall be used:
ZONE 0
Inside tank compartments, fittings for filling and discharge and vapour recovery lines.
ZONE 1
Inside cabinets for equipment used for filling and discharge and within 0.5 m of venting devices and
pressure relief safety valves.
9.7.8.3 Permanently energized electrical equipment, including the leads, which is situated outside Zones 0 and
1 shall meet the requirements for Zone 1 for electrical equipment in general or meet the requirements
for Zone 2 according to IEC 60079 part 14 for electrical equipment situated in the driver’s cab. The
requirements for the relevant group of electrical apparatus according to the substances to be carried shall
be met.
9.7.9 Additional safety requirements concerning FL and EX/III vehicles
9.7.9.1 The following vehicles shall be equipped with an automatic fire suppression system for the compartment
where the internal combustion engine propelling the vehicle is located:
(a) FL vehicles carrying liquefied and compressed flammable gases with a classification code
including an F;
(b) FL vehicles carrying packing group I or packing group II flammable liquids; and
(c) EX/III vehicles.
9.7.9.2 The following vehicles shall be fitted with thermal protection capable of mitigating the propagation of
a fire from all the wheels:
(a) FL vehicles carrying liquefied and compressed flammable gases with a classification code
including an F;
(b) FL vehicles carrying packing group I or packing group II flammable liquids; and
(c) EX/III vehicles.
NOTE: The aim is to avoid the propagation of the fire to the load, for example with thermal shields or
other equivalent systems, either:
(a) by direct spread from the wheel to the load; or
(b) by indirect spread from the wheel to the cabin and further to the load.
– 651 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 653 –
CHAPTER 9.8
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING COMPLETE AND COMPLETED
MEMUs
9.8.1 General provisions
In addition to the vehicle proper, or the units of running gear used in its stead, a MEMU comprises one
or more tanks and bulk containers, their items of equipment and the fittings for attaching them to the
vehicle or to the running-gear units.
9.8.2 Requirements concerning tanks and bulk containers
Tanks, bulk containers and special compartments for packages of explosives of MEMUs shall meet the
requirements of Chapter 6.12.
9.8.3 Electrical bonding of MEMUs
Tanks, bulk containers and special compartments for packages of explosives made of metal or of
fibre-reinforced plastics material shall be linked to the chassis by means of at least one good electrical
connection. Any metal contact capable of causing electro-chemical corrosion or reacting with the
dangerous goods carried in the tanks and bulk containers shall be avoided.
9.8.4 Stability of MEMUs
The overall width of the ground-level bearing surface (distance between the outer points of contact with
the ground of the right-hand tyre and the left-hand tyre of the same axle) shall be at least equal to 90 %
of the height of the centre of gravity of the laden vehicle. In an articulated vehicle the mass on the axles
of the load-carrying unit of the laden semi-trailer shall not exceed 60 % of the nominal total laden mass
of the complete articulated vehicle.
9.8.5 Rear protection of MEMUs
A bumper sufficiently resistant to rear impact shall be fitted over the full width of the tank at the rear of
the vehicle. There shall be a clearance of at least 100 mm between the rear wall of the tank and the rear
of the bumper (this clearance being measured from the rearmost point of the tank wall or from protecting
fittings or accessories in contact with the substance being carried). Vehicles with a tilting shell with rear
discharge do not require a bumper if the rear fittings of the shell are provided with a means of protection
which protects the shell in the same way as a bumper.
NOTE: This provision does not apply to MEMUs where the tanks are protected adequately against
rear impact by other means, e.g. machinery or piping not containing dangerous goods.
9.8.6 Combustion heaters
9.8.6.1 Combustion heaters shall meet the requirements of 9.2.4.8.1, 9.2.4.8.2, 9.2.4.8.5, 9.2.4.8.6 and the
following:
(a) the switch may be installed outside the driver’s cab;
(b) the device shall be switched off from outside the MEMU compartment; and
(c) it is not necessary to prove that the heat exchanger is resistant to the reduced afterrunning cycle.
9.8.6.2 No fuel tanks, power sources, combustion air or heating air intakes as well as exhaust tube outlets
required for the operation of the combustion heater shall be installed in the load compartments
containing tanks. It shall be ensured that the heating air outlet cannot be blocked. The temperature to
which any equipment is heated shall not exceed 50 °C. Heating devices installed inside the
– 653 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
– 654 –
compartments shall be designed so as to prevent the ignition of any explosive atmosphere under
operating conditions.
9.8.7 Additional safety requirements
9.8.7.1 MEMUs shall be equipped with automatic fire extinguisher systems for the engine compartment.
9.8.7.2 Protection of the load by metal thermal shields against tyre fire shall be provided.
9.8.8 Additional security requirements
Process equipment and special compartments in MEMUs shall be fitted with locks.
– 654 -Copyright © United Nations, 2022. All rights reserved
01903 719 646
ask@medisort.co.uk
Recent Comments